Data Sheet

MC9S12VR-Family
Reference Manual
S12
Microcontrollers
MC9S12VRRMV2
Rev. 2.8
October 2, 2012
freescale.com
To provide the most up-to-date information, the revision of our documents on the World Wide Web will be
the most current. Your printed copy may be an earlier revision. To verify you have the latest information
available, refer to: http://freescale.com/
A full list of family members and options is included in the appendices.
The following revision history table summarizes changes contained in this document.
This document contains information for all constituent modules, with the exception of the CPU. For CPU
information please refer to CPU12-1 in the CPU12 & CPU12X Reference Manual.
Table 0-1. Revision History
Date
Revision
Level
27-June-2011
Rev 2.3
• Corrected ADC conditional text settings, ADC resolution is 10 bit
29-July-2011
Rev 2.4
• Corrected ETRIG0/ETRIG1 in pinouts
Description
•
•
•
•
Corrected register name in register summary page 585 address 0x024F
Corrected PartID
Added Maskset 2N05E
Updated electricals: Num 5 & 6 Table I-2, Num 2 Table D-2, Num 2 Table J-1,
Table A-12, A-13 & A-14, Num 13 & 14 Table A-8, Table A-4
06-February-2012
Rev 2.5
09-February-2012
Rev 2.6
• Added HVI[3:0] to Table A-4 Num 11
Rev 2.7
•
•
•
•
•
15-May-2012
02-October-2012
Rev 2.8
Correced NVM timing parameter
Updated stop current values
Added 1.16 ADC Result Reference
Added Bandgap Spec Table B-1 Num 15 & 16
Added Order Info Appendix
•
•
•
•
•
•
Minor Corrections
Corrected Table B-1 Num 8 ACLK frequency is typ 20KHz
Added Max value to Table A-13 Num 5
Table M-1New NVM timing parameters
Added Section C.3.2, “ATD Analog Input Parasitics
See Section Chapter 2, “Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2) Revision
History
• See Section Chapter 4, “S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit
(S12CPMU_UHV) Revision History
• Added Table B-2
• Changed Num 2 in Table H-2 inductive load max 450mH
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
2
Chapter 1
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 2
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Chapter 3
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Chapter 4
Clock, Reset and Power Management (S12CPMU_UHV) . . . 119
Chapter 5
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Chapter 6
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 7
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 8
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Chapter 9
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Chapter 10
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Chapter 11
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Chapter 12
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Chapter 13
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Chapter 14
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Chapter 15
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Chapter 16
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Chapter 17
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1). . . . . . . . . . . 457
Appendix A MCU Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Appendix B VREG Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Appendix C ATD Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Appendix D HSDRV Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Appendix E PLL Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Appendix F IRC Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Appendix G LINPHY Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Appendix H LSDRV Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Appendix I
BATS Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Appendix J
PIM Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Appendix K SPI Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
3
Appendix L XOSCLCP Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Appendix M FTMRG Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Appendix N Package Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Appendix O Detailed Register Address Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
4
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 1
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.1
1.2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.1 MC9S12VR-Family Member Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3 Chip-Level Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.4 Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.1 HCS12 16-Bit Central Processor Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.2 On-Chip Flash with ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.3 On-Chip SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4.4 Main External Oscillator (XOSCLCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.5 Internal RC Oscillator (IRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.6 Internal Phase-Locked Loop (IPLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.7 Clock and Power Management Unit (CPMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.8 System Integrity Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4.9 Timer (TIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.4.10 Pulse Width Modulation Module (PWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.4.11 LIN physical layer transceiver (LINPHY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.4.12 Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.4.13 Serial Communication Interface Module (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.4.14 Analog-to-Digital Converter Module (ATD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.15 Supply Voltage Sense (BATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.16 On-Chip Voltage Regulator system (VREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.17 Low-side drivers (LSDRV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4.18 High-side drivers (HSDRV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4.19 Background Debug (BDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4.20 Debugger (DBG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.6 Family Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.6.1 Part ID Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7 Signal Description and Device Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7.1 Pin Assignment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.7.2 Detailed Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.7.3 Power Supply Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.8 Device Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8.1 Pinout 48-pin LQFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.8.2 Pinout 32-pin LQFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.9 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.9.1 Chip Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.9.2 Low Power Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.10 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.11 Resets and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.11.1 Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.11.2 Interrupt Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.11.3 Effects of Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
5
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
API external clock output (API_EXTCLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
COP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ADC External Trigger Input Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ADC Special Conversion Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Chapter 2
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.1
2.2
2.3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.3.1 Register Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.3.3 Port E Data Register (PORTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.3.4 Port E Data Direction Register (DDRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.3.5 Port E, BKGD pin Pull Control Register (PUCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.3.6 ECLK Control Register (ECLKCTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.3.7 PIM Miscellaneous Register (PIMMISC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.3.8 IRQ Control Register (IRQCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.3.9 Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.3.10 Port T Data Register (PTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.3.11 Port T Input Register (PTIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.3.12 Port T Data Direction Register (DDRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3.13 Port T Pull Device Enable Register (PERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.3.14 Port T Polarity Select Register (PPST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.3.15 Module Routing Register 0 (MODRR0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.3.16 Module Routing Register 1 (MODRR1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.3.17 Port S Data Register (PTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.3.18 Port S Input Register (PTIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.3.19 Port S Data Direction Register (DDRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.3.20 Port S Pull Device Enable Register (PERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.3.21 Port S Polarity Select Register (PPSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.3.22 Port S Wired-Or Mode Register (WOMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.3.23 Module Routing Register 2 (MODRR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.3.24 Port P Data Register (PTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.3.25 Port P Input Register (PTIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.3.26 Port P Data Direction Register (DDRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.3.27 Port P Reduced Drive Register (RDRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.3.28 Port P Pull Device Enable Register (PERP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.3.29 Port P Polarity Select Register (PPSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.3.30 Port P Interrupt Enable Register (PIEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.3.31 Port P Interrupt Flag Register (PIFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.3.32 Port L Input Register (PTIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.3.33 Port L Digital Input Enable Register (DIENL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
6
Freescale Semiconductor
2.4
2.5
2.3.34 Port L Analog Access Register (PTAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.3.35 Port L Input Divider Ratio Selection Register (PIRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.3.36 Port L Polarity Select Register (PPSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.3.37 Port L Interrupt Enable Register (PIEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2.3.38 Port L Interrupt Flag Register (PIFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2.3.39 Port AD Data Register (PT1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2.3.40 Port AD Input Register (PTI1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.3.41 Port AD Data Direction Register (DDR1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.3.42 Port AD Pull Enable Register (PER1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.3.43 Port AD Polarity Select Register (PPS1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.3.44 Port AD Interrupt Enable Register (PIE1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2.3.45 Port AD Interrupt Flag Register (PIF1AD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.4.2 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.4.3 Pins and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.4.4 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Initialization and Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.5.1 Port Data and Data Direction Register writes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.5.2 ADC External Triggers ETRIG1-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.5.3 Over-Current Protection on EVDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2.5.4 Open Input Detection on HVI Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Chapter 3
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.1.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.1.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.1.4 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.1.5 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Memory Map and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.4.1 MCU Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.4.2 Memory Map Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.4.3 Unimplemented and Reserved Address Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.4.4 Prioritization of Memory Accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.4.5 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
7
Chapter 4
Clock, Reset and Power Management (S12CPMU_UHVV1)
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4.1.3 S12CPMU_UHV Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2.1 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2.2 EXTAL and XTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2.3 VSUP — Regulator Power Input Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2.4 VDDA, VSSA — Regulator Reference Supply Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2.5 VDDX, VSSX— Pad Supply Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2.6 VSS, VSSC — Ground Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.2.7 API_EXTCLK — API external clock output pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.2.8 VDD— Internal Regulator Output Supply (Core Logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.2.9 VDDF— Internal Regulator Output Supply (NVM Logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.2.10 TEMPSENSE — Internal Temperature Sensor Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Memory Map and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.4.1 Phase Locked Loop with Internal Filter (PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.4.2 Startup from Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.4.3 Stop Mode using PLLCLK as Bus Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.4.4 Full Stop Mode using Oscillator Clock as Bus Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.4.5 External Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.4.6 System Clock Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.5.2 Description of Reset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.5.3 Power-On Reset (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.5.4 Low-Voltage Reset (LVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.6.1 Description of Interrupt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Initialization/Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.7.1 General Initialization information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.7.2 Application information for COP and API usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Chapter 5
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
5.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
8
Freescale Semiconductor
5.2
5.3
5.4
External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.3.3 Family ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.4.1 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.4.2 Enabling and Activating BDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.4.3 BDM Hardware Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.4.4 Standard BDM Firmware Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
5.4.5 BDM Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5.4.6 BDM Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.4.7 Serial Interface Hardware Handshake Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
5.4.8 Hardware Handshake Abort Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5.4.9 SYNC — Request Timed Reference Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5.4.10 Instruction Tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
5.4.11 Serial Communication Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Chapter 6
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6.1.1 Glossary Of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6.1.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
6.1.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
6.1.4 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
6.1.5 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Memory Map and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
6.4.1 S12SDBG Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
6.4.2 Comparator Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
6.4.3 Match Modes (Forced or Tagged) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6.4.4 State Sequence Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6.4.5 Trace Buffer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6.4.6 Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
6.4.7 Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.5.1 State Machine scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.5.2 Scenario 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.5.3 Scenario 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.5.4 Scenario 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6.5.5 Scenario 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6.5.6 Scenario 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
9
6.5.7
6.5.8
6.5.9
6.5.10
6.5.11
Scenario 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Scenario 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Scenario 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Scenario 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Scenario 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Chapter 7
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.1.3 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
7.1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
7.3.1 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
7.4.1 S12S Exception Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
7.4.2 Interrupt Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
7.4.3 Reset Exception Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
7.4.4 Exception Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Initialization/Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7.5.1 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7.5.2 Interrupt Nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7.5.3 Wake Up from Stop or Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Chapter 8
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Block Description
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
8.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
8.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
8.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
8.2.1 Detailed Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
8.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
8.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.4.1 Analog Sub-Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.4.2 Digital Sub-Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
10
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 9
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
9.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
9.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
9.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
9.2.1 PWM7 - PWM0 — PWM Channel 7 - 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
9.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
9.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
9.4.1 PWM Clock Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
9.4.2 PWM Channel Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Chapter 10
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
10.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
10.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
10.1.3 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
10.1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
10.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
10.2.1 TXD — Transmit Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
10.2.2 RXD — Receive Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
10.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
10.3.1 Module Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
10.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
10.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10.4.1 Infrared Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10.4.2 LIN Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10.4.3 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
10.4.4 Baud Rate Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
10.4.5 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
10.4.6 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
10.4.7 Single-Wire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
10.4.8 Loop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10.5 Initialization/Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10.5.1 Reset Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10.5.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10.5.3 Interrupt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
10.5.4 Recovery from Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
11
10.5.5 Recovery from Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Chapter 11
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
11.1.1 Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
11.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
11.1.3 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
11.1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
11.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
11.2.1 MOSI — Master Out/Slave In Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
11.2.2 MISO — Master In/Slave Out Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
11.2.3 SS — Slave Select Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
11.2.4 SCK — Serial Clock Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
11.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
11.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
11.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
11.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
11.4.1 Master Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
11.4.2 Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.4.3 Transmission Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
11.4.4 SPI Baud Rate Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
11.4.5 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
11.4.6 Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
11.4.7 Low Power Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Chapter 12
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
12.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
12.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
12.1.3 Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
12.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
12.2.1 IOC7 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
12.2.2 IOC6 - IOC0 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 6-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
12.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
12.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
12.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
12.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
12.4.1 Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
12.4.2 Input Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
12.4.3 Output Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
12.4.4 Pulse Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
12.4.5 Event Counter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
12
Freescale Semiconductor
12.4.6 Gated Time Accumulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
12.5 Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
12.6 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
12.6.1 Channel [7:0] Interrupt (C[7:0]F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
12.6.2 Pulse Accumulator Input Interrupt (PAOVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
12.6.3 Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt (PAOVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
12.6.4 Timer Overflow Interrupt (TOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Chapter 13
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
13.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
13.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
13.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
13.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
13.2.1 HS0, HS1— High Side Driver Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
13.2.2 VSUPHS — High Side Driver Power Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
13.2.3 VSSXHS — High Side Driver Ground Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
13.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
13.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
13.3.2 Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
13.3.3 Port HS Data Register (HSDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
13.3.4 HSDRV Configuration Register (HSCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
13.3.5 Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
13.3.6 HSDRV Status Register (HSSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
13.3.7 HSDRV Interrupt Enable Register (HSIE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
13.3.8 HSDRV Interrupt Flag Register (HSIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
13.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
13.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
13.4.2 Open Load Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
13.4.3 Over-Current Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
13.4.4 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
13.5 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
13.5.1 Use Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Chapter 14
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
14.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
14.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
14.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
14.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
14.2.1 LS0, LS1— Low Side Driver Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
14.2.2 LSGND — Low Side Driver Ground Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
13
14.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
14.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
14.3.2 Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
14.3.3 Port LS Data Register (LSDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
14.3.4 LSDRV Configuration Register (LSCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
14.3.5 Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
14.3.6 Reserved Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
14.3.7 LSDRV Status Register (LSSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
14.3.8 LSDRV Interrupt Enable Register (LSIE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
14.3.9 LSDRV Interrupt Flag Register (LSIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
14.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
14.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
14.4.2 Open-Load Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
14.4.3 Over-Current Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
14.4.4 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
14.5 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
14.5.1 Use Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Chapter 15
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
15.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
15.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
15.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
15.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
15.2.1 LIN — LIN Bus Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
15.2.2 LGND — LIN Ground Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
15.2.3 VSUP — Positive Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
15.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
15.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
15.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
15.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
15.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
15.4.2 Slew Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
15.4.3 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
15.4.4 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
15.5 Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
15.5.1 Over-current handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
15.5.2 Use Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Chapter 16
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
16.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
14
Freescale Semiconductor
16.1.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
16.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
16.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
16.2.1 VSENSE — Supply (Battery) Voltage Sense Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
16.2.2 VSUP — Voltage Supply Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
16.3 Memory Map and Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
16.3.1 Register Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
16.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
16.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
16.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
16.4.2 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Chapter 17
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
17.1.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
17.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
17.1.3 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
17.2 External Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
17.3 Memory Map and Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
17.3.1 Module Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
17.3.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
17.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
17.4.1 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
17.4.2 IFR Version ID Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
17.4.3 Internal NVM resource (NVMRES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
17.4.4 Flash Command Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
17.4.5 Allowed Simultaneous P-Flash and EEPROM Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
17.4.6 Flash Command Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
17.4.7 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
17.4.8 Wait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
17.4.9 Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
17.5 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
17.5.1 Unsecuring the MCU using Backdoor Key Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
17.5.2 Unsecuring the MCU in Special Single Chip Mode using BDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
17.5.3 Mode and Security Effects on Flash Command Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
17.6 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Appendix A
MCU Electrical Specifications
A.1 General
A.1.1
A.1.2
A.1.3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Parameter Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Current Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
15
A.1.4
A.1.5
A.1.6
A.1.7
A.1.8
A.1.9
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
ESD Protection and Latch-up Immunity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Power Dissipation and Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
I/O Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Supply Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Appendix B
VREG Electrical Specifications
Appendix C
ATD Electrical Specifications
C.1 ATD Operating Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
C.2 Factors Influencing Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
C.2.1 Port AD Output Drivers Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
C.2.2 Source Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
C.2.3 Source Capacitance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
C.2.4 Current Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
C.3 ATD Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
C.3.1 ATD Accuracy Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Appendix D
HSDRV Electrical Specifications
D.1 Operating Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
D.2 Static Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
D.3 Dynamic Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Appendix E
PLL Electrical Specifications
E.1
Reset, Oscillator and PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
E.1.1 Phase Locked Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Appendix F
IRC Electrical Specifications
Appendix G
LINPHY Electrical Specifications
G.1 Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
G.2 Static Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
G.3 Dynamic Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
16
Freescale Semiconductor
Appendix H
LSDRV Electrical Specifications
H.1 Static Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
H.2 Dynamic Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Appendix I
BATS Electrical Specifications
I.1
I.2
I.3
Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Static Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Dynamic Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Appendix J
PIM Electrical Specifications
J.1
J.2
High-Voltage Inputs (HVI) Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Pin Interrupt Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Appendix K
SPI Electrical Specifications
K.1 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
K.1.1 Master Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
K.1.2 Slave Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Appendix L
XOSCLCP Electrical Specifications
Appendix M
FTMRG Electrical Specifications
M.1 Timing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
M.1.1 Erase Verify All Blocks (Blank Check) (FCMD=0x01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
M.1.2 Erase Verify Block (Blank Check) (FCMD=0x02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
M.1.3 Erase Verify P-Flash Section (FCMD=0x03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
M.1.4 Read Once (FCMD=0x04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
M.1.5 Program P-Flash (FCMD=0x06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
M.1.6 Program Once (FCMD=0x07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
M.1.7 Erase All Blocks (FCMD=0x08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
M.1.8 Erase P-Flash Block (FCMD=0x09). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
M.1.9 Erase P-Flash Sector (FCMD=0x0A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
M.1.10 Unsecure Flash (FCMD=0x0B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
M.1.11 Verify Backdoor Access Key (FCMD=0x0C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
M.1.12 Set User Margin Level (FCMD=0x0D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
M.1.13 Set Field Margin Level (FCMD=0x0E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
M.1.14 Erase Verify D-Flash Section (FCMD=0x10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
M.1.15 Program D-Flash (FCMD=0x11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
17
M.1.16 Erase D-Flash Sector (FCMD=0x12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
M.1.17 NVM Reliability Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Appendix N
Package Information
Appendix O
Detailed Register Address Map
O.1 Detailed Register Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
18
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 1
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Table 1-1. Revision History
Version
Number
Revision
Date
1.0
26-November-2010
2.0
11-April-2011
1.1
Description of Changes
• Added Block Diagram
• Minor Corrections from Shared Review
• New Revision for Maskset N05E PartID=$3201
• Added 6 PWM Channels
• Pinout changes for PWM channels
Introduction
The MC9S12VR-Family is an optimized automotive 16-bit microcontroller product line focused on
low-cost, high-performance, and low pin-count. This family integrates an S12 microcontroller with a LIN
Physical interface, a 5V regulator system to supply the microcontroller, and analog blocks to control other
elements of the system which operate at vehicle battery level (e.g. relay drivers, high-side driver outputs,
wake up inputs). The MC9S12VR-Family is targeted at generic automotive applications requiring single
node LIN communications. Typical examples of these applications include window lift modules, seat
modules and sun-roof modules to name a few.
The MC9S12VR-Family uses many of the same features found on the MC9S12G family, including error
correction code (ECC) on flash memory, EEPROM for diagnostic or data storage, a fast analog-to-digital
converter (ADC) and a frequency modulated phase locked loop (IPLL) that improves the EMC
performance. The MC9S12VR-Family delivers an optimized solution with the integration of several key
system components into a single device, optimizing system architecture and achieving significant space
savings. The MC9S12VR-Family delivers all the advantages and efficiencies of a 16-bit MCU while
retaining the low cost, power consumption, EMC, and code-size efficiency advantages currently enjoyed
by users of Freescale’s existing 8-bit and 16-bit MCU families. Like the MC9S12XS family, the
MC9S12VR-Family will run 16-bit wide accesses without wait states for all peripherals and memories.
Misaligned single cycle 16 bit RAM access is not supported. The MC9S12VR-Family will be available in
32-pin and 48-pin LQFP. In addition to the I/O ports available in each module, further I/O ports are
available with interrupt capability allowing wake-up from stop or wait modes.
The MC9S12VR-Family is a general-purpose family of devices created with relay based motor control in
mind and is suitable for a range of applications, including:
• Window lift modules
• Door modules
• Seat controllers
• Smart actuators
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
19
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
•
1.2
Sun roof modules
Features
This section describes the key features of the MC9S12VR-Family.
1.2.1
MC9S12VR-Family Member Comparison
Table 1-2 provides a summary of different members of the MC9S12VR-Family and their features. This
information is intended to provide an understanding of the range of functionality offered by this
microcontroller family.
Table 1-2. MC9S12VR - Family
Feature
MC9S12VR48
CPU
MC9S12VR64
HCS12
Flash memory (ECC)
48 Kbytes
64 Kbytes
EEPROM (ECC)
512 Bytes
RAM
2 Kbytes
LIN physical layer
1
SPI
1
SCI
Up to 2
Timer
4ch x 16-bit
PWM
8ch x 8-bit or
4ch x 16-bit
ADC
6 ch x 10-bit available on external
pins and four internal channels.
see Table 1-13.
Frequency modulated PLL
Yes
Internal 1 MHz RC oscillator
Yes
Autonomous window watchdog
1
Low-side drivers
(protected for inductive loads)
2
High-side drivers
High voltage Inputs
General purpose I/Os (5V)
Up to 2
4
Up to 28
Direct battery sense pin
Yes
Supply voltage sense
Yes
Chip temperature sensor
1 general sensor
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
20
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Feature
Supply voltage
EVDD output current
1.3
MC9S12VR48
MC9S12VR64
VSUP = 6V – 18 V (normal
operation)
up to 40V (protected operation)
20mA @ 5V
Maximum execution speed
25 MHz
Package
32 pins
48 pins
Chip-Level Features
On-chip modules available within the family include the following features:
• HCS12 CPU core
• 64 or 48 Kbyte on-chip flash with ECC
• 512 byte EEPROM with ECC
• 2 Kbyte on-chip SRAM
• Phase locked loop (IPLL) frequency multiplier with internal filter
• 1 MHz internal RC oscillator with +/-1.3% accuracy over rated temperature range
• 4-16MHz amplitude controlled pierce oscillator
• Internal COP (watchdog) module (with separate clock source)
• Timer module (TIM) supporting input/output channels that provide a range of 16-bit input capture,
output compare and counter (up to 4 channels)
• Pulse width modulation (PWM) module (up to 8 x 8-bit channels)
• 10-bit resolution successive approximation analog-to-digital converter (ADC) with up to 6
channels available on external pins
• One serial peripheral interface (SPI) module
• One serial communication interface (SCI) module supporting LIN communications (with RX
connected to a timer channel for internal oscillator calibration purposes, if desired)
• Up to one additional SCI (not connected to LIN physical layer)
• One on-chip LIN physical layer transceiver fully compliant with the LIN 2.1 standard
• On-chip voltage regulator (VREG) for regulation of input supply and all internal voltages
• Autonomous periodic interrupt (API) (combination with cyclic, watchdog)
• Two protected low-side outputs to drive inductive loads
• Up to two protected high-side outputs
• 4 high-voltage inputs with wake-up capability and readable internally on ADC
• Up to two 10mA high-current outputs
• 20mA high-current output for use as Hall sensor supply
• Battery voltage sense with low battery warning, internally reverse battery protected
• Chip temperature sensor
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
21
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.4
Module Features
The following sections provide more details of the modules implemented on the MC9S12VR-Family.
1.4.1
HCS12 16-Bit Central Processor Unit (CPU)
The HCS12 CPU is a high-speed, 16-bit processing unit that has a programming model identical to that of
the industry standard M68HC11 central processor unit (CPU).
• Full 16-bit data paths supports efficient arithmetic operation and high-speed math execution
• Supports instructions with odd byte counts, including many single-byte instructions. This allows
much more efficient use of ROM space.
• Extensive set of indexed addressing capabilities, including:
— Using the stack pointer as an indexing register in all indexed operations
— Using the program counter as an indexing register in all but auto increment/decrement mode
— Accumulator offsets using A, B, or D accumulators
— Automatic index predecrement, preincrement, postdecrement, and postincrement (by –8 to +8)
1.4.2
On-Chip Flash with ECC
On-chip flash memory on the MC9S12VR features the following:
• 64 or 48 Kbyte of program flash memory
— Automated program and erase algorithm
— Protection scheme to prevent accidental program or erase
• 512 Byte EEPROM
— 16 data bits plus 6 syndrome ECC (error correction code) bits allow single bit error correction
and double fault detection
— Erase sector size 4 bytes
— Automated program and erase algorithm
— User margin level setting for reads
1.4.3
•
On-Chip SRAM
2 Kbytes of general-purpose RAM
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
22
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.4.4
•
1.4.5
•
1.4.6
•
1.4.7
•
•
•
1.4.8
•
•
•
•
Main External Oscillator (XOSCLCP)
Loop control Pierce oscillator using 4 MHz to 16 MHz crystal
— Current gain control on amplitude output
— Signal with low harmonic distortion
— Low power
— Good noise immunity
— Eliminates need for external current limiting resistor
— Transconductance sized for optimumstart-up margin for typical crystals
— Oscillator pins shared with GPIO functionality
Internal RC Oscillator (IRC)
Factory trimmed internal reference clock
— Frequency: 1 MHz
— Trimmed accuracy over –40˚C to +105˚C ambient temperature range: ±1.3%
Internal Phase-Locked Loop (IPLL)
Phase-locked-loop clock frequency multiplier
— No external components required
— Reference divider and multiplier allow large variety of clock rates
— Automatic bandwidth control mode for low-jitter operation
— Automatic frequency lock detector
— Configurable option to spread spectrum for reduced EMC radiation (frequency modulation)
— Reference clock sources:
– Internal 1 MHz RC oscillator (IRC)
Clock and Power Management Unit (CPMU)
Real time interrupt (RTI)
Clock monitor (CM)
System reset generation
System Integrity Support
Power-on reset (POR)
Illegal address detection with reset
Low-voltage detection with interrupt or reset
Computer operating properly (COP) watchdog with option to run on internal RC oscillator
— Configurable as window COP for enhanced failure detection
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
23
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
•
— Can be initialized out of reset using option bits located in flash memory
Clock monitor supervising the correct function of the oscillator
1.4.9
•
•
Timer (TIM)
Up to 4 x 16-bit channels for input capture or output compare
16-bit free-running counter with 8-bit precision prescaler
1.4.10
•
Up to eight 8-bit channels or reconfigurable four 16-bit channel PWM resolution
— Programmable period and duty cycle per channel
— Center-aligned or left-aligned outputs
— Programmable clock select logic with a wide range of frequencies
1.4.11
•
•
•
•
•
•
Serial Peripheral Interface Module (SPI)
Configurable 8- or 16-bit data size
Full-duplex or single-wire bidirectional
Double-buffered transmit and receive
Master or slave
MSB-first or LSB-first shifting
Serial clock phase and polarity options
1.4.13
•
•
•
•
•
LIN physical layer transceiver (LINPHY)
Compliant with LIN physical layer 2.1
Standby mode with glitch-filtered wake-up.
Slew rate selection optimized for the baud rates: 10kBit/s, 20kBit/s and Fast Mode (up to
250kBit/s).
Selectable pull-up of 30kΩ or 330kΩ (in Shutdown Mode, 330kΩ only)
Current limitation by LIN Bus pin rising and falling edges
Over-current protection with transmitter shutdown
1.4.12
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pulse Width Modulation Module (PWM)
Serial Communication Interface Module (SCI)
Full-duplex or single-wire operation
Standard mark/space non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format
Selectable IrDA 1.4 return-to-zero-inverted (RZI) format with programmable pulse widths
13-bit baud rate selection
Programmable character length
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
24
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
•
•
•
•
Programmable polarity for transmitter and receiver
Active edge receive wake-up
Break detect and transmit collision detect supporting LIN
Internal connection to one SCI routable to external pins
1.4.14
Analog-to-Digital Converter Module (ATD)
•
Up to 6-channel, 10-bit analog-to-digital converter
— 8-/10-bit resolution
— 3 us, 10-bit single conversion time
— Left or right justified result data
— Internal oscillator for conversion in stop modes
— Wake up from low power modes on analog comparison > or <= match
— Continuous conversion mode
— Multiple channel scans
• Pins can also be used as digital I/O
• Up to 6 pins can be used as keyboard wake-up interrupt (KWI)
• Internal voltages monitored with the ATD module
— VSUP, VSENSE, chip temperature sensor, high voltage inputs, LIN physical temperature sense,
VRH, VRL, VDDF
1.4.15
•
•
VSENSE & VSUP pin low or a high voltage interrupt
VSENSE & VSUP pin can be routed via an internal divider to the internal ADC
1.4.16
•
•
Supply Voltage Sense (BATS)
On-Chip Voltage Regulator system (VREG)
Voltage regulator
— Linear voltage regulator directly supplied by VSUP (protected VBAT)
— Low-voltage detect with low-voltage interrupt on VSUP
— Capable of supplying both the MCU internally and providing additional external current
(approximately 20mA) to supply other components within the electronic control unit.
— Over-temperature protection and interrupt
Internal Voltage regulator
— Linear voltage regulator with bandgap reference
— Low-voltage detect with low-voltage interrupt on VDDA
— Power-on reset (POR) circuit
— Low-voltage reset (LVR)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
25
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.4.17
•
•
•
•
•
•
2x low-side drivers targeted for up to approximately 150mA current capability.
Internal timer or PWM channels can be routed to control the low-side drivers
Open-load detection
Over-current protection with shutdown and interrupt
Active clamp (for driving relays)
Recirculation detection
1.4.18
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Background Debug (BDM)
Background debug module (BDM) with single-wire interface
— Non-intrusive memory access commands
— Supports in-circuit programming of on-chip nonvolatile memory
1.4.20
•
•
High-side drivers (HSDRV)
2 High-side drivers targeted for up to approximately 44mA current capability
Internal timer or PWM channels can be routed to control the high-side drivers
Open load detection
Over-current protection with shutdown and interrupt
1.4.19
•
Low-side drivers (LSDRV)
Debugger (DBG)
Trace buffer with depth of 64 entries
Three comparators (A, B and C)
— Access address comparisons with optional data comparisons
— Program counter comparisons
— Exact address or address range comparisons
Two types of comparator matches
— Tagged This matches just before a specific instruction begins execution
— Force This is valid on the first instruction boundary after a match occurs
Four trace modes
Four stage state sequencer
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
26
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.5
Block Diagram
Figure 1-1. MC9S12VR Block Diagram
VSUP
VSS
Voltage Regulator
Input: 6V – 18V
AN[5:0]
IOC0
IOC1
IOC2
IOC3
TIM
16-bit 4 channel
Timer
CPU12-V1
PWM
PE0
PE1
PTE
BKGD
RESET
TEST
Single-wire Background
Debug Module
EXTAL
Low Power Pierce
XTAL Oscillator
Debug Module
3 comparators
64 Byte Trace Buffer
Clock Monitor
COP Watchdog
Real Time Interrupt
Auton. Periodic Int.
PLL with Frequency
Modulation option
Internal RC Oscillator
Reset Generation
and Test Entry
Interrupt Module
8-bit 8 channel
Pulse Width Modulator
PWM[7:6]
see Pinout
SCI1
Asynchronous Serial IF
SCI0
Asynchronous Serial IF
SPI0
PTL
Synchronous Serial IF
PL0
PL1
PL2
PL3
LIN
LIN
5V IO Supply Output
VDDX1/VSSX1
VDDX2/VSSX2
HSDRV 0 & 1
High Side Driver
LGND
LGND
LIN Physical
Low Side Driver
BATS
Battery Sensor
RXD
TXD
RXD
TXD
MISO
MOSI
SCK
SS
HS0
HS1
VSUPHS
LS0
LS1
LSGND
LSDRV 0 & 1
LINPHY
PWM0
PWM1
PWM2
PWM3
PWM4
PWM5
VSENSE
PTAD
10-bit 6 channel
Analog-Digital
Converter
PAD[5:0]
PTT
512 bytes EEPROM with ECC
VDDA
VSSA
PT0
PT1
PT2
PT3
PTP
2K bytes RAM
ADC
PP0
PP1
PP2 / EVDD
PP3
PP4
PP5
PS0
PS1
PTS
48K & 64K bytes Flash with ECC
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
HS0
HS1
VSUPHS
LS0
LS1
LSGND
VSENSE
Block Diagram shows the maximum configuration!
Not all pins or all peripherals are available on all devices and packages.
Rerouting options are not shown.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
27
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.6
Family Memory Map
Table 1-3 shows the MC9S12VR-Family register memory map.
Table 1-3. Device Register Memory Map
Address
Module
Size
(Bytes)
0x0000–0x0009
PIM (port integration module)
10
0x000A–0x000B
MMC (memory map control)
2
0x000C–0x000D
PIM (port integration module)
2
0x000E–0x000F
Reserved
2
0x0010–0x0017
MMC (memory map control)
8
0x0018–0x0019
Reserved
2
0x001A–0x001B
Device ID register
2
0x001C–0x001F
PIM (port integration module)
4
0x0020–0x002F
DBG (debug module)
16
0x0030–0x0033
Reserved
4
0x0034–0x003F
CPMU (clock and power management)
12
0x0040–0x006F
TIM (timer module <= 4channels)
48
0x0070–0x009F
ADC (analog to digital converter <= 6 channels)
48
0x00A0–0x00C7
PWM (pulse-width modulator <= 2channels)
40
0x00C8–0x00CF
SCI0 (serial communication interface)
8
0x00D0–0x00D7
SCI1 (serial communication interface)
8
0x00D8–0x00DF
SPI (serial peripheral interface)
8
0x00E0–0x00FF
Reserved
32
0x0100–0x0113
FTMRG control registers
20
0x0114–0x011F
Reserved
12
INT (interrupt module)
1
0x0121–0x013F
Reserved
31
0x0140-0x0147
HSDRV (high-side driver)
8
0x0148-0x014F
Reserved
8
0x0150-0x0157
LSDRV (low-side driver)
8
0x0158-0x015F
Reserved
8
0x0160-0x0167
LINPHY (LIN physical layer)
8
0x0168-0x016F
Reserved
8
0x0170-0x0177
BATS (Supply Voltage Sense)
8
0x0178–0x023F
Reserved
200
0x0240–0x027F
PIM (port integration module)
64
0x0120
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
28
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Address
Module
Size
(Bytes)
0x0280–0x02EF
Reserved
112
0x02F0–0x02FF
CPMU (clock and power management)
16
0x0300–0x03FF
Reserved
256
NOTE
Reserved register space shown in Table 1-3 is not allocated to any module.
This register space is reserved for future use. Writing to these locations has
no effect. Read access to these locations returns zero.
Figure 1-2 shows MC9S12VR-Family CPU and BDM local address translation to the global memory map
as a graphical representation. The whole 256K global memory space is visible through the P-Flash window
located in the 64k local memory map located at 0x8000 - 0xBFFF using the PPAGE register.
NOTE
Flash space on page 0xC in Figure 1-2 is not available on S12VR48. This is
only available on S12VR64.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
29
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
0x0000
0x0400
0x0600
0x3800
Local CPU and BDM
Memory Map
Global Memory Map
Register Space
Register Space
EEPROM
EEPROM
Flash Space
Page 0xC
Unimplemented
RAM
RAM
0x4000
NVMRES=1
Page 0xD
Internal
NVM
Resources
Paging Window
Unimplemented
Flash Space
0x0_0000
0x0_0400
0x0_4000
0x8000
0x0_8000
Page
0x2
0x3_0000
0xC000
Flash Space
Flash Space
Page 0xF
Page 0xC
0x3_4000
0xFFFF
Flash Space
Page 0xD
0x3_8000
Flash Space
Page 0xE
0x3_C000
Flash Space
Page 0xF
0x3_FFFF
Figure 1-2. MC9S12VR-Family Global Memory Map.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
30
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.6.1
Part ID Assignments
The part ID is located in two 8-bit registers PARTIDH and PARTIDL (addresses 0x001A and 0x001B).
The read-only value is a unique part ID for each revision of the chip. Table 1-4 shows the assigned part ID
number and mask set number.
Table 1-4. Assigned Part ID Numbers
Device
Mask Set Number
Part ID
MC9S12VR48
1N05E
$3281
MC9S12VR64
1N05E
$3281
MC9S12VR48
1
$3282
1
$3282
MC9S12VR64
1
1.7
2N05E
2N05E
The open load detection feature described in Section 13.4.2 Open
Load Detection is not available on mask set 2N05E
Signal Description and Device Pinouts
This section describes signals that connect off-chip. It includes a pinout diagram, a table of signal
properties, and detailed discussion of signals. It is built from the signal description sections of the
individual IP blocks on the device.
1.7.1
Pin Assignment Overview
Table 1-5 provides a summary of which ports are available for 32-pin and 48-pin package option.
Table 1-5. Port Availability by Package Option
Port
32 LQFP
48 LQFP
Port AD
PAD[1:0]
PAD[5:0]
Port E
PE[1:0]
PE[1:0]
Port P
PP1,PP2
PP[5:0]
Port S
PS[3:2]
PS[5:0]
Port T
PT[3:0]
PT[3:0]
Port L
PL[3:0]
PL[3:0]
sum of ports
16
28
I/O power pairs VDDX/VSSX
1/1
2/2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
31
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
NOTE
To avoid current drawn from floating inputs, all non-bonded pins should be
configured as output or configured as input with a pull up or pull down
device enabled
1.7.2
Detailed Signal Descriptions
This section describes the signal properties.
1.7.2.1
RESET — External Reset Signal
The RESET signal is an active low bidirectional control signal. It acts as an input to initialize the MCU to
a known start-up state, and an output when an internal MCU function causes a reset. The RESET pin has
an internal pull-up device.
1.7.2.2
TEST — Test Pin
This input only pin is reserved for factory test. This pin has an internal pull-down device.
NOTE
The TEST pin must be tied to ground in all applications.
1.7.2.3
BKGD / MODC — Background Debug and Mode Pin
The BKGD/MODC pin is used as a pseudo-open-drain pin for the background debug communication. It
is used as a MCU operating mode select pin during reset. The state of this pin is latched to the MODC bit
at the rising edge of RESET. The BKGD pin has an internal pull-up device.
1.7.2.4
PAD[5:0] / KWAD[5:0] — Port AD Input Pins of ADC
PAD[5:0] are general-purpose input or output signals. The signals can be configured on per signal basis as
interrupt inputs with wake-up capability (KWAD[5:0]).These signals can have a pull-up or pull-down
device selected and enabled on per signal basis. Out of reset the pull devices are disabled.
1.7.2.5
PE[1:0] — Port E I/O Signals
PE[1:0] are general-purpose input or output signals. The signals can have pull-down device, enabled by a
single control bit for this signal group. Out of reset the pull-down devices are enabled.
1.7.2.6
PP[5:0] / KWP[5:0] — Port P I/O Signals
PP[5:0] are general-purpose input or output signals. The signals can be configured on per signal basis as
interrupt inputs with wake-up capability (KWP[5:0]). PP[2] has a high current drive strength and an
over-current interrupt feature. They can have a pull-up or pull-down device selected and enabled on per
signal basis. Out of reset the pull devices are disabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
32
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.7.2.7
PS[5:0] — Port S I/O Signals
PS[5:0] are general-purpose input or output signals. They can have a pull-up or pull-down device selected
and enabled on per signal basis. Out of reset the pull-up devices are enabled.
1.7.2.8
PT[3:0] — Port T I/O Signals
PT[3:0] are general-purpose input or output signals. They can have a pull-up or pull-down device selected
and enabled on per signal basis. Out of reset the pull devices are disabled.
1.7.2.9
PL[3:0] / KWL[3:0] — Port L Input Signals
PL[3:0] are high voltage input ports. The signals can be configured on per signal basis as interrupt inputs
with wake-up capability (KWL[3:0]).
1.7.2.10
LIN — LIN Physical Layer
This pad is connected to the single-wire LIN data bus.
1.7.2.11
HS[1:0] — High-Side Drivers Output Signals
Outputs of the two high-side drivers intended to drive incandescent bulbs or LEDs.
1.7.2.12
LS[1:0] — Low-Side Drivers Output Signals
Outputs of the two low-side drivers intended to drive inductive loads (relays).
1.7.2.13
VSENSE — Voltage Sensor Input
This pin can be connected to the supply (Battery) line for voltage measurements. The voltage present at
this input is scaled down by an internal voltage divider, and can be routed to the internal ADC via an analog
multiplexer. The pin itself is protected against reverse battery connections. To protect the pin from external
fast transients an external resistor is needed.
1.7.2.14
AN[5:0] — ADC Input Signals
AN[5:0] are the analog inputs of the Analog-to-Digital Converter.
1.7.2.15
SPI Signals
1.7.2.15.1
SS Signal
This signal is associated with the slave select SS functionality of the serial peripheral interface SPI.
1.7.2.15.2
SCK Signal
This signal is associated with the serial clock SCK functionality of the serial peripheral interface SPI.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
33
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.7.2.15.3
MISO Signal
This signal is associated with the MISO functionality of the serial peripheral interface SPI. This signal acts
as master input during master mode or as slave output during slave mode.
1.7.2.15.4
MOSI Signal
This signal is associated with the MOSI functionality of the serial peripheral interface SPI. This signal acts
as master output during master mode or as slave input during slave mode
1.7.2.16
LINPHY Signals
1.7.2.16.1
LPTXD Signal
This signal is the LINPHY transmit input. See Figure 2-22
1.7.2.16.2
LPRXD Signal
This signal is the LINPHY receive output. See Figure 2-22
1.7.2.17
1.7.2.17.1
SCI Signals
RXD[1:0] Signals
Those signals are associated with the receive functionality of the serial communication interfaces SCI1-0.
1.7.2.17.2
TXD[1:0] Signals
Those signals are associated with the transmit functionality of the serial communication interfaces SCI1-0.
1.7.2.18
PWM[7:0] Signals
The signals PWM[7:0] are associated with the PWM module outputs.
1.7.2.19
1.7.2.19.1
Internal Clock outputs
ECLK
This signal is associated with the output of the divided bus clock (ECLK).
NOTE
This feature is only intended for debug purposes at room temperature.
It must not be used for clocking external devices in an application.
1.7.2.20
ETRIG[1:0]
These signals are inputs to the Analog-to-Digital Converter. Their purpose is to trigger ADC conversions.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
34
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.7.2.21
IOC[3:0] Signals
The signals IOC[3:0] are associated with the input capture or output compare functionality of the timer
(TIM) module.
1.7.3
Power Supply Pins
MC9S12VR-Family power and ground pins are described below. Because fast signal transitions place
high, short-duration current demands on the power supply, use bypass capacitors with high-frequency
characteristics and place them as close to the MCU as possible.
NOTE
All ground pins must be connected together in the application.
1.7.3.1
VDDX1, VDDX2, VSSX1,VSSX2 — Power Output Pins and Ground Pins
VDDX1 and VDDX2 are the 5V power supply output for the I/O drivers. This voltage is generated by the
on chip voltage regulator. Bypass requirements on VDDX1 and VDDX2 pins depend on how heavily the
MCU pins are loaded. All VDDX pins are connected together internally. All VSSX pins are connected
together internally.
NOTE
The high side driver ground pin VSSXHS mentioned in Chapter 13,
“High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1) is internally connected to
VSSX2 ground pin.
NOTE
Not all power and ground pins are available on all packages. Refer to pinout
section for further details.
1.7.3.2
VDDA, VSSA — Power Supply Pins for ADC
These are the power supply and ground input pins for the analog-to-digital converter and the voltage
regulator.
NOTE
The reference voltages VRH and VRL mentioned in Appendix C, “ATD
Electrical Specifications are internally connected to VDDA and VSSA.
1.7.3.3
VSS — Core Ground Pin
The voltage supply of nominally 1.8V is generated by the internal voltage regulator. The return current
path is through the VSS pin.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
35
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.7.3.4
LGND — LINPHY Ground Pin
LGND is the the ground pin for the LIN physical layer LINPHY.
1.7.3.5
LSGND — Ground Pin for Low-Side Drivers
LSGND is the shared ground pin for the low-side drivers.
1.7.3.6
VSUP — Voltage Supply Pin for Voltage Regulator
VSUP is the 12V/18V shared supply voltage pin for the on chip voltage regulator.
1.7.3.7
VSUPHS — Voltage Supply Pin for High-Side Drivers
VSUPHS is the 12V/18V shared supply voltage pin for the high-side drivers.
1.7.3.8
Power and Ground Connection Summary
Table 1-6. Power and Ground Connection Summary
Mnemonic
Nominal Voltage
VSS
0V
VDDX1
5.0 V
VSSX1
0V
VDDX2
5.0 V
VSSX2
0V
VDDA
5.0 V
VSSA
0V
Ground pin for VDDA analog supply
LGND
0V
Ground pin for LIN physical
LSGND
0V
Ground pin for low-side driver
VSUP
12V/18V
External power supply for voltage regulator
VSUPHS
12V/18V
External power supply for high-side driver
1.8
Description
Ground pin for 1.8V core supply voltage generated by on chip voltage regulator
5V power supply output for I/O drivers generated by on chip voltage regulator
Ground pin for I/O drivers
5V power supply output for I/O drivers generated by on chip voltage regulator
Ground pin for I/O drivers
External power supply for the analog-to-digital converter and for the reference circuit of the
internal voltage regulator
Device Pinouts
MC9S12VR-Familyis available in 48-pin package and 32-pin package. Signals in parentheses in
Figure 1-3. and Figure 1-4. denote alternative module routing options.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
36
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Pinout 48-pin LQFP
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
PS1 / (TXD0) / (LPDR1) / TXD1
PS0 / (RXD0) / RXD1
PT3 / IOC3 / (LPTXD) / (SS)
PT2 / IOC2 / (LPRXD) / (SCK)
PT1 / IOC1 / PWM7 / (TXD0) / (LPDR)
PT0 / IOC0 / PWM6 / (RXD0)
PAD0 / KWAD0 / AN0
PAD1 / KWAD1 / AN1
PAD2 / KWAD2 / AN2
PAD3 / KWAD3 / AN3
VDDA
VSSA
1.8.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
MC9S12VR
48-pin LQFP
Pin out is subject to
change!
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
PAD4 / KWAD4 / AN4
PAD5 / KWAD5 / AN5
PL3 / HVI3 / KWL3
PL2 / HVI2 / KWL2
PL1 / HVI1 / KWL1
PL0 / HVI0 / KWL0
VSENSE
HS1 / (OC3) / (PWM1) / (PWM4)
VSSX2
HS0 / (OC2) / (PWM3)
VSUPHS
VSUP
TEST
RESET
PWM3 / KWP3 / PP3
PWM4 / (ETRIG0) / KWP4 / PP4
PWM5 / (ETRIG1) / IRQ / KWP5 / PP5
VSS
EXTAL / PE0
XTAL / PE1
VDDX2
PWM0 / KWP0 / PP0
XIRQ / PWM1 / KWP1 / PP1
PWM2 / EVDD / KWP2 / PP2
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
LGND
LIN
(PWM5) / (PWM6) / (OC0) / LS0
LSGND
(PWM7) / (OC1) / LS1
VSSX1
VDDX1
MISO / (RXD1) / (PWM4) / (ETRIG0) / PS2
ECLK / MOSI / (TXD1) / (PWM5) / (ETRIG1) / PS3
SCK / PS4
SS / PS5
MODC / BKGD
Figure 1-3. MC9S12VR 48-pin LQFP pinout
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
37
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Pinout 32-pin LQFP
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
PT3 / IOC3 / (LPTXD) / (SS)
PT2 / IOC2 / (LPRXD) / (SCK)
PT1 / IOC1 / PWM7 / (TXD0) / (LPDR1)
PT0 / IOC0 / PWM6 / (RXD0)
PAD0 / KWAD0 / AN0
PAD1 / KWAD1 / AN1
VDDA
VSSA
1.8.2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MC9S12VR
32-pin LQFP
Pin out is
subject to
change!
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
PL3 / HVI3 / KWL3
PL2 / HVI2 / KWL2
PL1 / HVI1 / KWL1
PL0 / HVI0 / KWL0
VSENSE
VSSX2
HS0 / (OC2) / (PWM3)
VSUP
TEST
RESET
VSS
EXTAL / PE0
XTAL / PE1
VDDX2
XIRQ / PWM1 / KWP1 / PP1
PWM2 / EVDD / KWP2 / PP2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LGND
LIN
(PWM5) / (PWM6) / (OC0) / LS0
LSGND
(PWM3) / (PWM0) / (OC1) / LS1
MISO / (RXD1) / (PWM4) / (ETRIG0) / PS2
ECLK / MOSI / (TXD1) / (PWM5) / (ETRIG1) / PS3
MODC / BKGD
Figure 1-4. MC9S12VR 32-pin LQFP pinout
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
38
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Table 1-7. Pin Summary
Package
Internal Pull
Resistor
Function
48
LQ
FP
32
LQ
FP
Pin
1th
Func.
2nd
Func.
3rd
Func.
4th
Func.
5th
Func.
1
1
LGND
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
LIN
—
—
—
—
PWM5
PWM6
Power
Supply
CTRL
Reset
State
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3
3
LS0
OC01
4
4
LSGND
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
5
LS1
OC1
PWM7
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
—
VSSX1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7
—
VDDX1
—
—
—
—
—
VDDX
—
—
8
6
PS2
ETRIG0
PWM4
RXD1
MISO
—
VDDX
PERS/PPSS
Up
9
7
PS3
ETRIG1
PWM5
TXD1
MOSI
ECLK
VDDX
PERS/PPSS
Up
10
—
PS4
SCK
—
—
—
—
VDDX
PERS/PPSS
Up
11
—
PS5
SS
—
—
—
—
VDDX
PERS/PPSS
Up
12
8
BKGD
MODC
—
—
—
—
VDDX
PUCR/BKPUE
Up
13
9
TEST
—
—
—
—
—
N.A
RESET pin
Down
14
10
RESET
—
—
—
—
—
VDDX
TEST pin
Up
15
—
PP3
KWP3
PWM3
—
—
—
VDDX
PERP/PPSP
Disabled
16
—
PP4
KWP4
ETRIG0
PWM4
—
—
VDDX
PERP/PPSP
Disabled
17
—
PP5
KWP5
ETRIG1
PWM5
IRQ
—
VDDX
PERP/PPSP
Disabled
18
11
VSS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
19
12
PE0
EXTAL
—
—
—
—
VDDX
PUCR/PUPEE
Down
20
13
PE1
XTAL
—
—
—
—
VDDX
PUCR/PUPEE
Down
21
14
VDDX2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
22
—
PP0
KWP0
PWM0
—
—
—
VDDX
PERP/PPSP
Disabled
23
15
PP1
KWP1
PWM1
XIRQ
—
—
VDDX
PERP/PPSP
Disabled
24
16
PP2
KWP2
EVDD
PWM2
—
—
VDDX
PERP/PPSP
Disabled
25
17
VSUP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
26
—
VSUPHS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
27
18
HS0
OC2
PWM3
—
—
—
VSUPH
—
—
S
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
39
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Package
Internal Pull
Resistor
Function
48
LQ
FP
32
LQ
FP
Pin
1th
Func.
2nd
Func.
3rd
Func.
4th
Func.
5th
Func.
28
19
VSSX2
—
—
—
—
—
29
—
HS1
OC3
PWM1
PWM4
—
—
Power
Supply
CTRL
Reset
State
—
—
—
VSUPH
—
—
S
1
30
20
VSENSE
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
31
21
PL0
HVI0
KWL0
—
—
—
VDDX
—
—
32
22
PL1
HVI1
KWL1
—
—
—
VDDX
—
—
33
23
PL2
HVI2
KWL2
—
—
—
VDDX
—
—
34
24
PL3
HVI3
KWL3
—
—
—
VDDX
—
—
35
—
PAD5
KWAD5
AN5
—
—
—
VDDA
PER1AD/
PPS1AD
Disabled
36
—
PAD4
KWAD4
AN4
—
—
—
VDDA
PER1AD/
PPS1AD
Disabled
37
25
VSSA
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
38
26
VDDA
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
39
—
PAD3
KWAD3
AN3
—
—
—
VDDA
PER1AD/
PPS1AD
Disabled
40
—
PAD2
KWAD2
AN2
—
—
—
VDDA
PER1AD/
PPS1AD
Disabled
41
27
PAD1
KWAD1
AN1
—
—
—
VDDA
PER1AD/
PPS1AD
Disabled
42
28
PAD0
KWAD0
AN0
—
—
—
VDDA
PER1AD/
PPS1AD
Disabled
43
29
PT0
IOC0
PWM6
RXD0
—
—
VDDX
PERT/PPST
Disabled
44
30
PT1
IOC1
PWM7
TXD0
LPDR1
—
VDDX
PERT/PPST
Disabled
45
31
PT2
IOC2
LPRXD
SCK
—
—
VDDX
PERT/PPST
Disabled
46
32
PT3
IOC3
LPTXD
SS
—
—
VDDX
PERT/PPST
Disabled
47
—
PS0
RXD0
RXD1
—
—
—
VDDX
PERS/PPSS
Up
48
—
PS1
TXD0
LPDR1
TXD1
—
—
VDDX
PERS/PPSS
Up
Timer Output Compare Channel
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
40
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.9
Modes of Operation
The MCU can operate in different modes. These are described in 1.9.1 Chip Configuration Summary.
The MCU can operate in different power modes to facilitate power saving when full system performance
is not required. These are described in 1.9.2 Low Power Operation.
Some modules feature a software programmable option to freeze the module status whilst the background
debug module is active to facilitate debugging.
1.9.1
Chip Configuration Summary
The different modes and the security state of the MCU affect the debug features (enabled or disabled).
The operating mode out of reset is determined by the state of the MODC signal during reset (see
Table 1-8). The MODC bit in the MODE register shows the current operating mode and provides limited
mode switching during operation. The state of the MODC signal is latched into this bit on the rising edge
of RESET.
Table 1-8. Chip Modes
Chip Modes
1.9.1.1
MODC
Normal single chip
1
Special single chip
0
Normal Single-Chip Mode
This mode is intended for normal device operation. The opcode from the on-chip memory is being
executed after reset (requires the reset vector to be programmed correctly). The processor program is
executed from internal memory.
1.9.1.2
Special Single-Chip Mode
This mode is used for debugging single-chip operation, boot-strapping, or security related operations. The
background debug module BDM is active in this mode. The CPU executes a monitor program located in
an on-chip ROM. BDM firmware waits for additional serial commands through the BKGD pin.
1.9.2
Low Power Operation
The MC9S12VR-Family has two dynamic-power modes (run and wait) and two static low-power modes
stop and pseudo stop). For a detailed description refer to Section Chapter 4 S12 Clock, Reset and Power
Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV).
• Dynamic power mode: Run
— Run mode is the main full performance operating mode with the entire device clocked. The user
can configure the device operating speed through selection of the clock source and the phase
locked loop (PLL) frequency. To save power, unused peripherals must not be enabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
41
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
•
•
•
Dynamic power mode: Wait
— This mode is entered when the CPU executes the WAI instruction. In this mode the CPU will
not execute instructions. The internal CPU clock is switched off. All peripherals can be active
in system wait mode. For further power consumption the peripherals can individually turn off
their local clocks. Asserting RESET, XIRQ, IRQ, or any other interrupt that is not masked ends
system wait mode.
Static power mode Pseudo-stop:
— In this mode the system clocks are stopped but the oscillator is still running and the real time
interrupt (RTI) and watchdog (COP), Autonomous Periodic Interrupt (API) and ATD modules
may be enabled. Other peripherals are turned off. This mode consumes more current than
system STOP mode but, as the oscillator continues to run, the full speed wake up time from this
mode is significantly shorter.
Static power mode: Stop
— The oscillator is stopped in this mode. By default, all clocks are switched off and all counters
and dividers remain frozen. The autonomous periodic interrupt (API), ATD, key wake-up and
the LIN physical layer transceiver modules may be enabled to wake the device.
1.10
Security
The MCU security mechanism prevents unauthorized access to the Flash memory. Refer to Section 5.4.1
Security and Section 17.5 Security.
1.11
Resets and Interrupts
Consult the S12 CPU manual and the S12SINT section for information on exception processing.
1.11.1
Resets
Table 1-9. lists all Reset sources and the vector locations. Resets are explained in detail in the Chapter 4,
“S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)”.
Table 1-9. Reset Sources and Vector Locations
Vector Address
Reset Source
CCR
Mask
Local Enable
$FFFE
Power-On Reset (POR)
None
None
$FFFE
Low Voltage Reset (LVR)
None
None
$FFFE
External pin RESET
None
None
$FFFE
Illegal Address Reset
None
None
$FFFC
Clock monitor reset
None
OSCE Bit in CPMUOSC register
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
42
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
1.11.2
Vector Address
Reset Source
CCR
Mask
Local Enable
$FFFA
COP watchdog reset
None
CR[2:0] in CPMUCOP register
Interrupt Vectors
Table 1-10 lists all interrupt sources and vectors in the default order of priority. The interrupt module (see
Chapter 7, “Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)”) provides an interrupt vector base register (IVBR) to relocate
the vectors.
Table 1-10. Interrupt Vector Locations (Sheet 1 of 2)
Vector Address1
Interrupt Source
CCR
Mask
Local Enable
Vector base + $F8
Unimplemented instruction trap
None
None
-
-
Vector base+ $F6
SWI
None
None
-
-
Vector base+ $F4
XIRQ
X Bit
None
Yes
Yes
Vector base+ $F2
IRQ
I bit
IRQCR (IRQEN)
Yes
Yes
Vector base+ $F0
RTI time-out interrupt
I bit
CPMUINT (RTIE)
Vector base+ $EE
TIM timer channel 0
I bit
TIE (C0I)
No
Yes
Vector base + $EC
TIM timer channel 1
I bit
TIE (C1I)
No
Yes
Vector base+ $EA
TIM timer channel 2
I bit
TIE (C2I)
No
Yes
Vector base+ $E8
TIM timer channel 3
I bit
TIE (C3I)
No
Yes
TSCR2(TOF)
No
Yes
Vector base+ $E6
to
Vector base + $E0
Vector base+ $DE
Wake up
Wake up
from STOP from WAIT
4.6 Interrupts
Reserved
TIM timer overflow
I bit
Vector base+ $DC
to
Vector base + $DA
Reserved
Vector base + $D8
SPI
I bit
SPICR1 (SPIE, SPTIE)
No
Yes
Vector base+ $D6
SCI0
I bit
SCI0CR2
(TIE, TCIE, RIE, ILIE)
Yes
Yes
Vector base + $D4
SCI1
I bit
SCI1CR2
(TIE, TCIE, RIE, ILIE)
Yes
Yes
Vector base + $D2
ADC
I bit
ATDCTL2 (ASCIE)
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Vector base + $D0
Vector base + $CE
Reserved
Port L
I bit
PIEL (PIEL3-PIEL0)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
43
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Table 1-10. Interrupt Vector Locations (Sheet 2 of 2)
Vector Address1
Interrupt Source
CCR
Mask
Vector base + $CC
to
Vector base + $CA
Local Enable
Wake up
Wake up
from STOP from WAIT
Reserved
Vector base + $C8
Oscillator status interrupt
I bit
CPMUINT (OSCIE)
No
Yes
Vector base + $C6
PLL lock interrupt
I bit
CPMUINT (LOCKIE)
No
Yes
Vector base + $C4
to
Vector base + $BC
Reserved
Vector base + $BA
FLASH error
I bit
FERCNFG (SFDIE, DFDIE)
No
No
Vector base + $B8
FLASH command
I bit
FCNFG (CCIE)
No
Yes
Vector base + $B6
to
Vector base + $B0
Reserved
Vector base + $AE
HSDRV over-current interrupt
I bit
HSIE (HSERR)
Vector base + $AC
LSDRV over-current interrupt
I bit
LSIE (LSERR)
No
Yes
Vector base + $AA
LINPHY over-current interrupt
I bit
LPIE (LPERR)
Yes
Yes
Vector base + $A8
BATS low & high battery voltage
interrupt
I bit
BATIE (BVHIE,BVLIE)
No
Yes
Vector base + $A6
to
Vector base + $90
No
Yes
Reserved
Vector base + $8E
Port P interrupt
I bit
PIEP (PIEP5-PIEP3,
PIEP1-PIEP0)
Yes
Yes
Vector base+ $8C
Port P2 (EVDD Hall Sensor Supply)
over-current interrupt
I bit
PIEP (OCIE)
No
Yes
Vector base + $8A
Low-voltage interrupt (LVI)
I bit
CPMUCTRL (LVIE)
No
Yes
Vector base + $88
Autonomous periodical interrupt
(API)
I bit
Yes
Yes
Vector base + $86
High temperature interrupt
I bit
CPMUHTCTL(HTIE)
Yes
Yes
Vector base + $84
ADC compare interrupt
I bit
ATDCTL2 (ACMPIE)
No
Yes
Vector base + $82
Port AD interrupt
I bit
PIE1AD(PIE1AD5-PIE1AD0)
Yes
Yes
Vector base + $80
Spurious interrupt
—
None
-
-
116
CPMUAPICTRL (APIE)
bits vector address based
1.11.3
Effects of Reset
When a reset occurs, MCU registers and control bits are initialized. Refer to the respective block sections
for register reset states.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
44
Freescale Semiconductor
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
On each reset, the Flash module executes a reset sequence to load Flash configuration registers.
1.11.3.1
Flash Configuration Reset Sequence Phase
On each reset, the Flash module will hold CPU activity while loading Flash module registers from the
Flash memory. If double faults are detected in the reset phase, Flash module protection and security may
be active on leaving reset. This is explained in more detail in the Flash module Section 17.1,
“Introduction”.
1.11.3.2
Reset While Flash Command Active
If a reset occurs while any Flash command is in progress, that command will be immediately aborted. The
state of the word being programmed or the sector/block being erased is not guaranteed.
1.11.3.3
I/O Pins
Refer to the PIM section for reset configurations of all peripheral module ports.
1.11.3.4
RAM
The RAM arrays are not initialized out of reset.
1.12
API external clock output (API_EXTCLK)
The API_EXTCLK option which is described 4.3.2.15 Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Control Register
(CPMUAPICTL) is not available on S12VR-Family.
1.13
COP Configuration
The COP time-out rate bits CR[2:0] and the WCOP bit in the CPMUCOP register at address 0x003C are
loaded from the Flash configuration field byte at global address 0x3_FF0E during the reset sequence. See
Table 1-11 and Table 1-12 for coding
Table 1-11. Initial COP Rate Configuration
NV[2:0] in
FOPT Register
CR[2:0] in
COPCTL Register
000
111
001
110
010
101
011
100
100
011
101
010
110
001
111
000
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
45
Device Overview MC9S12VR-Family
Table 1-12. Initial WCOP Configuration
1.14
NV[3] in
FOPT Register
WCOP in
COPCTL Register
1
0
0
1
ADC External Trigger Input Connection
The ADC module includes external trigger inputs ETRIG0, ETRIG1, ETRIG2, and ETRIG3. The external
trigger allows the user to synchronize ADC conversion to external trigger events. ETRIG0 is connected to
PP0 / PWM0 and ETRIG1 is connected to PP1 / PWM1. ETRIG2 and ETRIG3 are not used .ETRIG0 can
be routed to PS2 and ETRIG1 can be routed to PS3.
1.15
ADC Special Conversion Channels
Whenever the ADC’s Special Channel Conversion Bit (SC) in 8.3.2.6 ATD Control Register 5 (ATDCTL5)
is set, it is capable of running conversion on a number of internal channels. Table 1-13 lists the internal
sources which are connected to these special conversion channels.
Table 1-13. Usage of ADC Special Conversion Channels
ATDCTL5 Register Bits
1.16
Usage
SC
CD
CC
CB
CA
ADC Channel
1
0
0
0
1
Internal_7
1
0
0
1
0
Internal_0
Flash Supply Voltage VDDF
1
0
0
1
1
Internal_1
LINPHY temperature sensor
1
1
0
1
0
Internal_4
VSENSE or VSUP selectable in BATS module
see 16.1.1 Features
1
1
0
1
1
Internal_5
High voltage inputs Port L see 2.3.34 Port L
Analog Access Register (PTAL)
Bandgap Voltage VBG or Chip temperature
sensor VHT see 4.3.2.13 High Temperature
Control Register (CPMUHTCTL)
ADC Result Reference
MCUs of the MC9S12VR-Fanmily are able to measure the internal bandgap reference voltage VBGwith
the analog digital converter. (see Table 1-13.) VBG is a constant voltage with a narrow distribution over
temperature and external voltage supply. The ADC conversion result of VBG is provided at address
0x0_405A/0x0_405B in the NVM IFR for reference. By measuring the voltage VBG and comparing the
result to the reference value in the IFR it is possible to determine the refrence voltage of the ADC VRH in
the application environment.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
46
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 2
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Revision History
Rev. No.
Date
(Item No.) (Submitted By)
Sections
Affected
Substantial Change(s)
V02.02
11 Apr 2011
• Added stop mode condition to PTTEL and PTPSL
• Minor corrections after review
V02.03
18 Apr 2011
• Minor corrections after review
V02.04
24 May 2012
• Corrected PTAENL bit value in PTIL bit description
2.1
2.1.1
Introduction
Overview
The S12VR port integration module (PIM) establishes the interface between the peripheral modules and
the I/O pins for all ports. It controls the electrical pin properties as well as the signal prioritization and
multiplexing on shared pins.
This section covers:
• 2-pin port E associated with the external oscillator
• 4-pin port T associated with 4 TIM channels and 2 PWM channels
• 6-pin port S associated with 2 SCI and 1 SPI
• 6-pin port P with pin interrupts and wakeup function; associated with
— IRQ, XIRQ interrupt inputs
— Six PWM channels with two of those capable of driving up to 10 mA
— One output with over-current protection and interrupt capable of supplying up to 20 mA to
external devices such as Hall sensors
• 6-pin port AD with pin interrupts and wakeup function; associated with 6 ADC channels
• 4-pin port L with pin interrupts and wakeup function; associated with 4 high-voltage inputs for
digital or analog use with optional voltage divider bypass and open input detection
Most I/O pins can be configured by register bits to select data direction and to enable and select pullup or
pulldown devices.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
47
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.1.2
Features
The PIM includes these distinctive registers:
• Data registers and data direction registers for Ports E, T, S, P and AD when used as general-purpose
I/O
• Control registers to enable/disable pull devices and select pullups/pulldowns on Ports T, S, P, AD
on per-pin basis
• Single control register to enable/disable pullups on Port E on per-port basis and on BKGD pin
• Control registers to enable/disable open-drain (wired-or) mode on Port S
• Control register to enable/disable reduced output drive on Port P high-current pins
• Interrupt flag register for pin interrupts on Port P, L and AD
• Control register to configure IRQ pin operation
• Control register to enable ECLK clock output
• Routing registers to support module port relocation and control internal module routings:
— PWM and ETRIG to alternative pins
— SPI SS and SCK to alternative pins
— SCI1 to alternative pins
— HSDRV and LSDRV control selection from PWM, TIM or related register bit
— Various SCI0-LINPHY routing options supporting standalone use and conformance testing
— Optional LINPHY to TIM link
— Optional HVI to ADC link
A standard port pin has the following minimum features:
• Input/output selection
• 5 V output drive
• 5 V digital and analog input
• Input with selectable pullup or pulldown device
Optional features supported on dedicated pins:
•
Two selectable output drive strengths
•
Open drain for wired-or connections
•
Interrupt input with glitch filtering
•
High-voltage input
•
10 mA high-current output
•
20 mA high-current output with over-current protection for use as Hall sensor supply
2.2
External Signal Description
This section lists and describes the signals that do connect off-chip.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
48
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-1 shows all the pins and their functions that are controlled by the PIM. Routing options are denoted
in parenthesis.
NOTE
If there is more than one function associated with a pin, the output priority
is indicated by the position in the table from top (highest priority) to bottom
(lowest priority).
Table 2-1. Pin Functions and Priorities
Port
Pin Name
Pin Function
& Priority1
I/O
-
BKGD
MODC2
I
BKGD
E
PE1
XTAL
PTE[1]
PE0
T
PT3
EXTAL
CPMU OSC signal
-
I
I/O TIM channel 3
(SCK)
I/O SPI serial clock
O
LINPHY receive pin
I/O TIM channel 2
I/O General-purpose
O
LINPHY register LPDR[LPDR1]
(TXD0)
I/O Serial Communication Interface 0 transmit pin
PWM7
O
IOC1
PTT[1]
Pulse Width Modulator channel 7
I/O TIM channel 1
I/O General-purpose
(RXD0)
I
Serial Communication Interface 0 receive pin
PWM6
O
Pulse Width Modulator channel 6
IOC0
PTT[0]
GPIO
LINPHY transmit pin
I/O General-purpose
(LPDR1)
GPIO
CPMU OSC signal
PTT[3]
PTT[2]
PT0
-
I/O SPI slave select
IOC2
BKGD
I/O General-purpose
(SS)
(LPRXD)
Pin Function
after Reset
I/O BDM communication pin
I/O General-purpose
IOC3
PT1
MODC input during RESET
PTE[0]
(LPTXD)
PT2
Description
I/O TIM channel 0
I/O General-purpose
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
49
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Port
Pin Name
Pin Function
& Priority1
S
PS5
SS
I/O SPI slave select
PTS[5]
I/O General-purpose
PS4
PS3
PS2
PS1
SCK
Description
I/O General-purpose
ECLK
O
MOSI
I/O SPI master out / slave in
GPIO
Free running clock
(TXD1)
I/O Serial Communication Interface 1 transmit pin
(PWM5)
O
Pulse Width Modulator channel 5
(ETRIG1)
I
ADC external trigger input
PTS[3]
I/O General-purpose
MISO
I/O SPI master in / slave out
(RXD1)
I
Serial Communication Interface 1 receive pin
(PWM4)
O
Pulse Width Modulator channel 4
(ETRIG0)
I
ADC external trigger input
PTS[2]
I/O General-purpose
TXD1
I/O Serial Communication Interface 1 transmit pin
O
LINPHY register LPDR[LPDR1]
(TXD0)
I/O Serial Communication Interface 0 transmit pin
PTS[1]
I/O General-purpose
RXD1
I
Serial Communication Interface 1 receive pin
(RXD0)
I
Serial Communication Interface 0 receive pin
PTS[0]
Pin Function
after Reset
I/O SPI serial clock
PTS[4]
(LPDR1)
PS0
I/O
I/O General-purpose
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
50
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Port
Pin Name
Pin Function
& Priority1
I/O
P
PP5
IRQ
I
Maskable level- or falling edge-sensitive interrupt
PWM5
O
Pulse Width Modulator channel 5
ETRIG1
I
ADC external trigger input
PP4
PP3
PP2
PTP[5]/
KWP[5]
I/O General-purpose; with pin interrupt and wakeup
PWM4
O
Pulse Width Modulator channel 4
ETRIG0
I
ADC external trigger input
PTP[4]/
KWP[4]
I/O General-purpose; with pin interrupt and wakeup
PWM3
O
PTP[3]/
KWP[3]
I/O General-purpose; with pin interrupt and wakeup
PWM2
O
PTP[2]/
KWP[2]/
EVDD
PP1
PP0
2
Pin Function
after Reset
GPIO
Pulse Width Modulator channel 3
Pulse Width Modulator channel 2
I/O General-purpose; with pin interrupt and wakeup;
switchable external power supply output with over-current
interrupt; high-current capable (20 mA)
XIRQ
I
Non-maskable level-sensitive interrupt
PWM1
O
Pulse Width Modulator channel 1; high-current capable (10 mA)
PTP[1]/
KWP[1]
I/O General-purpose; with interrupt and wakeup; high-current
capable (10 mA)
PWM0
O
PTP[0]/
KWP[0]
I/O General-purpose; with interrupt and wakeup; high-current
capable (10 mA)
Pulse Width Modulator channel 0; high-current capable (10 mA)
L
PL3-0
PTL[3:0]/
KWL[3:0]
I
General-purpose high-voltage input (HVI); with interrupt and
wakeup; optional ADC link
AD
PAD5-0
AN[5:0]
I
ADC analog
PTAD[5:0]/
KWAD[5:0]
1
Description
GPI (HVI)
GPIO
I/O General-purpose; with interrupt and wakeup
Signals in parentheses denote alternative module routing pins
Function active when RESET asserted
2.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of all PIM registers.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
51
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.1
Register Map
Global
Address
Register
Name
0x0000–
0x0007
Reserved
0x0008
PORTE
0x0009
DDRE
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PE1
PE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DDRE1
DDRE0
W
R
W
R
W
R
0x000A–
Non-PIM
0x000B Address Range W
0x000C
PUCR
0x000D
Reserved
R
Non-PIM Address Range
0
BKPUE
W
R
0
0
0
0
ECLKCTL
0x001D
PIMMISC
0x001E
IRQCR
0x001F
Reserved
PTT
0x0241
PTIT
0x0242
DDRT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Non-PIM Address Range
NECLK
OCPE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PTT3
PTT2
PTT1
PTT0
PTIT3
PTIT2
PTIT1
PTIT0
DDRT3
DDRT2
DDRT1
DDRT0
IRQE
IRQEN
Reserved
Reserved
R
0x0020–
Non-PIM
0x023F Address Range W
0x0240
0
0
W
R
0x000E–
Non-PIM
0x001B Address Range W
0x001C
PDPEE
R
Non-PIM Address Range
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
W
R
W
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
52
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Global
Address
Register
Name
0x0243
Reserved
0x0244
PERT
0x0245
PPST
0x0246
MODRR0
0x0247
MODRR1
0x0248
PTS
0x0249
PTIS
0x024A
DDRS
0x024B
Reserved
0x024C
PERS
0x024D
PPSS
0x024E
WOMS
0x024F
MODRR2
0x0250–
0x0257
Reserved
0x0258
PTP
0x0259
PTIP
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PERT3
PERT2
PERT1
PERT0
0
0
0
0
PPST3
PPST2
PPST1
PPST0
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
MODRR07 MODRR06 MODRR05 MODRR04 MODRR03 MODRR02 MODRR01 MODRR00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
W
R
MODRR15 MODRR14
0
0
0
0
PTS5
PTS4
PTS3
PTS2
PTS1
PTS0
PTIS5
PTIS4
PTIS3
PTIS2
PTIS1
PTIS0
DDRS5
DDRS4
DDRS3
DDRS2
DDRS1
DDRS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PERS5
PERS4
PERS3
PERS2
PERS1
PERS0
PPSS5
PPSS4
PPSS3
PPSS2
PPSS1
PPSS0
WOMS5
WOMS4
WOMS3
WOMS2
WOMS1
WOMS0
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
MODRR27
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MODRR25 MODRR24 MODRR23 MODRR22 MODRR21 MODRR20
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTP5
PTP4
PTP3
PTP2
PTP1
PTP0
PTIP5
PTIP4
PTIP3
PTIP2
PTIP1
PTIP0
W
R
W
R
W
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
53
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Global
Address
Register
Name
0x025A
DDRP
0x025B
RDRP
0x025C
PERP
0x025D
PPSP
0x025E
PIEP
0x025F
PIFP
0x0260–
0x0268
Reserved
0x0269
PTIL
0x026A
DIENL
0x026B
PTAL
0x026C
PIRL
0x026D
PPSL
0x026E
PIEL
0x026F
R
0x0270
Reserved
0x0271
PT1AD
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
DDRP5
DDRP4
DDRP3
DDRP2
DDRP1
DDRP0
0
0
0
RDRP2
RDRP1
RDRP0
PERP5
PERP4
PERP3
PERP2
PERP1
PERP0
PPSP5
PPSP4
PPSP3
PPSP2
PPSP1
PPSP0
PIEP5
PIEP4
PIEP3
PIEP2
PIEP1
PIEP0
PIFP5
PIFP4
PIFP3
PIFP2
PIFP1
PIFP0
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
0
OCIE
0
OCIF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTIL3
PTIL2
PTIL1
PTIL0
0
0
0
0
DIENL3
DIENL2
DIENL1
DIENL0
PTTEL
PTPSL
PTABYPL
PTADIRL
PTAL1
PTAL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PT1AD5
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
R
PIRL1
PIRL0
PPSL3
PPSL2
PPSL1
PPSL0
PIEL3
PIEL2
PIEL1
PIEL0
PIFL3
PIFL2
PIFL1
PIFL0
0
0
0
0
0
PT1AD4
PT1AD3
PT1AD2
PT1AD1
PT1AD0
W
W
R
0
PIRL2
W
R
PTAENL
PIRL3
W
R
PIFL
Bit 7
W
R
W
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
54
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Global
Address
Register
Name
0x0272
Reserved
0x0273
PTI1AD
0x0274
Reserved
0x0275
DDR1AD
0x0276–
0x0278
Reserved
0x0279
PER1AD
0x027A
Reserved
0x027B
PPS1AD
0x027C
Reserved
0x027D
PIE1AD
0x027E
Reserved
0x027F
PIF1AD
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTI1AD5
PTI1AD4
PTI1AD3
PTI1AD2
PTI1AD1
PTI1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
DDR1AD5 DDR1AD4 DDR1AD3 DDR1AD2 DDR1AD1 DDR1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
W
R
PER1AD5 PER1AD4 PER1AD3 PER1AD2 PER1AD1 PER1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
W
R
PPS1AD5 PPS1AD4 PPS1AD3 PPS1AD2 PPS1AD1 PPS1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PIE1AD5
PIE1AD4
PIE1AD3
PIE1AD2
PIE1AD1
PIE1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PIF1AD5
PIF1AD4
PIF1AD3
PIF1AD2
PIF1AD1
PIF1AD0
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
= Unimplemented
2.3.2
Register Descriptions
The following table summarizes the effect of the various configuration bits, that is data direction (DDR),
output level (PORT/PT), pull enable (PER), pull select (PPS), interrupt enable (PIE) on the pin function,
pull device and interrupt activity.
The configuration bit PPS is used for two purposes:
1. Configure the sensitive interrupt edge (rising or falling), if interrupt is enabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
55
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2. Select either a pullup or pulldown device if PER is active.
Table 2-2. Pin Configuration Summary1
1
2
DDR
PORT
PT
PER
PPS1
PIE2
0
x
0
x
0
Input
Disabled
Disabled
0
x
1
0
0
Input
Pullup
Disabled
0
x
1
1
0
Input
Pulldown
Disabled
0
x
0
0
1
Input
Disabled
Falling edge
0
x
0
1
1
Input
Disabled
Rising edge
0
x
1
0
1
Input
Pullup
Falling edge
0
x
1
1
1
Input
Pulldown
Rising edge
1
0
x
x
0
Output, drive to 0
Disabled
Disabled
1
1
x
x
0
Output, drive to 1
Disabled
Disabled
1
0
x
0
1
Output, drive to 0
Disabled
Falling edge
1
1
x
1
1
Output, drive to 1
Disabled
Rising edge
Function
Pull Device
Interrupt
Always “0” on Port E
Applicable only on Port P and AD
•
•
•
NOTE
All register bits in this module are completely synchronous to internal
clocks during a register read.
Figure of port data registers also display the alternative functions if
applicable on the related pin as defined in Table 2-1. Names in
parentheses denote the availability of the function when using a specific
routing option.
Figures of module routing registers also display the module instance or
module channel associated with the related routing bit.
1. Not applicable for Port L. Refer to register descriptions.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
56
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.3
Port E Data Register (PORTE)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0008
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
PE1
PE0
W
Altern.
Function
—
—
—
—
—
—
XTAL
EXTAL
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-1. Port E Data Register (PORTE)
1
Read: Anytime. The data source is depending on the data direction value.
Write: Anytime
Table 2-3. PORTE Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1
PE
PorT data register port E — General-purpose input/output data, CPMU OSC XTAL signal
If the CPMU OSC function is active this pin is used as XTAL signal and the pulldown device is
disabled. When not used with the alternative function, this pin can be used as general-purpose I/O.
In general-purpose output mode the register bit is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit of this pin is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The CPMU OSC function takes precedence over the general purpose I/O function if enabled.
0
PE
PorT data register port E — General-purpose input/output data, CPMU OSC EXTAL signal
If the CPMU OSC function is active this pin is used as EXTAL signal and the pulldown device is
disabled. When not used with the alternative function, this pin can be used as general-purpose I/O.
In general-purpose output mode the register bit is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit of this pin is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The CPMU OSC function takes precedence over the general purpose I/O function if enabled.
2.3.4
Port E Data Direction Register (DDRE)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0009
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
DDRE1
DDRE0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-2. Port E Data Direction Register (DDRE)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
57
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-4. DDRE Register Field Descriptions
Field
1-0
DDRE
Description
Data Direction Register port E —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
2.3.5
Port E, BKGD pin Pull Control Register (PUCR)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x000C
7
R
6
5
0
4
0
BKPUE
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PDPEE
W
Reset
0
1
0
1
Figure 2-3. Port E, BKGD pin Pull Control Register (PUCR)
1
Read:Anytime
Write:Anytime, except BKPUE, which is writable in special mode only
Table 2-5. PUCR Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
6
BKPUE
BKGD pin Pullup Enable — Activate pullup device on pin
This bit configures whether a pullup device is activated, if the pin is used as input. If a pin is used as output this bit
has no effect.
1 Pullup device enabled
0 Pullup device disabled
4
PDPEE
Pull-Down Port E Enable — Activate pulldown devices on all port input pins
This bit configures whether a pulldown device is activated on all associated port input pins. If a pin is used as output
or used with the CPMU OSC function this bit has no effect. Out of reset the pulldown devices are enabled.
1 Pulldown devices enabled
0 Pulldown devices disabled
2.3.6
ECLK Control Register (ECLKCTL)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x001C
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NECLK
W
Reset
1
Figure 2-4. ECLK Control Register (ECLKCTL)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
58
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-6. ECLKCTL Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
NECLK
No ECLK — Disable ECLK output
This bit controls the availability of a free-running clock on the ECLK pin. This clock has a fixed rate equivalent to the
internal bus clock.
1 ECLK disabled
0 ECLK enabled
2.3.7
PIM Miscellaneous Register (PIMMISC)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x001D
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OCPE
W
Reset
0
Figure 2-5. PIM Miscellaneous Register (PIMMISC)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-7. PIMMISC Register Field Descriptions
Field
7
OCPE
Description
Over-Current Protection Enable— Activate over-current detector on PP2
Refer to Section 2.5.3, “Over-Current Protection on EVDD”
1 PP2 over-current detector enabled
0 PP2 over-current detector disabled
2.3.8
IRQ Control Register (IRQCR)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x001E
7
6
IRQE
IRQEN
0
0
R
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
Figure 2-6. IRQ Control Register (IRQCR)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
59
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
1
Read: Anytime
Write:
IRQE: Once in normal mode, anytime in special mode
IRQEN: Anytime
Table 2-8. IRQCR Register Field Descriptions
Field
7
IRQE
Description
IRQ select Edge sensitive only —
1 IRQ pin configured to respond only to falling edges. Falling edges on the IRQ pin will be detected anytime IRQE=1
and will be cleared only upon a reset or the servicing of the IRQ interrupt.
0 IRQ pin configured for low level recognition
6
IRQEN
IRQ ENable —
1 IRQ pin is connected to interrupt logic
0 IRQ pin is disconnected from interrupt logic
2.3.9
Reserved Register
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x001F
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
R
W
Reset
Figure 2-7. Reserved Register
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in special mode
NOTE
These reserved registers are designed for factory test purposes only and are
not intended for general user access. Writing to these registers when in
special modes can alter the module’s functionality.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
60
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.10
Port T Data Register (PTT)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0240
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
PTT3
PTT2
PTT1
PTT0
W
Altern.
Function
Reset
—
—
—
—
(SS)
(SCK)
PWM72
PWM62
—
—
—
—
(LPTXD)
(LPRXD)
(TXD0)
(RXD0)
—
—
—
—
—
—
(LPDR1)
—
—
—
—
—
IOC33
IOC24
IOC15
IOC05
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-8. Port T Data Register (PTT)
1
2
3
4
5
Read: Anytime. The data source is depending on the data direction value.
Write: Anytime
PWM function available on this pin only if not used with a routed HSDRV or LSDRV function. Refer to Section 2.3.15, “Module
Routing Register 0 (MODRR0)”
TIM output compare function available on this pin only if not used with routed HSDRV. Refer to Section 2.3.15, “Module Routing
Register 0 (MODRR0)”. TIM input capture function available on this pin only if not used with LPRXD. Refer to Section 2.3.23,
“Module Routing Register 2 (MODRR2)”.
TIM output compare function available on this pin only if not used with routed HSDRV. Refer to Section 2.3.15, “Module Routing
Register 0 (MODRR0)”
TIM output compare function available on this pin only if not used with routed LSDRV. Refer to Section 2.3.15, “Module Routing
Register 0 (MODRR0)”
Table 2-9. PTT Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3-2
PTT
PorT data register port T — General-purpose input/output data, SPI SS and SCK, TIM input/output, routed LINPHY
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The routed SPI takes precedence over the routed LINPHY function, TIM output function and the general-purpose
I/O function if enabled.
• The routed LINPHY function takes precedence over the TIM output function and the general-purpose I/O function
if the related channel is enabled.
• The TIM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
61
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-9. PTT Register Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
1
PTT
Description
PorT data register port T — General-purpose input/output data, TIM input/output, routed SCI0, LPDR[LPDR1]
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The routed SCI0 or LPDR[LPDR1] takes precedence over the TIM output function and the general-purpose I/O
function if enabled.
• The TIM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
0
PTT
PorT data register port T — General-purpose input/output data, TIM input/output, routed SCI0
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The routed SCI0 takes precedence over the TIM output function and the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
• The TIM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
2.3.11
Port T Input Register (PTIT)
Access: User read only1
Address 0x0241
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
PTIT3
PTIT2
PTIT1
PTIT0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
Figure 2-9. Port T Input Register (PTIT)
1
Read: Anytime
Write:Never
Table 2-10. PTIT Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3-0
PTIT
PorT Input data register port T —
A read always returns the synchronized input state of the associated pin. It can be used to detect overload or short
circuit conditions on output pins.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
62
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.12
Port T Data Direction Register (DDRT)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0242
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
DDRT3
DDRT2
DDRT1
DDRT0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-10. Port T Data Direction Register (DDRT)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-11. DDRT Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3
DDRT
Data Direction Register port T —
This bit determines whether the pin is an input or output
Depending on the configuration of the enabled SPI the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. The enabled
routed LINPHY forces the I/O state to be an input (LPTXD). Else the TIM forces the I/O state to be an output for a
TIM port associated with an enabled TIM output compare. In these cases the data direction bit will not change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
2
DDRT
Data Direction Register port T —
This bit determines whether the pin is an input or output.
Depending on the configuration of the enabled SPI the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. The enabled
routed LINPHY forces the I/O state to be an output (LPRXD). Else the TIM forces the I/O state to be an output for a
TIM port associated with an enabled TIM output compare. In these cases the data direction bit will not change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
1-0
DDRT
Data Direction Register port T —
This bit determines whether the pin is an input or output.
Depending on the configuration of the enabled routed SCI0 the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. The
enabled routed LINPHY forces the I/O state to be an output (LPDR[LPDR1]). Else the TIM forces the I/O state to be
an output for a TIM port associated with an enabled TIM output compare. In these cases the data direction bit will
not change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
63
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.13
Port T Pull Device Enable Register (PERT)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0244
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
PERT3
PERT2
PERT1
PERT0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-11. Port T Pull Device Enable Register (PERT)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-12. PERT Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3-0
PERT
Pull device Enable Register port T — Enable pull device on input pin
This bit controls whether a pull device on the associated port input pin is active. If a pin is used as output this bit has
no effect. The polarity is selected by the related polarity select register bit.
1 Pull device enabled
0 Pull device disabled
2.3.14
Port T Polarity Select Register (PPST)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0245
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
PPST3
PPST2
PPST1
PPST0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-12. Port T Polarity Select Register (PPST)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-13. PPST Register Field Descriptions
Field
3-0
PPST
Description
Pull device Polarity Select register port T — Configure pull device polarity on input pin
This bit selects a pullup or a pulldown device if enabled on the associated port input pin.
1 A pulldown device is selected
0 A pullup device is selected
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
64
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.15
Module Routing Register 0 (MODRR0)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0246
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MODRR07
MODRR06
MODRR05
MODRR04
MODRR03
MODRR02
MODRR01
MODRR00
R
W
Routing
Option
Reset
HS1
0
HS0
0
0
LS1
0
0
LS0
0
0
0
Figure 2-13. Module Routing Register 0 (MODRR0)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Once in normal, anytime in special mode
Table 2-14. Module Routing Register 0 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7-6
MODule Routing Register 0 — HS1
MODRR0 This register controls the routing of PWM and TIM channels to pin HS1 of HSDRV module. By default the pin is
controlled by the related HSDRV port register bit.
11 PWM channel 1 routed to HS1 if enabled
10 PWM channel 4 routed to HS1 if enabled
01 TIM output compare channel 3 routed to HS1 if enabled
00 HS1 controlled by register bit HSDR[HSDR1]. Refer to HSDRV section.
5-4
MODule Routing Register 0 — HS0
MODRR0 This register controls the routing of PWM and TIM channels to pin HS0 of HSDRV module. By default the pin is
controlled by the related HSDRV port register bit.
11 PWM channel 3 routed to HS0 if enabled
10 PWM channel 3 routed to HS0 if enabled
01 TIM output compare channel 2 routed to HS0 if enabled
00 HS0 controlled by register bit HSDR[HSDR0]. Refer to HSDRV section.
3-2
MODule Routing Register 0 — LS1
MODRR0 This register controls the routing of PWM and TIM channels to pin LS1 of LSDRV module. By default the pin is
controlled by the related LSDRV port register bit.
11 PWM channel 7 routed to LS1 if enabled
10 PWM channel 7 routed to LS1 if enabled
01 TIM output compare channel 1 routed to LS1 if enabled
00 LS1 controlled by register bit LSDR[LSDR1]. Refer to LSDRV section.
1-0
MODule Routing Register 0 — LS0
MODRR0 This register controls the routing of PWM and TIM channels to pin LS0 of LSDRV module. By default the pin is
controlled by the related LSDRV port register bit.
11 PWM channel 5 routed to LS0 if enabled
10 PWM channel 6 routed to LS0 if enabled
01 TIM output compare channel 0 routed to LS0 if enabled
00 LS0 controlled by register bit LSDR[LSDR0]. Refer to LSDRV section.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
65
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.16
Module Routing Register 1 (MODRR1)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0247
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
MODRR15
MODRR14
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
W
Routing
Option
—
—
PWM5
ETRIG1
PWM4
ETRIG0
—
—
—
—
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-14. Module Routing Register 1 (MODRR1)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Once in normal, anytime in special mode
Table 2-15. Module Routing Register 1 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5
MODule Routing Register 1 — PWM5, ETRIG1
MODRR1
1 PWM channel 5 on PS3; ETRIG1 on PS3
0 PWM channel 5 on PP5; ETRIG1 on PP5
4
MODule Routing Register 1 — PWM4, ETRIG0
MODRR1
1 PWM channel 4 on PS2; ETRIG0 on PS2
0 PWM channel 4 on PP4; ETRIG0 on PP4
2.3.17
Port S Data Register (PTS)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0248
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PTS5
PTS4
PTS3
PTS2
PTS1
PTS0
W
Altern.
Function
Reset
—
—
—
—
ECLK
—
—
—
—
—
SS
SCK
MOSI
MISO
—
—
—
—
—
—
(TXD1)
(RXD1)
TXD1
RXD1
—
—
—
—
(PWM52)
(PWM42)
(LPDR1)
—
—
—
—
—
(ETRIG1)
(ETRIG0)
(TXD0)
(RXD0)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-15. Port S Data Register (PTS)
1
Read: Anytime. The data source is depending on the data direction value.
Write: Anytime
2 PWM function available on this pin only if not used with a routed HSDRV or LSDRV function. Refer to Section 2.3.15, “Module
Routing Register 0 (MODRR0)”
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
66
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-16. PTS Register Field Descriptions
Field
5
PTS
Description
PorT data register port S — General-purpose input/output data, SPI SS
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The SPI function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
4
PTS
PorT data register port S — General-purpose input/output data, SPI SCK
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The SPI function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
3
PTS
PorT data register port S — General-purpose input/output data, ECLK, SPI MOSI, routed SCI1, routed PWM,
routed ETRIG
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The ECLK output function takes precedence over the SPI, routed SCI1 and PWM and the general purpose I/O
function if enabled.
• The SPI function takes precedence over the routed SCI1, routed PWM and the general purpose I/O function if
enabled.
• The routed SCI1 function takes precedence over the PWM and general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
• The routed PWM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
2
PTS
PorT data register port S — General-purpose input/output data, SPI MISO, routed SCI1, routed PWM, routed
ETRIG
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The SPI function takes precedence over the routed SCI1, routed PWM and the general purpose I/O function if
enabled.
• The routed SCI1 function takes precedence over the routed PWM and the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
• The routed PWM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
67
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-16. PTS Register Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
1
PTS
Description
PorT data register port S — General-purpose input/output data, SCI1, routed SCI0 or LPDR[LPDR1]
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The SCI1 function takes precedence over the routed SCI0 or LPDR[LPDR1] function and the general-purpose I/O
function if enabled.
• The routed SCI0 or LPDR[LPDR1] function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
0
PTS
PorT data register port S — General-purpose input/output data, SCI1, routed SCI0
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The SCI1 function takes precedence over the routed SCI0 function and the general-purpose I/O function if
enabled.
• The routed SCI0 function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
2.3.18
Port S Input Register (PTIS)
Access: User read only1
Address 0x0249
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
PTIS5
PTIS4
PTIS3
PTIS2
PTIS1
PTIS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
Figure 2-16. Port S Input Register (PTIS)
1
Read: Anytime
Write:Never
Table 2-17. PTIS Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PTIS
PorT Input data register port S —
A read always returns the synchronized input state of the associated pin. It can be used to detect overload or short
circuit conditions on output pins.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
68
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.19
Port S Data Direction Register (DDRS)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x024A
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
DDRS5
DDRS4
DDRS3
DDRS2
DDRS1
DDRS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-17. Port S Data Direction Register (DDRS)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-18. DDRS Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5
DDRS
Data Direction Register port S —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output. Depending on the configuration of the enabled
SPI the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. In this case the data direction bit will not change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
4
DDRS
Data Direction Register port S —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output. Depending on the configuration of the enabled
SPI the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. In this case the data direction bit will not change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
3
DDRS
Data Direction Register port S —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output. The ECLK output function, routed SCI1 and
routed PWM function forces the I/O state to output if enabled. Depending on the configuration of the enabled SPI
the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. In these cases the data direction bit will not change. The routed
ETRIG function has no effect on the I/O state.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
2
DDRS
Data Direction Register port S —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output. Depending on the configuration of the enabled
SPI the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. The routed SCI1 function forces the I/O state to input if enabled.
The routed PWM function forces the I/O state to output if enabled. In these cases the data direction bit will not
change. The routed ETRIG function has no effect on the I/O state.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
69
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-18. DDRS Register Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
1
DDRS
Description
Data Direction Register port S —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output.
Depending on the configuration of the enabled SCI the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. The enabled
routed LINPHY forces the I/O state to be an output (LPDR[LPDR1]). In these cases the data direction bit will not
change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
0
DDRS
Data Direction Register port S —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output.
Depending on the configuration of the enabled SCI the I/O state will be forced to be input or output. In this case the
data direction bit will not change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
2.3.20
Port S Pull Device Enable Register (PERS)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x024C
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PERS5
PERS4
PERS3
PERS2
PERS1
PERS0
1
1
1
1
1
1
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-18. Port S Pull Device Enable Register (PERS)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-19. PERS Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PERS
Pull device Enable Register port S — Enable pull device on input pin or wired-or output pin
This bit controls whether a pull device on the associated port input pin is active. If a pin is used as output this bit has
only effect if used in wired-or mode. The polarity is selected by the related polarity select register bit.
1 Pull device enabled
0 Pull device disabled
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
70
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.21
Port S Polarity Select Register (PPSS)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x024D
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PPSS5
PPSS4
PPSS3
PPSS2
PPSS1
PPSS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-19. Port S Polarity Select Register (PPSS)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-20. PPSS Register Field Descriptions
Field
5-0
PPSS
Description
Pull device Polarity Select register port S — Configure pull device polarity on input pin
This bit selects a pullup or a pulldown device if enabled on the associated port input pin.
1 A pulldown device is selected
0 A pullup device is selected
2.3.22
Port S Wired-Or Mode Register (WOMS)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x024E
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
WOMS5
WOMS4
WOMS3
WOMS2
WOMS1
WOMS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-20. Port S Wired-Or Mode Register (WOMS)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-21. WOMS Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
WOMS
Wired-Or Mode register port S — Enable open-drain functionality on output pin
This bit configures an output pin as wired-or (open-drain) or push-pull. In wired-or mode a logic “0” is driven
active-low while a logic “1” remains undriven. This allows a multipoint connection of several serial modules. The bit
has no influence on pins used as input.
1 Output buffer operates as open-drain output
0 Output buffer operates as push-pull output
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
71
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.23
Module Routing Register 2 (MODRR2)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x024F
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MODRR25
MODRR24
MODRR23
MODRR22
MODRR21
MODRR20
0
MODRR27
W
Routing
Option
Reset
LPRXD to
TIM
—
SPI
SS and SCK
SCI1
0
0
0
0
SCI0-to-LINPHY interface
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-21. Module Routing Register 2 (MODRR2)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Once in normal, anytime in special mode
Table 2-22. Module Routing Register 2 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
MODule Routing Register 2 — TIM routing
MODRR2
1 TIM input capture channel 3 is connected to LPRXD
0 TIM input capture channel 3 is connected to PT3
5
MODule Routing Register 2 — SPI SS and SCK routing
MODRR2
1 SS on PT3; SCK on PT2
0 SS on PS5; SCK on PS4
4
MODule Routing Register 2 — SCI1 routing
MODRR2
1 TXD1 on PS3; RXD1 on PS2
0 TXD1 on PS1; RXD1 on PS0
3-0
MODule Routing Register 2 — SCI0-to-LINPHY routing
MODRR2
Selection of SCI0-to-LINPHY interface routing options to support probing and conformance testing. Refer to
Figure 2-22 for an illustration and Table 2-23 for preferred settings. SCI0 must be enabled for TXD0 routing to take
effect on pins. LINPHY must be enabled for LPRXD and LPDR[LPDR1] routings to take effect on pins.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
72
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
MODRR20
MODRR21
MODRR22
MODRR23
0
0
1
1
PS1 / TXD0 / LPDR1
PT1 / TXD0 / LPDR1
PT3 / LPTXD
1
TXD0
0
0
LPTXD
1
LPDR1
SCI0
TIM input
capture
channel 3
MODRR27
0
1
0
RXD0
LIN
LINPHY
IOC3
LPRXD
1
0
1
PT2 / LPRXD
0
PS0 / RXD0
1
PT0 / RXD0
Figure 2-22. SCI0-to-LINPHY Routing Options Illustration
Table 2-23. Preferred Interface Configurations
MODRR2[3:0]
Signal Routing
Description
0000
Default setting:
0001
SCI0 connects to LINPHY, interface internal only
Direct control setting:
LPDR[LPDR1] register bit controls LPTXD, interface internal only
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
73
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
MODRR2[3:0]
Signal Routing
1100
Description
Probe setting:
1110
SCI0 connects to LINPHY, interface accessible on 2 external pins
Conformance test setting:
Interface opened and all 4 signals routed externally
NOTE
For standalone usage of SCI0 on external pins set MODRR2[3:0]=0b1110
and disable the LINPHY (LPCR[LPE]=0). This releases PT2 and PT3 to
other associated functions and maintains TXD0 and RXD0 signals on PT1
and PT0, respectively, if no other function with higher priority takes
precedence.
2.3.24
Port P Data Register (PTP)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0258
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PTP5
PTP4
PTP3
PTP2
PTP1
PTP0
W
Altern.
Function
Reset
—
—
PWM523
PWM423
PWM32
PWM2
PWM12
PWM0
—
—
IRQ
—
—
EVDD
XIRQ
—
—
—
ETRIG1
ETRIG0
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-23. Port P Data Register (PTP)
1
Read: Anytime. The data source is depending on the data direction value.
Write: Anytime
2
PWM function available on this pin only if not used with a routed HSDRV or LSDRV function. Refer to Section 2.3.15, “Module
Routing Register 0 (MODRR0)”
3 PWM function available on this pin only if not routed to port S. Refer to Section 2.3.16, “Module Routing Register 1 (MODRR1)”
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
74
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-24. PTP Register Field Descriptions
Field
5
PTP
Description
PorT data register port P — General-purpose input/output data, PWM output, ETRIG input, pin interrupt
input/output, IRQ input
The IRQ signal is mapped to this pin when used with the IRQ interrupt function. If enabled
(IRQCR[IRQEN]=1) the I/O state of the pin is forced to be an input.
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
•
•
•
•
4
PTP
The IRQ function takes precedence over the PWM and the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
The PWM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if the related channel is enabled.
Pin interrupts can be generated if enabled in input or output mode.
The ETRIG function has no effect on the I/O state.
PorT data register port P — General-purpose input/output data, PWM output, ETRIG input, pin interrupt
input/output
The associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In general-purpose output mode the register bit value is
driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The PWM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if the related channel is enabled.
• Pin interrupts can be generated if enabled in input or output mode.
• The ETRIG function has no effect on the I/O state.
3
PTP
PorT data register port P — General-purpose input/output data, PWM output, pin interrupt input/output
The associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In general-purpose output mode the register bit value is
driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The PWM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if the related channel is enabled.
• Pin interrupts can be generated if enabled in input or output mode.
2
PTP
PorT data register port P — General-purpose input/output data, PWM output, switchable high-current capable
external supply with over-current protection (EVDD)
The associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O or as a supply for external devices such as Hall sensors
(see Section 2.5.3, “Over-Current Protection on EVDD”. In output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The PWM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if the related channel is enabled.
• Pin interrupts can be generated if enabled in input or output mode.
• An over-current interrupt can be generated if enabled. Refer to Section 2.4.4.3, “Over-Current Interrupt”
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
75
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-24. PTP Register Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
1
PTP
PorT data register port P — General-purpose input/output data, PWM output, pin interrupt input/output, XIRQ input
The XIRQ signal is mapped to this pin when used with the XIRQ interrupt function. The
interrupt is enabled by clearing the X mask bit in the CPU Condition Code register. The I/O state of the
pin is forced to input level upon the first clearing of the X bit and held in this state even if the bit is set
again. A stop or wait recovery with the X bit set (refer to CPU12/CPU12X Reference Manual) is not
available.
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The XIRQ function takes precedence over the PWM and the general-purpose I/O function if enabled.
• The PWM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if the related channel is enabled.
• Pin interrupts can be generated if enabled in input or output mode.
0
PTP
PorT data register port P — General-purpose input/output data, PWM output, pin interrupt input/output
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit, otherwise the
synchronized pin input state is read.
• The PWM function takes precedence over the general-purpose I/O function if the related channel is enabled.
• Pin interrupts can be generated if enabled in input or output mode.
2.3.25
Port P Input Register (PTIP)
Access: User read only1
Address 0x0259
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
PTIP5
PTIP4
PTIP3
PTIP2
PTIP1
PTIP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
Figure 2-24. Port P Input Register (PTIP)
1
Read: Anytime
Write:Never
Table 2-25. PTIP Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PTIP
PorT Input data register port P —
A read always returns the synchronized input state of the associated pin. It can be used to detect overload or short
circuit conditions on output pins.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
76
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.26
Port P Data Direction Register (DDRP)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x025A
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
DDRP5
DDRP4
DDRP3
DDRP2
DDRP1
DDRP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-25. Port P Data Direction Register (DDRP)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-26. DDRP Register Field Descriptions
Field
5
DDRP
Description
Data Direction Register port P —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output.
The enabled IRQ function forces the I/O state to be an input if enabled. In this case the data direction bit will not
change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
4-2
DDRP
Data Direction Register port P —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
1
DDRP
Data Direction Register port P —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output.
The I/O state of the pin is forced to input level upon the first clearing of the X bit and held in this state even if the bit
is set again. The PWM forces the I/O state to be an output for an enabled channel. In this case the data direction bit
will not change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
0
DDRP
Data Direction Register port P —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output.
The PWM forces the I/O state to be an output for an enabled channel. In this case the data direction bit will not
change.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
77
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.27
Port P Reduced Drive Register (RDRP)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x025B
R
7
6
5
4
3
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
RDRP2
RDRP1
RDRP0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-26. Port P Reduced Drive Register (RDRP)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-27. RDRP Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
2
RDRP
Reduced Drive Register port P — Select reduced drive for output pin
This bit configures the drive strength of the associated output pin as either full or reduced. If a pin is used as input
this bit has no effect. The reduced drive function is independent of which function is being used on a particular pin.
1 Reduced drive selected (approx. 1/10 of the full drive strength)
0 Full drive strength enabled
1-0
RDRP
Reduced Drive Register port P — Select reduced drive for output pin
This bit configures the drive strength of the associated output pin as either full or reduced. If a pin is used as input
this bit has no effect. The reduced drive function is independent of which function is being used on a particular pin.
1 Reduced drive selected (approx. 1/5 of the full drive strength)
0 Full drive strength enabled
2.3.28
Port P Pull Device Enable Register (PERP)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x025C
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PERP5
PERP4
PERP3
PERP2
PERP1
PERP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-27. Port P Pull Device Enable Register (PERP)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
78
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-28. PERP Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PERP
Pull device Enable Register port P — Enable pull device on input pin
This bit controls whether a pull device on the associated port input pin is active. If a pin is used as output this bit has
no effect. The polarity is selected by the related polarity select register bit.
1 Pull device enabled
0 Pull device disabled
2.3.29
Port P Polarity Select Register (PPSP)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x025D
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PPSP5
PPSP4
PPSP3
PPSP2
PPSP1
PPSP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-28. Port P Polarity Select Register (PPSP)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-29. PPSP Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PPSP
Pull device Polarity Select register port P — Configure pull device polarity and pin interrupt edge polarity on input
pin
This bit selects a pullup or a pulldown device if enabled on the associated port input pin.
This bit also selects the polarity of the active pin interrupt edge.
1 A pulldown device is selected; rising edge selected
0 A pullup device is selected; falling edge selected
2.3.30
Port P Interrupt Enable Register (PIEP)
Read: Anytime.
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x025E
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PIEP5
PIEP4
PIEP3
PIEP2
PIEP1
PIEP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OCIE
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-29. Port P Interrupt Enable Register (PIEP)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
79
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-30. PIEP Register Field Descriptions
Field
7
OCIE
Description
Over-Current Interrupt Enable register port P —
This bit enables or disables the over-current interrupt on PP2.
1 PP2 over-current interrupt enabled
0 PP2 over-current interrupt disabled (interrupt flag masked)
5-0
PIEP
Pin Interrupt Enable register port P —
This bit enables or disables the edge sensitive pin interrupt on the associated pin. An interrupt can be generated if
the pin is operating in input or output mode when in use with the general-purpose or related peripheral function.
1 Interrupt is enabled
0 Interrupt is disabled (interrupt flag masked)
2.3.31
Port P Interrupt Flag Register (PIFP)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x025F
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PIFP5
PIFP4
PIFP3
PIFP2
PIFP1
PIFP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OCIF
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-30. Port P Interrupt Flag Register (PIFP)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime, write 1 to clear
Table 2-31. PIFP Register Field Descriptions
Field
7
OCIF
Description
Over-Current Interrupt Flag register port P —
This flag asserts if an over-current condition is detected on PP2 (Section 2.4.4.3, “Over-Current Interrupt”).
1 PP2 Over-current event occurred
0 No PP2 over-current event occurred
5-0
PIFP
Pin Interrupt Flag register port P —
This flag asserts after a valid active edge was detected on the related pin (Section 2.4.4, “Interrupts”). This can be
a rising or a falling edge based on the state of the polarity select register. An interrupt will occur if the associated
interrupt enable bit is set.
1 Active edge on the associated bit has occurred
0 No active edge occurred
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
80
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.32
Port L Input Register (PTIL)
Access: User read only1
Address 0x0269
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
PTIL3
PTIL2
PTIL1
PTIL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
Figure 2-31. Port L Input Register (PTIL)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: No Write
Table 2-32. PTIL - Register Field Descriptions
1
Field
Description
3-0
PTIL
PorT Input data register port L —
A read returns the synchronized input state if the associated pin is used in digital mode, that is the related
DIENL bit is set to 1 and the pin is not used in analog mode (PTAL[PTAENL]=0). See Section 2.3.34, “Port L
Analog Access Register (PTAL)”. A one is read in any other case1.
Refer to PTTEL bit description in Section 2.3.34, “Port L Analog Access Register (PTAL) for an override condition.
2.3.33
Port L Digital Input Enable Register (DIENL)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x26A
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
DIENL3
DIENL2
DIENL1
DIENL0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-32. Port L Digital Input Enable Register (DIENL)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-33. DIENL Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3-0
DIENL
Digital Input ENable port L — Input buffer control
This bit controls the HVI digital input function. If set to 1 the input buffers are enabled and the pin can be used with
the digital function. If the analog input function is enabled (PTAL[PTAENL]=1) the input buffer of the selected HVI pin
is forced off1 in run mode and is released to be active in stop mode only if DIENL=1.
1 Associated pin digital input is enabled if not used as analog input in run mode1
0 Associated pin digital input is disabled1
1
Refer to PTTEL bit description in Section 2.3.34, “Port L Analog Access Register (PTAL) for an override condition.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
81
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.34
Port L Analog Access Register (PTAL)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x026B
7
6
5
4
3
PTTEL
PTPSL
PTABYPL
PTADIRL
PTAENL
0
0
0
0
0
R
2
1
0
PTAL1
PTAL0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
Figure 2-33. Port L Analog Access Register (PTAL)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-34. PTAL Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
PTTEL
PorT Test Enable port L —
This bit forces the input buffer of the selected HVI pin (PTAL[1:0]) to be active while using the analog function to
support open input detection in run mode. Refer to Section 2.5.4, “Open Input Detection on HVI Pins”). In stop mode
this bit has no effect.
Note: In direct input connection (PTAL[PTADIRL]=1) the digital input buffer is not enabled.
1 Input buffer enabled when used with analog function and not in direct mode (PTAL[PTADIRL]=0)
0 Input buffer disabled when used with analog function
6
PTPSL
PorT Pull Select port L —
This bit selects a pull device on the selected HVI pin (PTAL[1:0]) in analog mode for open input detection. By default
a pulldown device is active as part of the input voltage divider. If set to 1 and PTTEL=1 and not in stop mode a pullup
to a level close to VDDX takes effect and overrides the weak pulldown device. Refer to Section 2.5.4, “Open Input
Detection on HVI Pins”).
1 Pullup enabled
0 Pulldown enabled
5
PTABYPL
PorT ADC connection BYPass port L —
This bit bypasses and powers down the impedance converter stage in the signal path from the analog input pin to
the ADC channel input. This bit takes effect only if using direct input connection to the ADC channel (PTADIRL=1).
1 Bypass impedance converter in ADC channel signal path
0 Use impedance converter in ADC channel signal path
4
PTADIRL
PorT ADC DIRect connection port L —
This bit connects the selected analog input signal (PTAL[1:0]) directly to the ADC channel bypassing the voltage
divider. This bit takes effect only in analog mode (PTAENL=1).
1 Input pin directly connected to ADC channel
0 Input voltage divider active on analog input to ADC channel
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
82
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-34. PTAL Register Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
3
PTAENL
PorT ADC connection ENable port L —
This bit enables the analog signal link of an HVI pin selected by PTAL[1:0] to an ADC channel. If set to 1 the analog
input function takes precedence over the digital input in run mode by forcing off the input buffers if not overridden by
PTTEL=1.
1 Selected pin by PTAL[1:0] is connected to ADC channel
0 No Port L pin is connected to ADC
1-0
PTAL
PorT ADC connection selector port L —
These selector bits choose the HVI pin connecting to an ADC channel if enabled (PTAENL=1). Refer to Table 2-35
for details.
NOTE
When enabling the resistor paths to ground by setting PTAL[PTAENL]=1
or by changing PTAL[PTAL1:PTAL0], a settling time of tUNC_HVI + two
bus cycles must be considered to let internal nodes be loaded with correct
values.
Table 2-35. HVI pin connected to ADC channel
1
PTAL[PTAL1]
PTAL[PTAL0]
HVI pin connected
to ADC1
0
0
HVI0
0
1
HVI1
1
0
HVI2
1
1
HVI3
Refer to device overview section for channel assignment
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
83
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.35
Port L Input Divider Ratio Selection Register (PIRL)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x026C
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
PIRL3
PIRL2
PIRL1
PIRL0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-34. Port L Input Divider Ratio Selection Register (PIRL)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-36. PIRL Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3-0
PIRL
Port L Input Divider Ratio Select —
This bit selects one of two voltage divider ratios for the associated high-voltage input pin in analog mode.
1 RatioL_HVI selected
0 RatioH_HVI selected
2.3.36
Port L Polarity Select Register (PPSL)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x026D
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
PPSL3
PPSL2
PPSL1
PPSL0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-35. Port L Polarity Select Register (PPSL)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-37. PPSL Register Field Descriptions
Field
3-0
PPSL
Description
Pin interrupt Polarity Select register port L —
This bit selects the polarity of the active pin interrupt edge.
1 Rising edge selected
0 Falling edge selected
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
84
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.37
Port L Interrupt Enable Register (PIEL)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x026E
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
PIEL3
PIEL2
PIEL1
PIEL0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-36. Port L Interrupt Enable Register (PIEL)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-38. PIEL Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3-0
PIEL
Pin Interrupt Enable register port L —
This bit enables or disables the edge sensitive pin interrupt on the associated pin. For wakeup from stop mode
this bit must be set.
1 Interrupt is enabled
0 Interrupt is disabled (interrupt flag masked)
2.3.38
Port L Interrupt Flag Register (PIFL)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x026F
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
PIFL3
PIFL2
PIFL1
PIFL0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-37. Port L Interrupt Flag Register (PIFL)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime, write 1 to clear
Table 2-39. PIFL Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3-0
PIFL
Pin Interrupt Flag register port L —
This flag asserts after a valid active edge was detected on the related pin (Section 2.4.4, “Interrupts”). This
can be a rising or a falling edge based on the state of the polarity select register. An interrupt will occur if the
associated interrupt enable bit is set.
1 Active edge on the associated bit has occurred
0 No active edge occurred
2.3.39
Port AD Data Register (PT1AD)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
85
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0271
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PT1AD5
PT1AD4
PT1AD3
PT1AD2
PT1AD1
PT1AD0
W
Altern.
Function
—
—
AN5
AN4
AN3
AN2
AN1
AN0
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 2-38. Port AD Data Register (PT1AD)
1
Read: Anytime. The data source is depending on the data direction value.
Write: Anytime
Table 2-40. PT1AD Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PT1AD
PorT data register 1 port AD — General-purpose input/output data, ADC AN analog input
When not used with the alternative function, the associated pin can be used as general-purpose I/O. In
general-purpose output mode the register bit value is driven to the pin.
If the associated data direction bit set to 1, a read returns the value of the port register bit. If the data direction bit is
set to 0 and the ADC Digital Input Enable Register (ATDDIEN) is set to 1 the synchronized pin input state is read.
2.3.40
Port AD Input Register (PTI1AD)
Access: User read only1
Address 0x0273
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
PTI1AD5
PTI1AD4
PTI1AD3
PTI1AD2
PTI1AD1
PTI1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
u = Unaffected by reset
Figure 2-39. Port P Input Register (PTI1AD)
1
Read: Anytime
Write:Never
Table 2-41. PTI1AD Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PTI1AD
PorT Input data register 1 port AD —
A read always returns the synchronized input state of the associated pin if the ADC Digital Input Enable Register
(ATDDIEN) is set to 1. Else a logic 1 is read. It can be used to detect overload or short circuit conditions on output
pins.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
86
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.41
Port AD Data Direction Register (DDR1AD)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0275
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
DDR1AD5
DDR1AD4
DDR1AD3
DDR1AD2
DDR1AD1
DDR1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-40. Port AD Data Direction Register (DDR1AD)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-42. DDR1AD Register Field Descriptions
Field
5-0
DDR1AD
Description
Data Direction Register 1 port AD —
This bit determines whether the associated pin is an input or output.
To use the digital input function the ADC Digital Input Enable Register (ATDDIEN) has to be set to logic level “1”.
1 Associated pin is configured as output
0 Associated pin is configured as input
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
87
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.42
Port AD Pull Enable Register (PER1AD)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x0279
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PER1AD5
PER1AD4
PER1AD3
PER1AD2
PER1AD1
PER1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-41. Port AD Pullup Enable Register (PER1AD)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-43. PER1AD Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PER1AD
Pull device Enable Register 1 port AD — Enable pull device on input pin
This bit controls whether a pull device on the associated port input pin is active. If a pin is used as output this bit has
no effect. The polarity is selected by the related polarity select register bit.
1 Pull device enabled
0 Pull device disabled
2.3.43
Port AD Polarity Select Register (PPS1AD)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x027B
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PPS1AD5
PPS1AD4
PPS1AD3
PPS1AD2
PPS1AD1
PPS1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-42. Port AD Polarity Select Register (PPS1AD)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-44. PPS1AD Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PPS1AD
Pull device Polarity Select register 1 port AD — Configure pull device polarity and pin interrupt edge polarity on
input pin
This bit selects a pullup or a pulldown device if enabled on the associated port input pin.
This bit also selects the polarity of the active pin interrupt edge.
1 A pulldown device is selected; rising edge selected
0 A pullup device is selected; falling edge selected
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
88
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.3.44
Port AD Interrupt Enable Register (PIE1AD)
Read: Anytime.
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x027D
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PIE1AD5
PIE1AD4
PIE1AD3
PIE1AD2
PIE1AD1
PIE1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-43. Port AD Interrupt Enable Register (PIE1AD)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 2-45. PIE1AD Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PIE1AD
Pin Interrupt Enable register 1 port AD —
This bit enables or disables the edge sensitive pin interrupt on the associated pin. An interrupt can be generated if
the pin is operating in input or output mode when in use with the general-purpose or related peripheral function.
For wakeup from stop mode this bit must be set to allow activating the RC oscillator.
1 Interrupt is enabled
0 Interrupt is disabled (interrupt flag masked)
2.3.45
Port AD Interrupt Flag Register (PIF1AD)
Access: User read/write1
Address 0x027F
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
PIF1AD5
PIF1AD4
PIF1AD3
PIF1AD2
PIF1AD1
PIF1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 2-44. Port AD Interrupt Flag Register (PIF1AD)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime, write 1 to clear
Table 2-46. PIF1AD Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5-0
PIF1AD
Pin Interrupt Flag register 1 port AD —
This flag asserts after a valid active edge was detected on the related pin (Section 2.4.4, “Interrupts”). This can be
a rising or a falling edge based on the state of the polarity select register. An interrupt will occur if the associated
interrupt enable bit is set.
1 Active edge on the associated bit has occurred
0 No active edge occurred
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
89
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.4
2.4.1
Functional Description
General
Each pin except BKGD and port L pins can act as general-purpose I/O. In addition each pin can act as an
output or input of a peripheral module.
2.4.2
Registers
Table 2-47 lists the configuration registers which are available on each port. These registers except the pin
input and routing registers can be written at any time, however a specific configuration might not become
active.
For example selecting a pullup device: This device does not become active while the port is used as a
push-pull output.
Data
Reduced
Direction
Drive
Port
Data
Input
E
yes
-
yes
Pull
Enable
Polarity
Select
WiredOr Mode
Interrupt
Enable
Interrupt
Flag
Routing
-
yes
-
-
-
-
-
T
yes
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
-
-
-
yes
S
yes
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
yes
-
-
yes
P
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
-
L
-
yes
yes1
-
-
yes
-
yes
yes
-
AD
yes
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
-
Table 2-47. Register availability per port (each cell represents one register with individual configuration bit)
1
Input buffer control only
2.4.2.1
Data register (PTx)
This register holds the value driven out to the pin if the pin is used as a general-purpose I/O.
Writing to this register has only an effect on the pin if the pin is used as general-purpose output. When
reading this address, the synchronized state of the pin is returned if the associated data direction register
bit is set to “0”.
If the data direction register bits are set to logic level “1”, the contents of the data register is returned. This
is independent of any other configuration (Figure 2-45).
2.4.2.2
Input register (PTIx)
This register is read-only and always returns the synchronized state of the pin (Figure 2-45).
2.4.2.3
Data direction register (DDRx)
This register defines whether the pin is used as an general-purpose input or an output.
If a peripheral module controls the pin the contents of the data direction register is ignored (Figure 2-45).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
90
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Independent of the pin usage with a peripheral module this register determines the source of data when
reading the associated data register address (2.4.2.1/2-90).
NOTE
Due to internal synchronization circuits, it can take up to 2 bus clock cycles
until the correct value is read on port data or port input registers, when
changing the data direction register.
Figure 2-45. Illustration of I/O pin functionality
PTI
0
1
PT
0
PIN
1
DDR
0
1
data out
Module
output enable
module enable
2.4.2.4
Reduced drive register (RDRx)
If the pin is used as an output this register allows the configuration of the drive strength independent of the
use with a peripheral module.
2.4.2.5
Pull device enable register (PERx)
This register turns on a pullup or pulldown device on the related pins determined by the associated polarity
select register (2.4.2.6/2-91).
The pull device becomes active only if the pin is used as an input or as a wired-or output. Some peripheral
module only allow certain configurations of pull devices to become active. Refer to the respective bit
descriptions.
2.4.2.6
Polarity select register (PPSx)
This register selects either a pullup or pulldown device if enabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
91
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
It becomes only active if the pin is used as an input. A pullup device can be activated if the pin is used as
a wired-or output.
2.4.2.7
Wired-or mode register (WOMx)
If the pin is used as an output this register turns off the active-high drive. This allows wired-or type
connections of outputs.
2.4.2.8
Interrupt enable register (PIEx)
If the pin is used as an interrupt input this register serves as a mask to the interrupt flag to enable/disable
the interrupt.
2.4.2.9
Interrupt flag register (PIFx)
If the pin is used as an interrupt input this register holds the interrupt flag after a valid pin event.
2.4.2.10
Module routing register (MODRRx)
Routing registers allow software re-configuration of specific peripheral inputs and outputs:
• MODRR0 selects the driving source of the HSDRV and LSDRV pins
• MODRR1 selects optional pins for PWM channels and ETRIG inputs
• MODRR2 supports options to test the internal SCI-LINPHY interface signals
2.4.3
Pins and Ports
NOTE
Please refer to the device pinout section to determine the pin availability in
the different package options.
2.4.3.1
BKGD pin
The BKGD pin is associated with the BDM module.
During reset, the BKGD pin is used as MODC input.
2.4.3.2
Port E
This port is associated with the CPMU OSC.
Port E pins PE1-0 can be used for general-purpose or with the CPMU OSC module.
2.4.3.3
Port T
This port is associated with TIM, routed SCI-LINPHY interface and routed SPI.
Port T pins can be used for either general-purpose I/O or with the channels of the standard TIM, SPI, or
SCI and LINPHY subsystems.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
92
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.4.3.4
Port S
This port is associated with the ECLK, SPI, SCI1, routed SCI0, routed PWM channels and ETRIG inputs.
Port S pins can be used either for general-purpose I/O, or with the ECLK, SPI, SCI, and PWM subsystems.
2.4.3.5
Port P
Port P pins can be used for either general-purpose I/O, IRQ and XIRQ or with the PWM subsystem. All
pins feature pin interrupt functionality.
PP2 has an increased current capability to drive up to 20 mA to supply external devices for external Hall
sensors. An over-current protection is available.
PP1 and PP0 have an increased current capability to drive up to 10 mA.
PP4 and PP5 support ETRIG functionality.
PP5 can be used for either general-purpose input or as the level- or falling edge-sensitive IRQ interrupt
input. IRQ will be enabled by setting the IRQCR[IRQEN] configuration bit (2.3.8/2-59) and clearing the
I-bit in the CPU condition code register. It is inhibited at reset so this pin is initially configured as a simple
input with a pullup.
PP0 can be used for either general-purpose input or as the level-sensitive XIRQ interrupt input. XIRQ can
be enabled by clearing the X-bit in the CPU condition code register. It is inhibited at reset so this pin is
initially configured as a high-impedance input with a pullup.
2.4.3.6
Port L
Port L provides four high-voltage inputs (HVI) with the following features:
• Input voltage proof up to VHVIx
• Digital input function with pin interrupt and wakeup from stop capability
• Analog input function with selectable divider ratio routable to ADC channel. Optional direct input
bypassing voltage divider and impedance converter. Capable to wakeup from stop (pin interrupts
in run mode not available). Open input detection.
Figure 2-46 shows a block diagram of the HVI.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
93
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
VHVI
REXT_HVI
10K
HVIx
ANALOG[x] = PTAENL & PTAL[1:0]
40K
Input Buffer
PTIL[x]
(DIENL[x] & (ANALOG[x] | STOP))
| (ANALOG[x] & PTADIRL & PTTEL & STOP)
500K
ANALOG[x]
& STOP
& PTADIRL
ANALOG[x] VDDX
& PTTEL
& PTPSL
& STOP
ANALOG[x]
& STOP & PTADIRL
Impedance
Converter
ADC
ANALOG[x]
& STOP & PTADIRL
110K
PIRL[x]
(other inputs)
440K
PTAENL
& PTADIRL
& PTABYPL
Figure 2-46. HVI Block Diagram
Voltages up to VHVIx can be applied to all HVI pins. Internal voltage dividers scale the input signals down
to logic level. There are two modes, digital and analog, where these signals can be processed.
2.4.3.6.1
Digital Mode Operation
In digital mode the input buffers are enabled (DIENL[x]=1 & PTAL[PTAENL]=0). The synchronized pin
input state determined at threshold level VTH_HVI can be read in register PTIL. Interrupt flags (PIFL) are
set on input transitions if enabled (PIEL[x]=1) and configured for the related edge polarity (PPSL).
Wakeup from stop mode is supported.
2.4.3.6.2
Analog Mode Operation
In analog mode (PTAL[PTAENL]=1) the voltage applied to a selectable pin (PTAL[PTAL1:PTAL0]) can
be measured on an internal ADC channel (refer to device overview section for channel assignment). One
of two input divider ratios (RatioH_HVI, RatioL_HVI) can be chosen on each analog input (PIRL[x]) or the
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
94
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
voltage divider can be bypassed (PTAL[PTADIRL]=1). Additionally in latter case the impedance
converter in the ADC signal path can be configured to be used or bypassed in direct input mode
(PTAL[PTABYPL]).
In run mode the digital input buffer of the selected pin is disabled to avoid shoot-through current. Thus pin
interrupts cannot be generated.
In stop mode the digital input buffer is enabled only if DIENL[x]=1 to support wakeup functionality.
Table 2-48 shows the HVI input configuration depending on register bits and operation mode.
Table 2-48. HVI Input Configurations
Mode
Run
Stop
1
DIENL
PTAENL
Digital Input
Analog Input
Resulting Function
0
0
off
off
0
1
off1
enabled
Input disabled (Reset)
1
0
enabled
off
1
1
off1
enabled
Analog input, interrupt not supported
Analog input, interrupt not supported
Digital input, interrupt supported
0
0
off
off
0
1
off
off
Input disabled, wakeup from stop not
supported
1
0
enabled
off
Digital input, wakeup from stop supported
1
1
enabled
off
Enabled if (PTAL[PTTEL]=1 & PTAL[PTADIRL]=0)
NOTE
An external resistor REXT_HVI must always be connected to the
high-voltage inputs to protect the device pins from fast transients and to
achieve the specified pin input divider ratios when using the HVI in analog
mode.
2.4.3.7
Port AD
This port is associated with the ADC.
Port AD pins can be used for either general-purpose I/O, or with the ADC subsystem.
2.4.4
Interrupts
This section describes the interrupts generated by the PIM and their individual sources. Vector addresses
and interrupt priorities are defined at MCU level.
Table 2-49. PIM Interrupt Sources
Module Interrupt Sources
Local Enable
XIRQ
None
IRQ
IRQCR[IRQEN]
Port P pin interrupt
PIEP[PIEP5-PIEP0]
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
95
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Table 2-49. PIM Interrupt Sources
Module Interrupt Sources
2.4.4.1
Local Enable
Port L pin interrupt
PIEL[PIEL3-PIEL0]
Port AD pin interrupt
PIE1AD[PIE1AD5-PIE1AD0]
Port P over-current
PIEP[OCIE]
XIRQ, IRQ Interrupts
The XIRQ pin allows requesting non-maskable interrupts after reset initialization. During reset, the X bit
in the condition code register is set and any interrupts are masked until software enables them.
The IRQ pin allows requesting asynchronous interrupts. The interrupt input is disabled out of reset. To
enable the interrupt the IRQCR[IRQEN] bit must be set and the I bit cleared in the condition code register.
The interrupt can be configured for level-sensitive or falling-edge-sensitive triggering. If IRQCR[IRQEN]
is cleared while an interrupt is pending, the request will deassert.
Both interrupts are capable to wake-up the device from stop mode. Means for glitch filtering are not
provided on these pins.
2.4.4.2
Pin Interrupts and Wakeup
Ports P, L and AD offer pin interrupt capability. The related interrupt enable (PIE) as well as the sensitivity
to rising or falling edges (PPS) can be individually configured on per-pin basis. All bits/pins in a port share
the same interrupt vector. Interrupts can be used with the pins configured as inputs or outputs.
An interrupt is generated when a bit in the port interrupt flag (PIF) and its corresponding port interrupt
enable (PIE) are both set. The pin interrupt feature is also capable to wake up the CPU when it is in stop
or wait mode.
A digital filter on each pin prevents short pulses from generating an interrupt. A valid edge on an input is
detected if 4 consecutive samples of a passive level are followed by 4 consecutive samples of an active
level. Else the sampling logic is restarted.
In run and wait mode the filters are continuously clocked by the bus clock. Pulses with a duration of tPULSE
< nP_MASK/fbus are assuredly filtered out while pulses with a duration of tPULSE > nP_PASS/fbus guarantee
a pin interrupt.
In stop mode the clock is generated by an RC-oscillator. The minimum pulse length varies over process
conditions, temperature and voltage (Figure 2-47). Pulses with a duration of tPULSE < tP_MASK are
assuredly filtered out while pulses with a duration of tPULSE > tP_PASS guarantee a wakeup event.
Please refer to the appendix table “Pin Interrupt Characteristics” for pulse length limits.
To maximize current saving the RC oscillator is active only if the following condition is true on any
individual pin:
Sample count <= 4 (at active or passive level) and interrupt enabled (PIE[x]=1) and interrupt flag not set
(PIF[x]=0).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
96
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
Glitch, filtered out, no interrupt flag set
Valid pulse, interrupt flag set
uncertain
tPULSE(min) tPULSE(max)
Figure 2-47. Interrupt Glitch Filter (here: active low level selected)
2.4.4.3
Over-Current Interrupt
In case of an over-current condition on PP2 (see Section 2.5.3, “Over-Current Protection on EVDD”) the
over-current interrupt flag PIFP[OCIF] asserts. This flag generates an interrupt if the enable bit
PIEP[OCIE] is set.
An asserted flag immediately forces the output pin low to protect the device. The flag must be cleared to
re-enable the driver.
2.5
2.5.1
Initialization and Application Information
Port Data and Data Direction Register writes
It is not recommended to write PORT[x]/PT[x] and DDR[x] in a word access. When changing the register
pins from inputs to outputs, the data may have extra transitions during the write access. Initialize the port
data register before enabling the outputs.
2.5.2
ADC External Triggers ETRIG1-0
The ADC external trigger inputs ETRIG1-0 allow the synchronization of conversions to external trigger
events if selected as trigger source (for details refer to ATDCTL1[ETRIGSEL] and ATDCTL1[ETRIGCH]
configuration bits in ADC section). These signals are related to PWM channels 5-4 to support periodic
trigger applications with the ADC. Other pin functions can also be used as triggers.
If a PWM channel is routed to an alternative pin, the ETRIG input function will follow the relocation
accordingly.
If the related PWM channel is enabled and not routed for internal use, the PWM signal as seen on the pin
will drive the ETRIG input. Else the ETRIG function will be triggered by other functions on the pin
including general-purpose input.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
97
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
2.5.3
Over-Current Protection on EVDD
Pin PP2 can be used as general-purpose I/O or due to its increased current capability in output mode as a
switchable external power supply pin (EVDD) for external devices like Hall sensors. An over-current
monitor is implemented to protect the controller from short circuits or excess currents on the output which
can only arise if the pin is configured for full drive. Although the full drive current is available on the high
and low side, the protection is only available if the pin is driven high (PTP[PTP2]=1). This is also true if
using the pin with the PWM.
To power up the over-current monitor set PIMMISC[OCPE]=1.
In stop mode the over-current monitor is disabled for power saving. The increased current capability
cannot be maintained to supply the external device. Therefore when using the pin as power supply the
external load must be powered down prior to entering stop mode by setting PTP[PTP2]=0.
An over-current condition is detected if the output current level exceeds the threshold IOCD in run mode.
The output driver is immediately forced low and the over-current interrupt flag PIFP[OCIF] asserts. Refer
to Section 2.4.4.3, “Over-Current Interrupt”.
2.5.4
Open Input Detection on HVI Pins
The connection of an external pull device on any port L high-voltage input can be validated by using the
built-in pull functionality of the HVI pins. Depending on the application type an external pulldown circuit
can be detected with the internal pullup device whereas an external pullup circuit can be detected with the
internal pulldown device which is part of the input voltage divider.
Note that the following procedures make use of a function that overrides the automatic disable mechanism
of the digital input buffers when using the inputs in analog mode. Make sure to switch off the override
function when using an input in analog mode after the check has been completed.
External pulldown device (Figure 2-48):
1. Enable analog function on HVIx in non-direct mode (PTAL[PTAENL]=1, PTAL[PTADIRL]=0,
PTAL[PTAL1:PTAL0]=x, where x is 0, 1, 2, or 3)
2. Select internal pullup device on selected HVI (PTAL[PTPSL]=1)
3. Enable function to force input buffer active on selected HVI in analog mode (PTAL[PTTEL]=1)
4. Verify PTILx=0 for a connected external pulldown device; read PTILx=1 for an open input
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
98
Freescale Semiconductor
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
VDDX
500K
min. 1/10 * VDDX
110K / 550K
Digital in
40K
PIRL=0 / PIRL=1
HVIx
10K
HV Supply
Figure 2-48. Digital Input Read with Pullup Enabled
External pullup device (Figure 2-49):
1. Enable analog function on HVIx in non-direct mode (PTAL[PTAENL]=1, PTAL[PTADIRL]=0,
PTAL[PTAL1:PTAL0]=x, where x is 0, 1, 2, or 3)
2. Select internal pulldown device on selected HVI (PTAL[PTPSL]=0)
3. Enable function to force input buffer active on selected HVI in analog mode (PTAL[PTTEL]=1)
4. Verify PTILx=1 for a connected external pullup device; read PTILx=0 for an open input
HV Supply
10K
HVIx
40K
max. 10/11 * VHVI (PIRL=0)
max. 21/22 * VHVI (PIRL=1)
Digital in
610K / 1050K
PIRL=0 / PIRL=1
Figure 2-49. Digital Input Read with Pulldown Enabled
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
99
Port Integration Module (S12VRPIMV2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
100
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 3
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
Table 3-1. Revision History Table
Rev. No.
Date
(Item No.) (Submitted By)
Sections
Affected
Substantial Change(s)
01.00
2-Jun 2009
Changed the RAM size of the S12GN32 from 1K to 2K
01.01
3-Aug 2009
Changed the RAM size of the S12GN16 from 0.5K to 1K
01.02
20-May 2010
3.1
Updates for S12VR48 and S12VR64
Introduction
The S12GMMC module controls the access to all internal memories and peripherals for the CPU12 and
S12SBDM module. It regulates access priorities and determines the address mapping of the on-chip
ressources. Figure 3-1 shows a block diagram of the S12GMMC module.
3.1.1
Glossary
Table 3-2. Glossary Of Terms
Term
Definition
Local Addresses
Address within the CPU12’s Local Address Map (Figure 3-11)
Global Address
Address within the Global Address Map (Figure 3-11)
Aligned Bus Access
Bus access to an even address.
Misaligned Bus Access
Bus access to an odd address.
NS
Normal Single-Chip Mode
SS
Special Single-Chip Mode
Unimplemented Address Ranges
Address ranges which are not mapped to any on-chip resource.
NVM
Non-volatile Memory; Flash or EEPROM
IFR
NVM Information Row. Refer to FTMRG Block Guide
3.1.2
Overview
The S12GMMC connects the CPU12’s and the S12SBDM’s bus interfaces to the MCU’s on-chip resources
(memories and peripherals). It arbitrates the bus accesses and determines all of the MCU’s memory maps.
Furthermore, the S12GMMC is responsible for constraining memory accesses on secured devices and for
selecting the MCU’s functional mode.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
103
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
3.1.3
Features
The main features of this block are:
• Paging capability to support a global 256 KByte memory address space
• Bus arbitration between the masters CPU12, S12SBDM to different resources.
• MCU operation mode control
• MCU security control
• Generation of system reset when CPU12 accesses an unimplemented address (i.e., an address
which does not belong to any of the on-chip modules) in single-chip modes
3.1.4
Modes of Operation
The S12GMMC selects the MCU’s functional mode. It also determines the devices behavior in secured
and unsecured state.
3.1.4.1
Functional Modes
Two functional modes are implemented on devices of the S12VR product family:
• Normal Single Chip (NS)
The mode used for running applications.
• Special Single Chip Mode (SS)
A debug mode which causes the device to enter BDM Active Mode after each reset. Peripherals
may also provide special debug features in this mode.
3.1.4.2
Security
S12VR devices can be secured to prohibit external access to the on-chip flash. The S12GMMC module
determines the access permissions to the on-chip memories in secured and unsecured state.
3.1.5
Block Diagram
Figure 3-1 shows a block diagram of the S12GMMC.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
104
Freescale Semiconductor
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
CPU
BDM
MMC
Address Decoder & Priority
DBG
Target Bus Controller
EEPROM
Flash
RAM
Peripherals
Figure 3-1. S12GMMC Block Diagram
3.2
External Signal Description
The S12GMMC uses two external pins to determine the devices operating mode: RESET and MODC
(Figure 3-3) See Device User Guide (DUG) for the mapping of these signals to device pins.
Table 3-3. External System Pins Associated With S12GMMC
Pin Name
Pin Functions
RESET
(See Section
Device Overview)
RESET
MODC
(See Section
Device Overview)
MODC
3.3
3.3.1
Description
The RESET pin is used the select the MCU’s operating mode.
The MODC pin is captured at the rising edge of the RESET pin. The captured
value determines the MCU’s operating mode.
Memory Map and Registers
Module Memory Map
A summary of the registers associated with the S12GMMC block is shown in Figure 3-2. Detailed
descriptions of the registers and bits are given in the subsections that follow.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
105
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
Address
Register
Name
0x000A
Reserved
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DP15
DP14
DP13
DP12
DP11
DP10
DP9
DP8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PIX3
PIX2
PIX1
PIX0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
0x000B
MODE
R
MODC
W
0x0010
Reserved
R
W
0x0011
DIRECT
R
W
0x0012
Reserved
R
W
0x0013
MMCCTL1
R
W
0x0014
Reserved
R
NVMRES
W
0x0015
PPAGE
R
W
0x00160x0017
Reserved
R
W
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 3-2. MMC Register Summary
3.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section consists of the S12GMMC control register descriptions in address order.
3.3.2.1
Mode Register (MODE)
Address: 0x000B
7
R
W
Reset
MODC
MODC1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1. External signal (see Table 3-3).
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 3-3. Mode Register (MODE)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
106
Freescale Semiconductor
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
Read: Anytime.
Write: Only if a transition is allowed (see Figure 3-4).
The MODC bit of the MODE register is used to select the MCU’s operating mode.
Table 3-4. MODE Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
MODC
Mode Select Bit — This bit controls the current operating mode during RESET high (inactive). The external
mode pin MODC determines the operating mode during RESET low (active). The state of the pin is registered
into the respective register bit after the RESET signal goes inactive (see Figure 3-4).
Write restrictions exist to disallow transitions between certain modes. Figure 3-4 illustrates all allowed mode
changes. Attempting non authorized transitions will not change the MODE bit, but it will block further writes to
the register bit except in special modes.
Write accesses to the MODE register are blocked when the device is secured.
RESET
1
0
Normal
Single-Chip
(NS)
1
Special
Single-Chip
(SS)
1
0
Figure 3-4. Mode Transition Diagram when MCU is Unsecured
3.3.2.2
Direct Page Register (DIRECT)
Address: 0x0011
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DP15
DP14
DP13
DP12
DP11
DP10
DP9
DP8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 3-5. Direct Register (DIRECT)
Read: Anytime
Write: anytime in special SS, write-once in NS.
This register determines the position of the 256 Byte direct page within the memory map.It is valid for both
global and local mapping scheme.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
107
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
Table 3-5. DIRECT Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–0
DP[15:8]
Direct Page Index Bits 15–8 — These bits are used by the CPU when performing accesses using the direct
addressing mode. These register bits form bits [15:8] of the local address (see Figure 3-6).
Bit15
Bit8
Bit0
Bit7
DP [15:8]
CPU Address [15:0]
Figure 3-6. DIRECT Address Mapping
Example 3-1. This example demonstrates usage of the Direct Addressing Mode
MOVB
#$04,DIRECT
LDY
<$12
3.3.2.3
;Set DIRECT register to 0x04. From this point on, all memory
;accesses using direct addressing mode will be in the local
;address range from 0x0400 to 0x04FF.
;Load the Y index register from 0x0412 (direct access).
MMC Control Register (MMCCTL1)
Address: 0x0013
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
NVMRES
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 3-7. MMC Control Register (MMCCTL1)
Read: Anytime.
Write: Anytime.
The NVMRES bit maps 16k of internal NVM resources (see Section FTMRG) to the global address space
0x04000 to 0x07FFF.
Table 3-6. MODE Field Descriptions
Field
0
NVMRES
Description
Map internal NVM resources into the global memory map
Write: Anytime
This bit maps internal NVM resources into the global address space.
0 Program flash is mapped to the global address range from 0x04000 to 0x07FFF.
1 NVM resources are mapped to the global address range from 0x04000 to 0x07FFF.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
108
Freescale Semiconductor
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
3.3.2.4
Program Page Index Register (PPAGE)
Address: 0x0015
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
3
2
1
0
PIX3
PIX2
PIX1
PIX0
1
1
1
0
Figure 3-8. Program Page Index Register (PPAGE)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
The four index bits of the PPAGE register select a 16K page in the global memory map (Figure 3-11). The
selected 16K page is mapped into the paging window ranging from local address 0x8000 to 0xBFFF.
Figure 3-9 illustrates the translation from local to global addresses for accesses to the paging window. The
CPU has special access to read and write this register directly during execution of CALL and RTC
instructions.
Global Address [17:0]
Bit17
Bit0
Bit14 Bit13
PPAGE Register [3:0]
Address [13:0]
Address: CPU Local Address
or BDM Local Address
Figure 3-9. PPAGE Address Mapping
NOTE
Writes to this register using the special access of the CALL and RTC
instructions will be complete before the end of the instruction execution.
Table 3-7. PPAGE Field Descriptions
Field
Description
3–0
PIX[3:0]
Program Page Index Bits 3–0 — These page index bits are used to select which of the 256 flash array pages
is to be accessed in the Program Page Window.
The fixed 16KB page from 0x0000 to 0x3FFF is the page number 0xC. Parts of this page are covered by
Registers, EEPROM and RAM space. See SoC Guide for details.
The fixed 16KB page from 0x4000–0x7FFF is the page number 0xD.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
109
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
The reset value of 0xE ensures that there is linear Flash space available between addresses 0x0000 and
0xFFFF out of reset.
The fixed 16KB page from 0xC000-0xFFFF is the page number 0xF.
3.4
Functional Description
The S12GMMC block performs several basic functions of the S12VR sub-system operation: MCU
operation modes, priority control, address mapping, select signal generation and access limitations for the
system. Each aspect is described in the following subsections.
3.4.1
•
•
MCU Operating Modes
Normal single chip mode
This is the operation mode for running application code. There is no external bus in this mode.
Special single chip mode
This mode is generally used for debugging operation, boot-strapping or security related operations.
The active background debug mode is in control of the CPU code execution and the BDM firmware
is waiting for serial commands sent through the BKGD pin.
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
Memory Map Scheme
CPU and BDM Memory Map Scheme
The BDM firmware lookup tables and BDM register memory locations share addresses with other
modules; however they are not visible in the memory map during user’s code execution. The BDM
memory resources are enabled only during the READ_BD and WRITE_BD access cycles to distinguish
between accesses to the BDM memory area and accesses to the other modules. (Refer to BDM Block
Guide for further details).
When the MCU enters active BDM mode, the BDM firmware lookup tables and the BDM registers
become visible in the local memory map in the range 0xFF00-0xFFFF (global address 0x3_FF00 0x3_FFFF) and the CPU begins execution of firmware commands or the BDM begins execution of
hardware commands. The resources which share memory space with the BDM module will not be visible
in the memory map during active BDM mode.
Please note that after the MCU enters active BDM mode the BDM firmware lookup tables and the BDM
registers will also be visible between addresses 0xBF00 and 0xBFFF if the PPAGE register contains value
of 0x0F.
3.4.2.1.1
Expansion of the Local Address Map
Expansion of the CPU Local Address Map
The program page index register in S12GMMC allows accessing up to 256KB of address space in the
global memory map by using the four index bits (PPAGE[3:0]) to page 16x16 KB blocks into the program
page window located from address 0x8000 to address 0xBFFF in the local CPU memory map.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
110
Freescale Semiconductor
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
The page value for the program page window is stored in the PPAGE register. The value of the PPAGE
register can be read or written by normal memory accesses as well as by the CALL and RTC instructions.
Control registers, vector space and parts of the on-chip memories are located in unpaged portions of the
64KB local CPU address space.
The starting address of an interrupt service routine must be located in unpaged memory unless the user is
certain that the PPAGE register will be set to the appropriate value when the service routine is called.
However an interrupt service routine can call other routines that are in paged memory. The upper 16KB
block of the local CPU memory space (0xC000–0xFFFF) is unpaged. It is recommended that all reset and
interrupt vectors point to locations in this area or to the other unmapped pages sections of the local CPU
memory map.
Expansion of the BDM Local Address Map
PPAGE and BDMPPR register is also used for the expansion of the BDM local address to the global
address. These registers can be read and written by the BDM.
The BDM expansion scheme is the same as the CPU expansion scheme.
The four BDMPPR Program Page index bits allow access to the full 256KB address map that can be
accessed with 18 address bits.
The BDM program page index register (BDMPPR) is used only when the feature is enabled in BDM and,
in the case the CPU is executing a firmware command which uses CPU instructions, or by a BDM
hardware commands. See the BDM Block Guide for further details. (see Figure 3-10).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
111
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
BDM HARDWARE COMMAND
Global Address [17:0]
Bit17
Bit0
Bit14 Bit13
BDMPPR Register [3:0]
BDM Local Address [13:0]
BDM FIRMWARE COMMAND
Global Address [17:0]
Bit17
Bit0
Bit14 Bit13
BDMPPR Register [3:0]
CPU Local Address [13:0]
Figure 3-10. Expansion of BDM local address map
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
112
Freescale Semiconductor
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
Local CPU and BDM
Memory Map
Global Memory Map
Register Space
Register Space
EEPROM
EEPROM
Flash Space
Page 0xC
Unimplemented
RAM
RAM
0x0000
0x0400
0x4000
NVMRES=0
Flash Space
Page 0xD
NVMRES=1
0x0_0000
0x0_0400
0x0_4000
Internal
Flash
NVM
Space
Resources
Page 0x1
0x0_8000
0x8000
Paging Window
Flash Space
Page 0x2
0x3_0000
0xC000
Flash Space
Flash Space
Page 0xF
Page 0xC
0x3_4000
0xFFFF
Flash Space
Page 0xD
0x3_8000
Flash Space
Page 0xE
0x3_C000
Flash Space
Page 0xF
0x3_FFFF
Figure 3-11. Local to Global Address Mapping
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
113
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
3.4.3
Unimplemented and Reserved Address Ranges
The S12GMMC is capable of mapping up 64K of flash, 512 bytes of EEPROM and 2K of RAM into the
global memory map{statement}. Smaller devices of theS12VR-family do not utilize all of the available
address space. Address ranges which are not associated with one of the on-chip memories fall into two
categories: Unimplemented addresses and reserved addresses.
Unimplemented addresses are not mapped to any of the on-chip memories. The S12GMMC is aware that
accesses to these address location have no destination and triggers a system reset (illegal address reset)
whenever they are attempted by the CPU. The BDM is not able to trigger illegal address resets.
Reserved addresses are associated with a memory block on the device, even though the memory block does
not contain the resources to fill the address space. The S12GMMC is not aware that the associated memory
does not physically exist. It does not trigger an illegal address reset when accesses to reserved locations
are attempted.
Table 3-9 shows the global address ranges of all members of the S12VR-family.
Table 3-9. Global Address Ranges
S12VR48
S12VR64
0x000000x003FF
Register Space
0x004000x005FF
0.5k
EEPROM
0x008000x037FF
Unimplemented
0x038000x03FFF
RAM
2k
0x040000x07FFF
(NVMRES
=1)
Internal NVM Resources
0x040000x07FFF
(NVMRES
=0)
Unimplemented
0x080000x30000
0x300000x33FFF
0x340000x3FFFF
3.4.4
Reserved
Flash
48k
64k
Prioritization of Memory Accesses
On S12VR devices, the CPU and the BDM are not able to access the memory in parallel. An arbitration
occurs whenever both modules attempt a memory access at the same time. CPU accesses are handled with
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
114
Freescale Semiconductor
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
higher priority than BDM accesses unless the BDM module has been stalled for more then 128 bus cycles.
In this case the pending BDM access will be processed immediately.
3.4.5
Interrupts
The S12GMMC does not generate any interrupts.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
115
S12G Memory Map Controller (S12GMMCV1)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
116
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 4
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit
(S12CPMU_UHV)
Revision History
Rev. No.
(Item No)
V01.00
V02.00
V02.01
V02.02
4.1
Date
(Submitted By)
Sections Affected
22.Dec 10
08. Apr 11
21.June 12
30.July 12
Substantial Change(s)
Initial Version.
4.1.2.3/4-121
4.1.2.4/4-122
4.1.3/4-123
4.3.1/4-127
4.3.2.6/4-134
4.3.2.18/4-153
4.4.3/4-164
4.4.4/4-165
4.5.2.2/4-170
4.7.2/4-174
Table 4-5
Table 4-14
Table 4-31
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-9
Added bit CSAD (COP in Stop Mode ACLK Disable) in register
CPMUCLKS. This bit allows halting the COP in Stop Mode (Full or
Pseudo) when ACLK is the COP clock source. Description of Stop
Modes, Block Diagram, CPMUCLKS register and COP Watchdog
feature are updated.
Improved signal descriptions of VSUP, VDDA/VSSA, VDDX/VSSX
concerning recommended decoupling capacitors.
Figure “Startup of clock system after Reset”: Corrected PLL clock
frequencies to 12.5Mhz and 25MHz (instead of 16MHz and
32Mhz before)
Introduction
This specification describes the function of the Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit
(S12CPMU_UHV).
• The Pierce oscillator (XOSCLCP) provides a robust, low-noise and low-power external clock
source. It is designed for optimal start-up margin with typical crystal oscillators.
• The Voltage regulator (VREGAUTO) operates from the range 6V to 18V. It provides all the
required chip internal voltages and voltage monitors.
• The Phase Locked Loop (PLL) provides a highly accurate frequency multiplier with internal filter.
• The Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) provides a 1MHz internal clock.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
117
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.1.1
Features
The Pierce Oscillator (XOSCLCP) contains circuitry to dynamically control current gain in the output
amplitude. This ensures a signal with low harmonic distortion, low power and good noise immunity.
• Supports crystals or resonators from 4MHz to 16MHz.
• High noise immunity due to input hysteresis and spike filtering.
• Low RF emissions with peak-to-peak swing limited dynamically
• Transconductance (gm) sized for optimum start-up margin for typical crystals
• Dynamic gain control eliminates the need for external current limiting resistor
• Integrated resistor eliminates the need for external bias resistor
• Low power consumption: Operates from internal 1.8V (nominal) supply, Amplitude control limits
power
The Voltage Regulator (VREGAUTO) has the following features:
• Input voltage range from 6 to 18V
• Low-voltage detect (LVD) with low-voltage interrupt (LVI)
• Power-on reset (POR)
• Low-voltage reset (LVR)
• On Chip Temperature Sensor and Bandgap Voltage measurement via internal ATD channel.
• Voltage Regulator providing Full Performance Mode (FPM) and Reduced Performance Mode
(RPM)
The Phase Locked Loop (PLL) has the following features:
• highly accurate and phase locked frequency multiplier
• Configurable internal filter for best stability and lock time
• Frequency modulation for defined jitter and reduced emission
• Automatic frequency lock detector
• Interrupt request on entry or exit from locked condition
• Reference clock either external (crystal) or internal square wave (1MHz IRC1M) based.
• PLL stability is sufficient for LIN communication in slave mode, even if using IRC1M as reference
clock
The Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) has the following features:
• Frequency trimming
(A factory trim value for 1MHz is loaded from Flash Memory into the IRCTRIM register after
reset, which can be overwritten by application if required)
• Temperature Coefficient (TC) trimming.
(A factory trim value is loaded from Flash Memory into the IRCTRIM register to turn off TC
trimming after reset. Application can trim the TC if required by overwriting the IRCTRIM
register).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
118
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Other features of the S12CPMU_UHV include
• Clock monitor to detect loss of crystal
• Autonomous periodical interrupt (API)
• Bus Clock Generator
— Clock switch to select either PLLCLK or external crystal/resonator based Bus Clock
— PLLCLK divider to adjust system speed
• System Reset generation from the following possible sources:
— Power-on reset (POR)
— Low-voltage reset (LVR)
— Illegal address access
— COP time-out
— Loss of oscillation (clock monitor fail)
— External pin RESET
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
119
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.1.2
Modes of Operation
This subsection lists and briefly describes all operating modes supported by the S12CPMU_UHV.
4.1.2.1
Run Mode
The voltage regulator is in Full Performance Mode (FPM).
NOTE
The voltage regulator is active, providing the nominal supply voltages with
full current sourcing capability (see also Appendix for VREG electrical
parameters). The features ACLK clock source, Low Voltage Interrupt (LVI),
Low Voltage Reset (LVR) and Power-On Reset (POR) are available.
The Phase Locked Loop (PLL) is on.
The Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) is on.
The API is available.
•
•
•
PLL Engaged Internal (PEI)
— This is the default mode after System Reset and Power-On Reset.
— The Bus Clock is based on the PLLCLK.
— After reset the PLL is configured for 50MHz VCOCLK operation
Post divider is 0x03, so PLLCLK is VCOCLK divided by 4, that is 12.5MHz and Bus Clock is
6.25MHz.
The PLL can be re-configured for other bus frequencies.
— The reference clock for the PLL (REFCLK) is based on internal reference clock IRC1M
PLL Engaged External (PEE)
— The Bus Clock is based on the PLLCLK.
— This mode can be entered from default mode PEI by performing the following steps:
– Configure the PLL for desired bus frequency.
– Program the reference divider (REFDIV[3:0] bits) to divide down oscillator frequency if
necessary.
– Enable the external oscillator (OSCE bit)
– Wait for oscillator to start up (UPOSC=1) and PLL to lock (LOCK=1)
PLL Bypassed External (PBE)
— The Bus Clock is based on the Oscillator Clock (OSCCLK).
— The PLLCLK is always on to qualify the external oscillator clock. Therefore it is necessary to
make sure a valid PLL configuration is used for the selected oscillator frequency.
— This mode can be entered from default mode PEI by performing the following steps:
– Make sure the PLL configuration is valid for the selected oscillator frequency.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
120
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
– Enable the external oscillator (OSCE bit)
– Wait for oscillator to start up (UPOSC=1)
– Select the Oscillator Clock (OSCCLK) as Bus Clock (PLLSEL=0).
— The PLLCLK is on and used to qualify the external oscillator clock.
4.1.2.2
Wait Mode
For S12CPMU_UHV Wait Mode is the same as Run Mode.
4.1.2.3
Stop Mode
This mode is entered by executing the CPU STOP instruction.
The voltage regulator is in Reduced Performance Mode (RPM).
NOTE
The voltage regulator output voltage may degrade to a lower value than in
Full Performance Mode (FPM), additionally the current sourcing capability
is substantially reduced (see also Appendix for VREG electrical
parameters). Only clock source ACLK is available and the Power On Reset
(POR) circuitry is functional. The Low Voltage Interrupt (LVI) and Low
Voltage Reset (LVR) are disabled.
The API is available.
The Phase Locked Loop (PLL) is off.
The Internal Reference Clock (IRC1M) is off.
Core Clock, Bus Clock and BDM Clock are stopped.
Depending on the setting of the PSTP and the OSCE bit, Stop Mode can be differentiated between Full
Stop Mode (PSTP = 0 or OSCE=0) and Pseudo Stop Mode (PSTP = 1 and OSCE=1). In addition, the
behavior of the COP in each mode will change based on the clocking method selected by
COPOSCSEL[1:0].
• Full Stop Mode (PSTP = 0 or OSCE=0)
External oscillator (XOSCLCP) is disabled.
— If COPOSCSEL1=0:
The COP and RTI counters halt during Full Stop Mode.
After wake-up from Full Stop Mode the Core Clock and Bus Clock are running on PLLCLK
(PLLSEL=1). COP and RTI are running on IRCCLK (COPOSCSEL0=0, RTIOSCSEL=0).
— If COPOSCSEL1=1:
The clock for the COP is derived from ACLK (trimmable internal RC-Oscillator clock). During
Full Stop Mode the ACLK for the COP can be stopped (COP static) or running (COP active)
depending on the setting of bit CSAD. When bit CSAD is set the ACLK clock source for the
COP is stopped during Full Stop Mode and COP continues to operate after exit from Full Stop
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
121
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
•
Mode. For this COP configuration (ACLK clock source, CSAD set) a latency time occurs when
entering or exiting (Full, Pseudo) Stop Mode. When bit CSAD is clear the ACLK clock source
is on for the COP during Full Stop Mode and COP is operating.
During Full Stop Mode the RTI counter halts.
After wake-up from Full Stop Mode the Core Clock and Bus Clock are running on PLLCLK
(PLLSEL=1). The COP runs on ACLK and RTI is running on IRCCLK (COPOSCSEL0=0,
RTIOSCSEL=0).
Pseudo Stop Mode (PSTP = 1 and OSCE=1)
External oscillator (XOSCLCP) continues to run.
— If COPOSCSEL1=0:
If the respective enable bits are set (PCE=1 and PRE=1) the COP and RTI will continue to run
with a clock derived from the oscillator clock.
The clock configuration bits PLLSEL, COPOSCSEL0, RTIOSCSEL are unchanged.
— If COPOSCSEL1=1:
If the respective enable bit for the RTI is set (PRE=1) the RTI will continue to run with a clock
derived from the oscillator clock.
The clock for the COP is derived from ACLK (trimmable internal RC-Oscillator clock). During
Pseudo Stop Mode the ACLK for the COP can be stopped (COP static) or running (COP active)
depending on the setting of bit CSAD. When bit CSAD is set the ACLK for the COP is stopped
during Pseudo Stop Mode and COP continues to operate after exit from Pseudo Stop Mode.
For this COP configuration (ACLK clock source, CSAD set) a latency time occurs when
entering or exiting (Pseudo, Full) Stop Mode. When bit CSAD is clear the ACLK clock source
is on for the COP during Pseudo Stop Mode and COP is operating.
The clock configuration bits PLLSEL, COPOSCSEL0, RTIOSCSEL are unchanged.
NOTE
When starting up the external oscillator (either by programming OSCE bit
to 1 or on exit from Full Stop Mode with OSCE bit already 1) the software
must wait for a minimum time equivalent to the startup-time of the external
oscillator tUPOSC before entering Pseudo Stop Mode.
4.1.2.4
Freeze Mode (BDM active)
For S12CPMU_UHV Freeze Mode is the same as Run Mode except for RTI and COP which can be
stopped in Active BDM Mode with the RSBCK bit in the CPMUCOP register. Additionally the COP can
be forced to the maximum time-out period in Active BDM Mode. For details please see also the RSBCK
and CR[2:0] bit description field of Table 4-12 in Section 4.3.2.9, “S12CPMU_UHV COP Control
Register (CPMUCOP)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
122
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.1.3
S12CPMU_UHV Block Diagram
Illegal Address Access
VSUP
vsup
monitor
VDD, VDDF
(core supplies)
Low Voltage Detect VDDA
Low Voltage Detect VDDX
ADC
VDDA
VSSA
VDDX
VSSX
VSS
ILAF
Clock
Monitor
OSCCLK_LCP
Loop
Controlled
REFDIV[3:0]
IRCTRIM[9:0]
Pierce
XTAL Oscillator
(XOSCLCP)
Internal
Reference
4MHz-16MHz
Reference
Divider
Clock
(IRC1M)
PSTP
S12CPMU_UHV
COP time-out
Power-On Reset
System Reset
Oscillator status Interrupt
OSCIE
Reset
Generator
UPOSC
RESET
LVIE Low Voltage Interrupt
LVDS
Voltage
Regulator
LVRF
6V to 18V
Power-On Detect
(VREGAUTO)
PORF
monitor fail
MMC
UPOSC=0 sets PLLSEL bit
OSCCLK
EXTAL
PLLSEL
POSTDIV[4:0]
ECLK2X
(Core Clock)
Post
Divider
1,2,.32
divide
by 4
OSCE
PLLCLK
ECLK
divide
by 2
(Bus Clock)
VCOFRQ[1:0]
Lock
detect
Phase
locked
Loop with
internal
Filter (PLL)
REFCLK
FBCLK
HTDS
LOCK
LOCKIE
Bus Clock
ACLK
Divide by
2*(SYNDIV+1)
CSAD
divide
by 2
IRCCLK
COPOSCSEL1
SYNDIV[5:0]
COPCLK COP
Watchdog
RC
Osc.
UPOSC=0 clears
APICLK
APIE
RTIE
COP time-out
to Reset
Generator IRCCLK
CPMUCOP
PLL Lock Interrupt
ACLK
RTICLK
PCE
HT Interrupt
Autonomous API_EXTCLK
Periodic
Interrupt (API)
divide
by 2
OSCCLK
COPOSCSEL0
HTIE
High
Temperature
Sense
REFFRQ[1:0]
UPOSC
BDM Clock
divide
by 8
VCOCLK
OSCCLK
RTIOSCSEL
API Interrupt
RTI Interrupt
Real Time
Interrupt (RTI)
PRE
CPMURTI
Figure 4-1. Block diagram of S12CPMU_UHV
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
123
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Figure 4-2 shows a block diagram of the XOSCLCP.
OSCCLK_LCP
monitor fail
Clock
Monitor
Peak
Detector
Gain Control
VDD = 1.8 V
VSS
Rf
Quartz Crystals
EXTAL
or
Ceramic Resonators
XTAL
C1
C2
VSS
VSS
Figure 4-2. XOSCLCP Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
124
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.2
Signal Description
This section lists and describes the signals that connect off chip as well as internal supply nodes and special
signals.
4.2.1
RESET
Pin RESET is an active-low bidirectional pin. As an input it initializes the MCU asynchronously to a
known start-up state. As an open-drain output it indicates that an MCU-internal reset has been triggered.
4.2.2
EXTAL and XTAL
These pins provide the interface for a crystal to control the internal clock generator circuitry. EXTAL is
the input to the crystal oscillator amplifier. XTAL is the output of the crystal oscillator amplifier. If
XOSCLCP is enabled, the MCU internal OSCCLK_LCP is derived from the EXTAL input frequency. If
OSCE=0, the EXTAL pin is pulled down by an internal resistor of approximately 200 kΩ and the XTAL
pin is pulled down by an internal resistor of approximately 700 kΩ.
NOTE
Freescale recommends an evaluation of the application board and chosen
resonator or crystal by the resonator or crystal supplier.
The loop controlled circuit (XOSCLCP) is not suited for overtone
resonators and crystals.
4.2.3
VSUP — Regulator Power Input Pin
Pin VSUP is the power input of VREGAUTO. All currents sourced into the regulator loads flow through
this pin.
An appropriate reverse battery protection network consisting of a diode and capacitors is recommended.
4.2.4
VDDA, VSSA — Regulator Reference Supply Pins
Pins VDDA and VSSA,are used to supply the analog parts of the regulator.
Internal precision reference circuits are supplied from these signals.
A local decoupling capacitor between VDDA and VSSA according to the electrical specification is
required. Additionally a bigger tank capacitor is required on the 5 Volt supply network as well to ensure
Voltage regulator stability.
VDDA has to be connected externally to VDDX.
4.2.5
VDDX, VSSX— Pad Supply Pins
This supply domain is monitored by the Low Voltage Reset circuit.
A local decoupling capacitor between VDDX and VSSX according to the electrical specification is
required.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
125
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
VDDX has to be connected externally to VDDA.
4.2.6
VSS— Ground Pin
VSS is the ground pin for the core logic. On the board VSSX, VSSA and VSS need to be connected
together to the application ground.
4.2.7
API_EXTCLK — API external clock output pin
This pin provides the signal selected via APIES and is enabled with APIEA bit. See the device
specification if this clock output is available on this device and to which pin it might be connects.
4.2.8
VDD— Internal Regulator Output Supply (Core Logic)
Node VDD is a device internal supply output of the voltage regulator that provides the power supply for
the core logic.
This supply domain is monitored by the Low Voltage Reset circuit.
4.2.9
VDDF— Internal Regulator Output Supply (NVM Logic)
Node VDDF is a device internal supply output of the voltage regulator that provides the power supply for
the NVM logic.
This supply domain is monitored by the Low Voltage Reset circuit.
4.2.10
TEMPSENSE — Internal Temperature Sensor Output Voltage
Depending on the VSEL setting either the voltage level generated by the temperature sensor or the VREG
bandgap voltage is driven to a special channel input of the ATD Converter. See device level specification
for connectivity of ATD special channels.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
126
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3
Memory Map and Registers
This section provides a detailed description of all registers accessible in the S12CPMU_UHV.
4.3.1
Module Memory Map
The S12CPMU_UHV registers are shown in Figure 4-3.
Addres
s
Name
0x0034
CPMU
SYNR
0x0035
CPMU
REFDIV
W
0x0036
CPMU
POSTDIV
W
0x0037
CPMUFLG
0x0038
CPMUINT
0x0039
CPMUCLKS
0x003A
CPMUPLL
0x003B
CPMURTI
0x003C
CPMUCOP
0x003D
RESERVED
CPMUTEST0
W
0x003E
RESERVED
CPMUTEST1
W
0x003F
CPMU
ARMCOP
0x02F0
CPMU
HTCTL
W
0x02F1
CPMU
LVCTL
W
0x02F2
CPMU
APICTL
W
Bit 7
R
W
R
R
6
5
4
VCOFRQ[1:0]
REFFRQ[1:0]
0
0
0
0
RTIF
PORF
LVRF
0
0
PLLSEL
PSTP
CSAD
COP
OSCSEL1
0
0
FM1
FM0
RTDEC
RTR6
RTR5
WCOP
RSBCK
0
0
0
0
R
W
R
2
1
Bit 0
SYNDIV[5:0]
0
R
3
REFDIV[3:0]
POSTDIV[4:0]
LOCKIF
LOCK
ILAF
OSCIF
UPOSC
0
0
PRE
PCE
RTI
OSCSEL
COP
OSCSEL0
0
0
0
0
RTR4
RTR3
RTR2
RTR1
RTR0
0
0
CR2
CR1
CR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
R
0
0
HTIE
HTIF
0
0
0
LVIE
LVIF
0
0
APIE
APIF
W
R
W
R
RTIE
W
R
W
R
W
R
R
R
R
APICLK
LOCKIE
WRTMASK
VSEL
0
HTE
HTDS
0
0
LVDS
APIES
APIEA
APIFE
OSCIE
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-3. CPMU Register Summary
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
127
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Addres
s
Name
0x02F3 CPMUACLKTR
R
W
R
0x02F4
CPMUAPIRH
0x02F5
CPMUAPIRL
0x02F6
RESERVED
CPMUTEST3
0x02F7
CPMUHTTR
0x02F8
CPMU
IRCTRIMH
W
0x02F9
CPMU
IRCTRIML
W
0x02FA
CPMUOSC
0x02FB
CPMUPROT
0x02FC
RESERVED
CPMUTEST2
W
R
W
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
ACLKTR5
ACLKTR4
ACLKTR3
APIR15
APIR14
APIR13
APIR12
APIR11
APIR7
APIR6
APIR5
APIR4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
APIR10
APIR9
APIR8
APIR3
APIR2
APIR1
APIR0
0
0
0
0
HTTR3
HTTR2
HTTR1
HTTR0
ACLKTR2 ACLKTR1 ACLKTR0
W
R
W
HTOE
R
R
R
W
R
0
TCTRIM[4:0]
IRCTRIM[9:8]
IRCTRIM[7:0]
0
OSCE
Reserved
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
PROT
0
W
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-3. CPMU Register Summary
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
128
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section describes all the S12CPMU_UHV registers and their individual bits.
Address order is as listed in Figure 4-3
4.3.2.1
S12CPMU_UHV Synthesizer Register (CPMUSYNR)
The CPMUSYNR register controls the multiplication factor of the PLL and selects the VCO frequency
range.
0x0034
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
R
VCOFRQ[1:0]
SYNDIV[5:0]
W
Reset
0
1
0
1
1
Figure 4-4. S12CPMU_UHV Synthesizer Register (CPMUSYNR)
Read: Anytime
Write: If PROT=0 (CPMUPROT register) and PLLSEL=1 (CPMUCLKS register), then write anytime.
Else write has no effect.
NOTE
Writing to this register clears the LOCK and UPOSC status bits.
If PLL has locked (LOCK=1)
f VCO = 2 × f REF × ( SYNDIV + 1 )
NOTE
fVCO must be within the specified VCO frequency lock range. Bus
frequency fbus must not exceed the specified maximum.
The VCOFRQ[1:0] bits are used to configure the VCO gain for optimal stability and lock time. For correct
PLL operation the VCOFRQ[1:0] bits have to be selected according to the actual target VCOCLK
frequency as shown in Table 4-1. Setting the VCOFRQ[1:0] bits incorrectly can result in a non functional
PLL (no locking and/or insufficient stability).
Table 4-1. VCO Clock Frequency Selection
VCOCLK Frequency Ranges
VCOFRQ[1:0]
32MHz <= fVCO<= 48MHz
00
48MHz < fVCO<= 50MHz
01
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
129
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.2
S12CPMU_UHV Reference Divider Register (CPMUREFDIV)
The CPMUREFDIV register provides a finer granularity for the PLL multiplier steps when using the
external oscillator as reference.
0x0035
7
6
R
5
4
0
0
3
2
REFFRQ[1:0]
1
0
1
1
REFDIV[3:0]
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
1
1
Figure 4-5. S12CPMU_UHV Reference Divider Register (CPMUREFDIV)
Read: Anytime
Write: If PROT=0 (CPMUPROT register) and PLLSEL=1 (CPMUCLKS register), then write anytime.
Else write has no effect.
NOTE
Write to this register clears the LOCK and UPOSC status bits.
If XOSCLCP is enabled (OSCE=1)
f OSC
f REF = -----------------------------------( REFDIV + 1 )
If XOSCLCP is disabled (OSCE=0)
f REF = f IRC1M
The REFFRQ[1:0] bits are used to configure the internal PLL filter for optimal stability and lock time. For
correct PLL operation the REFFRQ[1:0] bits have to be selected according to the actual REFCLK
frequency as shown in Table 4-2.
If IRC1M is selected as REFCLK (OSCE=0) the PLL filter is fixed configured for the 1MHz <= fREF <=
2MHz range. The bits can still be written but will have no effect on the PLL filter configuration.
For OSCE=1, setting the REFFRQ[1:0] bits incorrectly can result in a non functional PLL (no locking
and/or insufficient stability).
Table 4-2. Reference Clock Frequency Selection if OSC_LCP is enabled
REFCLK Frequency Ranges
(OSCE=1)
REFFRQ[1:0]
1MHz <= fREF <= 2MHz
00
2MHz < fREF <= 6MHz
01
6MHz < fREF <= 12MHz
10
fREF >12MHz
11
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
130
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.3
S12CPMU_UHV Post Divider Register (CPMUPOSTDIV)
The POSTDIV register controls the frequency ratio between the VCOCLK and the PLLCLK.
0x0036
R
7
6
5
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
2
1
0
ILAF
OSCIF
Note 3
0
POSTDIV[4:0]
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-6. S12CPMU_UHV Post Divider Register (CPMUPOSTDIV)
Read: Anytime
Write: If PLLSEL=1 write anytime, else write has no effect
If PLL is locked (LOCK=1)
f VCO
f PLL = ----------------------------------------( POSTDIV + 1 )
If PLL is not locked (LOCK=0)
f VCO
f PLL = --------------4
If PLL is selected (PLLSEL=1)
f PLL
f bus = ------------2
4.3.2.4
S12CPMU_UHV Flags Register (CPMUFLG)
This register provides S12CPMU_UHV status bits and flags.
0x0037
7
6
5
4
RTIF
PORF
LVRF
LOCKIF
0
Note 1
Note 2
0
R
3
LOCK
UPOSC
W
Reset
0
0
1. PORF is set to 1 when a power on reset occurs. Unaffected by System Reset.
2. LVRF is set to 1 when a low voltage reset occurs. Unaffected by System Reset. Set by power on reset.
3. ILAF is set to 1 when an illegal address reset occurs. Unaffected by System Reset. Cleared by power on reset.
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-7. S12CPMU_UHV Flags Register (CPMUFLG)
Read: Anytime
Write: Refer to each bit for individual write conditions
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
131
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-3. CPMUFLG Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
RTIF
Real Time Interrupt Flag — RTIF is set to 1 at the end of the RTI period. This flag can only be cleared by writing
a 1. Writing a 0 has no effect. If enabled (RTIE=1), RTIF causes an interrupt request.
0 RTI time-out has not yet occurred.
1 RTI time-out has occurred.
6
PORF
Power on Reset Flag — PORF is set to 1 when a power on reset occurs. This flag can only be cleared by writing
a 1. Writing a 0 has no effect.
0 Power on reset has not occurred.
1 Power on reset has occurred.
5
LVRF
Low Voltage Reset Flag — LVRF is set to 1 when a low voltage reset occurs. This flag can only be cleared by
writing a 1. Writing a 0 has no effect.
0 Low voltage reset has not occurred.
1 Low voltage reset has occurred.
4
LOCKIF
PLL Lock Interrupt Flag — LOCKIF is set to 1 when LOCK status bit changes. This flag can only be cleared by
writing a 1. Writing a 0 has no effect.If enabled (LOCKIE=1), LOCKIF causes an interrupt request.
0 No change in LOCK bit.
1 LOCK bit has changed.
3
LOCK
Lock Status Bit — LOCK reflects the current state of PLL lock condition. Writes have no effect.While PLL is
unlocked (LOCK=0) fPLL is fVCO / 4 to protect the system from high core clock frequencies during the PLL
stabilization time tlock.
0 VCOCLK is not within the desired tolerance of the target frequency.
fPLL = fVCO/4.
1 VCOCLK is within the desired tolerance of the target frequency.
fPLL = fVCO/(POSTDIV+1).
2
ILAF
Illegal Address Reset Flag — ILAF is set to 1 when an illegal address reset occurs.Refer to MMC chapter for
details.This flag can only be cleared by writing a 1. Writing a 0 has no effect.
0 Illegal address reset has not occurred.
1 Illegal address reset has occurred.
1
OSCIF
Oscillator Interrupt Flag — OSCIF is set to 1 when UPOSC status bit changes. This flag can only be cleared
by writing a 1. Writing a 0 has no effect.If enabled (OSCIE=1), OSCIF causes an interrupt request.
0 No change in UPOSC bit.
1 UPOSC bit has changed.
0
UPOSC
Oscillator Status Bit — UPOSC reflects the status of the oscillator. Writes have no effect. Entering Full Stop
Mode UPOSC is cleared.
0 The oscillator is off or oscillation is not qualified by the PLL.
1 The oscillator is qualified by the PLL.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
132
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.5
S12CPMU_UHV Interrupt Enable Register (CPMUINT)
This register enables S12CPMU_UHV interrupt requests.
0x0038
7
R
6
5
0
0
RTIE
4
3
2
0
0
LOCKIE
1
0
0
OSCIE
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-8. S12CPMU_UHV Interrupt Enable Register (CPMUINT)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 4-4. CPMUINT Field Descriptions
Field
7
RTIE
Description
Real Time Interrupt Enable Bit
0 Interrupt requests from RTI are disabled.
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever RTIF is set.
4
LOCKIE
PLL Lock Interrupt Enable Bit
0 PLL LOCK interrupt requests are disabled.
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever LOCKIF is set.
1
OSCIE
Oscillator Corrupt Interrupt Enable Bit
0 Oscillator Corrupt interrupt requests are disabled.
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever OSCIF is set.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
133
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.6
S12CPMU_UHV Clock Select Register (CPMUCLKS)
This register controls S12CPMU_UHV clock selection.
0x0039
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PLLSEL
PSTP
CSAD
COP
OSCSEL1
PRE
PCE
RTI
OSCSEL
COP
OSCSEL0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-9. S12CPMU_UHV Clock Select Register (CPMUCLKS)
Read: Anytime
Write:
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Only possible if PROT=0 (CPMUPROT register) in all MCU Modes (Normal and Special Mode).
All bits in Special Mode (if PROT=0).
PLLSEL, PSTP, PRE, PCE, RTIOSCSEL: In Normal Mode (if PROT=0).
CSAD: In Normal Mode (if PROT=0) until CPMUCOP write once has taken place.
COPOSCSEL0: In Normal Mode (if PROT=0) until CPMUCOP write once has taken place.
If COPOSCSEL0 was cleared by UPOSC=0 (entering Full Stop Mode with COPOSCSEL0=1 or
insufficient OSCCLK quality), then COPOSCSEL0 can be set once again.
10. COPOSCSEL1: In Normal Mode (if PROT=0) until CPMUCOP write once has taken place.
COPOSCSEL1 will not be cleared by UPOSC=0 (entering Full Stop Mode with
COPOSCSEL1=1 or insufficient OSCCLK quality if OSCCLK is used as clock source for
other clock domains: for instance core clock etc.).
NOTE
After writing CPMUCLKS register, it is strongly recommended to read
back CPMUCLKS register to make sure that write of PLLSEL,
RTIOSCSEL and COPOSCSEL was successful.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
134
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-5. CPMUCLKS Descriptions
Field
7
PLLSEL
Description
PLL Select Bit
This bit selects the PLLCLK as source of the System Clocks (Core Clock and Bus Clock).
PLLSEL can only be set to 0, if UPOSC=1.
UPOSC= 0 sets the PLLSEL bit.
Entering Full Stop Mode sets the PLLSEL bit.
0 System clocks are derived from OSCCLK if oscillator is up (UPOSC=1, fbus = fosc / 2).
1 System clocks are derived from PLLCLK, fbus = fPLL / 2.
6
PSTP
Pseudo Stop Bit
This bit controls the functionality of the oscillator during Stop Mode.
0 Oscillator is disabled in Stop Mode (Full Stop Mode).
1 Oscillator continues to run in Stop Mode (Pseudo Stop Mode), option to run RTI and COP.
Note: Pseudo Stop Mode allows for faster STOP recovery and reduces the mechanical stress and aging of the
resonator in case of frequent STOP conditions at the expense of a slightly increased power consumption.
Note: When starting up the external oscillator (either by programming OSCE bit to 1 or on exit from Full Stop
Mode with OSCE bit already 1) the software must wait for a minimum time equivalent to the startup-time
of the external oscillator tUPOSC before entering Pseudo Stop Mode.
4
CSAD
COP in Stop Mode ACLK Disable — This bit disables the ACLK for the COP in Stop Mode. Hence the COP is
static while in Stop Mode and continues to operate after exit from Stop Mode.
Due to clock domain crossing synchronization there is a latency time to enter and exit Stop Mode if COP clock
source is ACLK and this clock is stopped in Stop Mode. This maximum latency time is 4 ACLK cycles which must
be added to the Stop Mode recovery time tSTP_REC from exit of current Stop Mode to entry of next Stop Mode.
This latency time occurs no matter which Stop Mode (Full, Pseudo) is currently exited or entered next. After exit
from Stop Mode (Pseudo, Full) for 2 ACLK cycles no Stop Mode request (STOP instruction) should be generated
to make sure the COP counter increments at each Stop Mode exit.
This bit does not influence the ACLK for the API.
0 COP running in Stop Mode (ACLK for COP enabled in Stop Mode).
1 COP stopped in Stop Mode (ACLK for COP disabled in Stop Mode)
4
COP
OSCSEL1
COP Clock Select 1 — COPOSCSEL0 and COPOSCSEL1 combined determine the clock source to the COP
(see also Table 4-6).
If COPOSCSEL1 = 1, COPOSCSEL0 has no effect regarding clock select and changing the COPOSCSEL0 bit
does not re-start the COP time-out period.
COPOSCSEL1 selects the clock source to the COP to be either ACLK (derived from trimmable internal
RC-Oscillator) or clock selected via COPOSCSEL0 (IRCCLK or OSCCLK).
Changing the COPOSCSEL1 bit re-starts the COP time-out period.
COPOSCSEL1 can be set independent from value of UPOSC.
UPOSC= 0 does not clear the COPOSCSEL1 bit.
0 COP clock source defined by COPOSCSEL0
1 COP clock source is ACLK derived from a trimmable internal RC-Oscillator
3
PRE
RTI Enable During Pseudo Stop Bit — PRE enables the RTI during Pseudo Stop Mode.
0 RTI stops running during Pseudo Stop Mode.
1 RTI continues running during Pseudo Stop Mode if RTIOSCSEL=1.
Note: If PRE=0 or RTIOSCSEL=0 then the RTI will go static while Stop Mode is active. The RTI counter will not
be reset.
2
PCE
COP Enable During Pseudo Stop Bit — PCE enables the COP during Pseudo Stop Mode.
0 COP stops running during Pseudo Stop Mode
1 COP continues running during Pseudo Stop Mode if COPOSCSEL=1
Note: If PCE=0 or COPOSCSEL=0 then the COP will go static while Stop Mode is active. The COP counter will
not be reset.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
135
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-5. CPMUCLKS Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
1
RTI Clock Select— RTIOSCSEL selects the clock source to the RTI. Either IRCCLK or OSCCLK. Changing the
RTIOSCSEL RTIOSCSEL bit re-starts the RTI time-out period.
RTIOSCSEL can only be set to 1, if UPOSC=1.
UPOSC= 0 clears the RTIOSCSEL bit.
0 RTI clock source is IRCCLK.
1 RTI clock source is OSCCLK.
0
COP
OSCSEL0
COP Clock Select 0 — COPOSCSEL0 and COPOSCSEL1 combined determine the clock source to the COP
(see also Table 4-6)
If COPOSCSEL1 = 1, COPOSCSEL0 has no effect regarding clock select and changing the COPOSCSEL0 bit
does not re-start the COP time-out period.
When COPOSCSEL1=0,COPOSCSEL0 selects the clock source to the COP to be either IRCCLK or OSCCLK.
Changing the COPOSCSEL0 bit re-starts the COP time-out period.
COPOSCSEL0 can only be set to 1, if UPOSC=1.
UPOSC= 0 clears the COPOSCSEL0 bit.
0 COP clock source is IRCCLK.
1 COP clock source is OSCCLK
Table 4-6. COPOSCSEL1, COPOSCSEL0 clock source select description
COPOSCSEL1
COPOSCSEL0
COP clock source
0
0
IRCCLK
0
1
OSCCLK
1
x
ACLK
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
136
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.7
S12CPMU_UHV PLL Control Register (CPMUPLL)
This register controls the PLL functionality.
0x003A
R
7
6
0
0
5
4
FM1
FM0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
Figure 4-10. S12CPMU_UHV PLL Control Register (CPMUPLL)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime if PROT=0 (CPMUPROT register) and PLLSEL=1 (CPMUCLKS register). Else write has
no effect.
NOTE
Write to this register clears the LOCK and UPOSC status bits.
NOTE
Care should be taken to ensure that the bus frequency does not exceed the
specified maximum when frequency modulation is enabled.
Table 4-7. CPMUPLL Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5, 4
FM1, FM0
PLL Frequency Modulation Enable Bits — FM1 and FM0 enable frequency modulation on the VCOCLK. This
is to reduce noise emission. The modulation frequency is fref divided by 16. See Table 4-8 for coding.
Table 4-8. FM Amplitude selection
FM1
FM0
FM Amplitude /
fVCO Variation
0
0
FM off
0
1
±1%
1
0
±2%
1
1
±4%
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
137
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.8
S12CPMU_UHV RTI Control Register (CPMURTI)
This register selects the time-out period for the Real Time Interrupt.
The clock source for the RTI is either IRCCLK or OSCCLK depending on the setting of the RTIOSCSEL
bit. In Stop Mode with PSTP=1 (Pseudo Stop Mode) and RTIOSCSEL=1 the RTI continues to run, else
the RTI counter halts in Stop Mode.
0x003B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RTDEC
RTR6
RTR5
RTR4
RTR3
RTR2
RTR1
RTR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 4-11. S12CPMU_UHV RTI Control Register (CPMURTI)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
NOTE
A write to this register starts the RTI time-out period. A change of the
RTIOSCSEL bit (writing a different value or loosing UPOSC status)
re-starts the RTI time-out period.
Table 4-9. CPMURTI Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
RTDEC
Decimal or Binary Divider Select Bit — RTDEC selects decimal or binary based prescaler values.
0 Binary based divider value. See Table 4-10
1 Decimal based divider value. See Table 4-11
6–4
RTR[6:4]
Real Time Interrupt Prescale Rate Select Bits — These bits select the prescale rate for the RTI.See Table 4-10
and Table 4-11.
3–0
RTR[3:0]
Real Time Interrupt Modulus Counter Select Bits — These bits select the modulus counter target value to
provide additional granularity.Table 4-10 and Table 4-11 show all possible divide values selectable by the
CPMURTI register.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
138
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-10. RTI Frequency Divide Rates for RTDEC = 0
RTR[6:4] =
RTR[3:0]
1
000
(OFF)
001
(210)
010
(211)
011
(212)
100
(213)
101
(214)
110
(215)
111
(216)
0000 (÷1)
OFF1
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
0001 (÷2)
OFF
2x210
2x211
2x212
2x213
2x214
2x215
2x216
0010 (÷3)
OFF
3x210
3x211
3x212
3x213
3x214
3x215
3x216
0011 (÷4)
OFF
4x210
4x211
4x212
4x213
4x214
4x215
4x216
0100 (÷5)
OFF
5x210
5x211
5x212
5x213
5x214
5x215
5x216
0101 (÷6)
OFF
6x210
6x211
6x212
6x213
6x214
6x215
6x216
0110 (÷7)
OFF
7x210
7x211
7x212
7x213
7x214
7x215
7x216
0111 (÷8)
OFF
8x210
8x211
8x212
8x213
8x214
8x215
8x216
1000 (÷9)
OFF
9x210
9x211
9x212
9x213
9x214
9x215
9x216
1001 (÷10)
OFF
10x210
10x211
10x212
10x213
10x214
10x215
10x216
1010 (÷11)
OFF
11x210
11x211
11x212
11x213
11x214
11x215
11x216
1011 (÷12)
OFF
12x210
12x211
12x212
12x213
12x214
12x215
12x216
1100 (÷13)
OFF
13x210
13x211
13x212
13x213
13x214
13x215
13x216
1101 (÷14)
OFF
14x210
14x211
14x212
14x213
14x214
14x215
14x216
1110 (÷15)
OFF
15x210
15x211
15x212
15x213
15x214
15x215
15x216
1111 (÷16)
OFF
16x210
16x211
16x212
16x213
16x214
16x215
16x216
Denotes the default value out of reset.This value should be used to disable the RTI to ensure future backwards compatibility.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
139
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-11. RTI Frequency Divide Rates for RTDEC=1
RTR[6:4] =
RTR[3:0]
000
(1x103)
001
(2x103)
010
(5x103)
011
(10x103)
100
(20x103)
101
(50x103)
110
(100x103)
111
(200x103)
0000 (÷1)
1x103
2x103
5x103
10x103
20x103
50x103
100x103
200x103
0001 (÷2)
2x103
4x103
10x103
20x103
40x103
100x103
200x103
400x103
0010 (÷3)
3x103
6x103
15x103
30x103
60x103
150x103
300x103
600x103
0011 (÷4)
4x103
8x103
20x103
40x103
80x103
200x103
400x103
800x103
0100 (÷5)
5x103
10x103
25x103
50x103
100x103
250x103
500x103
1x106
0101 (÷6)
6x103
12x103
30x103
60x103
120x103
300x103
600x103
1.2x106
0110 (÷7)
7x103
14x103
35x103
70x103
140x103
350x103
700x103
1.4x106
0111 (÷8)
8x103
16x103
40x103
80x103
160x103
400x103
800x103
1.6x106
1000 (÷9)
9x103
18x103
45x103
90x103
180x103
450x103
900x103
1.8x106
1001 (÷10)
10 x103
20x103
50x103
100x103
200x103
500x103
1x106
2x106
1010 (÷11)
11 x103
22x103
55x103
110x103
220x103
550x103
1.1x106
2.2x106
1011 (÷12)
12x103
24x103
60x103
120x103
240x103
600x103
1.2x106
2.4x106
1100 (÷13)
13x103
26x103
65x103
130x103
260x103
650x103
1.3x106
2.6x106
1101 (÷14)
14x103
28x103
70x103
140x103
280x103
700x103
1.4x106
2.8x106
1110 (÷15)
15x103
30x103
75x103
150x103
300x103
750x103
1.5x106
3x106
1111 (÷16)
16x103
32x103
80x103
160x103
320x103
800x103
1.6x106
3.2x106
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
140
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.9
S12CPMU_UHV COP Control Register (CPMUCOP)
This register controls the COP (Computer Operating Properly) watchdog.
The clock source for the COP is either ACLK, IRCCLK or OSCCLK depending on the setting of the
COPOSCSEL0 and COPOSCSEL1 bit (see also Table 4-6).
In Stop Mode with PSTP=1 (Pseudo Stop Mode), COPOSCSEL0=1 and COPOSCEL1=0 and PCE=1 the
COP continues to run, else the COP counter halts in Stop Mode with COPOSCSEL1 =0.
In Full Stop Mode and Pseudo Stop Mode with COPOSCSEL1=1 the COP continues to run.
0x003C
7
6
WCOP
RSBCK
R
W
Reset
5
4
3
0
0
0
2
1
0
CR2
CR1
CR0
F
F
F
WRTMASK
F
0
0
0
0
After de-assert of System Reset the values are automatically loaded from the Flash memory. See Device specification for
details.
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-12. S12CPMU_UHV COP Control Register (CPMUCOP)
Read: Anytime
Write:
1. RSBCK: Anytime in Special Mode; write to “1” but not to “0” in Normal Mode
2. WCOP, CR2, CR1, CR0:
— Anytime in Special Mode, when WRTMASK is 0, otherwise it has no effect
— Write once in Normal Mode, when WRTMASK is 0, otherwise it has no effect.
– Writing CR[2:0] to “000” has no effect, but counts for the “write once” condition.
– Writing WCOP to “0” has no effect, but counts for the “write once” condition.
When a non-zero value is loaded from Flash to CR[2:0] the COP time-out period is started.
A change of the COPOSCSEL0 or COPOSCSEL1 bit (writing a different value) or loosing UPOSC status
while COPOSCSEL1 is clear and COPOSCSEL0 is set, re-starts the COP time-out period.
In Normal Mode the COP time-out period is restarted if either of these conditions is true:
1. Writing a non-zero value to CR[2:0] (anytime in special mode, once in normal mode) with
WRTMASK = 0.
2. Writing WCOP bit (anytime in Special Mode, once in Normal Mode) with WRTMASK = 0.
3. Changing RSBCK bit from “0” to “1”.
In Special Mode, any write access to CPMUCOP register restarts the COP time-out period.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
141
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-12. CPMUCOP Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
WCOP
Window COP Mode Bit — When set, a write to the CPMUARMCOP register must occur in the last 25% of the
selected period.A write during the first 75% of the selected period generates a COP reset.As long as all writes
occur during this window, $55 can be written as often as desired.Once $AA is written after the $55, the time-out
logic restarts and the user must wait until the next window before writing to CPMUARMCOP. Table 4-13 shows
the duration of this window for the seven available COP rates.
0 Normal COP operation
1 Window COP operation
6
RSBCK
COP and RTI Stop in Active BDM Mode Bit
0 Allows the COP and RTI to keep running in Active BDM mode.
1 Stops the COP and RTI counters whenever the part is in Active BDM mode.
5
Write Mask for WCOP and CR[2:0] Bit — This write-only bit serves as a mask for the WCOP and CR[2:0] bits
WRTMASK while writing the CPMUCOP register. It is intended for BDM writing the RSBCK without changing the content of
WCOP and CR[2:0].
0 Write of WCOP and CR[2:0] has an effect with this write of CPMUCOP
1 Write of WCOP and CR[2:0] has no effect with this write of CPMUCOP.
(Does not count for “write once”.)
2–0
CR[2:0]
COP Watchdog Timer Rate Select — These bits select the COP time-out rate (see Table 4-13 and Table 4-14).
Writing a nonzero value to CR[2:0] enables the COP counter and starts the time-out period.A COP counter
time-out causes a System Reset.This can be avoided by periodically (before time-out) initializing the COP
counter via the CPMUARMCOP register.
While all of the following four conditions are true the CR[2:0], WCOP bits are ignored and the COP operates at
highest time-out period (2 24 cycles) in normal COP mode (Window COP mode disabled):
1) COP is enabled (CR[2:0] is not 000)
2) BDM mode active
3) RSBCK = 0
4) Operation in Special Mode
Table 4-13. COP Watchdog Rates if COPOSCSEL1=0.
(default out of reset)
CR2
CR1
CR0
COPCLK
Cycles to time-out
(COPCLK is either IRCCLK or
OSCCLK depending on the
COPOSCSEL0 bit)
0
0
0
COP disabled
0
0
1
2 14
0
1
0
2 16
0
1
1
2 18
1
0
0
2 20
1
0
1
2 22
1
1
0
2 23
1
1
1
2 24
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
142
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-14. COP Watchdog Rates if COPOSCSEL1=1.
CR2
CR1
CR0
COPCLK
Cycles to time-out
(COPCLK is ACLK divided by 2)
0
0
0
COP disabled
0
0
1
27
0
1
0
29
0
1
1
2 11
1
0
0
2 13
1
0
1
2 15
1
1
0
2 16
1
1
1
2 17
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
143
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.10
Reserved Register CPMUTEST0
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in Special
Mode can alter the S12CPMU_UHV’s functionality.
0x003D
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-13. Reserved Register (CPMUTEST0)
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in Special Mode
4.3.2.11
Reserved Register CPMUTEST1
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in Special
Mode can alter the S12CPMU_UHV’s functionality.
0x003E
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-14. Reserved Register (CPMUTEST1)
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in Special Mode
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
144
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.12
S12CPMU_UHV COP Timer Arm/Reset Register (CPMUARMCOP)
This register is used to restart the COP time-out period.
0x003F
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W ARMCOP-Bit ARMCOP-Bit ARMCOP-Bit ARMCOP-Bit ARMCOP-Bit ARMCOP-Bit ARMCOP-Bit ARMCOP-Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 4-15. S12CPMU_UHV CPMUARMCOP Register
Read: Always reads $00
Write: Anytime
When the COP is disabled (CR[2:0] = “000”) writing to this register has no effect.
When the COP is enabled by setting CR[2:0] nonzero, the following applies:
Writing any value other than $55 or $AA causes a COP reset. To restart the COP time-out period
write $55 followed by a write of $AA. These writes do not need to occur back-to-back, but the
sequence ($55, $AA) must be completed prior to COP end of time-out period to avoid a COP reset.
Sequences of $55 writes are allowed. When the WCOP bit is set, $55 and $AA writes must be done
in the last 25% of the selected time-out period; writing any value in the first 75% of the selected
period will cause a COP reset.
4.3.2.13
High Temperature Control Register (CPMUHTCTL)
The CPMUHTCTL register configures the temperature sense features.
0x02F0
R
7
6
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
5
VSEL
0
4
0
0
3
HTE
2
HTDS
0
0
1
0
HTIE
HTIF
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-16. High Temperature Control Register (CPMUHTCTL)
Read: Anytime
Write: VSEL, HTE, HTIE and HTIF are write anytime, HTDS is read only
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
145
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Figure 4-17. Voltage Access Select
VBG
Ref
VSEL
TEMPSENSE
ATD
Channel
C
HTD
Table 4-15. CPMUHTCTL Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5
VSEL
Voltage Access Select Bit — If set, the bandgap reference voltage VBG can be accessed internally (i.e.
multiplexed to an internal Analog to Digital Converter channel). If not set, the die temperature proportional
voltage VHT of the temperature sensor can be accessed internally.See device level specification for connectivity.
For any of these access the HTE bit must be set.
0 An internal temperature proportional voltage VHT can be accessed internally.
1 Bandgap reference voltage VBG can be accessed internally.
3
HTE
High Temperature Sensor/Bandgap Voltage Enable Bit — This bit enables the high temperature sensor and
bandgap voltage amplifier.
0 The temperature sensor and bandgap voltage amplifier is disabled.
1 The temperature sensor and bandgap voltage amplifier is enabled.
2
HTDS
High Temperature Detect Status Bit — This read-only status bit reflects the temperature status.Writes have
no effect.
0 Junction Temperature is below level THTID or RPM.
1 Junction Temperature is above level THTIA and FPM.
1
HTIE
High Temperature Interrupt Enable Bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled.
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever HTIF is set.
0
HTIF
High Temperature Interrupt Flag — HTIF — High Temperature Interrupt Flag
HTIF is set to 1 when HTDS status bit changes.This flag can only be cleared by writing a 1.
Writing a 0 has no effect. If enabled (HTIE=1), HTIF causes an interrupt request.
0 No change in HTDS bit.
1 HTDS bit has changed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
146
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.14
Low Voltage Control Register (CPMULVCTL)
The CPMULVCTL register allows the configuration of the low-voltage detect features.
0x02F1
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
LVDS
0
0
0
0
0
U
W
Reset
1
0
LVIE
LVIF
0
U
The Reset state of LVDS and LVIF depends on the external supplied VDDA level
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-18. Low Voltage Control Register (CPMULVCTL)
Read: Anytime
Write: LVIE and LVIF are write anytime, LVDS is read only
Table 4-16. CPMULVCTL Field Descriptions
Field
Description
2
LVDS
Low-Voltage Detect Status Bit — This read-only status bit reflects the voltage level on VDDA.Writes have no
effect.
0 Input voltage VDDA is above level VLVID or RPM.
1 Input voltage VDDA is below level VLVIA and FPM.
1
LVIE
Low-Voltage Interrupt Enable Bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled.
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever LVIF is set.
0
LVIF
Low-Voltage Interrupt Flag — LVIF is set to 1 when LVDS status bit changes. This flag can only be cleared by
writing a 1.Writing a 0 has no effect. If enabled (LVIE = 1), LVIF causes an interrupt request.
0 No change in LVDS bit.
1 LVDS bit has changed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
147
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.15
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Control Register (CPMUAPICTL)
The CPMUAPICTL register allows the configuration of the autonomous periodical interrupt features.
0x02F2
7
R
W
Reset
APICLK
0
6
5
0
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
APIES
APIEA
APIFE
APIE
APIF
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-19. Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Control Register (CPMUAPICTL)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 4-17. CPMUAPICTL Field Descriptions
Field
7
APICLK
Description
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Clock Select Bit — Selects the clock source for the API. Writable only if
APIFE = 0. APICLK cannot be changed if APIFE is set by the same write operation.
0 Autonomous Clock (ACLK) used as source.
1 Bus Clock used as source.
4
APIES
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt External Select Bit — Selects the waveform at the external pin
API_EXTCLK as shown in Figure 4-20. See device level specification for connectivity of API_EXTCLK pin.
0 If APIEA and APIFE are set, at the external pin API_EXTCLK periodic high pulses are visible at the end of
every selected period with the size of half of the minimum period (APIR=0x0000 in Table 4-21).
1 If APIEA and APIFE are set, at the external pin API_EXTCLK a clock is visible with 2 times the selected API
Period.
3
APIEA
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt External Access Enable Bit — If set, the waveform selected by bit APIES
can be accessed externally. See device level specification for connectivity.
0 Waveform selected by APIES can not be accessed externally.
1 Waveform selected by APIES can be accessed externally, if APIFE is set.
2
APIFE
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Feature Enable Bit — Enables the API feature and starts the API timer
when set.
0 Autonomous periodical interrupt is disabled.
1 Autonomous periodical interrupt is enabled and timer starts running.
1
APIE
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Enable Bit
0 API interrupt request is disabled.
1 API interrupt will be requested whenever APIF is set.
0
APIF
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Flag — APIF is set to 1 when the in the API configured time has elapsed.
This flag can only be cleared by writing a 1.Writing a 0 has no effect. If enabled (APIE = 1), APIF causes an
interrupt request.
0 API time-out has not yet occurred.
1 API time-out has occurred.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
148
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Figure 4-20. Waveform selected on API_EXTCLK pin (APIEA=1, APIFE=1)
API min. period / 2
APIES=0
API period
APIES=1
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
149
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.16
Autonomous Clock Trimming Register (CPMUACLKTR)
The CPMUACLKTR register configures the trimming of the Autonomous Clock (ACLK - trimmable
internal RC-Oscillator) which can be selected as clock source for some CPMU features.
0x02F3
7
R
W
Reset
6
5
4
3
2
ACLKTR5
ACLKTR4
ACLKTR3
ACLKTR2
ACLKTR1
ACLKTR0
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
0
0
0
0
0
After de-assert of System Reset a value is automatically loaded from the Flash memory.
Figure 4-21. Autonomous Clock Trimming Register (CPMUACLKTR)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 4-18. CPMUACLKTR Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–2
Autonomous Clock Period Trimming Bits — See Table 4-19 for trimming effects. The ACLKTR[5:0] value
ACLKTR[5:0] represents a signed number influencing the ACLK period time.
Table 4-19. Trimming Effect of ACLKTR
Bit
Trimming Effect
ACLKTR[5]
Increases period
ACLKTR[4]
Decreases period less than ACLKTR[5] increased it
ACLKTR[3]
Decreases period less than ACLKTR[4]
ACLKTR[2]
Decreases period less than ACLKTR[3]
ACLKTR[1]
Decreases period less than ACLKTR[2]
ACLKTR[0]
Decreases period less than ACLKTR[1]
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
150
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.17
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Rate High and Low Register
(CPMUAPIRH / CPMUAPIRL)
The CPMUAPIRH and CPMUAPIRL registers allow the configuration of the autonomous periodical
interrupt rate.
0x02F4
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
APIR15
APIR14
APIR13
APIR12
APIR11
APIR10
APIR9
APIR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-22. Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Rate High Register (CPMUAPIRH)
0x02F5
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
APIR7
APIR6
APIR5
APIR4
APIR3
APIR2
APIR1
APIR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 4-23. Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Rate Low Register (CPMUAPIRL)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime if APIFE=0, Else writes have no effect.
Table 4-20. CPMUAPIRH / CPMUAPIRL Field Descriptions
Field
15-0
APIR[15:0]
Description
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Rate Bits — These bits define the time-out period of the API. See
Table 4-21 for details of the effect of the autonomous periodical interrupt rate bits.
The period can be calculated as follows depending on logical value of the APICLK bit:
APICLK=0: Period = 2*(APIR[15:0] + 1) * (ACLK Clock Period * 2)
APICLK=1: Period = 2*(APIR[15:0] + 1) * Bus Clock Period
NOTE
For APICLK bit clear the first time-out period of the API will show a latency
time between two to three fACLK cycles due to synchronous clock gate
release when the API feature gets enabled (APIFE bit set).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
151
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-21. Selectable Autonomous Periodical Interrupt Periods
1
APICLK
APIR[15:0]
Selected Period
0
0000
0.2 ms1
0
0001
0.4 ms1
0
0002
0.6 ms1
0
0003
0.8 ms1
0
0004
1.0 ms1
0
0005
1.2 ms1
0
.....
.....
0
FFFD
13106.8 ms1
0
FFFE
13107.0 ms1
0
FFFF
13107.2 ms1
1
0000
2 * Bus Clock period
1
0001
4 * Bus Clock period
1
0002
6 * Bus Clock period
1
0003
8 * Bus Clock period
1
0004
10 * Bus Clock period
1
0005
12 * Bus Clock period
1
.....
.....
1
FFFD
131068 * Bus Clock period
1
FFFE
131070 * Bus Clock period
1
FFFF
131072 * Bus Clock period
When fACLK is trimmed to 20kHz.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
152
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.18
Reserved Register CPMUTEST3
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in Special
Mode can alter the S12CPMU_UHV’s functionality.
0x02F6
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-24. Reserved Register (CPMUTEST3)
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in Special Mode
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
153
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.19
High Temperature Trimming Register (CPMUHTTR)
The CPMUHTTR register configures the trimming of the S12CPMU_UHV temperature sense.
0x02F7
7
R
W
Reset
HTOE
0
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
HTTR3
HTTR2
HTTR1
HTTR0
F
F
F
F
After de-assert of System Reset a trim value is automatically loaded from the Flash memory. See Device specification for
details.
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-25. High Temperature Trimming Register (CPMUHTTR)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 4-23. CPMUHTTR Field Descriptions
Field
7
HTOE
3–0
HTTR[3:0]
Description
High Temperature Offset Enable Bit — If set the temperature sense offset is enabled.
0 The temperature sense offset is disabled. HTTR[3:0] bits don’t care.
1 The temperature sense offset is enabled. HTTR[3:0] select the temperature offset.
High Temperature Trimming Bits — See Table 4-24 for trimming effects.
Table 4-24. Trimming Effect of HTTR
Bit
Trimming Effect
HTTR[3]
Increases VHT twice of HTTR[2]
HTTR[2]
Increases VHT twice of HTTR[1]
HTTR[1]
Increases VHT twice of HTTR[0]
HTTR[0]
Increases VHT (to compensate Temperature Offset)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
154
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.20
S12CPMU_UHV IRC1M Trim Registers (CPMUIRCTRIMH /
CPMUIRCTRIML)
0x02F8
15
14
13
12
11
R
10
9
8
0
TCTRIM[4:0]
IRCTRIM[9:8]
W
Reset
F
F
F
F
F
0
F
F
After de-assert of System Reset a factory programmed trim value is automatically loaded from the Flash memory to
provide trimmed Internal Reference Frequency fIRC1M_TRIM.
Figure 4-26. S12CPMU_UHV IRC1M Trim High Register (CPMUIRCTRIMH)
0x02F9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
F
F
F
R
IRCTRIM[7:0]
W
Reset
F
F
F
F
F
After de-assert of System Reset a factory programmed trim value is automatically loaded from the Flash memory to
provide trimmed Internal Reference Frequency fIRC1M_TRIM.
Figure 4-27. S12CPMU_UHV IRC1M Trim Low Register (CPMUIRCTRIML)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime if PROT=0 (CPMUPROT register). Else write has no effect
NOTE
Writes to these registers while PLLSEL=1 clears the LOCK and UPOSC
status bits.
Table 4-25. CPMUIRCTRIMH/L Field Descriptions
Field
Description
15-11
IRC1M temperature coefficient Trim Bits
TCTRIM[4:0] Trim bits for the Temperature Coefficient (TC) of the IRC1M frequency.
Table 4-26 shows the influence of the bits TCTRIM[4:0] on the relationship between frequency and temperature.
Figure 4-29 shows an approximate TC variation, relative to the nominal TC of the IRC1M (i.e. for
TCTRIM[4:0]=0x00000 or 0x10000).
9-0
IRC1M Frequency Trim Bits — Trim bits for Internal Reference Clock
IRCTRIM[9:0] After System Reset the factory programmed trim value is automatically loaded into these registers, resulting in a
Internal Reference Frequency fIRC1M_TRIM.See device electrical characteristics for value of fIRC1M_TRIM.
The frequency trimming consists of two different trimming methods:
A rough trimming controlled by bits IRCTRIM[9:6] can be done with frequency leaps of about 6% in average.
A fine trimming controlled by bits IRCTRIM[5:0] can be done with frequency leaps of about 0.3% (this trimming
determines the precision of the frequency setting of 0.15%, i.e. 0.3% is the distance between two trimming
values).
Figure 4-28 shows the relationship between the trim bits and the resulting IRC1M frequency.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
155
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
IRC1M frequency (IRCCLK)
IRCTRIM[9:6]
{
1.5MHz
IRCTRIM[5:0]
......
1MHz
600KHz
IRCTRIM[9:0]
$000
$3FF
Figure 4-28. IRC1M Frequency Trimming Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
156
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
frequency
1
111
]
4:0
[
RIM
x1
=0
T
TC
0x11111
...
0x10101
0x10100
0x10011
0x10010
0x10001
TC increases
0x00001
0x00010
0x00011
0x00100
0x00101
...
0x01111
TC decreases
TCTRIM[4:0] = 0x10000 or 0x00000 (nominal TC)
TCT
RIM
- 40C
[4:0
]=0
x01
111
150C
temperature
Figure 4-29. Influence of TCTRIM[4:0] on the Temperature Coefficient
NOTE
The frequency is not necessarily linear with the temperature (in most cases
it will not be). The above diagram is meant only to give the direction
(positive or negative) of the variation of the TC, relative to the nominal TC.
Setting TCTRIM[4:0] at 0x00000 or 0x10000 does not mean that the
temperature coefficient will be zero. These two combinations basically
switch off the TC compensation module, which results in the nominal TC of
the IRC1M.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
157
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Table 4-26. TC trimming of the frequency of the IRC1M at ambient temperature
TCTRIM[4:0]
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
11001
11010
11011
11100
11101
11110
11111
IRC1M Indicative
relative TC variation
0 (nominal TC of the IRC)
-0.27%
-0.54%
-0.81%
-1.08%
-1.35%
-1.63%
-1.9%
-2.20%
-2.47%
-2.77%
-3.04
-3.33%
-3.6%
-3.91%
-4.18%
0 (nominal TC of the IRC)
+0.27%
+0.54%
+0.81%
+1.07%
+1.34%
+1.59%
+1.86%
+2.11%
+2.38%
+2.62%
+2.89%
+3.12%
+3.39%
+3.62%
+3.89%
IRC1M indicative frequency drift for
relative TC variation
0%
-0.5%
-0.9%
-1.3%
-1.7%
-2.0%
-2.2%
-2.5%
-3.0%
-3.4%
-3.9%
-4.3%
-4.7%
-5.1%
-5.6%
-5.9%
0%
+0.5%
+0.9%
+1.3%
+1.7%
+2.0%
+2.2%
+2.5%
+3.0%
+3.4%
+3.9%
+4.3%
+4.7%
+5.1%
+5.6%
+5.9%
NOTE
Since the IRC1M frequency is not a linear function of the temperature, but
more like a parabola, the above relative variation is only an indication and
should be considered with care.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
158
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Be aware that the output frequency varies with the TC trimming. A
frequency trimming correction is therefore necessary. The values provided
in Table 4-26 are typical values at ambient temperature which can vary from
device to device.
4.3.2.21
S12CPMU_UHV Oscillator Register (CPMUOSC)
This register configures the external oscillator (XOSCLCP).
0x02FA
7
6
OSCE
Reserved
0
0
R
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
Reserved
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 4-30. S12CPMU_UHV Oscillator Register (CPMUOSC)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime if PROT=0 (CPMUPROT register) and PLLSEL=1 (CPMUCLKS register). Else write has
no effect.
NOTE.
Write to this register clears the LOCK and UPOSC status bits.
Table 4-27. CPMUOSC Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
OSCE
Oscillator Enable Bit — This bit enables the external oscillator (XOSCLCP). The UPOSC status bit in the
CPMUFLG register indicates when the oscillation is stable and OSCCLK can be selected as Bus Clock or source
of the COP or RTI.A loss of oscillation will lead to a clock monitor reset.This
0 External oscillator is disabled.
REFCLK for PLL is IRCCLK.
1 External oscillator is enabled. Clock monitor is enabled. External oscillator is qualified by PLLCLK
REFCLK for PLL is the external oscillator clock divided by REFDIV.
Note: When starting up the external oscillator (either by programming OSCE bit to 1 or on exit from Full Stop
Mode with OSCE bit already 1) the software must wait for a minimum time equivalent to the startup-time
of the external oscillator tUPOSC before entering Pseudo Stop Mode.
6
Reserved
Do not alter this bit from its reset value.It is for Manufacturer use only and can change the PLL behavior.
4-0
Reserved
Do not alter these bits from their reset value. These are for Manufacturer use only and can change the PLL
behavior.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
159
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.22
S12CPMU_UHV Protection Register (CPMUPROT)
This register protects the clock configuration registers from accidental overwrite:
CPMUSYNR, CPMUREFDIV, CPMUCLKS, CPMUPLL, CPMUIRCTRIMH/L and CPMUOSC
0x02FB
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PROT
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 4-31. S12CPMU_UHV Protection Register (CPMUPROT)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Field
Description
PROT
Clock Configuration Registers Protection Bit — This bit protects the clock configuration registers from
accidental overwrite (see list of protected registers above): Writing 0x26 to the CPMUPROT register clears the
PROT bit, other write accesses set the PROT bit.
0 Protection of clock configuration registers is disabled.
1 Protection of clock configuration registers is enabled. (see list of protected registers above).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
160
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.3.2.23
Reserved Register CPMUTEST2
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in Special
Mode can alter the S12CPMU_UHV’s functionality.
0x02FC
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 4-32. Reserved Register CPMUTEST2
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in Special Mode
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
161
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.4
4.4.1
Functional Description
Phase Locked Loop with Internal Filter (PLL)
The PLL is used to generate a high speed PLLCLK based on a low frequency REFCLK.
The REFCLK is by default the IRCCLK which is trimmed to fIRC1M_TRIM=1MHz.
If using the oscillator (OSCE=1) REFCLK will be based on OSCCLK. For increased flexibility, OSCCLK
can be divided in a range of 1 to 16 to generate the reference frequency REFCLK using the REFDIV[3:0]
bits. Based on the SYNDIV[5:0] bits the PLL generates the VCOCLK by multiplying the reference clock
by a 2, 4, 6,... 126, 128. Based on the POSTDIV[4:0] bits the VCOCLK can be divided in a range of 1,2,
3, 4, 5, 6,... to 32 to generate the PLLCLK.
If oscillator is enabled (OSCE=1)
f OSC
f REF = -----------------------------------( REFDIV + 1 )
If oscillator is disabled (OSCE=0)
f REF = f IRC1M
f VCO = 2 × f REF × ( SYNDIV + 1 )
If PLL is locked (LOCK=1)
f VCO
f PLL = ----------------------------------------( POSTDIV + 1 )
If PLL is not locked (LOCK=0)
f VCO
f PLL = --------------4
If PLL is selected (PLLSEL=1)
f PLL
f bus = ------------2
.
NOTE
Although it is possible to set the dividers to command a very high clock
frequency, do not exceed the specified bus frequency limit for the MCU.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
162
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Several examples of PLL divider settings are shown in Table 4-28. The following rules help to achieve
optimum stability and shortest lock time:
• Use lowest possible fVCO / fREF ratio (SYNDIV value).
• Use highest possible REFCLK frequency fREF.
Table 4-28. Examples of PLL Divider Settings
fosc
REFDIV[3:0]
fREF
REFFRQ[1:0] SYNDIV[5:0]
fVCO
VCOFRQ[1:0] POSTDIV[4:0]
fPLL
fbus
off
$00
1MHz
00
$18
50MHz
01
$03
12.5MHz
6.25MHz
off
$00
1MHz
00
$18
50MHz
01
$00
50MHz
25MHz
4MHz
$00
4MHz
01
$05
48MHz
00
$00
48MHz
24MHz
The phase detector inside the PLL compares the feedback clock (FBCLK = VCOCLK/(SYNDIV+1)) with
the reference clock (REFCLK = (IRC1M or OSCCLK)/(REFDIV+1)). Correction pulses are generated
based on the phase difference between the two signals. The loop filter alters the DC voltage on the internal
filter capacitor, based on the width and direction of the correction pulse which leads to a higher or lower
VCO frequency.
The user must select the range of the REFCLK frequency (REFFRQ[1:0] bits) and the range of the
VCOCLK frequency (VCOFRQ[1:0] bits) to ensure that the correct PLL loop bandwidth is set.
The lock detector compares the frequencies of the FBCLK and the REFCLK. Therefore the speed of the
lock detector is directly proportional to the reference clock frequency. The circuit determines the lock
condition based on this comparison.
If PLL LOCK interrupt requests are enabled, the software can wait for an interrupt request and for instance
check the LOCK bit. If interrupt requests are disabled, software can poll the LOCK bit continuously
(during PLL start-up) or at periodic intervals. In either case, only when the LOCK bit is set, the VCOCLK
will have stabilized to the programmed frequency.
• The LOCK bit is a read-only indicator of the locked state of the PLL.
• The LOCK bit is set when the VCO frequency is within the tolerance, ∆Lock, and is cleared when
the VCO frequency is out of the tolerance, ∆unl.
• Interrupt requests can occur if enabled (LOCKIE = 1) when the lock condition changes, toggling
the LOCK bit.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
163
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.4.2
Startup from Reset
An example for startup of the clock system from Reset is given in Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-33. Startup of clock system after Reset
System
Reset
768 cycles
PLLCLK
fPLL increasing
fPLLRST
fPLL=25MHz
fPLL=12.5MHz
)(
tlock
LOCK
SYNDIV
$18 (default target fVCO=50MHz)
POSTDIV
$03 (default target fPLL=fVCO/4 = 12.5MHz)
CPU
reset state
4.4.3
$01
vector fetch, program execution
example change
of POSTDIV
Stop Mode using PLLCLK as Bus Clock
An example of what happens going into Stop Mode and exiting Stop Mode after an interrupt is shown in
Figure 4-34. Disable PLL Lock interrupt (LOCKIE=0) before going into Stop Mode.
Figure 4-34. Stop Mode using PLLCLK as Bus Clock
wakeup
CPU
execution
interrupt
STOP instruction
continue execution
tSTP_REC
PLLCLK
LOCK
tlock
Depending on the COP configuration there might be an additional significant latency time until COP is
active again after exit from Stop Mode due to clock domain crossing synchronization. This latency time
of 2 ACLK cycles occurs if COP clock source is ACLK and the CSAD bit is set and must be added to the
device Stop Mode recovery time tSTP_REC. After exit from Stop Mode (Pseudo, Full) for this latency time
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
164
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
of 2 ACLK cycles no Stop Mode request (STOP instruction) should be generated to make sure the COP
counter can increment at each Stop Mode exit.
4.4.4
Full Stop Mode using Oscillator Clock as Bus Clock
An example of what happens going into Full Stop Mode and exiting Full Stop Mode after an interrupt is
shown in Figure 4-35.
Disable PLL Lock interrupt (LOCKIE=0) and oscillator status change interrupt (OSCIE=0) before going
into Full Stop Mode.
Figure 4-35. Full Stop Mode using Oscillator Clock as Bus Clock
wakeup
CPU
execution
Core
Clock
PLLCLK
interrupt
STOP instruction
continue execution
tSTP_REC
tlock
OSCCLK
UPOSC
select OSCCLK as Core/Bus Clock by writing PLLSEL to “0”
PLLSEL
automatically set when going into Full Stop Mode
Depending on the COP configuration there might be a significant latency time until COP is active again
after exit from Stop Mode due to clock domain crossing synchronization. This latency time of 2 ACLK
cycles occurs if COP clock source is ACLK and the CSAD bit is set and must be added to the device Stop
Mode recovery time tSTP_REC. After exit from Stop Mode (Pseudo, Full) for this latency time of 2 ACLK
cycles no Stop Mode request (STOP instruction) should be generated to make sure the COP counter can
increment at each Stop Mode exit.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
165
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.4.5
4.4.5.1
External Oscillator
Enabling the External Oscillator
An example of how to use the oscillator as Bus Clock is shown in Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36. Enabling the external oscillator
enable external oscillator by writing OSCE bit to one.
OSCE
crystal/resonator starts oscillating
EXTAL
UPOSC flag is set upon successful start of oscillation
UPOSC
OSCCLK
select OSCCLK as Core/Bus Clock by writing PLLSEL to zero
PLLSEL
Core
Clock
based on PLL Clock
based on OSCCLK
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
166
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.4.6
4.4.6.1
System Clock Configurations
PLL Engaged Internal Mode (PEI)
This mode is the default mode after System Reset or Power-On Reset.
The Bus Clock is based on the PLLCLK, the reference clock for the PLL is internally generated (IRC1M).
The PLL is configured to 50 MHz VCOCLK with POSTDIV set to 0x03. If locked (LOCK=1) this results
in a PLLCLK of 12.5 MHz and a Bus Clock of 6.25 MHz. The PLL can be re-configured to other bus
frequencies.
The clock sources for COP and RTI can be based on the internal reference clock generator (IRC1M) or the
RC-Oscillator (ACLK).
4.4.6.2
PLL Engaged External Mode (PEE)
In this mode, the Bus Clock is based on the PLLCLK as well (like PEI). The reference clock for the PLL
is based on the external oscillator.
The clock sources for COP and RTI can be based on the internal reference clock generator or on the
external oscillator clock or the RC-Oscillator (ACLK).
This mode can be entered from default mode PEI by performing the following steps:
1. Configure the PLL for desired bus frequency.
2. Enable the external Oscillator (OSCE bit).
3. Wait for oscillator to start-up and the PLL being locked (LOCK = 1) and (UPOSC =1).
4. Clear all flags in the CPMUFLG register to be able to detect any future status bit change.
5. Optionally status interrupts can be enabled (CPMUINT register).
Loosing PLL lock status (LOCK=0) means loosing the oscillator status information as well (UPOSC=0).
The impact of loosing the oscillator status (UPOSC=0) in PEE mode is as follows:
• The PLLCLK is derived from the VCO clock (with its actual frequency) divided by four until the
PLL locks again.
Application software needs to be prepared to deal with the impact of loosing the oscillator status at any
time.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
167
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.4.6.3
PLL Bypassed External Mode (PBE)
In this mode, the Bus Clock is based on the external oscillator clock. The reference clock for the PLL is
based on the external oscillator.
The clock sources for COP and RTI can be based on the internal reference clock generator or on the
external oscillator clock or the RC-Oscillator (ACLK).
This mode can be entered from default mode PEI by performing the following steps:
1. Make sure the PLL configuration is valid.
2. Enable the external Oscillator (OSCE bit)
3. Wait for the oscillator to start-up and the PLL being locked (LOCK = 1) and (UPOSC =1)
4. Clear all flags in the CPMUFLG register to be able to detect any status bit change.
5. Optionally status interrupts can be enabled (CPMUINT register).
6. Select the Oscillator clock as Bus clock (PLLSEL=0)
Loosing PLL lock status (LOCK=0) means loosing the oscillator status information as well (UPOSC=0).
The impact of loosing the oscillator status (UPOSC=0) in PBE mode is as follows:
• PLLSEL is set automatically and the Bus clock is switched back to the PLL clock.
• The PLLCLK is derived from the VCO clock (with its actual frequency) divided by four until the
PLL locks again.
Application software needs to be prepared to deal with the impact of loosing the oscillator status at any
time.
4.5
4.5.1
Resets
General
All reset sources are listed in Table 4-29. Refer to MCU specification for related vector addresses and
priorities.
Table 4-29. Reset Summary
4.5.2
Reset Source
Local Enable
Power-On Reset (POR)
None
Low Voltage Reset (LVR)
None
External pin RESET
None
Illegal Address Reset
None
Clock Monitor Reset
OSCE Bit in CPMUOSC register
COP Reset
CR[2:0] in CPMUCOP register
Description of Reset Operation
Upon detection of any reset of Table 4-29, an internal circuit drives the RESET pin low for 512 PLLCLK
cycles. After 512 PLLCLK cycles the RESET pin is released. The reset generator of the S12CPMU_UHV
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
168
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
waits for additional 256PLLCLK cycles and then samples the RESET pin to determine the originating
source. Table 4-30 shows which vector will be fetched.
Table 4-30. Reset Vector Selection
Sampled RESET Pin
(256 cycles after
release)
Oscillator monitor
fail pending
COP
time-out
pending
1
0
0
POR
LVR
Illegal Address Reset
External pin RESET
1
1
X
Clock Monitor Reset
1
0
1
COP Reset
0
X
X
POR
LVR
Illegal Address Reset
External pin RESET
Vector Fetch
NOTE
While System Reset is asserted the PLLCLK runs with the frequency
fVCORST.
The internal reset of the MCU remains asserted while the reset generator completes the 768 PLLCLK
cycles long reset sequence. In case the RESET pin is externally driven low for more than these 768
PLLCLK cycles (External Reset), the internal reset remains asserted longer.
Figure 4-37. RESET Timing
RESET
S12_CPMU drives
RESET pin low
fVCORST
fVCORST
)
)
PLLCLK
S12_CPMU releases
RESET pin
(
(
512 cycles
)
(
256 cycles
possibly
RESET
driven low
externally
4.5.2.1
Clock Monitor Reset
If the external oscillator is enabled (OSCE=1) in case of loss of oscillation or the oscillator frequency is
below the failure assert frequency fCMFA (see device electrical characteristics for values), the
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
169
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
S12CPMU_UHV generates a Clock Monitor Reset. In Full Stop Mode the external oscillator and the clock
monitor are disabled.
4.5.2.2
Computer Operating Properly Watchdog (COP) Reset
The COP (free running watchdog timer) enables the user to check that a program is running and
sequencing properly. When the COP is being used, software is responsible for keeping the COP from
timing out. If the COP times out it is an indication that the software is no longer being executed in the
intended sequence; thus COP reset is generated.
The clock source for the COP is either ACLK, IRCCLK or OSCCLK depending on the setting of the
COPOSCSEL0 and COPOSCSEL1 bit.
Due to clock domain crossing synchronization there is a latency time to enter and exit Stop Mode if the
COP clock source is ACLK and this clock is stopped in Stop Mode. This maximum total latency time is 4
ACLK cycles (2 ACLK cycles for Stop Mode entry and exit each) which must be added to the Stop Mode
recovery time tSTP_REC from exit of current Stop Mode to entry of next Stop Mode. This latency time
occurs no matter which Stop Mode (Full, Pseudo) is currently exited or entered next.
After exit from Stop Mode (Pseudo, Full) for this latency time of 2 ACLK cycles no Stop Mode request
(STOP instruction) should be generated to make sure the COP counter can increment at each Stop Mode
exit.
Table 4-31 gives an overview of the COP condition (run, static) in Stop Mode depending on legal
configuration and status bit settings:
Table 4-31. COP condition (run, static) in Stop Mode
COPOSCSEL1
CSAD
PSTP
PCE
COPOSCSEL0
OSCE
UPOSC
COP counter behavior in Stop Mode
(clock source)
1
0
x
x
x
x
x
Run (ACLK)
1
1
x
x
x
x
x
Static (ACLK)
0
x
1
1
1
1
1
Run (OSCCLK)
0
x
1
1
0
0
x
Static (IRCCLK)
0
x
1
1
0
1
x
Static (IRCCLK)
0
x
1
0
0
x
x
Static (IRCCLK)
0
x
1
0
1
1
1
Static (OSCCLK)
0
x
0
1
1
1
1
Static (OSCCLK)
0
x
0
1
0
1
x
Static (IRCCLK)
0
x
0
1
0
0
0
Static (IRCCLK)
0
x
0
0
1
1
1
Satic (OSCCLK)
0
x
0
0
0
1
1
Static (IRCCLK)
0
x
0
0
0
1
0
Static (IRCCLK)
0
x
0
0
0
0
0
Static (IRCCLK)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
170
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Three control bits in the CPMUCOP register allow selection of seven COP time-out periods.
When COP is enabled, the program must write $55 and $AA (in this order) to the CPMUARMCOP
register during the selected time-out period. Once this is done, the COP time-out period is restarted. If the
program fails to do this and the COP times out, a COP reset is generated. Also, if any value other than $55
or $AA is written, a COP reset is generated.
Windowed COP operation is enabled by setting WCOP in the CPMUCOP register. In this mode, writes to
the CPMUARMCOP register to clear the COP timer must occur in the last 25% of the selected time-out
period. A premature write will immediately reset the part.
In MCU Normal Mode the COP time-out period (CR[2:0]) and COP window (WCOP) setting can be
automatically pre-loaded at reset release from NVM memory (if values are defined in the NVM by the
application). By default the COP is off and no window COP feature is enabled after reset release via NVM
memory. The COP control register CPMUCOP can be written once in an application in MCU Normal
Mode to update the COP time-out period (CR[2:0]) and COP window (WCOP) setting loaded from NVM
memory at reset release. Any value for the new COP time-out period and COP window setting is allowed
except COP off value if the COP was enabled during pre-load via NVM memory.
The COP clock source select bits can not be pre-loaded via NVM memory at reset release. The IRC clock
is the default COP clock source out of reset.
The COP clock source select bits (COPOSCSEL0/1) and ACLK clock control bit in Stop Mode (CSAD)
can be modified until the CPMUCOP register write once has taken place. Therefore these control bits
should be modified before the final COP time-out period and window COP setting is written.
The CPMUCOP register access to modify the COP time-out period and window COP setting in MCU
Normal Mode after reset release must be done with the WRTMASK bit cleared otherwise the update is
ignored and this access does not count as the write once.
4.5.3
Power-On Reset (POR)
The on-chip POR circuitry detects when the internal supply VDD drops below an appropriate voltage
level. The POR is deasserted, if the internal supply VDD exceeds an appropriate voltage level (voltage
levels not specified in this document because this internal supply is not visible on device pins).
4.5.4
Low-Voltage Reset (LVR)
The on-chip LVR circuitry detects when one of the supply voltages VDD, VDDX and VDDF drops below
an appropriate voltage level. If LVR is deasserted the MCU is fully operational at the specified maximum
speed. The LVR assert and deassert levels for the supply voltage VDDX are VLVRXA and VLVRXD and are
specified in the device Reference Manual.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
171
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
4.6
Interrupts
The interrupt/reset vectors requested by the S12CPMU_UHV are listed in Table 4-32. Refer to MCU
specification for related vector addresses and priorities.
Table 4-32. S12CPMU_UHV Interrupt Vectors
4.6.1
4.6.1.1
Interrupt Source
CCR
Mask
Local Enable
RTI time-out interrupt
I bit
CPMUINT (RTIE)
PLL lock interrupt
I bit
CPMUINT (LOCKIE)
Oscillator status
interrupt
I bit
CPMUINT (OSCIE)
Low voltage interrupt
I bit
CPMULVCTL (LVIE)
High temperature
interrupt
I bit
CPMUHTCTL (HTIE)
Autonomous
Periodical Interrupt
I bit
CPMUAPICTL (APIE)
Description of Interrupt Operation
Real Time Interrupt (RTI)
The clock source for the RTI is either IRCCLK or OSCCLK depending on the setting of the RTIOSCSEL
bit. In Stop Mode with PSTP=1 (Pseudo Stop Mode), RTIOSCSEL=1 and PRE=1 the RTI continues to
run, else the RTI counter halts in Stop Mode.
The RTI can be used to generate hardware interrupts at a fixed periodic rate. If enabled (by setting
RTIE=1), this interrupt will occur at the rate selected by the CPMURTI register. At the end of the RTI
time-out period the RTIF flag is set to one and a new RTI time-out period starts immediately.
A write to the CPMURTI register restarts the RTI time-out period.
4.6.1.2
PLL Lock Interrupt
The S12CPMU_UHV generates a PLL Lock interrupt when the lock condition (LOCK status bit) of the
PLL changes, either from a locked state to an unlocked state or vice versa. Lock interrupts are locally
disabled by setting the LOCKIE bit to zero. The PLL Lock interrupt flag (LOCKIF) is set to1 when the
lock condition has changed, and is cleared to 0 by writing a 1 to the LOCKIF bit.
4.6.1.3
Oscillator Status Interrupt
When the OSCE bit is 0, then UPOSC stays 0. When OSCE=1 the UPOSC bit is set after the LOCK bit is
set.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
172
Freescale Semiconductor
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
Upon detection of a status change (UPOSC) the OSCIF flag is set. Going into Full Stop Mode or disabling
the oscillator can also cause a status change of UPOSC.
Any change in PLL configuration or any other event which causes the PLL lock status to be cleared leads
to a loss of the oscillator status information as well (UPOSC=0).
Oscillator status change interrupts are locally enabled with the OSCIE bit.
NOTE
Loosing the oscillator status (UPOSC=0) affects the clock configuration of
the system1. This needs to be dealt with in application software.
4.6.1.4
Low-Voltage Interrupt (LVI)
In FPM the input voltage VDDA is monitored. Whenever VDDA drops below level VLVIA, the status bit
LVDS is set to 1. When VDDA rises above level VLVID the status bit LVDS is cleared to 0. An interrupt,
indicated by flag LVIF = 1, is triggered by any change of the status bit LVDS if interrupt enable bit LVIE
= 1.
4.6.1.5
HTI - High Temperature Interrupt
In FPM the junction temperature TJ is monitored. Whenever TJ exceeds level THTIA the status bit HTDS
is set to 1. Vice versa, HTDS is reset to 0 when TJ get below level THTID. An interrupt, indicated by flag
HTIF = 1, is triggered by any change of the status bit HTDS, if interrupt enable bit HTIE = 1.
4.6.1.6
Autonomous Periodical Interrupt (API)
The API sub-block can generate periodical interrupts independent of the clock source of the MCU. To
enable the timer, the bit APIFE needs to be set.
The API timer is either clocked by the Autonomous Clock (ACLK - trimmable internal RC oscillator) or
the Bus Clock. Timer operation will freeze when MCU clock source is selected and Bus Clock is turned
off. The clock source can be selected with bit APICLK. APICLK can only be written when APIFE is not
set.
The APIR[15:0] bits determine the interrupt period. APIR[15:0] can only be written when APIFE is
cleared. As soon as APIFE is set, the timer starts running for the period selected by APIR[15:0] bits. When
the configured time has elapsed, the flag APIF is set. An interrupt, indicated by flag APIF = 1, is triggered
if interrupt enable bit APIE = 1. The timer is re-started automatically again after it has set APIF.
The procedure to change APICLK or APIR[15:0] is first to clear APIFE, then write to APICLK or
APIR[15:0], and afterwards set APIFE.
The API Trimming bits ACLKTR[5:0] must be set so the minimum period equals 0.2 ms if stable
frequency is desired.
See Table 4-19 for the trimming effect of ACLKTR.
1. For details please refer to “4.4.6 System Clock Configurations”
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
173
S12 Clock, Reset and Power Management Unit (S12CPMU_UHV)
NOTE
The first period after enabling the counter by APIFE might be reduced by
API start up delay tsdel.
It is possible to generate with the API a waveform at the external pin API_EXTCLK by setting APIFE and
enabling the external access with setting APIEA.
4.7
4.7.1
Initialization/Application Information
General Initialization information
Usually applications run in MCU Normal Mode.
It is recommended to write the CPMUCOP register in any case from the application program initialization
routine after reset no matter if the COP is used in the application or not, even if a configuration is loaded
via the flash memory after reset. By doing a “controlled” write access in MCU Normal Mode (with the
right value for the application) the write once for the COP configuration bits (WCOP,CR[2:0]) takes place
which protects these bits from further accidental change. In case of a program sequencing issue (code
runaway) the COP configuration can not be accidentally modified anymore.
4.7.2
Application information for COP and API usage
In many applications the COP is used to check that the program is running and sequencing properly. Often
the COP is kept running during Stop Mode and periodic wake-up events are needed to service the COP on
time and maybe to check the system status.
For such an application it is recommended to use the ACLK as clock source for both COP and API. This
guarantees lowest possible IDD current during Stop Mode. Additionally it eases software implementation
using the same clock source for both, COP and API.
The Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) of the Autonomous Periodic Interrupt API should contain the write
instruction to the CPMUARMCOP register. The value (byte) written is derived from the “main routine”
(alternating sequence of $55 and $AA) of the application software.
Using this method, then in the case of a runtime or program sequencing issue the application “main
routine” is not executed properly anymore and the alternating values are not provided properly. Hence the
COP is written at the correct time (due to independent API interrupt request) but the wrong value is written
(alternating sequence of $55 and $AA is no longer maintained) which causes a COP reset.
If the COP is stopped during any Stop Mode it is recommended to service the COP shortly before Stop
Mode is entered.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
174
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 5
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
Table 5-1. Revision History
Revision Number
Date
1.03
14.May.2009
Internal Conditional text only
1.04
30.Nov.2009
Internal Conditional text only
1.05
07.Dec.2010
Standardized format of revision history table header.
5.1
Summary of Changes
Introduction
This section describes the functionality of the background debug module (BDM) sub-block of the HCS12S
core platform.
The background debug module (BDM) sub-block is a single-wire, background debug system implemented
in on-chip hardware for minimal CPU intervention. All interfacing with the BDM is done via the BKGD
pin.
The BDM has enhanced capability for maintaining synchronization between the target and host while
allowing more flexibility in clock rates. This includes a sync signal to determine the communication rate
and a handshake signal to indicate when an operation is complete. The system is backwards compatible to
the BDM of the S12 family with the following exceptions:
• TAGGO command not supported by S12SBDM
• External instruction tagging feature is part of the DBG module
• S12SBDM register map and register content modified
• Family ID readable from BDM ROM at global address 0x3_FF0F in active BDM
(value for devices with HCS12S core is 0xC2)
• Clock switch removed from BDM (CLKSW bit removed from BDMSTS register)
5.1.1
Features
The BDM includes these distinctive features:
• Single-wire communication with host development system
• Enhanced capability for allowing more flexibility in clock rates
• SYNC command to determine communication rate
• GO_UNTIL command
• Hardware handshake protocol to increase the performance of the serial communication
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
175
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Active out of reset in special single chip mode
Nine hardware commands using free cycles, if available, for minimal CPU intervention
Hardware commands not requiring active BDM
14 firmware commands execute from the standard BDM firmware lookup table
Software control of BDM operation during wait mode
When secured, hardware commands are allowed to access the register space in special single chip
mode, if the Flash erase tests fail.
Family ID readable from BDM ROM at global address 0x3_FF0F in active BDM
(value for devices with HCS12S core is 0xC2)
BDM hardware commands are operational until system stop mode is entered
5.1.2
Modes of Operation
BDM is available in all operating modes but must be enabled before firmware commands are executed.
Some systems may have a control bit that allows suspending the function during background debug mode.
5.1.2.1
Regular Run Modes
All of these operations refer to the part in run mode and not being secured. The BDM does not provide
controls to conserve power during run mode.
• Normal modes
General operation of the BDM is available and operates the same in all normal modes.
• Special single chip mode
In special single chip mode, background operation is enabled and active out of reset. This allows
programming a system with blank memory.
5.1.2.2
Secure Mode Operation
If the device is in secure mode, the operation of the BDM is reduced to a small subset of its regular run
mode operation. Secure operation prevents access to Flash other than allowing erasure. For more
information please see Section 5.4.1, “Security”.
5.1.2.3
Low-Power Modes
The BDM can be used until stop mode is entered. When CPU is in wait mode all BDM firmware
commands as well as the hardware BACKGROUND command cannot be used and are ignored. In this case
the CPU can not enter BDM active mode, and only hardware read and write commands are available. Also
the CPU can not enter a low power mode (stop or wait) during BDM active mode.
In stop mode the BDM clocks are stopped. When BDM clocks are disabled and stop mode is exited, the
BDM clocks will restart and BDM will have a soft reset (clearing the instruction register, any command in
progress and disable the ACK function). The BDM is now ready to receive a new command.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
176
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
5.1.3
Block Diagram
A block diagram of the BDM is shown in Figure 5-1.
Host
System
BKGD
Serial
Interface
Data
16-Bit Shift Register
Control
Register Block
Address
TRACE
Instruction Code
and
Execution
BDMACT
Bus Interface
and
Control Logic
Data
Control
Clocks
ENBDM
SDV
Standard BDM Firmware
LOOKUP TABLE
UNSEC
Secured BDM Firmware
LOOKUP TABLE
BDMSTS
Register
Figure 5-1. BDM Block Diagram
5.2
External Signal Description
A single-wire interface pin called the background debug interface (BKGD) pin is used to communicate
with the BDM system. During reset, this pin is a mode select input which selects between normal and
special modes of operation. After reset, this pin becomes the dedicated serial interface pin for the
background debug mode. The communication rate of this pin is based on the settings for the VCO clock
(CPMUSYNR). The BDM clock frequency is always VCO clock frequency divided by 8. After reset the
BDM clock is based on the reset values of the CPMUSYNR register (4 MHz). When modifying the VCO
clock please make sure that the communication rate is adapted accordingly and a communication time-out
(BDM soft reset) has occurred.
5.3
5.3.1
Memory Map and Register Definition
Module Memory Map
Table 5-2 shows the BDM memory map when BDM is active.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
177
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
Table 5-2. BDM Memory Map
5.3.2
Global Address
Module
Size
(Bytes)
0x3_FF00–0x3_FF0B
BDM registers
12
0x3_FF0C–0x3_FF0E
BDM firmware ROM
3
0x3_FF0F
Family ID (part of BDM firmware ROM)
1
0x3_FF10–0x3_FFFF
BDM firmware ROM
240
Register Descriptions
A summary of the registers associated with the BDM is shown in Figure 5-2. Registers are accessed by
host-driven communications to the BDM hardware using READ_BD and WRITE_BD commands.
Global
Address
Register
Name
0x3_FF00
Reserved
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
BDMACT
0
SDV
TRACE
0
UNSEC
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CCR7
CCR6
CCR5
CCR4
CCR3
CCR2
CCR1
CCR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
0x3_FF01
BDMSTS
R
W
0x3_FF02
Reserved
R
ENBDM
W
0x3_FF03
Reserved
R
W
0x3_FF04
Reserved
R
W
0x3_FF05
Reserved
R
W
0x3_FF06
BDMCCR
R
W
0x3_FF07
Reserved
R
W
= Unimplemented, Reserved
X
= Indeterminate
= Implemented (do not alter)
0
= Always read zero
Figure 5-2. BDM Register Summary
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
178
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
Global
Address
Register
Name
0x3_FF08
BDMPPR
Bit 7
R
W
0x3_FF09
Reserved
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BPAE
R
3
2
1
Bit 0
BPP3
BPP2
BPP1
BPP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
0x3_FF0A
Reserved
R
W
0x3_FF0B
Reserved
R
W
= Unimplemented, Reserved
= Indeterminate
X
= Implemented (do not alter)
= Always read zero
0
Figure 5-2. BDM Register Summary (continued)
5.3.2.1
BDM Status Register (BDMSTS)
Register Global Address 0x3_FF01
7
R
W
ENBDM
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BDMACT
0
SDV
TRACE
0
UNSEC
0
Reset
Special Single-Chip Mode
01
1
0
0
0
0
02
0
All Other Modes
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented, Reserved
0
= Implemented (do not alter)
= Always read zero
1
ENBDM is read as 1 by a debugging environment in special single chip mode when the device is not secured or secured but
fully erased (Flash). This is because the ENBDM bit is set by the standard BDM firmware before a BDM command can be fully
transmitted and executed.
2 UNSEC is read as 1 by a debugging environment in special single chip mode when the device is secured and fully erased,
else it is 0 and can only be read if not secure (see also bit description).
Figure 5-3. BDM Status Register (BDMSTS)
Read: All modes through BDM operation when not secured
Write: All modes through BDM operation when not secured, but subject to the following:
— ENBDM should only be set via a BDM hardware command if the BDM firmware commands
are needed. (This does not apply in special single chip mode).
— BDMACT can only be set by BDM hardware upon entry into BDM. It can only be cleared by
the standard BDM firmware lookup table upon exit from BDM active mode.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
179
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
— All other bits, while writable via BDM hardware or standard BDM firmware write commands,
should only be altered by the BDM hardware or standard firmware lookup table as part of BDM
command execution.
Table 5-3. BDMSTS Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
ENBDM
Enable BDM — This bit controls whether the BDM is enabled or disabled. When enabled, BDM can be made
active to allow firmware commands to be executed. When disabled, BDM cannot be made active but BDM
hardware commands are still allowed.
0 BDM disabled
1 BDM enabled
Note: ENBDM is set out of reset in special single chip mode. In special single chip mode with the device
secured, this bit will not be set until after the Flash erase verify tests are complete.
6
BDMACT
BDM Active Status — This bit becomes set upon entering BDM. The standard BDM firmware lookup table is
then enabled and put into the memory map. BDMACT is cleared by a carefully timed store instruction in the
standard BDM firmware as part of the exit sequence to return to user code and remove the BDM memory from
the map.
0 BDM not active
1 BDM active
4
SDV
Shift Data Valid — This bit is set and cleared by the BDM hardware. It is set after data has been transmitted as
part of a BDM firmware or hardware read command or after data has been received as part of a BDM firmware
or hardware write command. It is cleared when the next BDM command has been received or BDM is exited.
SDV is used by the standard BDM firmware to control program flow execution.
0 Data phase of command not complete
1 Data phase of command is complete
3
TRACE
TRACE1 BDM Firmware Command is Being Executed — This bit gets set when a BDM TRACE1 firmware
command is first recognized. It will stay set until BDM firmware is exited by one of the following BDM commands:
GO or GO_UNTIL.
0 TRACE1 command is not being executed
1 TRACE1 command is being executed
1
UNSEC
Unsecure — If the device is secured this bit is only writable in special single chip mode from the BDM secure
firmware. It is in a zero state as secure mode is entered so that the secure BDM firmware lookup table is enabled
and put into the memory map overlapping the standard BDM firmware lookup table.
The secure BDM firmware lookup table verifies that the on-chip Flash is erased. This being the case, the UNSEC
bit is set and the BDM program jumps to the start of the standard BDM firmware lookup table and the secure
BDM firmware lookup table is turned off. If the erase test fails, the UNSEC bit will not be asserted.
0 System is in a secured mode.
1 System is in a unsecured mode.
Note: When UNSEC is set, security is off and the user can change the state of the secure bits in the on-chip
Flash EEPROM. Note that if the user does not change the state of the bits to “unsecured” mode, the
system will be secured again when it is next taken out of reset.After reset this bit has no meaning or effect
when the security byte in the Flash EEPROM is configured for unsecure mode.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
180
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
Register Global Address 0x3_FF06
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CCR7
CCR6
CCR5
CCR4
CCR3
CCR2
CCR1
CCR0
Special Single-Chip Mode
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
All Other Modes
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 5-4. BDM CCR Holding Register (BDMCCR)
Read: All modes through BDM operation when not secured
Write: All modes through BDM operation when not secured
NOTE
When BDM is made active, the CPU stores the content of its CCR register
in the BDMCCR register. However, out of special single-chip reset, the
BDMCCR is set to 0xD8 and not 0xD0 which is the reset value of the CCR
register in this CPU mode. Out of reset in all other modes the BDMCCR
register is read zero.
When entering background debug mode, the BDM CCR holding register is used to save the condition code
register of the user’s program. It is also used for temporary storage in the standard BDM firmware mode.
The BDM CCR holding register can be written to modify the CCR value.
5.3.2.2
BDM Program Page Index Register (BDMPPR)
Register Global Address 0x3_FF08
7
R
W
Reset
BPAE
0
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
BPP3
BPP2
BPP1
BPP0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented, Reserved
Figure 5-5. BDM Program Page Register (BDMPPR)
Read: All modes through BDM operation when not secured
Write: All modes through BDM operation when not secured
Table 5-4. BDMPPR Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
BPAE
BDM Program Page Access Enable Bit — BPAE enables program page access for BDM hardware and
firmware read/write instructions The BDM hardware commands used to access the BDM registers (READ_BD
and WRITE_BD) can not be used for global accesses even if the BGAE bit is set.
0 BDM Program Paging disabled
1 BDM Program Paging enabled
3–0
BPP[3:0]
BDM Program Page Index Bits 3–0 — These bits define the selected program page. For more detailed
information regarding the program page window scheme, please refer to the S12S_MMC Block Guide.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
181
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
5.3.3
Family ID Assignment
The family ID is an 8-bit value located in the BDM ROM in active BDM (at global address: 0x3_FF0F).
The read-only value is a unique family ID which is 0xC2 for devices with an HCS12S core.
5.4
Functional Description
The BDM receives and executes commands from a host via a single wire serial interface. There are two
types of BDM commands: hardware and firmware commands.
Hardware commands are used to read and write target system memory locations and to enter active
background debug mode, see Section 5.4.3, “BDM Hardware Commands”. Target system memory
includes all memory that is accessible by the CPU.
Firmware commands are used to read and write CPU resources and to exit from active background debug
mode, see Section 5.4.4, “Standard BDM Firmware Commands”. The CPU resources referred to are the
accumulator (D), X index register (X), Y index register (Y), stack pointer (SP), and program counter (PC).
Hardware commands can be executed at any time and in any mode excluding a few exceptions as
highlighted (see Section 5.4.3, “BDM Hardware Commands”) and in secure mode (see Section 5.4.1,
“Security”). BDM firmware commands can only be executed when the system is not secure and is in active
background debug mode (BDM).
5.4.1
Security
If the user resets into special single chip mode with the system secured, a secured mode BDM firmware
lookup table is brought into the map overlapping a portion of the standard BDM firmware lookup table.
The secure BDM firmware verifies that the on-chip Flash EEPROM are erased. This being the case, the
UNSEC and ENBDM bit will get set. The BDM program jumps to the start of the standard BDM firmware
and the secured mode BDM firmware is turned off and all BDM commands are allowed. If the Flash does
not verify as erased, the BDM firmware sets the ENBDM bit, without asserting UNSEC, and the firmware
enters a loop. This causes the BDM hardware commands to become enabled, but does not enable the
firmware commands. This allows the BDM hardware to be used to erase the Flash.
BDM operation is not possible in any other mode than special single chip mode when the device is secured.
The device can only be unsecured via BDM serial interface in special single chip mode. For more
information regarding security, please see the S12S_9SEC Block Guide.
5.4.2
Enabling and Activating BDM
The system must be in active BDM to execute standard BDM firmware commands. BDM can be activated
only after being enabled. BDM is enabled by setting the ENBDM bit in the BDM status (BDMSTS)
register. The ENBDM bit is set by writing to the BDM status (BDMSTS) register, via the single-wire
interface, using a hardware command such as WRITE_BD_BYTE.
After being enabled, BDM is activated by one of the following1:
1. BDM is enabled and active immediately out of special single-chip reset.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
182
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
•
•
•
Hardware BACKGROUND command
CPU BGND instruction
Breakpoint force or tag mechanism1
When BDM is activated, the CPU finishes executing the current instruction and then begins executing the
firmware in the standard BDM firmware lookup table. When BDM is activated by a breakpoint, the type
of breakpoint used determines if BDM becomes active before or after execution of the next instruction.
NOTE
If an attempt is made to activate BDM before being enabled, the CPU
resumes normal instruction execution after a brief delay. If BDM is not
enabled, any hardware BACKGROUND commands issued are ignored by
the BDM and the CPU is not delayed.
In active BDM, the BDM registers and standard BDM firmware lookup table are mapped to addresses
0x3_FF00 to 0x3_FFFF. BDM registers are mapped to addresses 0x3_FF00 to 0x3_FF0B. The BDM uses
these registers which are readable anytime by the BDM. However, these registers are not readable by user
programs.
When BDM is activated while CPU executes code overlapping with BDM firmware space the saved
program counter (PC) will be auto incremented by one from the BDM firmware, no matter what caused
the entry into BDM active mode (BGND instruction, BACKGROUND command or breakpoints). In such
a case the PC must be set to the next valid address via a WRITE_PC command before executing the GO
command.
5.4.3
BDM Hardware Commands
Hardware commands are used to read and write target system memory locations and to enter active
background debug mode. Target system memory includes all memory that is accessible by the CPU such
as on-chip RAM, Flash, I/O and control registers.
Hardware commands are executed with minimal or no CPU intervention and do not require the system to
be in active BDM for execution, although, they can still be executed in this mode. When executing a
hardware command, the BDM sub-block waits for a free bus cycle so that the background access does not
disturb the running application program. If a free cycle is not found within 128 clock cycles, the CPU is
momentarily frozen so that the BDM can steal a cycle. When the BDM finds a free cycle, the operation
does not intrude on normal CPU operation provided that it can be completed in a single cycle. However,
if an operation requires multiple cycles the CPU is frozen until the operation is complete, even though the
BDM found a free cycle.
The BDM hardware commands are listed in Table 5-5.
The READ_BD and WRITE_BD commands allow access to the BDM register locations. These locations
are not normally in the system memory map but share addresses with the application in memory. To
distinguish between physical memory locations that share the same address, BDM memory resources are
1. This method is provided by the S12S_DBG module.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
183
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
enabled just for the READ_BD and WRITE_BD access cycle. This allows the BDM to access BDM
locations unobtrusively, even if the addresses conflict with the application memory map.
Table 5-5. Hardware Commands
Opcode
(hex)
Data
Description
BACKGROUND
90
None
Enter background mode if BDM is enabled. If enabled, an ACK will be issued
when the part enters active background mode.
ACK_ENABLE
D5
None
Enable Handshake. Issues an ACK pulse after the command is executed.
ACK_DISABLE
D6
None
Disable Handshake. This command does not issue an ACK pulse.
READ_BD_BYTE
E4
16-bit address Read from memory with standard BDM firmware lookup table in map.
16-bit data out Odd address data on low byte; even address data on high byte.
READ_BD_WORD
EC
16-bit address Read from memory with standard BDM firmware lookup table in map.
16-bit data out Must be aligned access.
READ_BYTE
E0
16-bit address Read from memory with standard BDM firmware lookup table out of map.
16-bit data out Odd address data on low byte; even address data on high byte.
READ_WORD
E8
16-bit address Read from memory with standard BDM firmware lookup table out of map.
16-bit data out Must be aligned access.
WRITE_BD_BYTE
C4
16-bit address Write to memory with standard BDM firmware lookup table in map.
16-bit data in Odd address data on low byte; even address data on high byte.
WRITE_BD_WORD
CC
16-bit address Write to memory with standard BDM firmware lookup table in map.
16-bit data in Must be aligned access.
WRITE_BYTE
C0
16-bit address Write to memory with standard BDM firmware lookup table out of map.
16-bit data in Odd address data on low byte; even address data on high byte.
WRITE_WORD
C8
16-bit address Write to memory with standard BDM firmware lookup table out of map.
16-bit data in Must be aligned access.
Command
NOTE:
If enabled, ACK will occur when data is ready for transmission for all BDM READ commands and will occur after the write is
complete for all BDM WRITE commands.
5.4.4
Standard BDM Firmware Commands
BDM firmware commands are used to access and manipulate CPU resources. The system must be in active
BDM to execute standard BDM firmware commands, see Section 5.4.2, “Enabling and Activating BDM”.
Normal instruction execution is suspended while the CPU executes the firmware located in the standard
BDM firmware lookup table. The hardware command BACKGROUND is the usual way to activate BDM.
As the system enters active BDM, the standard BDM firmware lookup table and BDM registers become
visible in the on-chip memory map at 0x3_FF00–0x3_FFFF, and the CPU begins executing the standard
BDM firmware. The standard BDM firmware watches for serial commands and executes them as they are
received.
The firmware commands are shown in Table 5-6.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
184
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
Table 5-6. Firmware Commands
Command1
Opcode
(hex)
Data
Description
READ_NEXT2
62
16-bit data out Increment X index register by 2 (X = X + 2), then read word X points to.
READ_PC
63
16-bit data out Read program counter.
READ_D
64
16-bit data out Read D accumulator.
READ_X
65
16-bit data out Read X index register.
READ_Y
66
16-bit data out Read Y index register.
67
16-bit data out Read stack pointer.
READ_SP
2
WRITE_NEXT
42
16-bit data in
Increment X index register by 2 (X = X + 2), then write word to location
pointed to by X.
WRITE_PC
43
16-bit data in
Write program counter.
WRITE_D
44
16-bit data in
Write D accumulator.
WRITE_X
45
16-bit data in
Write X index register.
WRITE_Y
46
16-bit data in
Write Y index register.
WRITE_SP
47
16-bit data in
Write stack pointer.
GO
08
none
Go to user program. If enabled, ACK will occur when leaving active
background mode.
GO_UNTIL3
0C
none
Go to user program. If enabled, ACK will occur upon returning to active
background mode.
TRACE1
10
none
Execute one user instruction then return to active BDM. If enabled,
ACK will occur upon returning to active background mode.
TAGGO -> GO
18
none
(Previous enable tagging and go to user program.)
This command will be deprecated and should not be used anymore.
Opcode will be executed as a GO command.
1
If enabled, ACK will occur when data is ready for transmission for all BDM READ commands and will occur after the write is
complete for all BDM WRITE commands.
2 When the firmware command READ_NEXT or WRITE_NEXT is used to access the BDM address space the BDM resources
are accessed rather than user code. Writing BDM firmware is not possible.
3 System stop disables the ACK function and ignored commands will not have an ACK-pulse (e.g., CPU in stop or wait mode).
The GO_UNTIL command will not get an Acknowledge if CPU executes the wait or stop instruction before the “UNTIL”
condition (BDM active again) is reached (see Section 5.4.7, “Serial Interface Hardware Handshake Protocol” last note).
5.4.5
BDM Command Structure
Hardware and firmware BDM commands start with an 8-bit opcode followed by a 16-bit address and/or a
16-bit data word, depending on the command. All the read commands return 16 bits of data despite the
byte or word implication in the command name.
8-bit reads return 16-bits of data, only one byte of which contains valid data.
If reading an even address, the valid data will appear in the MSB. If reading
an odd address, the valid data will appear in the LSB.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
185
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
16-bit misaligned reads and writes are generally not allowed. If attempted
by BDM hardware command, the BDM ignores the least significant bit of
the address and assumes an even address from the remaining bits.
For hardware data read commands, the external host must wait at least 150 bus clock cycles after sending
the address before attempting to obtain the read data. This is to be certain that valid data is available in the
BDM shift register, ready to be shifted out. For hardware write commands, the external host must wait
150 bus clock cycles after sending the data to be written before attempting to send a new command. This
is to avoid disturbing the BDM shift register before the write has been completed. The 150 bus clock cycle
delay in both cases includes the maximum 128 cycle delay that can be incurred as the BDM waits for a
free cycle before stealing a cycle.
For BDM firmware read commands, the external host should wait at least 48 bus clock cycles after sending
the command opcode and before attempting to obtain the read data. The 48 cycle wait allows enough time
for the requested data to be made available in the BDM shift register, ready to be shifted out.
For BDM firmware write commands, the external host must wait 36 bus clock cycles after sending the data
to be written before attempting to send a new command. This is to avoid disturbing the BDM shift register
before the write has been completed.
The external host should wait for at least for 76 bus clock cycles after a TRACE1 or GO command before
starting any new serial command. This is to allow the CPU to exit gracefully from the standard BDM
firmware lookup table and resume execution of the user code. Disturbing the BDM shift register
prematurely may adversely affect the exit from the standard BDM firmware lookup table.
NOTE
If the bus rate of the target processor is unknown or could be changing, it is
recommended that the ACK (acknowledge function) is used to indicate
when an operation is complete. When using ACK, the delay times are
automated.
Figure 5-6 represents the BDM command structure. The command blocks illustrate a series of eight bit
times starting with a falling edge. The bar across the top of the blocks indicates that the BKGD line idles
in the high state. The time for an 8-bit command is 8 × 16 target clock cycles.1
1. Target clock cycles are cycles measured using the target MCU’s serial clock rate. See Section 5.4.6, “BDM Serial Interface”
and Section 5.3.2.1, “BDM Status Register (BDMSTS)” for information on how serial clock rate is selected.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
186
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
Hardware
Read
8 Bits
AT ~16 TC/Bit
16 Bits
AT ~16 TC/Bit
Command
Address
150-BC
Delay
16 Bits
AT ~16 TC/Bit
Data
Next
Command
150-BC
Delay
Hardware
Write
Command
Address
Data
Next
Command
48-BC
DELAY
Firmware
Read
Command
Next
Command
Data
36-BC
DELAY
Firmware
Write
Command
Data
Next
Command
76-BC
Delay
GO,
TRACE
Command
Next
Command
BC = Bus Clock Cycles
TC = Target Clock Cycles
Figure 5-6. BDM Command Structure
5.4.6
BDM Serial Interface
The BDM communicates with external devices serially via the BKGD pin. During reset, this pin is a mode
select input which selects between normal and special modes of operation. After reset, this pin becomes
the dedicated serial interface pin for the BDM.
The BDM serial interface is timed based on the VCO clock (please refer to the CPMU Block Guide for
more details), which gets divided by 8. This clock will be referred to as the target clock in the following
explanation.
The BDM serial interface uses a clocking scheme in which the external host generates a falling edge on
the BKGD pin to indicate the start of each bit time. This falling edge is sent for every bit whether data is
transmitted or received. Data is transferred most significant bit (MSB) first at 16 target clock cycles per
bit. The interface times out if 512 clock cycles occur between falling edges from the host.
The BKGD pin is a pseudo open-drain pin and has an weak on-chip active pull-up that is enabled at all
times. It is assumed that there is an external pull-up and that drivers connected to BKGD do not typically
drive the high level. Since R-C rise time could be unacceptably long, the target system and host provide
brief driven-high (speedup) pulses to drive BKGD to a logic 1. The source of this speedup pulse is the host
for transmit cases and the target for receive cases.
The timing for host-to-target is shown in Figure 5-7 and that of target-to-host in Figure 5-8 and
Figure 5-9. All four cases begin when the host drives the BKGD pin low to generate a falling edge. Since
the host and target are operating from separate clocks, it can take the target system up to one full clock
cycle to recognize this edge. The target measures delays from this perceived start of the bit time while the
host measures delays from the point it actually drove BKGD low to start the bit up to one target clock cycle
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
187
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
earlier. Synchronization between the host and target is established in this manner at the start of every bit
time.
Figure 5-7 shows an external host transmitting a logic 1 and transmitting a logic 0 to the BKGD pin of a
target system. The host is asynchronous to the target, so there is up to a one clock-cycle delay from the
host-generated falling edge to where the target recognizes this edge as the beginning of the bit time. Ten
target clock cycles later, the target senses the bit level on the BKGD pin. Internal glitch detect logic
requires the pin be driven high no later that eight target clock cycles after the falling edge for a logic 1
transmission.
Since the host drives the high speedup pulses in these two cases, the rising edges look like digitally driven
signals.
BDM Clock
(Target MCU)
Host
Transmit 1
Host
Transmit 0
Perceived
Start of Bit Time
Target Senses Bit
10 Cycles
Synchronization
Uncertainty
Earliest
Start of
Next Bit
Figure 5-7. BDM Host-to-Target Serial Bit Timing
The receive cases are more complicated. Figure 5-8 shows the host receiving a logic 1 from the target
system. Since the host is asynchronous to the target, there is up to one clock-cycle delay from the
host-generated falling edge on BKGD to the perceived start of the bit time in the target. The host holds the
BKGD pin low long enough for the target to recognize it (at least two target clock cycles). The host must
release the low drive before the target drives a brief high speedup pulse seven target clock cycles after the
perceived start of the bit time. The host should sample the bit level about 10 target clock cycles after it
started the bit time.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
188
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
BDM Clock
(Target MCU)
Host
Drive to
BKGD Pin
Target System
Speedup
Pulse
High-Impedance
High-Impedance
High-Impedance
Perceived
Start of Bit Time
R-C Rise
BKGD Pin
10 Cycles
10 Cycles
Host Samples
BKGD Pin
Earliest
Start of
Next Bit
Figure 5-8. BDM Target-to-Host Serial Bit Timing (Logic 1)
Figure 5-9 shows the host receiving a logic 0 from the target. Since the host is asynchronous to the target,
there is up to a one clock-cycle delay from the host-generated falling edge on BKGD to the start of the bit
time as perceived by the target. The host initiates the bit time but the target finishes it. Since the target
wants the host to receive a logic 0, it drives the BKGD pin low for 13 target clock cycles then briefly drives
it high to speed up the rising edge. The host samples the bit level about 10 target clock cycles after starting
the bit time.
BDM Clock
(Target MCU)
Host
Drive to
BKGD Pin
High-Impedance
Speedup Pulse
Target System
Drive and
Speedup Pulse
Perceived
Start of Bit Time
BKGD Pin
10 Cycles
10 Cycles
Host Samples
BKGD Pin
Earliest
Start of
Next Bit
Figure 5-9. BDM Target-to-Host Serial Bit Timing (Logic 0)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
189
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
5.4.7
Serial Interface Hardware Handshake Protocol
BDM commands that require CPU execution are ultimately treated at the MCU bus rate. Since the BDM
clock source can be modified when changing the settings for the VCO frequency (CPMUSYNR), it is very
helpful to provide a handshake protocol in which the host could determine when an issued command is
executed by the CPU. The BDM clock frequency is always VCO frequency divided by 8. The alternative
is to always wait the amount of time equal to the appropriate number of cycles at the slowest possible rate
the clock could be running. This sub-section will describe the hardware handshake protocol.
The hardware handshake protocol signals to the host controller when an issued command was successfully
executed by the target. This protocol is implemented by a 16 serial clock cycle low pulse followed by a
brief speedup pulse in the BKGD pin. This pulse is generated by the target MCU when a command, issued
by the host, has been successfully executed (see Figure 5-10). This pulse is referred to as the ACK pulse.
After the ACK pulse has finished: the host can start the bit retrieval if the last issued command was a read
command, or start a new command if the last command was a write command or a control command
(BACKGROUND, GO, GO_UNTIL or TRACE1). The ACK pulse is not issued earlier than 32 serial clock
cycles after the BDM command was issued. The end of the BDM command is assumed to be the 16th tick
of the last bit. This minimum delay assures enough time for the host to perceive the ACK pulse. Note also
that, there is no upper limit for the delay between the command and the related ACK pulse, since the
command execution depends upon the CPU bus, which in some cases could be very slow due to long
accesses taking place.This protocol allows a great flexibility for the POD designers, since it does not rely
on any accurate time measurement or short response time to any event in the serial communication.
BDM Clock
(Target MCU)
16 Cycles
Target
Transmits
ACK Pulse
High-Impedance
High-Impedance
32 Cycles
Speedup Pulse
Minimum Delay
From the BDM Command
BKGD Pin
Earliest
Start of
Next Bit
16th Tick of the
Last Command Bit
Figure 5-10. Target Acknowledge Pulse (ACK)
NOTE
If the ACK pulse was issued by the target, the host assumes the previous
command was executed. If the CPU enters wait or stop prior to executing a
hardware command, the ACK pulse will not be issued meaning that the
BDM command was not executed. After entering wait or stop mode, the
BDM command is no longer pending.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
190
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
Figure 5-11 shows the ACK handshake protocol in a command level timing diagram. The READ_BYTE
instruction is used as an example. First, the 8-bit instruction opcode is sent by the host, followed by the
address of the memory location to be read. The target BDM decodes the instruction. A bus cycle is grabbed
(free or stolen) by the BDM and it executes the READ_BYTE operation. Having retrieved the data, the
BDM issues an ACK pulse to the host controller, indicating that the addressed byte is ready to be retrieved.
After detecting the ACK pulse, the host initiates the byte retrieval process. Note that data is sent in the form
of a word and the host needs to determine which is the appropriate byte based on whether the address was
odd or even.
Target
BKGD Pin READ_BYTE
Host
Byte Address
Host
(2) Bytes are
Retrieved
New BDM
Command
Host
Target
Target
BDM Issues the
ACK Pulse (out of scale)
BDM Decodes
the Command
BDM Executes the
READ_BYTE Command
Figure 5-11. Handshake Protocol at Command Level
Differently from the normal bit transfer (where the host initiates the transmission), the serial interface ACK
handshake pulse is initiated by the target MCU by issuing a negative edge in the BKGD pin. The hardware
handshake protocol in Figure 5-10 specifies the timing when the BKGD pin is being driven, so the host
should follow this timing constraint in order to avoid the risk of an electrical conflict in the BKGD pin.
NOTE
The only place the BKGD pin can have an electrical conflict is when one
side is driving low and the other side is issuing a speedup pulse (high). Other
“highs” are pulled rather than driven. However, at low rates the time of the
speedup pulse can become lengthy and so the potential conflict time
becomes longer as well.
The ACK handshake protocol does not support nested ACK pulses. If a BDM command is not
acknowledge by an ACK pulse, the host needs to abort the pending command first in order to be able to
issue a new BDM command. When the CPU enters wait or stop while the host issues a hardware command
(e.g., WRITE_BYTE), the target discards the incoming command due to the wait or stop being detected.
Therefore, the command is not acknowledged by the target, which means that the ACK pulse will not be
issued in this case. After a certain time the host (not aware of stop or wait) should decide to abort any
possible pending ACK pulse in order to be sure a new command can be issued. Therefore, the protocol
provides a mechanism in which a command, and its corresponding ACK, can be aborted.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
191
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
NOTE
The ACK pulse does not provide a time out. This means for the GO_UNTIL
command that it can not be distinguished if a stop or wait has been executed
(command discarded and ACK not issued) or if the “UNTIL” condition
(BDM active) is just not reached yet. Hence in any case where the ACK
pulse of a command is not issued the possible pending command should be
aborted before issuing a new command. See the handshake abort procedure
described in Section 5.4.8, “Hardware Handshake Abort Procedure”.
5.4.8
Hardware Handshake Abort Procedure
The abort procedure is based on the SYNC command. In order to abort a command, which had not issued
the corresponding ACK pulse, the host controller should generate a low pulse in the BKGD pin by driving
it low for at least 128 serial clock cycles and then driving it high for one serial clock cycle, providing a
speedup pulse. By detecting this long low pulse in the BKGD pin, the target executes the SYNC protocol,
see Section 5.4.9, “SYNC — Request Timed Reference Pulse”, and assumes that the pending command
and therefore the related ACK pulse, are being aborted. Therefore, after the SYNC protocol has been
completed the host is free to issue new BDM commands. For BDM firmware READ or WRITE commands
it can not be guaranteed that the pending command is aborted when issuing a SYNC before the
corresponding ACK pulse. There is a short latency time from the time the READ or WRITE access begins
until it is finished and the corresponding ACK pulse is issued. The latency time depends on the firmware
READ or WRITE command that is issued and on the selected bus clock rate. When the SYNC command
starts during this latency time the READ or WRITE command will not be aborted, but the corresponding
ACK pulse will be aborted. A pending GO, TRACE1 or GO_UNTIL command can not be aborted. Only
the corresponding ACK pulse can be aborted by the SYNC command.
Although it is not recommended, the host could abort a pending BDM command by issuing a low pulse in
the BKGD pin shorter than 128 serial clock cycles, which will not be interpreted as the SYNC command.
The ACK is actually aborted when a negative edge is perceived by the target in the BKGD pin. The short
abort pulse should have at least 4 clock cycles keeping the BKGD pin low, in order to allow the negative
edge to be detected by the target. In this case, the target will not execute the SYNC protocol but the pending
command will be aborted along with the ACK pulse. The potential problem with this abort procedure is
when there is a conflict between the ACK pulse and the short abort pulse. In this case, the target may not
perceive the abort pulse. The worst case is when the pending command is a read command (i.e.,
READ_BYTE). If the abort pulse is not perceived by the target the host will attempt to send a new
command after the abort pulse was issued, while the target expects the host to retrieve the accessed
memory byte. In this case, host and target will run out of synchronism. However, if the command to be
aborted is not a read command the short abort pulse could be used. After a command is aborted the target
assumes the next negative edge, after the abort pulse, is the first bit of a new BDM command.
NOTE
The details about the short abort pulse are being provided only as a reference
for the reader to better understand the BDM internal behavior. It is not
recommended that this procedure be used in a real application.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
192
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
Since the host knows the target serial clock frequency, the SYNC command (used to abort a command)
does not need to consider the lower possible target frequency. In this case, the host could issue a SYNC
very close to the 128 serial clock cycles length. Providing a small overhead on the pulse length in order to
assure the SYNC pulse will not be misinterpreted by the target. See Section 5.4.9, “SYNC — Request
Timed Reference Pulse”.
Figure 5-12 shows a SYNC command being issued after a READ_BYTE, which aborts the READ_BYTE
command. Note that, after the command is aborted a new command could be issued by the host computer.
READ_BYTE CMD is Aborted
by the SYNC Request
(Out of Scale)
BKGD Pin READ_BYTE
Host
Memory Address
SYNC Response
From the Target
(Out of Scale)
READ_STATUS
Target
Host
BDM Decode
and Starts to Execute
the READ_BYTE Command
Target
New BDM Command
Host
Target
New BDM Command
Figure 5-12. ACK Abort Procedure at the Command Level
NOTE
Figure 5-12 does not represent the signals in a true timing scale
Figure 5-13 shows a conflict between the ACK pulse and the SYNC request pulse. This conflict could
occur if a POD device is connected to the target BKGD pin and the target is already in debug active mode.
Consider that the target CPU is executing a pending BDM command at the exact moment the POD is being
connected to the BKGD pin. In this case, an ACK pulse is issued along with the SYNC command. In this
case, there is an electrical conflict between the ACK speedup pulse and the SYNC pulse. Since this is not
a probable situation, the protocol does not prevent this conflict from happening.
At Least 128 Cycles
BDM Clock
(Target MCU)
ACK Pulse
Target MCU
Drives to
BKGD Pin
Host
Drives SYNC
To BKGD Pin
High-Impedance
Host and
Target Drive
to BKGD Pin
Electrical Conflict
Speedup Pulse
Host SYNC Request Pulse
BKGD Pin
16 Cycles
Figure 5-13. ACK Pulse and SYNC Request Conflict
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
193
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
NOTE
This information is being provided so that the MCU integrator will be aware
that such a conflict could occur.
The hardware handshake protocol is enabled by the ACK_ENABLE and disabled by the ACK_DISABLE
BDM commands. This provides backwards compatibility with the existing POD devices which are not
able to execute the hardware handshake protocol. It also allows for new POD devices, that support the
hardware handshake protocol, to freely communicate with the target device. If desired, without the need
for waiting for the ACK pulse.
The commands are described as follows:
• ACK_ENABLE — enables the hardware handshake protocol. The target will issue the ACK pulse
when a CPU command is executed by the CPU. The ACK_ENABLE command itself also has the
ACK pulse as a response.
• ACK_DISABLE — disables the ACK pulse protocol. In this case, the host needs to use the worst
case delay time at the appropriate places in the protocol.
The default state of the BDM after reset is hardware handshake protocol disabled.
All the read commands will ACK (if enabled) when the data bus cycle has completed and the data is then
ready for reading out by the BKGD serial pin. All the write commands will ACK (if enabled) after the data
has been received by the BDM through the BKGD serial pin and when the data bus cycle is complete. See
Section 5.4.3, “BDM Hardware Commands” and Section 5.4.4, “Standard BDM Firmware Commands”
for more information on the BDM commands.
The ACK_ENABLE sends an ACK pulse when the command has been completed. This feature could be
used by the host to evaluate if the target supports the hardware handshake protocol. If an ACK pulse is
issued in response to this command, the host knows that the target supports the hardware handshake
protocol. If the target does not support the hardware handshake protocol the ACK pulse is not issued. In
this case, the ACK_ENABLE command is ignored by the target since it is not recognized as a valid
command.
The BACKGROUND command will issue an ACK pulse when the CPU changes from normal to
background mode. The ACK pulse related to this command could be aborted using the SYNC command.
The GO command will issue an ACK pulse when the CPU exits from background mode. The ACK pulse
related to this command could be aborted using the SYNC command.
The GO_UNTIL command is equivalent to a GO command with exception that the ACK pulse, in this
case, is issued when the CPU enters into background mode. This command is an alternative to the GO
command and should be used when the host wants to trace if a breakpoint match occurs and causes the
CPU to enter active background mode. Note that the ACK is issued whenever the CPU enters BDM, which
could be caused by a breakpoint match or by a BGND instruction being executed. The ACK pulse related
to this command could be aborted using the SYNC command.
The TRACE1 command has the related ACK pulse issued when the CPU enters background active mode
after one instruction of the application program is executed. The ACK pulse related to this command could
be aborted using the SYNC command.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
194
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
5.4.9
SYNC — Request Timed Reference Pulse
The SYNC command is unlike other BDM commands because the host does not necessarily know the
correct communication speed to use for BDM communications until after it has analyzed the response to
the SYNC command. To issue a SYNC command, the host should perform the following steps:
1. Drive the BKGD pin low for at least 128 cycles at the lowest possible BDM serial communication
frequency (The lowest serial communication frequency is determined by the settings for the VCO
clock (CPMUSYNR). The BDM clock frequency is always VCO clock frequency divided by 8.)
2. Drive BKGD high for a brief speedup pulse to get a fast rise time (this speedup pulse is typically
one cycle of the host clock.)
3. Remove all drive to the BKGD pin so it reverts to high impedance.
4. Listen to the BKGD pin for the sync response pulse.
Upon detecting the SYNC request from the host, the target performs the following steps:
1. Discards any incomplete command received or bit retrieved.
2. Waits for BKGD to return to a logic one.
3. Delays 16 cycles to allow the host to stop driving the high speedup pulse.
4. Drives BKGD low for 128 cycles at the current BDM serial communication frequency.
5. Drives a one-cycle high speedup pulse to force a fast rise time on BKGD.
6. Removes all drive to the BKGD pin so it reverts to high impedance.
The host measures the low time of this 128 cycle SYNC response pulse and determines the correct speed
for subsequent BDM communications. Typically, the host can determine the correct communication speed
within a few percent of the actual target speed and the communication protocol can easily tolerate speed
errors of several percent.
As soon as the SYNC request is detected by the target, any partially received command or bit retrieved is
discarded. This is referred to as a soft-reset, equivalent to a time-out in the serial communication. After the
SYNC response, the target will consider the next negative edge (issued by the host) as the start of a new
BDM command or the start of new SYNC request.
Another use of the SYNC command pulse is to abort a pending ACK pulse. The behavior is exactly the
same as in a regular SYNC command. Note that one of the possible causes for a command to not be
acknowledged by the target is a host-target synchronization problem. In this case, the command may not
have been understood by the target and so an ACK response pulse will not be issued.
5.4.10
Instruction Tracing
When a TRACE1 command is issued to the BDM in active BDM, the CPU exits the standard BDM
firmware and executes a single instruction in the user code. Once this has occurred, the CPU is forced to
return to the standard BDM firmware and the BDM is active and ready to receive a new command. If the
TRACE1 command is issued again, the next user instruction will be executed. This facilitates stepping or
tracing through the user code one instruction at a time.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
195
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
If an interrupt is pending when a TRACE1 command is issued, the interrupt stacking operation occurs but
no user instruction is executed. Once back in standard BDM firmware execution, the program counter
points to the first instruction in the interrupt service routine.
Be aware when tracing through the user code that the execution of the user code is done step by step but
all peripherals are free running. Hence possible timing relations between CPU code execution and
occurrence of events of other peripherals no longer exist.
Do not trace the CPU instruction BGND used for soft breakpoints. Tracing over the BGND instruction will
result in a return address pointing to BDM firmware address space.
When tracing through user code which contains stop or wait instructions the following will happen when
the stop or wait instruction is traced:
The CPU enters stop or wait mode and the TRACE1 command can not be finished before leaving
the low power mode. This is the case because BDM active mode can not be entered after CPU
executed the stop instruction. However all BDM hardware commands except the BACKGROUND
command are operational after tracing a stop or wait instruction and still being in stop or wait
mode. If system stop mode is entered (all bus masters are in stop mode) no BDM command is
operational.
As soon as stop or wait mode is exited the CPU enters BDM active mode and the saved PC value
points to the entry of the corresponding interrupt service routine.
In case the handshake feature is enabled the corresponding ACK pulse of the TRACE1 command
will be discarded when tracing a stop or wait instruction. Hence there is no ACK pulse when BDM
active mode is entered as part of the TRACE1 command after CPU exited from stop or wait mode.
All valid commands sent during CPU being in stop or wait mode or after CPU exited from stop or
wait mode will have an ACK pulse. The handshake feature becomes disabled only when system
stop mode has been reached. Hence after a system stop mode the handshake feature must be
enabled again by sending the ACK_ENABLE command.
5.4.11
Serial Communication Time Out
The host initiates a host-to-target serial transmission by generating a falling edge on the BKGD pin. If
BKGD is kept low for more than 128 target clock cycles, the target understands that a SYNC command
was issued. In this case, the target will keep waiting for a rising edge on BKGD in order to answer the
SYNC request pulse. If the rising edge is not detected, the target will keep waiting forever without any
time-out limit.
Consider now the case where the host returns BKGD to logic one before 128 cycles. This is interpreted as
a valid bit transmission, and not as a SYNC request. The target will keep waiting for another falling edge
marking the start of a new bit. If, however, a new falling edge is not detected by the target within 512 clock
cycles since the last falling edge, a time-out occurs and the current command is discarded without affecting
memory or the operating mode of the MCU. This is referred to as a soft-reset.
If a read command is issued but the data is not retrieved within 512 serial clock cycles, a soft-reset will
occur causing the command to be disregarded. The data is not available for retrieval after the time-out has
occurred. This is the expected behavior if the handshake protocol is not enabled. In order to allow the data
to be retrieved even with a large clock frequency mismatch (between BDM and CPU) when the hardware
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
196
Freescale Semiconductor
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
handshake protocol is enabled, the time out between a read command and the data retrieval is disabled.
Therefore, the host could wait for more then 512 serial clock cycles and still be able to retrieve the data
from an issued read command. However, once the handshake pulse (ACK pulse) is issued, the time-out
feature is re-activated, meaning that the target will time out after 512 clock cycles. Therefore, the host
needs to retrieve the data within a 512 serial clock cycles time frame after the ACK pulse had been issued.
After that period, the read command is discarded and the data is no longer available for retrieval. Any
negative edge in the BKGD pin after the time-out period is considered to be a new command or a SYNC
request.
Note that whenever a partially issued command, or partially retrieved data, has occurred the time out in the
serial communication is active. This means that if a time frame higher than 512 serial clock cycles is
observed between two consecutive negative edges and the command being issued or data being retrieved
is not complete, a soft-reset will occur causing the partially received command or data retrieved to be
disregarded. The next negative edge in the BKGD pin, after a soft-reset has occurred, is considered by the
target as the start of a new BDM command, or the start of a SYNC request pulse.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
197
Background Debug Module (S12SBDMV1)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
198
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 6
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Table 6-1. Revision History
Revision Number
Revision
Date
Sections
Affected
02.07
13.DEC.2007
Section 6.5,
“Application
Information
02.08
09.MAY.2008
General
Spelling corrections. Revision history format changed.
02.09
29.MAY.2008
6.4.5.4
Added note for end aligned, PurePC, rollover case.
6.1
Summary of Changes
Added application information
Introduction
The S12SDBG module provides an on-chip trace buffer with flexible triggering capability to allow
non-intrusive debug of application software. The S12SDBG module is optimized for S12SCPU
debugging.
Typically the S12SDBG module is used in conjunction with the S12SBDM module, whereby the user
configures the S12SDBG module for a debugging session over the BDM interface. Once configured the
S12SDBG module is armed and the device leaves BDM returning control to the user program, which is
then monitored by the S12SDBG module. Alternatively the S12SDBG module can be configured over a
serial interface using SWI routines.
6.1.1
Glossary Of Terms
COF: Change Of Flow. Change in the program flow due to a conditional branch, indexed jump or interrupt.
BDM: Background Debug Mode
S12SBDM: Background Debug Module
DUG: Device User Guide, describing the features of the device into which the DBG is integrated.
WORD: 16 bit data entity
Data Line: 20 bit data entity
CPU: S12SCPU module
DBG: S12SDBG module
POR: Power On Reset
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
199
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Tag: Tags can be attached to CPU opcodes as they enter the instruction pipe. If the tagged opcode reaches
the execution stage a tag hit occurs.
6.1.2
Overview
The comparators monitor the bus activity of the CPU module. A match can initiate a state sequencer
transition. On a transition to the Final State, bus tracing is triggered and/or a breakpoint can be generated.
Independent of comparator matches a transition to Final State with associated tracing and breakpoint can
be triggered immediately by writing to the TRIG control bit.
The trace buffer is visible through a 2-byte window in the register address map and can be read out using
standard 16-bit word reads. Tracing is disabled when the MCU system is secured.
6.1.3
•
•
•
•
•
•
Features
Three comparators (A, B and C)
— Comparators A compares the full address bus and full 16-bit data bus
— Comparator A features a data bus mask register
— Comparators B and C compare the full address bus only
— Each comparator features selection of read or write access cycles
— Comparator B allows selection of byte or word access cycles
— Comparator matches can initiate state sequencer transitions
Three comparator modes
— Simple address/data comparator match mode
— Inside address range mode, Addmin ≤ Address ≤ Addmax
— Outside address range match mode, Address < Addmin or Address > Addmax
Two types of matches
— Tagged — This matches just before a specific instruction begins execution
— Force — This is valid on the first instruction boundary after a match occurs
Two types of breakpoints
— CPU breakpoint entering BDM on breakpoint (BDM)
— CPU breakpoint executing SWI on breakpoint (SWI)
Trigger mode independent of comparators
— TRIG Immediate software trigger
Four trace modes
— Normal: change of flow (COF) PC information is stored (see Section 6.4.5.2.1, “Normal Mode)
for change of flow definition.
— Loop1: same as Normal but inhibits consecutive duplicate source address entries
— Detail: address and data for all cycles except free cycles and opcode fetches are stored
— Compressed Pure PC: all program counter addresses are stored
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
200
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
•
4-stage state sequencer for trace buffer control
— Tracing session trigger linked to Final State of state sequencer
— Begin and End alignment of tracing to trigger
6.1.4
Modes of Operation
The DBG module can be used in all MCU functional modes.
During BDM hardware accesses and whilst the BDM module is active, CPU monitoring is disabled. When
the CPU enters active BDM Mode through a BACKGROUND command, the DBG module, if already
armed, remains armed.
The DBG module tracing is disabled if the MCU is secure, however, breakpoints can still be generated
Table 6-2. Mode Dependent Restriction Summary
BDM
Enable
BDM
Active
MCU
Secure
Comparator
Matches Enabled
Breakpoints
Possible
Tagging
Possible
Tracing
Possible
x
x
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
0
0
0
Yes
Only SWI
Yes
Yes
0
1
0
1
0
0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
1
0
No
No
No
No
6.1.5
Active BDM not possible when not enabled
Block Diagram
TAGS
TAGHITS
BREAKPOINT REQUESTS
TO CPU
COMPARATOR A
COMPARATOR B
COMPARATOR C
COMPARATOR
MATCH CONTROL
CPU BUS
BUS INTERFACE
SECURE
MATCH0
MATCH1
TAG &
MATCH
CONTROL
LOGIC
TRANSITION
STATE
STATE SEQUENCER
STATE
MATCH2
TRACE
CONTROL
TRIGGER
TRACE BUFFER
READ TRACE DATA (DBG READ DATA BUS)
Figure 6-1. Debug Module Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
201
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.2
External Signal Description
There are no external signals associated with this module.
6.3
6.3.1
Memory Map and Registers
Module Memory Map
A summary of the registers associated with the DBG sub-block is shown in Figure 6-2. Detailed
descriptions of the registers and bits are given in the subsections that follow.
Address
2
3
4
Name
Bit 7
6
5
ARM
0
TRIG
0
0
4
0x0020
DBGC1
R
W
0x0021
DBGSR
R
W
1TBF
0x0022
DBGTCR
R
W
0
0x0023
DBGC2
R
W
0
0x0024
DBGTBH
R
W
0x0025
DBGTBL
R
W
0x0026
DBGCNT
R 1 TBF
W
0
0x0027
DBGSCRX
0
0
0
0
0x0027
DBGMFR
R
W
R
W
0
0
0
SZE
SZ
SZE
SZ
0
0
0
0x0028
0x0028
0x0028
R
W
R
DBGBCTL
W
R
DBGCCTL
W
DBGACTL
3
2
1
0
Bit 0
BDM
DBGBRK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SC3
SC2
SC1
SC0
0
0
MC2
MC1
MC0
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
NDB
COMPE
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
0
0
0
0
0
TSOURCE
SSF2
COMRV
SSF1
SSF0
0
TRCMOD
TALIGN
ABCM
CNT
0x0029
DBGXAH
R
W
0x002A
DBGXAM
R
W
Bit 15
14
13
12
11
0x002B
DBGXAL
R
W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
0
0
COMPE
COMPE
Bit 17
Bit 16
10
9
Bit 8
2
1
Bit 0
Figure 6-2. Quick Reference to DBG Registers
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
202
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Address
Name
0x002C
DBGADH
0x002D
0x002E
2
3
4
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
R
W
Bit 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit 8
DBGADL
R
W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
DBGADHM
R
W
Bit 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit 8
1
Bit 0
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
W
This bit is visible at DBGCNT[7] and DBGSR[7]
This represents the contents if the Comparator A control register is blended into this address.
This represents the contents if the Comparator B control register is blended into this address
This represents the contents if the Comparator C control register is blended into this address
0x002F
1
Bit 7
DBGADLM
Figure 6-2. Quick Reference to DBG Registers
6.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section consists of the DBG control and trace buffer register descriptions in address order. Each
comparator has a bank of registers that are visible through an 8-byte window between 0x0028 and 0x002F
in the DBG module register address map. When ARM is set in DBGC1, the only bits in the DBG module
registers that can be written are ARM, TRIG, and COMRV[1:0]
6.3.2.1
Debug Control Register 1 (DBGC1)
Address: 0x0020
7
R
W
Reset
ARM
6
5
0
0
TRIG
0
0
0
4
3
BDM
DBGBRK
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
COMRV
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-3. Debug Control Register (DBGC1)
Read: Anytime
Write: Bits 7, 1, 0 anytime
Bit 6 can be written anytime but always reads back as 0.
Bits 4:3 anytime DBG is not armed.
NOTE
When disarming the DBG by clearing ARM with software, the contents of
bits[4:3] are not affected by the write, since up until the write operation,
ARM = 1 preventing these bits from being written. These bits must be
cleared using a second write if required.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
203
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Table 6-3. DBGC1 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
ARM
Arm Bit — The ARM bit controls whether the DBG module is armed. This bit can be set and cleared by user
software and is automatically cleared on completion of a debug session, or if a breakpoint is generated with
tracing not enabled. On setting this bit the state sequencer enters State1.
0 Debugger disarmed
1 Debugger armed
6
TRIG
Immediate Trigger Request Bit — This bit when written to 1 requests an immediate trigger independent of state
sequencer status. When tracing is complete a forced breakpoint may be generated depending upon DBGBRK
and BDM bit settings. This bit always reads back a 0. Writing a 0 to this bit has no effect. If the
DBGTCR_TSOURCE bit is clear no tracing is carried out. If tracing has already commenced using BEGIN trigger
alignment, it continues until the end of the tracing session as defined by the TALIGN bit, thus TRIG has no affect.
In secure mode tracing is disabled and writing to this bit cannot initiate a tracing session.
The session is ended by setting TRIG and ARM simultaneously.
0 Do not trigger until the state sequencer enters the Final State.
1 Trigger immediately
4
BDM
Background Debug Mode Enable — This bit determines if a breakpoint causes the system to enter Background
Debug Mode (BDM) or initiate a Software Interrupt (SWI). If this bit is set but the BDM is not enabled by the
ENBDM bit in the BDM module, then breakpoints default to SWI.
0 Breakpoint to Software Interrupt if BDM inactive. Otherwise no breakpoint.
1 Breakpoint to BDM, if BDM enabled. Otherwise breakpoint to SWI
3
DBGBRK
S12SDBG Breakpoint Enable Bit — The DBGBRK bit controls whether the debugger will request a breakpoint
on reaching the state sequencer Final State. If tracing is enabled, the breakpoint is generated on completion
of the tracing session. If tracing is not enabled, the breakpoint is generated immediately.
0 No Breakpoint generated
1 Breakpoint generated
1–0
COMRV
Comparator Register Visibility Bits — These bits determine which bank of comparator register is visible in the
8-byte window of the S12SDBG module address map, located between 0x0028 to 0x002F. Furthermore these
bits determine which register is visible at the address 0x0027. See Table 6-4.
Table 6-4. COMRV Encoding
6.3.2.2
COMRV
Visible Comparator
Visible Register at 0x0027
00
Comparator A
DBGSCR1
01
Comparator B
DBGSCR2
10
Comparator C
DBGSCR3
11
None
DBGMFR
Debug Status Register (DBGSR)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
204
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Address: 0x0021
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TBF
0
0
0
0
SSF2
SSF1
SSF0
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
POR
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-4. Debug Status Register (DBGSR)
Read: Anytime
Write: Never
Table 6-5. DBGSR Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
TBF
Trace Buffer Full — The TBF bit indicates that the trace buffer has stored 64 or more lines of data since it was
last armed. If this bit is set, then all 64 lines will be valid data, regardless of the value of DBGCNT bits. The TBF
bit is cleared when ARM in DBGC1 is written to a one. The TBF is cleared by the power on reset initialization.
Other system generated resets have no affect on this bit
This bit is also visible at DBGCNT[7]
2–0
SSF[2:0]
State Sequencer Flag Bits — The SSF bits indicate in which state the State Sequencer is currently in. During
a debug session on each transition to a new state these bits are updated. If the debug session is ended by
software clearing the ARM bit, then these bits retain their value to reflect the last state of the state sequencer
before disarming. If a debug session is ended by an internal event, then the state sequencer returns to state0
and these bits are cleared to indicate that state0 was entered during the session. On arming the module the state
sequencer enters state1 and these bits are forced to SSF[2:0] = 001. See Table 6-6.
Table 6-6. SSF[2:0] — State Sequence Flag Bit Encoding
SSF[2:0]
Current State
000
State0 (disarmed)
001
State1
010
State2
011
State3
100
Final State
101,110,111
Reserved
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
205
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.3
Debug Trace Control Register (DBGTCR)
Address: 0x0022
7
R
0
W
Reset
6
TSOURCE
0
0
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
TRCMOD
0
1
0
0
0
0
TALIGN
0
Figure 6-5. Debug Trace Control Register (DBGTCR)
Read: Anytime
Write: Bit 6 only when DBG is neither secure nor armed.Bits 3,2,0 anytime the module is disarmed.
Table 6-7. DBGTCR Field Descriptions
Field
Description
6
TSOURCE
Trace Source Control Bit — The TSOURCE bit enables a tracing session given a trigger condition. If the MCU
system is secured, this bit cannot be set and tracing is inhibited.
This bit must be set to read the trace buffer.
0 Debug session without tracing requested
1 Debug session with tracing requested
3–2
TRCMOD
Trace Mode Bits — See Section 6.4.5.2, “Trace Modes for detailed Trace Mode descriptions. In Normal Mode,
change of flow information is stored. In Loop1 Mode, change of flow information is stored but redundant entries
into trace memory are inhibited. In Detail Mode, address and data for all memory and register accesses is stored.
In Compressed Pure PC mode the program counter value for each instruction executed is stored. See Table 6-8.
0
TALIGN
Trigger Align Bit — This bit controls whether the trigger is aligned to the beginning or end of a tracing session.
0 Trigger at end of stored data
1 Trigger before storing data
Table 6-8. TRCMOD Trace Mode Bit Encoding
TRCMOD
Description
00
Normal
01
Loop1
10
Detail
11
Compressed Pure PC
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
206
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.4
Debug Control Register2 (DBGC2)
Address: 0x0023
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
ABCM
W
Reset
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-6. Debug Control Register2 (DBGC2)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime the module is disarmed.
This register configures the comparators for range matching.
Table 6-9. DBGC2 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1–0
ABCM[1:0]
A and B Comparator Match Control — These bits determine the A and B comparator match mapping as
described in Table 6-10.
Table 6-10. ABCM Encoding
1
ABCM
Description
00
Match0 mapped to comparator A match: Match1 mapped to comparator B match.
01
Match 0 mapped to comparator A/B inside range: Match1 disabled.
10
Match 0 mapped to comparator A/B outside range: Match1 disabled.
11
Reserved1
Currently defaults to Comparator A, Comparator B disabled
6.3.2.5
Debug Trace Buffer Register (DBGTBH:DBGTBL)
Address: 0x0024, 0x0025
15
R
W
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
POR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Other
Resets
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Figure 6-7. Debug Trace Buffer Register (DBGTB)
Read: Only when unlocked AND unsecured AND not armed AND TSOURCE set.
Write: Aligned word writes when disarmed unlock the trace buffer for reading but do not affect trace buffer
contents.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
207
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Table 6-11. DBGTB Field Descriptions
Field
Description
15–0
Bit[15:0]
Trace Buffer Data Bits — The Trace Buffer Register is a window through which the 20-bit wide data lines of the
Trace Buffer may be read 16 bits at a time. Each valid read of DBGTB increments an internal trace buffer pointer
which points to the next address to be read. When the ARM bit is set the trace buffer is locked to prevent reading.
The trace buffer can only be unlocked for reading by writing to DBGTB with an aligned word write when the
module is disarmed. The DBGTB register can be read only as an aligned word, any byte reads or misaligned
access of these registers return 0 and do not cause the trace buffer pointer to increment to the next trace buffer
address. Similarly reads while the debugger is armed or with the TSOURCE bit clear, return 0 and do not affect
the trace buffer pointer. The POR state is undefined. Other resets do not affect the trace buffer contents.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
208
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.6
Debug Count Register (DBGCNT)
Address: 0x0026
R
7
6
TBF
0
—
0
—
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
0
—
0
—
0
CNT
W
Reset
POR
—
0
—
0
—
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-8. Debug Count Register (DBGCNT)
Read: Anytime
Write: Never
Table 6-12. DBGCNT Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
TBF
Trace Buffer Full — The TBF bit indicates that the trace buffer has stored 64 or more lines of data since it was
last armed. If this bit is set, then all 64 lines will be valid data, regardless of the value of DBGCNT bits. The TBF
bit is cleared when ARM in DBGC1 is written to a one. The TBF is cleared by the power on reset initialization.
Other system generated resets have no affect on this bit
This bit is also visible at DBGSR[7]
5–0
CNT[5:0]
Count Value — The CNT bits indicate the number of valid data 20-bit data lines stored in the Trace Buffer.
Table 6-13 shows the correlation between the CNT bits and the number of valid data lines in the Trace Buffer.
When the CNT rolls over to zero, the TBF bit in DBGSR is set and incrementing of CNT will continue in
end-trigger mode. The DBGCNT register is cleared when ARM in DBGC1 is written to a one. The DBGCNT
register is cleared by power-on-reset initialization but is not cleared by other system resets. Thus should a reset
occur during a debug session, the DBGCNT register still indicates after the reset, the number of valid trace buffer
entries stored before the reset occurred. The DBGCNT register is not decremented when reading from the trace
buffer.
Table 6-13. CNT Decoding Table
TBF
CNT[5:0]
Description
0
000000
No data valid
0
000001
000010
000100
000110
..
111111
1 line valid
2 lines valid
4 lines valid
6 lines valid
..
63 lines valid
1
000000
64 lines valid; if using Begin trigger alignment,
ARM bit will be cleared and the tracing session ends.
1
000001
..
..
111110
64 lines valid,
oldest data has been overwritten by most recent data
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
209
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.7
Debug State Control Registers
There is a dedicated control register for each of the state sequencer states 1 to 3 that determines if
transitions from that state are allowed, depending upon comparator matches or tag hits, and defines the
next state for the state sequencer following a match. The three debug state control registers are located at
the same address in the register address map (0x0027). Each register can be accessed using the COMRV
bits in DBGC1 to blend in the required register. The COMRV = 11 value blends in the match flag register
(DBGMFR).
Table 6-14. State Control Register Access Encoding
COMRV
Visible State Control Register
00
DBGSCR1
01
DBGSCR2
10
DBGSCR3
11
DBGMFR
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
210
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.7.1
Debug State Control Register 1 (DBGSCR1)
Address: 0x0027
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
3
2
1
0
SC3
SC2
SC1
SC0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-9. Debug State Control Register 1 (DBGSCR1)
Read: If COMRV[1:0] = 00
Write: If COMRV[1:0] = 00 and DBG is not armed.
This register is visible at 0x0027 only with COMRV[1:0] = 00. The state control register 1 selects the
targeted next state whilst in State1. The matches refer to the match channels of the comparator match
control logic as depicted in Figure 6-1 and described in 6.3.2.8.1. Comparators must be enabled by setting
the comparator enable bit in the associated DBGXCTL control register.
Table 6-15. DBGSCR1 Field Descriptions
Field
3–0
SC[3:0]
Description
These bits select the targeted next state whilst in State1, based upon the match event.
Table 6-16. State1 Sequencer Next State Selection
SC[3:0]
Description (Unspecified matches have no effect)
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Any match to Final State
Match1 to State3
Match2 to State2
Match1 to State2
Match0 to State2....... Match1 to State3
Match1 to State3.........Match0 to Final State
Match0 to State2....... Match2 to State3
Either Match0 or Match1 to State2
Reserved
Match0 to State3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Either Match0 or Match2 to Final State........Match1 to State2
Reserved
Reserved
The priorities described in Table 6-36 dictate that in the case of simultaneous matches, a match leading to
final state has priority followed by the match on the lower channel number (0,1,2). Thus with
SC[3:0]=1101 a simultaneous match0/match1 transitions to final state.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
211
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.7.2
Debug State Control Register 2 (DBGSCR2)
Address: 0x0027
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
3
2
1
0
SC3
SC2
SC1
SC0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-10. Debug State Control Register 2 (DBGSCR2)
Read: If COMRV[1:0] = 01
Write: If COMRV[1:0] = 01 and DBG is not armed.
This register is visible at 0x0027 only with COMRV[1:0] = 01. The state control register 2 selects the
targeted next state whilst in State2. The matches refer to the match channels of the comparator match
control logic as depicted in Figure 6-1 and described in Section 6.3.2.8.1, “Debug Comparator Control
Register (DBGXCTL). Comparators must be enabled by setting the comparator enable bit in the associated
DBGXCTL control register.
Table 6-17. DBGSCR2 Field Descriptions
Field
3–0
SC[3:0]
Description
These bits select the targeted next state whilst in State2, based upon the match event.
Table 6-18. State2 —Sequencer Next State Selection
SC[3:0]
Description (Unspecified matches have no effect)
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Match0 to State1....... Match2 to State3.
Match1 to State3
Match2 to State3
Match1 to State3....... Match0 Final State
Match1 to State1....... Match2 to State3.
Match2 to Final State
Match2 to State1..... Match0 to Final State
Either Match0 or Match1 to Final State
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Either Match0 or Match1 to Final State........Match2 to State3
Reserved
Reserved
Either Match0 or Match1 to Final State........Match2 to State1
The priorities described in Table 6-36 dictate that in the case of simultaneous matches, a match leading to
final state has priority followed by the match on the lower channel number (0,1,2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
212
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.7.3
Debug State Control Register 3 (DBGSCR3)
Address: 0x0027
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
3
2
1
0
SC3
SC2
SC1
SC0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-11. Debug State Control Register 3 (DBGSCR3)
Read: If COMRV[1:0] = 10
Write: If COMRV[1:0] = 10 and DBG is not armed.
This register is visible at 0x0027 only with COMRV[1:0] = 10. The state control register three selects the
targeted next state whilst in State3. The matches refer to the match channels of the comparator match
control logic as depicted in Figure 6-1 and described in Section 6.3.2.8.1, “Debug Comparator Control
Register (DBGXCTL). Comparators must be enabled by setting the comparator enable bit in the associated
DBGXCTL control register.
Table 6-19. DBGSCR3 Field Descriptions
Field
3–0
SC[3:0]
Description
These bits select the targeted next state whilst in State3, based upon the match event.
Table 6-20. State3 — Sequencer Next State Selection
SC[3:0]
Description (Unspecified matches have no effect)
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Match0 to State1
Match2 to State2........ Match1 to Final State
Match0 to Final State....... Match1 to State1
Match1 to Final State....... Match2 to State1
Match1 to State2
Match1 to Final State
Match2 to State2........ Match0 to Final State
Match0 to Final State
Reserved
Reserved
Either Match1 or Match2 to State1....... Match0 to Final State
Reserved
Reserved
Either Match1 or Match2 to Final State....... Match0 to State1
Match0 to State2....... Match2 to Final State
Reserved
The priorities described in Table 6-36 dictate that in the case of simultaneous matches, a match leading to
final state has priority followed by the match on the lower channel number (0,1,2).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
213
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.7.4
Debug Match Flag Register (DBGMFR)
Address: 0x0027
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
MC2
MC1
MC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-12. Debug Match Flag Register (DBGMFR)
Read: If COMRV[1:0] = 11
Write: Never
DBGMFR is visible at 0x0027 only with COMRV[1:0] = 11. It features 3 flag bits each mapped directly
to a channel. Should a match occur on the channel during the debug session, then the corresponding flag
is set and remains set until the next time the module is armed by writing to the ARM bit. Thus the contents
are retained after a debug session for evaluation purposes. These flags cannot be cleared by software, they
are cleared only when arming the module. A set flag does not inhibit the setting of other flags. Once a flag
is set, further comparator matches on the same channel in the same session have no affect on that flag.
6.3.2.8
Comparator Register Descriptions
Each comparator has a bank of registers that are visible through an 8-byte window in the DBG module
register address map. Comparator A consists of 8 register bytes (3 address bus compare registers, two data
bus compare registers, two data bus mask registers and a control register). Comparator B consists of four
register bytes (three address bus compare registers and a control register). Comparator C consists of four
register bytes (three address bus compare registers and a control register).
Each set of comparator registers can be accessed using the COMRV bits in the DBGC1 register.
Unimplemented registers (e.g. Comparator B data bus and data bus masking) read as zero and cannot be
written. The control register for comparator B differs from those of comparators A and C.
Table 6-21. Comparator Register Layout
0x0028
CONTROL
Read/Write
Comparators A,B and C
0x0029
ADDRESS HIGH
Read/Write
Comparators A,B and C
0x002A
ADDRESS MEDIUM
Read/Write
Comparators A,B and C
0x002B
ADDRESS LOW
Read/Write
Comparators A,B and C
0x002C
DATA HIGH COMPARATOR
Read/Write
Comparator A only
0x002D
DATA LOW COMPARATOR
Read/Write
Comparator A only
0x002E
DATA HIGH MASK
Read/Write
Comparator A only
0x002F
DATA LOW MASK
Read/Write
Comparator A only
6.3.2.8.1
Debug Comparator Control Register (DBGXCTL)
The contents of this register bits 7 and 6 differ depending upon which comparator registers are visible in
the 8-byte window of the DBG module register address map.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
214
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Address: 0x0028
R
W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SZE
SZ
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
NDB
COMPE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-13. Debug Comparator Control Register DBGACTL (Comparator A)
Address: 0x0028
R
W
7
6
5
4
3
2
SZE
SZ
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
0
1
0
0
0
COMPE
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-14. Debug Comparator Control Register DBGBCTL (Comparator B)
Address: 0x0028
R
7
6
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
5
4
3
2
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
COMPE
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-15. Debug Comparator Control Register DBGCCTL (Comparator C)
Read: DBGACTL if COMRV[1:0] = 00
DBGBCTL if COMRV[1:0] = 01
DBGCCTL if COMRV[1:0] = 10
Write: DBGACTL if COMRV[1:0] = 00 and DBG not armed
DBGBCTL if COMRV[1:0] = 01 and DBG not armed
DBGCCTL if COMRV[1:0] = 10 and DBG not armed
Table 6-22. DBGXCTL Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
SZE
(Comparators
A and B)
Size Comparator Enable Bit — The SZE bit controls whether access size comparison is enabled for the
associated comparator. This bit is ignored if the TAG bit in the same register is set.
0 Word/Byte access size is not used in comparison
1 Word/Byte access size is used in comparison
6
SZ
(Comparators
A and B)
Size Comparator Value Bit — The SZ bit selects either word or byte access size in comparison for the
associated comparator. This bit is ignored if the SZE bit is cleared or if the TAG bit in the same register is set.
0 Word access size is compared
1 Byte access size is compared
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
215
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Table 6-22. DBGXCTL Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
5
TAG
Tag Select— This bit controls whether the comparator match has immediate effect, causing an immediate
state sequencer transition or tag the opcode at the matched address. Tagged opcodes trigger only if they
reach the execution stage of the instruction queue.
0 Allow state sequencer transition immediately on match
1 On match, tag the opcode. If the opcode is about to be executed allow a state sequencer transition
4
BRK
Break— This bit controls whether a comparator match terminates a debug session immediately, independent
of state sequencer state. To generate an immediate breakpoint the module breakpoints must be enabled
using the DBGC1 bit DBGBRK.
0 The debug session termination is dependent upon the state sequencer and trigger conditions.
1 A match on this channel terminates the debug session immediately; breakpoints if active are generated,
tracing, if active, is terminated and the module disarmed.
3
RW
Read/Write Comparator Value Bit — The RW bit controls whether read or write is used in compare for the
associated comparator. The RW bit is not used if RWE = 0. This bit is ignored if the TAG bit in the same
register is set.
0 Write cycle is matched1Read cycle is matched
2
RWE
Read/Write Enable Bit — The RWE bit controls whether read or write comparison is enabled for the
associated comparator.This bit is ignored if the TAG bit in the same register is set
0 Read/Write is not used in comparison
1 Read/Write is used in comparison
Not Data Bus — The NDB bit controls whether the match occurs when the data bus matches the comparator
1
register value or when the data bus differs from the register value. This bit is ignored if the TAG bit in the same
NDB
(Comparator A) register is set. This bit is only available for comparator A.
0 Match on data bus equivalence to comparator register contents
1 Match on data bus difference to comparator register contents
0
COMPE
Determines if comparator is enabled
0 The comparator is not enabled
1 The comparator is enabled
Table 6-23 shows the effect for RWE and RW on the comparison conditions. These bits are ignored if the
corresponding TAG bit is set since the match occurs based on the tagged opcode reaching the execution
stage of the instruction queue.
Table 6-23. Read or Write Comparison Logic Table
RWE Bit
RW Bit
RW Signal
Comment
0
x
0
RW not used in comparison
0
x
1
RW not used in comparison
1
0
0
Write data bus
1
0
1
No match
1
1
0
No match
1
1
1
Read data bus
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
216
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.3.2.8.2
Debug Comparator Address High Register (DBGXAH)
Address: 0x0029
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
1
0
Bit 17
Bit 16
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 6-16. Debug Comparator Address High Register (DBGXAH)
The DBGC1_COMRV bits determine which comparator address registers are visible in the 8-byte window
from 0x0028 to 0x002F as shown in Section Table 6-24., “Comparator Address Register Visibility
Table 6-24. Comparator Address Register Visibility
COMRV
Visible Comparator
00
DBGAAH, DBGAAM, DBGAAL
01
DBGBAH, DBGBAM, DBGBAL
10
DBGCAH, DBGCAM, DBGCAL
11
None
Read: Anytime. See Table 6-24 for visible register encoding.
Write: If DBG not armed. See Table 6-24 for visible register encoding.
Table 6-25. DBGXAH Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1–0
Bit[17:16]
Comparator Address High Compare Bits — The Comparator address high compare bits control whether the
selected comparator compares the address bus bits [17:16] to a logic one or logic zero.
0 Compare corresponding address bit to a logic zero
1 Compare corresponding address bit to a logic one
6.3.2.8.3
Debug Comparator Address Mid Register (DBGXAM)
Address: 0x002A
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 6-17. Debug Comparator Address Mid Register (DBGXAM)
Read: Anytime. See Table 6-24 for visible register encoding.
Write: If DBG not armed. See Table 6-24 for visible register encoding.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
217
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Table 6-26. DBGXAM Field Descriptions
Field
7–0
Bit[15:8]
Description
Comparator Address Mid Compare Bits — The Comparator address mid compare bits control whether the
selected comparator compares the address bus bits [15:8] to a logic one or logic zero.
0 Compare corresponding address bit to a logic zero
1 Compare corresponding address bit to a logic one
6.3.2.8.4
Debug Comparator Address Low Register (DBGXAL)
Address: 0x002B
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 6-18. Debug Comparator Address Low Register (DBGXAL)
Read: Anytime. See Table 6-24 for visible register encoding.
Write: If DBG not armed. See Table 6-24 for visible register encoding.
Table 6-27. DBGXAL Field Descriptions
Field
7–0
Bits[7:0]
Description
Comparator Address Low Compare Bits — The Comparator address low compare bits control whether the
selected comparator compares the address bus bits [7:0] to a logic one or logic zero.
0 Compare corresponding address bit to a logic zero
1 Compare corresponding address bit to a logic one
6.3.2.8.5
Debug Comparator Data High Register (DBGADH)
Address: 0x002C
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 6-19. Debug Comparator Data High Register (DBGADH)
Read: If COMRV[1:0] = 00
Write: If COMRV[1:0] = 00 and DBG not armed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
218
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Table 6-28. DBGADH Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–0
Bits[15:8]
Comparator Data High Compare Bits— The Comparator data high compare bits control whether the selected
comparator compares the data bus bits [15:8] to a logic one or logic zero. The comparator data compare bits are
only used in comparison if the corresponding data mask bit is logic 1. This register is available only for
comparator A. Data bus comparisons are only performed if the TAG bit in DBGACTL is clear.
0 Compare corresponding data bit to a logic zero
1 Compare corresponding data bit to a logic one
6.3.2.8.6
Debug Comparator Data Low Register (DBGADL)
Address: 0x002D
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 6-20. Debug Comparator Data Low Register (DBGADL)
Read: If COMRV[1:0] = 00
Write: If COMRV[1:0] = 00 and DBG not armed.
Table 6-29. DBGADL Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–0
Bits[7:0]
Comparator Data Low Compare Bits — The Comparator data low compare bits control whether the selected
comparator compares the data bus bits [7:0] to a logic one or logic zero. The comparator data compare bits are
only used in comparison if the corresponding data mask bit is logic 1. This register is available only for
comparator A. Data bus comparisons are only performed if the TAG bit in DBGACTL is clear
0 Compare corresponding data bit to a logic zero
1 Compare corresponding data bit to a logic one
6.3.2.8.7
Debug Comparator Data High Mask Register (DBGADHM)
Address: 0x002E
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 6-21. Debug Comparator Data High Mask Register (DBGADHM)
Read: If COMRV[1:0] = 00
Write: If COMRV[1:0] = 00 and DBG not armed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
219
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Table 6-30. DBGADHM Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–0
Bits[15:8]
Comparator Data High Mask Bits — The Comparator data high mask bits control whether the selected
comparator compares the data bus bits [15:8] to the corresponding comparator data compare bits. Data bus
comparisons are only performed if the TAG bit in DBGACTL is clear
0 Do not compare corresponding data bit Any value of corresponding data bit allows match.
1 Compare corresponding data bit
6.3.2.8.8
Debug Comparator Data Low Mask Register (DBGADLM)
Address: 0x002F
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 6-22. Debug Comparator Data Low Mask Register (DBGADLM)
Read: If COMRV[1:0] = 00
Write: If COMRV[1:0] = 00 and DBG not armed.
Table 6-31. DBGADLM Field Descriptions
Field
7–0
Bits[7:0]
6.4
Description
Comparator Data Low Mask Bits — The Comparator data low mask bits control whether the selected
comparator compares the data bus bits [7:0] to the corresponding comparator data compare bits. Data bus
comparisons are only performed if the TAG bit in DBGACTL is clear
0 Do not compare corresponding data bit. Any value of corresponding data bit allows match
1 Compare corresponding data bit
Functional Description
This section provides a complete functional description of the DBG module. If the part is in secure mode,
the DBG module can generate breakpoints but tracing is not possible.
6.4.1
S12SDBG Operation
Arming the DBG module by setting ARM in DBGC1 allows triggering the state sequencer, storing of data
in the trace buffer and generation of breakpoints to the CPU. The DBG module is made up of four main
blocks, the comparators, control logic, the state sequencer, and the trace buffer.
The comparators monitor the bus activity of the CPU. All comparators can be configured to monitor
address bus activity. Comparator A can also be configured to monitor databus activity and mask out
individual data bus bits during a compare. Comparators can be configured to use R/W and word/byte
access qualification in the comparison. A match with a comparator register value can initiate a state
sequencer transition to another state (see Figure 6-24). Either forced or tagged matches are possible. Using
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
220
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
a forced match, a state sequencer transition can occur immediately on a successful match of system busses
and comparator registers. Whilst tagging, at a comparator match, the instruction opcode is tagged and only
if the instruction reaches the execution stage of the instruction queue can a state sequencer transition occur.
In the case of a transition to Final State, bus tracing is triggered and/or a breakpoint can be generated.
A state sequencer transition to final state (with associated breakpoint, if enabled) can be initiated by
writing to the TRIG bit in the DBGC1 control register.
The trace buffer is visible through a 2-byte window in the register address map and must be read out using
standard 16-bit word reads.
TAGS
TAGHITS
BREAKPOINT REQUESTS
TO CPU
COMPARATOR A
COMPARATOR B
COMPARATOR C
COMPARATOR
MATCH CONTROL
CPU BUS
BUS INTERFACE
SECURE
MATCH0
MATCH1
TAG &
MATCH
CONTROL
LOGIC
TRANSITION
STATE
STATE SEQUENCER
STATE
MATCH2
TRACE
CONTROL
TRIGGER
TRACE BUFFER
READ TRACE DATA (DBG READ DATA BUS)
Figure 6-23. DBG Overview
6.4.2
Comparator Modes
The DBG contains three comparators, A, B and C. Each comparator compares the system address bus with
the address stored in DBGXAH, DBGXAM, and DBGXAL. Furthermore, comparator A also compares
the data buses to the data stored in DBGADH, DBGADL and allows masking of individual data bus bits.
All comparators are disabled in BDM and during BDM accesses.
The comparator match control logic (see Figure 6-23) configures comparators to monitor the buses for an
exact address or an address range, whereby either an access inside or outside the specified range generates
a match condition. The comparator configuration is controlled by the control register contents and the
range control by the DBGC2 contents.
A match can initiate a transition to another state sequencer state (see Section 6.4.4, “State Sequence
Control”). The comparator control register also allows the type of access to be included in the comparison
through the use of the RWE, RW, SZE, and SZ bits. The RWE bit controls whether read or write
comparison is enabled for the associated comparator and the RW bit selects either a read or write access
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
221
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
for a valid match. Similarly the SZE and SZ bits allow the size of access (word or byte) to be considered
in the compare. Only comparators A and B feature SZE and SZ.
The TAG bit in each comparator control register is used to determine the match condition. By setting TAG,
the comparator qualifies a match with the output of opcode tracking logic and a state sequencer transition
occurs when the tagged instruction reaches the CPU execution stage. Whilst tagging the RW, RWE, SZE,
and SZ bits and the comparator data registers are ignored; the comparator address register must be loaded
with the exact opcode address.
If the TAG bit is clear (forced type match) a comparator match is generated when the selected address
appears on the system address bus. If the selected address is an opcode address, the match is generated
when the opcode is fetched from the memory, which precedes the instruction execution by an indefinite
number of cycles due to instruction pipelining. For a comparator match of an opcode at an odd address
when TAG = 0, the corresponding even address must be contained in the comparator register. Thus for an
opcode at odd address (n), the comparator register must contain address (n–1).
Once a successful comparator match has occurred, the condition that caused the original match is not
verified again on subsequent matches. Thus if a particular data value is verified at a given address, this
address may not still contain that data value when a subsequent match occurs.
Match[0, 1, 2] map directly to Comparators [A, B, C] respectively, except in range modes (see
Section 6.3.2.4, “Debug Control Register2 (DBGC2)). Comparator channel priority rules are described in
the priority section (Section 6.4.3.4, “Channel Priorities).
6.4.2.1
Single Address Comparator Match
With range comparisons disabled, the match condition is an exact equivalence of address bus with the
value stored in the comparator address registers. Further qualification of the type of access (R/W,
word/byte) and databus contents is possible, depending on comparator channel.
6.4.2.1.1
Comparator C
Comparator C offers only address and direction (R/W) comparison. The exact address is compared, thus
with the comparator address register loaded with address (n) a word access of address (n–1) also accesses
(n) but does not cause a match.
Table 6-32. Comparator C Access Considerations
Condition For Valid Match
1
Comp C Address RWE
RW
Examples
Read and write accesses of ADDR[n]
1
ADDR[n]
0
X
LDAA ADDR[n]
STAA #$BYTE ADDR[n]
Write accesses of ADDR[n]
ADDR[n]
1
0
STAA #$BYTE ADDR[n]
Read accesses of ADDR[n]
ADDR[n]
1
1
LDAA #$BYTE ADDR[n]
A word access of ADDR[n-1] also accesses ADDR[n] but does not generate a match.
The comparator address register must contain the exact address from the code.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
222
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.4.2.1.2
Comparator B
Comparator B offers address, direction (R/W) and access size (word/byte) comparison. If the SZE bit is
set the access size (word or byte) is compared with the SZ bit value such that only the specified size of
access causes a match. Thus if configured for a byte access of a particular address, a word access covering
the same address does not lead to match.
Assuming the access direction is not qualified (RWE=0), for simplicity, the size access considerations are
shown in Table 6-33.
Table 6-33. Comparator B Access Size Considerations
Condition For Valid Match
1
Comp B Address RWE
SZE
SZ8
0
0
X
MOVB #$BYTE ADDR[n]
MOVW #$WORD ADDR[n]
ADDR[n]
0
1
0
MOVW #$WORD ADDR[n]
LDD ADDR[n]
ADDR[n]
0
1
1
MOVB #$BYTE ADDR[n]
LDAB ADDR[n]
Word and byte accesses of ADDR[n]
1
ADDR[n]
Word accesses of ADDR[n] only
Byte accesses of ADDR[n] only
Examples
A word access of ADDR[n-1] also accesses ADDR[n] but does not generate a match.
The comparator address register must contain the exact address from the code.
Access direction can also be used to qualify a match for Comparator B in the same way as described for
Comparator C in Table 6-32.
6.4.2.1.3
Comparator A
Comparator A offers address, direction (R/W), access size (word/byte) and data bus comparison.
Table 6-34 lists access considerations with data bus comparison. On word accesses the data byte of the
lower address is mapped to DBGADH. Access direction can also be used to qualify a match for
Comparator A in the same way as described for Comparator C in Table 6-32.
Table 6-34. Comparator A Matches When Accessing ADDR[n]
SZE
SZ
DBGADHM,
DBGADLM
Access
DH=DBGADH, DL=DBGADL
0
X
$0000
Byte
Word
No databus comparison
0
X
$FF00
Byte, data(ADDR[n])=DH
Word, data(ADDR[n])=DH, data(ADDR[n+1])=X
Match data( ADDR[n])
0
X
$00FF
Word, data(ADDR[n])=X, data(ADDR[n+1])=DL
Match data( ADDR[n+1])
0
X
$00FF
Byte, data(ADDR[n])=X, data(ADDR[n+1])=DL
Possible unintended match
0
X
$FFFF
Word, data(ADDR[n])=DH, data(ADDR[n+1])=DL
Match data( ADDR[n], ADDR[n+1])
0
X
$FFFF
Byte, data(ADDR[n])=DH, data(ADDR[n+1])=DL
Possible unintended match
1
0
$0000
Word
No databus comparison
1
0
$00FF
Word, data(ADDR[n])=X, data(ADDR[n+1])=DL
Match only data at ADDR[n+1]
1
0
$FF00
Word, data(ADDR[n])=DH, data(ADDR[n+1])=X
Match only data at ADDR[n]
1
0
$FFFF
Word, data(ADDR[n])=DH, data(ADDR[n+1])=DL
Match data at ADDR[n] & ADDR[n+1]
Comment
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
223
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
SZE
SZ
DBGADHM,
DBGADLM
1
1
$0000
Byte
No databus comparison
1
1
$FF00
Byte, data(ADDR[n])=DH
Match data at ADDR[n]
6.4.2.1.4
Access
DH=DBGADH, DL=DBGADL
Comment
Comparator A Data Bus Comparison NDB Dependency
Comparator A features an NDB control bit, which allows data bus comparators to be configured to either
trigger on equivalence or trigger on difference. This allows monitoring of a difference in the contents of
an address location from an expected value.
When matching on an equivalence (NDB=0), each individual data bus bit position can be masked out by
clearing the corresponding mask bit (DBGADHM/DBGADLM) so that it is ignored in the comparison. A
match occurs when all data bus bits with corresponding mask bits set are equivalent. If all mask register
bits are clear, then a match is based on the address bus only, the data bus is ignored.
When matching on a difference, mask bits can be cleared to ignore bit positions. A match occurs when any
data bus bit with corresponding mask bit set is different. Clearing all mask bits, causes all bits to be ignored
and prevents a match because no difference can be detected. In this case address bus equivalence does not
cause a match.
Table 6-35. NDB and MASK bit dependency
6.4.2.2
NDB
DBGADHM[n] /
DBGADLM[n]
Comment
0
0
Do not compare data bus bit.
0
1
Compare data bus bit. Match on equivalence.
1
0
Do not compare data bus bit.
1
1
Compare data bus bit. Match on difference.
Range Comparisons
Using the AB comparator pair for a range comparison, the data bus can also be used for qualification by
using the comparator A data registers. Furthermore the DBGACTL RW and RWE bits can be used to
qualify the range comparison on either a read or a write access. The corresponding DBGBCTL bits are
ignored. The SZE and SZ control bits are ignored in range mode. The comparator A TAG bit is used to tag
range comparisons. The comparator B TAG bit is ignored in range modes. In order for a range comparison
using comparators A and B, both COMPEA and COMPEB must be set; to disable range comparisons both
must be cleared. The comparator A BRK bit is used to for the AB range, the comparator B BRK bit is
ignored in range mode.
When configured for range comparisons and tagging, the ranges are accurate only to word boundaries.
6.4.2.2.1
Inside Range (CompA_Addr ≤ address ≤ CompB_Addr)
In the Inside Range comparator mode, comparator pair A and B can be configured for range comparisons.
This configuration depends upon the control register (DBGC2). The match condition requires that a valid
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
224
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
match for both comparators happens on the same bus cycle. A match condition on only one comparator is
not valid. An aligned word access which straddles the range boundary is valid only if the aligned address
is inside the range.
6.4.2.2.2
Outside Range (address < CompA_Addr or address > CompB_Addr)
In the Outside Range comparator mode, comparator pair A and B can be configured for range comparisons.
A single match condition on either of the comparators is recognized as valid. An aligned word access
which straddles the range boundary is valid only if the aligned address is outside the range.
Outside range mode in combination with tagging can be used to detect if the opcode fetches are from an
unexpected range. In forced match mode the outside range match would typically be activated at any
interrupt vector fetch or register access. This can be avoided by setting the upper range limit to $3FFFF or
lower range limit to $00000 respectively.
6.4.3
Match Modes (Forced or Tagged)
Match modes are used as qualifiers for a state sequencer change of state. The Comparator control register
TAG bits select the match mode. The modes are described in the following sections.
6.4.3.1
Forced Match
When configured for forced matching, a comparator channel match can immediately initiate a transition
to the next state sequencer state whereby the corresponding flags in DBGSR are set. The state control
register for the current state determines the next state. Forced matches are typically generated 2-3 bus
cycles after the final matching address bus cycle, independent of comparator RWE/RW settings.
Furthermore since opcode fetches occur several cycles before the opcode execution a forced match of an
opcode address typically precedes a tagged match at the same address.
6.4.3.2
Tagged Match
If a CPU taghit occurs a transition to another state sequencer state is initiated and the corresponding
DBGSR flags are set. For a comparator related taghit to occur, the DBG must first attach tags to
instructions as they are fetched from memory. When the tagged instruction reaches the execution stage of
the instruction queue a taghit is generated by the CPU. This can initiate a state sequencer transition.
6.4.3.3
Immediate Trigger
Independent of comparator matches it is possible to initiate a tracing session and/or breakpoint by writing
to the TRIG bit in DBGC1. If configured for begin aligned tracing, this triggers the state sequencer into
the Final State, if configured for end alignment, setting the TRIG bit disarms the module, ending the
session and issues a forced breakpoint request to the CPU.
It is possible to set both TRIG and ARM simultaneously to generate an immediate trigger, independent of
the current state of ARM.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
225
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.4.3.4
Channel Priorities
In case of simultaneous matches the priority is resolved according to Table 6-36. The lower priority is
suppressed. It is thus possible to miss a lower priority match if it occurs simultaneously with a higher
priority. The priorities described in Table 6-36 dictate that in the case of simultaneous matches, the match
pointing to final state has highest priority followed by the lower channel number (0,1,2).
Table 6-36. Channel Priorities
Priority
Source
Highest
Lowest
6.4.4
Action
TRIG
Enter Final State
Channel pointing to Final State
Transition to next state as defined by state control registers
Match0 (force or tag hit)
Transition to next state as defined by state control registers
Match1 (force or tag hit)
Transition to next state as defined by state control registers
Match2 (force or tag hit)
Transition to next state as defined by state control registers
State Sequence Control
ARM = 0
State 0
(Disarmed)
ARM = 1
State1
State2
ARM = 0
Session Complete
(Disarm)
Final State
State3
ARM = 0
Figure 6-24. State Sequencer Diagram
The state sequencer allows a defined sequence of events to provide a trigger point for tracing of data in the
trace buffer. Once the DBG module has been armed by setting the ARM bit in the DBGC1 register, then
state1 of the state sequencer is entered. Further transitions between the states are then controlled by the
state control registers and channel matches. From Final State the only permitted transition is back to the
disarmed state0. Transition between any of the states 1 to 3 is not restricted. Each transition updates the
SSF[2:0] flags in DBGSR accordingly to indicate the current state.
Alternatively writing to the TRIG bit in DBGSC1, provides an immediate trigger independent of
comparator matches.
Independent of the state sequencer, each comparator channel can be individually configured to generate an
immediate breakpoint when a match occurs through the use of the BRK bits in the DBGxCTL registers.
Thus it is possible to generate an immediate breakpoint on selected channels, whilst a state sequencer
transition can be initiated by a match on other channels. If a debug session is ended by a match on a channel
the state sequencer transitions through Final State for a clock cycle to state0. This is independent of tracing
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
226
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
and breakpoint activity, thus with tracing and breakpoints disabled, the state sequencer enters state0 and
the debug module is disarmed.
6.4.4.1
Final State
On entering Final State a trigger may be issued to the trace buffer according to the trace alignment control
as defined by the TALIGN bit (see Section 6.3.2.3, “Debug Trace Control Register (DBGTCR)”). If the
TSOURCE bit in DBGTCR is clear then the trace buffer is disabled and the transition to Final State can
only generate a breakpoint request. In this case or upon completion of a tracing session when tracing is
enabled, the ARM bit in the DBGC1 register is cleared, returning the module to the disarmed state0. If
tracing is enabled a breakpoint request can occur at the end of the tracing session. If neither tracing nor
breakpoints are enabled then when the final state is reached it returns automatically to state0 and the debug
module is disarmed.
6.4.5
Trace Buffer Operation
The trace buffer is a 64 lines deep by 20-bits wide RAM array. The DBG module stores trace information
in the RAM array in a circular buffer format. The system accesses the RAM array through a register
window (DBGTBH:DBGTBL) using 16-bit wide word accesses. After each complete 20-bit trace buffer
line is read, an internal pointer into the RAM increments so that the next read receives fresh information.
Data is stored in the format shown in Table 6-37 and Table 6-40. After each store the counter register
DBGCNT is incremented. Tracing of CPU activity is disabled when the BDM is active. Reading the trace
buffer whilst the DBG is armed returns invalid data and the trace buffer pointer is not incremented.
6.4.5.1
Trace Trigger Alignment
Using the TALIGN bit (see Section 6.3.2.3, “Debug Trace Control Register (DBGTCR)) it is possible to
align the trigger with the end or the beginning of a tracing session.
If end alignment is selected, tracing begins when the ARM bit in DBGC1 is set and State1 is entered; the
transition to Final State signals the end of the tracing session. Tracing with Begin-Trigger starts at the
opcode of the trigger. Using end alignment or when the tracing is initiated by writing to the TRIG bit whilst
configured for begin alignment, tracing starts in the second cycle after the DBGC1 write cycle.
6.4.5.1.1
Storing with Begin Trigger Alignment
Storing with begin alignment, data is not stored in the Trace Buffer until the Final State is entered. Once
the trigger condition is met the DBG module remains armed until 64 lines are stored in the Trace Buffer.
If the trigger is at the address of the change-of-flow instruction the change of flow associated with the
trigger is stored in the Trace Buffer. Using begin alignment together with tagging, if the tagged instruction
is about to be executed then the trace is started. Upon completion of the tracing session the breakpoint is
generated, thus the breakpoint does not occur at the tagged instruction boundary.
6.4.5.1.2
Storing with End Trigger Alignment
Storing with end alignment, data is stored in the Trace Buffer until the Final State is entered, at which point
the DBG module becomes disarmed and no more data is stored. If the trigger is at the address of a change
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
227
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
of flow instruction, the trigger event is not stored in the Trace Buffer. If all trace buffer lines have been
used before a trigger event occurrs then the trace continues at the first line, overwriting the oldest entries.
6.4.5.2
Trace Modes
Four trace modes are available. The mode is selected using the TRCMOD bits in the DBGTCR register.
Tracing is enabled using the TSOURCE bit in the DBGTCR register. The modes are described in the
following subsections.
6.4.5.2.1
Normal Mode
In Normal Mode, change of flow (COF) program counter (PC) addresses are stored.
COF addresses are defined as follows:
• Source address of taken conditional branches (long, short, bit-conditional, and loop primitives)
• Destination address of indexed JMP, JSR, and CALL instruction
• Destination address of RTI, RTS, and RTC instructions
• Vector address of interrupts, except for BDM vectors
LBRA, BRA, BSR, BGND as well as non-indexed JMP, JSR, and CALL instructions are not classified as
change of flow and are not stored in the trace buffer.
Stored information includes the full 18-bit address bus and information bits, which contains a
source/destination bit to indicate whether the stored address was a source address or destination address.
NOTE
When a COF instruction with destination address is executed, the
destination address is stored to the trace buffer on instruction completion,
indicating the COF has taken place. If an interrupt occurs simultaneously
then the next instruction carried out is actually from the interrupt service
routine. The instruction at the destination address of the original program
flow gets executed after the interrupt service routine.
In the following example an IRQ interrupt occurs during execution of the
indexed JMP at address MARK1. The BRN at the destination (SUB_1) is
not executed until after the IRQ service routine but the destination address
is entered into the trace buffer to indicate that the indexed JMP COF has
taken place.
MARK1
MARK2
LDX
JMP
NOP
#SUB_1
0,X
SUB_1
BRN
*
ADDR1
NOP
DBNE
A,PART5
LDAB
STAB
#$F0
VAR_C1
IRQ_ISR
; IRQ interrupt occurs during execution of this
;
; JMP Destination address TRACE BUFFER ENTRY 1
; RTI Destination address TRACE BUFFER ENTRY 3
;
; Source address TRACE BUFFER ENTRY 4
; IRQ Vector $FFF2 = TRACE BUFFER ENTRY 2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
228
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
RTI
;
The execution flow taking into account the IRQ is as follows
MARK1
IRQ_ISR
SUB_1
ADDR1
6.4.5.2.2
LDX
JMP
LDAB
STAB
RTI
BRN
NOP
DBNE
#SUB_1
0,X
#$F0
VAR_C1
;
;
;
*
;
;
A,PART5
Loop1 Mode
Loop1 Mode, similarly to Normal Mode also stores only COF address information to the trace buffer, it
however allows the filtering out of redundant information.
The intent of Loop1 Mode is to prevent the Trace Buffer from being filled entirely with duplicate
information from a looping construct such as delays using the DBNE instruction or polling loops using
BRSET/BRCLR instructions. Immediately after address information is placed in the Trace Buffer, the
DBG module writes this value into a background register. This prevents consecutive duplicate address
entries in the Trace Buffer resulting from repeated branches.
Loop1 Mode only inhibits consecutive duplicate source address entries that would typically be stored in
most tight looping constructs. It does not inhibit repeated entries of destination addresses or vector
addresses, since repeated entries of these would most likely indicate a bug in the user’s code that the DBG
module is designed to help find.
6.4.5.2.3
Detail Mode
In Detail Mode, address and data for all memory and register accesses is stored in the trace buffer. This
mode is intended to supply additional information on indexed, indirect addressing modes where storing
only the destination address would not provide all information required for a user to determine where the
code is in error. This mode also features information bit storage to the trace buffer, for each address byte
storage. The information bits indicate the size of access (word or byte) and the type of access (read or
write).
When tracing in Detail Mode, all cycles are traced except those when the CPU is either in a free or opcode
fetch cycle.
6.4.5.2.4
Compressed Pure PC Mode
In Compressed Pure PC Mode, the PC addresses of all executed opcodes, including illegal opcodes are
stored. A compressed storage format is used to increase the effective depth of the trace buffer. This is
achieved by storing the lower order bits each time and using 2 information bits to indicate if a 64 byte
boundary has been crossed, in which case the full PC is stored.
Each Trace Buffer row consists of 2 information bits and 18 PC address bits
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
229
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
NOTE:
When tracing is terminated using forced breakpoints, latency in breakpoint
generation means that opcodes following the opcode causing the breakpoint
can be stored to the trace buffer. The number of opcodes is dependent on
program flow. This can be avoided by using tagged breakpoints.
6.4.5.3
Trace Buffer Organization (Normal, Loop1, Detail modes)
ADRH, ADRM, ADRL denote address high, middle and low byte respectively. The numerical suffix refers
to the tracing count. The information format for Loop1 and Normal modes is identical. In Detail mode, the
address and data for each entry are stored on consecutive lines, thus the maximum number of entries is 32.
In this case DBGCNT bits are incremented twice, once for the address line and once for the data line, on
each trace buffer entry. In Detail mode CINF comprises of R/W and size access information (CRW and
CSZ respectively).
Single byte data accesses in Detail Mode are always stored to the low byte of the trace buffer (DATAL)
and the high byte is cleared. When tracing word accesses, the byte at the lower address is always stored to
trace buffer byte1 and the byte at the higher address is stored to byte0.
Table 6-37. Trace Buffer Organization (Normal,Loop1,Detail modes)
4-bits
8-bits
8-bits
Field 2
Field 1
Field 0
CINF1,ADRH1
ADRM1
ADRL1
0
DATAH1
DATAL1
CINF2,ADRH2
ADRM2
ADRL2
0
DATAH2
DATAL2
Entry 1
PCH1
PCM1
PCL1
Entry 2
PCH2
PCM2
PCL2
Entry
Number
Mode
Entry 1
Detail Mode
Entry 2
Normal/Loop1
Modes
6.4.5.3.1
Information Bit Organization
The format of the bits is dependent upon the active trace mode as described below.
Field2 Bits in Detail Mode
Bit 3
Bit 2
CSZ
CRW
Bit 1
Bit 0
ADDR[17] ADDR[16]
Figure 6-25. Field2 Bits in Detail Mode
In Detail Mode the CSZ and CRW bits indicate the type of access being made by the CPU.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
230
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Table 6-38. Field Descriptions
Bit
Description
3
CSZ
Access Type Indicator— This bit indicates if the access was a byte or word size when tracing in Detail Mode
0 Word Access
1 Byte Access
2
CRW
Read Write Indicator — This bit indicates if the corresponding stored address corresponds to a read or write
access when tracing in Detail Mode.
0 Write Access
1 Read Access
1
ADDR[17]
Address Bus bit 17— Corresponds to system address bus bit 17.
0
ADDR[16]
Address Bus bit 16— Corresponds to system address bus bit 16.
Field2 Bits in Normal and Loop1 Modes
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CSD
CVA
PC17
PC16
Figure 6-26. Information Bits PCH
Table 6-39. PCH Field Descriptions
Bit
Description
3
CSD
Source Destination Indicator — In Normal and Loop1 mode this bit indicates if the corresponding stored
address is a source or destination address. This bit has no meaning in Compressed Pure PC mode.
0 Source Address
1 Destination Address
2
CVA
Vector Indicator — In Normal and Loop1 mode this bit indicates if the corresponding stored address is a vector
address. Vector addresses are destination addresses, thus if CVA is set, then the corresponding CSD is also set.
This bit has no meaning in Compressed Pure PC mode.
0 Non-Vector Destination Address
1 Vector Destination Address
1
PC17
Program Counter bit 17— In Normal and Loop1 mode this bit corresponds to program counter bit 17.
0
PC16
Program Counter bit 16— In Normal and Loop1 mode this bit corresponds to program counter bit 16.
6.4.5.4
Trace Buffer Organization (Compressed Pure PC mode)
Table 6-40. Trace Buffer Organization Example (Compressed PurePC mode)
Mode
2-bits
Line
Number Field 3
6-bits
6-bits
6-bits
Field 2
Field 1
Field 0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
231
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
Compressed
Pure PC Mode
Line 1
00
PC1 (Initial 18-bit PC Base Address)
Line 2
11
PC4
PC3
PC2
Line 3
01
0
0
PC5
Line 4
00
Line 5
10
Line 6
00
PC6 (New 18-bit PC Base Address)
0
PC8
PC7
PC9 (New 18-bit PC Base Address)
NOTE
Configured for end aligned triggering in compressed PurePC mode, then
after rollover it is possible that the oldest base address is overwritten. In this
case all entries between the pointer and the next base address have lost their
base address following rollover. For example in Table 6-40 if one line of
rollover has occurred, Line 1, PC1, is overwritten with a new entry. Thus the
entries on Lines 2 and 3 have lost their base address. For reconstruction of
program flow the first base address following the pointer must be used, in
the example, Line 4. The pointer points to the oldest entry, Line 2.
Field3 Bits in Compressed Pure PC Modes
Table 6-41. Compressed Pure PC Mode Field 3 Information Bit Encoding
INF1
INF0
0
0
Base PC address TB[17:0] contains a full PC[17:0] value
TRACE BUFFER ROW CONTENT
0
1
Trace Buffer[5:0] contain incremental PC relative to base address zero value
1
0
Trace Buffer[11:0] contain next 2 incremental PCs relative to base address zero value
1
1
Trace Buffer[17:0] contain next 3 incremental PCs relative to base address zero value
Each time that PC[17:6] differs from the previous base PC[17:6], then a new base address is stored. The
base address zero value is the lowest address in the 64 address range
The first line of the trace buffer always gets a base PC address, this applies also on rollover.
6.4.5.5
Reading Data from Trace Buffer
The data stored in the Trace Buffer can be read provided the DBG module is not armed, is configured for
tracing (TSOURCE bit is set) and the system not secured. When the ARM bit is written to 1 the trace buffer
is locked to prevent reading. The trace buffer can only be unlocked for reading by a single aligned word
write to DBGTB when the module is disarmed.
The Trace Buffer can only be read through the DBGTB register using aligned word reads, any byte or
misaligned reads return 0 and do not cause the trace buffer pointer to increment to the next trace buffer
address. The Trace Buffer data is read out first-in first-out. By reading CNT in DBGCNT the number of
valid lines can be determined. DBGCNT does not decrement as data is read.
Whilst reading an internal pointer is used to determine the next line to be read. After a tracing session, the
pointer points to the oldest data entry, thus if no rollover has occurred, the pointer points to line0, otherwise
it points to the line with the oldest entry. In compressed Pure PC mode on rollover the line with the oldest
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
232
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
data entry may also contain newer data entries in fields 0 and 1. Thus if rollover is indicated by the TBF
bit, the line status must be decoded using the INF bits in field3 of that line. If both INF bits are clear then
the line contains only entries from before the last rollover.
If INF0=1 then field 0 contains post rollover data but fields 1 and 2 contain pre rollover data.
If INF1=1 then fields 0 and 1 contain post rollover data but field 2 contains pre rollover data.
The pointer is initialized by each aligned write to DBGTBH to point to the oldest data again. This enables
an interrupted trace buffer read sequence to be easily restarted from the oldest data entry.
The least significant word of line is read out first. This corresponds to the fields 1 and 0 of Table 6-37. The
next word read returns field 2 in the least significant bits [3:0] and “0” for bits [15:4].
Reading the Trace Buffer while the DBG module is armed returns invalid data and no shifting of the RAM
pointer occurs.
6.4.5.6
Trace Buffer Reset State
The Trace Buffer contents and DBGCNT bits are not initialized by a system reset. Thus should a system
reset occur, the trace session information from immediately before the reset occurred can be read out and
the number of valid lines in the trace buffer is indicated by DBGCNT. The internal pointer to the current
trace buffer address is initialized by unlocking the trace buffer and points to the oldest valid data even if a
reset occurred during the tracing session. To read the trace buffer after a reset, TSOURCE must be set,
otherwise the trace buffer reads as all zeroes. Generally debugging occurrences of system resets is best
handled using end trigger alignment since the reset may occur before the trace trigger, which in the begin
trigger alignment case means no information would be stored in the trace buffer.
The Trace Buffer contents and DBGCNT bits are undefined following a POR.
NOTE
An external pin RESET that occurs simultaneous to a trace buffer entry can,
in very seldom cases, lead to either that entry being corrupted or the first
entry of the session being corrupted. In such cases the other contents of the
trace buffer still contain valid tracing information. The case occurs when the
reset assertion coincides with the trace buffer entry clock edge.
6.4.6
Tagging
A tag follows program information as it advances through the instruction queue. When a tagged instruction
reaches the head of the queue a tag hit occurs and can initiate a state sequencer transition.
Each comparator control register features a TAG bit, which controls whether the comparator match causes
a state sequencer transition immediately or tags the opcode at the matched address. If a comparator is
enabled for tagged comparisons, the address stored in the comparator match address registers must be an
opcode address.
Using Begin trigger together with tagging, if the tagged instruction is about to be executed then the
transition to the next state sequencer state occurs. If the transition is to the Final State, tracing is started.
Only upon completion of the tracing session can a breakpoint be generated. Using End alignment, when
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
233
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
the tagged instruction is about to be executed and the next transition is to Final State then a breakpoint is
generated immediately, before the tagged instruction is carried out.
R/W monitoring, access size (SZ) monitoring and data bus monitoring are not useful if tagging is selected,
since the tag is attached to the opcode at the matched address and is not dependent on the data bus nor on
the type of access. Thus these bits are ignored if tagging is selected.
When configured for range comparisons and tagging, the ranges are accurate only to word boundaries.
Tagging is disabled when the BDM becomes active.
6.4.7
Breakpoints
It is possible to generate breakpoints from channel transitions to final state or using software to write to
the TRIG bit in the DBGC1 register.
6.4.7.1
Breakpoints From Comparator Channels
Breakpoints can be generated when the state sequencer transitions to the Final State. If configured for
tagging, then the breakpoint is generated when the tagged opcode reaches the execution stage of the
instruction queue.
If a tracing session is selected by the TSOURCE bit, breakpoints are requested when the tracing session
has completed, thus if Begin aligned triggering is selected, the breakpoint is requested only on completion
of the subsequent trace (see Table 6-42). If no tracing session is selected, breakpoints are requested
immediately.
If the BRK bit is set, then the associated breakpoint is generated immediately independent of tracing
trigger alignment.
Table 6-42. Breakpoint Setup For CPU Breakpoints
BRK
TALIGN
DBGBRK
0
0
0
Fill Trace Buffer until trigger then disarm (no breakpoints)
0
0
1
Fill Trace Buffer until trigger, then breakpoint request occurs
0
1
0
Start Trace Buffer at trigger (no breakpoints)
0
1
1
Start Trace Buffer at trigger
A breakpoint request occurs when Trace Buffer is full
1
x
1
Terminate tracing and generate breakpoint immediately on trigger
1
x
0
Terminate tracing immediately on trigger
6.4.7.2
Breakpoint Alignment
Breakpoints Generated Via The TRIG Bit
If a TRIG triggers occur, the Final State is entered whereby tracing trigger alignment is defined by the
TALIGN bit. If a tracing session is selected by the TSOURCE bit, breakpoints are requested when the
tracing session has completed, thus if Begin aligned triggering is selected, the breakpoint is requested only
on completion of the subsequent trace (see Table 6-42). If no tracing session is selected, breakpoints are
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
234
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
requested immediately. TRIG breakpoints are possible with a single write to DBGC1, setting ARM and
TRIG simultaneously.
6.4.7.3
Breakpoint Priorities
If a TRIG trigger occurs after Begin aligned tracing has already started, then the TRIG no longer has an
effect. When the associated tracing session is complete, the breakpoint occurs. Similarly if a TRIG is
followed by a subsequent comparator channel match, it has no effect, since tracing has already started.
If a forced SWI breakpoint coincides with a BGND in user code with BDM enabled, then the BDM is
activated by the BGND and the breakpoint to SWI is suppressed.
6.4.7.3.1
DBG Breakpoint Priorities And BDM Interfacing
Breakpoint operation is dependent on the state of the BDM module. If the BDM module is active, the CPU
is executing out of BDM firmware, thus comparator matches and associated breakpoints are disabled. In
addition, while executing a BDM TRACE command, tagging into BDM is disabled. If BDM is not active,
the breakpoint gives priority to BDM requests over SWI requests if the breakpoint happens to coincide
with a SWI instruction in user code. On returning from BDM, the SWI from user code gets executed.
Table 6-43. Breakpoint Mapping Summary
DBGBRK
BDM Bit
(DBGC1[4])
BDM
Enabled
BDM
Active
Breakpoint
Mapping
0
X
X
X
No Breakpoint
1
0
X
0
Breakpoint to SWI
X
X
1
1
No Breakpoint
1
1
0
X
Breakpoint to SWI
1
1
1
0
Breakpoint to BDM
BDM cannot be entered from a breakpoint unless the ENABLE bit is set in the BDM. If entry to BDM via
a BGND instruction is attempted and the ENABLE bit in the BDM is cleared, the CPU actually executes
the BDM firmware code, checks the ENABLE and returns if ENABLE is not set. If not serviced by the
monitor then the breakpoint is re-asserted when the BDM returns to normal CPU flow.
If the comparator register contents coincide with the SWI/BDM vector address then an SWI in user code
could coincide with a DBG breakpoint. The CPU ensures that BDM requests have a higher priority than
SWI requests. Returning from the BDM/SWI service routine care must be taken to avoid a repeated
breakpoint at the same address.
Should a tagged or forced breakpoint coincide with a BGND in user code, then the instruction that follows
the BGND instruction is the first instruction executed when normal program execution resumes.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
235
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
NOTE
When program control returns from a tagged breakpoint using an RTI or
BDM GO command without program counter modification it returns to the
instruction whose tag generated the breakpoint. To avoid a repeated
breakpoint at the same location reconfigure the DBG module in the SWI
routine, if configured for an SWI breakpoint, or over the BDM interface by
executing a TRACE command before the GO to increment the program flow
past the tagged instruction.
6.5
6.5.1
Application Information
State Machine scenarios
Defining the state control registers as SCR1,SCR2, SCR3 and M0,M1,M2 as matches on channels 0,1,2
respectively. SCR encoding supported by S12SDBGV1 are shown in black. SCR encoding supported only
in S12SDBGV2 are shown in red. For backwards compatibility the new scenarios use a 4th bit in each SCR
register. Thus the existing encoding for SCRx[2:0] is not changed.
6.5.2
Scenario 1
A trigger is generated if a given sequence of 3 code events is executed.
Figure 6-27. Scenario 1
SCR2=0010
SCR1=0011
State1
M1
SCR3=0111
M2
State2
State3
M0
Final State
Scenario 1 is possible with S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding
6.5.3
Scenario 2
A trigger is generated if a given sequence of 2 code events is executed.
Figure 6-28. Scenario 2a
SCR2=0101
SCR1=0011
State1
M1
State2
M2
Final State
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
236
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
A trigger is generated if a given sequence of 2 code events is executed, whereby the first event is entry into
a range (COMPA,COMPB configured for range mode). M1 is disabled in range modes.
Figure 6-29. Scenario 2b
SCR2=0101
SCR1=0111
State1
M01
M2
State2
Final State
A trigger is generated if a given sequence of 2 code events is executed, whereby the second event is entry
into a range (COMPA,COMPB configured for range mode)
Figure 6-30. Scenario 2c
SCR2=0011
SCR1=0010
State1
M2
M0
State2
Final State
All 3 scenarios 2a,2b,2c are possible with the S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding
6.5.4
Scenario 3
A trigger is generated immediately when one of up to 3 given events occurs
Figure 6-31. Scenario 3
SCR1=0000
State1
M012
Final State
Scenario 3 is possible with S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding
6.5.5
Scenario 4
Trigger if a sequence of 2 events is carried out in an incorrect order. Event A must be followed by event B
and event B must be followed by event A. 2 consecutive occurrences of event A without an intermediate
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
237
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
event B cause a trigger. Similarly 2 consecutive occurrences of event B without an intermediate event A
cause a trigger. This is possible by using CompA and CompC to match on the same address as shown.
Figure 6-32. Scenario 4a
SCR1=0100 State1
M1
SCR3=0001
State 3
M0
State2
M2
M0
M1
M1
SCR2=0011
Final State
This scenario is currently not possible using 2 comparators only. S12SDBGV2 makes it possible with 2
comparators, State 3 allowing a M0 to return to state 2, whilst a M2 leads to final state as shown.
Figure 6-33. Scenario 4b (with 2 comparators)
SCR1=0110 State1
M2
SCR3=1110
State 3
M0
State2
M0
M01
M2
M2
SCR2=1100
M1 disabled in
range mode
Final State
The advantage of using only 2 channels is that now range comparisons can be included (channel0)
This however violates the S12SDBGV1 specification, which states that a match leading to final state
always has priority in case of a simultaneous match, whilst priority is also given to the lowest channel
number. For S12SDBG the corresponding CPU priority decoder is removed to support this, such that on
simultaneous taghits, taghits pointing to final state have highest priority. If no taghit points to final state
then the lowest channel number has priority. Thus with the above encoding from State3, the CPU and DBG
would break on a simultaneous M0/M2.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
238
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
6.5.6
Scenario 5
Trigger if following event A, event C precedes event B. i.e. the expected execution flow is A->B->C.
Figure 6-34. Scenario 5
SCR2=0110
SCR1=0011
M1
State1
M0
State2
Final State
M2
Scenario 5 is possible with the S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding
6.5.7
Scenario 6
Trigger if event A occurs twice in succession before any of 2 other events (BC) occurs. This scenario is
not possible using the S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding. S12SDBGV2 includes additions shown in red. The
change in SCR1 encoding also has the advantage that a State1->State3 transition using M0 is now possible.
This is advantageous because range and data bus comparisons use channel0 only.
Figure 6-35. Scenario 6
SCR3=1010
SCR1=1001
State1
M0
State3
M0
Final State
M12
6.5.8
Scenario 7
Trigger when a series of 3 events is executed out of order. Specifying the event order as M1,M2,M0 to run
in loops (120120120). Any deviation from that order should trigger. This scenario is not possible using the
S12SDBGV1 SCR encoding because OR possibilities are very limited in the channel encoding. By adding
OR forks as shown in red this scenario is possible.
Figure 6-36. Scenario 7
M01
SCR2=1100
SCR1=1101
State1
M1
State2
SCR3=1101
M2
State3
M12
Final State
M0
M02
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
239
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
On simultaneous matches the lowest channel number has priority so with this configuration the forking
from State1 has the peculiar effect that a simultaneous match0/match1 transitions to final state but a
simultaneous match2/match1transitions to state2.
6.5.9
Scenario 8
Trigger when a routine/event at M2 follows either M1 or M0.
Figure 6-37. Scenario 8a
SCR2=0101
SCR1=0111
M01
State1
M2
State2
Final State
Trigger when an event M2 is followed by either event M0 or event M1
Figure 6-38. Scenario 8b
SCR2=0111
SCR1=0010
State1
M2
State2
M01
Final State
Scenario 8a and 8b are possible with the S12SDBGV1 and S12SDBGV2 SCR encoding
6.5.10
Scenario 9
Trigger when a routine/event at A (M2) does not follow either B or C (M1 or M0) before they are executed
again. This cannot be realized with theS12SDBGV1 SCR encoding due to OR limitations. By changing
the SCR2 encoding as shown in red this scenario becomes possible.
Figure 6-39. Scenario 9
SCR2=1111
SCR1=0111
State1
M01
State2
M01
Final State
M2
6.5.11
Scenario 10
Trigger if an event M0 occurs following up to two successive M2 events without the resetting event M1.
As shown up to 2 consecutive M2 events are allowed, whereby a reset to State1 is possible after either one
or two M2 events. If an event M0 occurs following the second M2, before M1 resets to State1 then a trigger
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
240
Freescale Semiconductor
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
is generated. Configuring CompA and CompC the same, it is possible to generate a breakpoint on the third
consecutive occurrence of event M0 without a reset M1.
Figure 6-40. Scenario 10a
M1
SCR1=0010
State1
M2
SCR2=0100
SCR3=0010
M2
State2
M0
State3
Final State
M1
Figure 6-41. Scenario 10b
M0
SCR2=0011
SCR1=0010
State1
M2
State2
SCR3=0000
M1
State3
Final State
M0
Scenario 10b shows the case that after M2 then M1 must occur before M0. Starting from a particular point
in code, event M2 must always be followed by M1 before M0. If after any M2, event M0 occurs before
M1 then a trigger is generated.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
241
S12S Debug Module (S12SDBGV2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
242
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 7
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
Version
Number
Revision
Date
01.02
13 Sep
2007
updates for S12P family devices:
- re-added XIRQ and IRQ references since this functionality is used
on devices without D2D
- added low voltage reset as possible source to the pin reset vector
01.03
21 Nov
2007
added clarification of “Wake-up from STOP or WAIT by XIRQ with
X bit set” feature
01.04
20 May
2009
added footnote about availability of “Wake-up from STOP or WAIT
by XIRQ with X bit set” feature
7.1
Effective
Date
Author
Description of Changes
Introduction
The INT module decodes the priority of all system exception requests and provides the applicable vector
for processing the exception to the CPU. The INT module supports:
• I bit and X bit maskable interrupt requests
• A non-maskable unimplemented op-code trap
• A non-maskable software interrupt (SWI) or background debug mode request
• Three system reset vector requests
• A spurious interrupt vector
Each of the I bit maskable interrupt requests is assigned to a fixed priority level.
7.1.1
Glossary
Table 7-2 contains terms and abbreviations used in the document.
Table 7-2. Terminology
Term
CCR
Condition Code Register (in the CPU)
ISR
Interrupt Service Routine
MCU
7.1.2
•
•
Meaning
Micro-Controller Unit
Features
Interrupt vector base register (IVBR)
One spurious interrupt vector (at address vector base1 + 0x0080).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
243
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7.1.3
•
•
•
•
7.1.4
2–58 I bit maskable interrupt vector requests (at addresses vector base + 0x0082–0x00F2).
I bit maskable interrupts can be nested.
One X bit maskable interrupt vector request (at address vector base + 0x00F4).
One non-maskable software interrupt request (SWI) or background debug mode vector request (at
address vector base + 0x00F6).
One non-maskable unimplemented op-code trap (TRAP) vector (at address vector base + 0x00F8).
Three system reset vectors (at addresses 0xFFFA–0xFFFE).
Determines the highest priority interrupt vector requests, drives the vector to the bus on CPU
request
Wakes up the system from stop or wait mode when an appropriate interrupt request occurs.
Modes of Operation
Run mode
This is the basic mode of operation.
Wait mode
In wait mode, the clock to the INT module is disabled. The INT module is however capable of
waking-up the CPU from wait mode if an interrupt occurs. Please refer to Section 7.5.3, “Wake Up
from Stop or Wait Mode” for details.
Stop Mode
In stop mode, the clock to the INT module is disabled. The INT module is however capable of
waking-up the CPU from stop mode if an interrupt occurs. Please refer to Section 7.5.3, “Wake Up
from Stop or Wait Mode” for details.
Freeze mode (BDM active)
In freeze mode (BDM active), the interrupt vector base register is overridden internally. Please
refer to Section 7.3.1.1, “Interrupt Vector Base Register (IVBR)” for details.
Block Diagram
Figure 7-1 shows a block diagram of the INT module.
1. The vector base is a 16-bit address which is accumulated from the contents of the interrupt vector base register (IVBR, used
as upper byte) and 0x00 (used as lower byte).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
244
Freescale Semiconductor
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
Peripheral
Interrupt Requests
Wake Up
CPU
Priority
Decoder
Non I bit Maskable Channels
To CPU
Vector
Address
IVBR
I bit Maskable Channels
Interrupt
Requests
Figure 7-1. INT Block Diagram
7.2
External Signal Description
The INT module has no external signals.
7.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of all registers accessible in the INT module.
7.3.1
Register Descriptions
This section describes in address order all the INT registers and their individual bits.
7.3.1.1
Interrupt Vector Base Register (IVBR)
Address: 0x0120
7
6
5
R
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
IVB_ADDR[7:0]
W
Reset
4
1
1
1
1
1
Figure 7-2. Interrupt Vector Base Register (IVBR)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
245
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
Table 7-3. IVBR Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–0
Interrupt Vector Base Address Bits — These bits represent the upper byte of all vector addresses. Out of
IVB_ADDR[7:0] reset these bits are set to 0xFF (that means vectors are located at 0xFF80–0xFFFE) to ensure compatibility
to HCS12.
Note: A system reset will initialize the interrupt vector base register with “0xFF” before it is used to determine
the reset vector address. Therefore, changing the IVBR has no effect on the location of the three reset
vectors (0xFFFA–0xFFFE).
Note: If the BDM is active (that means the CPU is in the process of executing BDM firmware code), the
contents of IVBR are ignored and the upper byte of the vector address is fixed as “0xFF”. This is done
to enable handling of all non-maskable interrupts in the BDM firmware.
7.4
Functional Description
The INT module processes all exception requests to be serviced by the CPU module. These exceptions
include interrupt vector requests and reset vector requests. Each of these exception types and their overall
priority level is discussed in the subsections below.
7.4.1
S12S Exception Requests
The CPU handles both reset requests and interrupt requests. A priority decoder is used to evaluate the
priority of pending interrupt requests.
7.4.2
Interrupt Prioritization
The INT module contains a priority decoder to determine the priority for all interrupt requests pending for
the CPU. If more than one interrupt request is pending, the interrupt request with the higher vector address
wins the prioritization.
The following conditions must be met for an I bit maskable interrupt request to be processed.
1. The local interrupt enabled bit in the peripheral module must be set.
2. The I bit in the condition code register (CCR) of the CPU must be cleared.
3. There is no SWI, TRAP, or X bit maskable request pending.
NOTE
All non I bit maskable interrupt requests always have higher priority than
the I bit maskable interrupt requests. If the X bit in the CCR is cleared, it is
possible to interrupt an I bit maskable interrupt by an X bit maskable
interrupt. It is possible to nest non maskable interrupt requests, for example
by nesting SWI or TRAP calls.
Since an interrupt vector is only supplied at the time when the CPU requests it, it is possible that a higher
priority interrupt request could override the original interrupt request that caused the CPU to request the
vector. In this case, the CPU will receive the highest priority vector and the system will process this
interrupt request first, before the original interrupt request is processed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
246
Freescale Semiconductor
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
If the interrupt source is unknown (for example, in the case where an interrupt request becomes inactive
after the interrupt has been recognized, but prior to the CPU vector request), the vector address supplied
to the CPU will default to that of the spurious interrupt vector.
NOTE
Care must be taken to ensure that all interrupt requests remain active until
the system begins execution of the applicable service routine; otherwise, the
exception request may not get processed at all or the result may be a
spurious interrupt request (vector at address (vector base + 0x0080)).
7.4.3
Reset Exception Requests
The INT module supports three system reset exception request types (please refer to the Clock and Reset
generator module for details):
1. Pin reset, power-on reset or illegal address reset, low voltage reset (if applicable)
2. Clock monitor reset request
3. COP watchdog reset request
7.4.4
Exception Priority
The priority (from highest to lowest) and address of all exception vectors issued by the INT module upon
request by the CPU is shown in Table 7-4.
Table 7-4. Exception Vector Map and Priority
Vector Address1
Source
0xFFFE
Pin reset, power-on reset, illegal address reset, low voltage reset (if applicable)
0xFFFC
Clock monitor reset
0xFFFA
COP watchdog reset
(Vector base + 0x00F8)
Unimplemented opcode trap
(Vector base + 0x00F6)
Software interrupt instruction (SWI) or BDM vector request
(Vector base + 0x00F4)
X bit maskable interrupt request (XIRQ or D2D error interrupt)2
(Vector base + 0x00F2)
IRQ or D2D interrupt request3
(Vector base + 0x00F0–0x0082) Device specific I bit maskable interrupt sources (priority determined by the low byte of the
vector address, in descending order)
(Vector base + 0x0080)
Spurious interrupt
1
16 bits vector address based
D2D error interrupt on MCUs featuring a D2D initiator module, otherwise XIRQ pin interrupt
3
D2D interrupt on MCUs featuring a D2D initiator module, otherwise IRQ pin interrupt
2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
247
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
7.5
7.5.1
Initialization/Application Information
Initialization
After system reset, software should:
1. Initialize the interrupt vector base register if the interrupt vector table is not located at the default
location (0xFF80–0xFFF9).
2. Enable I bit maskable interrupts by clearing the I bit in the CCR.
3. Enable the X bit maskable interrupt by clearing the X bit in the CCR.
7.5.2
Interrupt Nesting
The interrupt request scheme makes it possible to nest I bit maskable interrupt requests handled by the
CPU.
• I bit maskable interrupt requests can be interrupted by an interrupt request with a higher priority.
I bit maskable interrupt requests cannot be interrupted by other I bit maskable interrupt requests per
default. In order to make an interrupt service routine (ISR) interruptible, the ISR must explicitly clear the
I bit in the CCR (CLI). After clearing the I bit, other I bit maskable interrupt requests can interrupt the
current ISR.
An ISR of an interruptible I bit maskable interrupt request could basically look like this:
1. Service interrupt, that is clear interrupt flags, copy data, etc.
2. Clear I bit in the CCR by executing the instruction CLI (thus allowing other I bit maskable interrupt
requests)
3. Process data
4. Return from interrupt by executing the instruction RTI
7.5.3
7.5.3.1
Wake Up from Stop or Wait Mode
CPU Wake Up from Stop or Wait Mode
Every I bit maskable interrupt request is capable of waking the MCU from stop or wait mode. To determine
whether an I bit maskable interrupts is qualified to wake-up the CPU or not, the same conditions as in
normal run mode are applied during stop or wait mode:
• If the I bit in the CCR is set, all I bit maskable interrupts are masked from waking-up the MCU.
Since there are no clocks running in stop mode, only interrupts which can be asserted asynchronously can
wake-up the MCU from stop mode.
The X bit maskable interrupt request can wake up the MCU from stop or wait mode at anytime, even if the
X bit in CCR is set1.
1. The capability of the XIRQ pin to wake-up the MCU with the X bit set may not be available if, for example, the XIRQ pin is
shared with other peripheral modules on the device. Please refer to the Device section of the MCU reference manual for details.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
248
Freescale Semiconductor
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
If the X bit maskable interrupt request is used to wake-up the MCU with the X bit in the CCR set, the
associated ISR is not called. The CPU then resumes program execution with the instruction following the
WAI or STOP instruction. This features works following the same rules like any interrupt request, that is
care must be taken that the X interrupt request used for wake-up remains active at least until the system
begins execution of the instruction following the WAI or STOP instruction; otherwise, wake-up may not
occur.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
249
Interrupt Module (S12SINTV1)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
250
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 8
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Revision History
Version
Number
Revision
Date
Effective
Date
V02.00
17 June 2009
17 June 2009
Initial version copied from 8 channel version
Author
Description of Changes
V02.01
09 Feb 2010
09 Feb 2010
Updated Table 8-15 Analog Input Channel Select Coding description of internal channels.
Updated register ATDDR (left/right justified result) description
in section 8.3.2.12.1/8-270 and 8.3.2.12.2/8-271 and added
Table 8-21 to improve feature description.
Fixed typo in Table 8-9 - conversion result for 3mV and 10bit
resolution
V02.03
26 Feb 2010
26 Feb 2010
Corrected Table 8-15 Analog Input Channel Select Coding description of internal channels.
V02.04
26 Mar 2010
26 Mar 2010
Corrected typo: Reset value of ATDDIEN register
V02.05
14 Apr 2010
14 Apr 2010
Corrected typos to be in-line with SoC level pin naming
conventions for VDDA, VSSA, VRL and VRH.
V02.06
25 Aug 2010
25 Aug 2010
Removed feature of conversion during STOP and general
wording clean up done in Section 8.4, “Functional Description
V02.07
09 Sep 2010
09 Sep 2010
Update of internal only information.
V02.08
11 Feb 2011
11 Feb 2011
Connectivity Information regarding internal channel_6 added
to Table 8-15.
8.1
Introduction
The ADC12B6C is a 6-channel, , multiplexed input successive approximation analog-to-digital converter.
Refer to device electrical specifications for ATD accuracy.
8.1.1
•
•
•
Features
8-, 10-bit resolution.
Automatic return to low power after conversion sequence
Automatic compare with interrupt for higher than or less/equal than programmable value
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
251
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable sample time.
Left/right justified result data.
External trigger control.
Sequence complete interrupt.
Analog input multiplexer for 6 analog input channels.
Special conversions for VRH, VRL, (VRL+VRH)/2 and ADC temperature sensor.
1-to-6 conversion sequence lengths.
Continuous conversion mode.
Multiple channel scans.
Configurable external trigger functionality on any AD channel or any of four additional trigger
inputs. The four additional trigger inputs can be chip external or internal. Refer to device
specification for availability and connectivity.
Configurable location for channel wrap around (when converting multiple channels in a sequence).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
252
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.1.2
Modes of Operation
8.1.2.1
Conversion Modes
There is software programmable selection between performing single or continuous conversion on a
single channel or multiple channels.
8.1.2.2
•
•
•
MCU Operating Modes
Stop Mode
Entering Stop Mode aborts any conversion sequence in progress and if a sequence was aborted
restarts it after exiting stop mode. This has the same effect/consequences as starting a conversion
sequence with write to ATDCTL5. So after exiting from stop mode with a previously aborted
sequence all flags are cleared etc.
Wait Mode
ADC12B6C behaves same in Run and Wait Mode. For reduced power consumption continuous
conversions should be aborted before entering Wait mode.
Freeze Mode
In Freeze Mode the ADC12B6C will either continue or finish or stop converting according to the
FRZ1 and FRZ0 bits. This is useful for debugging and emulation.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
253
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.1.3
Block Diagram
Bus Clock
Clock
Prescaler
ATD_12B8C
ATD Clock
ETRIG0
ETRIG1
ETRIG2
Trigger
Mux
Mode and
Sequence Complete
Interrupt
Compare Interrupt
Timing Control
ETRIG3
(See device specification for availability
and connectivity)
ATDCTL1
ATDDIEN
VDDA
VSSA
Successive
Approximation
Register (SAR)
and DAC
VRH
VRL
Results
ATD 0
ATD 1
ATD 2
ATD 3
ATD 4
ATD 5
+
Sample & Hold
AN5
-
AN4
AN3
Analog
MUX
Comparator
AN2
AN1
AN0
Figure 8-1. ADC12B6C Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
254
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.2
Signal Description
This section lists all inputs to the ADC12B6C block.
8.2.1
8.2.1.1
Detailed Signal Descriptions
ANx (x = 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0)
This pin serves as the analog input Channel x. It can also be configured as digital port or external trigger
for the ATD conversion.
8.2.1.2
ETRIG3, ETRIG2, ETRIG1, ETRIG0
These inputs can be configured to serve as an external trigger for the ATD conversion.
Refer to device specification for availability and connectivity of these inputs!
8.2.1.3
VRH, VRL
VRH is the high reference voltage, VRL is the low reference voltage for ATD conversion.
8.2.1.4
VDDA, VSSA
These pins are the power supplies for the analog circuitry of the ADC12B6C block.
8.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of all registers accessible in the ADC12B6C.
8.3.1
Module Memory Map
Figure 8-2 gives an overview on all ADC12B6C registers.
NOTE
Register Address = Base Address + Address Offset, where the Base Address
is defined at the MCU level and the Address Offset is defined at the module
level.
Address
Name
0x0000
ATDCTL0
0x0001
ATDCTL1
0x0002
ATDCTL2
Bit 7
R
Reserved
W
R
ETRIGSEL
W
R
0
W
6
0
5
0
SRES1
SRES0
AFFC
4
0
3
2
1
Bit 0
WRAP3
WRAP2
WRAP1
WRAP0
SMP_DIS ETRIGCH3 ETRIGCH2 ETRIGCH1 ETRIGCH0
Reserved ETRIGLE
ETRIGP
ETRIGE
ASCIE
ACMPIE
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-2. ADC12B6C Register Summary (Sheet 1 of 2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
255
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Address
0x0003
0x0004
0x0005
0x0006
0x0007
0x0008
0x0009
0x000A
0x000B
0x000C
0x000D
0x000E
0x000F
Name
R
ATDCTL3
W
R
ATDCTL4
W
R
ATDCTL5
W
R
ATDSTAT0
W
R
Unimplemented
W
R
ATDCMPEH
W
R
W
R
ATDSTAT2H
W
R
ATDSTAT2L
W
R
ATDDIENH
W
R
ATDDIENL
W
R
ATDCMPHTH
W
0
ATDCMPHTL
ATDCMPEL
0x0010
ATDDR0
0x0012
ATDDR1
0x0014
ATDDR2
0x0016
ATDDR3
0x0018
ATDDR4
0x001A
ATDDR5
0x001C 0x002F
Unimplemented
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
DJM
S8C
S4C
S2C
S1C
FIFO
FRZ1
FRZ0
SMP2
SMP1
SMP0
SC
SCAN
MULT
ETORF
FIFOR
0
SCF
0
PRS[4:0]
CD
CC
CB
CA
CC3
CC2
CC1
CC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CMPE[5:0]
0
0
0
0
CCF[5:0]
1
1
1
IEN[5:0]
0
0
0
CMPHT[5:0]
See Section 8.3.2.12.1, “Left Justified Result Data (DJM=0)”
and Section 8.3.2.12.2, “Right Justified Result Data (DJM=1)”
See Section 8.3.2.12.1, “Left Justified Result Data (DJM=0)”
and Section 8.3.2.12.2, “Right Justified Result Data (DJM=1)”
See Section 8.3.2.12.1, “Left Justified Result Data (DJM=0)”
and Section 8.3.2.12.2, “Right Justified Result Data (DJM=1)”
See Section 8.3.2.12.1, “Left Justified Result Data (DJM=0)”
and Section 8.3.2.12.2, “Right Justified Result Data (DJM=1)”
See Section 8.3.2.12.1, “Left Justified Result Data (DJM=0)”
and Section 8.3.2.12.2, “Right Justified Result Data (DJM=1)”
See Section 8.3.2.12.1, “Left Justified Result Data (DJM=0)”
and Section 8.3.2.12.2, “Right Justified Result Data (DJM=1)”
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-2. ADC12B6C Register Summary (Sheet 2 of 2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
256
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section describes in address order all the ADC12B6C registers and their individual bits.
8.3.2.1
ATD Control Register 0 (ATDCTL0)
Writes to this register will abort current conversion sequence.
Module Base + 0x0000
7
R
W
Reserved
Reset
0
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
WRAP3
WRAP2
WRAP1
WRAP0
1
1
1
1
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-3. ATD Control Register 0 (ATDCTL0)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime, in special modes always write 0 to Reserved Bit 7.
Table 8-1. ATDCTL0 Field Descriptions
Field
3-0
WRAP[3-0]
Description
Wrap Around Channel Select Bits — These bits determine the channel for wrap around when doing
multi-channel conversions. The coding is summarized in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2. Multi-Channel Wrap Around Coding
WRAP3 WRAP2 WRAP1 WRAP0
Multiple Channel Conversions (MULT = 1)
Wraparound to AN0 after Converting
0
0
0
0
Reserved1
0
0
0
1
AN1
0
0
1
0
AN2
0
0
1
1
AN3
0
1
0
0
AN4
0
1
0
1
AN5
0
1
1
0
AN5
0
1
1
1
AN5
1
0
0
0
AN5
1
0
0
1
AN5
1
0
1
0
AN5
1
0
1
1
AN5
1
1
0
0
AN5
1
1
0
1
AN5
1
1
1
0
AN5
1
1
1
1
AN5
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
257
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
1
If only AN0 should be converted use MULT=0.
8.3.2.2
ATD Control Register 1 (ATDCTL1)
Writes to this register will abort current conversion sequence.
Module Base + 0x0001
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRIGSEL
SRES1
SRES0
SMP_DIS
ETRIGCH3
ETRIGCH2
ETRIGCH1
ETRIGCH0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
R
W
Reset
Figure 8-4. ATD Control Register 1 (ATDCTL1)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 8-3. ATDCTL1 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
ETRIGSEL
External Trigger Source Select — This bit selects the external trigger source to be either one of the AD
channels or one of the ETRIG3-0 inputs. See device specification for availability and connectivity of ETRIG3-0
inputs. If a particular ETRIG3-0 input option is not available, writing a 1 to ETRISEL only sets the bit but has
no effect, this means that one of the AD channels (selected by ETRIGCH3-0) is configured as the source for
external trigger. The coding is summarized in Table 8-5.
6–5
SRES[1:0]
A/D Resolution Select — These bits select the resolution of A/D conversion results. See Table 8-4 for coding.
4
SMP_DIS
Discharge Before Sampling Bit
0 No discharge before sampling.
1 The internal sample capacitor is discharged before sampling the channel. This adds 2 ATD clock cycles to
the sampling time. This can help to detect an open circuit instead of measuring the previous sampled
channel.
3–0
External Trigger Channel Select — These bits select one of the AD channels or one of the ETRIG3-0 inputs
ETRIGCH[3:0] as source for the external trigger. The coding is summarized in Table 8-5.
Table 8-4. A/D Resolution Coding
SRES1
SRES0
A/D Resolution
0
0
8-bit data
0
1
10-bit data
1
0
1
1
Reserved
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
258
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Table 8-5. External Trigger Channel Select Coding
1
8.3.2.3
ETRIGSEL
ETRIGCH3
ETRIGCH2
ETRIGCH1
ETRIGCH0
External trigger source is
0
0
0
0
0
AN0
0
0
0
0
1
AN1
0
0
0
1
0
AN2
0
0
0
1
1
AN3
0
0
1
0
0
AN4
0
0
1
0
1
AN5
0
0
1
1
0
AN5
0
0
1
1
1
AN5
0
1
0
0
0
AN5
0
1
0
0
1
AN5
0
1
0
1
0
AN5
0
1
0
1
1
AN5
0
1
1
0
0
AN5
0
1
1
0
1
AN5
0
1
1
1
0
AN5
0
1
1
1
1
AN5
1
0
0
0
0
ETRIG01
1
0
0
0
1
ETRIG11
1
0
0
1
0
ETRIG21
1
0
0
1
1
ETRIG31
1
0
1
X
X
Reserved
1
1
X
X
X
Reserved
Only if ETRIG3-0 input option is available (see device specification), else ETRISEL is ignored, that means
external trigger source is still on one of the AD channels selected by ETRIGCH3-0
ATD Control Register 2 (ATDCTL2)
Writes to this register will abort current conversion sequence.
Module Base + 0x0002
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AFFC
Reserved
ETRIGLE
ETRIGP
ETRIGE
ASCIE
ACMPIE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-5. ATD Control Register 2 (ATDCTL2)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
259
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Table 8-6. ATDCTL2 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
6
AFFC
ATD Fast Flag Clear All
0 ATD flag clearing done by write 1 to respective CCF[n] flag.
1 Changes all ATD conversion complete flags to a fast clear sequence.
For compare disabled (CMPE[n]=0) a read access to the result register will cause the associated CCF[n] flag
to clear automatically.
For compare enabled (CMPE[n]=1) a write access to the result register will cause the associated CCF[n] flag
to clear automatically.
5
Reserved
Do not alter this bit from its reset value.It is for Manufacturer use only and can change the ATD behavior.
4
ETRIGLE
External Trigger Level/Edge Control — This bit controls the sensitivity of the external trigger signal. See
Table 8-7 for details.
3
ETRIGP
External Trigger Polarity — This bit controls the polarity of the external trigger signal. See Table 8-7 for details.
2
ETRIGE
External Trigger Mode Enable — This bit enables the external trigger on one of the AD channels or one of the
ETRIG3-0 inputs as described in Table 8-5. If the external trigger source is one of the AD channels, the digital
input buffer of this channel is enabled. The external trigger allows to synchronize the start of conversion with
external events.
0 Disable external trigger
1 Enable external trigger
1
ASCIE
0
ACMPIE
ATD Sequence Complete Interrupt Enable
0 ATD Sequence Complete interrupt requests are disabled.
1 ATD Sequence Complete interrupt will be requested whenever SCF=1 is set.
ATD Compare Interrupt Enable — If automatic compare is enabled for conversion n (CMPE[n]=1 in ATDCMPE
register) this bit enables the compare interrupt. If the CCF[n] flag is set (showing a successful compare for
conversion n), the compare interrupt is triggered.
0 ATD Compare interrupt requests are disabled.
1 For the conversions in a sequence for which automatic compare is enabled (CMPE[n]=1), an ATD Compare
Interrupt will be requested whenever any of the respective CCF flags is set.
Table 8-7. External Trigger Configurations
ETRIGLE
ETRIGP
External Trigger Sensitivity
0
0
Falling edge
0
1
Rising edge
1
0
Low level
1
1
High level
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
260
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.3.2.4
ATD Control Register 3 (ATDCTL3)
Writes to this register will abort current conversion sequence.
Module Base + 0x0003
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DJM
S8C
S4C
S2C
S1C
FIFO
FRZ1
FRZ0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-6. ATD Control Register 3 (ATDCTL3)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 8-8. ATDCTL3 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
DJM
Result Register Data Justification — Result data format is always unsigned. This bit controls justification of
conversion data in the result registers.
0 Left justified data in the result registers.
1 Right justified data in the result registers.
Table 8-9 gives example ATD results for an input signal range between 0 and 5.12 Volts.
6–3
S8C, S4C,
S2C, S1C
Conversion Sequence Length — These bits control the number of conversions per sequence. Table 8-10
shows all combinations. At reset, S4C is set to 1 (sequence length is 4). This is to maintain software continuity
to HC12 family.
2
FIFO
Result Register FIFO Mode — If this bit is zero (non-FIFO mode), the A/D conversion results map into the result
registers based on the conversion sequence; the result of the first conversion appears in the first result register
(ATDDR0), the second result in the second result register (ATDDR1), and so on.
If this bit is one (FIFO mode) the conversion counter is not reset at the beginning or end of a conversion
sequence; sequential conversion results are placed in consecutive result registers. In a continuously scanning
conversion sequence, the result register counter will wrap around when it reaches the end of the result register
file. The conversion counter value (CC3-0 in ATDSTAT0) can be used to determine where in the result register
file, the current conversion result will be placed.
Aborting a conversion or starting a new conversion clears the conversion counter even if FIFO=1. So the first
result of a new conversion sequence, started by writing to ATDCTL5, will always be place in the first result register
(ATDDDR0). Intended usage of FIFO mode is continuos conversion (SCAN=1) or triggered conversion
(ETRIG=1).
Which result registers hold valid data can be tracked using the conversion complete flags. Fast flag clear mode
may be useful in a particular application to track valid data.
If this bit is one, automatic compare of result registers is always disabled, that is ADC12B6C will behave as if
ACMPIE and all CPME[n] were zero.
0 Conversion results are placed in the corresponding result register up to the selected sequence length.
1 Conversion results are placed in consecutive result registers (wrap around at end).
1–0
FRZ[1:0]
Background Debug Freeze Enable — When debugging an application, it is useful in many cases to have the
ATD pause when a breakpoint (Freeze Mode) is encountered. These 2 bits determine how the ATD will respond
to a breakpoint as shown in Table 8-11. Leakage onto the storage node and comparator reference capacitors
may compromise the accuracy of an immediately frozen conversion depending on the length of the freeze period.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
261
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Table 8-9. Examples of ideal decimal ATD Results
Input Signal
VRL = 0 Volts
VRH = 5.12 Volts
8-Bit
Codes
(resolution=20mV)
10-Bit
Codes
(resolution=5mV)
5.120 Volts
...
0.022
0.020
0.018
0.016
0.014
0.012
0.010
0.008
0.006
0.004
0.003
0.002
0.000
255
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1023
...
4
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
Table 8-10. Conversion Sequence Length Coding
S8C
S4C
S2C
S1C
Number of Conversions
per Sequence
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
2
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
0
4
0
1
0
1
5
0
1
1
0
6
0
1
1
1
6
1
0
0
0
6
1
0
0
1
6
1
0
1
0
6
1
0
1
1
6
1
1
0
0
6
1
1
0
1
6
1
1
1
0
6
1
1
1
1
6
Table 8-11. ATD Behavior in Freeze Mode (Breakpoint)
FRZ1
FRZ0
0
0
Behavior in Freeze Mode
Continue conversion
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
262
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Table 8-11. ATD Behavior in Freeze Mode (Breakpoint)
8.3.2.5
FRZ1
FRZ0
Behavior in Freeze Mode
0
1
Reserved
1
0
Finish current conversion, then freeze
1
1
Freeze Immediately
ATD Control Register 4 (ATDCTL4)
Writes to this register will abort current conversion sequence.
Module Base + 0x0004
7
6
5
SMP2
SMP1
SMP0
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
R
PRS[4:0]
W
Reset
0
0
1
Figure 8-7. ATD Control Register 4 (ATDCTL4)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 8-12. ATDCTL4 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–5
SMP[2:0]
Sample Time Select — These three bits select the length of the sample time in units of ATD conversion clock
cycles. Note that the ATD conversion clock period is itself a function of the prescaler value (bits PRS4-0).
Table 8-13 lists the available sample time lengths.
4–0
PRS[4:0]
ATD Clock Prescaler — These 5 bits are the binary prescaler value PRS. The ATD conversion clock frequency
is calculated as follows:
f BUS
f ATDCLK = ------------------------------------2 × ( PRS + 1 )
Refer to Device Specification for allowed frequency range of fATDCLK.
Table 8-13. Sample Time Select
SMP2
SMP1
SMP0
Sample Time
in Number of
ATD Clock Cycles
0
0
0
4
0
0
1
6
0
1
0
8
0
1
1
10
1
0
0
12
1
0
1
16
1
1
0
20
1
1
1
24
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
263
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.3.2.6
ATD Control Register 5 (ATDCTL5)
Writes to this register will abort current conversion sequence and start a new conversion sequence. If the
external trigger function is enabled (ETRIGE=1) an initial write to ATDCTL5 is required to allow starting
of a conversion sequence which will then occur on each trigger event. Start of conversion means the
beginning of the sampling phase.
Module Base + 0x0005
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SC
SCAN
MULT
CD
CC
CB
CA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-8. ATD Control Register 5 (ATDCTL5)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 8-14. ATDCTL5 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
6
SC
Special Channel Conversion Bit — If this bit is set, then special channel conversion can be selected using CD,
CC, CB and CA of ATDCTL5. Table 8-15 lists the coding.
0 Special channel conversions disabled
1 Special channel conversions enabled
5
SCAN
Continuous Conversion Sequence Mode — This bit selects whether conversion sequences are performed
continuously or only once. If external trigger function is enabled (ETRIGE=1) setting this bit has no effect, thus
the external trigger always starts a single conversion sequence.
0 Single conversion sequence
1 Continuous conversion sequences (scan mode)
4
MULT
Multi-Channel Sample Mode — When MULT is 0, the ATD sequence controller samples only from the specified
analog input channel for an entire conversion sequence. The analog channel is selected by channel selection
code (control bits CD/CC/CB/CA located in ATDCTL5). When MULT is 1, the ATD sequence controller samples
across channels. The number of channels sampled is determined by the sequence length value (S8C, S4C, S2C,
S1C). The first analog channel examined is determined by channel selection code (CD, CC, CB, CA control bits);
subsequent channels sampled in the sequence are determined by incrementing the channel selection code or
wrapping around to AN0 (channel 0).
0 Sample only one channel
1 Sample across several channels
3–0
CD, CC,
CB, CA
Analog Input Channel Select Code — These bits select the analog input channel(s). Table 8-15 lists the coding
used to select the various analog input channels.
In the case of single channel conversions (MULT=0), this selection code specifies the channel to be examined.
In the case of multiple channel conversions (MULT=1), this selection code specifies the first channel to be
examined in the conversion sequence. Subsequent channels are determined by incrementing the channel
selection code or wrapping around to AN0 (after converting the channel defined by the Wrap Around Channel
Select Bits WRAP3-0 in ATDCTL0). When starting with a channel number higher than the one defined by
WRAP3-0 the first wrap around will be AN5 to AN0.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
264
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Table 8-15. Analog Input Channel Select Coding
SC
CD
CC
CB
CA
Analog Input
Channel
0
0
0
0
0
AN0
0
0
0
1
AN1
0
0
1
0
AN2
0
0
1
1
AN3
0
1
0
0
AN4
0
1
0
1
AN5
0
1
1
0
AN5
0
1
1
1
AN5
1
0
0
0
AN5
1
0
0
1
AN5
1
0
1
0
AN5
1
0
1
1
AN5
1
1
0
0
AN5
1
1
0
1
AN5
1
1
1
0
AN5
1
1
1
1
1
AN5
0
0
0
0
Internal_6,
Temperature sense of ADC
hardmacro
0
0
0
1
Internal_7
0
0
1
0
Internal_0
0
0
1
1
Internal_1
0
1
0
0
VRH
0
1
0
1
VRL
0
1
1
0
(VRH+VRL) / 2
0
1
1
1
Reserved
1
0
0
0
Internal_2
1
0
0
1
Internal_3
1
0
1
0
Internal_4
1
0
1
1
Internal_5
1
X
X
X
Reserved
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
265
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.3.2.7
ATD Status Register 0 (ATDSTAT0)
This register contains the Sequence Complete Flag, overrun flags for external trigger and FIFO mode, and
the conversion counter.
Module Base + 0x0006
7
R
6
5
4
ETORF
FIFOR
0
0
0
SCF
3
2
1
0
CC3
CC2
CC1
CC0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-9. ATD Status Register 0 (ATDSTAT0)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime (No effect on (CC3, CC2, CC1, CC0))
Table 8-16. ATDSTAT0 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
SCF
Sequence Complete Flag — This flag is set upon completion of a conversion sequence. If conversion
sequences are continuously performed (SCAN=1), the flag is set after each one is completed. This flag is cleared
when one of the following occurs:
A) Write “1” to SCF
B) Write to ATDCTL5 (a new conversion sequence is started)
C) If AFFC=1 and a result register is read
0 Conversion sequence not completed
1 Conversion sequence has completed
5
ETORF
External Trigger Overrun Flag — While in edge sensitive mode (ETRIGLE=0), if additional active edges are
detected while a conversion sequence is in process the overrun flag is set. This flag is cleared when one of the
following occurs:
A) Write “1” to ETORF
B) Write to ATDCTL0,1,2,3,4, ATDCMPE or ATDCMPHT (a conversion sequence is aborted)
C) Write to ATDCTL5 (a new conversion sequence is started)
0 No External trigger overrun error has occurred
1 External trigger overrun error has occurred
4
FIFOR
Result Register Overrun Flag — This bit indicates that a result register has been written to before its associated
conversion complete flag (CCF) has been cleared. This flag is most useful when using the FIFO mode because
the flag potentially indicates that result registers are out of sync with the input channels. However, it is also
practical for non-FIFO modes, and indicates that a result register has been overwritten before it has been read
(i.e. the old data has been lost). This flag is cleared when one of the following occurs:
A) Write “1” to FIFOR
B) Write to ATDCTL0,1,2,3,4, ATDCMPE or ATDCMPHT (a conversion sequence is aborted)
C) Write to ATDCTL5 (a new conversion sequence is started)
0 No overrun has occurred
1 Overrun condition exists (result register has been written while associated CCFx flag was still set)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
266
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
Table 8-16. ATDSTAT0 Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
3–0
CC[3:0]
Conversion Counter — These 4 read-only bits are the binary value of the conversion counter. The conversion
counter points to the result register that will receive the result of the current conversion. E.g. CC3=0, CC2=1,
CC1=1, CC0=0 indicates that the result of the current conversion will be in ATD Result Register 6. If in non-FIFO
mode (FIFO=0) the conversion counter is initialized to zero at the beginning and end of the conversion sequence.
If in FIFO mode (FIFO=1) the register counter is not initialized. The conversion counter wraps around when its
maximum value is reached.
Aborting a conversion or starting a new conversion clears the conversion counter even if FIFO=1.
8.3.2.8
ATD Compare Enable Register (ATDCMPE)
Writes to this register will abort current conversion sequence.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Module Base + 0x0008
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
5
4
0
2
1
0
0
0
CMPE[5:0]
W
Reset
3
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-10. ATD Compare Enable Register (ATDCMPE)
Table 8-17. ATDCMPE Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5–0
CMPE[5:0]
Compare Enable for Conversion Number n (n= 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0) of a Sequence (n conversion number, NOT
channel number!) — These bits enable automatic compare of conversion results individually for conversions of
a sequence. The sense of each comparison is determined by the CMPHT[n] bit in the ATDCMPHT register.
For each conversion number with CMPE[n]=1 do the following:
1) Write compare value to ATDDRn result register
2) Write compare operator with CMPHT[n] in ATDCPMHT register
CCF[n] in ATDSTAT2 register will flag individual success of any comparison.
0 No automatic compare
1 Automatic compare of results for conversion n of a sequence is enabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
267
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.3.2.9
ATD Status Register 2 (ATDSTAT2)
This read-only register contains the Conversion Complete Flags CCF[5:0].
Module Base + 0x000A
R
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
CCF[5:0]
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-11. ATD Status Register 2 (ATDSTAT2)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime, no effect
Table 8-18. ATDSTAT2 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5–0
CCF[5:0]
Conversion Complete Flag n (n= 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0) (n conversion number, NOT channel number!)— A
conversion complete flag is set at the end of each conversion in a sequence. The flags are associated with the
conversion position in a sequence (and also the result register number). Therefore in non-fifo mode, CCF[4] is
set when the fifth conversion in a sequence is complete and the result is available in result register ATDDR4;
CCF[5] is set when the sixth conversion in a sequence is complete and the result is available in ATDDR5, and
so forth.
If automatic compare of conversion results is enabled (CMPE[n]=1 in ATDCMPE), the conversion complete flag
is only set if comparison with ATDDRn is true. If ACMPIE=1 a compare interrupt will be requested. In this case,
as the ATDDRn result register is used to hold the compare value, the result will not be stored there at the end of
the conversion but is lost.
A flag CCF[n] is cleared when one of the following occurs:
A) Write to ATDCTL5 (a new conversion sequence is started)
B) If AFFC=0, write “1” to CCF[n]
C) If AFFC=1 and CMPE[n]=0, read of result register ATDDRn
D) If AFFC=1 and CMPE[n]=1, write to result register ATDDRn
In case of a concurrent set and clear on CCF[n]: The clearing by method A) will overwrite the set. The clearing
by methods B) or C) or D) will be overwritten by the set.
0 Conversion number n not completed or successfully compared
1 If (CMPE[n]=0): Conversion number n has completed. Result is ready in ATDDRn.
If (CMPE[n]=1): Compare for conversion result number n with compare value in ATDDRn, using compare
operator CMPGT[n] is true. (No result available in ATDDRn)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
268
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.3.2.10
ATD Input Enable Register (ATDDIEN)
Module Base + 0x000C
R
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
4
3
1
0
0
0
IEN[5:0]
W
Reset
2
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-12. ATD Input Enable Register (ATDDIEN)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 8-19. ATDDIEN Field Descriptions
Field
Description
5–0
IEN[5:0]
ATD Digital Input Enable on channel x (x= 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0) — This bit controls the digital input buffer from the
analog input pin (ANx) to the digital data register.
0 Disable digital input buffer to ANx pin
1 Enable digital input buffer on ANx pin.
Note: Setting this bit will enable the corresponding digital input buffer continuously. If this bit is set while
simultaneously using it as an analog port, there is potentially increased power consumption because the
digital input buffer maybe in the linear region.
8.3.2.11
ATD Compare Higher Than Register (ATDCMPHT)
Writes to this register will abort current conversion sequence.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Module Base + 0x000E
R
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
2
1
0
0
0
CMPHT[5:0]
W
Reset
3
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-13. ATD Compare Higher Than Register (ATDCMPHT)
Table 8-20. ATDCMPHT Field Descriptions
Field
5–0
CMPHT[5:0]
Description
Compare Operation Higher Than Enable for conversion number n (n= 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0) of a Sequence (n
conversion number, NOT channel number!) — This bit selects the operator for comparison of conversion
results.
0 If result of conversion n is lower or same than compare value in ATDDRn, this is flagged in ATDSTAT2
1 If result of conversion n is higher than compare value in ATDDRn, this is flagged in ATDSTAT2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
269
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.3.2.12
ATD Conversion Result Registers (ATDDRn)
The A/D conversion results are stored in 6 result registers. Results are always in unsigned data
representation. Left and right justification is selected using the DJM control bit in ATDCTL3.
If automatic compare of conversions results is enabled (CMPE[n]=1 in ATDCMPE), these registers must
be written with the compare values in left or right justified format depending on the actual value of the
DJM bit. In this case, as the ATDDRn register is used to hold the compare value, the result will not be
stored there at the end of the conversion but is lost.
Attention, n is the conversion number, NOT the channel number!
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
NOTE
For conversions not using automatic compare, results are stored in the result
registers after each conversion. In this case avoid writing to ATDDRn except
for initial values, because an A/D result might be overwritten.
8.3.2.12.1
Left Justified Result Data (DJM=0)
Module Base +
0x0010 = ATDDR0, 0x0012 = ATDDR1, 0x0014 = ATDDR2, 0x0016 = ATDDR3
0x0018 = ATDDR4, 0x001A = ATDDR5
15
14
13
12
11
10
R
8
7
6
5
4
Result-Bit[11:0]
W
Reset
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-14. Left justified ATD conversion result register (ATDDRn)
Table 8-21 shows how depending on the A/D resolution the conversion result is transferred to the ATD
result registers for left justified data. Compare is always done using all 12 bits of both the conversion result
and the compare value in ATDDRn.
Table 8-21. Conversion result mapping to ATDDRn
A/D
resolution
DJM
conversion result mapping to ATDDRn
8-bit data
0
Result-Bit[11:4] = conversion result,
Result-Bit[3:0]=0000
10-bit data
0
Result-Bit[11:2] = conversion result,
Result-Bit[1:0]=00
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
270
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.3.2.12.2
Right Justified Result Data (DJM=1)
Module Base +
0x0010 = ATDDR0, 0x0012 = ATDDR1, 0x0014 = ATDDR2, 0x0016 = ATDDR3
0x0018 = ATDDR4, 0x001A = ATDDR5
R
15
14
13
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11
10
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Result-Bit[11:0]
W
Reset
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 8-15. Right justified ATD conversion result register (ATDDRn)
Table 8-22 shows how depending on the A/D resolution the conversion result is transferred to the ATD
result registers for right justified data. Compare is always done using all 12 bits of both the conversion
result and the compare value in ATDDRn.
Table 8-22. Conversion result mapping to ATDDRn
A/D
resolution
DJM
conversion result mapping to ATDDRn
8-bit data
1
Result-Bit[7:0] = result,
Result-Bit[11:8]=0000
10-bit data
1
Result-Bit[9:0] = result,
Result-Bit[11:10]=00
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
271
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.4
Functional Description
The ADC12B6C consists of an analog sub-block and a digital sub-block.
8.4.1
Analog Sub-Block
The analog sub-block contains all analog electronics required to perform a single conversion. Separate
power supplies VDDA and VSSA allow to isolate noise of other MCU circuitry from the analog sub-block.
8.4.1.1
Sample and Hold Machine
The Sample and Hold Machine controls the storage and charge of the sample capacitor to the voltage level
of the analog signal at the selected ADC input channel.
During the sample process the analog input connects directly to the storage node.
The input analog signals are unipolar and must be within the potential range of VSSA to VDDA.
During the hold process the analog input is disconnected from the storage node.
8.4.1.2
Analog Input Multiplexer
The analog input multiplexer connects one of the 6 external analog input channels to the sample and hold
machine.
8.4.1.3
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Machine
The A/D Machine performs analog to digital conversions. The resolution is program selectable to be either
8 or 10 bits. The A/D machine uses a successive approximation architecture. It functions by comparing the
sampled and stored analog voltage with a series of binary coded discrete voltages. By following a binary
search algorithm, the A/D machine identifies the discrete voltage that is nearest to the sampled and stored
voltage.
When not converting the A/D machine is automatically powered down.
Only analog input signals within the potential range of VRL to VRH (A/D reference potentials) will result
in a non-railed digital output code.
8.4.2
Digital Sub-Block
This subsection describes some of the digital features in more detail. See Section 8.3.2, “Register
Descriptions” for all details.
8.4.2.1
External Trigger Input
The external trigger feature allows the user to synchronize ATD conversions to an external event rather
than relying only on software to trigger the ATD module when a conversions is about to take place. The
external trigger signal (out of reset ATD channel 5, configurable in ATDCTL1) is programmable to be edge
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
272
Freescale Semiconductor
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
or level sensitive with polarity control. Table 8-23 gives a brief description of the different combinations
of control bits and their effect on the external trigger function.
Table 8-23. External Trigger Control Bits
ETRIGLE
ETRIGP
ETRIGE
SCAN
Description
X
X
0
0
Ignores external trigger. Performs one
conversion sequence and stops.
X
X
0
1
Ignores external trigger. Performs
continuous conversion sequences.
0
0
1
X
Trigger falling edge sensitive. Performs
one conversion sequence per trigger.
0
1
1
X
Trigger rising edge sensitive. Performs one
conversion sequence per trigger.
1
0
1
X
Trigger low level sensitive. Performs
continuous conversions while trigger level
is active.
1
1
1
X
Trigger high level sensitive. Performs
continuous conversions while trigger level
is active.
In either level or edge sensitive mode, the first conversion begins when the trigger is received.
Once ETRIGE is enabled a conversion must be triggered externally after writing to ATDCTL5 register.
During a conversion in edge sensitive mode, if additional trigger events are detected the overrun error flag
ETORF is set.
If level sensitive mode is active and the external trigger de-asserts and later asserts again during a
conversion sequence, this does not constitute an overrun. Therefore, the flag is not set. If the trigger is left
active in level sensitive mode when a sequence is about to be complete, another sequence will be triggered
immediately.
8.4.2.2
General-Purpose Digital Port Operation
Each ATD input pin can be switched between analog or digital input functionality. An analog multiplexer
makes each ATD input pin selected as analog input available to the A/D converter.
The pad of the ATD input pin is always connected to the analog input channel of the analog mulitplexer.
Each pad input signal is buffered to the digital port register.
This buffer can be turned on or off with the ATDDIEN register for each ATD input pin.
This is important so that the buffer does not draw excess current when an ATD input pin is selected as
analog input to the ADC12B6C.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
273
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC12B6CV2)
8.5
Resets
At reset the ADC12B6C is in a power down state. The reset state of each individual bit is listed within the
Register Description section (see Section 8.3.2, “Register Descriptions”) which details the registers and
their bit-field.
8.6
Interrupts
The interrupts requested by the ADC12B6C are listed in Table 8-24. Refer to MCU specification for
related vector address and priority.
Table 8-24. ATD Interrupt Vectors
Interrupt Source
CCR
Mask
Local Enable
Sequence Complete Interrupt
I bit
ASCIE in ATDCTL2
Compare Interrupt
I bit
ACMPIE in ATDCTL2
See Section 8.3.2, “Register Descriptions” for further details.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
274
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 9
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
9.1
Introduction
The Version 2 of S12 PWM module is a channel scalable and optimized implementation of S12
PWM8B8C Version 1. The channel is scalable in pairs from PWM0 to PWM7 and the available channel
number is 2, 4, 6 and 8. The shutdown feature has been removed and the flexibility to select one of four
clock sources per channel has improved. If the corresponding channels exist and shutdown feature is not
used, the Version 2 is fully software compatible to Version 1.
9.1.1
Features
The scalable PWM block includes these distinctive features:
• Up to eight independent PWM channels, scalable in pairs (PWM0 to PWM7)
• Available channel number could be 2, 4, 6, 8 (refer to device specification for exact number)
• Programmable period and duty cycle for each channel
• Dedicated counter for each PWM channel
• Programmable PWM enable/disable for each channel
• Software selection of PWM duty pulse polarity for each channel
• Period and duty cycle are double buffered. Change takes effect when the end of the effective period
is reached (PWM counter reaches zero) or when the channel is disabled.
• Programmable center or left aligned outputs on individual channels
• Up to eight 8-bit channel or four 16-bit channel PWM resolution
• Four clock sources (A, B, SA, and SB) provide for a wide range of frequencies
• Programmable clock select logic
9.1.2
Modes of Operation
There is a software programmable option for low power consumption in wait mode that disables the input
clock to the prescaler.
In freeze mode there is a software programmable option to disable the input clock to the prescaler. This is
useful for emulation.
Wait:
The prescaler keeps on running, unless PSWAI in PWMCTL is set to 1.
Freeze:
The prescaler keeps on running, unless PFRZ in PWMCTL is set to 1.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
275
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
9.1.3
Block Diagram
Figure 9-1 shows the block diagram for the 8-bit up to 8-channel scalable PWM block.
PWM8B8C
PWM Channels
Channel 7
Period and Duty
Counter
Channel 6
Bus Clock
Clock Select
PWM Clock
Period and Duty
PWM6
Counter
Channel 5
Period and Duty
PWM7
PWM5
Counter
Control
Channel 4
Period and Duty
PWM4
Counter
Channel 3
Period and Duty
Enable
PWM3
Counter
Channel 2
Polarity
Period and Duty
Alignment
PWM2
Counter
Channel 1
Period and Duty
PWM1
Counter
Channel 0
Period and Duty
Counter
PWM0
Maximum possible channels, scalable in pairs from PWM0 to PWM7.
Figure 9-1. Scalable PWM Block Diagram
9.2
External Signal Description
The scalable PWM module has a selected number of external pins. Refer to device specification for exact
number.
9.2.1
PWM7 - PWM0 — PWM Channel 7 - 0
Those pins serve as waveform output of PWM channel 7 - 0.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
276
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
9.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
9.3.1
Module Memory Map
This section describes the content of the registers in the scalable PWM module. The base address of the
scalable PWM module is determined at the MCU level when the MCU is defined. The register decode map
is fixed and begins at the first address of the module address offset. The figure below shows the registers
associated with the scalable PWM and their relative offset from the base address. The register detail
description follows the order they appear in the register map.
Reserved bits within a register will always read as 0 and the write will be unimplemented. Unimplemented
functions are indicated by shading the bit.
NOTE
Register Address = Base Address + Address Offset, where the Base Address
is defined at the MCU level and the Address Offset is defined at the module
level.
9.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section describes in detail all the registers and register bits in the scalable PWM module.
Register
Name
0x0000
PWME1
R
W
0x0001
PWMPOL1
W
0x0002
PWMCLK1
W
R
R
0x0003
R
PWMPRCLK W
0x0004
R
PWMCAE1 W
0x0005
PWMCTL1
R
W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PWME7
PWME6
PWME5
PWME4
PWME3
PWME2
PWME1
PWME0
PPOL7
PPOL6
PPOL5
PPOL4
PPOL3
PPOL2
PPOL1
PPOL0
PCLK7
PCLKL6
PCLK5
PCLK4
PCLK3
PCLK2
PCLK1
PCLK0
PCKB2
PCKB1
PCKB0
PCKA2
PCKA1
PCKA0
CAE7
CAE6
CAE5
CAE4
CAE3
CAE2
CAE1
CAE0
CON67
CON45
CON23
CON01
PSWAI
PFRZ
0
0
PCLKAB6
PCLKAB5
PCLKAB4
PCLKAB3
PCLKAB2
PCLKAB1
PCLKAB0
0
0x0006
R
PWMCLKAB W PCLKAB7
1
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 9-2. The scalable PWM Register Summary (Sheet 1 of 4)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
277
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Register
Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0008
R
PWMSCLA W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0009
R
PWMSCLB W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x000A
R
RESERVED W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x000B
R
RESERVED W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x000C
R
PWMCNT02 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0x000D
PWMCNT12 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0x000E
PWMCNT22 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0x000F
PWMCNT32 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0x0010
PWMCNT42 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0x0011
PWMCNT52 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0x0012
PWMCNT62 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0x0013
PWMCNT72 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0x0014
PWMPER02 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0015
R
PWMPER12 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0007
R
RESERVED W
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 9-2. The scalable PWM Register Summary (Sheet 2 of 4)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
278
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Register
Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
R
0x0016
PWMPER22 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0017
R
PWMPER32 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0018
R
PWMPER42 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0019
R
PWMPER52 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x001A
R
PWMPER62 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x001B
R
PWMPER72 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x001C
R
PWMDTY02 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x001D
R
PWMDTY12 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x001E
R
PWMDTY22 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x001F
R
PWMDTY32 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0010
R
PWMDTY42 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0021
R
PWMDTY52 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0022
R
PWMDTY62 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0023
R
PWMDTY72 W
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0024
R
RESERVED W
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 9-2. The scalable PWM Register Summary (Sheet 3 of 4)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
279
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Register
Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0025
R
RESERVED W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0026
R
RESERVED W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0027
R
RESERVED W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 9-2. The scalable PWM Register Summary (Sheet 4 of 4)
1
The related bit is available only if corresponding channel exists.
2 The register is available only if corresponding channel exists.
9.3.2.1
PWM Enable Register (PWME)
Each PWM channel has an enable bit (PWMEx) to start its waveform output. When any of the PWMEx
bits are set (PWMEx = 1), the associated PWM output is enabled immediately. However, the actual PWM
waveform is not available on the associated PWM output until its clock source begins its next cycle due to
the synchronization of PWMEx and the clock source.
NOTE
The first PWM cycle after enabling the channel can be irregular.
An exception to this is when channels are concatenated. Once concatenated mode is enabled (CONxx bits
set in PWMCTL register), enabling/disabling the corresponding 16-bit PWM channel is controlled by the
low order PWMEx bit. In this case, the high order bytes PWMEx bits have no effect and their
corresponding PWM output lines are disabled.
While in run mode, if all existing PWM channels are disabled (PWMEx–0 = 0), the prescaler counter shuts
off for power savings.
Module Base + 0x0000
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWME7
PWME6
PWME5
PWME4
PWME3
PWME2
PWME1
PWME0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 9-3. PWM Enable Register (PWME)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
280
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Table 9-2. PWME Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero
Field
Description
7
PWME7
Pulse Width Channel 7 Enable
0 Pulse width channel 7 is disabled.
1 Pulse width channel 7 is enabled. The pulse modulated signal becomes available at PWM output bit 7 when
its clock source begins its next cycle.
6
PWME6
Pulse Width Channel 6 Enable
0 Pulse width channel 6 is disabled.
1 Pulse width channel 6 is enabled. The pulse modulated signal becomes available at PWM output bit 6 when
its clock source begins its next cycle. If CON67=1, then bit has no effect and PWM output line 6 is disabled.
5
PWME5
Pulse Width Channel 5 Enable
0 Pulse width channel 5 is disabled.
1 Pulse width channel 5 is enabled. The pulse modulated signal becomes available at PWM output bit 5 when
its clock source begins its next cycle.
4
PWME4
Pulse Width Channel 4 Enable
0 Pulse width channel 4 is disabled.
1 Pulse width channel 4 is enabled. The pulse modulated signal becomes available at PWM, output bit 4 when
its clock source begins its next cycle. If CON45 = 1, then bit has no effect and PWM output line 4 is disabled.
3
PWME3
Pulse Width Channel 3 Enable
0 Pulse width channel 3 is disabled.
1 Pulse width channel 3 is enabled. The pulse modulated signal becomes available at PWM, output bit 3 when
its clock source begins its next cycle.
2
PWME2
Pulse Width Channel 2 Enable
0 Pulse width channel 2 is disabled.
1 Pulse width channel 2 is enabled. The pulse modulated signal becomes available at PWM, output bit 2 when
its clock source begins its next cycle. If CON23 = 1, then bit has no effect and PWM output line 2 is disabled.
1
PWME1
Pulse Width Channel 1 Enable
0 Pulse width channel 1 is disabled.
1 Pulse width channel 1 is enabled. The pulse modulated signal becomes available at PWM, output bit 1 when
its clock source begins its next cycle.
0
PWME0
Pulse Width Channel 0 Enable
0 Pulse width channel 0 is disabled.
1 Pulse width channel 0 is enabled. The pulse modulated signal becomes available at PWM, output bit 0 when
its clock source begins its next cycle. If CON01 = 1, then bit has no effect and PWM output line 0 is disabled.
9.3.2.2
PWM Polarity Register (PWMPOL)
The starting polarity of each PWM channel waveform is determined by the associated PPOLx bit in the
PWMPOL register. If the polarity bit is one, the PWM channel output is high at the beginning of the cycle
and then goes low when the duty count is reached. Conversely, if the polarity bit is zero, the output starts
low and then goes high when the duty count is reached.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
281
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Module Base + 0x0001
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PPOL7
PPOL6
PPOL5
PPOL4
PPOL3
PPOL2
PPOL1
PPOL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 9-4. PWM Polarity Register (PWMPOL)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
NOTE
PPOLx register bits can be written anytime. If the polarity is changed while
a PWM signal is being generated, a truncated or stretched pulse can occur
during the transition
Table 9-3. PWMPOL Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero
Field
7–0
PPOL[7:0]
9.3.2.3
Description
Pulse Width Channel 7–0 Polarity Bits
0 PWM channel 7–0 outputs are low at the beginning of the period, then go high when the duty count is
reached.
1 PWM channel 7–0 outputs are high at the beginning of the period, then go low when the duty count is
reached.
PWM Clock Select Register (PWMCLK)
Each PWM channel has a choice of four clocks to use as the clock source for that channel as described
below.
Module Base + 0x0002
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCLK7
PCLKL6
PCLK5
PCLK4
PCLK3
PCLK2
PCLK1
PCLK0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 9-5. PWM Clock Select Register (PWMCLK)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
NOTE
Register bits PCLK0 to PCLK7 can be written anytime. If a clock select is
changed while a PWM signal is being generated, a truncated or stretched
pulse can occur during the transition.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
282
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Table 9-4. PWMCLK Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero
Field
7-0
PCLK[7:0]
Description
Pulse Width Channel 7-0 Clock Select
0 Clock A or B is the clock source for PWM channel 7-0, as shown in Table 9-5 and Table 9-6.
1 Clock SA or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 7-0, as shown in Table 9-5 and Table 9-6.
The clock source of each PWM channel is determined by PCLKx bits in PWMCLK and PCLKABx bits
in PWMCLKAB (see Section 9.3.2.7, “PWM Clock A/B Select Register (PWMCLKAB)). For Channel
0, 1, 4, 5, the selection is shown in Table 9-5; For Channel 2, 3, 6, 7, the selection is shown in Table 9-6.
Table 9-5. PWM Channel 0, 1, 4, 5 Clock Source Selection
PCLKAB[0,1,4,5]
PCLK[0,1,4,5]
Clock Source Selection
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Clock A
Clock SA
Clock B
Clock SB
Table 9-6. PWM Channel 2, 3, 6, 7 Clock Source Selection
9.3.2.4
PCLKAB[2,3,6,7]
PCLK[2,3,6,7]
Clock Source Selection
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Clock B
Clock SB
Clock A
Clock SA
PWM Prescale Clock Select Register (PWMPRCLK)
This register selects the prescale clock source for clocks A and B independently.
Module Base + 0x0003
7
R
6
0
W
Reset
0
5
4
PCKB2
PCKB1
PCKB0
0
0
0
3
0
2
1
0
PCKA2
PCKA1
PCKA0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 9-6. PWM Prescale Clock Select Register (PWMPRCLK)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
NOTE
PCKB2–0 and PCKA2–0 register bits can be written anytime. If the clock
pre-scale is changed while a PWM signal is being generated, a truncated or
stretched pulse can occur during the transition.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
283
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Table 9-7. PWMPRCLK Field Descriptions
Field
Description
6–4
PCKB[2:0]
Prescaler Select for Clock B — Clock B is one of two clock sources which can be used for all channels. These
three bits determine the rate of clock B, as shown in Table 9-8.
2–0
PCKA[2:0]
Prescaler Select for Clock A — Clock A is one of two clock sources which can be used for all channels. These
three bits determine the rate of clock A, as shown in Table 9-8.
s
Table 9-8. Clock A or Clock B Prescaler Selects
9.3.2.5
PCKA/B2
PCKA/B1
PCKA/B0
Value of Clock A/B
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bus clock
Bus clock / 2
Bus clock / 4
Bus clock / 8
Bus clock / 16
Bus clock / 32
Bus clock / 64
Bus clock / 128
PWM Center Align Enable Register (PWMCAE)
The PWMCAE register contains eight control bits for the selection of center aligned outputs or left aligned
outputs for each PWM channel. If the CAEx bit is set to a one, the corresponding PWM output will be
center aligned. If the CAEx bit is cleared, the corresponding PWM output will be left aligned. See
Section 9.4.2.5, “Left Aligned Outputs” and Section 9.4.2.6, “Center Aligned Outputs” for a more detailed
description of the PWM output modes.
Module Base + 0x0004
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CAE7
CAE6
CAE5
CAE4
CAE3
CAE2
CAE1
CAE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 9-7. PWM Center Align Enable Register (PWMCAE)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
NOTE
Write these bits only when the corresponding channel is disabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
284
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Table 9-9. PWMCAE Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero
Field
7–0
CAE[7:0]
9.3.2.6
Description
Center Aligned Output Modes on Channels 7–0
0 Channels 7–0 operate in left aligned output mode.
1 Channels 7–0 operate in center aligned output mode.
PWM Control Register (PWMCTL)
The PWMCTL register provides for various control of the PWM module.
Module Base + 0x0005
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
CON67
CON45
CON23
CON01
PSWAI
PFRZ
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 9-8. PWM Control Register (PWMCTL)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
There are up to four control bits for concatenation, each of which is used to concatenate a pair of PWM
channels into one 16-bit channel. If the corresponding channels do not exist on a particular derivative, then
writes to these bits have no effect and reads will return zeroes. When channels 6 and 7are concatenated,
channel 6 registers become the high order bytes of the double byte channel. When channels 4 and 5 are
concatenated, channel 4 registers become the high order bytes of the double byte channel. When channels
2 and 3 are concatenated, channel 2 registers become the high order bytes of the double byte channel.
When channels 0 and 1 are concatenated, channel 0 registers become the high order bytes of the double
byte channel.
See Section 9.4.2.7, “PWM 16-Bit Functions” for a more detailed description of the concatenation PWM
Function.
NOTE
Change these bits only when both corresponding channels are disabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
285
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Table 9-10. PWMCTL Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero
Field
Description
7
CON67
Concatenate Channels 6 and 7
0 Channels 6 and 7 are separate 8-bit PWMs.
1 Channels 6 and 7 are concatenated to create one 16-bit PWM channel. Channel 6 becomes the high order
byte and channel 7 becomes the low order byte. Channel 7 output pin is used as the output for this 16-bit
PWM (bit 7 of port PWMP). Channel 7 clock select control-bit determines the clock source, channel 7 polarity
bit determines the polarity, channel 7 enable bit enables the output and channel 7 center aligned enable bit
determines the output mode.
6
CON45
Concatenate Channels 4 and 5
0 Channels 4 and 5 are separate 8-bit PWMs.
1 Channels 4 and 5 are concatenated to create one 16-bit PWM channel. Channel 4 becomes the high order
byte and channel 5 becomes the low order byte. Channel 5 output pin is used as the output for this 16-bit
PWM (bit 5 of port PWMP). Channel 5 clock select control-bit determines the clock source, channel 5 polarity
bit determines the polarity, channel 5 enable bit enables the output and channel 5 center aligned enable bit
determines the output mode.
5
CON23
Concatenate Channels 2 and 3
0 Channels 2 and 3 are separate 8-bit PWMs.
1 Channels 2 and 3 are concatenated to create one 16-bit PWM channel. Channel 2 becomes the high order
byte and channel 3 becomes the low order byte. Channel 3 output pin is used as the output for this 16-bit
PWM (bit 3 of port PWMP). Channel 3 clock select control-bit determines the clock source, channel 3 polarity
bit determines the polarity, channel 3 enable bit enables the output and channel 3 center aligned enable bit
determines the output mode.
4
CON01
Concatenate Channels 0 and 1
0 Channels 0 and 1 are separate 8-bit PWMs.
1 Channels 0 and 1 are concatenated to create one 16-bit PWM channel. Channel 0 becomes the high order
byte and channel 1 becomes the low order byte. Channel 1 output pin is used as the output for this 16-bit
PWM (bit 1 of port PWMP). Channel 1 clock select control-bit determines the clock source, channel 1 polarity
bit determines the polarity, channel 1 enable bit enables the output and channel 1 center aligned enable bit
determines the output mode.
3
PSWAI
PWM Stops in Wait Mode — Enabling this bit allows for lower power consumption in wait mode by disabling
the input clock to the prescaler.
0 Allow the clock to the prescaler to continue while in wait mode.
1 Stop the input clock to the prescaler whenever the MCU is in wait mode.
2
PFRZ
PWM Counters Stop in Freeze Mode — In freeze mode, there is an option to disable the input clock to the
prescaler by setting the PFRZ bit in the PWMCTL register. If this bit is set, whenever the MCU is in freeze mode,
the input clock to the prescaler is disabled. This feature is useful during emulation as it allows the PWM function
to be suspended. In this way, the counters of the PWM can be stopped while in freeze mode so that once normal
program flow is continued, the counters are re-enabled to simulate real-time operations. Since the registers can
still be accessed in this mode, to re-enable the prescaler clock, either disable the PFRZ bit or exit freeze mode.
0 Allow PWM to continue while in freeze mode.
1 Disable PWM input clock to the prescaler whenever the part is in freeze mode. This is useful for emulation.
9.3.2.7
PWM Clock A/B Select Register (PWMCLKAB)
Each PWM channel has a choice of four clocks to use as the clock source for that channel as described
below.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
286
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Module Base + 0x00006
R
W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCLKAB7
PCLKAB6
PCLKAB5
PCLKAB4
PCLKAB3
PCLKAB2
PCLKAB1
PCLKAB0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
Figure 9-9. PWM Clock Select Register (PWMCLK)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
NOTE
Register bits PCLKAB0 to PCLKAB7 can be written anytime. If a clock
select is changed while a PWM signal is being generated, a truncated or
stretched pulse can occur during the transition.
Table 9-11. PWMCLK Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero
Field
Description
7
PCLKAB7
Pulse Width Channel 7 Clock A/B Select
0 Clock B or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 7, as shown in Table 9-6.
1 Clock A or SA is the clock source for PWM channel 7, as shown in Table 9-6.
6
PCLKAB6
Pulse Width Channel 6 Clock A/B Select
0 Clock B or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 6, as shown in Table 9-6.
1 Clock A or SA is the clock source for PWM channel 6, as shown in Table 9-6.
5
PCLKAB5
Pulse Width Channel 5 Clock A/B Select
0 Clock A or SA is the clock source for PWM channel 5, as shown in Table 9-5.
1 Clock B or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 5, as shown in Table 9-5.
4
PCLKAB4
Pulse Width Channel 4 Clock A/B Select
0 Clock A or SA is the clock source for PWM channel 4, as shown in Table 9-5.
1 Clock B or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 4, as shown in Table 9-5.
3
PCLKAB3
Pulse Width Channel 3 Clock A/B Select
0 Clock B or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 3, as shown in Table 9-6.
1 Clock A or SA is the clock source for PWM channel 3, as shown in Table 9-6.
2
PCLKAB2
Pulse Width Channel 2 Clock A/B Select
0 Clock B or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 2, as shown in Table 9-6.
1 Clock A or SA is the clock source for PWM channel 2, as shown in Table 9-6.
1
PCLKAB1
Pulse Width Channel 1 Clock A/B Select
0 Clock A or SA is the clock source for PWM channel 1, as shown in Table 9-5.
1 Clock B or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 1, as shown in Table 9-5.
0
PCLKAB0
Pulse Width Channel 0 Clock A/B Select
0 Clock A or SA is the clock source for PWM channel 0, as shown in Table 9-5.
1 Clock B or SB is the clock source for PWM channel 0, as shown in Table 9-5.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
287
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
The clock source of each PWM channel is determined by PCLKx bits in PWMCLK (see Section 9.3.2.3,
“PWM Clock Select Register (PWMCLK)) and PCLKABx bits in PWMCLKAB as shown in Table 9-5
and Table 9-6.
9.3.2.8
PWM Scale A Register (PWMSCLA)
PWMSCLA is the programmable scale value used in scaling clock A to generate clock SA. Clock SA is
generated by taking clock A, dividing it by the value in the PWMSCLA register and dividing that by two.
Clock SA = Clock A / (2 * PWMSCLA)
NOTE
When PWMSCLA = $00, PWMSCLA value is considered a full scale value
of 256. Clock A is thus divided by 512.
Any value written to this register will cause the scale counter to load the new scale value (PWMSCLA).
Module Base + 0x0008
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 9-10. PWM Scale A Register (PWMSCLA)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime (causes the scale counter to load the PWMSCLA value)
9.3.2.9
PWM Scale B Register (PWMSCLB)
PWMSCLB is the programmable scale value used in scaling clock B to generate clock SB. Clock SB is
generated by taking clock B, dividing it by the value in the PWMSCLB register and dividing that by two.
Clock SB = Clock B / (2 * PWMSCLB)
NOTE
When PWMSCLB = $00, PWMSCLB value is considered a full scale value
of 256. Clock B is thus divided by 512.
Any value written to this register will cause the scale counter to load the new scale value (PWMSCLB).
Module Base + 0x0009
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 9-11. PWM Scale B Register (PWMSCLB)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime (causes the scale counter to load the PWMSCLB value).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
288
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
9.3.2.10
PWM Channel Counter Registers (PWMCNTx)
Each channel has a dedicated 8-bit up/down counter which runs at the rate of the selected clock source.
The counter can be read at any time without affecting the count or the operation of the PWM channel. In
left aligned output mode, the counter counts from 0 to the value in the period register - 1. In center aligned
output mode, the counter counts from 0 up to the value in the period register and then back down to 0.
Any value written to the counter causes the counter to reset to $00, the counter direction to be set to up,
the immediate load of both duty and period registers with values from the buffers, and the output to change
according to the polarity bit. The counter is also cleared at the end of the effective period (see
Section 9.4.2.5, “Left Aligned Outputs” and Section 9.4.2.6, “Center Aligned Outputs” for more details).
When the channel is disabled (PWMEx = 0), the PWMCNTx register does not count. When a channel
becomes enabled (PWMEx = 1), the associated PWM counter starts at the count in the PWMCNTx
register. For more detailed information on the operation of the counters, see Section 9.4.2.4, “PWM Timer
Counters”.
In concatenated mode, writes to the 16-bit counter by using a 16-bit access or writes to either the low or
high order byte of the counter will reset the 16-bit counter. Reads of the 16-bit counter must be made by
16-bit access to maintain data coherency.
NOTE
Writing to the counter while the channel is enabled can cause an irregular
PWM cycle to occur.
Module Base + 0x000C = PWMCNT0, 0x000D = PWMCNT1, 0x000E = PWMCNT2, 0x000F = PWMCNT3
Module Base + 0x0010 = PWMCNT4, 0x0011 = PWMCNT5, 0x0012 = PWMCNT6, 0x0013 = PWMCNT7
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 9-12. PWM Channel Counter Registers (PWMCNTx)
1
This register is available only when the corresponding channel exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to
a reserved register have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime (any value written causes PWM counter to be reset to $00).
9.3.2.11
PWM Channel Period Registers (PWMPERx)
There is a dedicated period register for each channel. The value in this register determines the period of
the associated PWM channel.
The period registers for each channel are double buffered so that if they change while the channel is
enabled, the change will NOT take effect until one of the following occurs:
• The effective period ends
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
289
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
•
•
The counter is written (counter resets to $00)
The channel is disabled
In this way, the output of the PWM will always be either the old waveform or the new waveform, not some
variation in between. If the channel is not enabled, then writes to the period register will go directly to the
latches as well as the buffer.
NOTE
Reads of this register return the most recent value written. Reads do not
necessarily return the value of the currently active period due to the double
buffering scheme.
See Section 9.4.2.3, “PWM Period and Duty” for more information.
To calculate the output period, take the selected clock source period for the channel of interest (A, B, SA,
or SB) and multiply it by the value in the period register for that channel:
• Left aligned output (CAEx = 0)
PWMx Period = Channel Clock Period * PWMPERx
• Center Aligned Output (CAEx = 1)
PWMx Period = Channel Clock Period * (2 * PWMPERx)
For boundary case programming values, please refer to Section 9.4.2.8, “PWM Boundary Cases”.
Module Base + 0x0014 = PWMPER0, 0x0015 = PWMPER1, 0x0016 = PWMPER2, 0x0017 = PWMPER3
Module Base + 0x0018 = PWMPER4, 0x0019 = PWMPER5, 0x001A = PWMPER6, 0x001B = PWMPER7
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Figure 9-13. PWM Channel Period Registers (PWMPERx)
1
This register is available only when the corresponding channel exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to
a reserved register have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
9.3.2.12
PWM Channel Duty Registers (PWMDTYx)
There is a dedicated duty register for each channel. The value in this register determines the duty of the
associated PWM channel. The duty value is compared to the counter and if it is equal to the counter value
a match occurs and the output changes state.
The duty registers for each channel are double buffered so that if they change while the channel is enabled,
the change will NOT take effect until one of the following occurs:
• The effective period ends
• The counter is written (counter resets to $00)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
290
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
•
The channel is disabled
In this way, the output of the PWM will always be either the old duty waveform or the new duty waveform,
not some variation in between. If the channel is not enabled, then writes to the duty register will go directly
to the latches as well as the buffer.
NOTE
Reads of this register return the most recent value written. Reads do not
necessarily return the value of the currently active duty due to the double
buffering scheme.
See Section 9.4.2.3, “PWM Period and Duty” for more information.
NOTE
Depending on the polarity bit, the duty registers will contain the count of
either the high time or the low time. If the polarity bit is one, the output starts
high and then goes low when the duty count is reached, so the duty registers
contain a count of the high time. If the polarity bit is zero, the output starts
low and then goes high when the duty count is reached, so the duty registers
contain a count of the low time.
To calculate the output duty cycle (high time as a% of period) for a particular channel:
• Polarity = 0 (PPOL x =0)
Duty Cycle = [(PWMPERx-PWMDTYx)/PWMPERx] * 100%
• Polarity = 1 (PPOLx = 1)
Duty Cycle = [PWMDTYx / PWMPERx] * 100%
For boundary case programming values, please refer to Section 9.4.2.8, “PWM Boundary Cases”.
Module Base + 0x001C = PWMDTY0, 0x001D = PWMDTY1, 0x001E = PWMDTY2, 0x001F = PWMDTY3
Module Base + 0x0020 = PWMDTY4, 0x0021 = PWMDTY5, 0x0022 = PWMDTY6, 0x0023 = PWMDTY7
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Figure 9-14. PWM Channel Duty Registers (PWMDTYx)
1
This register is available only when the corresponding channel exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to
a reserved register have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
291
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
9.4
9.4.1
Functional Description
PWM Clock Select
There are four available clocks: clock A, clock B, clock SA (scaled A), and clock SB (scaled B). These
four clocks are based on the bus clock.
Clock A and B can be software selected to be 1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8,..., 1/64, 1/128 times the bus clock. Clock SA
uses clock A as an input and divides it further with a reloadable counter. Similarly, clock SB uses clock B
as an input and divides it further with a reloadable counter. The rates available for clock SA are software
selectable to be clock A divided by 2, 4, 6, 8,..., or 512 in increments of divide by 2. Similar rates are
available for clock SB. Each PWM channel has the capability of selecting one of four clocks, clock A,
Clock B, clock SA or clock SB.
The block diagram in Figure 9-15 shows the four different clocks and how the scaled clocks are created.
9.4.1.1
Prescale
The input clock to the PWM prescaler is the bus clock. It can be disabled whenever the part is in freeze
mode by setting the PFRZ bit in the PWMCTL register. If this bit is set, whenever the MCU is in freeze
mode (freeze mode signal active) the input clock to the prescaler is disabled. This is useful for emulation
in order to freeze the PWM. The input clock can also be disabled when all available PWM channels are
disabled (PWMEx-0 = 0). This is useful for reducing power by disabling the prescale counter.
Clock A and clock B are scaled values of the input clock. The value is software selectable for both clock
A and clock B and has options of 1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, or 1/128 times the bus clock. The value
selected for clock A is determined by the PCKA2, PCKA1, PCKA0 bits in the PWMPRCLK register. The
value selected for clock B is determined by the PCKB2, PCKB1, PCKB0 bits also in the PWMPRCLK
register.
9.4.1.2
Clock Scale
The scaled A clock uses clock A as an input and divides it further with a user programmable value and
then divides this by 2. The scaled B clock uses clock B as an input and divides it further with a user
programmable value and then divides this by 2. The rates available for clock SA are software selectable to
be clock A divided by 2, 4, 6, 8,..., or 512 in increments of divide by 2. Similar rates are available for clock
SB.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
292
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Clock A
PCKA2
PCKA1
PCKA0
Clock A/2, A/4, A/6,....A/512
M
U
X
Clock to
PWM Ch 0
PCLK0 PCLKAB0
Count = 1
8-Bit Down
Counter
M
U
X
Load
PWMSCLA
DIV 2
Clock SA
PCLK1 PCLKAB1
M
U
X
M
Clock to
PWM Ch 1
Clock to
PWM Ch 2
U
PCLK2 PCLKAB2
M
U
X
2 4 8 16 32 64 128
Divide by
Prescaler Taps:
X
PCLK3 PCLKAB3
Clock B
Clock B/2, B/4, B/6,....B/512
M
M
U
X
Clock to
PWM Ch 4
PCLK4 PCLKAB4
Count = 1
8-Bit Down
Counter
U
X
M
U
X
Load
PWMSCLB
DIV 2
Clock SB
PCKB2
PCKB1
PCKB0
Clock to
PWM Ch 5
PCLK5 PCLKAB5
M
U
X
Clock to
PWM Ch 6
PCLK6 PCLKAB6
PWME7-0
Bus Clock
PFRZ
Freeze Mode Signal
Clock to
PWM Ch 3
M
U
X
Clock to
PWM Ch 7
PCLK7 PCLKAB7
Prescale
Scale
Clock Select
Maximum possible channels, scalable in pairs from PWM0 to PWM7.
Figure 9-15. PWM Clock Select Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
293
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Clock A is used as an input to an 8-bit down counter. This down counter loads a user programmable scale
value from the scale register (PWMSCLA). When the down counter reaches one, a pulse is output and the
8-bit counter is re-loaded. The output signal from this circuit is further divided by two. This gives a greater
range with only a slight reduction in granularity. Clock SA equals clock A divided by two times the value
in the PWMSCLA register.
NOTE
Clock SA = Clock A / (2 * PWMSCLA)
When PWMSCLA = $00, PWMSCLA value is considered a full scale value
of 256. Clock A is thus divided by 512.
Similarly, clock B is used as an input to an 8-bit down counter followed by a divide by two producing clock
SB. Thus, clock SB equals clock B divided by two times the value in the PWMSCLB register.
NOTE
Clock SB = Clock B / (2 * PWMSCLB)
When PWMSCLB = $00, PWMSCLB value is considered a full scale value
of 256. Clock B is thus divided by 512.
As an example, consider the case in which the user writes $FF into the PWMSCLA register. Clock A for
this case will be E (bus clock) divided by 4. A pulse will occur at a rate of once every 255x4 E cycles.
Passing this through the divide by two circuit produces a clock signal at an E divided by 2040 rate.
Similarly, a value of $01 in the PWMSCLA register when clock A is E divided by 4 will produce a clock
at an E divided by 8 rate.
Writing to PWMSCLA or PWMSCLB causes the associated 8-bit down counter to be re-loaded.
Otherwise, when changing rates the counter would have to count down to $01 before counting at the proper
rate. Forcing the associated counter to re-load the scale register value every time PWMSCLA or
PWMSCLB is written prevents this.
NOTE
Writing to the scale registers while channels are operating can cause
irregularities in the PWM outputs.
9.4.1.3
Clock Select
Each PWM channel has the capability of selecting one of four clocks, clock A, clock SA, clock B or clock
SB. The clock selection is done with the PCLKx control bits in the PWMCLK register and PCLKABx
control bits in PWMCLKAB register. For backward compatibility consideration, the reset value of
PWMCLK and PWMCLKAB configures following default clock selection.
For channels 0, 1, 4, and 5 the clock choices are clock A.
For channels 2, 3, 6, and 7 the clock choices are clock B.
NOTE
Changing clock control bits while channels are operating can cause
irregularities in the PWM outputs.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
294
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
9.4.2
PWM Channel Timers
The main part of the PWM module are the actual timers. Each of the timer channels has a counter, a period
register and a duty register (each are 8-bit). The waveform output period is controlled by a match between
the period register and the value in the counter. The duty is controlled by a match between the duty register
and the counter value and causes the state of the output to change during the period. The starting polarity
of the output is also selectable on a per channel basis. Shown below in Figure 9-16 is the block diagram
for the PWM timer.
Clock Source
From Port PWMP
Data Register
8-Bit Counter
Gate
PWMCNTx
(Clock Edge
Sync)
Up/Down
Reset
8-bit Compare =
T
M
U
X
Q
PWMDTYx
Q
R
M
U
X
To Pin
Driver
8-bit Compare =
PWMPERx
PPOLx
Q
T
CAEx
Q
R
PWMEx
Figure 9-16. PWM Timer Channel Block Diagram
9.4.2.1
PWM Enable
Each PWM channel has an enable bit (PWMEx) to start its waveform output. When any of the PWMEx
bits are set (PWMEx = 1), the associated PWM output signal is enabled immediately. However, the actual
PWM waveform is not available on the associated PWM output until its clock source begins its next cycle
due to the synchronization of PWMEx and the clock source. An exception to this is when channels are
concatenated. Refer to Section 9.4.2.7, “PWM 16-Bit Functions” for more detail.
NOTE
The first PWM cycle after enabling the channel can be irregular.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
295
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
On the front end of the PWM timer, the clock is enabled to the PWM circuit by the PWMEx bit being high.
There is an edge-synchronizing circuit to guarantee that the clock will only be enabled or disabled at an
edge. When the channel is disabled (PWMEx = 0), the counter for the channel does not count.
9.4.2.2
PWM Polarity
Each channel has a polarity bit to allow starting a waveform cycle with a high or low signal. This is shown
on the block diagram Figure 9-16 as a mux select of either the Q output or the Q output of the PWM output
flip flop. When one of the bits in the PWMPOL register is set, the associated PWM channel output is high
at the beginning of the waveform, then goes low when the duty count is reached. Conversely, if the polarity
bit is zero, the output starts low and then goes high when the duty count is reached.
9.4.2.3
PWM Period and Duty
Dedicated period and duty registers exist for each channel and are double buffered so that if they change
while the channel is enabled, the change will NOT take effect until one of the following occurs:
• The effective period ends
• The counter is written (counter resets to $00)
• The channel is disabled
In this way, the output of the PWM will always be either the old waveform or the new waveform, not some
variation in between. If the channel is not enabled, then writes to the period and duty registers will go
directly to the latches as well as the buffer.
A change in duty or period can be forced into effect “immediately” by writing the new value to the duty
and/or period registers and then writing to the counter. This forces the counter to reset and the new duty
and/or period values to be latched. In addition, since the counter is readable, it is possible to know where
the count is with respect to the duty value and software can be used to make adjustments
NOTE
When forcing a new period or duty into effect immediately, an irregular
PWM cycle can occur.
Depending on the polarity bit, the duty registers will contain the count of
either the high time or the low time.
9.4.2.4
PWM Timer Counters
Each channel has a dedicated 8-bit up/down counter which runs at the rate of the selected clock source (see
Section 9.4.1, “PWM Clock Select” for the available clock sources and rates). The counter compares to
two registers, a duty register and a period register as shown in Figure 9-16. When the PWM counter
matches the duty register, the output flip-flop changes state, causing the PWM waveform to also change
state. A match between the PWM counter and the period register behaves differently depending on what
output mode is selected as shown in Figure 9-16 and described in Section 9.4.2.5, “Left Aligned Outputs”
and Section 9.4.2.6, “Center Aligned Outputs”.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
296
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Each channel counter can be read at anytime without affecting the count or the operation of the PWM
channel.
Any value written to the counter causes the counter to reset to $00, the counter direction to be set to up,
the immediate load of both duty and period registers with values from the buffers, and the output to change
according to the polarity bit. When the channel is disabled (PWMEx = 0), the counter stops. When a
channel becomes enabled (PWMEx = 1), the associated PWM counter continues from the count in the
PWMCNTx register. This allows the waveform to continue where it left off when the channel is
re-enabled. When the channel is disabled, writing “0” to the period register will cause the counter to reset
on the next selected clock.
NOTE
If the user wants to start a new “clean” PWM waveform without any
“history” from the old waveform, the user must write to channel counter
(PWMCNTx) prior to enabling the PWM channel (PWMEx = 1).
Generally, writes to the counter are done prior to enabling a channel in order to start from a known state.
However, writing a counter can also be done while the PWM channel is enabled (counting). The effect is
similar to writing the counter when the channel is disabled, except that the new period is started
immediately with the output set according to the polarity bit.
NOTE
Writing to the counter while the channel is enabled can cause an irregular
PWM cycle to occur.
The counter is cleared at the end of the effective period (see Section 9.4.2.5, “Left Aligned Outputs” and
Section 9.4.2.6, “Center Aligned Outputs” for more details).
Table 9-12. PWM Timer Counter Conditions
Counter Clears ($00)
Counter Counts
Counter Stops
When PWMCNTx register written to
any value
When PWM channel is enabled
(PWMEx = 1). Counts from last value in
PWMCNTx.
When PWM channel is disabled
(PWMEx = 0)
Effective period ends
9.4.2.5
Left Aligned Outputs
The PWM timer provides the choice of two types of outputs, left aligned or center aligned. They are
selected with the CAEx bits in the PWMCAE register. If the CAEx bit is cleared (CAEx = 0), the
corresponding PWM output will be left aligned.
In left aligned output mode, the 8-bit counter is configured as an up counter only. It compares to two
registers, a duty register and a period register as shown in the block diagram in Figure 9-16. When the
PWM counter matches the duty register the output flip-flop changes state causing the PWM waveform to
also change state. A match between the PWM counter and the period register resets the counter and the
output flip-flop, as shown in Figure 9-16, as well as performing a load from the double buffer period and
duty register to the associated registers, as described in Section 9.4.2.3, “PWM Period and Duty”. The
counter counts from 0 to the value in the period register – 1.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
297
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
NOTE
Changing the PWM output mode from left aligned to center aligned output
(or vice versa) while channels are operating can cause irregularities in the
PWM output. It is recommended to program the output mode before
enabling the PWM channel.
PPOLx = 0
PPOLx = 1
PWMDTYx
Period = PWMPERx
Figure 9-17. PWM Left Aligned Output Waveform
To calculate the output frequency in left aligned output mode for a particular channel, take the selected
clock source frequency for the channel (A, B, SA, or SB) and divide it by the value in the period register
for that channel.
• PWMx Frequency = Clock (A, B, SA, or SB) / PWMPERx
• PWMx Duty Cycle (high time as a% of period):
— Polarity = 0 (PPOLx = 0)
Duty Cycle = [(PWMPERx-PWMDTYx)/PWMPERx] * 100%
— Polarity = 1 (PPOLx = 1)
Duty Cycle = [PWMDTYx / PWMPERx] * 100%
As an example of a left aligned output, consider the following case:
Clock Source = E, where E = 10 MHz (100 ns period)
PPOLx = 0
PWMPERx = 4
PWMDTYx = 1
PWMx Frequency = 10 MHz/4 = 2.5 MHz
PWMx Period = 400 ns
PWMx Duty Cycle = 3/4 *100% = 75%
The output waveform generated is shown in Figure 9-18.
E = 100 ns
Duty Cycle = 75%
Period = 400 ns
Figure 9-18. PWM Left Aligned Output Example Waveform
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
298
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
9.4.2.6
Center Aligned Outputs
For center aligned output mode selection, set the CAEx bit (CAEx = 1) in the PWMCAE register and the
corresponding PWM output will be center aligned.
The 8-bit counter operates as an up/down counter in this mode and is set to up whenever the counter is
equal to $00. The counter compares to two registers, a duty register and a period register as shown in the
block diagram in Figure 9-16. When the PWM counter matches the duty register, the output flip-flop
changes state, causing the PWM waveform to also change state. A match between the PWM counter and
the period register changes the counter direction from an up-count to a down-count. When the PWM
counter decrements and matches the duty register again, the output flip-flop changes state causing the
PWM output to also change state. When the PWM counter decrements and reaches zero, the counter
direction changes from a down-count back to an up-count and a load from the double buffer period and
duty registers to the associated registers is performed, as described in Section 9.4.2.3, “PWM Period and
Duty”. The counter counts from 0 up to the value in the period register and then back down to 0. Thus the
effective period is PWMPERx*2.
NOTE
Changing the PWM output mode from left aligned to center aligned output
(or vice versa) while channels are operating can cause irregularities in the
PWM output. It is recommended to program the output mode before
enabling the PWM channel.
PPOLx = 0
PPOLx = 1
PWMDTYx
PWMDTYx
PWMPERx
PWMPERx
Period = PWMPERx*2
Figure 9-19. PWM Center Aligned Output Waveform
To calculate the output frequency in center aligned output mode for a particular channel, take the selected
clock source frequency for the channel (A, B, SA, or SB) and divide it by twice the value in the period
register for that channel.
• PWMx Frequency = Clock (A, B, SA, or SB) / (2*PWMPERx)
• PWMx Duty Cycle (high time as a% of period):
— Polarity = 0 (PPOLx = 0)
Duty Cycle = [(PWMPERx-PWMDTYx)/PWMPERx] * 100%
— Polarity = 1 (PPOLx = 1)
Duty Cycle = [PWMDTYx / PWMPERx] * 100%
As an example of a center aligned output, consider the following case:
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
299
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Clock Source = E, where E = 10 MHz (100 ns period)
PPOLx = 0
PWMPERx = 4
PWMDTYx = 1
PWMx Frequency = 10 MHz/8 = 1.25 MHz
PWMx Period = 800 ns
PWMx Duty Cycle = 3/4 *100% = 75%
Shown in Figure 9-20 is the output waveform generated.
E = 100 ns
E = 100 ns
DUTY CYCLE = 75%
PERIOD = 800 ns
Figure 9-20. PWM Center Aligned Output Example Waveform
9.4.2.7
PWM 16-Bit Functions
The scalable PWM timer also has the option of generating up to 8-channels of 8-bits or 4-channels of
16-bits for greater PWM resolution. This 16-bit channel option is achieved through the concatenation of
two 8-bit channels.
The PWMCTL register contains four control bits, each of which is used to concatenate a pair of PWM
channels into one 16-bit channel. Channels 6 and 7 are concatenated with the CON67 bit, channels 4 and
5 are concatenated with the CON45 bit, channels 2 and 3 are concatenated with the CON23 bit, and
channels 0 and 1 are concatenated with the CON01 bit.
NOTE
Change these bits only when both corresponding channels are disabled.
When channels 6 and 7 are concatenated, channel 6 registers become the high order bytes of the double
byte channel, as shown in Figure 9-21. Similarly, when channels 4 and 5 are concatenated, channel 4
registers become the high order bytes of the double byte channel. When channels 2 and 3 are concatenated,
channel 2 registers become the high order bytes of the double byte channel. When channels 0 and 1 are
concatenated, channel 0 registers become the high order bytes of the double byte channel.
When using the 16-bit concatenated mode, the clock source is determined by the low order 8-bit channel
clock select control bits. That is channel 7 when channels 6 and 7 are concatenated, channel 5 when
channels 4 and 5 are concatenated, channel 3 when channels 2 and 3 are concatenated, and channel 1 when
channels 0 and 1 are concatenated. The resulting PWM is output to the pins of the corresponding low order
8-bit channel as also shown in Figure 9-21. The polarity of the resulting PWM output is controlled by the
PPOLx bit of the corresponding low order 8-bit channel as well.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
300
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
Clock Source 7
High
Low
PWMCNT6
PWMCNT7
Period/Duty Compare
PWM7
Clock Source 5
High
Low
PWMCNT4
PWMCNT5
Period/Duty Compare
PWM5
Clock Source 3
High
Low
PWMCNT2
PWMCNT3
Period/Duty Compare
PWM3
Clock Source 1
High
Low
PWMCNT0
PWMCNT1
Period/Duty Compare
PWM1
Maximum possible 16-bit channels
Figure 9-21. PWM 16-Bit Mode
Once concatenated mode is enabled (CONxx bits set in PWMCTL register), enabling/disabling the
corresponding 16-bit PWM channel is controlled by the low order PWMEx bit. In this case, the high order
bytes PWMEx bits have no effect and their corresponding PWM output is disabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
301
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
In concatenated mode, writes to the 16-bit counter by using a 16-bit access or writes to either the low or
high order byte of the counter will reset the 16-bit counter. Reads of the 16-bit counter must be made by
16-bit access to maintain data coherency.
Either left aligned or center aligned output mode can be used in concatenated mode and is controlled by
the low order CAEx bit. The high order CAEx bit has no effect.
Table 9-13 is used to summarize which channels are used to set the various control bits when in 16-bit
mode.
Table 9-13. 16-bit Concatenation Mode Summary
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance.
9.4.2.8
CONxx
PWMEx
PPOLx
PCLKx
CAEx
PWMx
Output
CON67
PWME7
PPOL7
PCLK7
CAE7
PWM7
CON45
PWME5
PPOL5
PCLK5
CAE5
PWM5
CON23
PWME3
PPOL3
PCLK3
CAE3
PWM3
CON01
PWME1
PPOL1
PCLK1
CAE1
PWM1
PWM Boundary Cases
Table 9-14 summarizes the boundary conditions for the PWM regardless of the output mode (left aligned
or center aligned) and 8-bit (normal) or 16-bit (concatenation).
Table 9-14. PWM Boundary Cases
1
9.5
PWMDTYx
PWMPERx
PPOLx
PWMx Output
$00
(indicates no duty)
>$00
1
Always low
$00
(indicates no duty)
>$00
0
Always high
XX
$001
(indicates no period)
1
Always high
XX
$001
(indicates no period)
0
Always low
>= PWMPERx
XX
1
Always high
>= PWMPERx
XX
0
Always low
Counter = $00 and does not count.
Resets
The reset state of each individual bit is listed within the Section 9.3.2, “Register Descriptions” which
details the registers and their bit-fields. All special functions or modes which are initialized during or just
following reset are described within this section.
• The 8-bit up/down counter is configured as an up counter out of reset.
• All the channels are disabled and all the counters do not count.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
302
Freescale Semiconductor
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
•
•
9.6
For channels 0, 1, 4, and 5 the clock choices are clock A.
For channels 2, 3, 6, and 7 the clock choices are clock B.
Interrupts
The PWM module has no interrupt.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
303
Pulse-Width Modulator (S12PWM8B8CV2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
304
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 10
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
Table 10-1. Revision History
Version
Number
Revision
Date
05.01
04/16/2004
05.02
10/14/2005
05.03
12/25/2008
05.04
08/05/2009
10.1
Effective
Date
Author
Description of Changes
Update OR and PF flag description; Correct baud rate
tolerance in 4.7.5.1 and 4.7.5.2; Clean up classification and
NDA message banners
Correct alternative registers address;
Remove unavailable baud rate in Table1-16
remove redundancy comments in Figure1-2
fix typo, SCIBDL reset value be 0x04, not 0x00
Introduction
This block guide provides an overview of the serial communication interface (SCI) module.
The SCI allows asynchronous serial communications with peripheral devices and other CPUs.
10.1.1
Glossary
IR: InfraRed
IrDA: Infrared Design Associate
IRQ: Interrupt Request
LIN: Local Interconnect Network
LSB: Least Significant Bit
MSB: Most Significant Bit
NRZ: Non-Return-to-Zero
RZI: Return-to-Zero-Inverted
RXD: Receive Pin
SCI : Serial Communication Interface
TXD: Transmit Pin
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
305
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.1.2
Features
The SCI includes these distinctive features:
• Full-duplex or single-wire operation
• Standard mark/space non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format
• Selectable IrDA 1.4 return-to-zero-inverted (RZI) format with programmable pulse widths
• 13-bit baud rate selection
• Programmable 8-bit or 9-bit data format
• Separately enabled transmitter and receiver
• Programmable polarity for transmitter and receiver
• Programmable transmitter output parity
• Two receiver wakeup methods:
— Idle line wakeup
— Address mark wakeup
• Interrupt-driven operation with eight flags:
— Transmitter empty
— Transmission complete
— Receiver full
— Idle receiver input
— Receiver overrun
— Noise error
— Framing error
— Parity error
— Receive wakeup on active edge
— Transmit collision detect supporting LIN
— Break Detect supporting LIN
• Receiver framing error detection
• Hardware parity checking
• 1/16 bit-time noise detection
10.1.3
Modes of Operation
The SCI functions the same in normal, special, and emulation modes. It has two low power modes, wait
and stop modes.
• Run mode
• Wait mode
• Stop mode
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
306
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.1.4
Block Diagram
Figure 10-1 is a high level block diagram of the SCI module, showing the interaction of various function
blocks.
SCI Data Register
RXD Data In
Infrared
Decoder
Receive Shift Register
Receive & Wakeup
Control
Bus Clock
Baud Rate
Generator
IDLE
Receive
RDRF/OR
Interrupt
Generation BRKD
RXEDG
BERR
Data Format Control
1/16
Transmit Control
Transmit Shift Register
SCI
Interrupt
Request
Transmit
TDRE
Interrupt
Generation TC
Infrared
Encoder
Data Out TXD
SCI Data Register
Figure 10-1. SCI Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
307
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.2
External Signal Description
The SCI module has a total of two external pins.
10.2.1
TXD — Transmit Pin
The TXD pin transmits SCI (standard or infrared) data. It will idle high in either mode and is high
impedance anytime the transmitter is disabled.
10.2.2
RXD — Receive Pin
The RXD pin receives SCI (standard or infrared) data. An idle line is detected as a line high. This input is
ignored when the receiver is disabled and should be terminated to a known voltage.
10.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of all the SCI registers.
10.3.1
Module Memory Map and Register Definition
The memory map for the SCI module is given below in Figure 10-2. The address listed for each register is
the address offset. The total address for each register is the sum of the base address for the SCI module and
the address offset for each register.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
308
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section consists of register descriptions in address order. Each description includes a standard register
diagram with an associated figure number. Writes to a reserved register locations do not have any effect
and reads of these locations return a zero. Details of register bit and field function follow the register
diagrams, in bit order.
Register
Name
0x0000
SCIBDH1
W
0x0001
SCIBDL1
W
0x0002
SCICR11
R
R
R
W
0x0000
SCIASR12
W
0x0001
SCIACR12
W
0x0002
SCIACR22
0x0003
SCICR2
0x0004
SCISR1
0x0005
SCISR2
0x0006
SCIDRH
0x0007
SCIDRL
R
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
IREN
TNP1
TNP0
SBR12
SBR11
SBR10
SBR9
SBR8
SBR7
SBR6
SBR5
SBR4
SBR3
SBR2
SBR1
SBR0
LOOPS
SCISWAI
RSRC
M
WAKE
ILT
PE
PT
0
0
0
0
BERRV
BERRIF
BKDIF
0
0
0
0
BERRIE
BKDIE
0
0
0
0
0
BERRM1
BERRM0
BKDFE
TIE
TCIE
RIE
ILIE
TE
RE
RWU
SBK
TDRE
TC
RDRF
IDLE
OR
NF
FE
PF
0
0
TXPOL
RXPOL
BRK13
TXDIR
0
0
0
0
0
0
RXEDGIF
RXEDGIE
R
W
R
W
R
0
W
R
W
R
AMAP
R8
W
T8
RAF
R
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
W
T7
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
T0
1.These registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCISR2 register is set to zero.
2,These registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCISR2 register is set to one.
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 10-2. SCI Register Summary
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
309
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2.1
SCI Baud Rate Registers (SCIBDH, SCIBDL)
Module Base + 0x0000
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IREN
TNP1
TNP0
SBR12
SBR11
SBR10
SBR9
SBR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 10-3. SCI Baud Rate Register (SCIBDH)
Module Base + 0x0001
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SBR7
SBR6
SBR5
SBR4
SBR3
SBR2
SBR1
SBR0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Figure 10-4. SCI Baud Rate Register (SCIBDL)
Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 0. If only SCIBDH is written to, a read will not return the correct data until
SCIBDL is written to as well, following a write to SCIBDH.
Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 0.
NOTE
Those two registers are only visible in the memory map if AMAP = 0 (reset
condition).
The SCI baud rate register is used by to determine the baud rate of the SCI, and to control the infrared
modulation/demodulation submodule.
Table 10-2. SCIBDH and SCIBDL Field Descriptions
Field
7
IREN
Description
Infrared Enable Bit — This bit enables/disables the infrared modulation/demodulation submodule.
0 IR disabled
1 IR enabled
6:5
TNP[1:0]
Transmitter Narrow Pulse Bits — These bits enable whether the SCI transmits a 1/16, 3/16, 1/32 or 1/4 narrow
pulse. See Table 10-3.
4:0
7:0
SBR[12:0]
SCI Baud Rate Bits — The baud rate for the SCI is determined by the bits in this register. The baud rate is
calculated two different ways depending on the state of the IREN bit.
The formulas for calculating the baud rate are:
When IREN = 0 then,
SCI baud rate = SCI bus clock / (16 x SBR[12:0])
When IREN = 1 then,
SCI baud rate = SCI bus clock / (32 x SBR[12:1])
Note: The baud rate generator is disabled after reset and not started until the TE bit or the RE bit is set for the
first time. The baud rate generator is disabled when (SBR[12:0] = 0 and IREN = 0) or (SBR[12:1] = 0 and
IREN = 1).
Note: Writing to SCIBDH has no effect without writing to SCIBDL, because writing to SCIBDH puts the data in
a temporary location until SCIBDL is written to.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
310
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
Table 10-3. IRSCI Transmit Pulse Width
10.3.2.2
TNP[1:0]
Narrow Pulse Width
11
1/4
10
1/32
01
1/16
00
3/16
SCI Control Register 1 (SCICR1)
Module Base + 0x0002
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LOOPS
SCISWAI
RSRC
M
WAKE
ILT
PE
PT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 10-5. SCI Control Register 1 (SCICR1)
Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 0.
Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 0.
NOTE
This register is only visible in the memory map if AMAP = 0 (reset
condition).
Table 10-4. SCICR1 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
LOOPS
Loop Select Bit — LOOPS enables loop operation. In loop operation, the RXD pin is disconnected from the SCI
and the transmitter output is internally connected to the receiver input. Both the transmitter and the receiver must
be enabled to use the loop function.
0 Normal operation enabled
1 Loop operation enabled
The receiver input is determined by the RSRC bit.
6
SCISWAI
5
RSRC
4
M
3
WAKE
SCI Stop in Wait Mode Bit — SCISWAI disables the SCI in wait mode.
0 SCI enabled in wait mode
1 SCI disabled in wait mode
Receiver Source Bit — When LOOPS = 1, the RSRC bit determines the source for the receiver shift register
input. See Table 10-5.
0 Receiver input internally connected to transmitter output
1 Receiver input connected externally to transmitter
Data Format Mode Bit — MODE determines whether data characters are eight or nine bits long.
0 One start bit, eight data bits, one stop bit
1 One start bit, nine data bits, one stop bit
Wakeup Condition Bit — WAKE determines which condition wakes up the SCI: a logic 1 (address mark) in the
most significant bit position of a received data character or an idle condition on the RXD pin.
0 Idle line wakeup
1 Address mark wakeup
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
311
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
Table 10-4. SCICR1 Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
2
ILT
Idle Line Type Bit — ILT determines when the receiver starts counting logic 1s as idle character bits. The
counting begins either after the start bit or after the stop bit. If the count begins after the start bit, then a string of
logic 1s preceding the stop bit may cause false recognition of an idle character. Beginning the count after the
stop bit avoids false idle character recognition, but requires properly synchronized transmissions.
0 Idle character bit count begins after start bit
1 Idle character bit count begins after stop bit
1
PE
Parity Enable Bit — PE enables the parity function. When enabled, the parity function inserts a parity bit in the
most significant bit position.
0 Parity function disabled
1 Parity function enabled
0
PT
Parity Type Bit — PT determines whether the SCI generates and checks for even parity or odd parity. With even
parity, an even number of 1s clears the parity bit and an odd number of 1s sets the parity bit. With odd parity, an
odd number of 1s clears the parity bit and an even number of 1s sets the parity bit.
1 Even parity
1 Odd parity
Table 10-5. Loop Functions
LOOPS
RSRC
Function
0
x
Normal operation
1
0
Loop mode with transmitter output internally connected to receiver input
1
1
Single-wire mode with TXD pin connected to receiver input
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
312
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2.3
SCI Alternative Status Register 1 (SCIASR1)
Module Base + 0x0000
7
R
W
Reset
RXEDGIF
0
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
BERRV
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
BERRIF
BKDIF
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 10-6. SCI Alternative Status Register 1 (SCIASR1)
Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 1
Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 1
Table 10-6. SCIASR1 Field Descriptions
Field
7
RXEDGIF
Description
Receive Input Active Edge Interrupt Flag — RXEDGIF is asserted, if an active edge (falling if RXPOL = 0,
rising if RXPOL = 1) on the RXD input occurs. RXEDGIF bit is cleared by writing a “1” to it.
0 No active edge on the receive input has occurred
1 An active edge on the receive input has occurred
2
BERRV
Bit Error Value — BERRV reflects the state of the RXD input when the bit error detect circuitry is enabled and
a mismatch to the expected value happened. The value is only meaningful, if BERRIF = 1.
0 A low input was sampled, when a high was expected
1 A high input reassembled, when a low was expected
1
BERRIF
Bit Error Interrupt Flag — BERRIF is asserted, when the bit error detect circuitry is enabled and if the value
sampled at the RXD input does not match the transmitted value. If the BERRIE interrupt enable bit is set an
interrupt will be generated. The BERRIF bit is cleared by writing a “1” to it.
0 No mismatch detected
1 A mismatch has occurred
0
BKDIF
Break Detect Interrupt Flag — BKDIF is asserted, if the break detect circuitry is enabled and a break signal is
received. If the BKDIE interrupt enable bit is set an interrupt will be generated. The BKDIF bit is cleared by writing
a “1” to it.
0 No break signal was received
1 A break signal was received
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
313
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2.4
SCI Alternative Control Register 1 (SCIACR1)
Module Base + 0x0001
7
R
W
Reset
RXEDGIE
0
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
BERRIE
BKDIE
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 10-7. SCI Alternative Control Register 1 (SCIACR1)
Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 1
Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 1
Table 10-7. SCIACR1 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
RSEDGIE
Receive Input Active Edge Interrupt Enable — RXEDGIE enables the receive input active edge interrupt flag,
RXEDGIF, to generate interrupt requests.
0 RXEDGIF interrupt requests disabled
1 RXEDGIF interrupt requests enabled
1
BERRIE
0
BKDIE
Bit Error Interrupt Enable — BERRIE enables the bit error interrupt flag, BERRIF, to generate interrupt
requests.
0 BERRIF interrupt requests disabled
1 BERRIF interrupt requests enabled
Break Detect Interrupt Enable — BKDIE enables the break detect interrupt flag, BKDIF, to generate interrupt
requests.
0 BKDIF interrupt requests disabled
1 BKDIF interrupt requests enabled
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
314
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2.5
SCI Alternative Control Register 2 (SCIACR2)
Module Base + 0x0002
R
7
6
5
4
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
2
1
0
BERRM1
BERRM0
BKDFE
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 10-8. SCI Alternative Control Register 2 (SCIACR2)
Read: Anytime, if AMAP = 1
Write: Anytime, if AMAP = 1
Table 10-8. SCIACR2 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
2:1
Bit Error Mode — Those two bits determines the functionality of the bit error detect feature. See Table 10-9.
BERRM[1:0]
0
BKDFE
Break Detect Feature Enable — BKDFE enables the break detect circuitry.
0 Break detect circuit disabled
1 Break detect circuit enabled
Table 10-9. Bit Error Mode Coding
BERRM1
BERRM0
Function
0
0
Bit error detect circuit is disabled
0
1
Receive input sampling occurs during the 9th time tick of a transmitted bit
(refer to Figure 10-19)
1
0
Receive input sampling occurs during the 13th time tick of a transmitted bit
(refer to Figure 10-19)
1
1
Reserved
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
315
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2.6
SCI Control Register 2 (SCICR2)
Module Base + 0x0003
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
TCIE
RIE
ILIE
TE
RE
RWU
SBK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 10-9. SCI Control Register 2 (SCICR2)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 10-10. SCICR2 Field Descriptions
Field
7
TIE
Description
Transmitter Interrupt Enable Bit — TIE enables the transmit data register empty flag, TDRE, to generate
interrupt requests.
0 TDRE interrupt requests disabled
1 TDRE interrupt requests enabled
6
TCIE
Transmission Complete Interrupt Enable Bit — TCIE enables the transmission complete flag, TC, to generate
interrupt requests.
0 TC interrupt requests disabled
1 TC interrupt requests enabled
5
RIE
Receiver Full Interrupt Enable Bit — RIE enables the receive data register full flag, RDRF, or the overrun flag,
OR, to generate interrupt requests.
0 RDRF and OR interrupt requests disabled
1 RDRF and OR interrupt requests enabled
4
ILIE
Idle Line Interrupt Enable Bit — ILIE enables the idle line flag, IDLE, to generate interrupt requests.
0 IDLE interrupt requests disabled
1 IDLE interrupt requests enabled
3
TE
Transmitter Enable Bit — TE enables the SCI transmitter and configures the TXD pin as being controlled by
the SCI. The TE bit can be used to queue an idle preamble.
0 Transmitter disabled
1 Transmitter enabled
2
RE
Receiver Enable Bit — RE enables the SCI receiver.
0 Receiver disabled
1 Receiver enabled
1
RWU
Receiver Wakeup Bit — Standby state
0 Normal operation.
1 RWU enables the wakeup function and inhibits further receiver interrupt requests. Normally, hardware wakes
the receiver by automatically clearing RWU.
0
SBK
Send Break Bit — Toggling SBK sends one break character (10 or 11 logic 0s, respectively 13 or 14 logics 0s
if BRK13 is set). Toggling implies clearing the SBK bit before the break character has finished transmitting. As
long as SBK is set, the transmitter continues to send complete break characters (10 or 11 bits, respectively 13
or 14 bits).
0 No break characters
1 Transmit break characters
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
316
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2.7
SCI Status Register 1 (SCISR1)
The SCISR1 and SCISR2 registers provides inputs to the MCU for generation of SCI interrupts. Also,
these registers can be polled by the MCU to check the status of these bits. The flag-clearing procedures
require that the status register be read followed by a read or write to the SCI data register.It is permissible
to execute other instructions between the two steps as long as it does not compromise the handling of I/O,
but the order of operations is important for flag clearing.
Module Base + 0x0004
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
TC
RDRF
IDLE
OR
NF
FE
PF
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
1
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 10-10. SCI Status Register 1 (SCISR1)
Read: Anytime
Write: Has no meaning or effect
Table 10-11. SCISR1 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
TDRE
Transmit Data Register Empty Flag — TDRE is set when the transmit shift register receives a byte from the
SCI data register. When TDRE is 1, the transmit data register (SCIDRH/L) is empty and can receive a new value
to transmit.Clear TDRE by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1), with TDRE set and then writing to SCI data
register low (SCIDRL).
0 No byte transferred to transmit shift register
1 Byte transferred to transmit shift register; transmit data register empty
6
TC
Transmit Complete Flag — TC is set low when there is a transmission in progress or when a preamble or break
character is loaded. TC is set high when the TDRE flag is set and no data, preamble, or break character is being
transmitted.When TC is set, the TXD pin becomes idle (logic 1). Clear TC by reading SCI status register 1
(SCISR1) with TC set and then writing to SCI data register low (SCIDRL). TC is cleared automatically when data,
preamble, or break is queued and ready to be sent. TC is cleared in the event of a simultaneous set and clear of
the TC flag (transmission not complete).
0 Transmission in progress
1 No transmission in progress
5
RDRF
Receive Data Register Full Flag — RDRF is set when the data in the receive shift register transfers to the SCI
data register. Clear RDRF by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with RDRF set and then reading SCI data
register low (SCIDRL).
0 Data not available in SCI data register
1 Received data available in SCI data register
4
IDLE
Idle Line Flag — IDLE is set when 10 consecutive logic 1s (if M = 0) or 11 consecutive logic 1s (if M =1) appear
on the receiver input. Once the IDLE flag is cleared, a valid frame must again set the RDRF flag before an idle
condition can set the IDLE flag.Clear IDLE by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with IDLE set and then
reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL).
0 Receiver input is either active now or has never become active since the IDLE flag was last cleared
1 Receiver input has become idle
Note: When the receiver wakeup bit (RWU) is set, an idle line condition does not set the IDLE flag.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
317
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
Table 10-11. SCISR1 Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
3
OR
Overrun Flag — OR is set when software fails to read the SCI data register before the receive shift register
receives the next frame. The OR bit is set immediately after the stop bit has been completely received for the
second frame. The data in the shift register is lost, but the data already in the SCI data registers is not affected.
Clear OR by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with OR set and then reading SCI data register low
(SCIDRL).
0 No overrun
1 Overrun
Note: OR flag may read back as set when RDRF flag is clear. This may happen if the following sequence of
events occurs:
1. After the first frame is received, read status register SCISR1 (returns RDRF set and OR flag clear);
2. Receive second frame without reading the first frame in the data register (the second frame is not
received and OR flag is set);
3. Read data register SCIDRL (returns first frame and clears RDRF flag in the status register);
4. Read status register SCISR1 (returns RDRF clear and OR set).
Event 3 may be at exactly the same time as event 2 or any time after. When this happens, a dummy
SCIDRL read following event 4 will be required to clear the OR flag if further frames are to be received.
2
NF
Noise Flag — NF is set when the SCI detects noise on the receiver input. NF bit is set during the same cycle as
the RDRF flag but does not get set in the case of an overrun. Clear NF by reading SCI status register 1(SCISR1),
and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL).
0 No noise
1 Noise
1
FE
Framing Error Flag — FE is set when a logic 0 is accepted as the stop bit. FE bit is set during the same cycle
as the RDRF flag but does not get set in the case of an overrun. FE inhibits further data reception until it is
cleared. Clear FE by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with FE set and then reading the SCI data register
low (SCIDRL).
0 No framing error
1 Framing error
0
PF
Parity Error Flag — PF is set when the parity enable bit (PE) is set and the parity of the received data does not
match the parity type bit (PT). PF bit is set during the same cycle as the RDRF flag but does not get set in the
case of an overrun. Clear PF by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1), and then reading SCI data register low
(SCIDRL).
0 No parity error
1 Parity error
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
318
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2.8
SCI Status Register 2 (SCISR2)
Module Base + 0x0005
7
R
W
Reset
AMAP
0
6
5
0
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
TXPOL
RXPOL
BRK13
TXDIR
0
0
0
0
0
RAF
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 10-11. SCI Status Register 2 (SCISR2)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 10-12. SCISR2 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
AMAP
Alternative Map — This bit controls which registers sharing the same address space are accessible. In the reset
condition the SCI behaves as previous versions. Setting AMAP=1 allows the access to another set of control and
status registers and hides the baud rate and SCI control Register 1.
0 The registers labelled SCIBDH (0x0000),SCIBDL (0x0001), SCICR1 (0x0002) are accessible
1 The registers labelled SCIASR1 (0x0000),SCIACR1 (0x0001), SCIACR2 (0x00002) are accessible
4
TXPOL
Transmit Polarity — This bit control the polarity of the transmitted data. In NRZ format, a one is represented by
a mark and a zero is represented by a space for normal polarity, and the opposite for inverted polarity. In IrDA
format, a zero is represented by short high pulse in the middle of a bit time remaining idle low for a one for normal
polarity, and a zero is represented by short low pulse in the middle of a bit time remaining idle high for a one for
inverted polarity.
0 Normal polarity
1 Inverted polarity
3
RXPOL
Receive Polarity — This bit control the polarity of the received data. In NRZ format, a one is represented by a
mark and a zero is represented by a space for normal polarity, and the opposite for inverted polarity. In IrDA
format, a zero is represented by short high pulse in the middle of a bit time remaining idle low for a one for normal
polarity, and a zero is represented by short low pulse in the middle of a bit time remaining idle high for a one for
inverted polarity.
0 Normal polarity
1 Inverted polarity
2
BRK13
Break Transmit Character Length — This bit determines whether the transmit break character is 10 or 11 bit
respectively 13 or 14 bits long. The detection of a framing error is not affected by this bit.
0 Break character is 10 or 11 bit long
1 Break character is 13 or 14 bit long
1
TXDIR
Transmitter Pin Data Direction in Single-Wire Mode — This bit determines whether the TXD pin is going to
be used as an input or output, in the single-wire mode of operation. This bit is only relevant in the single-wire
mode of operation.
0 TXD pin to be used as an input in single-wire mode
1 TXD pin to be used as an output in single-wire mode
0
RAF
Receiver Active Flag — RAF is set when the receiver detects a logic 0 during the RT1 time period of the start
bit search. RAF is cleared when the receiver detects an idle character.
0 No reception in progress
1 Reception in progress
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
319
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.3.2.9
SCI Data Registers (SCIDRH, SCIDRL)
Module Base + 0x0006
7
R
6
R8
W
Reset
0
T8
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 10-12. SCI Data Registers (SCIDRH)
Module Base + 0x0007
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
W
T7
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
T0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
Figure 10-13. SCI Data Registers (SCIDRL)
Read: Anytime; reading accesses SCI receive data register
Write: Anytime; writing accesses SCI transmit data register; writing to R8 has no effect
Table 10-13. SCIDRH and SCIDRL Field Descriptions
Field
Description
SCIDRH
7
R8
Received Bit 8 — R8 is the ninth data bit received when the SCI is configured for 9-bit data format (M = 1).
SCIDRH
6
T8
Transmit Bit 8 — T8 is the ninth data bit transmitted when the SCI is configured for 9-bit data format (M = 1).
SCIDRL
7:0
R[7:0]
T[7:0]
R7:R0 — Received bits seven through zero for 9-bit or 8-bit data formats
T7:T0 — Transmit bits seven through zero for 9-bit or 8-bit formats
NOTE
If the value of T8 is the same as in the previous transmission, T8 does not
have to be rewritten.The same value is transmitted until T8 is rewritten
In 8-bit data format, only SCI data register low (SCIDRL) needs to be
accessed.
When transmitting in 9-bit data format and using 8-bit write instructions,
write first to SCI data register high (SCIDRH), then SCIDRL.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
320
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4
Functional Description
This section provides a complete functional description of the SCI block, detailing the operation of the
design from the end user perspective in a number of subsections.
Figure 10-14 shows the structure of the SCI module. The SCI allows full duplex, asynchronous, serial
communication between the CPU and remote devices, including other CPUs. The SCI transmitter and
receiver operate independently, although they use the same baud rate generator. The CPU monitors the
status of the SCI, writes the data to be transmitted, and processes received data.
R8
IREN
SCI Data
Register
NF
FE
Ir_RXD
Bus
Clock
Receive
Shift Register
SCRXD
Receive
and Wakeup
Control
PF
RAF
RE
IDLE
RWU
RDRF
LOOPS
OR
RSRC
M
Baud Rate
Generator
IDLE
ILIE
RDRF/OR
Infrared
Receive
Decoder
R16XCLK
RXD
RIE
TIE
WAKE
Data Format
Control
ILT
PE
SBR12:SBR0
TDRE
TDRE
TC
SCI
Interrupt
Request
PT
TC
TCIE
TE
÷16
Transmit
Control
LOOPS
SBK
RSRC
T8
Transmit
Shift Register
RXEDGIE
Active Edge
Detect
RXEDGIF
BKDIF
RXD
SCI Data
Register
Break Detect
BKDFE
SCTXD
BKDIE
LIN Transmit BERRIF
Collision
Detect
BERRIE
R16XCLK
Infrared
Transmit
Encoder
BERRM[1:0]
Ir_TXD
TXD
R32XCLK
TNP[1:0]
IREN
Figure 10-14. Detailed SCI Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
321
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4.1
Infrared Interface Submodule
This module provides the capability of transmitting narrow pulses to an IR LED and receiving narrow
pulses and transforming them to serial bits, which are sent to the SCI. The IrDA physical layer
specification defines a half-duplex infrared communication link for exchange data. The full standard
includes data rates up to 16 Mbits/s. This design covers only data rates between 2.4 Kbits/s and 115.2
Kbits/s.
The infrared submodule consists of two major blocks: the transmit encoder and the receive decoder. The
SCI transmits serial bits of data which are encoded by the infrared submodule to transmit a narrow pulse
for every zero bit. No pulse is transmitted for every one bit. When receiving data, the IR pulses should be
detected using an IR photo diode and transformed to CMOS levels by the IR receive decoder (external
from the MCU). The narrow pulses are then stretched by the infrared submodule to get back to a serial bit
stream to be received by the SCI.The polarity of transmitted pulses and expected receive pulses can be
inverted so that a direct connection can be made to external IrDA transceiver modules that uses active low
pulses.
The infrared submodule receives its clock sources from the SCI. One of these two clocks are selected in
the infrared submodule in order to generate either 3/16, 1/16, 1/32 or 1/4 narrow pulses during
transmission. The infrared block receives two clock sources from the SCI, R16XCLK and R32XCLK,
which are configured to generate the narrow pulse width during transmission. The R16XCLK and
R32XCLK are internal clocks with frequencies 16 and 32 times the baud rate respectively. Both
R16XCLK and R32XCLK clocks are used for transmitting data. The receive decoder uses only the
R16XCLK clock.
10.4.1.1
Infrared Transmit Encoder
The infrared transmit encoder converts serial bits of data from transmit shift register to the TXD pin. A
narrow pulse is transmitted for a zero bit and no pulse for a one bit. The narrow pulse is sent in the middle
of the bit with a duration of 1/32, 1/16, 3/16 or 1/4 of a bit time. A narrow high pulse is transmitted for a
zero bit when TXPOL is cleared, while a narrow low pulse is transmitted for a zero bit when TXPOL is set.
10.4.1.2
Infrared Receive Decoder
The infrared receive block converts data from the RXD pin to the receive shift register. A narrow pulse is
expected for each zero received and no pulse is expected for each one received. A narrow high pulse is
expected for a zero bit when RXPOL is cleared, while a narrow low pulse is expected for a zero bit when
RXPOL is set. This receive decoder meets the edge jitter requirement as defined by the IrDA serial infrared
physical layer specification.
10.4.2
LIN Support
This module provides some basic support for the LIN protocol. At first this is a break detect circuitry
making it easier for the LIN software to distinguish a break character from an incoming data stream. As a
further addition is supports a collision detection at the bit level as well as cancelling pending transmissions.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
322
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4.3
Data Format
The SCI uses the standard NRZ mark/space data format. When Infrared is enabled, the SCI uses RZI data
format where zeroes are represented by light pulses and ones remain low. See Figure 10-15 below.
8-Bit Data Format
(Bit M in SCICR1 Clear)
Start
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Possible
Parity
Bit
Bit 6
STOP
Bit
Bit 7
Next
Start
Bit
Standard
SCI Data
Infrared
SCI Data
9-Bit Data Format
(Bit M in SCICR1 Set)
Start
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
POSSIBLE
PARITY
Bit
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
STOP
Bit
NEXT
START
Bit
Standard
SCI Data
Infrared
SCI Data
Figure 10-15. SCI Data Formats
Each data character is contained in a frame that includes a start bit, eight or nine data bits, and a stop bit.
Clearing the M bit in SCI control register 1 configures the SCI for 8-bit data characters. A frame with eight
data bits has a total of 10 bits. Setting the M bit configures the SCI for nine-bit data characters. A frame
with nine data bits has a total of 11 bits.
Table 10-14. Example of 8-Bit Data Formats
Start
Bit
Data
Bits
Address
Bits
Parity
Bits
Stop
Bit
1
8
0
0
1
1
7
0
1
1
7
1
0
1
1
1
1
The address bit identifies the frame as an address
character. See Section 10.4.6.6, “Receiver Wakeup”.
When the SCI is configured for 9-bit data characters, the ninth data bit is the T8 bit in SCI data register
high (SCIDRH). It remains unchanged after transmission and can be used repeatedly without rewriting it.
A frame with nine data bits has a total of 11 bits.
Table 10-15. Example of 9-Bit Data Formats
Start
Bit
Data
Bits
Address
Bits
Parity
Bits
Stop
Bit
1
9
0
0
1
1
8
0
1
1
8
1
0
1
1
1
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
323
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
1
10.4.4
The address bit identifies the frame as an address
character. See Section 10.4.6.6, “Receiver Wakeup”.
Baud Rate Generation
A 13-bit modulus counter in the baud rate generator derives the baud rate for both the receiver and the
transmitter. The value from 0 to 8191 written to the SBR12:SBR0 bits determines the bus clock divisor.
The SBR bits are in the SCI baud rate registers (SCIBDH and SCIBDL). The baud rate clock is
synchronized with the bus clock and drives the receiver. The baud rate clock divided by 16 drives the
transmitter. The receiver has an acquisition rate of 16 samples per bit time.
Baud rate generation is subject to one source of error:
• Integer division of the bus clock may not give the exact target frequency.
Table 10-16 lists some examples of achieving target baud rates with a bus clock frequency of 25 MHz.
When IREN = 0 then,
SCI baud rate = SCI bus clock / (16 * SCIBR[12:0])
Table 10-16. Baud Rates (Example: Bus Clock = 25 MHz)
Bits
SBR[12:0]
Receiver
Clock (Hz)
Transmitter
Clock (Hz)
Target
Baud Rate
Error
(%)
41
609,756.1
38,109.8
38,400
.76
81
308,642.0
19,290.1
19,200
.47
163
153,374.2
9585.9
9,600
.16
326
76,687.1
4792.9
4,800
.15
651
38,402.5
2400.2
2,400
.01
1302
19,201.2
1200.1
1,200
.01
2604
9600.6
600.0
600
.00
5208
4800.0
300.0
300
.00
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
324
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4.5
Transmitter
Internal Bus
Bus
Clock
÷ 16
Baud Divider
SCI Data Registers
11-Bit Transmit Register
H
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXPOL
SCTXD
L
MSB
M
Start
Stop
SBR12:SBR0
LOOP
CONTROL
TIE
TDRE IRQ
Break (All 0s)
Parity
Generation
Preamble (All 1s)
PT
Shift Enable
PE
Load from SCIDR
T8
To Receiver
LOOPS
RSRC
TDRE
Transmitter Control
TC
TC IRQ
TCIE
TE
BERRIF
BER IRQ
TCIE
SBK
BERRM[1:0]
Transmit
Collision Detect
SCTXD
SCRXD
(From Receiver)
Figure 10-16. Transmitter Block Diagram
10.4.5.1
Transmitter Character Length
The SCI transmitter can accommodate either 8-bit or 9-bit data characters. The state of the M bit in SCI
control register 1 (SCICR1) determines the length of data characters. When transmitting 9-bit data, bit T8
in SCI data register high (SCIDRH) is the ninth bit (bit 8).
10.4.5.2
Character Transmission
To transmit data, the MCU writes the data bits to the SCI data registers (SCIDRH/SCIDRL), which in turn
are transferred to the transmitter shift register. The transmit shift register then shifts a frame out through
the TXD pin, after it has prefaced them with a start bit and appended them with a stop bit. The SCI data
registers (SCIDRH and SCIDRL) are the write-only buffers between the internal data bus and the transmit
shift register.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
325
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
The SCI also sets a flag, the transmit data register empty flag (TDRE), every time it transfers data from the
buffer (SCIDRH/L) to the transmitter shift register.The transmit driver routine may respond to this flag by
writing another byte to the Transmitter buffer (SCIDRH/SCIDRL), while the shift register is still shifting
out the first byte.
To initiate an SCI transmission:
1. Configure the SCI:
a) Select a baud rate. Write this value to the SCI baud registers (SCIBDH/L) to begin the baud
rate generator. Remember that the baud rate generator is disabled when the baud rate is zero.
Writing to the SCIBDH has no effect without also writing to SCIBDL.
b) Write to SCICR1 to configure word length, parity, and other configuration bits
(LOOPS,RSRC,M,WAKE,ILT,PE,PT).
c) Enable the transmitter, interrupts, receive, and wake up as required, by writing to the SCICR2
register bits (TIE,TCIE,RIE,ILIE,TE,RE,RWU,SBK). A preamble or idle character will now
be shifted out of the transmitter shift register.
2. Transmit Procedure for each byte:
a) Poll the TDRE flag by reading the SCISR1 or responding to the TDRE interrupt. Keep in mind
that the TDRE bit resets to one.
b) If the TDRE flag is set, write the data to be transmitted to SCIDRH/L, where the ninth bit is
written to the T8 bit in SCIDRH if the SCI is in 9-bit data format. A new transmission will not
result until the TDRE flag has been cleared.
3. Repeat step 2 for each subsequent transmission.
NOTE
The TDRE flag is set when the shift register is loaded with the next data to
be transmitted from SCIDRH/L, which happens, generally speaking, a little
over half-way through the stop bit of the previous frame. Specifically, this
transfer occurs 9/16ths of a bit time AFTER the start of the stop bit of the
previous frame.
Writing the TE bit from 0 to a 1 automatically loads the transmit shift register with a preamble of 10 logic
1s (if M = 0) or 11 logic 1s (if M = 1). After the preamble shifts out, control logic transfers the data from
the SCI data register into the transmit shift register. A logic 0 start bit automatically goes into the least
significant bit position of the transmit shift register. A logic 1 stop bit goes into the most significant bit
position.
Hardware supports odd or even parity. When parity is enabled, the most significant bit (MSB) of the data
character is the parity bit.
The transmit data register empty flag, TDRE, in SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) becomes set when the SCI
data register transfers a byte to the transmit shift register. The TDRE flag indicates that the SCI data
register can accept new data from the internal data bus. If the transmit interrupt enable bit, TIE, in SCI
control register 2 (SCICR2) is also set, the TDRE flag generates a transmitter interrupt request.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
326
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
When the transmit shift register is not transmitting a frame, the TXD pin goes to the idle condition, logic
1. If at any time software clears the TE bit in SCI control register 2 (SCICR2), the transmitter enable signal
goes low and the transmit signal goes idle.
If software clears TE while a transmission is in progress (TC = 0), the frame in the transmit shift register
continues to shift out. To avoid accidentally cutting off the last frame in a message, always wait for TDRE
to go high after the last frame before clearing TE.
To separate messages with preambles with minimum idle line time, use this sequence between messages:
1. Write the last byte of the first message to SCIDRH/L.
2. Wait for the TDRE flag to go high, indicating the transfer of the last frame to the transmit shift
register.
3. Queue a preamble by clearing and then setting the TE bit.
4. Write the first byte of the second message to SCIDRH/L.
10.4.5.3
Break Characters
Writing a logic 1 to the send break bit, SBK, in SCI control register 2 (SCICR2) loads the transmit shift
register with a break character. A break character contains all logic 0s and has no start, stop, or parity bit.
Break character length depends on the M bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1). As long as SBK is at logic
1, transmitter logic continuously loads break characters into the transmit shift register. After software
clears the SBK bit, the shift register finishes transmitting the last break character and then transmits at least
one logic 1. The automatic logic 1 at the end of a break character guarantees the recognition of the start bit
of the next frame.
The SCI recognizes a break character when there are 10 or 11(M = 0 or M = 1) consecutive zero received.
Depending if the break detect feature is enabled or not receiving a break character has these effects on SCI
registers.
If the break detect feature is disabled (BKDFE = 0):
• Sets the framing error flag, FE
• Sets the receive data register full flag, RDRF
• Clears the SCI data registers (SCIDRH/L)
• May set the overrun flag, OR, noise flag, NF, parity error flag, PE, or the receiver active flag, RAF
(see 3.4.4 and 3.4.5 SCI Status Register 1 and 2)
If the break detect feature is enabled (BKDFE = 1) there are two scenarios1
The break is detected right from a start bit or is detected during a byte reception.
• Sets the break detect interrupt flag, BLDIF
• Does not change the data register full flag, RDRF or overrun flag OR
• Does not change the framing error flag FE, parity error flag PE.
• Does not clear the SCI data registers (SCIDRH/L)
• May set noise flag NF, or receiver active flag RAF.
1. A Break character in this context are either 10 or 11 consecutive zero received bits
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
327
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
Figure 10-17 shows two cases of break detect. In trace RXD_1 the break symbol starts with the start bit,
while in RXD_2 the break starts in the middle of a transmission. If BRKDFE = 1, in RXD_1 case there
will be no byte transferred to the receive buffer and the RDRF flag will not be modified. Also no framing
error or parity error will be flagged from this transfer. In RXD_2 case, however the break signal starts later
during the transmission. At the expected stop bit position the byte received so far will be transferred to the
receive buffer, the receive data register full flag will be set, a framing error and if enabled and appropriate
a parity error will be set. Once the break is detected the BRKDIF flag will be set.
Start Bit Position
Stop Bit Position
BRKDIF = 1
RXD_1
Zero Bit Counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 . . .
BRKDIF = 1
FE = 1
RXD_2
Zero Bit Counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
...
Figure 10-17. Break Detection if BRKDFE = 1 (M = 0)
10.4.5.4
Idle Characters
An idle character (or preamble) contains all logic 1s and has no start, stop, or parity bit. Idle character
length depends on the M bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1). The preamble is a synchronizing idle
character that begins the first transmission initiated after writing the TE bit from 0 to 1.
If the TE bit is cleared during a transmission, the TXD pin becomes idle after completion of the
transmission in progress. Clearing and then setting the TE bit during a transmission queues an idle
character to be sent after the frame currently being transmitted.
NOTE
When queueing an idle character, return the TE bit to logic 1 before the stop
bit of the current frame shifts out through the TXD pin. Setting TE after the
stop bit appears on TXD causes data previously written to the SCI data
register to be lost. Toggle the TE bit for a queued idle character while the
TDRE flag is set and immediately before writing the next byte to the SCI
data register.
If the TE bit is clear and the transmission is complete, the SCI is not the
master of the TXD pin
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
328
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4.5.5
LIN Transmit Collision Detection
This module allows to check for collisions on the LIN bus.
LIN Physical Interface
Synchronizer Stage
Receive Shift
Register
Compare
RXD Pin
Bit Error
LIN Bus
Bus Clock
Sample
Point
Transmit Shift
Register
TXD Pin
Figure 10-18. Collision Detect Principle
If the bit error circuit is enabled (BERRM[1:0] = 0:1 or = 1:0]), the error detect circuit will compare the
transmitted and the received data stream at a point in time and flag any mismatch. The timing checks run
when transmitter is active (not idle). As soon as a mismatch between the transmitted data and the received
data is detected the following happens:
• The next bit transmitted will have a high level (TXPOL = 0) or low level (TXPOL = 1)
• The transmission is aborted and the byte in transmit buffer is discarded.
• the transmit data register empty and the transmission complete flag will be set
• The bit error interrupt flag, BERRIF, will be set.
• No further transmissions will take place until the BERRIF is cleared.
4
5
6
7
8
BERRM[1:0] = 0:1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
Sampling End
3
Sampling Begin
Input Receive
Shift Register
2
Sampling End
Output Transmit
Shift Register
1
Sampling Begin
0
BERRM[1:0] = 1:1
Compare Sample Points
Figure 10-19. Timing Diagram Bit Error Detection
If the bit error detect feature is disabled, the bit error interrupt flag is cleared.
NOTE
The RXPOL and TXPOL bit should be set the same when transmission
collision detect feature is enabled, otherwise the bit error interrupt flag may
be set incorrectly.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
329
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4.6
Receiver
Internal Bus
SBR12:SBR0
RXPOL
Data
Recovery
Loop
Control
H
Start
11-Bit Receive Shift Register
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L
All 1s
SCRXD
From TXD Pin
or Transmitter
Stop
Baud Divider
MSB
Bus
Clock
SCI Data Register
RE
RAF
LOOPS
RSRC
FE
M
WAKE
ILT
PE
PT
RWU
NF
Wakeup
Logic
PE
R8
Parity
Checking
Idle IRQ
IDLE
ILIE
BRKDFE
OR
Break
Detect Logic
RIE
BRKDIF
BRKDIE
Active Edge
Detect Logic
RDRF/OR
IRQ
RDRF
Break IRQ
RXEDGIF
RXEDGIE
RX Active Edge IRQ
Figure 10-20. SCI Receiver Block Diagram
10.4.6.1
Receiver Character Length
The SCI receiver can accommodate either 8-bit or 9-bit data characters. The state of the M bit in SCI
control register 1 (SCICR1) determines the length of data characters. When receiving 9-bit data, bit R8 in
SCI data register high (SCIDRH) is the ninth bit (bit 8).
10.4.6.2
Character Reception
During an SCI reception, the receive shift register shifts a frame in from the RXD pin. The SCI data register
is the read-only buffer between the internal data bus and the receive shift register.
After a complete frame shifts into the receive shift register, the data portion of the frame transfers to the
SCI data register. The receive data register full flag, RDRF, in SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) becomes set,
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
330
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
indicating that the received byte can be read. If the receive interrupt enable bit, RIE, in SCI control
register 2 (SCICR2) is also set, the RDRF flag generates an RDRF interrupt request.
10.4.6.3
Data Sampling
The RT clock rate. The RT clock is an internal signal with a frequency 16 times the baud rate. To adjust
for baud rate mismatch, the RT clock (see Figure 10-21) is re-synchronized:
• After every start bit
• After the receiver detects a data bit change from logic 1 to logic 0 (after the majority of data bit
samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10 returns a valid logic 1 and the majority of the next RT8, RT9, and
RT10 samples returns a valid logic 0)
To locate the start bit, data recovery logic does an asynchronous search for a logic 0 preceded by three logic
1s.When the falling edge of a possible start bit occurs, the RT clock begins to count to 16.
Start Bit
LSB
RXD
Samples
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
Start Bit
Qualification
0
0
Start Bit
Verification
0
0
0
Data
Sampling
RT4
RT3
RT2
RT1
RT16
RT15
RT14
RT13
RT12
RT11
RT10
RT9
RT8
RT7
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT2
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT CLock Count
RT1
RT Clock
Reset RT Clock
Figure 10-21. Receiver Data Sampling
To verify the start bit and to detect noise, data recovery logic takes samples at RT3, RT5, and RT7.
Figure 10-17 summarizes the results of the start bit verification samples.
Table 10-17. Start Bit Verification
RT3, RT5, and RT7 Samples
Start Bit Verification
Noise Flag
000
Yes
0
001
Yes
1
010
Yes
1
011
No
0
100
Yes
1
101
No
0
110
No
0
111
No
0
If start bit verification is not successful, the RT clock is reset and a new search for a start bit begins.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
331
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
To determine the value of a data bit and to detect noise, recovery logic takes samples at RT8, RT9, and
RT10. Table 10-18 summarizes the results of the data bit samples.
Table 10-18. Data Bit Recovery
RT8, RT9, and RT10 Samples
Data Bit Determination
Noise Flag
000
0
0
001
0
1
010
0
1
011
1
1
100
0
1
101
1
1
110
1
1
111
1
0
NOTE
The RT8, RT9, and RT10 samples do not affect start bit verification. If any
or all of the RT8, RT9, and RT10 start bit samples are logic 1s following a
successful start bit verification, the noise flag (NF) is set and the receiver
assumes that the bit is a start bit (logic 0).
To verify a stop bit and to detect noise, recovery logic takes samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10. Table 10-19
summarizes the results of the stop bit samples.
Table 10-19. Stop Bit Recovery
RT8, RT9, and RT10 Samples
Framing Error Flag
Noise Flag
000
1
0
001
1
1
010
1
1
011
0
1
100
1
1
101
0
1
110
0
1
111
0
0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
332
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
In Figure 10-22 the verification samples RT3 and RT5 determine that the first low detected was noise and
not the beginning of a start bit. The RT clock is reset and the start bit search begins again. The noise flag
is not set because the noise occurred before the start bit was found.
LSB
Start Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
RT9
RT1
1
RT10
RT1
1
RT8
RT1
1
RT7
0
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT5
1
RT1
RXD
Samples
0
RT3
RT2
RT1
RT16
RT15
RT14
RT13
RT12
RT11
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT2
RT4
RT3
RT Clock Count
RT2
RT Clock
Reset RT Clock
Figure 10-22. Start Bit Search Example 1
In Figure 10-23, verification sample at RT3 is high. The RT3 sample sets the noise flag. Although the
perceived bit time is misaligned, the data samples RT8, RT9, and RT10 are within the bit time and data
recovery is successful.
Perceived Start Bit
Actual Start Bit
LSB
1
0
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
1
0
0
0
0
0
RT10
1
RT9
1
RT8
1
RT7
1
RT1
Samples
RT1
RXD
RT7
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT2
RT1
RT16
RT15
RT14
RT13
RT12
RT11
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT Clock Count
RT2
RT Clock
Reset RT Clock
Figure 10-23. Start Bit Search Example 2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
333
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
In Figure 10-24, a large burst of noise is perceived as the beginning of a start bit, although the test sample
at RT5 is high. The RT5 sample sets the noise flag. Although this is a worst-case misalignment of perceived
bit time, the data samples RT8, RT9, and RT10 are within the bit time and data recovery is successful.
Perceived Start Bit
LSB
Actual Start Bit
RT1
RT1
RT1
0
1
0
0
0
0
RT10
0
RT9
1
RT8
1
RT7
1
RT1
RXD
Samples
RT9
RT8
RT7
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT2
RT1
RT16
RT15
RT14
RT13
RT12
RT11
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT Clock Count
RT2
RT Clock
Reset RT Clock
Figure 10-24. Start Bit Search Example 3
Figure 10-25 shows the effect of noise early in the start bit time. Although this noise does not affect proper
synchronization with the start bit time, it does set the noise flag.
Perceived and Actual Start Bit
LSB
RT1
RT1
RT1
1
1
1
1
0
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
Samples
RT1
RXD
1
0
RT3
RT2
RT1
RT16
RT15
RT14
RT13
RT12
RT11
RT9
RT10
RT8
RT7
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT Clock Count
RT2
RT Clock
Reset RT Clock
Figure 10-25. Start Bit Search Example 4
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
334
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
Figure 10-26 shows a burst of noise near the beginning of the start bit that resets the RT clock. The sample
after the reset is low but is not preceded by three high samples that would qualify as a falling edge.
Depending on the timing of the start bit search and on the data, the frame may be missed entirely or it may
set the framing error flag.
Start Bit
0
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT1
1
RT7
1
RT1
RXD
Samples
LSB
No Start Bit Found
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT Clock Count
RT2
RT Clock
Reset RT Clock
Figure 10-26. Start Bit Search Example 5
In Figure 10-27, a noise burst makes the majority of data samples RT8, RT9, and RT10 high. This sets the
noise flag but does not reset the RT clock. In start bits only, the RT8, RT9, and RT10 data samples are
ignored.
Start Bit
LSB
1
1
1
1
1
0
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
RT1
0
0
0
1
0
1
RT10
1
RT9
1
RT8
1
RT7
1
RT1
Samples
RT1
RXD
RT3
RT2
RT1
RT16
RT15
RT14
RT13
RT12
RT11
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT Clock Count
RT2
RT Clock
Reset RT Clock
Figure 10-27. Start Bit Search Example 6
10.4.6.4
Framing Errors
If the data recovery logic does not detect a logic 1 where the stop bit should be in an incoming frame, it
sets the framing error flag, FE, in SCI status register 1 (SCISR1). A break character also sets the FE flag
because a break character has no stop bit. The FE flag is set at the same time that the RDRF flag is set.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
335
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4.6.5
Baud Rate Tolerance
A transmitting device may be operating at a baud rate below or above the receiver baud rate. Accumulated
bit time misalignment can cause one of the three stop bit data samples (RT8, RT9, and RT10) to fall outside
the actual stop bit. A noise error will occur if the RT8, RT9, and RT10 samples are not all the same logical
values. A framing error will occur if the receiver clock is misaligned in such a way that the majority of the
RT8, RT9, and RT10 stop bit samples are a logic zero.
As the receiver samples an incoming frame, it re-synchronizes the RT clock on any valid falling edge
within the frame. Re synchronization within frames will correct a misalignment between transmitter bit
times and receiver bit times.
10.4.6.5.1
Slow Data Tolerance
Figure 10-28 shows how much a slow received frame can be misaligned without causing a noise error or
a framing error. The slow stop bit begins at RT8 instead of RT1 but arrives in time for the stop bit data
samples at RT8, RT9, and RT10.
MSB
Stop
RT16
RT15
RT14
RT13
RT12
RT11
RT10
RT9
RT8
RT7
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT2
RT1
Receiver
RT Clock
Data
Samples
Figure 10-28. Slow Data
Let’s take RTr as receiver RT clock and RTt as transmitter RT clock.
For an 8-bit data character, it takes the receiver 9 bit times x 16 RTr cycles +7 RTr cycles = 151 RTr cycles
to start data sampling of the stop bit.
With the misaligned character shown in Figure 10-28, the receiver counts 151 RTr cycles at the point when
the count of the transmitting device is 9 bit times x 16 RTt cycles = 144 RTt cycles.
The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of a slow 8-bit data
character with no errors is:
((151 – 144) / 151) x 100 = 4.63%
For a 9-bit data character, it takes the receiver 10 bit times x 16 RTr cycles + 7 RTr cycles = 167 RTr cycles
to start data sampling of the stop bit.
With the misaligned character shown in Figure 10-28, the receiver counts 167 RTr cycles at the point when
the count of the transmitting device is 10 bit times x 16 RTt cycles = 160 RTt cycles.
The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of a slow 9-bit
character with no errors is:
((167 – 160) / 167) X 100 = 4.19%
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
336
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4.6.5.2
Fast Data Tolerance
Figure 10-29 shows how much a fast received frame can be misaligned. The fast stop bit ends at RT10
instead of RT16 but is still sampled at RT8, RT9, and RT10.
Stop
Idle or Next Frame
RT16
RT15
RT14
RT13
RT12
RT11
RT10
RT9
RT8
RT7
RT6
RT5
RT4
RT3
RT2
RT1
Receiver
RT Clock
Data
Samples
Figure 10-29. Fast Data
For an 8-bit data character, it takes the receiver 9 bit times x 16 RTr cycles + 10 RTr cycles = 154 RTr cycles
to finish data sampling of the stop bit.
With the misaligned character shown in Figure 10-29, the receiver counts 154 RTr cycles at the point when
the count of the transmitting device is 10 bit times x 16 RTt cycles = 160 RTt cycles.
The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of a fast 8-bit
character with no errors is:
((160 – 154) / 160) x 100 = 3.75%
For a 9-bit data character, it takes the receiver 10 bit times x 16 RTr cycles + 10 RTr cycles = 170 RTr cycles
to finish data sampling of the stop bit.
With the misaligned character shown in Figure 10-29, the receiver counts 170 RTr cycles at the point when
the count of the transmitting device is 11 bit times x 16 RTt cycles = 176 RTt cycles.
The maximum percent difference between the receiver count and the transmitter count of a fast 9-bit
character with no errors is:
((176 – 170) /176) x 100 = 3.40%
10.4.6.6
Receiver Wakeup
To enable the SCI to ignore transmissions intended only for other receivers in multiple-receiver systems,
the receiver can be put into a standby state. Setting the receiver wakeup bit, RWU, in SCI control register 2
(SCICR2) puts the receiver into standby state during which receiver interrupts are disabled.The SCI will
still load the receive data into the SCIDRH/L registers, but it will not set the RDRF flag.
The transmitting device can address messages to selected receivers by including addressing information in
the initial frame or frames of each message.
The WAKE bit in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1) determines how the SCI is brought out of the standby
state to process an incoming message. The WAKE bit enables either idle line wakeup or address mark
wakeup.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
337
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.4.6.6.1
Idle Input line Wakeup (WAKE = 0)
In this wakeup method, an idle condition on the RXD pin clears the RWU bit and wakes up the SCI. The
initial frame or frames of every message contain addressing information. All receivers evaluate the
addressing information, and receivers for which the message is addressed process the frames that follow.
Any receiver for which a message is not addressed can set its RWU bit and return to the standby state. The
RWU bit remains set and the receiver remains on standby until another idle character appears on the RXD
pin.
Idle line wakeup requires that messages be separated by at least one idle character and that no message
contains idle characters.
The idle character that wakes a receiver does not set the receiver idle bit, IDLE, or the receive data register
full flag, RDRF.
The idle line type bit, ILT, determines whether the receiver begins counting logic 1s as idle character bits
after the start bit or after the stop bit. ILT is in SCI control register 1 (SCICR1).
10.4.6.6.2
Address Mark Wakeup (WAKE = 1)
In this wakeup method, a logic 1 in the most significant bit (MSB) position of a frame clears the RWU bit
and wakes up the SCI. The logic 1 in the MSB position marks a frame as an address frame that contains
addressing information. All receivers evaluate the addressing information, and the receivers for which the
message is addressed process the frames that follow.Any receiver for which a message is not addressed can
set its RWU bit and return to the standby state. The RWU bit remains set and the receiver remains on
standby until another address frame appears on the RXD pin.
The logic 1 MSB of an address frame clears the receiver’s RWU bit before the stop bit is received and sets
the RDRF flag.
Address mark wakeup allows messages to contain idle characters but requires that the MSB be reserved
for use in address frames.
NOTE
With the WAKE bit clear, setting the RWU bit after the RXD pin has been
idle can cause the receiver to wake up immediately.
10.4.7
Single-Wire Operation
Normally, the SCI uses two pins for transmitting and receiving. In single-wire operation, the RXD pin is
disconnected from the SCI. The SCI uses the TXD pin for both receiving and transmitting.
Transmitter
Receiver
TXD
RXD
Figure 10-30. Single-Wire Operation (LOOPS = 1, RSRC = 1)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
338
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
Enable single-wire operation by setting the LOOPS bit and the receiver source bit, RSRC, in SCI control
register 1 (SCICR1). Setting the LOOPS bit disables the path from the RXD pin to the receiver. Setting
the RSRC bit connects the TXD pin to the receiver. Both the transmitter and receiver must be enabled
(TE = 1 and RE = 1).The TXDIR bit (SCISR2[1]) determines whether the TXD pin is going to be used as
an input (TXDIR = 0) or an output (TXDIR = 1) in this mode of operation.
NOTE
In single-wire operation data from the TXD pin is inverted if RXPOL is set.
10.4.8
Loop Operation
In loop operation the transmitter output goes to the receiver input. The RXD pin is disconnected from the
SCI.
Transmitter
TXD
Receiver
RXD
Figure 10-31. Loop Operation (LOOPS = 1, RSRC = 0)
Enable loop operation by setting the LOOPS bit and clearing the RSRC bit in SCI control register 1
(SCICR1). Setting the LOOPS bit disables the path from the RXD pin to the receiver. Clearing the RSRC
bit connects the transmitter output to the receiver input. Both the transmitter and receiver must be enabled
(TE = 1 and RE = 1).
NOTE
In loop operation data from the transmitter is not recognized by the receiver
if RXPOL and TXPOL are not the same.
10.5
Initialization/Application Information
10.5.1
Reset Initialization
See Section 10.3.2, “Register Descriptions”.
10.5.2
10.5.2.1
Modes of Operation
Run Mode
Normal mode of operation.
To initialize a SCI transmission, see Section 10.4.5.2, “Character Transmission”.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
339
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.5.2.2
Wait Mode
SCI operation in wait mode depends on the state of the SCISWAI bit in the SCI control register 1
(SCICR1).
• If SCISWAI is clear, the SCI operates normally when the CPU is in wait mode.
• If SCISWAI is set, SCI clock generation ceases and the SCI module enters a power-conservation
state when the CPU is in wait mode. Setting SCISWAI does not affect the state of the receiver
enable bit, RE, or the transmitter enable bit, TE.
If SCISWAI is set, any transmission or reception in progress stops at wait mode entry. The
transmission or reception resumes when either an internal or external interrupt brings the CPU out
of wait mode. Exiting wait mode by reset aborts any transmission or reception in progress and
resets the SCI.
10.5.2.3
Stop Mode
The SCI is inactive during stop mode for reduced power consumption. The STOP instruction does not
affect the SCI register states, but the SCI bus clock will be disabled. The SCI operation resumes from
where it left off after an external interrupt brings the CPU out of stop mode. Exiting stop mode by reset
aborts any transmission or reception in progress and resets the SCI.
The receive input active edge detect circuit is still active in stop mode. An active edge on the receive input
can be used to bring the CPU out of stop mode.
10.5.3
Interrupt Operation
This section describes the interrupt originated by the SCI block.The MCU must service the interrupt
requests. Table 10-20 lists the eight interrupt sources of the SCI.
Table 10-20. SCI Interrupt Sources
Interrupt
Source
Local Enable
TDRE
SCISR1[7]
TIE
TC
SCISR1[6]
TCIE
RDRF
SCISR1[5]
RIE
OR
SCISR1[3]
IDLE
SCISR1[4]
RXEDGIF SCIASR1[7]
Description
Active high level. Indicates that a byte was transferred from SCIDRH/L to the
transmit shift register.
Active high level. Indicates that a transmit is complete.
Active high level. The RDRF interrupt indicates that received data is available
in the SCI data register.
Active high level. This interrupt indicates that an overrun condition has occurred.
ILIE
Active high level. Indicates that receiver input has become idle.
RXEDGIE
Active high level. Indicates that an active edge (falling for RXPOL = 0, rising for
RXPOL = 1) was detected.
BERRIF
SCIASR1[1]
BERRIE
Active high level. Indicates that a mismatch between transmitted and received data
in a single wire application has happened.
BKDIF
SCIASR1[0]
BRKDIE
Active high level. Indicates that a break character has been received.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
340
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.5.3.1
Description of Interrupt Operation
The SCI only originates interrupt requests. The following is a description of how the SCI makes a request
and how the MCU should acknowledge that request. The interrupt vector offset and interrupt number are
chip dependent. The SCI only has a single interrupt line (SCI Interrupt Signal, active high operation) and
all the following interrupts, when generated, are ORed together and issued through that port.
10.5.3.1.1
TDRE Description
The TDRE interrupt is set high by the SCI when the transmit shift register receives a byte from the SCI
data register. A TDRE interrupt indicates that the transmit data register (SCIDRH/L) is empty and that a
new byte can be written to the SCIDRH/L for transmission.Clear TDRE by reading SCI status register 1
with TDRE set and then writing to SCI data register low (SCIDRL).
10.5.3.1.2
TC Description
The TC interrupt is set by the SCI when a transmission has been completed. Transmission is completed
when all bits including the stop bit (if transmitted) have been shifted out and no data is queued to be
transmitted. No stop bit is transmitted when sending a break character and the TC flag is set (providing
there is no more data queued for transmission) when the break character has been shifted out. A TC
interrupt indicates that there is no transmission in progress. TC is set high when the TDRE flag is set and
no data, preamble, or break character is being transmitted. When TC is set, the TXD pin becomes idle
(logic 1). Clear TC by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with TC set and then writing to SCI data
register low (SCIDRL).TC is cleared automatically when data, preamble, or break is queued and ready to
be sent.
10.5.3.1.3
RDRF Description
The RDRF interrupt is set when the data in the receive shift register transfers to the SCI data register. A
RDRF interrupt indicates that the received data has been transferred to the SCI data register and that the
byte can now be read by the MCU. The RDRF interrupt is cleared by reading the SCI status register one
(SCISR1) and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL).
10.5.3.1.4
OR Description
The OR interrupt is set when software fails to read the SCI data register before the receive shift register
receives the next frame. The newly acquired data in the shift register will be lost in this case, but the data
already in the SCI data registers is not affected. The OR interrupt is cleared by reading the SCI status
register one (SCISR1) and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL).
10.5.3.1.5
IDLE Description
The IDLE interrupt is set when 10 consecutive logic 1s (if M = 0) or 11 consecutive logic 1s (if M = 1)
appear on the receiver input. Once the IDLE is cleared, a valid frame must again set the RDRF flag before
an idle condition can set the IDLE flag. Clear IDLE by reading SCI status register 1 (SCISR1) with IDLE
set and then reading SCI data register low (SCIDRL).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
341
Serial Communication Interface (S12SCIV5)
10.5.3.1.6
RXEDGIF Description
The RXEDGIF interrupt is set when an active edge (falling if RXPOL = 0, rising if RXPOL = 1) on the
RXD pin is detected. Clear RXEDGIF by writing a “1” to the SCIASR1 SCI alternative status register 1.
10.5.3.1.7
BERRIF Description
The BERRIF interrupt is set when a mismatch between the transmitted and the received data in a single
wire application like LIN was detected. Clear BERRIF by writing a “1” to the SCIASR1 SCI alternative
status register 1. This flag is also cleared if the bit error detect feature is disabled.
10.5.3.1.8
BKDIF Description
The BKDIF interrupt is set when a break signal was received. Clear BKDIF by writing a “1” to the
SCIASR1 SCI alternative status register 1. This flag is also cleared if break detect feature is disabled.
10.5.4
Recovery from Wait Mode
The SCI interrupt request can be used to bring the CPU out of wait mode.
10.5.5
Recovery from Stop Mode
An active edge on the receive input can be used to bring the CPU out of stop mode.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
342
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 11
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
Table 11-1. Revision History
Revision
Number
Revision Date
Sections
Affected
V05.00
24 Mar 2005
11.3.2/11-347
11.1
Description of Changes
- Added 16-bit transfer width feature.
Introduction
The SPI module allows a duplex, synchronous, serial communication between the MCU and peripheral
devices. Software can poll the SPI status flags or the SPI operation can be interrupt driven.
11.1.1
Glossary of Terms
SPI
SS
SCK
MOSI
MISO
MOMI
SISO
11.1.2
Serial Peripheral Interface
Slave Select
Serial Clock
Master Output, Slave Input
Master Input, Slave Output
Master Output, Master Input
Slave Input, Slave Output
Features
The SPI includes these distinctive features:
• Master mode and slave mode
• Selectable 8 or 16-bit transfer width
• Bidirectional mode
• Slave select output
• Mode fault error flag with CPU interrupt capability
• Double-buffered data register
• Serial clock with programmable polarity and phase
• Control of SPI operation during wait mode
11.1.3
Modes of Operation
The SPI functions in three modes: run, wait, and stop.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
343
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
•
•
•
Run mode
This is the basic mode of operation.
Wait mode
SPI operation in wait mode is a configurable low power mode, controlled by the SPISWAI bit
located in the SPICR2 register. In wait mode, if the SPISWAI bit is clear, the SPI operates like in
run mode. If the SPISWAI bit is set, the SPI goes into a power conservative state, with the SPI clock
generation turned off. If the SPI is configured as a master, any transmission in progress stops, but
is resumed after CPU goes into run mode. If the SPI is configured as a slave, reception and
transmission of data continues, so that the slave stays synchronized to the master.
Stop mode
The SPI is inactive in stop mode for reduced power consumption. If the SPI is configured as a
master, any transmission in progress stops, but is resumed after CPU goes into run mode. If the SPI
is configured as a slave, reception and transmission of data continues, so that the slave stays
synchronized to the master.
For a detailed description of operating modes, please refer to Section 11.4.7, “Low Power Mode Options”.
11.1.4
Block Diagram
Figure 11-1 gives an overview on the SPI architecture. The main parts of the SPI are status, control and
data registers, shifter logic, baud rate generator, master/slave control logic, and port control logic.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
344
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
SPI
2
SPI Control Register 1
BIDIROE
2
SPI Control Register 2
SPC0
SPI Status Register
SPIF MODF SPTEF
Interrupt Control
SPI
Interrupt
Request
Baud Rate Generator
Slave
Control
CPOL
CPHA
Phase + SCK In
Slave Baud Rate Polarity
Control
Master Baud Rate
Phase + SCK Out
Polarity
Control
Master
Control
Counter
Bus Clock
Prescaler Clock Select
SPPR
3
SPR
MOSI
Port
Control
Logic
SCK
SS
Baud Rate
Shift
Clock
Sample
Clock
3
Shifter
SPI Baud Rate Register
Data In
LSBFE=1
LSBFE=0
LSBFE=1
MSB
SPI Data Register
LSBFE=0
LSBFE=0 LSB
LSBFE=1
Data Out
Figure 11-1. SPI Block Diagram
11.2
External Signal Description
This section lists the name and description of all ports including inputs and outputs that do, or may, connect
off chip. The SPI module has a total of four external pins.
11.2.1
MOSI — Master Out/Slave In Pin
This pin is used to transmit data out of the SPI module when it is configured as a master and receive data
when it is configured as slave.
11.2.2
MISO — Master In/Slave Out Pin
This pin is used to transmit data out of the SPI module when it is configured as a slave and receive data
when it is configured as master.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
345
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
11.2.3
SS — Slave Select Pin
This pin is used to output the select signal from the SPI module to another peripheral with which a data
transfer is to take place when it is configured as a master and it is used as an input to receive the slave select
signal when the SPI is configured as slave.
11.2.4
SCK — Serial Clock Pin
In master mode, this is the synchronous output clock. In slave mode, this is the synchronous input clock.
11.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of address space and registers used by the SPI.
11.3.1
Module Memory Map
The memory map for the SPI is given in Figure 11-2. The address listed for each register is the sum of a
base address and an address offset. The base address is defined at the SoC level and the address offset is
defined at the module level. Reads from the reserved bits return zeros and writes to the reserved bits have
no effect.
Register
Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
SPIE
SPE
SPTIE
MSTR
CPOL
CPHA
SSOE
LSBFE
MODFEN
BIDIROE
SPISWAI
SPC0
SPR2
SPR1
SPR0
0x0000
SPICR1
R
W
0x0001
SPICR2
R
W
0
0x0002
SPIBR
R
W
0
0x0003
SPISR
R
W
0x0004
SPIDRH
XFRW
0
0
0
SPPR2
SPPR1
SPPR0
SPIF
0
SPTEF
MODF
0
0
0
0
R
W
R15
T15
R14
T14
R13
T13
R12
T12
R11
T11
R10
T10
R9
T9
R8
T8
0x0005
SPIDRL
R
W
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R1
T1
R0
T0
0x0006
Reserved
R
W
0x0007
Reserved
R
W
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 11-2. SPI Register Summary
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
346
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
11.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section consists of register descriptions in address order. Each description includes a standard register
diagram with an associated figure number. Details of register bit and field function follow the register
diagrams, in bit order.
11.3.2.1
SPI Control Register 1 (SPICR1)
Module Base +0x0000
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SPIE
SPE
SPTIE
MSTR
CPOL
CPHA
SSOE
LSBFE
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 11-3. SPI Control Register 1 (SPICR1)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 11-2. SPICR1 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
SPIE
SPI Interrupt Enable Bit — This bit enables SPI interrupt requests, if SPIF or MODF status flag is set.
0 SPI interrupts disabled.
1 SPI interrupts enabled.
6
SPE
SPI System Enable Bit — This bit enables the SPI system and dedicates the SPI port pins to SPI system
functions. If SPE is cleared, SPI is disabled and forced into idle state, status bits in SPISR register are reset.
0 SPI disabled (lower power consumption).
1 SPI enabled, port pins are dedicated to SPI functions.
5
SPTIE
SPI Transmit Interrupt Enable — This bit enables SPI interrupt requests, if SPTEF flag is set.
0 SPTEF interrupt disabled.
1 SPTEF interrupt enabled.
4
MSTR
SPI Master/Slave Mode Select Bit — This bit selects whether the SPI operates in master or slave mode.
Switching the SPI from master to slave or vice versa forces the SPI system into idle state.
0 SPI is in slave mode.
1 SPI is in master mode.
3
CPOL
SPI Clock Polarity Bit — This bit selects an inverted or non-inverted SPI clock. To transmit data between SPI
modules, the SPI modules must have identical CPOL values. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a
transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state.
0 Active-high clocks selected. In idle state SCK is low.
1 Active-low clocks selected. In idle state SCK is high.
2
CPHA
SPI Clock Phase Bit — This bit is used to select the SPI clock format. In master mode, a change of this bit will
abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state.
0 Sampling of data occurs at odd edges (1,3,5,...) of the SCK clock.
1 Sampling of data occurs at even edges (2,4,6,...) of the SCK clock.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
347
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
Table 11-2. SPICR1 Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
1
SSOE
Slave Select Output Enable — The SS output feature is enabled only in master mode, if MODFEN is set, by
asserting the SSOE as shown in Table 11-3. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in
progress and force the SPI system into idle state.
0
LSBFE
LSB-First Enable — This bit does not affect the position of the MSB and LSB in the data register. Reads and
writes of the data register always have the MSB in the highest bit position. In master mode, a change of this bit
will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state.
0 Data is transferred most significant bit first.
1 Data is transferred least significant bit first.
Table 11-3. SS Input / Output Selection
MODFEN
11.3.2.2
SSOE
Master Mode
Slave Mode
0
0
SS not used by SPI
SS input
0
1
SS not used by SPI
SS input
1
0
SS input with MODF feature
SS input
1
1
SS is slave select output
SS input
SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2)
Module Base +0x0001
7
R
6
0
5
4
3
MODFEN
BIDIROE
0
0
0
XFRW
2
1
0
SPISWAI
SPC0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 11-4. SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime; writes to the reserved bits have no effect
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
348
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
Table 11-4. SPICR2 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
6
XFRW
Transfer Width — This bit is used for selecting the data transfer width. If 8-bit transfer width is selected, SPIDRL
becomes the dedicated data register and SPIDRH is unused. If 16-bit transfer width is selected, SPIDRH and
SPIDRL form a 16-bit data register. Please refer to Section 11.3.2.4, “SPI Status Register (SPISR) for
information about transmit/receive data handling and the interrupt flag clearing mechanism. In master mode, a
change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state.
0 8-bit Transfer Width (n = 8)1
1 16-bit Transfer Width (n = 16)1
4
MODFEN
Mode Fault Enable Bit — This bit allows the MODF failure to be detected. If the SPI is in master mode and
MODFEN is cleared, then the SS port pin is not used by the SPI. In slave mode, the SS is available only as an
input regardless of the value of MODFEN. For an overview on the impact of the MODFEN bit on the SS port pin
configuration, refer to Table 11-3. In master mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and
force the SPI system into idle state.
0 SS port pin is not used by the SPI.
1 SS port pin with MODF feature.
3
BIDIROE
Output Enable in the Bidirectional Mode of Operation — This bit controls the MOSI and MISO output buffer
of the SPI, when in bidirectional mode of operation (SPC0 is set). In master mode, this bit controls the output
buffer of the MOSI port, in slave mode it controls the output buffer of the MISO port. In master mode, with SPC0
set, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI into idle state.
0 Output buffer disabled.
1 Output buffer enabled.
1
SPISWAI
SPI Stop in Wait Mode Bit — This bit is used for power conservation while in wait mode.
0 SPI clock operates normally in wait mode.
1 Stop SPI clock generation when in wait mode.
0
SPC0
1
Serial Pin Control Bit 0 — This bit enables bidirectional pin configurations as shown in Table 11-5. In master
mode, a change of this bit will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state.
n is used later in this document as a placeholder for the selected transfer width.
Table 11-5. Bidirectional Pin Configurations
Pin Mode
SPC0
BIDIROE
MISO
MOSI
Master Mode of Operation
Normal
0
Bidirectional
1
X
Master In
0
MISO not used by SPI
Master Out
Master In
1
Master I/O
Slave Mode of Operation
Normal
0
Bidirectional
1
X
Slave Out
Slave In
0
Slave In
MOSI not used by SPI
1
Slave I/O
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
349
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
11.3.2.3
SPI Baud Rate Register (SPIBR)
Module Base +0x0002
7
R
6
5
4
3
SPPR2
SPPR1
SPPR0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
SPR2
SPR1
SPR0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 11-5. SPI Baud Rate Register (SPIBR)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime; writes to the reserved bits have no effect
Table 11-6. SPIBR Field Descriptions
Field
Description
6–4
SPPR[2:0]
SPI Baud Rate Preselection Bits — These bits specify the SPI baud rates as shown in Table 11-7. In master
mode, a change of these bits will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state.
2–0
SPR[2:0]
SPI Baud Rate Selection Bits — These bits specify the SPI baud rates as shown in Table 11-7. In master mode,
a change of these bits will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI system into idle state.
The baud rate divisor equation is as follows:
BaudRateDivisor = (SPPR + 1) • 2(SPR + 1)
Eqn. 11-1
The baud rate can be calculated with the following equation:
Baud Rate = BusClock / BaudRateDivisor
Eqn. 11-2
NOTE
For maximum allowed baud rates, please refer to the SPI Electrical
Specification in the Electricals chapter of this data sheet.
Table 11-7. Example SPI Baud Rate Selection (25 MHz Bus Clock) (Sheet 1 of 3)
SPPR2
SPPR1
SPPR0
SPR2
SPR1
SPR0
Baud Rate
Divisor
Baud Rate
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
12.5 Mbit/s
0
0
0
0
0
1
4
6.25 Mbit/s
0
0
0
0
1
0
8
3.125 Mbit/s
0
0
0
0
1
1
16
1.5625 Mbit/s
0
0
0
1
0
0
32
781.25 kbit/s
0
0
0
1
0
1
64
390.63 kbit/s
0
0
0
1
1
0
128
195.31 kbit/s
0
0
0
1
1
1
256
97.66 kbit/s
0
0
1
0
0
0
4
6.25 Mbit/s
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
350
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
Table 11-7. Example SPI Baud Rate Selection (25 MHz Bus Clock) (Sheet 2 of 3)
Baud Rate
Divisor
SPPR2
SPPR1
SPPR0
SPR2
SPR1
SPR0
Baud Rate
0
0
1
0
0
1
8
3.125 Mbit/s
0
0
1
0
1
0
16
1.5625 Mbit/s
0
0
1
0
1
1
32
781.25 kbit/s
0
0
1
1
0
0
64
390.63 kbit/s
0
0
1
1
0
1
128
195.31 kbit/s
0
0
1
1
1
0
256
97.66 kbit/s
0
0
1
1
1
1
512
48.83 kbit/s
0
1
0
0
0
0
6
4.16667 Mbit/s
0
1
0
0
0
1
12
2.08333 Mbit/s
0
1
0
0
1
0
24
1.04167 Mbit/s
0
1
0
0
1
1
48
520.83 kbit/s
0
1
0
1
0
0
96
260.42 kbit/s
0
1
0
1
0
1
192
130.21 kbit/s
0
1
0
1
1
0
384
65.10 kbit/s
0
1
0
1
1
1
768
32.55 kbit/s
0
1
1
0
0
0
8
3.125 Mbit/s
0
1
1
0
0
1
16
1.5625 Mbit/s
0
1
1
0
1
0
32
781.25 kbit/s
0
1
1
0
1
1
64
390.63 kbit/s
0
1
1
1
0
0
128
195.31 kbit/s
0
1
1
1
0
1
256
97.66 kbit/s
0
1
1
1
1
0
512
48.83 kbit/s
0
1
1
1
1
1
1024
24.41 kbit/s
1
0
0
0
0
0
10
2.5 Mbit/s
1
0
0
0
0
1
20
1.25 Mbit/s
1
0
0
0
1
0
40
625 kbit/s
1
0
0
0
1
1
80
312.5 kbit/s
1
0
0
1
0
0
160
156.25 kbit/s
1
0
0
1
0
1
320
78.13 kbit/s
1
0
0
1
1
0
640
39.06 kbit/s
1
0
0
1
1
1
1280
19.53 kbit/s
1
0
1
0
0
0
12
2.08333 Mbit/s
1
0
1
0
0
1
24
1.04167 Mbit/s
1
0
1
0
1
0
48
520.83 kbit/s
1
0
1
0
1
1
96
260.42 kbit/s
1
0
1
1
0
0
192
130.21 kbit/s
1
0
1
1
0
1
384
65.10 kbit/s
1
0
1
1
1
0
768
32.55 kbit/s
1
0
1
1
1
1
1536
16.28 kbit/s
1
1
0
0
0
0
14
1.78571 Mbit/s
1
1
0
0
0
1
28
892.86 kbit/s
1
1
0
0
1
0
56
446.43 kbit/s
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
351
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
Table 11-7. Example SPI Baud Rate Selection (25 MHz Bus Clock) (Sheet 3 of 3)
SPPR2
SPPR1
SPPR0
SPR2
SPR1
SPR0
Baud Rate
Divisor
Baud Rate
1
1
0
0
1
1
112
223.21 kbit/s
1
1
0
1
0
0
224
111.61 kbit/s
1
1
0
1
0
1
448
55.80 kbit/s
1
1
0
1
1
0
896
27.90 kbit/s
1
1
0
1
1
1
1792
13.95 kbit/s
1
1
1
0
0
0
16
1.5625 Mbit/s
1
1
1
0
0
1
32
781.25 kbit/s
1
1
1
0
1
0
64
390.63 kbit/s
1
1
1
0
1
1
128
195.31 kbit/s
1
1
1
1
0
0
256
97.66 kbit/s
1
1
1
1
0
1
512
48.83 kbit/s
1
1
1
1
1
0
1024
24.41 kbit/s
1
1
1
1
1
1
2048
12.21 kbit/s
11.3.2.4
SPI Status Register (SPISR)
Module Base +0x0003
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SPIF
0
SPTEF
MODF
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 11-6. SPI Status Register (SPISR)
Read: Anytime
Write: Has no effect
Table 11-8. SPISR Field Descriptions
Field
7
SPIF
Description
SPIF Interrupt Flag — This bit is set after received data has been transferred into the SPI data register. For
information about clearing SPIF Flag, please refer to Table 11-9.
0 Transfer not yet complete.
1 New data copied to SPIDR.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
352
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
Table 11-8. SPISR Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
5
SPTEF
SPI Transmit Empty Interrupt Flag — If set, this bit indicates that the transmit data register is empty. For
information about clearing this bit and placing data into the transmit data register, please refer to Table 11-10.
0 SPI data register not empty.
1 SPI data register empty.
4
MODF
Mode Fault Flag — This bit is set if the SS input becomes low while the SPI is configured as a master and mode
fault detection is enabled, MODFEN bit of SPICR2 register is set. Refer to MODFEN bit description in
Section 11.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2)”. The flag is cleared automatically by a read of the SPI status
register (with MODF set) followed by a write to the SPI control register 1.
0 Mode fault has not occurred.
1 Mode fault has occurred.
Table 11-9. SPIF Interrupt Flag Clearing Sequence
XFRW Bit
SPIF Interrupt Flag Clearing Sequence
0
Read SPISR with SPIF == 1
1
Read SPISR with SPIF == 1
then
Read SPIDRL
Byte Read SPIDRL 1
or
then
Byte Read SPIDRH 2
Byte Read SPIDRL
or
Word Read (SPIDRH:SPIDRL)
1
2
Data in SPIDRH is lost in this case.
SPIDRH can be read repeatedly without any effect on SPIF. SPIF Flag is cleared only by the read
of SPIDRL after reading SPISR with SPIF == 1.
Table 11-10. SPTEF Interrupt Flag Clearing Sequence
XFRW Bit
SPTEF Interrupt Flag Clearing Sequence
0
Read SPISR with SPTEF == 1 then
1
Read SPISR with SPTEF == 1
Write to SPIDRL 1
Byte Write to SPIDRL 12
or
then Byte Write to SPIDRH 13 Byte Write to SPIDRL 1
or
Word Write to (SPIDRH:SPIDRL) 1
1
Any write to SPIDRH or SPIDRL with SPTEF == 0 is effectively ignored.
Data in SPIDRH is undefined in this case.
3 SPIDRH can be written repeatedly without any effect on SPTEF. SPTEF Flag is cleared only by
writing to SPIDRL after reading SPISR with SPTEF == 1.
2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
353
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
11.3.2.5
SPI Data Register (SPIDR = SPIDRH:SPIDRL)
Module Base +0x0004
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
R15
R14
R13
R12
R11
R10
R9
R8
W
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
T10
T9
T8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
Figure 11-7. SPI Data Register High (SPIDRH)
Module Base +0x0005
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
W
T7
T6
T5
T4
T3
T2
T1
T0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
Figure 11-8. SPI Data Register Low (SPIDRL)
Read: Anytime; read data only valid when SPIF is set
Write: Anytime
The SPI data register is both the input and output register for SPI data. A write to this register
allows data to be queued and transmitted. For an SPI configured as a master, queued data is
transmitted immediately after the previous transmission has completed. The SPI transmitter empty
flag SPTEF in the SPISR register indicates when the SPI data register is ready to accept new data.
Received data in the SPIDR is valid when SPIF is set.
If SPIF is cleared and data has been received, the received data is transferred from the receive shift
register to the SPIDR and SPIF is set.
If SPIF is set and not serviced, and a second data value has been received, the second received data
is kept as valid data in the receive shift register until the start of another transmission. The data in
the SPIDR does not change.
If SPIF is set and valid data is in the receive shift register, and SPIF is serviced before the start of
a third transmission, the data in the receive shift register is transferred into the SPIDR and SPIF
remains set (see Figure 11-9).
If SPIF is set and valid data is in the receive shift register, and SPIF is serviced after the start of a
third transmission, the data in the receive shift register has become invalid and is not transferred
into the SPIDR (see Figure 11-10).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
354
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
Data A Received
Data B Received
Data C Received
SPIF Serviced
Receive Shift Register
Data B
Data A
Data C
SPIF
SPI Data Register
Data B
Data A
= Unspecified
Data C
= Reception in progress
Figure 11-9. Reception with SPIF serviced in Time
Data A Received
Data B Received
Data C Received
Data B Lost
SPIF Serviced
Receive Shift Register
Data B
Data A
Data C
SPIF
SPI Data Register
Data A
= Unspecified
Data C
= Reception in progress
Figure 11-10. Reception with SPIF serviced too late
11.4
Functional Description
The SPI module allows a duplex, synchronous, serial communication between the MCU and peripheral
devices. Software can poll the SPI status flags or SPI operation can be interrupt driven.
The SPI system is enabled by setting the SPI enable (SPE) bit in SPI control register 1. While SPE is set,
the four associated SPI port pins are dedicated to the SPI function as:
• Slave select (SS)
• Serial clock (SCK)
• Master out/slave in (MOSI)
• Master in/slave out (MISO)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
355
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
The main element of the SPI system is the SPI data register. The n-bit1 data register in the master and the
n-bit1 data register in the slave are linked by the MOSI and MISO pins to form a distributed 2n-bit1
register. When a data transfer operation is performed, this 2n-bit1 register is serially shifted n1 bit positions
by the S-clock from the master, so data is exchanged between the master and the slave. Data written to the
master SPI data register becomes the output data for the slave, and data read from the master SPI data
register after a transfer operation is the input data from the slave.
A read of SPISR with SPTEF = 1 followed by a write to SPIDR puts data into the transmit data register.
When a transfer is complete and SPIF is cleared, received data is moved into the receive data register. This
data register acts as the SPI receive data register for reads and as the SPI transmit data register for writes.
A common SPI data register address is shared for reading data from the read data buffer and for writing
data to the transmit data register.
The clock phase control bit (CPHA) and a clock polarity control bit (CPOL) in the SPI control register 1
(SPICR1) select one of four possible clock formats to be used by the SPI system. The CPOL bit simply
selects a non-inverted or inverted clock. The CPHA bit is used to accommodate two fundamentally
different protocols by sampling data on odd numbered SCK edges or on even numbered SCK edges (see
Section 11.4.3, “Transmission Formats”).
The SPI can be configured to operate as a master or as a slave. When the MSTR bit in SPI control register1
is set, master mode is selected, when the MSTR bit is clear, slave mode is selected.
NOTE
A change of CPOL or MSTR bit while there is a received byte pending in
the receive shift register will destroy the received byte and must be avoided.
11.4.1
Master Mode
The SPI operates in master mode when the MSTR bit is set. Only a master SPI module can initiate
transmissions. A transmission begins by writing to the master SPI data register. If the shift register is
empty, data immediately transfers to the shift register. Data begins shifting out on the MOSI pin under the
control of the serial clock.
• Serial clock
The SPR2, SPR1, and SPR0 baud rate selection bits, in conjunction with the SPPR2, SPPR1, and
SPPR0 baud rate preselection bits in the SPI baud rate register, control the baud rate generator and
determine the speed of the transmission. The SCK pin is the SPI clock output. Through the SCK
pin, the baud rate generator of the master controls the shift register of the slave peripheral.
• MOSI, MISO pin
In master mode, the function of the serial data output pin (MOSI) and the serial data input pin
(MISO) is determined by the SPC0 and BIDIROE control bits.
• SS pin
If MODFEN and SSOE are set, the SS pin is configured as slave select output. The SS output
becomes low during each transmission and is high when the SPI is in idle state.
1. n depends on the selected transfer width, please refer to Section 11.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
356
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
If MODFEN is set and SSOE is cleared, the SS pin is configured as input for detecting mode fault
error. If the SS input becomes low this indicates a mode fault error where another master tries to
drive the MOSI and SCK lines. In this case, the SPI immediately switches to slave mode, by
clearing the MSTR bit and also disables the slave output buffer MISO (or SISO in bidirectional
mode). So the result is that all outputs are disabled and SCK, MOSI, and MISO are inputs. If a
transmission is in progress when the mode fault occurs, the transmission is aborted and the SPI is
forced into idle state.
This mode fault error also sets the mode fault (MODF) flag in the SPI status register (SPISR). If
the SPI interrupt enable bit (SPIE) is set when the MODF flag becomes set, then an SPI interrupt
sequence is also requested.
When a write to the SPI data register in the master occurs, there is a half SCK-cycle delay. After
the delay, SCK is started within the master. The rest of the transfer operation differs slightly,
depending on the clock format specified by the SPI clock phase bit, CPHA, in SPI control register 1
(see Section 11.4.3, “Transmission Formats”).
NOTE
A change of the bits CPOL, CPHA, SSOE, LSBFE, XFRW, MODFEN,
SPC0, or BIDIROE with SPC0 set, SPPR2-SPPR0 and SPR2-SPR0 in
master mode will abort a transmission in progress and force the SPI into idle
state. The remote slave cannot detect this, therefore the master must ensure
that the remote slave is returned to idle state.
11.4.2
Slave Mode
The SPI operates in slave mode when the MSTR bit in SPI control register 1 is clear.
• Serial clock
In slave mode, SCK is the SPI clock input from the master.
• MISO, MOSI pin
In slave mode, the function of the serial data output pin (MISO) and serial data input pin (MOSI)
is determined by the SPC0 bit and BIDIROE bit in SPI control register 2.
• SS pin
The SS pin is the slave select input. Before a data transmission occurs, the SS pin of the slave SPI
must be low. SS must remain low until the transmission is complete. If SS goes high, the SPI is
forced into idle state.
The SS input also controls the serial data output pin, if SS is high (not selected), the serial data
output pin is high impedance, and, if SS is low, the first bit in the SPI data register is driven out of
the serial data output pin. Also, if the slave is not selected (SS is high), then the SCK input is
ignored and no internal shifting of the SPI shift register occurs.
Although the SPI is capable of duplex operation, some SPI peripherals are capable of only
receiving SPI data in a slave mode. For these simpler devices, there is no serial data out pin.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
357
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
NOTE
When peripherals with duplex capability are used, take care not to
simultaneously enable two receivers whose serial outputs drive the same
system slave’s serial data output line.
As long as no more than one slave device drives the system slave’s serial data output line, it is possible for
several slaves to receive the same transmission from a master, although the master would not receive return
information from all of the receiving slaves.
If the CPHA bit in SPI control register 1 is clear, odd numbered edges on the SCK input cause the data at
the serial data input pin to be latched. Even numbered edges cause the value previously latched from the
serial data input pin to shift into the LSB or MSB of the SPI shift register, depending on the LSBFE bit.
If the CPHA bit is set, even numbered edges on the SCK input cause the data at the serial data input pin to
be latched. Odd numbered edges cause the value previously latched from the serial data input pin to shift
into the LSB or MSB of the SPI shift register, depending on the LSBFE bit.
When CPHA is set, the first edge is used to get the first data bit onto the serial data output pin. When CPHA
is clear and the SS input is low (slave selected), the first bit of the SPI data is driven out of the serial data
output pin. After the nth1 shift, the transfer is considered complete and the received data is transferred into
the SPI data register. To indicate transfer is complete, the SPIF flag in the SPI status register is set.
NOTE
A change of the bits CPOL, CPHA, SSOE, LSBFE, MODFEN, SPC0, or
BIDIROE with SPC0 set in slave mode will corrupt a transmission in
progress and must be avoided.
11.4.3
Transmission Formats
During an SPI transmission, data is transmitted (shifted out serially) and received (shifted in serially)
simultaneously. The serial clock (SCK) synchronizes shifting and sampling of the information on the two
serial data lines. A slave select line allows selection of an individual slave SPI device; slave devices that
are not selected do not interfere with SPI bus activities. Optionally, on a master SPI device, the slave select
line can be used to indicate multiple-master bus contention.
MASTER SPI
SHIFT REGISTER
BAUD RATE
GENERATOR
SLAVE SPI
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
SCK
SCK
SS
VDD
SHIFT REGISTER
SS
Figure 11-11. Master/Slave Transfer Block Diagram
1. n depends on the selected transfer width, please refer to Section 11.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
358
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
11.4.3.1
Clock Phase and Polarity Controls
Using two bits in the SPI control register 1, software selects one of four combinations of serial clock phase
and polarity.
The CPOL clock polarity control bit specifies an active high or low clock and has no significant effect on
the transmission format.
The CPHA clock phase control bit selects one of two fundamentally different transmission formats.
Clock phase and polarity should be identical for the master SPI device and the communicating slave
device. In some cases, the phase and polarity are changed between transmissions to allow a master device
to communicate with peripheral slaves having different requirements.
11.4.3.2
CPHA = 0 Transfer Format
The first edge on the SCK line is used to clock the first data bit of the slave into the master and the first
data bit of the master into the slave. In some peripherals, the first bit of the slave’s data is available at the
slave’s data out pin as soon as the slave is selected. In this format, the first SCK edge is issued a half cycle
after SS has become low.
A half SCK cycle later, the second edge appears on the SCK line. When this second edge occurs, the value
previously latched from the serial data input pin is shifted into the LSB or MSB of the shift register,
depending on LSBFE bit.
After this second edge, the next bit of the SPI master data is transmitted out of the serial data output pin of
the master to the serial input pin on the slave. This process continues for a total of 16 edges on the SCK
line, with data being latched on odd numbered edges and shifted on even numbered edges.
Data reception is double buffered. Data is shifted serially into the SPI shift register during the transfer and
is transferred to the parallel SPI data register after the last bit is shifted in.
After 2n1 (last) SCK edges:
• Data that was previously in the master SPI data register should now be in the slave data register and
the data that was in the slave data register should be in the master.
• The SPIF flag in the SPI status register is set, indicating that the transfer is complete.
Figure 11-12 is a timing diagram of an SPI transfer where CPHA = 0. SCK waveforms are shown for
CPOL = 0 and CPOL = 1. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or slave timing diagram because
the SCK, MISO, and MOSI pins are connected directly between the master and the slave. The MISO signal
is the output from the slave and the MOSI signal is the output from the master. The SS pin of the master
must be either high or reconfigured as a general-purpose output not affecting the SPI.
1. n depends on the selected transfer width, please refer to Section 11.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
359
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
End of Idle State
Begin
1
SCK Edge Number
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Begin of Idle State
End
Transfer
9
10
11
12
13 14
15
16
Bit 1
Bit 6
LSB Minimum 1/2 SCK
for tT, tl, tL
MSB
SCK (CPOL = 0)
SCK (CPOL = 1)
If next transfer begins here
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE O
MOSI pin
CHANGE O
MISO pin
SEL SS (O)
Master only
SEL SS (I)
tT
tL
MSB first (LSBFE = 0): MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
LSB first (LSBFE = 1): LSB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
tL = Minimum leading time before the first SCK edge
tT = Minimum trailing time after the last SCK edge
tI = Minimum idling time between transfers (minimum SS high time)
tL, tT, and tI are guaranteed for the master mode and required for the slave mode.
tI
tL
Figure 11-12. SPI Clock Format 0 (CPHA = 0), with 8-bit Transfer Width selected (XFRW = 0)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
360
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
End of Idle State
SCK Edge Number
Begin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Begin of Idle State
End
Transfer
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
SCK (CPOL = 0)
SCK (CPOL = 1)
If next transfer begins here
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE O
MOSI pin
CHANGE O
MISO pin
SEL SS (O)
Master only
SEL SS (I)
MSB first (LSBFE = 0)
LSB first (LSBFE = 1)
tL
tT tI tL
MSB Bit 14Bit 13Bit 12Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSB
Minimum 1/2 SCK
LSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10Bit 11Bit 12Bit 13Bit 14 MSB
for tT, tl, tL
tL = Minimum leading time before the first SCK edge
tT = Minimum trailing time after the last SCK edge
tI = Minimum idling time between transfers (minimum SS high time)
tL, tT, and tI are guaranteed for the master mode and required for the slave mode.
Figure 11-13. SPI Clock Format 0 (CPHA = 0), with 16-Bit Transfer Width selected (XFRW = 1)
In slave mode, if the SS line is not deasserted between the successive transmissions then the content of the
SPI data register is not transmitted; instead the last received data is transmitted. If the SS line is deasserted
for at least minimum idle time (half SCK cycle) between successive transmissions, then the content of the
SPI data register is transmitted.
In master mode, with slave select output enabled the SS line is always deasserted and reasserted between
successive transfers for at least minimum idle time.
11.4.3.3
CPHA = 1 Transfer Format
Some peripherals require the first SCK edge before the first data bit becomes available at the data out pin,
the second edge clocks data into the system. In this format, the first SCK edge is issued by setting the
CPHA bit at the beginning of the n1-cycle transfer operation.
The first edge of SCK occurs immediately after the half SCK clock cycle synchronization delay. This first
edge commands the slave to transfer its first data bit to the serial data input pin of the master.
A half SCK cycle later, the second edge appears on the SCK pin. This is the latching edge for both the
master and slave.
1. n depends on the selected transfer width, please refer to Section 11.3.2.2, “SPI Control Register 2 (SPICR2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
361
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
When the third edge occurs, the value previously latched from the serial data input pin is shifted into the
LSB or MSB of the SPI shift register, depending on LSBFE bit. After this edge, the next bit of the master
data is coupled out of the serial data output pin of the master to the serial input pin on the slave.
This process continues for a total of n1 edges on the SCK line with data being latched on even numbered
edges and shifting taking place on odd numbered edges.
Data reception is double buffered, data is serially shifted into the SPI shift register during the transfer and
is transferred to the parallel SPI data register after the last bit is shifted in.
After 2n1 SCK edges:
• Data that was previously in the SPI data register of the master is now in the data register of the
slave, and data that was in the data register of the slave is in the master.
• The SPIF flag bit in SPISR is set indicating that the transfer is complete.
Figure 11-14 shows two clocking variations for CPHA = 1. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or
slave timing diagram because the SCK, MISO, and MOSI pins are connected directly between the master
and the slave. The MISO signal is the output from the slave, and the MOSI signal is the output from the
master. The SS line is the slave select input to the slave. The SS pin of the master must be either high or
reconfigured as a general-purpose output not affecting the SPI.
End of Idle State
Begin
SCK Edge Number
1
2
3
4
End
Transfer
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 14
Begin of Idle State
15
16
SCK (CPOL = 0)
SCK (CPOL = 1)
If next transfer begins here
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE O
MOSI pin
CHANGE O
MISO pin
SEL SS (O)
Master only
SEL SS (I)
tT
tL
tI
tL
MSB first (LSBFE = 0):
LSB first (LSBFE = 1):
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSB Minimum 1/2 SCK
for tT, tl, tL
LSB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
MSB
tL = Minimum leading time before the first SCK edge, not required for back-to-back transfers
tT = Minimum trailing time after the last SCK edge
tI = Minimum idling time between transfers (minimum SS high time), not required for back-to-back transfers
Figure 11-14. SPI Clock Format 1 (CPHA = 1), with 8-Bit Transfer Width selected (XFRW = 0)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
362
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
End of Idle State
SCK Edge Number
Begin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Begin of Idle State
End
Transfer
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
SCK (CPOL = 0)
SCK (CPOL = 1)
If next transfer begins here
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE O
MOSI pin
CHANGE O
MISO pin
SEL SS (O)
Master only
SEL SS (I)
tT tI tL
Minimum 1/2 SCK
for tT, tl, tL
tL
MSB first (LSBFE = 0)
LSB first (LSBFE = 1)
MSB Bit 14Bit 13Bit 12Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 LSB
LSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10Bit 11Bit 12Bit 13Bit 14 MSB
tL = Minimum leading time before the first SCK edge, not required for back-to-back transfers
tT = Minimum trailing time after the last SCK edge
tI = Minimum idling time between transfers (minimum SS high time), not required for back-to-back transfers
Figure 11-15. SPI Clock Format 1 (CPHA = 1), with 16-Bit Transfer Width selected (XFRW = 1)
The SS line can remain active low between successive transfers (can be tied low at all times). This format
is sometimes preferred in systems having a single fixed master and a single slave that drive the MISO data
line.
• Back-to-back transfers in master mode
In master mode, if a transmission has completed and new data is available in the SPI data register,
this data is sent out immediately without a trailing and minimum idle time.
The SPI interrupt request flag (SPIF) is common to both the master and slave modes. SPIF gets set one
half SCK cycle after the last SCK edge.
11.4.4
SPI Baud Rate Generation
Baud rate generation consists of a series of divider stages. Six bits in the SPI baud rate register (SPPR2,
SPPR1, SPPR0, SPR2, SPR1, and SPR0) determine the divisor to the SPI module clock which results in
the SPI baud rate.
The SPI clock rate is determined by the product of the value in the baud rate preselection bits
(SPPR2–SPPR0) and the value in the baud rate selection bits (SPR2–SPR0). The module clock divisor
equation is shown in Equation 11-3.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
363
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
BaudRateDivisor = (SPPR + 1) • 2(SPR + 1)
Eqn. 11-3
When all bits are clear (the default condition), the SPI module clock is divided by 2. When the selection
bits (SPR2–SPR0) are 001 and the preselection bits (SPPR2–SPPR0) are 000, the module clock divisor
becomes 4. When the selection bits are 010, the module clock divisor becomes 8, etc.
When the preselection bits are 001, the divisor determined by the selection bits is multiplied by 2. When
the preselection bits are 010, the divisor is multiplied by 3, etc. See Table 11-7 for baud rate calculations
for all bit conditions, based on a 25 MHz bus clock. The two sets of selects allows the clock to be divided
by a non-power of two to achieve other baud rates such as divide by 6, divide by 10, etc.
The baud rate generator is activated only when the SPI is in master mode and a serial transfer is taking
place. In the other cases, the divider is disabled to decrease IDD current.
NOTE
For maximum allowed baud rates, please refer to the SPI Electrical
Specification in the Electricals chapter of this data sheet.
11.4.5
11.4.5.1
Special Features
SS Output
The SS output feature automatically drives the SS pin low during transmission to select external devices
and drives it high during idle to deselect external devices. When SS output is selected, the SS output pin
is connected to the SS input pin of the external device.
The SS output is available only in master mode during normal SPI operation by asserting SSOE and
MODFEN bit as shown in Table 11-3.
The mode fault feature is disabled while SS output is enabled.
NOTE
Care must be taken when using the SS output feature in a multimaster
system because the mode fault feature is not available for detecting system
errors between masters.
11.4.5.2
Bidirectional Mode (MOMI or SISO)
The bidirectional mode is selected when the SPC0 bit is set in SPI control register 2 (see Table 11-11). In
this mode, the SPI uses only one serial data pin for the interface with external device(s). The MSTR bit
decides which pin to use. The MOSI pin becomes the serial data I/O (MOMI) pin for the master mode, and
the MISO pin becomes serial data I/O (SISO) pin for the slave mode. The MISO pin in master mode and
MOSI pin in slave mode are not used by the SPI.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
364
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
Table 11-11. Normal Mode and Bidirectional Mode
When SPE = 1
Master Mode MSTR = 1
Serial Out
Normal Mode
SPC0 = 0
MOSI
MOSI
Serial In
SPI
SPI
Serial In
MISO
Serial Out
Bidirectional Mode
SPC0 = 1
Slave Mode MSTR = 0
MOMI
Serial Out
MISO
Serial In
BIDIROE
SPI
BIDIROE
Serial In
SPI
Serial Out
SISO
The direction of each serial I/O pin depends on the BIDIROE bit. If the pin is configured as an output,
serial data from the shift register is driven out on the pin. The same pin is also the serial input to the shift
register.
• The SCK is output for the master mode and input for the slave mode.
• The SS is the input or output for the master mode, and it is always the input for the slave mode.
• The bidirectional mode does not affect SCK and SS functions.
NOTE
In bidirectional master mode, with mode fault enabled, both data pins MISO
and MOSI can be occupied by the SPI, though MOSI is normally used for
transmissions in bidirectional mode and MISO is not used by the SPI. If a
mode fault occurs, the SPI is automatically switched to slave mode. In this
case MISO becomes occupied by the SPI and MOSI is not used. This must
be considered, if the MISO pin is used for another purpose.
11.4.6
Error Conditions
The SPI has one error condition:
• Mode fault error
11.4.6.1
Mode Fault Error
If the SS input becomes low while the SPI is configured as a master, it indicates a system error where more
than one master may be trying to drive the MOSI and SCK lines simultaneously. This condition is not
permitted in normal operation, the MODF bit in the SPI status register is set automatically, provided the
MODFEN bit is set.
In the special case where the SPI is in master mode and MODFEN bit is cleared, the SS pin is not used by
the SPI. In this special case, the mode fault error function is inhibited and MODF remains cleared. In case
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
365
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
the SPI system is configured as a slave, the SS pin is a dedicated input pin. Mode fault error doesn’t occur
in slave mode.
If a mode fault error occurs, the SPI is switched to slave mode, with the exception that the slave output
buffer is disabled. So SCK, MISO, and MOSI pins are forced to be high impedance inputs to avoid any
possibility of conflict with another output driver. A transmission in progress is aborted and the SPI is
forced into idle state.
If the mode fault error occurs in the bidirectional mode for a SPI system configured in master mode, output
enable of the MOMI (MOSI in bidirectional mode) is cleared if it was set. No mode fault error occurs in
the bidirectional mode for SPI system configured in slave mode.
The mode fault flag is cleared automatically by a read of the SPI status register (with MODF set) followed
by a write to SPI control register 1. If the mode fault flag is cleared, the SPI becomes a normal master or
slave again.
NOTE
If a mode fault error occurs and a received data byte is pending in the receive
shift register, this data byte will be lost.
11.4.7
11.4.7.1
Low Power Mode Options
SPI in Run Mode
In run mode with the SPI system enable (SPE) bit in the SPI control register clear, the SPI system is in a
low-power, disabled state. SPI registers remain accessible, but clocks to the core of this module are
disabled.
11.4.7.2
SPI in Wait Mode
SPI operation in wait mode depends upon the state of the SPISWAI bit in SPI control register 2.
• If SPISWAI is clear, the SPI operates normally when the CPU is in wait mode
• If SPISWAI is set, SPI clock generation ceases and the SPI module enters a power conservation
state when the CPU is in wait mode.
–
If SPISWAI is set and the SPI is configured for master, any transmission and reception in
progress stops at wait mode entry. The transmission and reception resumes when the SPI exits
wait mode.
–
If SPISWAI is set and the SPI is configured as a slave, any transmission and reception in
progress continues if the SCK continues to be driven from the master. This keeps the slave
synchronized to the master and the SCK.
If the master transmits several bytes while the slave is in wait mode, the slave will continue to
send out bytes consistent with the operation mode at the start of wait mode (i.e., if the slave is
currently sending its SPIDR to the master, it will continue to send the same byte. Else if the
slave is currently sending the last received byte from the master, it will continue to send each
previous master byte).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
366
Freescale Semiconductor
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
NOTE
Care must be taken when expecting data from a master while the slave is in
wait or stop mode. Even though the shift register will continue to operate,
the rest of the SPI is shut down (i.e., a SPIF interrupt will not be generated
until exiting stop or wait mode). Also, the byte from the shift register will
not be copied into the SPIDR register until after the slave SPI has exited wait
or stop mode. In slave mode, a received byte pending in the receive shift
register will be lost when entering wait or stop mode. An SPIF flag and
SPIDR copy is generated only if wait mode is entered or exited during a
tranmission. If the slave enters wait mode in idle mode and exits wait mode
in idle mode, neither a SPIF nor a SPIDR copy will occur.
11.4.7.3
SPI in Stop Mode
Stop mode is dependent on the system. The SPI enters stop mode when the module clock is disabled (held
high or low). If the SPI is in master mode and exchanging data when the CPU enters stop mode, the
transmission is frozen until the CPU exits stop mode. After stop, data to and from the external SPI is
exchanged correctly. In slave mode, the SPI will stay synchronized with the master.
The stop mode is not dependent on the SPISWAI bit.
11.4.7.4
Reset
The reset values of registers and signals are described in Section 11.3, “Memory Map and Register
Definition”, which details the registers and their bit fields.
• If a data transmission occurs in slave mode after reset without a write to SPIDR, it will transmit
garbage, or the data last received from the master before the reset.
• Reading from the SPIDR after reset will always read zeros.
11.4.7.5
Interrupts
The SPI only originates interrupt requests when SPI is enabled (SPE bit in SPICR1 set). The following is
a description of how the SPI makes a request and how the MCU should acknowledge that request. The
interrupt vector offset and interrupt priority are chip dependent.
The interrupt flags MODF, SPIF, and SPTEF are logically ORed to generate an interrupt request.
11.4.7.5.1
MODF
MODF occurs when the master detects an error on the SS pin. The master SPI must be configured for the
MODF feature (see Table 11-3). After MODF is set, the current transfer is aborted and the following bit is
changed:
• MSTR = 0, The master bit in SPICR1 resets.
The MODF interrupt is reflected in the status register MODF flag. Clearing the flag will also clear the
interrupt. This interrupt will stay active while the MODF flag is set. MODF has an automatic clearing
process which is described in Section 11.3.2.4, “SPI Status Register (SPISR)”.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
367
Serial Peripheral Interface (S12SPIV5)
11.4.7.5.2
SPIF
SPIF occurs when new data has been received and copied to the SPI data register. After SPIF is set, it does
not clear until it is serviced. SPIF has an automatic clearing process, which is described in
Section 11.3.2.4, “SPI Status Register (SPISR)”.
11.4.7.5.3
SPTEF
SPTEF occurs when the SPI data register is ready to accept new data. After SPTEF is set, it does not clear
until it is serviced. SPTEF has an automatic clearing process, which is described in Section 11.3.2.4, “SPI
Status Register (SPISR)”.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
368
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 12
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Table 12-1.
V03.00
Jan. 28, 2009
V03.01
Aug. 26, 2009
12.1.2/12-370
Figure 12-4./12373
12.3.2.15/12-38
7
12.3.2.2/12-376,
12.3.2.3/12-377,
12.3.2.4/12-378,
12.4.3/12-393
V03.02
Apri,12,2010
12.3.2.8/12-381 -Add Table 12-10
12.3.2.11/12-38 -update TCRE bit description
-add Figure 12-31
4
12.4.3/12-393
12.1
Initial version
- Correct typo: TSCR ->TSCR1;
- Correct typo: ECTxxx->TIMxxx
- Correct reference: Figure 12-25 -> Figure 12-30
- Add description, “a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set”, to be the
condition of channel 7 override event.
- Phrase the description of OC7M to make it more explicit
Introduction
The basic scalable timer consists of a 16-bit, software-programmable counter driven by a flexible
programmable prescaler.
This timer can be used for many purposes, including input waveform measurements while simultaneously
generating an output waveform. Pulse widths can vary from microseconds to many seconds.
This timer could contain up to 8 (0....7) input capture/output compare channels with one pulse accumulator
available only on channel 7. The input capture function is used to detect a selected transition edge and
record the time. The output compare function is used for generating output signals or for timer software
delays. The 16-bit pulse accumulator is used to operate as a simple event counter or a gated time
accumulator. The pulse accumulator shares timer channel 7 when the channel is available and when in
event mode.
A full access for the counter registers or the input capture/output compare registers should take place in
one clock cycle. Accessing high byte and low byte separately for all of these registers may not yield the
same result as accessing them in one word.
12.1.1
Features
The TIM16B8CV3 includes these distinctive features:
• Up to 8 channels available. (refer to device specification for exact number)
• All channels have same input capture/output compare functionality.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
369
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
•
•
•
Clock prescaling.
16-bit counter.
16-bit pulse accumulator on channel 7 if channel 7 exists.
12.1.2
Modes of Operation
Stop:
Timer is off because clocks are stopped.
Freeze:
Timer counter keeps on running, unless TSFRZ in TSCR1 is set to 1.
Wait:
Counters keeps on running, unless TSWAI in TSCR1 is set to 1.
Normal:
Timer counter keep on running, unless TEN in TSCR1 is cleared to 0.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
370
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.1.3
Block Diagrams
Bus clock
Prescaler
16-bit Counter
Channel 0
Input capture
Output compare
Channel 1
Input capture
Output compare
Channel 2
Input capture
Output compare
Timer overflow
interrupt
Timer channel 0
interrupt
Channel 3
Input capture
Output compare
Registers
Channel 4
Input capture
Output compare
Channel 5
Input capture
Output compare
Timer channel 7
interrupt
PA overflow
interrupt
PA input
interrupt
Channel 6
Input capture
Output compare
16-bit
Pulse accumulator
Channel 7
Input capture
Output compare
IOC0
IOC1
IOC2
IOC3
IOC4
IOC5
IOC6
IOC7
Maximum possible channels, scalable from 0 to 7.
Pulse Accumulator is available only if channel 7 exists.
Figure 12-1. TIM16B8CV3 Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
371
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
TIMCLK (Timer clock)
CLK1
CLK0
Intermodule Bus
Clock select
(PAMOD)
Edge detector
IOC7
PACLK
PACLK / 256
PACLK / 65536
Prescaled clock
(PCLK)
4:1 MUX
Interrupt
PACNT
MUX
Divide by 64
M clock
Figure 12-2. 16-Bit Pulse Accumulator Block Diagram
16-bit Main Timer
IOCn
Edge detector
Set CnF Interrupt
TCn Input Capture Reg.
Figure 12-3. Interrupt Flag Setting
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
372
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
PULSE
ACCUMULATOR
PAD
CHANNEL 7 OUTPUT COMPARE
OCPD
TEN
TIOS7
Figure 12-4. Channel 7 Output Compare/Pulse Accumulator Logic
12.2
External Signal Description
The TIM16B8CV3 module has a selected number of external pins. Refer to device specification for exact
number.
12.2.1
IOC7 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 7
This pin serves as input capture or output compare for channel 7 if this channel is available. This can also
be configured as pulse accumulator input.
12.2.2
IOC6 - IOC0 — Input Capture and Output Compare Channel 6-0
Those pins serve as input capture or output compare for TIM168CV3 channel if the corresponding channel
is available.
NOTE
For the description of interrupts see Section 12.6, “Interrupts”.
12.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of all memory and registers.
12.3.1
Module Memory Map
The memory map for the TIM16B8CV3 module is given below in Figure 12-5. The address listed for each
register is the address offset. The total address for each register is the sum of the base address for the
TIM16B8CV3 module and the address offset for each register.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
373
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section consists of register descriptions in address order. Each description includes a standard register
diagram with an associated figure number. Details of register bit and field function follow the register
diagrams, in bit order.
Only bits related to implemented channels are valid.
Register
Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0x0000
TIOS1
R
W
IOS7
IOS6
IOS5
IOS4
IOS3
IOS2
IOS1
IOS0
0x0001
CFORC1
R
W
0
FOC7
0
FOC6
0
FOC5
0
FOC4
0
FOC3
0
FOC2
0
FOC1
0
FOC0
0x0002
OC7M2
R
W
OC7M7
OC7M6
OC7M5
OC7M4
OC7M3
OC7M2
OC7M1
OC7M0
0x0003
2
OC7D
R
W
OC7D7
OC7D6
OC7D5
OC7D4
OC7D3
OC7D2
OC7D1
OC7D0
0x0004
TCNTH
R
W
TCNT15
TCNT14
TCNT13
TCNT12
TCNT11
TCNT10
TCNT9
TCNT8
0x0005
TCNTL
R
W
TCNT7
TCNT6
TCNT5
TCNT4
TCNT3
TCNT2
TCNT1
TCNT0
0x0006
TSCR1
R
W
TEN
TSWAI
TSFRZ
TFFCA
PRNT
0
0
0
0x0007
TTOV1
R
W
TOV7
TOV6
TOV5
TOV4
TOV3
TOV2
TOV1
TOV0
0x0008
TCTL11
R
W
OM7
OL7
OM6
OL6
OM5
OL5
OM4
OL4
0x0009
TCTL21
R
W
OM3
OL3
OM2
OL2
OM1
OL1
OM0
OL0
0x000A
TCTL31
R
W
EDG7B
EDG7A
EDG6B
EDG6A
EDG5B
EDG5A
EDG4B
EDG4A
0x000B
TCTL41
R
W
EDG3B
EDG3A
EDG2B
EDG2A
EDG1B
EDG1A
EDG0B
EDG0A
0x000C
TIE1
R
W
C7I
C6I
C5I
C4I
C3I
C2I
C1I
C0I
0x000D
TSCR21
R
W
TOI
0
0
0
TCRE
PR2
PR1
PR0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 12-5. TIM16B8CV3 Register Summary (Sheet 1 of 2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
374
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Register
Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
C6F
C5F
C4F
C3F
C2F
C1F
C0F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x000E
TFLG11
R
W
C7F
0x000F
TFLG2
R
W
TOF
R
W
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PAEN
PAMOD
PEDGE
CLK1
CLK0
PAOVI
PAI
0
0
0
0
0
PAOVF
PAIF
0x0010–0x001F
TCxH–TCxL3
0x0020
2
PACTL
R
W
0
0x0021
2
PAFLG
R
W
0
0x0022
2
PACNTH
R
PACNT15
W
PACNT14
PACNT13
PACNT12
PACNT11
PACNT10
PACNT9
PACNT8
0x0023
2
PACNTL
R
W
PACNT7
PACNT6
PACNT5
PACNT4
PACNT3
PACNT2
PACNT1
PACNT0
0x0024–0x002B
Reserved
R
W
0x002C
OCPD1
R
W
OCPD7
OCPD6
OCPD5
OCPD4
OCPD3
OCPD2
OCPD1
OCPD0
0x002D
Reserved
R
0x002E
PTPSR
R
W
PTPS7
PTPS6
PTPS5
PTPS4
PTPS3
PTPS2
PTPS1
PTPS0
0x002F
Reserved
R
W
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 12-5. TIM16B8CV3 Register Summary (Sheet 2 of 2)
1
The related bit is available only if corresponding channel exists
The register is available only if channel 7 exists.
3 The register is available only if corresponding channel exists.
2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
375
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.3.2.1
Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Select (TIOS)
Module Base + 0x0000
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOS7
IOS6
IOS5
IOS4
IOS3
IOS2
IOS1
IOS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-6. Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Select (TIOS)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 12-2. TIOS Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero.
Field
7:0
IOS[7:0]
12.3.2.2
Description
Input Capture or Output Compare Channel Configuration
0 The corresponding implemented channel acts as an input capture.
1 The corresponding implemented channel acts as an output compare.
Timer Compare Force Register (CFORC)
Module Base + 0x0001
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
FOC7
FOC6
FOC5
FOC4
FOC3
FOC2
FOC1
FOC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
Figure 12-7. Timer Compare Force Register (CFORC)
Read: Anytime but will always return 0x0000 (1 state is transient)
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
376
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Table 12-3. CFORC Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional effect. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from unavailable
bits return a zero.
Field
Description
7:0
FOC[7:0]
Force Output Compare Action for Channel 7:0 — A write to this register with the corresponding data bit(s) set
causes the action which is programmed for output compare “x” to occur immediately. The action taken is the
same as if a successful comparison had just taken place with the TCx register except the interrupt flag does not
get set.
Note: A channel 7 event, which can be a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set or a successful output compare
on channel 7, overrides any channel 6:0 compares. If forced output compare on any channel occurs at the
same time as the successful output compare then forced output compare action will take precedence and
interrupt flag won’t get set.
12.3.2.3
Output Compare 7 Mask Register (OC7M)
Module Base + 0x0002
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OC7M7
OC7M6
OC7M5
OC7M4
OC7M3
OC7M2
OC7M1
OC7M0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-8. Output Compare 7 Mask Register (OC7M)
1
This register is available only when channel 7 exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to a reserved register
have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 12-4. OC7M Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7:0
OC7M[7:0]
Output Compare 7 Mask — A channel 7 event, which can be a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set or a
successful output compare on channel 7, overrides any channel 6:0 compares. For each OC7M bit that is set,
the output compare action reflects the corresponding OC7D bit.
0 The corresponding OC7Dx bit in the output compare 7 data register will not be transferred to the timer port on
a channel 7 event, even if the corresponding pin is setup for output compare.
1 The corresponding OC7Dx bit in the output compare 7 data register will be transferred to the timer port on a
channel 7 event.
Note: The corresponding channel must also be setup for output compare (IOSx = 1 and OCPDx = 0) for data to
be transferred from the output compare 7 data register to the timer port.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
377
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.3.2.4
Output Compare 7 Data Register (OC7D)
Module Base + 0x0003
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OC7D7
OC7D6
OC7D5
OC7D4
OC7D3
OC7D2
OC7D1
OC7D0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-9. Output Compare 7 Data Register (OC7D)
1
This register is available only when channel 7 exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to a reserved register
have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 12-5. OC7D Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7:0
OC7D[7:0]
Output Compare 7 Data — A channel 7 event, which can be a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set or a
successful output compare on channel 7, can cause bits in the output compare 7 data register to transfer to the
timer port data register depending on the output compare 7 mask register.
12.3.2.5
Timer Count Register (TCNT)
Module Base + 0x0004
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
9
TCNT15
TCNT14
TCNT13
TCNT12
TCNT11
TCNT10
TCNT9
TCNT8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-10. Timer Count Register High (TCNTH)
Module Base + 0x0005
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCNT7
TCNT6
TCNT5
TCNT4
TCNT3
TCNT2
TCNT1
TCNT0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-11. Timer Count Register Low (TCNTL)
The 16-bit main timer is an up counter.
A full access for the counter register should take place in one clock cycle. A separate read/write for high
byte and low byte will give a different result than accessing them as a word.
Read: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
378
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Write: Has no meaning or effect in the normal mode; only writable in special modes (test_mode = 1).
The period of the first count after a write to the TCNT registers may be a different size because the write
is not synchronized with the prescaler clock.
12.3.2.6
Timer System Control Register 1 (TSCR1)
Module Base + 0x0006
7
6
5
4
3
TEN
TSWAI
TSFRZ
TFFCA
PRNT
0
0
0
0
0
R
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 12-12. Timer System Control Register 1 (TSCR1)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 12-6. TSCR1 Field Descriptions
Field
7
TEN
Description
Timer Enable
0 Disables the main timer, including the counter. Can be used for reducing power consumption.
1 Allows the timer to function normally.
If for any reason the timer is not active, there is no ÷64 clock for the pulse accumulator because the ÷64 is
generated by the timer prescaler.
6
TSWAI
Timer Module Stops While in Wait
0 Allows the timer module to continue running during wait.
1 Disables the timer module when the MCU is in the wait mode. Timer interrupts cannot be used to get the MCU
out of wait.
TSWAI also affects pulse accumulator.
5
TSFRZ
Timer Stops While in Freeze Mode
0 Allows the timer counter to continue running while in freeze mode.
1 Disables the timer counter whenever the MCU is in freeze mode. This is useful for emulation.
TSFRZ does not stop the pulse accumulator.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
379
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Table 12-6. TSCR1 Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
4
TFFCA
Timer Fast Flag Clear All
0 Allows the timer flag clearing to function normally.
1 For TFLG1(0x000E), a read from an input capture or a write to the output compare channel (0x0010–0x001F)
causes the corresponding channel flag, CnF, to be cleared. For TFLG2 (0x000F), any access to the TCNT
register (0x0004, 0x0005) clears the TOF flag. Any access to the PACNT registers (0x0022, 0x0023) clears
the PAOVF and PAIF flags in the PAFLG register (0x0021) if channel 7 exists. This has the advantage of
eliminating software overhead in a separate clear sequence. Extra care is required to avoid accidental flag
clearing due to unintended accesses.
3
PRNT
Precision Timer
0 Enables legacy timer. PR0, PR1, and PR2 bits of the TSCR2 register are used for timer counter prescaler
selection.
1 Enables precision timer. All bits of the PTPSR register are used for Precision Timer Prescaler Selection, and
all bits.
This bit is writable only once out of reset.
12.3.2.7
Timer Toggle On Overflow Register 1 (TTOV)
Module Base + 0x0007
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TOV7
TOV6
TOV5
TOV4
TOV3
TOV2
TOV1
TOV0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-13. Timer Toggle On Overflow Register 1 (TTOV)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 12-7. TTOV Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero.
Field
Description
7:0
TOV[7:0]
Toggle On Overflow Bits — TOVx toggles output compare pin on overflow. This feature only takes effect when
in output compare mode. When set, it takes precedence over forced output compare but not channel 7 override
events.
0 Toggle output compare pin on overflow feature disabled.
1 Toggle output compare pin on overflow feature enabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
380
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.3.2.8
Timer Control Register 1/Timer Control Register 2 (TCTL1/TCTL2)
Module Base + 0x0008
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OM7
OL7
OM6
OL6
OM5
OL5
OM4
OL4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-14. Timer Control Register 1 (TCTL1)
Module Base + 0x0009
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OM3
OL3
OM2
OL2
OM1
OL1
OM0
OL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-15. Timer Control Register 2 (TCTL2)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 12-8. TCTL1/TCTL2 Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero
Field
Description
7:0
OMx
Output Mode — These eight pairs of control bits are encoded to specify the output action to be taken as a result
of a successful OCx compare. When either OMx or OLx is 1, the pin associated with OCx becomes an output
tied to OCx.
Note: To enable output action by OMx bits on timer port, the corresponding bit in OC7M should be cleared. For
an output line to be driven by an OCx the OCPDx must be cleared.
7:0
OLx
Output Level — These eight pairs of control bits are encoded to specify the output action to be taken as a result
of a successful OCx compare. When either OMx or OLx is 1, the pin associated with OCx becomes an output
tied to OCx.
Note: To enable output action by OLx bits on timer port, the corresponding bit in OC7M should be cleared. For
an output line to be driven by an OCx the OCPDx must be cleared.
Table 12-9. Compare Result Output Action
OMx
OLx
Action
0
0
No output compare
action on the timer output signal
0
1
Toggle OCx output line
1
0
Clear OCx output line to zero
1
1
Set OCx output line to one
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
381
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Note: To enable output action using the OM7 and OL7 bits on the timer port,the corresponding bit OC7M7
in the OC7M register must also be cleared. The settings for these bits can be seen inTable 12-10.
Table 12-10. The OC7 and OCx event priority
OC7M7=0
OC7M7=1
OC7Mx=1
TC7=TCx
OC7Mx=0
TC7>TCx
TC7=TCx
OC7Mx=1
TC7>TCx
TC7=TCx
IOCx=OMx/OLx
IOC7=OM7/OL7
IOCx=OC7Dx IOCx=OC7Dx
IOC7=OM7/O +OMx/OLx
L7
IOC7=OM7/O
L7
OC7Mx=0
TC7>TCx
IOCx=OC7Dx IOCx=OC7Dx
IOC7=OC7D7 +OMx/OLx
IOC7=OC7D7
TC7=TCx
TC7>TCx
IOCx=OMx/OLx
IOC7=OC7D7
Note: in Table 12-10, the IOS7 and IOSx should be set to 1
IOSx is the register TIOS bit x,
OC7Mx is the register OC7M bit x,
TCx is timer Input Capture/Output Compare register,
IOCx is channel x,
OMx/OLx is the register TCTL1/TCTL2,
OC7Dx is the register OC7D bit x.
IOCx = OC7Dx+ OMx/OLx, means that both OC7 event and OCx event will change channel x value.
12.3.2.9
Timer Control Register 3/Timer Control Register 4 (TCTL3 and TCTL4)
Module Base + 0x000A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EDG7B
EDG7A
EDG6B
EDG6A
EDG5B
EDG5A
EDG4B
EDG4A
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-16. Timer Control Register 3 (TCTL3)
Module Base + 0x000B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EDG3B
EDG3A
EDG2B
EDG2A
EDG1B
EDG1A
EDG0B
EDG0A
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-17. Timer Control Register 4 (TCTL4)
Read: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
382
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Write: Anytime.
Table 12-11. TCTL3/TCTL4 Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero.
Field
7:0
EDGnB
EDGnA
Description
Input Capture Edge Control — These eight pairs of control bits configure the input capture edge detector
circuits.
Table 12-12. Edge Detector Circuit Configuration
EDGnB
EDGnA
Configuration
0
0
Capture disabled
0
1
Capture on rising edges only
1
0
Capture on falling edges only
1
1
Capture on any edge (rising or falling)
12.3.2.10 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIE)
Module Base + 0x000C
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C7I
C6I
C5I
C4I
C3I
C2I
C1I
C0I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-18. Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIE)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime.
Table 12-13. TIE Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero
Field
Description
7:0
C7I:C0I
Input Capture/Output Compare “x” Interrupt Enable — The bits in TIE correspond bit-for-bit with the bits in
the TFLG1 status register. If cleared, the corresponding flag is disabled from causing a hardware interrupt. If set,
the corresponding flag is enabled to cause a interrupt.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
383
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.3.2.11 Timer System Control Register 2 (TSCR2)
Module Base + 0x000D
7
R
6
5
4
0
0
0
TOI
3
2
1
0
TCRE
PR2
PR1
PR0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 12-19. Timer System Control Register 2 (TSCR2)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime.
Table 12-14. TSCR2 Field Descriptions
Field
7
TOI
Description
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
0 Interrupt inhibited.
1 Hardware interrupt requested when TOF flag set.
3
TCRE
Timer Counter Reset Enable — This bit allows the timer counter to be reset by a successful output compare 7
event. This mode of operation is similar to an up-counting modulus counter.
0 Counter reset inhibited and counter free runs.
1 Counter reset by a successful output compare 7.
Note: If TC7 = 0x0000 and TCRE = 1, TCNT will stay at 0x0000 continuously. If TC7 = 0xFFFF and TCRE = 1,
TOF will never be set when TCNT is reset from 0xFFFF to 0x0000.
Note: TCRE=1 and TC7!=0, the TCNT cycle period will be TC7 x "prescaler counter width" + "1 Bus Clock", for
a more detail explanation please refer to Section 12.4.3, “Output Compare
Note: This bit and feature is available only when channel 7 exists. If channel 7 doesn’t exist, this bit is reserved.
Writing to reserved bit has no effect. Read from reserved bit return a zero.
2
PR[2:0]
Timer Prescaler Select — These three bits select the frequency of the timer prescaler clock derived from the
Bus Clock as shown in Table 12-15.
Table 12-15. Timer Clock Selection
PR2
PR1
PR0
Timer Clock
0
0
0
Bus Clock / 1
0
0
1
Bus Clock / 2
0
1
0
Bus Clock / 4
0
1
1
Bus Clock / 8
1
0
0
Bus Clock / 16
1
0
1
Bus Clock / 32
1
1
0
Bus Clock / 64
1
1
1
Bus Clock / 128
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
384
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
NOTE
The newly selected prescale factor will not take effect until the next
synchronized edge where all prescale counter stages equal zero.
12.3.2.12 Main Timer Interrupt Flag 1 (TFLG1)
Module Base + 0x000E
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C7F
C6F
C5F
C4F
C3F
C2F
C1F
C0F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-20. Main Timer Interrupt Flag 1 (TFLG1)
Read: Anytime
Write: Used in the clearing mechanism (set bits cause corresponding bits to be cleared). Writing a zero
will not affect current status of the bit.
Table 12-16. TRLG1 Field Descriptions
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero.
Field
Description
7:0
C[7:0]F
Input Capture/Output Compare Channel “x” Flag — These flags are set when an input capture or output
compare event occurs. Clearing requires writing a one to the corresponding flag bit while TEN or PAEN is set to
one.
Note: When TFFCA bit in TSCR register is set, a read from an input capture or a write into an output compare
channel (0x0010–0x001F) will cause the corresponding channel flag CxF to be cleared.
12.3.2.13 Main Timer Interrupt Flag 2 (TFLG2)
Module Base + 0x000F
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TOF
W
Reset
0
Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 12-21. Main Timer Interrupt Flag 2 (TFLG2)
TFLG2 indicates when interrupt conditions have occurred. To clear a bit in the flag register, write the bit
to one while TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL is set to one.
Read: Anytime
Write: Used in clearing mechanism (set bits cause corresponding bits to be cleared).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
385
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Any access to TCNT will clear TFLG2 register if the TFFCA bit in TSCR register is set.
Table 12-17. TRLG2 Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
TOF
Timer Overflow Flag — Set when 16-bit free-running timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. Clearing this bit
requires writing a one to bit 7 of TFLG2 register while the TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL is set to one
(See also TCRE control bit explanation.)
12.3.2.14 Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Registers High and Low 0–7
(TCxH and TCxL)
0x0018 = TC4H
0x001A = TC5H
0x001C = TC6H
0x001E = TC7H
Module Base + 0x0010 = TC0H
0x0012 = TC1H
0x0014 = TC2H
0x0016 = TC3H
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-22. Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Register x High (TCxH)
0x0019 = TC4L
0x001B = TC5L
0x001D = TC6L
0x001F = TC7L
Module Base + 0x0011 = TC0L
0x0013 = TC1L
0x0015 = TC2L
0x0017 = TC3L
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-23. Timer Input Capture/Output Compare Register x Low (TCxL)
1
This register is available only when the corresponding channel exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to
a reserved register have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Depending on the TIOS bit for the corresponding channel, these registers are used to latch the value of the
free-running counter when a defined transition is sensed by the corresponding input capture edge detector
or to trigger an output action for output compare.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime for output compare function.Writes to these registers have no meaning or effect during
input capture. All timer input capture/output compare registers are reset to 0x0000.
NOTE
Read/Write access in byte mode for high byte should takes place before low
byte otherwise it will give a different result.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
386
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.3.2.15 16-Bit Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL)
Module Base + 0x0020
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PAEN
PAMOD
PEDGE
CLK1
CLK0
PAOVI
PAI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 12-24. 16-Bit Pulse Accumulator Control Register (PACTL)
1
This register is available only when channel 7 exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to a reserved register
have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Read: Any time
Write: Any time
When PAEN is set, the Pulse Accumulator counter is enabled.The Pulse Accumulator counter shares the
input pin with IOC7.
Table 12-18. PACTL Field Descriptions
Field
6
PAEN
Description
Pulse Accumulator System Enable — PAEN is independent from TEN. With timer disabled, the pulse
accumulator can function unless pulse accumulator is disabled.
0 16-Bit Pulse Accumulator system disabled.
1 Pulse Accumulator system enabled.
5
PAMOD
Pulse Accumulator Mode — This bit is active only when the Pulse Accumulator is enabled (PAEN = 1). See
Table 12-19.
0 Event counter mode.
1 Gated time accumulation mode.
4
PEDGE
Pulse Accumulator Edge Control — This bit is active only when the Pulse Accumulator is enabled (PAEN = 1).
For PAMOD bit = 0 (event counter mode). See Table 12-19.
0 Falling edges on IOC7 pin cause the count to be increased.
1 Rising edges on IOC7 pin cause the count to be increased.
For PAMOD bit = 1 (gated time accumulation mode).
0 IOC7 input pin high enables M (bus clock) divided by 64 clock to Pulse Accumulator and the trailing falling
edge on IOC7 sets the PAIF flag.
1 IOC7 input pin low enables M (bus clock) divided by 64 clock to Pulse Accumulator and the trailing rising edge
on IOC7 sets the PAIF flag.
3:2
CLK[1:0]
Clock Select Bits — Refer to Table 12-20.
1
PAOVI
0
PAI
Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt Enable
0 Interrupt inhibited.
1 Interrupt requested if PAOVF is set.
Pulse Accumulator Input Interrupt Enable
0 Interrupt inhibited.
1 Interrupt requested if PAIF is set.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
387
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Table 12-19. Pin Action
PAMOD
PEDGE
Pin Action
0
0
Falling edge
0
1
Rising edge
1
0
Div. by 64 clock enabled with pin high level
1
1
Div. by 64 clock enabled with pin low level
NOTE
If the timer is not active (TEN = 0 in TSCR), there is no divide-by-64
because the ÷64 clock is generated by the timer prescaler.
Table 12-20. Timer Clock Selection
CLK1
CLK0
Timer Clock
0
0
Use timer prescaler clock as timer counter clock
0
1
Use PACLK as input to timer counter clock
1
0
Use PACLK/256 as timer counter clock frequency
1
1
Use PACLK/65536 as timer counter clock frequency
For the description of PACLK please refer Figure 12-30.
If the pulse accumulator is disabled (PAEN = 0), the prescaler clock from the timer is always used as an
input clock to the timer counter. The change from one selected clock to the other happens immediately
after these bits are written.
12.3.2.16 Pulse Accumulator Flag Register (PAFLG)
Module Base + 0x0021
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
PAOVF
PAIF
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 12-25. Pulse Accumulator Flag Register (PAFLG)
1
This register is available only when channel 7 exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to a reserved register
have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
388
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
When the TFFCA bit in the TSCR register is set, any access to the PACNT register will clear all the flags
in the PAFLG register. Timer module or Pulse Accumulator must stay enabled (TEN=1 or PAEN=1) while
clearing these bits.
Table 12-21. PAFLG Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1
PAOVF
Pulse Accumulator Overflow Flag — Set when the 16-bit pulse accumulator overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000.
Clearing this bit requires writing a one to this bit in the PAFLG register while TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of
PACTL register is set to one.
0
PAIF
Pulse Accumulator Input edge Flag — Set when the selected edge is detected at the IOC7 input pin.In event
mode the event edge triggers PAIF and in gated time accumulation mode the trailing edge of the gate signal at
the IOC7 input pin triggers PAIF.
Clearing this bit requires writing a one to this bit in the PAFLG register while TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of
PACTL register is set to one. Any access to the PACNT register will clear all the flags in this register when TFFCA
bit in register TSCR(0x0006) is set.
12.3.2.17 Pulse Accumulators Count Registers (PACNT)
Module Base + 0x0022
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
0
PACNT15
PACNT14
PACNT13
PACNT12
PACNT11
PACNT10
PACNT9
PACNT8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-26. Pulse Accumulator Count Register High (PACNTH)
Module Base + 0x0023
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PACNT7
PACNT6
PACNT5
PACNT4
PACNT3
PACNT2
PACNT1
PACNT0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-27. Pulse Accumulator Count Register Low (PACNTL)
1
This register is available only when channel 7 exists and is reserved if that channel does not exist. Writes to a reserved register
have no functional effect. Reads from a reserved register return zeroes.
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
These registers contain the number of active input edges on its input pin since the last reset.
When PACNT overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the Interrupt flag PAOVF in PAFLG (0x0021) is set.
Full count register access should take place in one clock cycle. A separate read/write for high byte and low
byte will give a different result than accessing them as a word.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
389
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
NOTE
Reading the pulse accumulator counter registers immediately after an active
edge on the pulse accumulator input pin may miss the last count because the
input has to be synchronized with the bus clock first.
12.3.2.18 Output Compare Pin Disconnect Register(OCPD)
Module Base + 0x002C
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCPD7
OCPD6
OCPD5
OCPD4
OCPD3
OCPD2
OCPD1
OCPD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-28. Output Compare Pin Disconnect Register (OCPD)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
All bits reset to zero.
Table 12-22. OCPD Field Description
Note: Bits related to available channels have functional significance. Writing to unavailable bits has no effect. Read from
unavailable bits return a zero.
Field
OCPD[7:0}
Description
Output Compare Pin Disconnect Bits
0 Enables the timer channel port. Output Compare action will occur on the channel pin. These bits do not affect
the input capture or pulse accumulator functions
1 Disables the timer channel port. Output Compare action will not occur on the channel pin, but the output
compare flag still become set.
12.3.2.19 Precision Timer Prescaler Select Register (PTPSR)
Module Base + 0x002E
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PTPS7
PTPS6
PTPS5
PTPS4
PTPS3
PTPS2
PTPS1
PTPS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
Reset
Figure 12-29. Precision Timer Prescaler Select Register (PTPSR)
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
All bits reset to zero.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
390
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
...
Table 12-23. PTPSR Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7:0
PTPS[7:0]
Precision Timer Prescaler Select Bits — These eight bits specify the division rate of the main Timer prescaler.
These are effective only when the PRNT bit of TSCR1 is set to 1. Table 12-24 shows some selection examples
in this case.
The newly selected prescale factor will not take effect until the next synchronized edge where all prescale counter
stages equal zero.
The Prescaler can be calculated as follows depending on logical value of the PTPS[7:0] and PRNT bit:
PRNT = 1 : Prescaler = PTPS[7:0] + 1
Table 12-24. Precision Timer Prescaler Selection Examples when PRNT = 1
PTPS7
PTPS6
PTPS5
PTPS4
PTPS3
PTPS2
PTPS1
PTPS0
Prescale
Factor
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
20
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
21
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
22
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
253
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
254
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
255
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
256
12.4
Functional Description
This section provides a complete functional description of the timer TIM16B8CV3 block. Please refer to
the detailed timer block diagram in Figure 12-30 as necessary.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
391
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
PTPSR[7:0]
CLK[1:0]
PACLK
PACLK/256
PACLK/65536
MUX
PRNT
Bus Clock
PRE-PRESCALER
PR[2:1:0]
channel 7 output
compare
1
MUX
0
PRESCALER
TCRE
CxI
TCNT(hi):TCNT(lo)
CxF
CLEAR COUNTER
16-BIT COUNTER
TOF
INTERRUPT
LOGIC
TOI
TE
TOF
CHANNEL 0
16-BIT COMPARATOR
C0F
C0F
OM:OL0
TC0
EDG0A
TOV0
EDGE
DETECT
EDG0B
CH. 0 CAPTURE
IOC0 PIN
LOGIC CH. 0COMPARE
IOC0 PIN
IOC0
CHANNEL 1
16-BIT COMPARATOR
C1F
C1F
OM:OL1
TC1
EDG1A
EDGE
DETECT
EDG1B
CH. 1 CAPTURE
IOC1 PIN
LOGIC CH. 1 COMPARE
TOV1
IOC1 PIN
IOC1
CHANNEL2
CHANNEL7
16-BIT COMPARATOR
C7F
C7F
TC7
OM:OL7
EDG7A
EDG7B
PAOVF
TOV7
EDGE
DETECT
IOC7
PACNT(hi):PACNT(lo)
PACLK/65536
PEDGE
MUX
16-BIT COUNTER
CH.7 CAPTURE
IOC7 PIN PA INPUT
LOGIC CH. 7 COMPARE IOC7 PIN
PAEN
EDGE
DETECT
PACLK
PACLK/256
TEN
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
PAMOD
INTERRUPT
LOGIC
PAIF
PEDGE
DIVIDE-BY-64
PAOVI
PAI
PAOVF
PAIF
Bus Clock
PAOVF
PAOVI
Maximum possible channels, scalable from 0 to 7.
Pulse Accumulator is available only if channel 7 exists.
Figure 12-30. Detailed Timer Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
392
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.4.1
Prescaler
The prescaler divides the bus clock by 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128. The prescaler select bits, PR[2:0], select
the prescaler divisor. PR[2:0] are in timer system control register 2 (TSCR2).
The prescaler divides the bus clock by a prescalar value. Prescaler select bits PR[2:0] of in timer system
control register 2 (TSCR2) are set to define a prescalar value that generates a divide by 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64 and 128 when the PRNT bit in TSCR1 is disabled.
By enabling the PRNT bit of the TSCR1 register, the performance of the timer can be enhanced. In this
case, it is possible to set additional prescaler settings for the main timer counter in the present timer by
using PTPSR[7:0] bits of PTPSR register generating divide by 1, 2, 3, 4,....20, 21, 22, 23,......255, or 256.
12.4.2
Input Capture
Clearing the I/O (input/output) select bit, IOSx, configures channel x as an input capture channel. The
input capture function captures the time at which an external event occurs. When an active edge occurs on
the pin of an input capture channel, the timer transfers the value in the timer counter into the timer channel
registers, TCx.
The minimum pulse width for the input capture input is greater than two bus clocks.
An input capture on channel x sets the CxF flag. The CxI bit enables the CxF flag to generate interrupt
requests. Timer module or Pulse Accumulator must stay enabled (TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of
PACTL register must be set to one) while clearing CxF (writing one to CxF).
12.4.3
Output Compare
Setting the I/O select bit, IOSx, configures channel x when available as an output compare channel. The
output compare function can generate a periodic pulse with a programmable polarity, duration, and
frequency. When the timer counter reaches the value in the channel registers of an output compare channel,
the timer can set, clear, or toggle the channel pin if the corresponding OCPDx bit is set to zero. An output
compare on channel x sets the CxF flag. The CxI bit enables the CxF flag to generate interrupt requests.
Timer module or Pulse Accumulator must stay enabled (TEN bit of TSCR1 or PAEN bit of PACTL register
must be set to one) while clearing CxF (writing one to CxF).
The output mode and level bits, OMx and OLx, select set, clear, toggle on output compare. Clearing both
OMx and OLx results in no output compare action on the output compare channel pin.
Setting a force output compare bit, FOCx, causes an output compare on channel x. A forced output
compare does not set the channel flag.
The following channel 7 feature is available only when channel 7 exists. A channel 7 event, which can be
a counter overflow when TTOV[7] is set or a successful output compare on channel 7, overrides output
compares on all other output compare channels. The output compare 7 mask register masks the bits in the
output compare 7 data register. The timer counter reset enable bit, TCRE, enables channel 7 output
compares to reset the timer counter. A channel 7 output compare can reset the timer counter even if the
IOC7 pin is being used as the pulse accumulator input.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
393
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Writing to the timer port bit of an output compare pin does not affect the pin state. The value written is
stored in an internal latch. When the pin becomes available for general-purpose output, the last value
written to the bit appears at the pin.
When TCRE is set and TC7 is not equal to 0, then TCNT will cycle from 0 to TC7. When TCNT reaches
TC7 value, it will last only one bus cycle then reset to 0.
Note: in Figure 12-31,if PR[2:0] is equal to 0, one prescaler counter equal to one bus clock
Figure 12-31. The TCNT cycle diagram under TCRE=1 condition
prescaler
counter
TC7
0
1 bus
clock
1
TC7-1
TC7
0
TC7 event
TC7 event
12.4.3.1
-----
OC Channel Initialization
The internal register whose output drives OCx can be programmed before the timer drives OCx. The
desired state can be programmed to this internal register by writing a one to CFORCx bit with TIOSx,
OCPDx and TEN bits set to one.
Set OCx: Write a 1 to FOCx while TEN=1, IOSx=1, OMx=1, OLx=1 and OCPDx=1
Clear OCx: Write a 1 to FOCx while TEN=1, IOSx=1, OMx=1, OLx=0 and OCPDx=1
Setting OCPDx to zero allows the internal register to drive the programmed state to OCx. This allows a
glitch free switch over of port from general purpose I/O to timer output once the OCPDx bit is set to zero.
12.4.4
Pulse Accumulator
The following Pulse Accumulator feature is available only when channel 7 exists.
The pulse accumulator (PACNT) is a 16-bit counter that can operate in two modes:
Event counter mode — Counting edges of selected polarity on the pulse accumulator input pin, PAI.
Gated time accumulation mode — Counting pulses from a divide-by-64 clock. The PAMOD bit selects the
mode of operation.
The minimum pulse width for the PAI input is greater than two bus clocks.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
394
Freescale Semiconductor
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
12.4.5
Event Counter Mode
Clearing the PAMOD bit configures the PACNT for event counter operation. An active edge on the IOC7
pin increments the pulse accumulator counter. The PEDGE bit selects falling edges or rising edges to
increment the count.
NOTE
The PACNT input and timer channel 7 use the same pin IOC7. To use the
IOC7, disconnect it from the output logic by clearing the channel 7 output
mode and output level bits, OM7 and OL7. Also clear the channel 7 output
compare 7 mask bit, OC7M7.
The Pulse Accumulator counter register reflect the number of active input edges on the PACNT input pin
since the last reset.
The PAOVF bit is set when the accumulator rolls over from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. The pulse accumulator
overflow interrupt enable bit, PAOVI, enables the PAOVF flag to generate interrupt requests.
NOTE
The pulse accumulator counter can operate in event counter mode even
when the timer enable bit, TEN, is clear.
12.4.6
Gated Time Accumulation Mode
Setting the PAMOD bit configures the pulse accumulator for gated time accumulation operation. An active
level on the PACNT input pin enables a divided-by-64 clock to drive the pulse accumulator. The PEDGE
bit selects low levels or high levels to enable the divided-by-64 clock.
The trailing edge of the active level at the IOC7 pin sets the PAIF. The PAI bit enables the PAIF flag to
generate interrupt requests.
The pulse accumulator counter register reflect the number of pulses from the divided-by-64 clock since the
last reset.
NOTE
The timer prescaler generates the divided-by-64 clock. If the timer is not
active, there is no divided-by-64 clock.
12.5
Resets
The reset state of each individual bit is listed within Section 12.3, “Memory Map and Register Definition”
which details the registers and their bit fields.
12.6
Interrupts
This section describes interrupts originated by the TIM16B8CV3 block. Table 12-25 lists the interrupts
generated by the TIM16B8CV3 to communicate with the MCU.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
395
Timer Module (TIM16B8CV3)
Table 12-25. TIM16B8CV1 Interrupts
Interrupt
Offset1
Vector1
Priority1
Source
Description
C[7:0]F3
—
—
—
Timer Channel 7–0
Active high timer channel interrupts 7–0
2
PAOVI
—
—
—
Pulse Accumulator
Input
Active high pulse accumulator input interrupt
PAOVF2
—
—
—
Pulse Accumulator
Overflow
Pulse accumulator overflow interrupt
TOF
—
—
—
Timer Overflow
Timer Overflow interrupt
1
Chip Dependent.
This feature is available only when channel 7 exists.
3 Bits related to available channels have functional significance
2
The TIM16B8CV3 could use up to 11 interrupt vectors. The interrupt vector offsets and interrupt numbers
are chip dependent.
12.6.1
Channel [7:0] Interrupt (C[7:0]F)
This active high outputs will be asserted by the module to request a timer channel 7 – 0 interrupt. The TIM
block only generates the interrupt and does not service it. Only bits related to implemented channels are
valid.
12.6.2
Pulse Accumulator Input Interrupt (PAOVI)
This interrupt is available only when channel 7 exists. This active high output will be asserted by the
module to request a timer pulse accumulator input interrupt. The TIM block only generates the interrupt
and does not service it.
12.6.3
Pulse Accumulator Overflow Interrupt (PAOVF)
This interrupt is available only when channel 7 exists. This active high output will be asserted by the
module to request a timer pulse accumulator overflow interrupt. The TIM block only generates the
interrupt and does not service it.
12.6.4
Timer Overflow Interrupt (TOF)
This active high output will be asserted by the module to request a timer overflow interrupt. The TIM block
only generates the interrupt and does not service it.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
396
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 13
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
Table 13-1. Revision History Table
Rev. No.
Date
(Item No.) (Submitted By)
Sections
Affected
Substantial Change(s)
V1.00
10 December
2010
All
- Initial Version
V1.01
22 February
2011
All
- Added clarification to open-load mechanism in over-current conditions
V1.02
04 May
2011
All
- Improved clarification to open-load mechanism in over-current conditions
- added Note on considering settling time tHS_settling to HSDR and HSCR
register description
NOTE
The information given in this section are preliminary and should be used as
a guide only. Values in this section cannot be guaranteed by Freescale and
are subject to change without notice.
13.1
Introduction
The HSDRV module provides two high-side drivers typically used to drive LED or resistive loads (typical
240 Ohm). The incandescent or halogen lamp is not considered here as a possible load.
13.1.1
Features
The HSDRV module includes two independent high-side drivers with common high power supply. Each
driver has the following features:
•
Selectable gate control of high-side switches: HSDR[1:0] register bits or PWM or timer channels.
•
High-load resistance open-load detection when driver enabled and turned off.
•
Over-current protection for the drivers, while they are enabled, including:
–
Interrupt flag generation.
–
Driver shutdown.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
397
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.1.2
Modes of Operation
The HSDRV module behaves as follows in the system power modes:
1. CPU run mode
The activation of the HSE0 or HSE1 bits enable the related high-side driver. The gate is controlled
by the selected source.
2. CPU stop mode
During stop mode operation the high-side drivers are shut down, i.e. the high-side drivers are
disabled and their gates are turned off The bits in the data register which control the gates (HSDRx)
are cleared automatically. After returning from stop mode the drivers are re-enabled and the state
of the HSE bits are automatically set If the data register bits (HSDRx) were chosen as source in
PIM module, then the respective high-side driver gates stays turned off until the software sets the
associated bit in the data register (HSDRx). When the timer or PWM were chosen as source, the
respective high-side driver gate is controlled by the timer or PWM without further handling When
it is required that the gate stays turned off after the stop mode for this case (PWM or timer), the
software must take the appropriate action to turn off the gate before entering stop mode.
13.1.3
Block Diagram
Figure 13-1 shows a block diagram of the HSDRV module. The module consists of a control and an output
stage. Internal functions can be routed to control the high-side drivers. See PIM chapter for routing options.
Figure 13-1. HSDRV Block Diagram
HS0 Open Load
HS0
HS0 control
HS0 Over Current
VSUPHS
HS1 Over Current
HS1 control
HS1 Open Load
HS1
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
398
Freescale Semiconductor
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.2
External Signal Description
Table 13-2 shows the external pins of associated with the HSDRV module.
Table 13-2. HSDRV Signal Properties
Name
Function
HS0
High-side driver output 0
disabled (off)
HS1
High-side driver output 1
disabled (off)
High Voltage Power Supply for both
high side drivers
disabled (off)
VSUPHS
13.2.1
Reset State
HS0, HS1— High Side Driver Pins
Outputs of the two high-side drivers are intended to drive LEDs or resistive loads.
13.2.2
VSUPHS — High Side Driver Power Pin
Common high power supply for both high-side driver pins. This pin is set for high voltage power supply.
This pin must be connected to the main power supply source, also connected to VSUP, with the appropriate
guard on board (like for example protection diodes).
13.2.3
VSSXHS — High Side Driver Ground Pin
Due to the low ohmic connection requirement of ESD clamp one VSS pin is needed to stay near high side
driver to achieve the best performance of ESD protection.
So here VSSXHS pin is used to make the ground connection for high side driver as low ohmic as possible.
13.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of all registers accessible in the HSDRV module.
13.3.1
Module Memory Map
A summary of registers associated with the HSDRV module is shown in Table 13-3. Detailed descriptions
of the registers and bits are given in the following sections.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
399
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
NOTE
Register Address = Module Base Address + Address Offset, where the Module Base Address is defined at
the MCU level and the Address Offset is defined at the module level.
Table 13-3. Register Summary
Address Offset
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
HSDR1
HSDR0
HSOLE1
HSOLE0
HSE1
HSE0
0x0000
HSDR
R
W
0
0
0
0
0x0001
HSCR
R
W
0
0
0
0
0x0002
Reserved
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0003
Reserved
R
Reserved
W
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0x0004
Reserved
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0005
HSSR
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
HSOL1
HSOL0
0x0006
HSIE
R
HSOCIE
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0007
HSIF
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
HSOCIF1
HSOCIF0
0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
400
Freescale Semiconductor
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.3.2
Register Definition
13.3.3
Port HS Data Register (HSDR)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0000
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
HSDR1
HSDR0
W
Altern.
Read
Function
—
—
—
—
—
—
OC2
OC2
—
—
—
—
—
—
PWM2
PWM2
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 13-2. Port HS Data Register (HSDR)
1
Read: Anytime The data source (HSDRx or alternate function) depends on the HSE control bit settings.
Write: Anytime
2 See PIM chapter for detailed routing description.
Table 13-4. PTHS Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1-0
HSDRx
Port HS Data Bits—Data registers or routed timer outputs or routed PWM outputs
These register bits can be used to control the high-side driver gates if selected as control source. See PIM section
for routing details.
If the associated HSEx bit is set to 0, a read returns the value of the Port HS Data Register (HSDRx).
If the associated HSEx bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the selected as gate control source.
When entering in STOP mode the Port HS Data Register (HSDRx) is cleared.
0 High-side driver gate is turned off
1 High-side driver gate is turned on
NOTE
After enabling the high-side driver with the HSEx bit in HSCR
register, the user must wait a minimum settling time tHS_settling
before turning on the high-side driver gate.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
401
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.3.4
HSDRV Configuration Register (HSCR)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0001
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
HSOLE1
HSOLE0
HSE1
HSE0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 13-3. HSDRV Configuration Register (HSCR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 13-5. HSCR Register Field Descriptions
Field
3-2
HSOLE
Description
HSDRV High-Load Resistance Open-Load Detection Enable
These bits enable the measurement function to detect an open-load condition on the related high-side driver
operating on high-load resistance loads. If the high-side driver is enabled and its gate is not being driven by the
selected source, then the high-load resistance detection circuit is activated when this bit is set to ‘1’.
0 high-load resistance open-load detection is disabled
1 high-load resistance open-load detection is enabled
1-0
HSE
HSDRV Enable —
These bits control the power supply of the related high-side driver circuit.
0 High-side driver supply is disabled
1 High-side driver supply is enabled
NOTE
After enabling the high-side driver (write 1 to HSEx) a settling
time tHS_settling is required before the high-side driver gate is
allowed to be turned on (e.g. by writing HSDRx bits).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
402
Freescale Semiconductor
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.3.5
Reserved Register
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0003
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
R
W
Reset
= Unimplemented
Figure 13-4. Reserved Register
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in special mode
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in special
mode can alter the module’s functionality.
Table 13-6. Reserved Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7-0
These reserved bits are used for test purposes. Writing to these bits can alter the module functionality.
Reserved
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
403
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.3.6
HSDRV Status Register (HSSR)
Access: User read1
Module Base + 0x0005
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HSOL1
HSOL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented
Figure 13-5. HSDRV Status Register (HSSR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: No Write
Table 13-7. HSSR - Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1-0
HSOLx
HSDRV Open-Load Status Bit
This bit reflects the open-load condition status on the related pin. A delay of tHLROLDT must be granted after
enabling the high-load resistance open-load detection function in order to read valid data.
0 Open-load condition IHS <IHLROLDC
1 Open-load condition IHS ≥IHLROLDC
13.3.7
HSDRV Interrupt Enable Register (HSIE)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0006
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HSOCIE
W
Reset
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 13-6. HSDRV Interrupt Enable Register (HSIE)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 13-8. HSIE Register Field Descriptions
Field
7
HSOCIE
Description
HSDRV Over-Current Interrupt Enable
0 Interrupt request is disabled
1Interrupt will be requested whenever a HSOCIFx flag is set
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
404
Freescale Semiconductor
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.3.8
HSDRV Interrupt Flag Register (HSIF)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0007
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
HSOCIF1
HSOCIF0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 13-7. HSDRV Interrupt Flag Register (HSIF)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Write 1 to clear, writing 0 has no effect
Table 13-9. HSIF Register Field Descriptions
Field
1-0
HSOCIFx
Description
HSDRV Over-Current Interrupt Flag
These flags are set to 1 when an over-current event occurs on the related high-side driver (IHS > ILIMHSX).
While set the related high-side driver gate is turned off.
Once these flags are cleared, the related gate is again driven by the source selected in PIM module.
0No over-current event occurred since last clearing of flag
1An over-current event occurred since last clearing of flag
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
405
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.4
13.4.1
Functional Description
General
The HSDRV module provides two high-side drivers able to drive LED or resistive loads. The driver gate
can be controlled directly through register bits or alternatively by dedicated timer or PWM channels. See
PIM section for routing details.
Both drivers feature open-load and over-current detection described in the following sub-sections.
13.4.2
Open Load Detection
A “High-load resistance Open Load Detection” can be enabled for each driver by setting the corresponding
HSEOLx bit (refer to Section 13.3.4, “HSDRV Configuration Register (HSCR)”. This detection will only
be executed when the driver is enabled and it is not being driven (HSDRx = 0). To detect an open-load
condition a small current IHVOLDC will flow through the load. Then if the driving pin HSx stays at high
voltage, which is higher than a threshold set by the internal Schmitt trigger, then an open load will be
detected (no load or load >300K under typical power supply) for the corresponding high-side driver and it
can be observed that the current in the pin is IHS <IHLROLDC.
An open-load condition is flagged with bits HSOL0 and HSOL1 in the HSDRV Status Register (HSSR).
13.4.3
Over-Current Detection
Each high-side driver has an over-current detection while enabled with a current threshold of ILIMHSX.
If over-current is detected the related interrupt flag (HSOCIF1 or HSOCIF0) is set in the HSDRV Interrupt
Flag Register (HSIF). As long as the over-current interrupt flag remains set, the related high-side driver
gate is turned off to protect the circuit.
NOTE
Although the gate is turned off by the over-current detection, the open-load
detection might not be active. Open-load detection is only active if the
selected source (e.g. PWM, Timer, HSDRx) for the high-side driver is
turned off.
Clearing the related over-current interrupt flag returns back the control of the gate to the selected source
in the PIM module.
13.4.4
Interrupts
This section describes the interrupt generated by HSDRV module. The interrupt is only available in CPU
run mode. Entering and exiting CPU stop mode has no effect on the interrupt flags.
The HSDRV interrupt vector is named in Table 13-10. Vector addresses and interrupt priorities are defined
at MCU level.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
406
Freescale Semiconductor
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
13.4.4.1
HSDRV Over Current Interrupt (HSOCI)
Table 13-10. HSDRV Interrupt Sources
Module Interrupt Source
Module Internal Interrupt Source
Local Enable
HSDRV Interrupt (HSI)
HSDRV Over-Current Interrupt (HSOCI)
HSOCIE = 1
If a high-side driver over-current event is detected the related interrupt flag HSOCIFx asserts. Depending
on the setting of the HSDRV Error Interrupt Enable (HSOCIE) bit an interrupt is requested.
13.5
Application Information
13.5.1
Use Cases
This section describes the common uses of the high-side driver and how should it be configured. It also
describes its dependencies with other modules and their configuration for the specific use case.The
high-side driver performance parameters are listed in the electrical parameter table. VSUPHS can vary
between 7V and 18V.
13.5.1.1
Controlling directly the High Side Driver
13.5.1.2
Using the High Side Driver with a timer
13.5.1.3
Using the High Side Driver with PWM
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
407
High-Side Drivers - HSDRV (S12HSDRV1)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
408
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 14
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
Table 14-1. Revision History Table
Rev. No.
Date
(Item No.) (Submitted By)
Sections
Affected
Substantial Change(s)
V01.00
10 December
2010
All
-Initial Version
V1.01
22 February
2011
All
- Added clarification to open-load mechanism in over-current conditions
V1.02
12 April
2011
All
- improved clarification to open-load mechanism in over-current conditions
- corrected typos
V1.03
3 April
2011
Register
Descriptions for
LSDR and
LSCR
- added Note on considering settling time tLS_settling to LSDR and LSCR
register description
- added Note on how to disable the low-side driver to LSDR register
description
NOTE
The information given in this section are preliminary and should be used as
a guide only. Values in this section cannot be guaranteed by Freescale and
are subject to change without notice.
14.1
Introduction
The LSDRV module provides two low-side drivers typically used to drive inductive loads (relays).
14.1.1
Features
The LSDRV module includes two independent low side drivers with common current sink. Each driver has
the following features:
• Selectable gate control of low-side switches: LSDRx register bits, PWM or timer channels. See
PIM chapter for routing options.
• Open-load detection while enabled
– While driver off: selectable high-load resistance open-load detection
• Over-current protection with shutdown and interrupt while enabled
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
409
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
•
Active clamp to protect the device against over-voltage when the power transistor that is driving an
inductive load (relay) is turned off.
14.1.2
Modes of Operation
The LSDRV module behaves as follows in the system operating modes:
1. Run mode
The activation of the LSE0 or LSE1 bits enable the related low-side driver. The gate is controlled
by the selected source in the Port Integration Module (see PIM chapter).
2. Stop mode
During stop mode operation the low-side drivers are shut down, i.e. the low-side drivers are
disabled and their gates are turned off. The bits in the data register which control the gates (LSDRx)
are cleared automatically. After returning from stop mode the drivers are re-enabled. If the data
register bits (LSDRx) were chosen as source in PIM module, then the respective low-side driver
gates stays turned off until the software sets the associated bit in the data register (LSDRx). When
the timer or PWM were chosen as source, the respective low-side driver gate is controlled by the
timer or PWM without further handling. When it is required that the gate stays turned off after the
stop mode for this case (PWM or timer), the software must take the appropriate action to turn off
the gate before entering stop mode.
14.1.3
Block Diagram
Figure 14-1 shows a block diagram of the LSDRV module. The module consists of a control and an output
stage. Internal functions can be routed to control the low-side drivers. See PIM chapter for routing options.
Figure 14-1. LSDRV Block Diagram
LS0 control
LS1 control
Low Side Driver Control
LS0
LSGND
LS1
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
410
Freescale Semiconductor
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.2
External Signal Description
Table 14-2 shows the external pins of associated with the LSDRV module.
Table 14-2. LSDRV Signal Properties
Name
Function
LS0
Low-side driver output 0
disabled (off)
LS1
Low-side driver output 1
disabled (off)
LSGND
14.2.1
Reset State
Low-side driver ground pin
—
LS0, LS1— Low Side Driver Pins
Outputs of the two low-side drivers intended to drive inductive loads (relays).
14.2.2
LSGND — Low Side Driver Ground Pin
Common current sink for both low-side driver pins. This pin should be connected on-board to the common
ground.
14.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of all registers accessible in the LSDRV module.
14.3.1
Module Memory Map
A summary of registers associated with the LSDRV module is shown in Table 14-3. Detailed descriptions
of the registers and bits are given in the following sections.
NOTE
Register Address = Module Base Address + Address Offset, where the
Module Base Address is defined at the MCU level and the Address Offset is
defined at the module level.
Table 14-3. Register Summary
Address Offset
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
LSOLE1
Reserved
0x0000
LSDR
R
W
0
0
0
0
0x0001
LSCR
R
W
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0x0002
Reserved
R
Reserved
W
1
Bit 0
LSDR1
LSDR0
LSOLE0
LSE1
LSE0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
411
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
Table 14-3. Register Summary
Address Offset
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0x0003
Reserved
R
Reserved
W
0x0004
Reserved
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0005
LSSR
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSOL1
LSOL0
0x0006
LSIE
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0007
LSIF
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
LSOCIF1
LSOCIF0
LSOCIE
0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
412
Freescale Semiconductor
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.3.2
Register Definition
14.3.3
Port LS Data Register (LSDR)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0000
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
LSDR1
LSDR0
OC2
OC2
PWM2
PWM2
0
0
W
Altern.
Read
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-2. Port LS Data Register (LSDR)
1
Read: Anytime. The data source (LSDRx or alternate function) depends on the LSE control bit settings.
Write: Anytime
2 See PIM chapter for detailed routing description.
Table 14-4. LSDR Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1-0
LSDR
Port LS Data Bits—Data registers or routed timer outputs or routed PWM outputs
These register bits can be used to control the low-side drivers gates if selected as control source. See PIM section
for routing details.
If the associated LSE bit is set to 0, a read returns the value of the Port LS Data Register (LSDRx).
If the associated LSE bit is set to 1, a read returns the value of the selected control source in PIM module.
When entering in STOP mode the Port LS Data Register (LSDR) is cleared.
0 Low-side driver gate is turned off
1 Low-side driver gate is turned on
NOTE
After enabling the low-side driver with the LSEx bit in LSCR
register, the user must wait a minimum settling time tLS_settling
before turning on the low-side driver gate.
NOTE
The low-side driver gate should be turned off (e.g. LDSRx=0 or
OC=0 or PWM=0) and the load should be de-energized before
going into Stop Mode or disabling the low-side driver with the
LSEx bits.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
413
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.3.4
LSDRV Configuration Register (LSCR)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0001
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
LSOLE1
LSOLE0
LSE1
LSE0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-3. LSDRV Configuration Register (LSCR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 14-5. LSCR Register Field Descriptions
Field
3-2
LSOLEx
Description
LSDRV High-Load Resistance Open-Load Detection Enable
These bits enable the measurement function to detect an open-load condition on the related low-side driver
operating on high-load resistance loads. If the low-side driver is enabled and its gate is not being driven by the
selected source, then the high-load resistance detection circuit is activated when this bit is set to ‘1’.
0 high-load resistance open-load detection is disabled
1 high-load resistance open-load detection is enabled
1-0
LSEx
LSDRV Enable —
These bits control the power supply of the related low-side driver circuit.
0 Low-side driver is in shutdown mode. None of the functionalities is available.
1 Low-side driver is enabled.
NOTE
After enabling the low-side driver (write “1” to LSEx) a settling
time tLS_settling is required before the low-side driver gate is
allowed to be turned on (e.g. by writing LSDRx bits).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
414
Freescale Semiconductor
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.3.5
Reserved Register
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0002
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reset
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
F
R
W
After de-assert of System Reset a value is automatically loaded from the Flash Memory
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-4. Reserved Register
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in special mode
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in special
mode can alter the module’s functionality.
Table 14-6. Reserved Register
Field
Description
7-0
Reserved
These reserved bits are used for test purposes. Writing to these bits can alter the module functionality.
1-0
TRLS0OC
Trimming Bit
Threshold trimming for both LS1 and LS0 over-current comparators.
The trimming is coded representing an one-hot coding 0 -> “0001”, 1 -> “0010”, 2-> “0100” and 3 -> “1000”.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
415
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.3.6
Reserved Register
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0003
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reset
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-5. Reserved Register
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in special mode
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in special
mode can alter the module’s functionality.
Table 14-7. Reserved Register
Field
Description
7-0
These reserved bits are used for test purposes. Writing to these bits can alter the module functionality.
Reserved
7
NOCOFF
No Over-Current Turn Off
For test proposes the over-current gate protection for both gates can be turned off. This bit can be written in special
mode only.
0 Over-current gate protection enabled
1 Over-current gate protection disabled
6
Shift Active Clamp
SHIFTACT For test proposes the active clamp threshold voltage can be shifted. This bit can be written in special mode only.
0 No active clamp voltage shift
1 Active clamp voltage shift
1-0
LSOCx
LSDRV Over-current Status Bits
These bits show the over-current status of each driver. These bits are useful only with the over-current shutdown
disabled.
0 No over-current condition
1 over-current condition
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
416
Freescale Semiconductor
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.3.7
LSDRV Status Register (LSSR)
Access: User read1
Module Base + 0x0005
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSOL1
LSOL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-6. LSDRV Status Register (LSSR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: No Write
Table 14-8. LSSR - Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1-0
LSOLx
LSDRV Open-Load Status Bits
These bits reflect the open-load condition status on each driver related pin.
This open-load monitoring will only be active if the detection function is enabled (bits LSOLEx) and the
corresponding low-side driver is enabled and turned off.
A delay of tHLROLDT must be granted after enabling the high-load resistance open-load detection function in
order to read valid data.
0 Open-load condition ILS < IHLROLDC
1 Open-load condition ILS ≥ IHLROLDC
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
417
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.3.8
LSDRV Interrupt Enable Register (LSIE)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0006
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSOCIE
W
Reset
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-7. LSDRV Interrupt Enable Register (LSIE)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 14-9. LSIE Register Field Descriptions
Field
7
LSOCIE
Description
LSDRV Error Interrupt Enable
0 Interrupt request is disabled
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever a LSOCIFx flag is set
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
418
Freescale Semiconductor
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.3.9
LSDRV Interrupt Flag Register (LSIF)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0007
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
LSOCIF1
LSOCIF0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 14-8. LSDRV Interrupt Flag Register (LSIF)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Write 1 to clear, writing 0 has no effect
Table 14-10. LSIF Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1-0
LSOCIFx
LSDRV Over-Current Interrupt Flag
These flags are set to 1 when an over-current event occurs on the related low-side driver (ILS > ILIMLSX). While
set the related low-side driver gate is turned off.
Once these flags are cleared, the related gate is again driven by the source selected in PIM module.
0 No over-current event occurred since last clearing of flag
1 An over-current event occurred since last clearing of flag
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
419
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
14.4
14.4.1
Functional Description
General
The LSDRV module provides two low-side drivers able to drive inductive loads (relays). The driver gate
can be controlled directly through register bits or alternatively by dedicated timer or PWM channels. See
PIM section for routing details.
Both drivers feature an open-load and over-current detection described in the following sub-sections. In
addition to this an active clamp (for driving relays) is protecting each driver stage. The active clamp will
turn on a low-side FET if the voltage on a pin exceeds VCLAMP when the gate is turned off.
14.4.2
Open-Load Detection
A “High-load resistance Open Load Detection” can be enabled for each driver by setting the corresponding
LSOLEx bit (refer to Section 14.3.4, “LSDRV Configuration Register (LSCR)”. This detection will only
be executed when the driver is enabled and it is not being driven (LSDRx = 0). That is because the
measurement point is between the load and the driver, and the current should not go through the driver. To
detect an open-load condition the voltage will be observed at the output from the driver. Then if the driving
pin LSx stays at low voltage which is approximately LSGND, there is no load for the corresponding
low-side driver.
An open-load condition is flagged with bits LSOL0 and LSOL1 in the LSDRV Status Register (LSSR).
14.4.3
Over-Current Detection
Each low-side driver has an over-current detection while enabled with a current threshold of ILIMLSX.
If over-current is detected the related interrupt flag (LSOCIF1 or LSOCIF0) is set in the LSDRV Interrupt
Flag Register (LSIF). As long as the over-current interrupt flag remains set the related low-side driver gate
is turned off to protect the circuit.
NOTE
Although the gate is turned off by the over-current detection, the open-load
detection might not be active. Open-load detection is only active if the
selected source (e.g. PWM, Timer, LSDRx) for the low-side driver is turned
off.
Clearing the related over-current interrupt flag returns back the control of the gate to the selected source
in the PIM module.
14.4.4
Interrupts
This section describes the interrupt generated by LSDRV module. The interrupt is only available in CPU
run mode. Entering and exiting CPU stop mode has no effect on the interrupt flags.
The LSDRV interrupt vector is named in Table 14-11. Vector addresses and interrupt priorities are defined
at MCU level.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
420
Freescale Semiconductor
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
Table 14-11. LSDRV Interrupt Sources
Module Interrupt Source
Module Internal Interrupt Source
Local Enable
LSDRV Interrupt (LSI)
LSDRV Over-Current Interrupt (LSOCI)
LSOCIE=1
14.4.4.1
LSDRV Over Current Interrupt (LSOCI)
If a low-side driver over-current event is detected the related interrupt flag LSOCIFx asserts. Depending
on the setting of the LSDRV Error Interrupt Enable (LSOCIE) bit an interrupt is requested.
14.5
Application Information
14.5.1
Use Cases
This section describes the common uses of the low-side driver and how should it be configured. It also
describes its dependencies with other modules and their configuration for the specific use case.
14.5.1.1
Controlling directly the Low Side Driver
14.5.1.2
Using the Low Side Driver with a timer
14.5.1.3
Using the Low Side Driver with PWM
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
421
Low-Side Drivers - LSDRV (S12LSDRV1)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
422
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 15
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
Table 15-1. Revision History Table
Rev. No.
Date
(Item No.) (Submitted By)
V01.00
10 Dec 2010
Sections
Affected
All
Substantial Change(s)
- Initial Version
NOTE
The information given in this section are preliminary and should be used as
a guide only. Values in this section cannot be guaranteed by Freescale and
are subject to change without notice.
15.1
Introduction
The LIN (Local Interconnect Network) bus pin provides a physical layer for single-wire communication
in automotive applications. The LIN Physical Layer is designed to meet the LIN Physical Layer 2.1
specification.
15.1.1
Features
Module LIN Physical Layer includes the following distinctive features:
• Compliant with LIN physical layer 2.1
• Standby mode with glitch-filtered wake-up.
• Slew rate selection optimized for the baud rates: 10.4kBit/s, 20kBit/s and Fast Mode (up to
250kBit/s).
• Selectable pull-up of 30kΩ or 330kΩ (in Shutdown Mode, 330kΩ only)
• Current limitation by LIN Bus pin rising and falling edges
• Over-current protection with transmitter shutdown
The LIN transmitter is a low side MOSFET with current limitation and over-current transmitter shutdown.
A selectable internal pull-up resistor with a serial diode structure is integrated, so no external pull-up
components are required for the application in a slave node. To be used as a master node, an external
resistor of 1kΩ must be placed in parallel between VSUP and the LIN Bus pin, with a diode between
VSUP and the resistor. The fall time from recessive to dominant and the rise time from dominant to
recessive is selectable and controlled to guarantee communication quality and reduce EMC emissions..
The symmetry between both slopes is guaranteed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
423
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.1.2
Modes of Operation
There are four modes the LIN Physical Layer can operate in:
1. Shutdown Mode
The LIN Physical Layer is fully disabled. No wake-up functionality is available. The internal
pull-up resistor is replaced by a high ohmic one (330kΩ) to maintain the LIN Bus pin in the
recessive state.
2. Normal Mode
The full functionality is available. Both receiver and transmitter are enabled.
3. Receive Only Mode
The transmitter is disabled and the receiver is running in full performance mode. When the LIN
Physical Layer has entered this mode due to an over-current condition, it can only exit it once the
condition is gone.
4. Standby Mode
The transmitter of the physical layer is disabled. Like in the Normal and Receive Only Modes, the
internal pull-up resistor can be selected (30kΩ or 330kΩ). The receiver enters a low power mode
and is only able to pass wake-up events to the SCI (Serial Communication Interface).If the LIN Bus
pin is driven with a dominant level longer than tWUFR followed by a rising edge, the LIN Physical
Layer will send a wake-up pulse to the SCI, which will request a wake-up interrupt (This feature
is only available if the LIN Physical Layer is routed to the SCI).
15.1.3
Block Diagram
Figure 15-1 shows the block diagram of the LIN Physical Layer. The module consists of a receiver, a
transmitter with slope control, a temperature and a current sensor as well as a control block.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
424
Freescale Semiconductor
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
Figure 15-1. LIN Physical Layer Block Diagram
chip edge
VSUP
LIN Control
IP-BUS
Pull up Control
R
LIN
Receiver
LPRXD
Transmitter
Over-current
detection
A
LPTXD
Slope
Control
LGND
C
ADC (special
channel)
220pF
recommended
NOTE
The external 220pF capacitance between LIN and LGND is strongly
recommended for correct operation.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
425
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.2
External Signal Description
Table 15-2 shows all signals of LIN Physical Layer associated with pins.
Table 15-2. Signal Properties
Name
Reset State
Pull Up
LIN Bus pin
—
pull up
(LPPUE=1)
LGND
LIN Ground
(Supply)
(Supply)
VSUP
Positive power supply
(Supply)
(Supply)
LIN
Function
NOTE
Check device level specification for connectivity of the signals.
15.2.1
LIN — LIN Bus Pin
This pad is connected to the single-wire LIN data bus.
15.2.2
LGND — LIN Ground Pin
This pin is the device LIN ground connection. It is used to sink currents related to the LIN Bus pin. A
de-coupling capacitor external to the chip (typically 220 pF, X7R ceramic) between LIN and LGND can
further improve the quality of this ground and filter noise.
15.2.3
VSUP — Positive Power Supply
External power supply to the chip.See device specification.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
426
Freescale Semiconductor
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides a detailed description of all registers accessible in LIN Physical Layer.
15.3.1
Module Memory Map
A summary of the registers associated with the LIN Physical Layer module is shown in Table 15-3.
Detailed descriptions of the registers and bits are given in the subsections that follow.
NOTE
Register Address = Module Base Address + Address Offset, where the
Module Base Address is defined at the MCU level and the Address Offset is
defined at the module level.
.
Table 15-3. Register Summary
Address Offset
Register Name
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
LPE
RXONLY
LPWUE
LPPUE
Reserved
Reserved
LPSLR1
LPSLR0
0x0000
LPDR
R
W
0
0
0
0
0x0001
LPCR
R
W
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
LPOC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0002
Reserved
R
Reserved
W
0x0003
LPSLR
R LPSLRWD
W
0x0004
Reserved
R
Reserved
W
0x0005
LPSR
R
W
0x0006
LPIE
R
W
0x0007
LPIF
R
W
0
LPOCIE
0
LPDR1
LPDR0
LPOCIF
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
427
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section describes all the LIN Physical Layer registers and their individual bits.
15.3.2.1
Port LP Data Register (LPDR)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + Address 0x0000
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
1
LPDR1
1
0
LPDR0
1
= Unimplemented
Figure 15-2. Port LP Data Register (LPDR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 15-4. LPDR Fields Description
Field
Description
1
LPDR1
Port LP Data Bit 1
The LIN Physical Layer LPTXD input (see Figure 15-1) can be directly controlled by this register bit. The routing
of the LPTXD input is done in PIM Module, see PIM Block guide for more info.
0
LPDR0
Port LP Data Bit 0
Read-only bit. The LIN Physical Layer LPRXD output state can be read at any time.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
428
Freescale Semiconductor
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.3.2.2
LIN Control Register (LPCR)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + Address 0x0001
R
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
3
2
1
0
LPE
RXONLY
LPWUE
LPPUE
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 15-3. LIN Control Register (LPCR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 15-5. LPCR Fields Description
Field
Description
3
LPE
LIN Enable Bit
0 The LIN Physical Layer is in shutdown mode. None of the functionalities is available, except that the bus line
is held in its recessive state by a high ohmic (330kΩ) resistor.
1 The LIN Physical Layer is not in shutdown mode.
2
RXONLY
Receive Only Mode bit
This bit can be normally written in normal mode.
If an over-current condition occurs it will be set to 1 and it is write protected until the over-current condition is
gone. See mode description for details.
0 The LIN Physical Layer is not in receive only mode.
1 The LIN Physical Layer is in receive only mode.
1
LPWUE
LIN Wake-Up Enable
0 The wake-up feature is disabled when being in standby mode.
1 The wake-up feature is enabled when being in standby mode.
0
LPPUE
LIN Pull-Up Enable
0 The pull-up resistor is high ohmic (330kΩ).
1 If LPE=1, the pull-up resistor is the one specified in the LIN specification (30kΩ).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
429
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.3.2.3
Reserved Register
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + Address 0x0002
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
= Unimplemented
Figure 15-4. LIN Test register
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in special mode
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in special
mode can alter the module’s functionality.
Table 15-6. Reserved Register Fields Description
Field
Description
7-0
Reserved
15.3.2.4
These reserved bits are used for test purposes. Writing to these bits can alter the module functionality.
LIN Slew Rate Register (LPSLR)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + Address 0x0003
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
LPSLRWD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
1
0
LPSLR1
LPSLR0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 15-5. LIN Slew Rate Register (LPSLR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Only when LPSLRWD is 0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
430
Freescale Semiconductor
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
Table 15-7. LPSLR Fields Description
7
LPSLRWD
Slew-Rate Write Disable
This bit indicates that writes to the slew rate register have no effect due to synchronization. It is set after a write
to the LPSLR bits, and will remain set until the LPSLR value is synchronized.
1 Writes to the LPSLR bits are disabled
0 Writes to the LPSLR bits are enabled
1-0
LPSLR[1:0]
Slew-Rate Bit
Please see section Section 15.4.2, “Slew Rate Selection for details on how the slew rate control works.
00 Normal Slew Rate (optimized for 20kBit/s).
01 Slow Slew Rate (optimized for 10.4kBit/s).
10 Fast Mode Slew Rate (up to 250kBit/s). This mode is not compliant with the LIN Protocol(LIN electrical
characteristics like duty cycles, reference levels, etc. are not fulfilled). It is only meant to be used for fast data
transmission. Please refer to section Section 15.4.2.2, “Fast Mode for more details on fast mode.Please note
that an external pull-up stronger than 1kΩ might be necessary for the range 100kbit/s to 250kBit/s.
11 Reserved.
Please note that this register is writable only when LPSLRWD is inactive.
15.3.2.5
Reserved Register
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + Address 0x0004
R
W
Reset
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
= Unimplemented
Figure 15-6. Reserved Register )
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in special mode
NOTE
This reserved register is designed for factory test purposes only, and is not
intended for general user access. Writing to this register when in special
mode can alter the module’s functionality.
Table 15-8. Reserved RegisterFields Description
Field
7-0
Reserved
Description
These reserved bits are used for test purposes. Writing to these bits can alter the module functionality.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
431
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.3.2.6
LIN Status Register (LPSR)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + Address 0x0005
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LPOC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented
Figure 15-7. LIN Status Register (LPSR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Never, writes to this register have no effect
Table 15-9. LPSR Fields Description
Field
Description
0
LPOC
LIN Transmitter Over-Current Status Bit
This read-only bit signals that an over-current condition is present. If there is an over-current condition the LIN
transmitter is shutdown and the transmitted data (if any) lost.
0 No LIN over-current condition.
1 An over-current condition is occurring. The LIN transmitter is disabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
432
Freescale Semiconductor
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.3.2.7
LIN Interrupt Enable Register (LPIE)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + Address 0x0006
7
R
W
Reset
LPOCIE
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 15-8. LIN Interrupt Enable Register (LPIE)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 15-10. LPIE Fields Description
Field
7
LPOCIE
Description
LIN Over-current Interrupt Enable
0 Interrupt request is disabled.
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever LPOCIF bit is set.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
433
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.3.2.8
LIN Interrupt Flags Register (LPIF)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + Address 0x0007
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
LPOCIF
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 15-9. LIN Interrupt Flags Register (LPIF)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Writing ‘1’ sets the flags back, writing a ‘0’ has no effect
Table 15-11. LPIF Fields Description
Field
Description
0
LPOCIF
LIN Transmitter Over-Current Interrupt Flag
LPOCIF is set to 1 when LPOC status bit changes. This flag can only be cleared by writing a 1. Writing a 0 has
no effect. If interrupt requests are enabled (LPOCIE= 1), LPOCIF causes an interrupt request.
0 No change in LPOC status bit.
1 LPOC status bit has changed.
Note: When entering standby mode, LPOCIF is not cleared.
15.4
15.4.1
Functional Description
General
The LIN Physical Layer module implements the physical layer of the LIN interface. This physical layer
can be driven by the SCI (Serial Communication Interface) module, the timer for bit banging or directly
through the LPDR register.
15.4.2
Slew Rate Selection
The slew rate can be selected for EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) optimized operation at 10.4kBit/s
and 20kBit/s as well as at fast baud rate (up to 250kBit/s) for test and programming. The slew rate can be
chosen with the bits LPSLR[1:0] in the LIN Slew Rate Register (LPSLR). The default slew rate
corresponds to 20kBit/s.
Generally, changing the slew rate has an immediate effect on the rising/falling edges of the LIN signal.
However, it is recommended to change the slew rate only in recessive state, and at least 2us before a falling
edge of TXD. If the slew rate is changed less than 2us before a falling edge of TXD, the slew rate change
may be effective only at the second next TXD falling edge.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
434
Freescale Semiconductor
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
NOTE
For 20kBit/s and Fast Mode communication speeds, the corresponding slew
rate MUST be set, otherwise the communication is not guaranteed. For
10.4kBit/s, the 20kBit/s slew rate can be set but the EMC performance will
be worse. The up to 250kBit/s slew rate must be chosen ONLY for fast
mode, not for any of the 10.4kBit/s or 20kBit/s communication speeds.
15.4.2.1
10.4kBit/s and 20kBit/s
When the slew rate is chosen for 10.4kBit/s or 20kBit/s communication, a control loop is activated within
the module to make the rise and fall times of the LIN bus independent on VSUP and the load on the bus.
15.4.2.2
Fast Mode
Choosing this slew rate allows baud rates up to 250kBit/s by having much steeper edges (please refer to
electricals). As for the 10.4kBit/s and 20kBit/s modes, the slope control loop is also engaged. This mode
is used for fast communication only, and the LIN electricals are not supported (e.g.the LIN duty cycles).
Depending on the baud rate, a stronger external pull-up resistance might be necessary. For example, the
classical 1kΩ master resistance is enough to sustain a 100kBit/s communication. However, an external
pull-up stronger than 1kΩ might be necessary to sustain up to 250kBit/s. Which value the external
pull-up should have is let at the appreciation of the customer, depending on the baud rate. The LIN signal
(and therefore the receive LPRXD signal) might not be symmetrical for high baud rates with too high loads
on the bus.
Please note that if the bit time is smaller than the parameter tOCLIM (please refer to electricals), then no
over-current will be reported nor an over-current shutdown will occur. However, the current limitation is
always engaged in case of a failure.
15.4.3
Modes
Figure 15-10 shows the possible mode transitions depending on control bits, stop mode and error
conditions.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
435
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
TX: Transmitter
RX: Receiver
Shutdown
Reset
LPE = 1
and
(RXONLY=1 or LPOC=1)
TX: Off, RX: Off
LIN pull-up: weak
LPE = 0
LPE = 1
LPE = 0
RXONLY=1
or
LPOC=1
Normal
Receive Only
TX: On, RX: On (full perf)
LIN pull-up: strong if LPPUE = 1
weak if LPPUE = 0
STOP
and
RXONLY = 0
and
LPOC=0
RXONLY = 0
and
LPOC=0
TX: Off
RX: On (full perf)
LIN pull-up: strong if LPPUE = 1
weak if LPPUE = 0
STOP
STOP
Standby
STOP
and
(RXONLY=1 or LPOC=1)
TX: Off
RX: On (low power) if LPWUE = 1
Off if LPWUE = 0
LIN pull-up: strong if LPPUE = 1
weak if LPPUE = 0
Figure 15-10. LIN Physical Layer Mode Transitions
15.4.3.1
Shutdown Mode
The LIN Physical Layer is fully disabled. No wake-up functionality is available. The internal pull-up
resistor is replaced by a high ohmic one (330kΩ) to maintain the LIN Bus pin in the recessive state.
Setting LPE at 1 makes the module leave the Shutdown mode to enter the Normal Mode.
Setting LPE at 0 makes the module leave the Normal or Receive Only Modes and go back to Shutdown
Mode.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
436
Freescale Semiconductor
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.4.3.2
Normal Mode
The full functionality is available. Both receiver and transmitter are enabled. Per default (LPPUE = 1), the
internal pull-up resistor is the standard LIN slave specified pull-up (30kΩ). If LPPUE = 0, this resistor is
replaced by a high ohmic one (330kΩ).
If an over-current condition occurs, or if RXONLY is set to 1, the module is leaving the Normal Mode to
enter the Receive Only mode.
If the MCU goes into stop mode, the LIN Physical Layer goes into Standby Mode.
15.4.3.3
Receive Only Mode
This mode has been entered because an over-current condition occurred, or because RXONLY has been
set to 1.The transmitter is disabled in this mode.
If this mode has been entered because of an over-current condition, RXONLY is set to 1 and can not be
cleared till the condition is gone( LPOC=0).
The receiver is running in full performance mode in all cases.
To return to Normal mode it is mandatory to set the RXONLY bit to 0.
Going into stop makes the module leave the Receive Only mode to enter the Standby Mode.
15.4.3.4
Standby Mode with wake-up feature
The transmitter of the physical layer is disabled. Like in the Normal and Receive Only Modes, the internal
pull-up resistor can be selected to be 30kΩ or 330kΩ to maintain the LIN Bus pin in the recessive state.
The receiver enters a low power mode.
If LPWUE is set to 0, no wake up feature is available and the Standby Mode has the same electrical
properties (current consumption, etc.) as the Shutdown Mode. This allows a low-power consumption when
the wake-up feature is not needed.
If LPWUE is set to 1 the receiver is able to pass wake-up events to the SCI (Serial Communication
Interface). If the LIN is receiving a dominant level longer than tWUFR followed by a rising edge, it will
send a pulse to the SCI which generates a wake-up interrupt.
Once the MCU exits the stop mode, the LIN Physical Layer is going back to Normal or Receive Only mode
depending on the status of the bits LPOC and RXONLY.
NOTE
Since the wake-up interrupt is requested by the SCI, no wake-up feature is
available if the SCI is not used. (For example when using with a timer for
bit banging)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
437
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.4.4
Interrupts
The interrupt vector requested by the LIN Physical Layer is listed in Table 15-12. Vector address and
interrupt priority is defined at MCU level.
The module internal interrupt sources are combined into one module interrupt source.
Table 15-12. Interrupt Vectors
Module Interrupt Source
LIN Interrupt (LPI)
15.4.4.1
Module Internal Interrupt
Source
LIN Over-Current Interrupt
(LPOCI)
Local Enable
LPOCIE = 1; available only in Normal Mode
Over-Current Interrupt
The output low side FET (transmitter) is protected against over-current. In case of an over-current
condition occurring within a time frame called tOCLIM starting from a transition on TXD, the current
through the transmitter is limited (the transmitter is not shut down), the transmitted data is lost and the bit
LPOC remains at 0. If an over-current occurs out of this time frame, the transmitter is shut down and the
bit LPOC in the LPSR register is set as long as the condition is present. The inhibition of an over-current
within the time frame tOCLIM is meant to avoid “false” over-current conditions due to charging/discharging
the LIN bus during transition phases.
The bit LPOCIF is set to 1 when the status of LPOC changes and it remains set until it has been cleared
by writing a 1. If the bit LPOCIE is set in the LPIE register, an interrupt will be requested.
As long as LPOC is 1, the transmitter is disable.
NOTE
On entering Standby Mode (stop mode at the device level), the LPOCIF bit
is not cleared.
15.5
15.5.1
Application Information
Over-current handling
In case of an over-current condition, the transmitter is switched off. The transmitter will stay disabled until
the condition is gone. At this moment it is up to the software to activate again the transmitter through the
RXONLY bit.
However, if the over-current occurs within a transition phase, the transmitter is internally limiting the
current but no over-current event will be reported. Indeed, charging/discharging the bus can cause
over-current events at each transition, which should not be reported. The time frame during which an
over-current is not reported is equal to tOCLIM starting from a rising or a falling edge of txd.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
438
Freescale Semiconductor
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
15.5.2
Use Cases
15.5.2.1
LIN Physical Layer standalone
15.5.2.2
LIN Physical Layer with SCI
15.5.2.3
LIN Physical Layer with Timer
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
439
LIN Physical Layer (S12LINPHYV1)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
440
Freescale Semiconductor
Chapter 16
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
Table 16-1. Revision History Table
Rev. No.
(Item No.)
Data
Sections
Affected
Substantial Change(s)
V01.00
15 Dec 2010
all
Initial Version
V02.00
16 Mar 2010
16.3.2.1
16.4.2.1
- added BVLS[1] to support four voltage level
- moved BVHS to register bit 6
16.1
Introduction
The BATS module provides the functionality to measure the voltage of the battery supply pin VSENSE or
of the chip supply pin VSUP.
16.1.1
Features
Either One of the voltage present on the VSENSE or VSUP pin can be routed via an internal divider to the
internal Analog to Digital Converter. Independent of the routing to the Analog to Digital Converter, it is
possible to route one of these voltages to a comparator to generate a low or a high voltage interrupt to alert
the MCU.
16.1.2
Modes of Operation
The BATS module behaves as follows in the system power modes:
1. Run mode
The activation of the VSENSE Level Sense Enable (BSESE=1) or ADC connection Enable
(BSEAE=1) closes the path from the VSENSE pin through the resistor chain to ground and enables
the associated features if selected.
The activation of the VSUP Level Sense Enable (BSUSE=1) or ADC connection Enable
(BSUAE=1) closes the path from VSUP pin through the resistor chain to ground and enables the
associated features if selected.
BSESE takes precedence over BSUSE. BSEAE takes precedence over BSUAE.
2. Stop mode
During stop mode operation the path from the VSENSE pin through the resistor chain to ground is
opened and the low voltage sense features are disabled.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
441
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
During stop mode operation the path from the VSUP pin through the resistor chain to ground is
opened and the low voltage sense features are disabled.
The content of the configuration register is unchanged.
16.1.3
Block Diagram
Figure 16-1 shows a block diagram of the BATS module. See device guide for connectivity to ADC
channel.
Figure 16-1. BATS Block Diagram
VSUP
...
...
VSENSE
BVLC
BVLS[1:0]
BVHS
BVHC
Comparator
BSUSE
BSESE
1
2
BSEAE
BSUAE
1 automatically closed if BSESE and/or BSEAE
is active, open during Stop mode
2 automatically closed if BSUSE and/or BSUAE
is active, open during Stop mode
16.2
to ADC
External Signal Description
This section lists the name and description of all external ports.
16.2.1
VSENSE — Supply (Battery) Voltage Sense Pin
This pin can be connected to the supply (Battery) line for voltage measurements. The voltage present at
this input is scaled down by an internal voltage divider, and can be routed to the internal ADC or to a
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
442
Freescale Semiconductor
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
comparator via an analog multiplexer. The pin itself is protected against reverse battery connections. To
protect the pin from external fast transients an external resistor (RVSENSE_R) is needed for protection.
16.2.2
VSUP — Voltage Supply Pin
This pin is the chip supply. It can be internally connected for voltage measurement. The voltage present at
this input is scaled down by an internal voltage divider, and can be routed to the internal ADC or to a
comparator via an analog multiplexer.
16.3
Memory Map and Register Definition
This section provides the detailed information of all registers for the BATS module.
16.3.1
Register Summary
Figure 16-2 shows the summary of all implemented registers inside the BATS module.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
443
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
NOTE
Register Address = Module Base Address + Address Offset, where the
Module Base Address is defined at the MCU level and the Address Offset is
defined at the module level.
Address Offset
Register Name
0x0000
BATE
Bit 7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
BSUAE
BSUSE
BSEAE
BSESE
BVHC
BVLC
BVHIE
BVLIE
BVHIF
BVLIF
0
BVHS
BVLS[1:0]
W
0x0001
BATSR
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
0x0002
BATIE
R
W
0x0003
BATIF
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
0x0004 - 0x0005
Reserved
0x0006 - 0x0007
Reserved
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
W
R
W
= Unimplemented
Figure 16-2. BATS Register Summary
16.3.2
Register Descriptions
This section consists of register descriptions in address order. Each description includes a standard register
diagram with an associated figure number. Details of register bit and field function follow the register
diagrams, in bit order. Unused bits read back zero.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
444
Freescale Semiconductor
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
16.3.2.1
BATS Module Enable Register (BATE)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0000
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BSUAE
BSUSE
BSEAE
BSESE
0
0
0
1
0
BVHS
BVLS[1:0]
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 16-3. BATS Module Enable Register (BATE)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 16-2. BATE Field Description
Field
6
BVHS
Description
BATS Voltage High Select — This bit selects the trigger level for the Voltage Level High Condition (BVHC).
0 Voltage level VHBI1 is selected
1 Voltage level VHBI2 is selected
5:4
BATS Voltage Low Select — This bit selects the trigger level for the Voltage Level Low Condition (BVLC).
BVLS[1:0]
00 Voltage level VLBI1 is selected
01 Voltage level VLBI2 is selected
10 Voltage level VLBI3 is selected
11 Voltage level VLBI4 is selected
3
BSUAE
BATS VSUP ADC Connection Enable — This bit connects the VSUP pin through the resistor chain to ground
and connects the ADC channel to the divided down voltage. This bit can be set only if the BSEAE bit is cleared.
0 ADC Channel is disconnected
1 ADC Channel is connected
2
BSUSE
BATS VSUP Level Sense Enable — This bit connects the VSUP pin through the resistor chain to ground and
enables the Voltage Level Sense features measuring BVLC and BVHC. This bit can be set only if the BSESE bit
is cleared.
0 Level Sense features disabled
1 Level Sense features enabled
1
BSEAE
BATS VSENSE ADC Connection Enable — This bit connects the VSENSE pin through the resistor chain to
ground and connects the ADC channel to divided down voltage. Setting this bit will clear bit BSUAE .
0 ADC Channel is disconnected
1 ADC Channel is connected
0
BSESE
BATS VSENSE Level Sense Enable — This bit connects the VSENSE pin through the resistor chain to ground
and enables the Voltage Level Sense features measuring BVLC and BVHC.Setting this bit will clear bit BSUSE
0 Level Sense features disabled
1 Level Sense features enabled
NOTE
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
445
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
When opening the resistors path to ground by changing BSESE, BSEAE or
BSUSE, BSUAE then for a time TEN_UNC + two bus cycles the measured
value is invalid. This is to let internal nodes be charged to correct value.
BVHIE, BVLIE might be cleared for this time period to avoid false
interrupts.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
446
Freescale Semiconductor
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
16.3.2.2
BATS Module Status Register (BATSR)
Access: User read only1
Module Base + 0x0001
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BVHC
BVLC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented
Figure 16-4. BATS Module Status Register (BATSR)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Never
Table 16-3. BATSR - Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1
BVHC
BATS Voltage Sense High Condition Bit — This status bit indicates that a high voltage at VSENSE or VSUP,
depending on selection, is present.
0 Vmeasured < VHBI_A (rising edge) or Vmeasured < VHBI_D (falling edge)
1 Vmeasured ≥ VHBI_A (rising edge) or Vmeasured ≥ VHBI_D (falling edge)
0
BVLC
BATS Voltage Sense Low Condition Bit — This status bit indicates that a low voltage at VSENSE or VSUP,
depending on selection, is present.
0 Vmeasured ≥ VLBI_A (falling edge) or Vmeasured ≥ VLBI_D (rising edge)
1 Vmeasured < VLBI_A (falling edge) or Vmeasured < VLBI_D (rising edge)
Figure 16-5. BATS Voltage Sensing
V
VHBI_A
VHBI_D
VLBI_D
VLBI_A
t
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
447
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
16.3.2.3
BATS Interrupt Enable Register (BATIE)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0002
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
BVHIE
BVLIE
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 16-6. BATS Interrupt Enable Register (BATIE)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime
Table 16-4. BATIE Register Field Descriptions
Field
1
BVHIE
Description
BATS Interrupt Enable High — Enables High Voltage Interrupt .
0 No interrupt will be requested whenever BVHIF flag is set .
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever BVHIF flag is set
0
BVLIE
BATS Interrupt Enable Low — Enables Low Voltage Interrupt .
0 No interrupt will be requested whenever BVLIF flag is set .
1 Interrupt will be requested whenever BVLIF flag is set .
16.3.2.4
BATS Interrupt Flag Register (BATIF)
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0003
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
BVHIF
BVLIF
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented
Figure 16-7. BATS Interrupt Flag Register (BATIF)
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Anytime, write 1 to clear
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
448
Freescale Semiconductor
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
Table 16-5. BATIF Register Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1
BVHIF
BATS Interrupt Flag High Detect — The flag is set to 1 when BVHC status bit changes.
0 No change of the BVHC status bit since the last clearing of the flag.
1 BVHC status bit has changed since the last clearing of the flag.
0
BVLIF
BATS Interrupt Flag Low Detect — The flag is set to 1 when BVLC status bit changes.
0 No change of the BVLC status bit since the last clearing of the flag.
1 BVLC status bit has changed since the last clearing of the flag.
16.3.2.5
Reserved Register
Access: User read/write1
Module Base + 0x0006
Module Base + 0x0007
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
R
W
Reset
Figure 16-8. Reserved Register
1
Read: Anytime
Write: Only in special mode
NOTE
These reserved registers are designed for factory test purposes only and are
not intended for general user access. Writing to these registers when in
special mode can alter the module’s functionality.
16.4
16.4.1
Functional Description
General
The BATS module allows measuring voltages on the VSENSE and VSUP pins. The VSENSE pin is
implemented to allow measurement of the supply Line (Battery) Voltage VBAT directly. By bypassing the
device supply capacitor and the external reversed battery protection diode this pin allows to detect
under/over voltage conditions without delay. A series resistor (RVSENSE_R) is required to protect the
VSENSE pin from fast transients.
The voltage at the VSENSE or VSUP pin can be routed via an internal voltage divider to an internal Analog
to Digital Converter Channel. Also the BATS module can be configured to generate a low and high voltage
interrupt based on VSENSE or VSUP. The trigger level of the high and low interrupt are selectable.
In a typical application, the module could be used as follows: The voltage at VSENSE is observed via
usage of the interrupt feature (BSESE=1, BVHIE=1), while the VSUP pin voltage is routed to the ATD to
allow regular measurement (BSUAE=1).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
449
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
16.4.2
Interrupts
This section describes the interrupt generated by the BATS module. The interrupt is only available in CPU
run mode. Entering and exiting CPU stop mode has no effect on the interrupt flags.
To make sure the interrupt generation works properly the bus clock frequency must be higher than the
Voltage Warning Low Pass Filter frequency (fVWLP_filter).
The comparator outputs BVLC and BVHC are forced to zero if the comparator is disabled (configuration
bits BSESE and BSUSE are cleared). If the software disables the comparator during a high or low Voltage
condition (BVHC or BVLC active), then an additional interrupt is generated. To avoid this behavior the
software must disable the interrupt generation before disabling the comparator.
The BATS interrupt vector is named in Table 16-6. Vector addresses and interrupt priorities are defined at
MCU level.
The module internal interrupt sources are combined into one module interrupt signal.
Table 16-6. BATS Interrupt Sources
Module Interrupt Source
BATS Interrupt (BATI)
16.4.2.1
Module Internal Interrupt Source
Local Enable
BATS Voltage Low Condition Interrupt (BVLI)
BVLIE = 1
BATS Voltage High Condition Interrupt (BVHI)
BVHIE = 1
BATS Voltage Low Condition Interrupt (BVLI)
To use the Voltage Low Interrupt the Level Sensing must be enabled (BSESE =1 or BSUSE =1).
If measured when
a) VLBI1 selected with BVLS[1:0] = 0x0
at selected pin Vmeasure < VLBI1_A (falling edge) or Vmeasure < VLBI1_D (rising edge)
or when
b) VLBI2 selected with BVLS[1:0] = 0x1
at selected pin Vmeasure < VLBI2_A (falling edge) or Vmeasure < VLBI2_D (rising edge)
or when
c) VLBI3 selected with BVLS[1:0] = 0x2
at selected pin Vmeasure < VLBI3_A (falling edge) or Vmeasure < VLBI3_D (rising edge)
or when
d) VLBI4 selected with BVLS[1:0] = 0x3
at selected pin Vmeasure < VLBI4_A (falling edge) or Vmeasure < VLBI4_D (rising edge)
then BVLC is set. BVLC status bit indicates that a low voltage at the selected pin is present. The Low
Voltage Interrupt flag (BVLIF) is set to 1 when the Voltage Low Condition (BVLC) changes state . The
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
450
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
Interrupt flag BVLIF can only be cleared by writing a 1. If the interrupt is enabled by bit BVLIE the
module requests an interrupt to MCU (BATI).
16.4.2.2
BATS Voltage High Condition Interrupt (BVHI)
To use the Voltage High Interrupt the Level Sensing must be enabled (BSESE =1 or BSUSE).
If measured when
a) VHBI1 selected with BVHS = 0
at selected pin Vmeasure ≥ VHBI1_A (rising edge) or Vmeasure ≥ VHBI1_D (falling edge)
or when
a) VHBI2 selected with BVHS = 1
at selected pin Vmeasure ≥ VHBI2_A (rising edge) or Vmeasure ≥ VHBI2_D (falling edge)
then BVHC is set. BVHC status bit indicates that a high voltage at the selected pin is present. The High
Voltage Interrupt flag (BVHIF) is set to 1 when a Voltage High Condition (BVHC) changes state. The
Interrupt flag BVHIF can only be cleared by writing a 1. If the interrupt is enabled by bit BVHIE the
module requests an interrupt to MCU (BATI).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
451
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
452
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
453
Supply Voltage Sensor - (BATSV2)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
454
Chapter 17
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.1
Introduction
The FTMRG64K512 module implements the following:
• 64Kbytes of P-Flash (Program Flash) memory
• 512bytes of EEPROM memory
The Flash memory is ideal for single-supply applications allowing for field reprogramming without
requiring external high voltage sources for program or erase operations. The Flash module includes a
memory controller that executes commands to modify Flash memory contents. The user interface to the
memory controller consists of the indexed Flash Common Command Object (FCCOB) register which is
written to with the command, global address, data, and any required command parameters. The memory
controller must complete the execution of a command before the FCCOB register can be written to with a
new command.
CAUTION
A Flash word or phrase must be in the erased state before being
programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within a Flash word or
phrase is not allowed.
The Flash memory may be read as bytes and aligned words. Read access time is one bus cycle for bytes
and aligned words. For misaligned words access, the CPU has to perform twice the byte read access
command. For Flash memory, an erased bit reads 1 and a programmed bit reads 0.
It is possible to read from P-Flash memory while some commands are executing on EEPROM memory. It
is not possible to read from EEPROM memory while a command is executing on P-Flash memory.
Simultaneous P-Flash and EEPROM operations are discussed in Section 17.4.5.
Both P-Flash and EEPROM memories are implemented with Error Correction Codes (ECC) that can
resolve single bit faults and detect double bit faults. For P-Flash memory, the ECC implementation
requires that programming be done on an aligned 8 byte basis (a Flash phrase). Since P-Flash memory is
always read by half-phrase, only one single bit fault in an aligned 4 byte half-phrase containing the byte
or word accessed will be corrected.
17.1.1
Glossary
Command Write Sequence — An MCU instruction sequence to execute built-in algorithms (including
program and erase) on the Flash memory.
EEPROM Memory — The EEPROM memory constitutes the nonvolatile memory store for data.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
455
EEPROM Sector — The EEPROM sector is the smallest portion of the EEPROM memory that can be
erased. The EEPROM sector consists of 4 bytes.
NVM Command Mode — An NVM mode using the CPU to setup the FCCOB register to pass parameters
required for Flash command execution.
Phrase — An aligned group of four 16-bit words within the P-Flash memory. Each phrase includes two
sets of aligned double words with each set including 7 ECC bits for single bit fault correction and double
bit fault detection within each double word.
P-Flash Memory — The P-Flash memory constitutes the main nonvolatile memory store for applications.
P-Flash Sector — The P-Flash sector is the smallest portion of the P-Flash memory that can be erased.
Each P-Flash sector contains 512 bytes.
Program IFR — Nonvolatile information register located in the P-Flash block that contains the Version
ID, and the Program Once field.
17.1.2
17.1.2.1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
P-Flash Features
64 Kbytes of P-Flash memory composed of one 64 Kbyte Flash block divided into 128 sectors of
512 bytes
Single bit fault correction and double bit fault detection within a 32-bit double word during read
operations
Automated program and erase algorithm with verify and generation of ECC parity bits
Fast sector erase and phrase program operation
Ability to read the P-Flash memory while programming a word in the EEPROM memory
Flexible protection scheme to prevent accidental program or erase of P-Flash memory
17.1.2.2
•
Features
EEPROM Features
512 bytes of EEPROM memory composed of one 512 byte Flash block divided into 128 sectors of
4 bytes
Single bit fault correction and double bit fault detection within a word during read operations
Automated program and erase algorithm with verify and generation of ECC parity bits
Fast sector erase and word program operation
Protection scheme to prevent accidental program or erase of EEPROM memory
Ability to program up to four words in a burst sequence
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
456
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.1.2.3
•
•
•
Other Flash Module Features
No external high-voltage power supply required for Flash memory program and erase operations
Interrupt generation on Flash command completion and Flash error detection
Security mechanism to prevent unauthorized access to the Flash memory
17.1.3
Block Diagram
The block diagram of the Flash module is shown in Figure 17-1.
Flash
Interface
Command
Interrupt
Request
Error
Interrupt
Request
16bit
internal
bus
Registers
P-Flash
16Kx39
sector 0
sector 1
Protection
sector 127
Security
Bus
Clock
CPU
Clock
Divider FCLK
Memory
Controller
EEPROM
256x22
sector 0
sector 1
sector 127
Figure 17-1. FTMRG64K512 Block Diagram
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
457
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.2
External Signal Description
The Flash module contains no signals that connect off-chip.
17.3
Memory Map and Registers
This section describes the memory map and registers for the Flash module. Read data from unimplemented
memory space in the Flash module is undefined. Write access to unimplemented or reserved memory space
in the Flash module will be ignored by the Flash module.
CAUTION
Writing to the Flash registers while a Flash command is executing (that is
indicated when the value of flag CCIF reads as ’0’) is not allowed. If such
action is attempted the write operation will not change the register value.
Writing to the Flash registers is allowed when the Flash is not busy
executing commands (CCIF = 1) and during initialization right after reset,
despite the value of flag CCIF in that case (refer to Section 17.6 for a
complete description of the reset sequence).
.
Table 17-1. FTMRG Memory Map
Global Address (in Bytes)
0x0_0000 - 0x0_03FF
1
Size
(Bytes)
1,024
0x0_0400 – 0x0_05FF
512
0x0_4000 – 0x0_7FFF
16,284
Description
Register Space
EEPROM Memory
NVMRES1=1 : NVM Resource area (see Figure 17-2)
See NVMRES description in Section 17.4.3
17.3.1
Module Memory Map
The S12 architecture places the P-Flash memory between global addresses 0x3_0000 and 0x3_FFFF as
shown in Table 17-2.The P-Flash memory map is shown in Figure 17-2.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
458
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
The FPROT register, described in Section 17.3.2.9, can be set to protect regions in the Flash memory from
Table 17-2. P-Flash Memory Addressing
Global Address
Size
(Bytes)
0x3_0000 – 0x3_FFFF
64 K
Description
P-Flash Block
Contains Flash Configuration Field
(see Table 17-3)
accidental program or erase. Three separate memory regions, one growing upward from global address
0x3_8000 in the Flash memory (called the lower region), one growing downward from global address
0x3_FFFF in the Flash memory (called the higher region), and the remaining addresses in the Flash
memory, can be activated for protection. Two separate memory regions, one growing downward from
global address 0x3_FFFF in the Flash memory (called the higher region), and the remaining addresses in
the Flash memory, can be activated for protectionThe Flash memory addresses covered by these
protectable regions are shown in the P-Flash memory map. The higher address region is mainly targeted
to hold the boot loader code since it covers the vector space. Default protection settings as well as security
information that allows the MCU to restrict access to the Flash module are stored in the Flash configuration
field as described in Table 17-3.
Table 17-3. Flash Configuration Field
1
Global Address
Size
(Bytes)
0x3_FF00-0x3_FF07
8
Backdoor Comparison Key
Refer to Section 17.4.6.11, “Verify Backdoor Access Key Command,” and
Section 17.5.1, “Unsecuring the MCU using Backdoor Key Access”
0x3_FF08-0x3_FF0B1
4
Reserved
0x3_FF0C1
1
P-Flash Protection byte.
Refer to Section 17.3.2.9, “P-Flash Protection Register (FPROT)”
0x3_FF0D1
1
EEPROM Protection byte.
Refer to Section 17.3.2.10, “EEPROM Protection Register (EEPROT)”
0x3_FF0E1
1
Flash Nonvolatile byte
Refer to Section 17.3.2.16, “Flash Option Register (FOPT)”
0x3_FF0F1
1
Flash Security byte
Refer to Section 17.3.2.2, “Flash Security Register (FSEC)”
Description
0x3FF08-0x3_FF0F form a Flash phrase and must be programmed in a single command write sequence. Each byte in
the 0x3_FF08 - 0x3_FF0B reserved field should be programmed to 0xFF.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
459
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
P-Flash START = 0x3_0000
Flash Protected/Unprotected Region
32 Kbytes
0x3_8000
0x3_8400
0x3_8800
0x3_9000
Flash Protected/Unprotected Lower Region
1, 2, 4, 8 Kbytes
Protection
Fixed End
0x3_A000
Flash Protected/Unprotected Region
8 Kbytes (up to 29 Kbytes)
Protection
Movable End
0x3_C000
Protection
Fixed End
0x3_E000
Flash Protected/Unprotected Higher Region
2, 4, 8, 16 Kbytes
0x3_F000
0x3_F800
P-Flash END = 0x3_FFFF
Flash Configuration Field
16 bytes (0x3_FF00 - 0x3_FF0F)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
460
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
P-Flash Memory Map
Table 17-4. Program IFR Fields
1
Global Address
Size
(Bytes)
0x0_4000 – 0x0_4007
8
Reserved
0x0_4008 – 0x0_40B5
174
Reserved
0x0_40B6 – 0x0_40B7
2
Version ID1
0x0_40B8 – 0x0_40BF
8
Reserved
0x0_40C0 – 0x0_40FF
64
Program Once Field
Refer to Section 17.4.6.6, “Program Once Command”
Field Description
Used to track firmware patch versions, see Section 17.4.2
Table 17-5. Memory Controller Resource Fields (NVMRES1=1)
Global Address
Size
(Bytes)
0x0_4000 – 0x040FF
256
P-Flash IFR (see Table 17-4)
0x0_4100 – 0x0_41FF
256
Reserved.
0x0_4200 – 0x0_57FF
1
Description
Reserved
0x0_5800 – 0x0_59FF
512
Reserved
0x0_5A00 – 0x0_5FFF
1,536
Reserved
0x0_6000 – 0x0_6BFF
3,072
Reserved
0x0_6C00 – 0x0_7FFF
5,120
Reserved
NVMRES - See Section 17.4.3 for NVMRES (NVM Resource) detail.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
461
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
0x0_4000
P-Flash IFR 1 Kbyte (NVMRES=1)
0x0_4400
Reserved 5k bytes
RAM Start = 0x0_5800
RAM End = 0x0_59FF
Reserved 512 bytes
Reserved 4608 bytes
0x0_6C00
Reserved 5120 bytes
0x0_7FFF
Figure 17-2. Memory Controller Resource Memory Map (NVMRES=1)
17.3.2
Register Descriptions
The Flash module contains a set of 20 control and status registers located between Flash module base +
0x0000 and 0x0013.
In the case of the writable registers, the write accesses are forbidden during Fash command execution (for
more detail, see Caution note in Section 17.3).
A summary of the Flash module registers is given in Figure 17-3 with detailed descriptions in the
following subsections.
Address
& Name
0x0000
FCLKDIV
0x0001
FSEC
0x0002
FCCOBIX
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FDIVLCK
FDIV5
FDIV4
FDIV3
FDIV2
FDIV1
FDIV0
KEYEN1
KEYEN0
RNV5
RNV4
RNV3
RNV2
SEC1
SEC0
0
0
0
0
0
CCOBIX2
CCOBIX1
CCOBIX0
FDIVLD
W
R
W
R
W
Figure 17-3. FTMRG64K512 Register Summary
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
462
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Address
& Name
0x0003
FRSV0
0x0004
FCNFG
0x0005
FERCNFG
0x0006
FSTAT
0x0007
FERSTAT
0x0008
FPROT
0x0009
EEPROT
0x000A
FCCOBHI
0x000B
FCCOBLO
0x000C
FRSV1
0x000D
FRSV2
0x000E
FRSV3
0x000F
FRSV4
0x0010
FOPT
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FDFD
FSFD
DFDIE
SFDIE
MGSTAT1
MGSTAT0
DFDIF
SFDIF
W
R
CCIE
IGNSF
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
0
CCIF
ACCERR
FPVIOL
0
0
MGBUSY
RSVD
0
0
W
R
0
0
W
R
RNV6
FPOPEN
FPHDIS
FPHS1
0
0
FPHS0
FPLDIS
FPLS1
FPLS0
DPS3
DPS2
DPS1
DPS0
W
R
0
DPOPEN
W
R
CCOB15
CCOB14
CCOB13
CCOB12
CCOB11
CCOB10
CCOB9
CCOB8
CCOB7
CCOB6
CCOB5
CCOB4
CCOB3
CCOB2
CCOB1
CCOB0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NV7
NV6
NV5
NV4
NV3
NV2
NV1
NV0
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Figure 17-3. FTMRG64K512 Register Summary (continued)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
463
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Address
& Name
0x0011
FRSV5
0x0012
FRSV6
0x0013
FRSV7
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
W
R
W
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-3. FTMRG64K512 Register Summary (continued)
17.3.2.1
Flash Clock Divider Register (FCLKDIV)
The FCLKDIV register is used to control timed events in program and erase algorithms.
Offset Module Base + 0x0000
7
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
FDIVLD
FDIVLCK
FDIV[5:0]
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-4. Flash Clock Divider Register (FCLKDIV)
All bits in the FCLKDIV register are readable, bit 7 is not writable, bit 6 is write-once-hi and controls the
writability of the FDIV field in normal mode. In special mode, bits 6-0 are writable any number of times
but bit 7 remains unwritable.
CAUTION
The FCLKDIV register should never be written while a Flash command is
executing (CCIF=0).
Table 17-6. FCLKDIV Field Descriptions
Field
7
FDIVLD
Description
Clock Divider Loaded
0 FCLKDIV register has not been written since the last reset
1 FCLKDIV register has been written since the last reset
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
464
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-6. FCLKDIV Field Descriptions (continued)
Field
Description
6
FDIVLCK
Clock Divider Locked
0 FDIV field is open for writing
1 FDIV value is locked and cannot be changed. Once the lock bit is set high, only reset can clear this bit and
restore writability to the FDIV field in normal mode.
5–0
FDIV[5:0]
Clock Divider Bits — FDIV[5:0] must be set to effectively divide BUSCLK down to 1 MHz to control timed events
during Flash program and erase algorithms. Table 17-7 shows recommended values for FDIV[5:0] based on the
BUSCLK frequency. Please refer to Section 17.4.4, “Flash Command Operations,” for more information.
Table 17-7. FDIV values for various BUSCLK Frequencies
BUSCLK Frequency
(MHz)
MIN
1
1
2
17.3.2.2
FDIV[5:0]
2
MAX
BUSCLK Frequency
(MHz)
MIN
1
MAX
FDIV[5:0]
2
1.0
1.6
0x00
16.6
17.6
0x10
1.6
2.6
0x01
17.6
18.6
0x11
2.6
3.6
0x02
18.6
19.6
0x12
3.6
4.6
0x03
19.6
20.6
0x13
4.6
5.6
0x04
20.6
21.6
0x14
5.6
6.6
0x05
21.6
22.6
0x15
6.6
7.6
0x06
22.6
23.6
0x16
7.6
8.6
0x07
23.6
24.6
0x17
8.6
9.6
0x08
24.6
25.6
0x18
9.6
10.6
0x09
10.6
11.6
0x0A
11.6
12.6
0x0B
12.6
13.6
0x0C
13.6
14.6
0x0D
14.6
15.6
0x0E
15.6
16.6
0x0F
BUSCLK is Greater Than this value.
BUSCLK is Less Than or Equal to this value.
Flash Security Register (FSEC)
The FSEC register holds all bits associated with the security of the MCU and Flash module.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
465
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Offset Module Base + 0x0001
7
R
6
5
4
KEYEN[1:0]
3
2
1
RNV[5:2]
0
SEC[1:0]
W
Reset
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-5. Flash Security Register (FSEC)
1
Loaded from IFR Flash configuration field, during reset sequence.
All bits in the FSEC register are readable but not writable.
During the reset sequence, the FSEC register is loaded with the contents of the Flash security byte in the
Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0F located in P-Flash memory (see Table 17-3) as
indicated by reset condition F in Figure 17-5. If a double bit fault is detected while reading the P-Flash
phrase containing the Flash security byte during the reset sequence, all bits in the FSEC register will be
set to leave the Flash module in a secured state with backdoor key access disabled.
Table 17-8. FSEC Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–6
Backdoor Key Security Enable Bits — The KEYEN[1:0] bits define the enabling of backdoor key access to the
KEYEN[1:0] Flash module as shown in Table 17-9.
5–2
RNV[5:2]
Reserved Nonvolatile Bits — The RNV bits should remain in the erased state for future enhancements.
1–0
SEC[1:0]
Flash Security Bits — The SEC[1:0] bits define the security state of the MCU as shown in Table 17-10. If the
Flash module is unsecured using backdoor key access, the SEC bits are forced to 10.
Table 17-9. Flash KEYEN States
1
KEYEN[1:0]
Status of Backdoor Key Access
00
DISABLED
01
DISABLED1
10
ENABLED
11
DISABLED
Preferred KEYEN state to disable backdoor key access.
Table 17-10. Flash Security States
SEC[1:0]
1
Status of Security
00
SECURED
01
SECURED1
10
UNSECURED
11
SECURED
Preferred SEC state to set MCU to secured state.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
466
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
The security function in the Flash module is described in Section 17.5.
17.3.2.3
Flash CCOB Index Register (FCCOBIX)
The FCCOBIX register is used to index the FCCOB register for Flash memory operations.
Offset Module Base + 0x0002
R
7
6
5
4
3
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
CCOBIX[2:0]
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-6. FCCOB Index Register (FCCOBIX)
CCOBIX bits are readable and writable while remaining bits read 0 and are not writable.
Table 17-11. FCCOBIX Field Descriptions
Field
Description
2–0
CCOBIX[1:0]
Common Command Register Index— The CCOBIX bits are used to select which word of the FCCOB register
array is being read or written to. See 17.3.2.11 Flash Common Command Object Register (FCCOB),” for more
details.
17.3.2.4
Flash Reserved0 Register (FRSV0)
This Flash register is reserved for factory testing.
Offset Module Base + 0x000C
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-7. Flash Reserved0 Register (FRSV0)
All bits in the FRSV0 register read 0 and are not writable.
17.3.2.5
Flash Configuration Register (FCNFG)
The FCNFG register enables the Flash command complete interrupt and forces ECC faults on Flash array
read access from the CPU.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
467
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Offset Module Base + 0x0004
7
R
6
5
0
0
CCIE
4
3
2
0
0
IGNSF
1
0
FDFD
FSFD
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-8. Flash Configuration Register (FCNFG)
CCIE, IGNSF, FDFD, and FSFD bits are readable and writable while remaining bits read 0 and are not
writable.
Table 17-12. FCNFG Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
CCIE
Command Complete Interrupt Enable — The CCIE bit controls interrupt generation when a Flash command
has completed.
0 Command complete interrupt disabled
1 An interrupt will be requested whenever the CCIF flag in the FSTAT register is set (see Section 17.3.2.7)
4
IGNSF
Ignore Single Bit Fault — The IGNSF controls single bit fault reporting in the FERSTAT register (see
Section 17.3.2.8).
0 All single bit faults detected during array reads are reported
1 Single bit faults detected during array reads are not reported and the single bit fault interrupt will not be
generated
1
FDFD
Force Double Bit Fault Detect — The FDFD bit allows the user to simulate a double bit fault during Flash array
read operations and check the associated interrupt routine. The FDFD bit is cleared by writing a 0 to FDFD.
0 Flash array read operations will set the DFDIF flag in the FERSTAT register only if a double bit fault is detected
1 Any Flash array read operation will force the DFDIF flag in the FERSTAT register to be set (see
Section 17.3.2.7) and an interrupt will be generated as long as the DFDIE interrupt enable in the FERCNFG
register is set (see Section 17.3.2.6)
0
FSFD
Force Single Bit Fault Detect — The FSFD bit allows the user to simulate a single bit fault during Flash array
read operations and check the associated interrupt routine. The FSFD bit is cleared by writing a 0 to FSFD.
0 Flash array read operations will set the SFDIF flag in the FERSTAT register only if a single bit fault is detected
1 Flash array read operation will force the SFDIF flag in the FERSTAT register to be set (see Section 17.3.2.7)
and an interrupt will be generated as long as the SFDIE interrupt enable in the FERCNFG register is set (see
Section 17.3.2.6)
17.3.2.6
Flash Error Configuration Register (FERCNFG)
The FERCNFG register enables the Flash error interrupts for the FERSTAT flags.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
468
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Offset Module Base + 0x0005
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
DFDIE
SFDIE
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-9. Flash Error Configuration Register (FERCNFG)
All assigned bits in the FERCNFG register are readable and writable.
Table 17-13. FERCNFG Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1
DFDIE
Double Bit Fault Detect Interrupt Enable — The DFDIE bit controls interrupt generation when a double bit fault
is detected during a Flash block read operation.
0 DFDIF interrupt disabled
1 An interrupt will be requested whenever the DFDIF flag is set (see Section 17.3.2.8)
0
SFDIE
Single Bit Fault Detect Interrupt Enable — The SFDIE bit controls interrupt generation when a single bit fault
is detected during a Flash block read operation.
0 SFDIF interrupt disabled whenever the SFDIF flag is set (see Section 17.3.2.8)
1 An interrupt will be requested whenever the SFDIF flag is set (see Section 17.3.2.8)
17.3.2.7
Flash Status Register (FSTAT)
The FSTAT register reports the operational status of the Flash module.
Offset Module Base + 0x0006
7
6
R
5
4
ACCERR
FPVIOL
0
0
0
CCIF
3
2
MGBUSY
RSVD
0
0
1
0
MGSTAT[1:0]
W
Reset
1
0
01
01
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-10. Flash Status Register (FSTAT)
1
Reset value can deviate from the value shown if a double bit fault is detected during the reset sequence (see Section 17.6).
CCIF, ACCERR, and FPVIOL bits are readable and writable, MGBUSY and MGSTAT bits are readable
but not writable, while remaining bits read 0 and are not writable.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
469
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-14. FSTAT Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
CCIF
Command Complete Interrupt Flag — The CCIF flag indicates that a Flash command has completed. The
CCIF flag is cleared by writing a 1 to CCIF to launch a command and CCIF will stay low until command
completion or command violation.
0 Flash command in progress
1 Flash command has completed
5
ACCERR
Flash Access Error Flag — The ACCERR bit indicates an illegal access has occurred to the Flash memory
caused by either a violation of the command write sequence (see Section 17.4.4.2) or issuing an illegal Flash
command. While ACCERR is set, the CCIF flag cannot be cleared to launch a command. The ACCERR bit is
cleared by writing a 1 to ACCERR. Writing a 0 to the ACCERR bit has no effect on ACCERR.
0 No access error detected
1 Access error detected
4
FPVIOL
Flash Protection Violation Flag —The FPVIOL bit indicates an attempt was made to program or erase an
address in a protected area of P-Flash or EEPROM memory during a command write sequence. The FPVIOL
bit is cleared by writing a 1 to FPVIOL. Writing a 0 to the FPVIOL bit has no effect on FPVIOL. While FPVIOL
is set, it is not possible to launch a command or start a command write sequence.
0 No protection violation detected
1 Protection violation detected
3
MGBUSY
2
RSVD
Memory Controller Busy Flag — The MGBUSY flag reflects the active state of the Memory Controller.
0 Memory Controller is idle
1 Memory Controller is busy executing a Flash command (CCIF = 0)
Reserved Bit — This bit is reserved and always reads 0.
1–0
Memory Controller Command Completion Status Flag — One or more MGSTAT flag bits are set if an error
MGSTAT[1:0] is detected during execution of a Flash command or during the Flash reset sequence. See Section 17.4.6,
“Flash Command Description,” and Section 17.6, “Initialization” for details.
17.3.2.8
Flash Error Status Register (FERSTAT)
The FERSTAT register reflects the error status of internal Flash operations.
Offset Module Base + 0x0007
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
DFDIF
SFDIF
0
0
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-11. Flash Error Status Register (FERSTAT)
All flags in the FERSTAT register are readable and only writable to clear the flag.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
470
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-15. FERSTAT Field Descriptions
Field
Description
1
DFDIF
Double Bit Fault Detect Interrupt Flag — The setting of the DFDIF flag indicates that a double bit fault was
detected in the stored parity and data bits during a Flash array read operation or that a Flash array read operation
returning invalid data was attempted on a Flash block that was under a Flash command operation.1 The DFDIF
flag is cleared by writing a 1 to DFDIF. Writing a 0 to DFDIF has no effect on DFDIF.2
0 No double bit fault detected
1 Double bit fault detected or a Flash array read operation returning invalid data was attempted while command
running
0
SFDIF
Single Bit Fault Detect Interrupt Flag — With the IGNSF bit in the FCNFG register clear, the SFDIF flag
indicates that a single bit fault was detected in the stored parity and data bits during a Flash array read operation
or that a Flash array read operation returning invalid data was attempted on a Flash block that was under a Flash
command operation.1 The SFDIF flag is cleared by writing a 1 to SFDIF. Writing a 0 to SFDIF has no effect on
SFDIF.
0 No single bit fault detected
1 Single bit fault detected and corrected or a Flash array read operation returning invalid data was attempted
while command running
1
The single bit fault and double bit fault flags are mutually exclusive for parity errors (an ECC fault occurrence can be either
single fault or double fault but never both). A simultaneous access collision (Flash array read operation returning invalid data
attempted while command running) is indicated when both SFDIF and DFDIF flags are high.
2 There is a one cycle delay in storing the ECC DFDIF and SFDIF fault flags in this register. At least one NOP is required after
a flash memory read before checking FERSTAT for the occurrence of ECC errors.
17.3.2.9
P-Flash Protection Register (FPROT)
The FPROT register defines which P-Flash sectors are protected against program and erase operations.
The (unreserved) bits of the FPROT register are writable with the restriction that the size of the protected
region can only be increased.
During the reset sequence, the FPROT register is loaded with the contents of the P-Flash protection byte
in the Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0C located in P-Flash memory (see Table 17-3)
as indicated by reset condition ‘F’ in . To change the P-Flash protection that will be loaded during the reset
sequence, the upper sector of the P-Flash memory must be unprotected, then the P-Flash protection byte
must be reprogrammed. If a double bit fault is detected while reading the P-Flash phrase containing the
P-Flash protection byte during the reset sequence, the FPOPEN bit will be cleared and remaining bits in
the FPROT register will be set to leave the P-Flash memory fully protected.
Trying to alter data in any protected area in the P-Flash memory will result in a protection violation error
and the FPVIOL bit will be set in the FSTAT register. The block erase of a P-Flash block is not possible
if any of the P-Flash sectors contained in the same P-Flash block are protected.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
471
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-16. FPROT Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
FPOPEN
Flash Protection Operation Enable — The FPOPEN bit determines the protection function for program or
erase operations as shown in Table 17-17 for the P-Flash block.
0 When FPOPEN is clear, the FPHDIS and FPLDIS bits define unprotected address ranges as specified by the
corresponding FPHS and FPLS bits
1 When FPOPEN is set, the FPHDIS and FPLDIS bits enable protection for the address range specified by the
corresponding FPHS and FPLS bits
6
RNV[6]
Reserved Nonvolatile Bit — The RNV bit should remain in the erased state for future enhancements.
5
FPHDIS
Flash Protection Higher Address Range Disable — The FPHDIS bit determines whether there is a
protected/unprotected area in a specific region of the P-Flash memory ending with global address 0x3_FFFF.
0 Protection/Unprotection enabled
1 Protection/Unprotection disabled
4–3
FPHS[1:0]
Flash Protection Higher Address Size — The FPHS bits determine the size of the protected/unprotected area
in P-Flash memory as shown inTable 17-18. The FPHS bits can only be written to while the FPHDIS bit is set.
2
FPLDIS
Flash Protection Lower Address Range Disable — The FPLDIS bit determines whether there is a
protected/unprotected area in a specific region of the P-Flash memory beginning with global address 0x3_8000.
0 Protection/Unprotection enabled
1 Protection/Unprotection disabled
1–0
FPLS[1:0]
Flash Protection Lower Address Size — The FPLS bits determine the size of the protected/unprotected area
in P-Flash memory as shown in Table 17-19. The FPLS bits can only be written to while the FPLDIS bit is set.
Table 17-17. P-Flash Protection Function
1
Function1
FPOPEN
FPHDIS
FPLDIS
1
1
1
No P-Flash Protection
1
1
0
Protected Low Range
1
0
1
Protected High Range
1
0
0
Protected High and Low Ranges
0
1
1
Full P-Flash Memory Protected
0
1
0
Unprotected Low Range
0
0
1
Unprotected High Range
0
0
0
Unprotected High and Low Ranges
For range sizes, refer to Table 17-18 and Table 17-19.
Table 17-18. P-Flash Protection Higher Address Range
FPHS[1:0]
Global Address Range
Protected Size
00
0x3_F800–0x3_FFFF
2 Kbytes
01
0x3_F000–0x3_FFFF
4 Kbytes
10
0x3_E000–0x3_FFFF
8 Kbytes
11
0x3_C000–0x3_FFFF
16 Kbytes
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
472
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-19. P-Flash Protection Lower Address Range
FPLS[1:0]
Global Address Range
Protected Size
00
0x3_8000–0x3_83FF
1 Kbyte
01
0x3_8000–0x3_87FF
2 Kbytes
10
0x3_8000–0x3_8FFF
4 Kbytes
11
0x3_8000–0x3_9FFF
8 Kbytes
All possible P-Flash protection scenarios are shown in Figure 17-12 Although the protection scheme is
loaded from the Flash memory at global address 0x3_FF0C during the reset sequence, it can be changed
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
473
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
by the user. The P-Flash protection scheme can be used by applications requiring reprogramming in single
chip mode while providing as much protection as possible if reprogramming is not required.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
474
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
FPHDIS = 1
FPLDIS = 1
FPHDIS = 1
FPLDIS = 0
FPHDIS = 0
FPLDIS = 1
FPHDIS = 0
FPLDIS = 0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Scenario
0x3_8000
0x3_FFFF
Scenario
FPHS[1:0]
FPLS[1:0]
FLASH START
FPOPEN = 1
Figure 17-12. P-Flash Protection Scenarios
FPHS[1:0]
0x3_8000
FPOPEN = 0
FPLS[1:0]
FLASH START
0x3_FFFF
Unprotected region
Protected region with size
defined by FPLS
Protected region
not defined by FPLS, FPHS
Protected region with size
defined by FPHS
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
475
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.3.2.9.1
P-Flash Protection Restrictions
The general guideline is that P-Flash protection can only be added and not removed. Table 17-20 specifies
all valid transitions between P-Flash protection scenarios. Any attempt to write an invalid scenario to the
FPROT register will be ignored. The contents of the FPROT register reflect the active protection scenario.
See the FPHS and FPLS bit descriptions for additional restrictions.
17.3.2.10 EEPROM Protection Register (EEPROT)
Table 17-20. P-Flash Protection Scenario Transitions
To Protection Scenario1
From
Protection
Scenario
0
1
2
3
0
X
X
X
X
X
1
X
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6
X
7
1
X
6
7
X
3
5
5
X
X
2
4
X
X
X
X
X
X
Allowed transitions marked with X, see Figure 17-12 for a definition of the scenarios.
The EEPROT register defines which EEPROM sectors are protected against program and erase operations.
Offset Module Base + 0x0009
7
R
6
5
4
0
0
0
3
2
DPOPEN
1
0
1
1
DPS[3:0]
W
Reset
1
0
0
0
1
1
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-13. EEPROM Protection Register (EEPROT)
The (unreserved) bits of the EEPROT register are writable with the restriction that protection can be added
but not removed. Writes must increase the DPS value and the DPOPEN bit can only be written from 1
(protection disabled) to 0 (protection enabled). If the DPOPEN bit is set, the state of the DPS bits is
irrelevant.
During the reset sequence, fields DPOPEN and DPS of the EEPROT register are loaded with the contents
of the EEPROM protection byte in the Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0D located in
P-Flash memory (see Table 17-3) as indicated by reset condition F in . To change the EEPROM protection
that will be loaded during the reset sequence, the P-Flash sector containing the EEPROM protection byte
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
476
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
must be unprotected, then the EEPROM protection byte must be programmed. If a double bit fault is
detected while reading the P-Flash phrase containing the EEPROM protection byte during the reset
sequence, the DPOPEN bit will be cleared and DPS bits will be set to leave the EEPROM memory fully
protected.
Trying to alter data in any protected area in the EEPROM memory will result in a protection violation error
and the FPVIOL bit will be set in the FSTAT register. Block erase of the EEPROM memory is not possible
if any of the EEPROM sectors are protected.
Table 17-21. EEPROT Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7
DPOPEN
EEPROM Protection Control
0 Enables EEPROM memory protection from program and erase with protected address range defined by DPS
bits
1 Disables EEPROM memory protection from program and erase
Table 17-22. EEPROM Protection Address Range
DPS[3:0]
Global Address Range
Protected Size
0000
0x0_0400 – 0x0_041F
32 bytes
0001
0x0_0400 – 0x0_043F
64 bytes
0010
0x0_0400 – 0x0_045F
96 bytes
0011
0x0_0400 – 0x0_047F
128 bytes
0100
0x0_0400 – 0x0_049F
160 bytes
0101
0x0_0400 – 0x0_04BF
192 bytes
The Protection Size goes on enlarging in step of 32 bytes, for each DPS
value increasing of one.
.
.
.
1111
0x0_0400 – 0x0_05FF
512 bytes
17.3.2.11 Flash Common Command Object Register (FCCOB)
The FCCOB is an array of six words addressed via the CCOBIX index found in the FCCOBIX register.
Byte wide reads and writes are allowed to the FCCOB register.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
477
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Offset Module Base + 0x000A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
R
CCOB[15:8]
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 17-14. Flash Common Command Object High Register (FCCOBHI)
Offset Module Base + 0x000B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
R
CCOB[7:0]
W
Reset
0
0
0
0
Figure 17-15. Flash Common Command Object Low Register (FCCOBLO)
17.3.2.11.1 FCCOB - NVM Command Mode
NVM command mode uses the indexed FCCOB register to provide a command code and its relevant
parameters to the Memory Controller. The user first sets up all required FCCOB fields and then initiates
the command’s execution by writing a 1 to the CCIF bit in the FSTAT register (a 1 written by the user
clears the CCIF command completion flag to 0). When the user clears the CCIF bit in the FSTAT register
all FCCOB parameter fields are locked and cannot be changed by the user until the command completes
(as evidenced by the Memory Controller returning CCIF to 1). Some commands return information to the
FCCOB register array.
The generic format for the FCCOB parameter fields in NVM command mode is shown in Table 17-23.
The return values are available for reading after the CCIF flag in the FSTAT register has been returned to
1 by the Memory Controller. Writes to the unimplemented parameter fields (CCOBIX = 110 and CCOBIX
= 111) are ignored with reads from these fields returning 0x0000.
Table 17-23 shows the generic Flash command format. The high byte of the first word in the CCOB array
contains the command code, followed by the parameters for this specific Flash command. For details on
the FCCOB settings required by each command, see the Flash command descriptions in Section 17.4.6.
Table 17-23. FCCOB - NVM Command Mode (Typical Usage)
CCOBIX[2:0]
Byte
FCCOB Parameter Fields (NVM Command Mode)
HI
FCMD[7:0] defining Flash command
LO
6’h0, Global address [17:16]
HI
Global address [15:8]
LO
Global address [7:0]
HI
Data 0 [15:8]
LO
Data 0 [7:0]
000
001
010
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
478
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-23. FCCOB - NVM Command Mode (Typical Usage)
CCOBIX[2:0]
Byte
FCCOB Parameter Fields (NVM Command Mode)
HI
Data 1 [15:8]
LO
Data 1 [7:0]
HI
Data 2 [15:8]
LO
Data 2 [7:0]
HI
Data 3 [15:8]
LO
Data 3 [7:0]
011
100
101
17.3.2.12 Flash Reserved1 Register (FRSV1)
This Flash register is reserved for factory testing.
Offset Module Base + 0x000C
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-16. Flash Reserved1 Register (FRSV1)
All bits in the FRSV1 register read 0 and are not writable.
17.3.2.13 Flash Reserved2 Register (FRSV2)
This Flash register is reserved for factory testing.
Offset Module Base + 0x000D
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-17. Flash Reserved2 Register (FRSV2)
All bits in the FRSV2 register read 0 and are not writable.
17.3.2.14 Flash Reserved3 Register (FRSV3)
This Flash register is reserved for factory testing.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
479
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Offset Module Base + 0x000E
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-18. Flash Reserved3 Register (FRSV3)
All bits in the FRSV3 register read 0 and are not writable.
17.3.2.15 Flash Reserved4 Register (FRSV4)
This Flash register is reserved for factory testing.
Offset Module Base + 0x000F
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-19. Flash Reserved4 Register (FRSV4)
All bits in the FRSV4 register read 0 and are not writable.
17.3.2.16 Flash Option Register (FOPT)
The FOPT register is the Flash option register.
Offset Module Base + 0x0010
7
6
5
4
R
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
NV[7:0]
W
Reset
1
1
1
1
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-20. Flash Option Register (FOPT)
All bits in the FOPT register are readable but are not writable.
During the reset sequence, the FOPT register is loaded from the Flash nonvolatile byte in the Flash
configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0E located in P-Flash memory (see Table 17-3) as indicated
by reset condition F in Figure 17-20. If a double bit fault is detected while reading the P-Flash phrase
containing the Flash nonvolatile byte during the reset sequence, all bits in the FOPT register will be set.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
480
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-24. FOPT Field Descriptions
Field
Description
7–0
NV[7:0]
Nonvolatile Bits — The NV[7:0] bits are available as nonvolatile bits. Refer to the device user guide for proper
use of the NV bits.
17.3.2.17 Flash Reserved5 Register (FRSV5)
This Flash register is reserved for factory testing.
Offset Module Base + 0x0011
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-21. Flash Reserved5 Register (FRSV5)
All bits in the FRSV5 register read 0 and are not writable.
17.3.2.18 Flash Reserved6 Register (FRSV6)
This Flash register is reserved for factory testing.
Offset Module Base + 0x0012
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-22. Flash Reserved6 Register (FRSV6)
All bits in the FRSV6 register read 0 and are not writable.
17.3.2.19 Flash Reserved7 Register (FRSV7)
This Flash register is reserved for factory testing.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
481
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Offset Module Base + 0x0013
R
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
Reset
= Unimplemented or Reserved
Figure 17-23. Flash Reserved7 Register (FRSV7)
All bits in the FRSV7 register read 0 and are not writable.
MGATE 0x0_0008
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FPOPEN
RNV14
FPHDIS
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
R
FPHS[1:0]
RNV[10:8]
W
Reset
R
1
1
DPOPEN
1
1
1
1
DPS[5:0]
W
Reset
1
0
0
0
1
1
Figure 17-24. MGATE Flag Register (MPROT)
17.4
17.4.1
Functional Description
Modes of Operation
The FTMRG64K512 module provides the modes of operation normal and special . The operating mode
is determined by module-level inputs and affects the FCLKDIV, FCNFG, and EEPROT registers (see
Table 17-26).
17.4.2
IFR Version ID Word
The version ID word is stored in the IFR at address 0x0_40B6. The contents of the word are defined in
Table 17-25.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
482
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-25. IFR Version ID Fields
•
[15:4]
[3:0]
Reserved
VERNUM
VERNUM: Version number. The first version is number 0b_0001 with both 0b_0000 and 0b_1111
meaning ‘none’.
17.4.3
Internal NVM resource (NVMRES)
IFR is an internal NVM resource readable by CPU , when NVMRES is active. The IFR fields are shown
in Table 17-4.
The NVMRES global address map is shown in Table 17-5.
17.4.4
Flash Command Operations
Flash command operations are used to modify Flash memory contents.
The next sections describe:
• How to write the FCLKDIV register that is used to generate a time base (FCLK) derived from
BUSCLK for Flash program and erase command operations
• The command write sequence used to set Flash command parameters and launch execution
• Valid Flash commands available for execution, according to MCU functional mode and MCU
security state.
17.4.4.1
Writing the FCLKDIV Register
Prior to issuing any Flash program or erase command after a reset, the user is required to write the
FCLKDIV register to divide BUSCLK down to a target FCLK of 1 MHz. Table 17-7 shows recommended
values for the FDIV field based on BUSCLK frequency.
NOTE
Programming or erasing the Flash memory cannot be performed if the bus
clock runs at less than 0.8 MHz. Setting FDIV too high can destroy the Flash
memory due to overstress. Setting FDIV too low can result in incomplete
programming or erasure of the Flash memory cells.
When the FCLKDIV register is written, the FDIVLD bit is set automatically. If the FDIVLD bit is 0, the
FCLKDIV register has not been written since the last reset. If the FCLKDIV register has not been written,
any Flash program or erase command loaded during a command write sequence will not execute and the
ACCERR bit in the FSTAT register will set.
17.4.4.2
Command Write Sequence
The Memory Controller will launch all valid Flash commands entered using a command write sequence.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
483
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Before launching a command, the ACCERR and FPVIOL bits in the FSTAT register must be clear (see
Section 17.3.2.7) and the CCIF flag should be tested to determine the status of the current command write
sequence. If CCIF is 0, the previous command write sequence is still active, a new command write
sequence cannot be started, and all writes to the FCCOB register are ignored.
17.4.4.2.1
Define FCCOB Contents
The FCCOB parameter fields must be loaded with all required parameters for the Flash command being
executed. Access to the FCCOB parameter fields is controlled via the CCOBIX bits in the FCCOBIX
register (see Section 17.3.2.3).
The contents of the FCCOB parameter fields are transferred to the Memory Controller when the user clears
the CCIF command completion flag in the FSTAT register (writing 1 clears the CCIF to 0). The CCIF flag
will remain clear until the Flash command has completed. Upon completion, the Memory Controller will
return CCIF to 1 and the FCCOB register will be used to communicate any results. The flow for a generic
command write sequence is shown in Figure 17-25.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
484
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
START
Read: FCLKDIV register
Clock Divider
Value Check
FDIV
Correct?
no
no
Read: FSTAT register
yes
FCCOB
Availability Check
CCIF
Set?
yes
Read: FSTAT register
Note: FCLKDIV must be
set after each reset
Write: FCLKDIV register
no
CCIF
Set?
yes
Results from previous Command
ACCERR/
FPVIOL
Set?
no
Access Error and
Protection Violation
Check
yes
Write: FSTAT register
Clear ACCERR/FPVIOL 0x30
Write to FCCOBIX register
to identify specific command
parameter to load.
Write to FCCOB register
to load required command parameter.
More
Parameters?
yes
no
Write: FSTAT register (to launch command)
Clear CCIF 0x80
Read: FSTAT register
Bit Polling for
Command Completion
Check
CCIF Set?
no
yes
EXIT
Figure 17-25. Generic Flash Command Write Sequence Flowchart
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
485
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.4.4.3
Valid Flash Module Commands
Table 17-26 present the valid Flash commands, as enabled by the combination of the functional MCU
mode (Normal SingleChip NS, Special Singlechip SS) with the MCU security state (Unsecured, Secured).
Special Singlechip mode is selected by input mmc_ss_mode_ts2 asserted. MCU Secured state is selected
by input mmc_secure input asserted.
+
Table 17-26. Flash Commands by Mode and Security State
Unsecured
FCMD
Command
Secured
NS1
SS2
NS3
SS4
0x01
Erase Verify All Blocks
∗
∗
∗
∗
0x02
Erase Verify Block
∗
∗
∗
∗
0x03
Erase Verify P-Flash Section
∗
∗
∗
0x04
Read Once
∗
∗
∗
0x06
Program P-Flash
∗
∗
∗
0x07
Program Once
∗
∗
∗
0x08
Erase All Blocks
0x09
Erase Flash Block
∗
∗
∗
0x0A
Erase P-Flash Sector
∗
∗
∗
0x0B
Unsecure Flash
0x0C
Verify Backdoor Access Key
∗
0x0D
Set User Margin Level
∗
0x0E
Set Field Margin Level
0x10
Erase Verify EEPROM Section
∗
∗
∗
0x11
Program EEPROM
∗
∗
∗
0x12
Erase EEPROM Sector
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
1
Unsecured Normal Single Chip mode
Unsecured Special Single Chip mode.
3
Secured Normal Single Chip mode.
4 Secured Special Single Chip mode.
2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
486
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.4.4.4
P-Flash Commands
Table 17-27 summarizes the valid P-Flash commands along with the effects of the commands on the
P-Flash block and other resources within the Flash module.
Table 17-27. P-Flash Commands
FCMD
Command
0x01
Erase Verify All
Blocks
0x02
Erase Verify Block
0x03
Erase Verify
P-Flash Section
0x04
Read Once
0x06
Program P-Flash
0x07
Program Once
Program a dedicated 64 byte field in the nonvolatile information register in P-Flash block
that is allowed to be programmed only once.
0x08
Erase All Blocks
Erase all P-Flash (and EEPROM) blocks.
An erase of all Flash blocks is only possible when the FPLDIS, FPHDIS, and FPOPEN
bits in the FPROT register and the DPOPEN bit in the EEPROT register are set prior to
launching the command.
0x09
Erase Flash Block
Erase a P-Flash (or EEPROM) block.
An erase of the full P-Flash block is only possible when FPLDIS, FPHDIS and FPOPEN
bits in the FPROT register are set prior to launching the command.
0x0A
Erase P-Flash
Sector
0x0B
Unsecure Flash
0x0C
Verify Backdoor
Access Key
Supports a method of releasing MCU security by verifying a set of security keys.
0x0D
Set User Margin
Level
Specifies a user margin read level for all P-Flash blocks.
0x0E
Set Field Margin
Level
Specifies a field margin read level for all P-Flash blocks (special modes only).
17.4.4.5
Function on P-Flash Memory
Verify that all P-Flash (and EEPROM) blocks are erased.
Verify that a P-Flash block is erased.
Verify that a given number of words starting at the address provided are erased.
Read a dedicated 64 byte field in the nonvolatile information register in P-Flash block that
was previously programmed using the Program Once command.
Program a phrase in a P-Flash block.
Erase all bytes in a P-Flash sector.
Supports a method of releasing MCU security by erasing all P-Flash (and EEPROM)
blocks and verifying that all P-Flash (and EEPROM) blocks are erased.
EEPROM Commands
Table 17-28 summarizes the valid EEPROM commands along with the effects of the commands on the
EEPROM block.
Table 17-28. EEPROM Commands
FCMD
Command
0x01
Erase Verify All
Blocks
0x02
Erase Verify Block
Function on EEPROM Memory
Verify that all EEPROM (and P-Flash) blocks are erased.
Verify that the EEPROM block is erased.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
487
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-28. EEPROM Commands
FCMD
Command
Function on EEPROM Memory
0x08
Erase All Blocks
Erase all EEPROM (and P-Flash) blocks.
An erase of all Flash blocks is only possible when the FPLDIS, FPHDIS, and FPOPEN
bits in the FPROT register and the DPOPEN bit in the EEPROT register are set prior to
launching the command.
0x09
Erase Flash Block
Erase a EEPROM (or P-Flash) block.
An erase of the full EEPROM block is only possible when DPOPEN bit in the EEPROT
register is set prior to launching the command.
0x0B
Unsecure Flash
0x0D
Set User Margin
Level
Specifies a user margin read level for the EEPROM block.
0x0E
Set Field Margin
Level
Specifies a field margin read level for the EEPROM block (special modes only).
0x10
Erase Verify
EEPROM Section
Verify that a given number of words starting at the address provided are erased.
0x11
Program
EEPROM
Program up to four words in the EEPROM block.
0x12
Erase EEPROM
Sector
Erase all bytes in a sector of the EEPROM block.
17.4.5
Supports a method of releasing MCU security by erasing all EEPROM (and P-Flash)
blocks and verifying that all EEPROM (and P-Flash) blocks are erased.
Allowed Simultaneous P-Flash and EEPROM Operations
Only the operations marked ‘OK’ in Table 17-29 are permitted to be run simultaneously on the Program
Flash and Data Flash blocks. Some operations cannot be executed simultaneously because certain
hardware resources are shared by the two memories. The priority has been placed on permitting Program
Flash reads while program and erase operations execute on the Data Flash, providing read (P-Flash) while
write (EEPROM) functionality.
Table 17-29. Allowed P-Flash and EEPROM Simultaneous Operations
Data Flash
Program Flash
Read
Read
Margin
Read1
Program
Sector
Erase
OK
OK
OK
Mass
Erase2
Margin Read1
Program
Sector Erase
Mass Erase2
OK
1
A ‘Margin Read’ is any read after executing the margin setting commands
‘Set User Margin Level’ or ‘Set Field Margin Level’ with anything but the
‘normal’ level specified. See the Note on margin settings in Section 17.4.6.12
and Section 17.4.6.13.
2 The ‘Mass Erase’ operations are commands ‘Erase All Blocks’ and ‘Erase
Flash Block’
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
488
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.4.6
Flash Command Description
This section provides details of all available Flash commands launched by a command write sequence. The
ACCERR bit in the FSTAT register will be set during the command write sequence if any of the following
illegal steps are performed, causing the command not to be processed by the Memory Controller:
• Starting any command write sequence that programs or erases Flash memory before initializing the
FCLKDIV register
• Writing an invalid command as part of the command write sequence
• For additional possible errors, refer to the error handling table provided for each command
If a Flash block is read during execution of an algorithm (CCIF = 0) on that same block, the read operation
will return invalid data if both flags SFDIF and DFDIF are set. If the SFDIF or DFDIF flags were not
previously set when the invalid read operation occurred, both the SFDIF and DFDIF flags will be set.
If the ACCERR or FPVIOL bits are set in the FSTAT register, the user must clear these bits before starting
any command write sequence (see Section 17.3.2.7).
CAUTION
A Flash word or phrase must be in the erased state before being
programmed. Cumulative programming of bits within a Flash word or
phrase is not allowed.
17.4.6.1
Erase Verify All Blocks Command
The Erase Verify All Blocks command will verify that all P-Flash and EEPROM blocks have been erased.
Table 17-30. Erase Verify All Blocks Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
FCCOB Parameters
000
0x01
Not required
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Verify All Blocks command, the Memory Controller will verify
that the entire Flash memory space is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Verify All Blocks
operation has completed. If all blocks are not erased, it means blank check failed, both MGSTAT bits will
be set.
Table 17-31. Erase Verify All Blocks Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
ACCERR
FPVIOL
FSTAT
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch
None
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the reador if blank check failed .
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read or if
blank check failed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
489
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.4.6.2
Erase Verify Block Command
The Erase Verify Block command allows the user to verify that an entire P-Flash or EEPROM block has
been erased. The FCCOB global address bits determine which block must be verified.
Table 17-32. Erase Verify Block Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
FCCOB Parameters
000
0x02
Global address [17:16] of the
Flash block to be verified.
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Verify Block command, the Memory Controller will verify that
the selected P-Flash or EEPROM block is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Verify Block
operation has completed.If the block is not erased, it means blank check failed, both MGSTAT bits will be
set.
Table 17-33. Erase Verify Block Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied
FSTAT
17.4.6.3
FPVIOL
None
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the read or if blank check failed.
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read or if
blank check failed.
Erase Verify P-Flash Section Command
The Erase Verify P-Flash Section command will verify that a section of code in the P-Flash memory is
erased. The Erase Verify P-Flash Section command defines the starting point of the code to be verified and
the number of phrases.
Table 17-34. Erase Verify P-Flash Section Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
FCCOB Parameters
0x03
Global address [17:16] of
a P-Flash block
001
Global address [15:0] of the first phrase to be verified
010
Number of phrases to be verified
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Verify P-Flash Section command, the Memory Controller will
verify the selected section of Flash memory is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Verify P-Flash
Section operation has completed. If the section is not erased, it means blank check failed, both MGSTAT
bits will be set.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
490
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-35. Erase Verify P-Flash Section Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 010 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied see )
Set if a misaligned phrase address is supplied (global address [2:0] != 000)
FSTAT
Set if the requested section crosses a the P-Flash address boundary
FPVIOL
17.4.6.4
None
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the read or if blank check failed.
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read or if
blank check failed.
Read Once Command
The Read Once command provides read access to a reserved 64 byte field (8 phrases) located in the
nonvolatile information register of P-Flash. The Read Once field is programmed using the Program Once
command described in Section 17.4.6.6. The Read Once command must not be executed from the Flash
block containing the Program Once reserved field to avoid code runaway.
Table 17-36. Read Once Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
FCCOB Parameters
0x04
Not Required
001
Read Once phrase index (0x0000 - 0x0007)
010
Read Once word 0 value
011
Read Once word 1 value
100
Read Once word 2 value
101
Read Once word 3 value
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Read Once command, a Read Once phrase is fetched and stored in the
FCCOB indexed register. The CCIF flag will set after the Read Once operation has completed. Valid
phrase index values for the Read Once command range from 0x0000 to 0x0007. During execution of the
Read Once command, any attempt to read addresses within P-Flash block will return invalid data.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
491
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
8
Table 17-37. Read Once Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch
ACCERR
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
Set if an invalid phrase index is supplied
FSTAT
FPVIOL
17.4.6.5
None
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the read
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read
Program P-Flash Command
The Program P-Flash operation will program a previously erased phrase in the P-Flash memory using an
embedded algorithm.
CAUTION
A P-Flash phrase must be in the erased state before being programmed.
Cumulative programming of bits within a Flash phrase is not allowed.
Table 17-38. Program P-Flash Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
1
FCCOB Parameters
0x06
Global address [17:16] to
identify P-Flash block
001
Global address [15:0] of phrase location to be programmed1
010
Word 0 program value
011
Word 1 program value
100
Word 2 program value
101
Word 3 program value
Global address [2:0] must be 000
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Program P-Flash command, the Memory Controller will program the
data words to the supplied global address and will then proceed to verify the data words read back as
expected. The CCIF flag will set after the Program P-Flash operation has completed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
492
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-39. Program P-Flash Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 101 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied see )
Set if a misaligned phrase address is supplied (global address [2:0] != 000)
FSTAT
FPVIOL
17.4.6.6
Set if the global address [17:0] points to a protected area
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
operation
Program Once Command
The Program Once command restricts programming to a reserved 64 byte field (8 phrases) in the
nonvolatile information register located in P-Flash. The Program Once reserved field can be read using the
Read Once command as described in Section 17.4.6.4. The Program Once command must only be issued
once since the nonvolatile information register in P-Flash cannot be erased. The Program Once command
must not be executed from the Flash block containing the Program Once reserved field to avoid code
runaway.
Table 17-40. Program Once Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
FCCOB Parameters
0x07
Not Required
001
Program Once phrase index (0x0000 - 0x0007)
010
Program Once word 0 value
011
Program Once word 1 value
100
Program Once word 2 value
101
Program Once word 3 value
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Program Once command, the Memory Controller first verifies that the
selected phrase is erased. If erased, then the selected phrase will be programmed and then verified with
read back. The CCIF flag will remain clear, setting only after the Program Once operation has completed.
The reserved nonvolatile information register accessed by the Program Once command cannot be erased
and any attempt to program one of these phrases a second time will not be allowed. Valid phrase index
values for the Program Once command range from 0x0000 to 0x0007. During execution of the Program
Once command, any attempt to read addresses within P-Flash will return invalid data.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
493
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-41. Program Once Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 101 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid phrase index is supplied
Set if the requested phrase has already been programmed1
FSTAT
FPVIOL
1
None
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
operation
If a Program Once phrase is initially programmed to 0xFFFF_FFFF_FFFF_FFFF, the Program Once command will
be allowed to execute again on that same phrase.
17.4.6.7
Erase All Blocks Command
The Erase All Blocks operation will erase the entire P-Flash and EEPROM memory space.
Table 17-42. Erase All Blocks Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
FCCOB Parameters
0x08
Not required
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase All Blocks command, the Memory Controller will erase the entire
Flash memory space and verify that it is erased. If the Memory Controller verifies that the entire Flash
memory space was properly erased, security will be released. During the execution of this command
(CCIF=0) the user must not write to any Flash module register. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase All
Blocks operation has completed.
Table 17-43. Erase All Blocks Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch
ACCERR
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
FSTAT
17.4.6.8
FPVIOL
Set if any area of the P-Flash or EEPROM memory is protected
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
operation
Erase Flash Block Command
The Erase Flash Block operation will erase all addresses in a P-Flash or EEPROM block.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
494
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-44. Erase Flash Block Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
001
FCCOB Parameters
Global address [17:16] to
identify Flash block
0x09
Global address [15:0] in Flash block to be erased
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Flash Block command, the Memory Controller will erase the
selected Flash block and verify that it is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Flash Block
operation has completed.
Table 17-45. Erase Flash Block Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if the supplied P-Flash address is not phrase-aligned or if the EEPROM
address is not word-aligned
FSTAT
FPVIOL
17.4.6.9
Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied
Set if an area of the selected Flash block is protected
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
operation
Erase P-Flash Sector Command
The Erase P-Flash Sector operation will erase all addresses in a P-Flash sector.
Table 17-46. Erase P-Flash Sector Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
001
FCCOB Parameters
0x0A
Global address [17:16] to identify
P-Flash block to be erased
Global address [15:0] anywhere within the sector to be erased.
Refer to Section 17.1.2.1 for the P-Flash sector size.
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase P-Flash Sector command, the Memory Controller will erase the
selected Flash sector and then verify that it is erased. The CCIF flag will be set after the Erase P-Flash
Sector operation has completed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
495
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-47. Erase P-Flash Sector Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied see )
Set if a misaligned phrase address is supplied (global address [2:0] != 000)
FSTAT
FPVIOL
Set if the selected P-Flash sector is protected
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
operation
17.4.6.10 Unsecure Flash Command
The Unsecure Flash command will erase the entire P-Flash and EEPROM memory space and, if the erase
is successful, will release security.
Table 17-48. Unsecure Flash Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
FCCOB Parameters
0x0B
Not required
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Unsecure Flash command, the Memory Controller will erase the entire
P-Flash and EEPROM memory space and verify that it is erased. If the Memory Controller verifies that
the entire Flash memory space was properly erased, security will be released. If the erase verify is not
successful, the Unsecure Flash operation sets MGSTAT1 and terminates without changing the security
state. During the execution of this command (CCIF=0) the user must not write to any Flash module
register. The CCIF flag is set after the Unsecure Flash operation has completed.
Table 17-49. Unsecure Flash Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 000 at command launch
ACCERR
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
FSTAT
FPVIOL
Set if any area of the P-Flash or EEPROM memory is protected
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
operation
17.4.6.11 Verify Backdoor Access Key Command
The Verify Backdoor Access Key command will only execute if it is enabled by the KEYEN bits in the
FSEC register (see Table 17-9). The Verify Backdoor Access Key command releases security if
user-supplied keys match those stored in the Flash security bytes of the Flash configuration field (see
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
496
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-3). The Verify Backdoor Access Key command must not be executed from the Flash block
containing the backdoor comparison key to avoid code runaway.
Table 17-50. Verify Backdoor Access Key Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
FCCOB Parameters
000
0x0C
Not required
001
Key 0
010
Key 1
011
Key 2
100
Key 3
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Verify Backdoor Access Key command, the Memory Controller will
check the FSEC KEYEN bits to verify that this command is enabled. If not enabled, the Memory
Controller sets the ACCERR bit in the FSTAT register and terminates. If the command is enabled, the
Memory Controller compares the key provided in FCCOB to the backdoor comparison key in the Flash
configuration field with Key 0 compared to 0x3_FF00, etc. If the backdoor keys match, security will be
released. If the backdoor keys do not match, security is not released and all future attempts to execute the
Verify Backdoor Access Key command are aborted (set ACCERR) until a reset occurs. The CCIF flag is
set after the Verify Backdoor Access Key operation has completed.
Table 17-51. Verify Backdoor Access Key Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 100 at command launch
Set if an incorrect backdoor key is supplied
ACCERR
FSTAT
Set if backdoor key access has not been enabled (KEYEN[1:0] != 10, see
Section 17.3.2.2)
Set if the backdoor key has mismatched since the last reset
FPVIOL
None
MGSTAT1
None
MGSTAT0
None
17.4.6.12 Set User Margin Level Command
The Set User Margin Level command causes the Memory Controller to set the margin level for future read
operations of the P-Flash or EEPROM block.
Table 17-52. Set User Margin Level Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
001
FCCOB Parameters
0x0D
Global address [17:16] to identify the
Flash block
Margin level setting
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
497
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Set User Margin Level command, the Memory Controller will set the
user margin level for the targeted block and then set the CCIF flag.
NOTE
When the EEPROM block is targeted, the EEPROM user margin levels are
applied only to the EEPROM reads. However, when the P-Flash block is
targeted, the P-Flash user margin levels are applied to both P-Flash and
EEPROM reads. It is not possible to apply user margin levels to the P-Flash
block only.
Valid margin level settings for the Set User Margin Level command are defined in Table 17-53.
Table 17-53. Valid Set User Margin Level Settings
CCOB
(CCOBIX=001)
Level Description
0x0000
Return to Normal Level
0x0001
User Margin-1 Level1
0x0002
User Margin-0 Level2
1
2
Read margin to the erased state
Read margin to the programmed state
Table 17-54. Set User Margin Level Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied see )
FSTAT
Set if an invalid margin level setting is supplied
FPVIOL
None
MGSTAT1
None
MGSTAT0
None
NOTE
User margin levels can be used to check that Flash memory contents have
adequate margin for normal level read operations. If unexpected results are
encountered when checking Flash memory contents at user margin levels, a
potential loss of information has been detected.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
498
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.4.6.13 Set Field Margin Level Command
The Set Field Margin Level command, valid in special modes only, causes the Memory Controller to set
the margin level specified for future read operations of the P-Flash or EEPROM block.
Table 17-55. Set Field Margin Level Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
FCCOB Parameters
000
0x0E
001
Global address [17:16] to identify the Flash
block
Margin level setting
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Set Field Margin Level command, the Memory Controller will set the
field margin level for the targeted block and then set the CCIF flag.
NOTE
When the EEPROM block is targeted, the EEPROM field margin levels are
applied only to the EEPROM reads. However, when the P-Flash block is
targeted, the P-Flash field margin levels are applied to both P-Flash and
EEPROM reads. It is not possible to apply field margin levels to the P-Flash
block only.
Valid margin level settings for the Set Field Margin Level command are defined in Table 17-56.
Table 17-56. Valid Set Field Margin Level Settings
CCOB
(CCOBIX=001)
Level Description
0x0000
Return to Normal Level
0x0001
User Margin-1 Level1
0x0002
User Margin-0 Level2
0x0003
Field Margin-1 Level1
0x0004
Field Margin-0 Level2
1
2
Read margin to the erased state
Read margin to the programmed state
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
499
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-57. Set Field Margin Level Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:16] is supplied
FSTAT
Set if an invalid margin level setting is supplied
FPVIOL
None
MGSTAT1
None
MGSTAT0
None
CAUTION
Field margin levels must only be used during verify of the initial factory
programming.
NOTE
Field margin levels can be used to check that Flash memory contents have
adequate margin for data retention at the normal level setting. If unexpected
results are encountered when checking Flash memory contents at field
margin levels, the Flash memory contents should be erased and
reprogrammed.
17.4.6.14 Erase Verify EEPROM Section Command
The Erase Verify EEPROM Section command will verify that a section of code in the EEPROM is erased.
The Erase Verify EEPROM Section command defines the starting point of the data to be verified and the
number of words.
Table 17-58. Erase Verify EEPROM Section Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
FCCOB Parameters
0x10
Global address [17:16] to
identify the EEPROM
block
001
Global address [15:0] of the first word to be verified
010
Number of words to be verified
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase Verify EEPROM Section command, the Memory Controller will
verify the selected section of EEPROM memory is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase Verify
EEPROM Section operation has completed. If the section is not erased, it means blank check failed, both
MGSTAT bits will be set.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
500
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-59. Erase Verify EEPROM Section Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 010 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied
Set if a misaligned word address is supplied (global address [0] != 0)
FSTAT
Set if the requested section breaches the end of the EEPROM block
FPVIOL
None
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the read or if blank check failed.
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the read or if
blank check failed.
17.4.6.15 Program EEPROM Command
The Program EEPROM operation programs one to four previously erased words in the EEPROM block.
The Program EEPROM operation will confirm that the targeted location(s) were successfully programmed
upon completion.
CAUTION
A Flash word must be in the erased state before being programmed.
Cumulative programming of bits within a Flash word is not allowed.
Table 17-60. Program EEPROM Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
FCCOB Parameters
0x11
Global address [17:16] to
identify the EEPROM block
001
Global address [15:0] of word to be programmed
010
Word 0 program value
011
Word 1 program value, if desired
100
Word 2 program value, if desired
101
Word 3 program value, if desired
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Program EEPROM command, the user-supplied words will be
transferred to the Memory Controller and be programmed if the area is unprotected. The CCOBIX index
value at Program EEPROM command launch determines how many words will be programmed in the
EEPROM block. The CCIF flag is set when the operation has completed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
501
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
Table 17-61. Program EEPROM Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] < 010 at command launch
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] > 101 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is supplied
Set if a misaligned word address is supplied (global address [0] != 0)
FSTAT
Set if the requested group of words breaches the end of the EEPROM block
FPVIOL
Set if the selected area of the EEPROM memory is protected
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
operation
17.4.6.16 Erase EEPROM Sector Command
The Erase EEPROM Sector operation will erase all addresses in a sector of the EEPROM block.
Table 17-62. Erase EEPROM Sector Command FCCOB Requirements
CCOBIX[2:0]
000
001
FCCOB Parameters
0x12
Global address [17:16] to identify
EEPROM block
Global address [15:0] anywhere within the sector to be erased.
See Section 17.1.2.2 for EEPROM sector size.
Upon clearing CCIF to launch the Erase EEPROM Sector command, the Memory Controller will erase the
selected Flash sector and verify that it is erased. The CCIF flag will set after the Erase EEPROM Sector
operation has completed.
Table 17-63. Erase EEPROM Sector Command Error Handling
Register
Error Bit
Error Condition
Set if CCOBIX[2:0] != 001 at command launch
Set if command not available in current mode (see Table 17-26)
ACCERR
Set if an invalid global address [17:0] is suppliedsee )
Set if a misaligned word address is supplied (global address [0] != 0)
FSTAT
FPVIOL
Set if the selected area of the EEPROM memory is protected
MGSTAT1
Set if any errors have been encountered during the verify operation
MGSTAT0
Set if any non-correctable errors have been encountered during the verify
operation
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
502
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.4.7
Interrupts
The Flash module can generate an interrupt when a Flash command operation has completed or when a
Flash command operation has detected an ECC fault.
Table 17-64. Flash Interrupt Sources
Interrupt Source
Global (CCR)
Mask
Interrupt Flag
Local Enable
CCIF
(FSTAT register)
CCIE
(FCNFG register)
I Bit
ECC Double Bit Fault on Flash Read
DFDIF
(FERSTAT register)
DFDIE
(FERCNFG register)
I Bit
ECC Single Bit Fault on Flash Read
SFDIF
(FERSTAT register)
SFDIE
(FERCNFG register)
I Bit
Flash Command Complete
NOTE
Vector addresses and their relative interrupt priority are determined at the
MCU level.
17.4.7.1
Description of Flash Interrupt Operation
The Flash module uses the CCIF flag in combination with the CCIE interrupt enable bit to generate the
Flash command interrupt request. The Flash module uses the DFDIF and SFDIF flags in combination with
the DFDIE and SFDIE interrupt enable bits to generate the Flash error interrupt request. For a detailed
description of the register bits involved, refer to Section 17.3.2.5, “Flash Configuration Register
(FCNFG)”, Section 17.3.2.6, “Flash Error Configuration Register (FERCNFG)”, Section 17.3.2.7, “Flash
Status Register (FSTAT)”, and Section 17.3.2.8, “Flash Error Status Register (FERSTAT)”.
The logic used for generating the Flash module interrupts is shown in Figure 17-26.
Flash Command Interrupt Request
CCIE
CCIF
DFDIE
DFDIF
Flash Error Interrupt Request
SFDIE
SFDIF
Figure 17-26. Flash Module Interrupts Implementation
17.4.8
Wait Mode
The Flash module is not affected if the MCU enters wait mode. The Flash module can recover the MCU
from wait via the CCIF interrupt (see Section 17.4.7, “Interrupts”).
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
503
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.4.9
Stop Mode
If a Flash command is active (CCIF = 0) when the MCU requests stop mode, the current Flash operation
will be completed before the MCU is allowed to enter stop mode.
17.5
Security
The Flash module provides security information to the MCU. The Flash security state is defined by the
SEC bits of the FSEC register (see Table 17-10). During reset, the Flash module initializes the FSEC
register using data read from the security byte of the Flash configuration field at global address 0x3_FF0F.
The security state out of reset can be permanently changed by programming the security byte assuming
that the MCU is starting from a mode where the necessary P-Flash erase and program commands are
available and that the upper region of the P-Flash is unprotected. If the Flash security byte is successfully
programmed, its new value will take affect after the next MCU reset.
The following subsections describe these security-related subjects:
• Unsecuring the MCU using Backdoor Key Access
• Unsecuring the MCU in Special Single Chip Mode using BDM
• Mode and Security Effects on Flash Command Availability
17.5.1
Unsecuring the MCU using Backdoor Key Access
The MCU may be unsecured by using the backdoor key access feature which requires knowledge of the
contents of the backdoor keys (four 16-bit words programmed at addresses 0x3_FF00-0x3_FF07). If the
KEYEN[1:0] bits are in the enabled state (see Section 17.3.2.2), the Verify Backdoor Access Key
command (see Section 17.4.6.11) allows the user to present four prospective keys for comparison to the
keys stored in the Flash memory via the Memory Controller. If the keys presented in the Verify Backdoor
Access Key command match the backdoor keys stored in the Flash memory, the SEC bits in the FSEC
register (see Table 17-10) will be changed to unsecure the MCU. Key values of 0x0000 and 0xFFFF are
not permitted as backdoor keys. While the Verify Backdoor Access Key command is active, P-Flash
memory and EEPROM memory will not be available for read access and will return invalid data.
The user code stored in the P-Flash memory must have a method of receiving the backdoor keys from an
external stimulus. This external stimulus would typically be through one of the on-chip serial ports.
If the KEYEN[1:0] bits are in the enabled state (see Section 17.3.2.2), the MCU can be unsecured by the
backdoor key access sequence described below:
1. Follow the command sequence for the Verify Backdoor Access Key command as explained in
Section 17.4.6.11
2. If the Verify Backdoor Access Key command is successful, the MCU is unsecured and the
SEC[1:0] bits in the FSEC register are forced to the unsecure state of 10
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
504
Freescale Semiconductor
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
The Verify Backdoor Access Key command is monitored by the Memory Controller and an illegal key will
prohibit future use of the Verify Backdoor Access Key command. A reset of the MCU is the only method
to re-enable the Verify Backdoor Access Key command. The security as defined in the Flash security byte
(0x3_FF0F) is not changed by using the Verify Backdoor Access Key command sequence. The backdoor
keys stored in addresses 0x3_FF00-0x3_FF07 are unaffected by the Verify Backdoor Access Key
command sequence. The Verify Backdoor Access Key command sequence has no effect on the program
and erase protections defined in the Flash protection register, FPROT.
After the backdoor keys have been correctly matched, the MCU will be unsecured. After the MCU is
unsecured, the sector containing the Flash security byte can be erased and the Flash security byte can be
reprogrammed to the unsecure state, if desired. In the unsecure state, the user has full control of the
contents of the backdoor keys by programming addresses 0x3_FF00-0x3_FF07 in the Flash configuration
field.
17.5.2
Unsecuring the MCU in Special Single Chip Mode using BDM
A secured MCU can be unsecured in special single chip mode by using the following method to erase the
P-Flash and EEPROM memory:
1. Reset the MCU into special single chip mode
2. Delay while the BDM executes the Erase Verify All Blocks command write sequence to check if
the P-Flash and EEPROM memories are erased
3. Send BDM commands to disable protection in the P-Flash and EEPROM memory
4. Execute the Erase All Blocks command write sequence to erase the P-Flash and EEPROM
memory. Alternatively the Unsecure Flash command can be executed, if so the steps 5 and 6 below
are skeeped.
5. After the CCIF flag sets to indicate that the Erase All Blocks operation has completed, reset the
MCU into special single chip mode
6. Delay while the BDM executes the Erase Verify All Blocks command write sequence to verify that
the P-Flash and EEPROM memory are erased
If the P-Flash and EEPROM memory are verified as erased, the MCU will be unsecured. All BDM
commands will now be enabled and the Flash security byte may be programmed to the unsecure state by
continuing with the following steps:
7. Send BDM commands to execute the Program P-Flash command write sequence to program the
Flash security byte to the unsecured state
8. Reset the MCU
17.5.3
Mode and Security Effects on Flash Command Availability
The availability of Flash module commands depends on the MCU operating mode and security state as
shown in Table 17-26.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
505
64 KByte Flash Module (S12FTMRG64K512V1)
17.6
Initialization
On each system reset the flash module executes an initialization sequence which establishes initial values
for the Flash Block Configuration Parameters, the FPROT and EEPROT protection registers, and the
FOPT and FSEC registers. The initialization routine reverts to built-in default values that leave the module
in a fully protected and secured state if errors are encountered during execution of the reset sequence. If a
double bit fault is detected during the reset sequence, both MGSTAT bits in the FSTAT register will be set.
CCIF is cleared throughout the initialization sequence. The Flash module holds off all CPU access for a
portion of the initialization sequence. Flash reads are allowed once the hold is removed. Completion of the
initialization sequence is marked by setting CCIF high which enables user commands.
If a reset occurs while any Flash command is in progress, that command will be immediately aborted. The
state of the word being programmed or the sector/block being erased is not guaranteed.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
506
Freescale Semiconductor
Appendix A
MCU Electrical Specifications
A.1
General
This supplement contains the most accurate electrical information for the MC9S12VR-Family available at
the time of publication.
This introduction is intended to give an overview on several common topics like power supply, current
injection etc.
A.1.1
Parameter Classification
The electrical parameters shown in this supplement are guaranteed by various methods. To give the
customer a better understanding the following classification is used and the parameters are tagged
accordingly in the tables where appropriate.
NOTE
This classification is shown in the column labeled “C” in the parameter
tables where appropriate.
P:
C:
T:
D:
Those parameters are guaranteed during production testing on each individual device.
Those parameters are achieved by the design characterization by measuring a statistically relevant
sample size across process variations.
Those parameters are achieved by design characterization on a small sample size from typical
devices under typical conditions unless otherwise noted. All values shown in the typical column
are within this category.
Those parameters are derived mainly from simulations.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
507
MCU Electrical Specifications
Table A-1. Power Supplies
Mnemonic
Nominal Voltage
VSS
0V
VDDX1
1
5.0 V
VSSX12
0V
VDDX2
5.0 V
VSSX2
0V
VDDA
3
5.0 V
Description
Ground pin for 1.8V core supply voltage generated by on chip voltage regulator
5V power supply output for I/O drivers generated by on chip voltage regulator
Ground pin for I/O drivers
5V power supply output for I/O drivers generated by on chip voltage regulator
Ground pin for I/O drivers
External power supply for the analog-to-digital converter and for the reference circuit of the
internal voltage regulator
VSSA
0V
Ground pin for VDDA analog supply
LGND
0V
Ground pin for LIN physical
LSGND
0V
Ground pin for low-side driver
VSUP
12V/18V
External power supply for voltage regulator
VSUPHS
12V/18V
External power supply for high-side driver
1
All VDDX pins are internally connected by metal
All VSSX pins are internally connected by metal
3
VDDA, VDDX and VSSA, VSSX are connected by diodes for ESD protection
2
A.1.2
Pins
There are four groups of functional pins.
A.1.2.1
I/O Pins
The I/O pins have a level in the range of 3.13V to 5.5V. This class of pins is comprised of all port I/O pins,
the analog inputs, BKGD and the RESET pins. Some functionality may be disabled.
A.1.2.2
High Voltage Pins
LS[1:0], HS[1:0], PL[3:0], VSENSE have a nominal 12V level.
A.1.2.3
Oscillator
The pins EXTAL, XTAL dedicated to the oscillator have a nominal 1.8V level.
A.1.2.4
TEST
This pin is used for production testing only. The TEST pin must be tied to ground in all applications.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
508
Freescale Semiconductor
MCU Electrical Specifications
A.1.3
Current Injection
Power supply must maintain regulation within operating VDDX or VDD range during instantaneous and
operating maximum current conditions. Figure A-1. shows a 5V GPIO pad driver and the on chip voltage
regulator with VDDX output. It shows also the power & gound pins VSUP, VDDX, VSSX and VSSA. Px
represents any 5V GPIO pin. Assume Px is configured as an input. The pad driver transistors P1 and N1
are switched off (high impedance). If the voltage Vin on Px is greated than VDDX a positive injection
current Iin will flow through diode D1 into VDDX node. If this injection current Iin is greater than ILoad,
the internal power supply VDDX may go out of regulation. Ensure external VDDX load will shunt current
greater than maximum injection current. This will be the greatest risk when the MCU is not consuming
power; e.g., if no system clock is present, or if clock rate is very low which would reduce overall power
consumption.
Figure A-1. Current Injection on GPIO Port if Vin > VDDX
VSUP
Voltage Regulator
VBG
+
_
ISUP
Pad Driver
P2
IDDX
VDDX
ILoad
C
Load
Iin
P1
D1
Iin
Px
N1
Vin > VDDX
VSSX
VSSA
A.1.4
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Absolute maximum ratings are stress ratings only. A functional operation under or outside those maxima
is not guaranteed. Stress beyond those limits may affect the reliability or cause permanent damage of the
device.
This device contains circuitry protecting against damage due to high static voltage or electrical fields;
however, it is advised that normal precautions be taken to avoid application of any voltages higher than
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
509
MCU Electrical Specifications
maximum-rated voltages to this high-impedance circuit. Reliability of operation is enhanced if unused
inputs are tied to an appropriate logic voltage level.
Table A-2. Absolute Maximum Ratings1
Num
Rating
1
Voltage regulator and LINPHY supply voltage
2
High side driver supply voltage
VDDA2
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
VSUP
-0.3V
42
V
VSUPHS
-0.3
42
V
∆VDDX
–0.3
0.3
V
3
Voltage difference VDDX to
4
Voltage difference VSSX to VSSA
∆VSSX
–0.3
0.3
V
5
Digital I/O input voltage sources
VIN
–0.3
6.0
V
6
HVI PL[3:0] input voltage
VLx
-0.3
42
V
7
High-side driver HS[1:0]
VPHS0/1
0
VSUPHS +
0.3V
V
8
Low-side driver LS[1:0]
VPLS0/1
0
40
V
VILV
–0.3
2.16
V
I
–25
+25
mA
IEVDD
-25
+120
mA
IDL
–25
+25
mA
Tstg
–65
155
°C
3
9
EXTAL, XTAL
10
Instantaneous maximum current
Single pin limit for all digital I/O pins4
11
Instantaneous maximum current on PP2 / EVDD
12
Instantaneous maximum current
Single pin limit for EXTAL, XTAL
13
Storage temperature range
D
1
Beyond absolute maximum ratings device might be damaged.
VDDX and VDDA must be shorted
3 EXTAL and XTAL are shared with PE0 and PE1 5V GPIO’s
4 All digital I/O pins are internally clamped to V
SSX and VDDX, or VSSA and VDDA.
2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
510
Freescale Semiconductor
MCU Electrical Specifications
A.1.5
ESD Protection and Latch-up Immunity
All ESD testing is in conformity with CDF-AEC-Q100 stress test qualification for automotive grade
integrated circuits. During the device qualification ESD stresses were performed for the Human Body
Model (HBM) and the Charged-Device Model.
A device will be defined as a failure if after exposure to ESD pulses the device no longer meets the device
specification. Complete DC parametric and functional testing is performed per the applicable device
specification at room temperature followed by hot temperature, unless specified otherwise in the device
specification.
Table A-3. ESD and Latch-up Test Conditions
Model
Spec
Human Body
ChargedDevice
Description
JESD22-A114
JESD22-C101
Symbol
Value
Unit
Series Resistance
R
1500
Ω
Storage Capacitance
C
100
pF
Number of Pulse per pin
positive
negative
-
3
3
Series Resistance
R
0
Ω
Storage Capacitance
C
4
pF
Latch-up for
5V GPIO’s
Minimum Input Voltage Limit
-2.5
V
Maximum Input Voltage Limit
+7.5
V
Latch-up for
LS/HS/HVI/V
SENSE/LIN
Minimum Input Voltage Limit
-7
V
Maximum Input Voltage Limit
+21
V
Table A-4. ESD Protection and Latch-up Characteristics for Maskset 2N05E
Num
C
1
C
2
Rating
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
HBM: LIN to LGND
+/- 6
-
KV
C
HBM: VSENSE, HVI[3:0] to GND
+/- 4
KV
3
C
HBM: HS1, HS2 to GND
+/- 4
KV
4
C
HBM: LS0, LS1 to GND
+/- 2
KV
5
C
HBM: Pin to Pin (all Pins LS0, LS1 excluded)
+/- 2
KV
6
C
HBM: Pin to Pin (all Pins LS0, LS1 included)
+/- 1.25
KV
7
C
CDM : Corner Pins
VCDM
+/-750
8
C
CDM: All other Pins
VCDM
+/-500
9
C
Direct Contact Discharge IEC61000-4-2 with and with
out 220pF capacitor (R=330, C=150pF):
LIN vs LGND
VESDIEC
+/-6
VHBM
-
V
V
-
KV
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
511
MCU Electrical Specifications
Table A-4. ESD Protection and Latch-up Characteristics for Maskset 2N05E
10
11
C
C
Latch-up Current of 5V GPIO’s at T=125°C
positive
negative
ILAT
Latch-up Current for LS[1:0], HS[1:0], VSENSE, LIN
& HVI[3:0] at T=125°C
positive
negative
ILAT
+100
-100
+100
-100
-
mA
-
mA
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
512
Freescale Semiconductor
MCU Electrical Specifications
A.1.6
Operating Conditions
This section describes the operating conditions of the device. Unless otherwise noted those conditions
apply to all the following data.
NOTE
Please refer to the temperature rating of the device with regards to the
ambient temperature TA and the junction temperature TJ. For power
dissipation calculations refer to Section A.1.7, “Power Dissipation and
Thermal Characteristics”.
Table A-5. Operating Conditions
Num
Rating
Symbol
1
Voltage regulator and LINPHY supply voltage
2
High side driver supply voltage
3
4
5
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1
V
VSUP
3.7
12
40
VSUPHS
3.7
12
401
V
Oscillator
fosc
4
—
16
MHz
Bus frequency
fbus
see
Footnote2
—
25
MHz
TJ
TA
–40
–40
—
—
150
105
°C
Operating junction temperature range
Operating ambient temperature range3
1
Normal operating range is 6V - 18V. Continous operation at 40V is not allowed. Only Transient Conditions (Load Dump)
single pulse tmax<400ms
2 Minimum bus frequency for ADC module refer to Table C-1., “ATD Operating Characteristics and for Flash Module refer to
Table M-1., “NVM Timing Characteristics
3
Please refer to Section A.1.7, “Power Dissipation and Thermal Characteristics” for more details about the relation between
ambient temperature TA and device junction temperature TJ.
NOTE
Operation is guaranteed when powering down until low voltage reset
assertion.
A.1.7
Power Dissipation and Thermal Characteristics
Power dissipation and thermal characteristics are closely related. The user must assure that the maximum
operating junction temperature is not exceeded. The average chip-junction temperature (TJ) in °C can be
obtained from:
T
T
T
J
= Junction Temperature, [°C ]
A
= Ambient Temperature, [°C ]
P
D
Θ
J
= T + (P • Θ )
A
D
JA
= Total Chip Power Dissipation, [W]
JA
= Package Thermal Resistance, [°C/W]
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
513
MCU Electrical Specifications
The total power dissipation PD can be calculated from the equation below. Table A-6 below lists the power
dissipation components . Figure A-2. gives an overview of the supply currents.
PD = PINT + PHS + PLS + PLIN + PSENSE + PHVI - PEVDD - PGPIO
Table A-6. Power Dissipation Components
Power Component
Description
PINT = VSUP ISUP
Internal Power for LQFP 48 Package with
seperate VSUP and VSUPHS pins.
PINT = VSUP (ISUP - IPHS0/1)
Internal Power for LQFP 32 Package with single VSUP pin which is double bonded to
VSUP pad and VSUPHS pad.
PHS = IPHS0/12 RDSONHS0/1
Power dissipation of High-side drivers
PLS = IPLS0/12 RDSONLS0/1
Power dissipation of Low-side drivers
PLIN = VLIN ILIN
Power dissipation of LINPHY
PSENSE = VSENSE ISENSE
Power dissipation of Battery Sensor
PHVI = VHVI IHVI
Power dissipation of High Voltage Inputs
PEVDD = VDDX IEVDD
Power dissipation of external load driven by
EVDD. (see Figure A-2.) This component is
included in PINT and is subtracted from overall
MCU power dissipation PD
PGPIO = VI/O II/O
Power dissipation of external load driven by
GPIO Port.(see Figure A-2.) Assuming the
load is connected between GPIO and ground.
This power component is included in PINT and
is subtracted from overall MCU power dissipation PD
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
514
Freescale Semiconductor
MCU Electrical Specifications
Figure A-2. Supply Currents Overview
VBAT
MC9S12VR64
ISENSE
VSENSE
IPLS0/1
VBAT
LS[1:0]
ISUP
GND
ISUPHS
VSUP
VSUPHS
VDDA
IPHS0/1
HS[1:0]
VDDX1
VDDX2
IHVI
Switch
Inputs
HVI[3:0]
VSSX1
VSSX2
II/O
GPIO
RL2
VI/O
IEVDD
ILIN
LIN
EVDD
RL1
VDDX
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
515
MCU Electrical Specifications
Table A-7. Thermal Package Characteristics1
Num
C
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
LQFP 32
1
D
Thermal resistance LQFP 32, single sided PCB1
θJA
—
85
—
°C/W
2
D
Thermal resistance LQFP 32, double sided PCB
with 2 internal planes2
θJA
—
56
—
°C/W
3
D
Junction to Board LQFP 32
θJB
—
33
—
°C/W
D
4
θJC
—
23
—
°C/W
ΨJT
—
5
—
°C/W
4
5
D
Junction to Case LQFP 32
5
Junction to Case (Bottom) LQFP 32
LQFP 48
6
D
Thermal resistance LQFP 48, single sided PCB3
θJA
—
80
—
°C/W
7
D
Thermal resistance LQFP 48, double sided PCB
with 2 internal planes4
θJA
—
56
—
°C/W
8
D
Junction to Board LQFP 48
θJB
—
34
—
°C/W
D
4
θJC
—
23
—
°C/W
ΨJT
—
5
—
°C/W
9
10
D
Junction to Case LQFP 48
5
Junction to Case (Bottom) LQFP 48
1
Junction to ambient thermal resistance, θJA was simulated to be equivalent to the JEDEC specification JESD51-2 in a
horizontal configuration in natural convection.
2 Junction to ambient thermal resistance, θ was simulated to be equivalent to the JEDEC specification JESD51-7 in a
JA
horizontal configuration in natural convection.
3 Junction to ambient thermal resistance, θ was simulated to be equivalent to the JEDEC specification JESD51-2 in a
JA
horizontal configuration in natural convection.
4
Junction to ambient thermal resistance, θJA was simulated to be equivalent to the JEDEC specification JESD51-7 in a
horizontal configuration in natural convection.
1. The values for thermal resistance are achieved by package simulations
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
516
Freescale Semiconductor
MCU Electrical Specifications
A.1.8
I/O Characteristics
This section describes the characteristics of I/O pins
Table A-8. 5-V I/O Characteristics
ALL 5V RANGE I/O PARAMETERS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE FOLLOWING CHARACTERIZATION
Conditions are 4.5 V < VDDX< 5.5 V junction temperature from –40°C to +150°C, unless otherwise noted
I/O Characteristics for all I/O pins except EXTAL, XTAL,TEST, PL, HS[1:0], LS[1:0], LIN and supply pins.
Num C
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
0.65*VDDX
—
—
V
1
P Input high voltage
V
2
T Input high voltage
VIH
—
—
VDDX+0.3
V
3
P Input low voltage
VIL
—
—
0.35*VDDX
V
4
T Input low voltage
VIL
VSSX–0.3
—
—
V
5
C Input hysteresis
VHYS
250
—
mV
6
P Input leakage current (pins in high impedance input
mode)1 Vin = VDDX or VSSX
1
µA
7
—
V
IH
Iin
-1
P Output high voltage (pins in output mode)
IOH = –4 mA for PP[5:3], PS, PT, PAD
VOH
VDDX – 0.8
8
P Output high voltage (pins in output mode) PP[1:0]
Partial Drive IOH = –2 mA
Full Drive IOH = –10mA
V
VDDX – 0.8
V
9
P Output high voltage (pins in output mode)
PP[2]/EVDD
Partial Drive IOH = –2 mA
Full Drive IOH = –20mA
V
VDDX – 0.8
V
10
P Output low voltage (pins in output mode)
IOL = +4mA for PP[5:3], PS, PT, PAD
VOL
11
P Output low voltage (pins in output mode) PP[1:0]
Partial drive IOL = +2mA
Full drive IOL = +10mA
12
OH
OH
0.8
V
V
0.8
V
P Output low voltage (pins in output mode) for
PP[2]/EVDD
Partial drive IOL = +2mA
Full drive IOL = +20mA
V
0.8
V
13
P Over-current Detect Threshold PP[2]/EVDD
IOCD
20
55
mA
14
P Internal pull up resistor on RESET pin
VIH min > input voltage > VIL max
RPUL
3.8
5
10.5
ΚΩ
15
P Internal pull up current
VIH min > input voltage > VIL max
IPUL
-10
—
-130
µA
16
P Internal pull down current
VIH min > input voltage > VIL max
IPDH
10
—
130
µA
17
D Input capacitance
Cin
—
7
—
pF
IICS
IICP
–2.5
–25
18
—
—
OL
OL
2
T Injection current
Single pin limit
Total device Limit, sum of all injected currents
—
—
mA
2.5
25
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
517
MCU Electrical Specifications
1
Maximum leakage current occurs at maximum operating temperature. Current decreases by approximately one-half for each
8°C to 12 C° in the temperature range from 50°C to 125°C.
2
Refer to Section A.1.3, “Current Injection” for more details
A.1.9
Supply Currents
This section describes the current consumption characteristics of the device as well as the conditions for
the measurements.
A.1.9.1
Measurement Conditions
Current is measured on VSUP & VSUPHS pins. VDDX is connected to VDDA. It does not include the
current to drive external loads. Unless otherwise noted the currents are measured in special single chip
mode and the CPU code is executed from RAM. For Run and Wait current measurements PLL is on and
the reference clock is the IRC1M trimmed to 1MHz. The bus frequency is 25MHz and the CPU frequency
is 50MHz. Table A-9, Table A-10 and Table A-11 show the configuration of the CPMU module and the
peripherals for Run, Wait and Stop current measurement.
Table A-9. CPMU Configuration for Pseudo Stop Current Measurement
CPMU REGISTER
Bit settings/Conditions
CPMUCLKS
PLLSEL=0, PSTP=1, CSAD=0
PRE=PCE=RTIOSCSEL=COPOSCSEL=1
CPMUOSC
OSCE=1, External Square wave on EXTAL fEXTAL=4MHz,
VIH= 1.8V, VIL=0V
CPMURTI
RTDEC=0, RTR[6:4]=111, RTR[3:0]=1111;
CPMUCOP
WCOP=1, CR[2:0]=111
Table A-10. CPMU Configuration for Run/Wait and Full Stop Current Measurement
CPMU REGISTER
CPMUSYNR
CPMUPOSTDIV
Bit settings/Conditions
VCOFRQ[1:0]=01,SYNDIV[5:0] = 23
POSTDIV[4:0]=0
CPMUCLKS
PLLSEL=1
CPMUOSC
OSCE=0,
Reference clock for PLL is fref=firc1m trimmed to 1MHz
API settings for STOP current measurement
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
518
Freescale Semiconductor
MCU Electrical Specifications
Table A-10. CPMU Configuration for Run/Wait and Full Stop Current Measurement
CPMU REGISTER
Bit settings/Conditions
CPMUAPICTL
APIEA=0, APIFE=1, APIE=0
CPMUAPITR
trimmed to >=10Khz
CPMUAPIRH/RL
set to $FFFF
Table A-11. Peripheral Configurations for Run & Wait Current Measurement
Peripheral
Configuration
SCI
continuously transmit data (0x55) at speed of 19200 baud
SPI
configured to master mode, continuously transmit data
(0x55) at 1Mbit/s
PWM
configured to toggle its pins at the rate of 40kHz
ADC
the peripheral is configured to operate at its maximum specified frequency and to continuously convert voltages on all
input channels in sequence.
DBG
the module is enabled and the comparators are configured
to trigger in outside range.The range covers all the code
executed by the core.
TIM
the peripheral is configured to output compare mode, pulse
accumulator and modulus counter enabled.
COP & RTI
enabled
HSDRV 1 & 2
module is enabled but output driver disabled
LSDRV 1 & 2
module is enabled but output driver disabled
BATS
enabled
connected to SCI and continuously transmit data (0x55) at
speed of 19200 baud
LINPHY
Table A-12. Run and Wait Current Characteristics
Conditions are: VSUP=VSUPHS=18V, TA=105°C, see Table A-10 and Table A-9
Num
C
Rating
1
P
Run Current
2
P
Wait Current
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
ISUPR
15
22
mA
ISUPW
10
15
mA
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
519
MCU Electrical Specifications
Table A-13. Stop Current Characteristics
Conditions are: VSUP=VSUPHS=12V API see CPMU Configuration for Pseudo Stop Current
MeasurementTable A-9.
Num
C
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
ISUPS
29
60
µA
Stop Current all modules off
1
P
TA = TJ = -40°C
1
1
2
P
TA = TJ = 150°C
ISUPS
140
600
µA
3
C
TA = TJ = 25°C1
ISUPS
33
65
µA
4
C
TA = TJ = 105°C1
ISUPS
55
90
µA
Stop Current API enabled & LINPHY in standby (see 15.4.3.4 Standby Mode with wake-up feature)
5
1
C
TA = TJ = 25°C1
ISUPS
50
80
µA
If MCU is in STOP long enough then TA = TJ . Die self heating due to stop current can be ignored.
Table A-14. Pseudo Stop Current Characteristics
Conditions are: VSUP=VSUPHS=12V, API see CPMU Configuration for Pseudo Stop Current
MeasurementTable A-9., COP & RTI enabled
Num
C
1
C
Rating
TA= 25°C
Symbol
Min
ISUPPS
Typ
Max
Unit
358
480
µA
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
520
Freescale Semiconductor
Appendix B
VREG Electrical Specifications
Table B-1. Voltage Regulator Electrical Characteristics
-40oC <= TJ <= 150oC unless noted otherwise, VDDA and VDDX must be shorted on the application board.
Num
C
1
P
Input Voltages
P
4
Characteristic
Symbol
Min
Typical
Max
Unit
VSUP
3.5
—
40
V
Output Voltage VDDX
Full Performance Mode VSUP > 6V
Full Performance Mode 5.5V < VSUP <=6V
Full Performance Mode 3.5V <= VSUP <=5.5V
Reduced Performance Mode (stopmode)
VSUP > =3.5V
VDDX
4.75
4.50
3.13
5.0
5.0
—
5.25
5.25
5.25
V
V
V
2.5
5.5
5.75
V
IDDX
0
0
0
—
—
—
70
25
5
mA
mA
mA
5
P
Load Current VDDX1 2,3
Full Performance Mode VSUP > 6V
Full Performance Mode 3.5V <= VSUP <=6V
Reduced Performance Mode (stopmode)
6
P
Low Voltage Interrupt Assert Level4
Low Voltage Interrupt Deassert Level
VLVIA
VLVID
4.04
4.19
4.23
4.38
4.40
4.49
V
V
7a
P
VDDX Low Voltage Reset deassert5
VLVRXD
—
—
3.13
V
7b
P
VDDX Low Voltage Reset assert
VLVRXA
2.97
3.02
—
V
8
C
Trimmed ACLK output frequency
fACLK
—
20
—
KHz
9
C
Trimmed ACLK internal clock ∆f / fnominal 6
dfACLK
- 5%
—
+ 5%
—
10
D
The first period after enabling the counter by
APIFE might be reduced by API start up delay
tsdel
—
—
100
µs
11
T
Temperature Sensor Slope
dVHT
5.05
5.25
5.45
mV/o
C
12
T
Temperature Sensor Output Voltage at Tj=150oC
VHT
—
2.4
—
V
13
T
High Temperature Interrupt Assert7
High Temperature Interrupt Deassert
THTIA
THTID
120
110
132
122
144
134
oC
oC
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
521
VREG Electrical Specifications
Table B-1. Voltage Regulator Electrical Characteristics
-40oC <= TJ <= 150oC unless noted otherwise, VDDA and VDDX must be shorted on the application board.
Num
C
Characteristic
14
P
Bandgap output voltage
15
C
VBG Voltage Distribution
over input voltage VSUP
3.5V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18V, TA = 125°C
16
C
VBG Voltage Distribution
over ambient temperature TA
VSUP = 12V, -40°C ≤ TA ≤ 125°C
17
D
Recovery time from STOP
Symbol
Min
Typical
Max
Unit
VBG
1.13
1.22
1.32
V
∆VBGV
-5
5
mV
∆VBGV
-20
20
mV
tSTP_REC
—
—
µs
23
1For
the given maximum load currents and VSUP input voltages, the MCU will stay out of reset.
note that the core current is derived from VDDX
3further limitation may apply due to maximum allowable T
J
4LVI is monitored on the VDDA supply domain
5LVRX is monitored on the VDDX supply domain only active during full performance mode. During reduced performance
mode (stopmode) voltage supervision is solely performed by the POR block monitoring core VDD.
6The ACLK trimming must be set that the minimum period equals to 0.2ms
7VREGHTTR=$88
2Please
NOTE
The LVR monitors the voltages VDD, VDDF and VDDX. If the voltage
drops on these supplies to a level which could prohibit the correct function
(e.g. code execution) of the microcontroller, the LVR triggers.
Table B-2. Recommended Capacitor Values
Num
Characteristic
Symbol
Typical1
Unit
1
VDDX capacitor2
CVDDX
100-220
nF
2
3
VDDA capacitor
CVDDA
100-220
nF
3
Stability capacitor4,5
CVDD5
4.7 or 10
µF
1Values
are nominal component values.
X7R ceramics
3X7R ceramics
4Can be placed anywhere on the 5V supply node (VDDA, VDDX)
54.7µF X7R ceramics or 10µF tantalum
2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
522
Freescale Semiconductor
Appendix C
ATD Electrical Specifications
This section describes the characteristics of the analog-to-digital converter.
C.1
ATD Operating Characteristics
The Table C-1 and Table C-2 show conditions under which the ATD operates.
The following constraints exist to obtain full-scale, full range results:
VSSA ≤ VRL ≤ VIN ≤ VRH ≤ VDDA.
This constraint exists since the sample buffer amplifier can not drive beyond the power supply levels that
it ties to. If the input level goes outside of this range it will effectively be clipped.
Table C-1. ATD Operating Characteristics
Supply voltage 3.13 V < VDDA < 5.5 V, -40oC < TJ < 150oC
Num C
1
2
D Reference potential
Low
High
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VRL
VRH
VSSA
VDDA/2
—
—
VDDA/2
VDDA
V
V
2
D Voltage difference VDDX to VDDA
∆VDDX
–2.35
0
0.1
V
3
D Voltage difference VSSX to VSSA
∆VSSX
–0.1
0
0.1
V
VRH-VRL
3.13
5.0
5.5
V
0.25
8.0
MHz
19
17
41
39
ATD
clock
Cycles
1
4
C Differential reference voltage
5
C ATD Clock Frequency (derived from bus clock via the
prescaler bus)
6
1
Rating
ATD Conversion Period2
10 bit resolution:
D
8 bit resolution:
fATDCLk
NCONV10
NCONV8
Full accuracy is not guaranteed when differential voltage is less than 4.50 V
The minimum time assumes a sample time of 4 ATD clock cycles. The maximum time assumes a sample time of 24 ATD clock
cycles and the discharge feature (SMP_DIS) enabled, which adds 2 ATD clock cycles.
C.2
Factors Influencing Accuracy
Source resistance, source capacitance and current injection have an influence on the accuracy of the ATD.
A further factor is that PortAD pins that are configured as output drivers switching.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
523
ATD Electrical Specifications
C.2.1
Port AD Output Drivers Switching
PortAD output drivers switching can adversely affect the ATD accuracy whilst converting the analog
voltage on other PortAD pins because the output drivers are supplied from the VDDA/VSSA ATD supply
pins. Although internal design measures are implemented to minimize the affect of output driver noise, it
is recommended to configure PortAD pins as outputs only for low frequency, low load outputs. The impact
on ATD accuracy is load dependent and not specified. The values specified are valid under condition that
no PortAD output drivers switch during conversion.
C.2.2
Source Resistance
Due to the input pin leakage current as specified in conjunction with the source resistance there will be a
voltage drop from the signal source to the ATD input. The maximum source resistance RS specifies results
in an error (10-bit resolution) of less than 1/2 LSB (2.5 mV) at the maximum leakage current. If device or
operating conditions are less than worst case or leakage-induced error is acceptable, larger values of source
resistance of up to 10Kohm are allowed.
C.2.3
Source Capacitance
When sampling an additional internal capacitor is switched to the input. This can cause a voltage drop due
to charge sharing with the external and the pin capacitance. For a maximum sampling error of the input
voltage ≤ 1LSB (10-bit resilution), then the external filter capacitor, Cf ≥ 1024 * (CINS–CINN).
C.2.4
Current Injection
There are two cases to consider.
1. A current is injected into the channel being converted. The channel being stressed has conversion
values of $3FF (in 10-bit mode) for analog inputs greater than VRH and $000 for values less than
VRL unless the current is higher than specified as disruptive condition.
2. Current is injected into pins in the neighborhood of the channel being converted. A portion of this
current is picked up by the channel (coupling ratio K), This additional current impacts the accuracy
of the conversion depending on the source resistance.
The additional input voltage error on the converted channel can be calculated as:
VERR = K * RS * IINJ
with IINJ being the sum of the currents injected into the two pins adjacent to the converted channel.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
524
Freescale Semiconductor
ATD Electrical Specifications
Table C-2. ATD Electrical Characteristics
Supply voltage 3.13 V < VDDA < 5.5 V, -40oC < TJ < 150oC
Num C
1
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
RS
—
—
1
KΩ
1
C Max input source resistance1
2
D Total input capacitance Non sampling
Total input capacitance Sampling
CINN
CINS
—
—
—
—
10
16
pF
3
D Input internal Resistance
RINA
-
5
15
kΩ
4
C Disruptive analog input current
INA
-2.5
—
2.5
mA
5
C Coupling ratio positive current injection
Kp
—
—
1E-4
A/A
6
C Coupling ratio negative current injection
Kn
—
—
5E-3
A/A
1 Refer to C.2.2 for further information concerning source resistance
C.3
ATD Accuracy
Table C-3. and Table C-4. specifies the ATD conversion performance excluding any errors due to current
injection, input capacitance and source resistance.
C.3.1
ATD Accuracy Definitions
For the following definitions see also Figure C-1.
Differential non-linearity (DNL) is defined as the difference between two adjacent switching steps.
V –V
i
i–1
DNL ( i ) = -------------------------- – 1
1LSB
The integral non-linearity (INL) is defined as the sum of all DNLs:
n
INL ( n ) =
n
0
-–n
∑ DNL(i) = -------------------1LSB
V –V
i=1
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
525
ATD Electrical Specifications
DNL
Vi-1
10-Bit Absolute Error Boundary
LSB
Vi
$3FF
8-Bit Absolute Error Boundary
$3FE
$3FD
$FF
$3FC
$3FB
$3FA
$3F9
$FE
$3F8
$3F7
$3F6
$3F5
10-Bit Resolution
$3F3
9
Ideal Transfer Curve
2
8
8-Bit Resolution
$FD
$3F4
7
10-Bit Transfer Curve
6
5
1
4
3
8-Bit Transfer Curve
2
1
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95 100 105 110 115 120
5000 +
Vin
mV
Figure C-1. ATD Accuracy Definitions
NOTE
Figure A-1 shows only definitions, for specification values refer to Table
A-3 and Table A-4.
Table C-3. ATD Conversion Performance 5V range
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
526
Freescale Semiconductor
ATD Electrical Specifications
Supply voltage VDDA =5.12 V, -40oC < TJ < 150oC. VREF = VRH - VRL = 5.12V. fATDCLK = 8.0MHz
The values are tested to be valid with no PortAD output drivers switching simultaneous with conversions.
Num C
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
5
Unit
1
P Resolution
10-Bit
LSB
mV
2
P Differential Nonlinearity
10-Bit
DNL
-1
±0.5
1
counts
3
P Integral Nonlinearity
10-Bit
INL
-2
±1
2
counts
4
P Absolute Error
10-Bit
AE
-3
±2
3
counts
5
C Resolution
8-Bit
LSB
6
C Differential Nonlinearity
8-Bit
DNL
-0.5
±0.3
0.5
counts
7
C Integral Nonlinearity
8-Bit
INL
-1
±0.5
1
counts
8
C Absolute Error
8-Bit
AE
-1.5
±1
1.5
counts
Max
Unit
20
mV
Table C-4. ATD Conversion Performance 3.3V range
Supply voltage VDDA = 3.3V, -40oC < TJ < 150oC. VREF = VRH - VRL = 3.3V. fATDCLK = 8.0MHz
The values are tested to be valid with no PortAD output drivers switching simultaneous with conversions.
Num C
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
1
C Resolution
10-Bit
LSB
3.22
mV
2
C Differential Nonlinearity
10-Bit
DNL
-1.5
±1
1.5
counts
3
C Integral Nonlinearity
10-Bit
INL
-2
±1
2
counts
4
C Absolute Error
10-Bit
AE
-3
±2
3
counts
5
C Resolution
8-Bit
LSB
6
C Differential Nonlinearity
8-Bit
DNL
-0.5
±0.3
0.5
counts
7
C Integral Nonlinearity
8-Bit
INL
-1
±0.5
1
counts
8
C Absolute Error
8-Bit
AE
-1.5
±1
1.5
counts
12.89
mV
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
527
ATD Electrical Specifications
C.3.2
ATD Analog Input Parasitics
Figure C-2. ATD Input Parasitics
VDDA
sampling time is 4 to 24 adc clock cycles of
0.25MHz to 8MHz -> 96µs >= tsample >= 500ns
Ileakp < 0.5µA
PAD0PAD5
Ileakn < 0.5µA
920Ω < Rpath < 9.9KΩ
(incl parasitics)
Ctop
3.7pF < S/H Cap < 6.2pF
(incl parasitics)
Cbottom
connected to low ohmic
supply during sampling
VSSA
Ctop potential just prior to sampling is either
a) ~ last converted channel potential or
b) ground level if S/H discharge feature is enabled.
Complete 10bit conversion takes between 19 and 41 adc clock cycles
Switch resistance depends on input voltage, corner ranges are shown.
Leakage current is guaranteed by specification.
Tjmax=130oC
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
528
Freescale Semiconductor
HSDRV Electrical Specifications
Appendix D
HSDRV Electrical Specifications
This section provides electrical parametric and ratings for the HSDRV.
D.1
Operating Characteristics
Table D-1. Operating Characteristics - HSDRV
-40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2
under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
1
2
Num
C
Ratings
1
P
High Voltage Supply for the high-side drivers.
2
T
VSUP_HS in case of being connected to VDDX
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VSUPHS
7
–
42
V
VSUPHS_X
4.5
–
5.5
V
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
D.2
Static Characteristics
Table D-2. Static Characteristics - HSDRV
Characteristics noted under conditions 7V ≤ VSUPHS ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values
noted reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
1
P
2
P
Ratings
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Output Drain-to-Source On Resistance
TJ = 150˚C, IPHS0/1 = 50 mA
RDS(ON)
–
–
18.0
Ω
Output Over-Current Threshold.
The threashold is valid for each HS-driver output.
ILIMHSX
90
120
150
mA
INOMHSX
–
–
50
mA
Note:
The high-side driver is NOT intended to switch
capacitive loads. A significant capacitive load
on PHS0/1 would induce a current when the
high-side driver gate is turned on. This current
will be sensed by the over-current circuitry
and eventually lead to an immediate
over-current shut down.
3
T
Nominal Current for continuous operation.
This value is valid for each HS-driver output.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
529
HSDRV Electrical Specifications
Table D-2. Static Characteristics - HSDRV
Characteristics noted under conditions 7V ≤ VSUPHS ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values
noted reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
Ratings
4
P
High-Load Resistance Open-Load Detection Current
(if High-side driver is enabled and gate turned off)
5
T
Leakage Current -40˚C < TJ < 80˚C
Leakage Current 80˚C < TJ< 150˚C
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
IHLROLDC
–
40
–
µA
ILEAK_L
ILEAK_H
-1
-10
–
–
1
10
µA
µA
Open Load Detection disabled.
(0V < VPHS0/1 < VSUP_HS)
1
2
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
D.3
Dynamic Characteristics
Table D-3. Dynamic Characteristics - HSDRV
Characteristics noted under conditions 7V ≤ VSUPHS ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values
noted reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
1
2
Num
C
Ratings
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1
T
High-Side Driver Operating Frequency
fHS
–
–
10
kHz
2
T
High-Load Resistance Open-Load Detection Switch On
Time
tHLROLOT
–
–
1
µs
3
D
High-Load Resistance Open-Load Detection Time
(capacitive load = 50pF)
tHLROLDT
–
–
40
µs
4
D
Settling time after the high-side driver is enabled (write
HSEx Bits)
tHS_settling
1
–
µs
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
530
Freescale Semiconductor
Appendix E
PLL Electrical Specifications
E.1
Reset, Oscillator and PLL
E.1.1
Phase Locked Loop
E.1.1.1
Jitter Information
With each transition of the feedback clock, the deviation from the reference clock is measured and the
input voltage to the VCO is adjusted accordingly.The adjustment is done continuously with no abrupt
changes in the VCOCLK frequency. Noise, voltage, temperature and other factors cause slight variations
in the control loop resulting in a clock jitter. This jitter affects the real minimum and maximum clock
periods as illustrated in Figure E-1..
1
0
2
3
N-1
N
tmin1
tnom
tmax1
tminN
tmaxN
Figure E-1. Jitter Definitions
The relative deviation of tnom is at its maximum for one clock period, and decreases towards zero for larger
number of clock periods (N).
Defining the jitter as:
t
(N)
t
(N) ⎞
⎛
max
min
J ( N ) = max ⎜ 1 – ----------------------- , 1 – ----------------------- ⎟
N⋅t
N⋅t
⎝
nom
nom ⎠
The following equation is a good fit for the maximum jitter:
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
531
PLL Electrical Specifications
j1
J ( N ) = -------N
J(N)
1
5
10
20
N
Figure E-2. Maximum Bus Clock Jitter Approximation
NOTE
On timers and serial modules a prescaler will eliminate the effect of the jitter
to a large extent.
Table E-1. ipll_1vdd_ll18 Characteristics
Conditions are shown in Figure A-5 unless otherwise noted
Num C
Rating
Symbol
Min
fVCORST
Typ
Max
Unit
8
32
MHz
50
MHz
1
D VCO frequency during system reset
2
C VCO locking range
fVCO
32
3
C Reference Clock
fREF
1
4
D Lock Detection
|∆Lock|
0
1.5
%1
5
D Un-Lock Detection
|∆unl|
0.5
2.5
%1
6
C Time to lock
tlock
150 +
256/fREF
µs
7
C
Jitter fit parameter 12
IRC as reference clock source
j1
1.4
%
8
C
Jitter fit parameter 13
XOSCLCP as reference clock source
j1
1.0
%
MHz
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
532
Freescale Semiconductor
PLL Electrical Specifications
1
% deviation from target frequency
fREF = 1MHz (IRC), fBUS = 25MHz equivalent fPLL=50MHz, CPMUSYNR=0x58, CPMUREFDIV=0x00,CPMUPOSTDIV=0x00
3 f
REF = 4MHz (XOSCLCP), fBUS = 24MHz equivalent fPLL=48MHz,
CPMUSYNR=0x05,CPMUREFDIV=0x40,CPMUPOSTDIV=0x00
2
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
533
PLL Electrical Specifications
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
534
Freescale Semiconductor
IRC Electrical Specifications
Appendix F
IRC Electrical Specifications
Table F-1. IRC electrical characteristics
Num C
1
P
Rating
Junction Temperature - 40 to 150 Celsius
Internal Reference Frequency, factory trimmed
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
fIRC1M_TRIM
0.987
1
1.013
MHz
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
535
IRC Electrical Specifications
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
536
Freescale Semiconductor
LINPHY Electrical Specifications
Appendix G
LINPHY Electrical Specifications
G.1
Maximum Ratings
Table G-1. Maximum ratings of the LINPHY
Characteristics noted under conditions 7V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C unless otherwise noted1. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
Ratings
1
C
DC voltage on LIN
2
D
Continuous current on LIN
Symbol
Value
Unit
VBUS
-32 to +40
V
ILIN
2002
mA
1For
2
3.5V<=VSUP<7V, the LINPHY is still working but with degraded parametrics.
The current on the LIN pin is internally limited. Therefore, it should not be possible to reach the 200mA anyway.
G.2
Static Electrical Characteristics
Table G-2. Static electrical characteristics of the LINPHY
Characteristics noted under conditions 7V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C unless otherwise noted1. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
1
C
VSUP range for LIN compliant electrical
characteristics
2
T
VSUP range within which the device is working without
LIN compliant electrical characteristics
VSUP_NO_LIN
3
T
VSUP range within which the device is not destroyed
VSUP_NO_DES
4
Ratings
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VSUP_LIN
71
12
18
V
3.5 to 7
and
18 to 27
-32
V
40
V
Current consumption, recessive state (VSUP=12V,
VDDX = 5V, VDDA = 5V, VDD = 1.8V, Tj = 25 C)
D
on chip VSUP
3.7
µA
D
on VDDX
812
µA
D
on VDDA
28
µA
D
on VDD
0
µA
5
Current consumption, dominant state (VSUP=12V,
VDDX = 5V, VDDA = 5V, VDD = 1.8V, Tj = 25 C)
D
on chip VSUP
376
µA
D
on VDDX
979
µA
D
on VDDA
28
µA
D
on VDD
0
µA
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
537
LINPHY Electrical Specifications
6
7
Current consumption, standby (VSUP=12V, VDDX =
5V, VDDA = 5V, VDD = 1.8V, Tj = 25 C)
D
on chip VSUP
3.7
µA
D
on VDDX
5.8
µA
D
on VDDA
0
µA
D
on VDD
0
µA
P
Current limitation into the LIN pin in dominant state
IBUS_LIM
40
Input leakage current in dominant state
(VBUS = 0V, VBAT = 12V)
IBUS_PAS_dom
-1
Input leakage current in recessive state
(8V<VBAT<18V, 8V<VBUS<18V, VBUS >= VBAT)
IBUS_PAS_rec
10
Input leakage current when ground disconnected
(GNDDevice = VSUP, 0V<VBUS<18V, VBAT = 12V)
IBUS_NO_GND
11
Input leakage current when battery disconnected
(VSUP_Device = GND, 0<VBUS<18V)
8
9
P
mA
mA
20
µA
1
mA
IBUS_NO_BAT
100
µA
0.4
VSUP
-1
12
P
Receiver dominant state
VBUSdom
13
P
Receiver recessive state
VBUSrec
0.6
14
P
VBUS_CNT =(Vth_dom+ Vth_rec)/2
VBUS_CNT
0.475
15
P
VHYS = Vth_rec -Vth_dom
VHYS
16
D
Capacitance of slave node
Cslave
17
P
Internal pull-up (slave)
Rslave
1For
200
20
VSUP
0.5
0.525
VSUP
0.175
VSUP
220
250
pF
30
60
kΩ
3.5V<=VSUP<7V, the LINPHY is still working but with degraded parametrics.
G.3
Dynamic Electrical Characteristics
Table G-3. Dynamic electrical characteristics of the LINPHY
Characteristics noted under conditions 7V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C unless otherwise noted1. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
1
T
2
3
Ratings
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Minimum duration of wake-up pulse generating a
wake-up interrupt
tWUFR
56
72
120
µs
P
Propagation delay of receiver
trx_pd
6
µs
P
Symmetry of receiver propagation delay rising edge
w.r.t. falling edge
trx_sym
2
µs
-2
LIN PHYSICAL LAYER: DRIVER CHARACTERISTICS FOR NOMINAL SLEW RATE - 20.0KBIT/S
4
T
Rising/falling edge time (min to max / max to min)
5
T
Over-current masking window (IRC trimmed at 1MHz)
trise
tOCLIM
µs
8
15
17
µs
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
538
Freescale Semiconductor
LINPHY Electrical Specifications
Characteristics noted under conditions 7V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C unless otherwise noted1. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
6
P
7
P
Ratings
Symbol
Min
Duty cycle 1
D1
0.396
Duty cycle 2
D2
Typ
Max
Unit
0.581
LIN PHYSICAL LAYER: DRIVER CHARACTERISTICS FOR SLOW SLEW RATE - 10.4KBIT/S
8
T
Rising/falling edge time (min to max / max to min)
9
T
Over-current masking window (IRC trimmed at 1MHz)
10
P
11
P
trise
µs
17
tOCLIM
31
Duty cycle 3
D3
0.417
Duty cycle 4
D4
33
µs
0.590
LIN PHYSICAL LAYER: DRIVER CHARACTERISTICS FOR FAST MODE SLEW RATE - 100KBIT/S UP TO 250KBIT/S
12
T
Rising/falling edge time (min to max / max to min)
13
T
Over-current masking window (IRC trimmed at 1MHz)
1For
trise
tOCLIM
µs
0.8
5
7
µs
3.5V<=VSUP<7V, the LINPHY is still working but with degraded parametrics.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
539
LINPHY Electrical Specifications
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
540
Freescale Semiconductor
LSDRV Electrical Specifications
Appendix H
LSDRV Electrical Specifications
This section provides electrical parametric and ratings for the LSDRV.
H.1
Static Characteristics
Table H-1. Static Characteristics - LSDRV
Characteristics noted under conditions 6V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
Ratings
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
6
12
18
V
1
P
VSUP range for LSDRV compliant electrical
characteristics
VSUP
2
C
VSUP range within which the device is working without
LSDRV compliant electrical characteristics
VSUP
3
P
Output Drain-to-Source On Resistance
TJ = 25˚C, IPLS0/1 = 150 mA
TJ = 150˚C, IPLS0/1 = 150 mA
RDS(ON)
Output Over-Current Threshold
The threashold is valid for each LS-driver output.
4
P
3.5 to 6
and
18 to 27
V
Ω
–
–
2.3
–
–
4.5
ILIMLSX
160
270
350
mA
150
mA
Note:
The low-side driver is NOT intended to switch
capacitive loads. A significant capacitive load
on PLS0/1 would induce a current when the
low-side driver gate is turned on. This current
will be sensed by the over-current circuitry
and eventually lead to an immediate
over-current shut down.
5
D
Nominal Current for continuous operation.
This value is valid for each LS-driver output.
INOMLSX
–
–
5
D
Settling time after the low-side driver is enabled (write
LSEx Bits)
tLS_settling
1
–
7
P
High-Load Resistance Open-Load Detection Current
(if low-side driver is enabled and gate turned off)
IHLROLDC
28
40
52
µA
8
C
Leakage Current -40˚C < TJ < 80˚C
Open Load Detection disabled.
ILEAK_L
–
–
1
µA
µA
9
P
Leakage Current -40˚C < TJ< 150˚C
Open Load Detection disabled.
ILEAK_H
–
–
10
µA
µA
µs
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
541
LSDRV Electrical Specifications
Table H-1. Static Characteristics - LSDRV
Characteristics noted under conditions 6V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
10
1
2
C
P
Ratings
Active Output Voltage Clamp (IPLS0/1 = 150 mA)
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VCLAMP
40
44
–
V
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
H.2
Dynamic Characteristics
Table H-2. Dynamic Characteristics - LSDRV
Characteristics noted under conditions 6V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted
Num
1
2
C
Ratings
1
T
Low-Side Driver Operating Frequency
2
T
Inductive Load on each LS-driver output
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
fLS
–
–
10
kHz
LPLS0/1
–
–
450
mH
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
542
Freescale Semiconductor
BATS Electrical Specifications
Appendix I
BATS Electrical Specifications
This section describe the electrical characteristics of the Supply Voltage Sense module.
I.1
Maximum Ratings
Table I-1. Maximum ratings of the Supply Voltage Sense - (BATS).
Characteristics noted under conditions 5.5V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
1
2
Num
C
1
D
Ratings
VSENSE Max Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VVSENSE_M
-27
–
42
V
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
543
BATS Electrical Specifications
I.2
Static Electrical Characteristics
Table I-2. Static Electrical Characteristics - Supply Voltage Sense - (BATS).
Characteristics noted under conditions 5.5V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
1
P
2
3
4
5
6
7
P
P
P
P
P
T
Ratings
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Low Voltage Warning (LBI 1)
Assert (Measured on selected pin, falling edge)
Deassert (Measured on selected pin, rising edge)
Hysteresis (measured on selected pin)
VLBI1_A
VLBI1_D
VLBI1_H
5
–
–
5.5
–
0.4
6
6.5
–
V
V
V
Low Voltage Warning (LBI 2)
Assert (Measured on selected pin, falling edge)
Deassert (Measured on selected pin, rising edge)
Hysteresis (measured on selected pin)
VLBI2_A
VLBI2_D
VLBI2_H
6
–
–
6.75
–
0.4
7
7.75
–
V
V
V
Low Voltage Warning (LBI 3)
Assert (Measured on selected pin, falling edge)
Deassert (Measured on selected pin, rising edge)
Hysteresis (measured on selected pin)
VLBI3_A
VLBI3_D
VLBI3_H
7
–
–
7.75
–
0.4
8.5
9
–
V
V
V
Low Voltage Warning (LBI 4)
Assert (Measured on selected pin, falling edge)
Deassert (Measured on selected pin, rising edge)
Hysteresis (measured on selected pin)
VLBI4_A
VLBI4_D
VLBI4_H
8
–
–
9
–
0.4
10
10.5
–
V
V
V
High Voltage Warning (HBI 1)
Assert (Measured on selected pin, rising edge)
Deassert (Measured on selected pin, falling edge)
Hysteresis (measured on selected pin)
VHBI1_A
VHBI1_D
VHBI1_H
15
14.5
16.5
–
1.0
18
–
–
V
V
V
High Voltage Warning (HBI 2)
Assert (Measured on selected pin, rising edge)
Deassert (Measured on selected pin, falling edge)
Hysteresis (measured on selected pin)
VHBI2_A
VHBI2_D
VHBI2_H
25
24
–
27.5
–
1.0
29
–
–
V
V
V
RatioVSENSE
RatioVSUP
–
–
9
9
–
–
–
–
AIMatching
–
+-2%
+-5%
–
Pin Input Divider Ratio
RatioVSENSE = VSENSE / VADC3
RatioVSUP = VSUP / VADC
5.5V < VSENSE < 29 V; 5.5V < VSUP < 29 V
8
C
Analog Input Matching
Absolute Error on VADC
- compared to VSENSE / RatioVSENSE
- compared to VSUP / RatioVSUP
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
544
Freescale Semiconductor
BATS Electrical Specifications
Table I-2. Static Electrical Characteristics - Supply Voltage Sense - (BATS).
Characteristics noted under conditions 5.5V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
9
D
Ratings
VSENSE Series Resistor
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
RVSENSE_R
9.5
10
10.5
kΩ
RVSEN_IMP
–
350
–
kΩ
Required to be placed externally at VSENSE pin.
10
D
VSENSE Impedance
If path to ground is enabled.
1
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
3 V
ADC: Voltage accessible at the ATD input channel
2
I.3
Dynamic Electrical Characteristics
Table I-3. Dynamic Electrical Characteristics - Supply Voltage Sense - (BATS).
Characteristics noted under conditions 5.5V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted
reflect the approximate parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
1
2
Num
C
Ratings
1
D
Enable Stabilisation Time
2
D
Voltage Warning Low Pass Filter
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
TEN_UNC
–
1
–
µs
fVWLP_filter
–
0.5
–
Mhz
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
NOTE
The information given in this section are preliminary and should be used as a guide only. Values in
this section cannot be guaranteed by Freescale and are subject to change without notice.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
545
BATS Electrical Specifications
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
546
Freescale Semiconductor
Appendix J
PIM Electrical Specifications
J.1
High-Voltage Inputs (HVI) Electrical Characteristics
Table J-1. Static Electrical Characteristics - High Voltage Input Pins - Port L
Characteristics are 5.5V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 unless otherwise noted. Typical values noted reflect the approximate
parameter mean at TA = 25˚C2 under nominal conditions unless otherwise noted.
Num
C
Ratings
1
D
VHVI Voltage Range
2
P
Digital Input Threshold
• VSUP > 6.5V
• 5.5V ≤ VSUP ≤ 6.5V
VTH_HVI
3
D
Input Hysteresis
4
T
Pin Input Divider Ratio with external series REXT_HVI
Ratio = VEXT_HVI / VInternal(ADC)
5
C
2
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VHVI
-27
40
42
V
2.8
2.0
3.5
2.5
4.5
3.8
V
V
VHYS_HVI
_
250
_
mV
RatioL_HVI
RatioH_HVI
–
–
2
6
–
–
AIML_HVI
–
±2
±5
%
AIMH_HVI
–
±2
±5
%
Analog Input Matching
Absolute Error on VADC
• Compared to VEXT_HVI / RatioL_HVI
(1V < VEXT_HVI < 7V)
• Compared to VEXT_HVI / RatioH_HVI
(3V < VEXT_HVI < 21V)
1
Symbol
6
D
High Voltage Input Series Resistor
Note: Always required externally at HVI pins.
REXT_HVI
–
10
–
kΩ
7
D
Enable Uncertainty Time
tUNC_HVI
–
1
–
µs
TJ: Junction Temperature
TA: Ambient Temperature
J.2
Pin Interrupt Characteristics
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
547
PIM Electrical Specifications
Table J-2. Pin Interrupt Characteristics
Characteristics are 5.5V ≤ VSUP ≤ 18 V, -40˚C ≤ TJ ≤ 150˚C1 junction temperature from –40°C to +150°C unless otherwise
noted.
Num C
1
2
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1
P Port L, P, AD interrupt input pulse filtered (STOP)2
tP_MASK
—
—
3
µs
2
2
P Port L, P, AD interrupt input pulse passed (STOP)
tP_PASS
10
—
—
µs
3
D Port L, P, AD interrupt input pulse filtered (STOP) in
number of bus clock cycles of period 1/fbus
nP_MASK
—
—
3
4
D Port L, P, AD interrupt input pulse passed (STOP) in
number of bus clock cycles of period 1/fbus
nP_PASS
4
—
—
5
D IRQ pulse width, edge-sensitive mode (STOP) in
number of bus clock cycles of period 1/fbus
nIRQ
1
—
—
TJ: Junction Temperature
Parameter only applies in stop or pseudo stop mode.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
548
Freescale Semiconductor
SPI Electrical Specifications
Appendix K
SPI Electrical Specifications
This section provides electrical parametrics and ratings for the SPI.
In Table K-1. the measurement conditions are listed.
Table K-1. Measurement Conditions
Description
Drive mode
Load capacitance CLOAD1,
on all outputs
Thresholds for delay
measurement points
1Timing
K.1
K.1.1
Value
full drive mode
Unit
—
50
pF
(35% / 65%) VDDX
V
specified for equal load on all SPI output pins. Avoid asymmetric load.
Timing
Master Mode
In Figure K-1. the timing diagram for master mode with transmission format CPHA=0 is depicted.
SS1
(OUTPUT)
2
1
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
(OUTPUT)
5
12
13
3
6
MSB IN2
10
MOSI
(OUTPUT)
13
4
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
(OUTPUT)
MISO
(INPUT)
12
4
BIT 6 . . . 1
LSB IN
9
MSB OUT2
BIT 6 . . . 1
11
LSB OUT
1. If enabled.
2. LSBFE = 0. For LSBFE = 1, bit order is LSB, bit 1, ..., bit 6, MSB.
Figure K-1. SPI Master Timing (CPHA=0)
In Figure K-2. the timing diagram for master mode with transmission format CPHA=1 is depicted.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
549
SPI Electrical Specifications
SS1
(OUTPUT)
1
2
12
13
12
13
3
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
(OUTPUT)
4
4
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
(OUTPUT)
5
MISO
(INPUT)
6
MSB IN2
LSB IN
11
9
MOSI
(OUTPUT)
BIT 6 . . . 1
MASTER MSB OUT2
BIT 6 . . . 1
MASTER LSB OUT
1. If enabled.
2. LSBFE = 0. For LSBFE = 1, bit order is LSB, bit 1, ..., bit 6, MSB.
Figure K-2. SPI Master Timing (CPHA=1)
In Figure K-2. the timing characteristics for master mode are listed.
Table K-2. SPI Master Mode Timing Characteristics
Num
C
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
1pls.
Characteristic
SCK Frequency
SCK Period
Enable Lead Time
Enable Lag Time
Clock (SCK) High or Low Time
Data Setup Time (Inputs)
Data Hold Time (Inputs)
Data Valid after SCK Edge
Data Valid after SS fall (CPHA=0)
Data Hold Time (Outputs)
Rise and Fall Time Inputs
Rise and Fall Time Outputs
Symbol
fsck
tsck
tlead
tlag
twsck
tsu
thi
tvsck
tvss
tho
trfi
trfo
Min
1/2048
21
—
—
—
8
8
—
—
0
—
—
Typ
—
—
1/2
1/2
1/2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Max
1/21
2048
—
—
—
—
—
15
15
—
8
8
Unit
fbus
tbus
tsck
tsck
tsck
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
see Figure K-3.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
550
Freescale Semiconductor
SPI Electrical Specifications
fSCK/fbus
1/2
1/4
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
fbus [MHz]
Figure K-3. Derating of maximum fSCK to fbus ratio in Master Mode
In Master Mode the allowed maximum fSCK to fbus ratio (= minimum Baud Rate Divisor, pls. see SPI Block
Guide) derates with increasing fbus, please see Figure K-3..
K.1.2
Slave Mode
In Figure K-4. the timing diagram for slave mode with transmission format CPHA=0 is depicted.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
551
SPI Electrical Specifications
SS
(INPUT)
1
12
13
3
12
13
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
(INPUT)
4
2
4
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
(INPUT) 10
8
7
MISO
(OUTPUT)
9
see
note
5
MOSI
(INPUT)
BIT 6 . . . 1
SLAVE MSB
11
11
see
note
SLAVE LSB OUT
6
BIT 6 . . . 1
MSB IN
LSB IN
NOTE: Not defined!
Figure K-4. SPI Slave Timing (CPHA=0)
In Figure K-5. the timing diagram for slave mode with transmission format CPHA=1 is depicted.
SS
(INPUT)
3
1
2
12
13
12
13
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
(INPUT)
4
4
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
(INPUT)
see
note
7
MOSI
(INPUT)
SLAVE
8
11
9
MISO
(OUTPUT)
MSB OUT
5
BIT 6 . . . 1
SLAVE LSB OUT
6
MSB IN
BIT 6 . . . 1
LSB IN
NOTE: Not defined!
Figure K-5. SPI Slave Timing (CPHA=1)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
552
Freescale Semiconductor
SPI Electrical Specifications
In Table K-3. the timing characteristics for slave mode are listed.
Table K-3. SPI Slave Mode Timing Characteristics
Num
C
1
1
2
D
D
D
SCK Frequency
SCK Period
Enable Lead Time
fsck
tsck
tlead
3
4
5
6
D
D
D
D
tlag
7
D
8
D
Enable Lag Time
Clock (SCK) High or Low Time
Data Setup Time (Inputs)
Data Hold Time (Inputs)
Slave Access Time (time to data
active)
Slave MISO Disable Time
9
D
10
11
12
13
10.5t
bus
Characteristic
Symbol
Unit
Min
DC
4
4
Typ
—
—
—
Max
1/4
—
fbus
tbus
tbus
twsck
tsu
thi
4
4
8
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
tbus
tbus
ns
ns
ta
—
—
20
ns
tdis
—
—
22
ns
Data Valid after SCK Edge
tvsck
—
—
28 + 0.5 ⋅ t bus
1
ns
D
Data Valid after SS fall
tvss
—
—
28 + 0.5 ⋅ t bus
1
ns
D
D
D
Data Hold Time (Outputs)
Rise and Fall Time Inputs
Rise and Fall Time Outputs
tho
trfi
trfo
20
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
8
ns
ns
ns
∞
added due to internal synchronization delay
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
553
SPI Electrical Specifications
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
554
Freescale Semiconductor
Appendix L
XOSCLCP Electrical Specifications
Table L-1. XOSCLCP Characteristics
Conditions are shown in Table A-4 unless otherwise noted
Num C
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
16
MHz
1
C Nominal crystal or resonator frequency
fOSC
4.0
2
P Startup Current
iOSC
100
3a
C Oscillator start-up time (4MHz)1
tUPOSC
—
2
10
ms
3b
C Oscillator start-up time
(8MHz)1
tUPOSC
—
1.6
8
ms
3c
C Oscillator start-up time (16MHz)1
tUPOSC
—
1
5
ms
4
P Clock Monitor Failure Assert Frequency
fCMFA
200
450
1200
KHz
5
D Input Capacitance (EXTAL, XTAL pins)
CIN
6
C EXTAL Pin Input Hysteresis
VHYS,EXT
µA
7
—
120
pF
—
mV
AL
1
EXTAL Pin oscillation amplitude (loop
controlled Pierce)
7
C
VPP,EXTAL
8
D EXTAL Pin oscillation required amplitude2 VPP,EXTAL
—
0.8
0.9
—
—
1.5
V
V
These values apply for carefully designed PCB layouts with capacitors that match the crystal/resonator requirements.
to be measured at room temperature on the application board using a probe with very low (<=5pF) input
capacitance.
2Needs
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
555
XOSCLCP Electrical Specifications
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
556
Freescale Semiconductor
FTMRG Electrical Specifications
Appendix M
FTMRG Electrical Specifications
M.1
Timing Parameters
The time base for all NVM program or erase operations is derived from the bus clock using the FCLKDIV
register. The frequency of this derived clock must be set within the limits specified as fNVMOP. The NVM
module does not have any means to monitor the frequency and will not prevent program or erase operation
at frequencies above or below the specified minimum. When attempting to program or erase the NVM
module at a lower frequency, a full program or erase transition is not assured.
All timing parameters are a function of the bus clock frequency, fNVMBUS. All program and erase times
are also a function of the NVM operating frequency, fNVMOP. A summary of key timing parameters can be
found in Table M-1.
Table M-1. NVM Timing Characteristics
Num C
Command
fNVMOP
cycle
fNVMBUS
cycle
Symbol
Min1
Typ2
Max3
Worst4
Unit
1
Bus frequency
1
—
fNVMBUS
1
25
25
MHz
2
NVM Operating frequency
—
1
fNVMOP
0.8
1.0
1.05
MHz
0
17169
tRD1ALL
0.69
0.69
1.37
34.34
ms
0
16924
tRD1BLK_P
0.68
0.68
1.35
33.85
ms
0
744
tRD1BLK_D
0.03
0.03
0.06
1.49
ms
3
D Erase Verify All Blocks
4
D Erase Verify Block (Pflash)5
6
5
D Erase Verify Block (EEPROM)
6
D Erase Verify P-Flash Section
0
476
tRD1SEC
19.04
19.04
38.08
952.00
us
7
D Read Once
0
445
tRDONCE
17.80
17.80
17.80
445.00
us
8
D Program P-Flash (4 Word)
164
2896
tPGM_4
0.27
0.28
0.63
11.79
ms
9
D Program Once
164
2859
tPGMONCE
0.27
0.27
0.28
3.06
ms
5, 6
10
D Erase All Blocks
100066
17505
tERSALL
96.00
100.77
101.47
160.09
ms
11
D Erase Flash Block (Pflash)
100060
17150
tERSBLK_P
95.98
100.75
101.43
159.38
ms
12
D Erase Flash Block (EEPROM)
100060
1033
tERSBLK_D
95.34
100.10
100.14
127.14
ms
13
D Erase P-Flash Sector
20015
858
tERSPG
19.10
20.05
20.08
26.73
ms
14
D Unsecure Flash
100066
17570
tUNSECU
96.00
100.77
101.47
160.22
ms
15
D Verify Backdoor Access Key
0
481
tVFYKEY
19.24
19.24
19.24
481.00
us
18
D Erase Verify EEPROM Sector
0
546
tDRD1SEC
0.02
0.02
0.04
1.09
ms
19
D Program EEPROM (1 Word)
68
1552
tDPGM_1
0.13
0.13
0.32
6.29
ms
20
D Program EEPROM (2 Word)
136
2486
tDPGM_2
0.23
0.24
0.53
10.11
ms
21
D Program EEPROM (3 Word)
204
3420
tDPGM_3
0.33
0.34
0.75
13.94
ms
22
D Program EEPROM (4 Word)
272
4354
tDPGM_4
0.43
0.45
0.97
17.76
ms
23
D Erase EEPROM Sector
5015
746
tDERSPG
4.81
5.04
20.57
37.76
ms
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
557
FTMRG Electrical Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
Minimum times are based on maximum fNVMOP and maximum fNVMBUS
Typical times are based on typical fNVMOP and typical fNVMBUS
Maximum times are based on typical fNVMOP and typical fNVMBUS plus aging
Worst times are based on minimum fNVMOP and minimum fNVMBUS plus aging
Affected by Pflash size
Affected by EEPROM size
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
558
Freescale Semiconductor
FTMRG Electrical Specifications
Table M-2. Timing Characteristics
M.1.1
NVM Reliability Parameters
The reliability of the NVM blocks is guaranteed by stress test during qualification, constant process
monitors and burn-in to screen early life failures.
The data retention and program/erase cycling failure rates are specified at the operating conditions noted.
The program/erase cycle count on the sector is incremented every time a sector or mass erase event is
executed.
NOTE
All values shown in Table M-3 are preliminary and subject to further
characterization.
Table M-3. NVM Reliability Characteristics
Conditions are shown in Table A-5 unless otherwise noted
NUM C
Rating
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
tNVMRET
20
1002
—
Years
nFLPE
10K
100K3
—
Cycles
Program Flash Arrays
1
C Data retention at an average junction temperature of TJavg = 85°C1
after up to 10,000 program/erase cycles
2
C Program Flash number of program/erase cycles
(-40°C ≤ Tj ≤ 150°C)
EEPROM Array
3
C Data retention at an average junction temperature of TJavg = 85°C1
after up to 100,000 program/erase cycles
tNVMRET
5
1002
—
Years
4
C Data retention at an average junction temperature of TJavg = 85°C1
after up to 10,000 program/erase cycles
tNVMRET
10
1002
—
Years
5
C Data retention at an average junction temperature of TJavg = 85°C1
after less than 100 program/erase cycles
tNVMRET
20
1002
—
Years
6
C EEPROM number of program/erase cycles (-40°C ≤ Tj ≤ 150°C)
nFLPE
100K
500K3
—
Cycles
1
TJavg does not exceed 85°C in a typical temperature profile over the lifetime of a consumer, industrial or automotive application.
Typical data retention values are based on intrinsic capability of the technology measured at high temperature and de-rated to
25°C using the Arrhenius equation. For additional information on how Freescale defines Typical Data Retention, please refer to
Engineering Bulletin EB618
3 Spec table quotes typical endurance evaluated at 25°C for this product family. For additional information on how Freescale defines
Typical Endurance, please refer to Engineering Bulletin EB619.
2
M.1.2
NVM Factory Shipping Condition
Devices are shipped from the factory with flash and EEPROM in the erased state. Data retention specifications
stated in Table M-3. begin at time of this erase operation. For additional information on how Freescale defines
Typical Data Retention, please refer to Engineering Bulletin EB618.
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
559
FTMRG Electrical Specifications
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
560
Freescale Semiconductor
Package Information
Appendix N
Package Information
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
561
Package Information
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
562
Freescale Semiconductor
Package Information
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
563
Package Information
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
564
Freescale Semiconductor
Package Information
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
565
Package Information
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
566
Freescale Semiconductor
Ordering Information
Appendix O
Ordering Information
The following figure provides an ordering partnumber example for the devices covered by this data book.
There are two options when ordering a device. Customers must choose between ordering either the
mask-specific partnumber or the generic / mask-independent partnumber. Ordering the mask-specific
partnumber enables the customer to specify which particular maskset they will receive whereas ordering
the generic maskset means that FSL will ship the currently preferred maskset (which may change over
time).
In either case, the marking on the device will always show the generic / mask-independent partnumber and
the mask set number.
NOTE
The mask identifier suffix and the Tape & Reel suffix are always both omitted from the
partnumber which is actually marked on the device.
For specific partnumbers to order, please contact your local sales office. The below figure illustrates the
structure of a typical mask-specific ordering number for the MC9S12VR64 devices
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
567
Ordering Information
S 9 S12 VR64
F2 C LF R
Tape & Reel:
R = Tape & Reel
No R = No Tape & Reel
Package Option:
LF = 48 LQFP
LC = 32 LQFP
Temperature Option:
C = -40˚C to 85˚C
V = -40˚C to 105˚C
Maskset identifier Suffix:
First digit usually references wafer fab
Second digit usually differentiates mask rev
(This suffix is omitted in generic partnumbers)
Device Title
Controller Family
Main Memory Type:
9 = Flash
3 = ROM (if available)
Status / Partnumber type:
S or SC = Maskset specific partnumber
MC = Generic / mask-independent partnumber
P or PC = prototype status (pre qualification)
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
568
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
Appendix P
Detailed Register Address Map
P.1
Detailed Register Map
The following tables show the detailed register map of the MC9S12VR64.
0x0000-0x0009 Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 1 of 4
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PE1
PE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DDRE1
DDRE0
W
0x0000
Reserved
0x0001
Reserved
0x0002
Reserved
0x0003
Reserved
0x0004
Reserved
0x0005
Reserved
0x0006
Reserved
0x0007
Reserved
0x0008
PORTE
0x0009
DDRE
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
0x000A-0x000B Module Mapping Conrol (MMC) Map 1 of 2
Address
Name
0x000A
Reserved
0x000B
MODE
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MODC
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
569
Detailed Register Address Map
0x000C-0x000D Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 2 of 4
Address
Name
Bit 7
0x000C
PUCR
R
W
0x000D
Reserved
R
W
0
0
Bit 6
BKPUE
Bit 5
0
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PDPEE
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x000E-0x000F Reserved
Address
Name
0x000E
Reserved
0x000F
Reserved
R
W
R
W
0x0010-0x0017 Module Mapping Control (MMC) Map 2 of 2
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0x0010
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0011
DIRECT
DP15
DP14
DP13
DP12
DP11
DP10
DP9
DP8
0x0012
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0013
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0014
Reserved
R
W
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0015
PPAGE
0
0
0
0
PIX3
PIX2
PIX1
PIX0
0x0016
Reserved
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0017
Reserved
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
NVMRES
0x0018-0x0019 Reserved
Address
Name
0x0018
Reserved
0x0019
Reserved
R
W
R
W
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
570
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
0x001A-0x001B Part ID Registers
Address
Name
0x001A
PARTIDH
0x001B
PARTIDL
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
R
W
R
W
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PARTIDH
PARTIDL
0x001C-0x001F Port Intergartion Module (PIM) Map 3 of 4
Address
Name
0x001C
ECLKCTL
0x001D
PIMMISC
0x001E
IRQCR
0x001F
Reserved
Bit 7
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
NECLK
OCPE
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
BDM
DBGBRK
0
0
0
0
0
IRQE
IRQEN
0
0
0x0020-0x002F Debug Module (S12SDBG) Map
Address
Name
0x0020
DBGC1
0x0021
DBGSR
0x0022
DBGTCR
0x0023
DBGC2
0x0024
DBGTBH
0x0025
DBGTBL
0x0026
DBGCNT
0x0027
DBGSCRX
0x0027
DBGMFR
0x00281
DBGACTL
0x00282
DBGBCTL
Bit 7
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
ARM
TBF
0
Bit 6
Bit 5
0
TRIG
0
0
TSOURCE
0
SSF2
COMRV
SSF1
0
TRCMOD
SSF0
TALIGN
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TBF
0
0
0
0
0
SC3
SC2
SC1
SC0
0
0
0
0
0
MC2
MC1
MC0
SZE
SZ
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
NDB
COMPE
SZE
SZ
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
ABCM
CNT
0
COMPE
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
571
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0020-0x002F Debug Module (S12SDBG) Map
Address
Name
0x00283
DBGCCTL
0x0029
DBGXAH
0x002A
DBGXAM
0x002B
DBGXAL
0x002C
DBGADH
0x002D
DBGADL
0x002E
DBGADHM
0x002F
DBGADLM
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
0
0
0
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
TAG
BRK
RW
RWE
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 15
14
13
12
11
Bit 7
6
5
4
Bit 15
14
13
Bit 7
6
Bit 15
Bit 7
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
COMPE
Bit17
Bit 16
10
9
Bit 8
3
2
1
Bit 0
12
11
10
9
Bit 8
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit 8
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
1
This represents the contents if the Comparator A or C control register is blended into this address
This represents the contents if the Comparator B or D control register is blended into this address
3 This represents the contents if the Comparator B or D control register is blended into this address
2
0x0030-0x0033 Reserved
Address
Name
0x0030
Reserved
0x0031
Reserved
0x0032
Reserved
0x0033
Reserved
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0x0034-0x003F Clock Reset and Power Management (CPMU) Map
Address
0x0034
0x0035
0x0036
0x0037
Name
R
CPMUSYNR
W
R
CPMUREFDIV
W
CPMUPOSTDI R
V
W
R
CPMUFLG
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
VCOFRQ[1:0]
REFFRQ[1:0]
Bit 3
SYNDIV[5:0]
0
0
0
0
RTIF
PORF
LVRF
0
REFDIV[3:0]
POSTDIV[4:0]
LOCKIF
LOCK
ILAF
OSCIF
UPOSC
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
572
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0034-0x003F Clock Reset and Power Management (CPMU) Map
Address
Name
0x0038
CPMUINT
0x0039
CPMUCLKS
0x003A
CPMUPLL
0x003B
CPMURTI
0x003C
CPMUCOP
0x003D
Reserved
0x003E
Reserved
0x003F
CPMU
ARMCOP
Bit 7
R
RTIE
W
R
PLLSEL
W
R
0
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 6
Bit 5
0
0
PSTP
0
Bit 4
LOCKIE
Bit 3
Bit 2
0
0
PRE
PCE
RTIOSCS
EL
COPOSC
SEL0
0
0
0
0
RTR2
RTR1
RTR0
CR2
CR1
CR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
1
0
Bit 0
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
IOS3
IOS2
IOS1
IOS0
0
COPOSC
SEL1
FM1
FM0
RTR5
RTR4
RTR3
0
0
RTDEC
RTR6
WCOP
RSBCK
0
0
0
WRTMAS
K
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
0
6
0
5
0
0
Reserved For Factory Test
0
Reserved For Factory Test
0
0
4
3
Bit 1
OSCIE
Bit 0
0
0x0040-0x006F Timer Module (TIM) Map
Address
Name
0x0040
TIOS
0x0041
CFORC
0x00420x0043
Reserved
0x0044
TCNTH
0x0045
TCNTL
0x0046
TSCR1
0x0047
TTOV
0x0048
Reserved
0x0049
TCTL2
0x004A
Reserved
0x004B
TCTL4
0x004C
TIE
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FOC3
0
FOC2
0
FOC1
0
FOC0
0
Bit 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit 8
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
TEN
TSWAI
TSFRZ
TFFCA
PRNT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TOV3
TOV2
TOV1
TOV0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OM3
OL3
OM2
OL2
OM1
OL1
OM0
OL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
EDG3B
EDG3A
EDG2B
EDG2A
EDG1B
EDG1A
EDG0B
EDG0A
0
0
0
0
C3I
C2I
C1I
C0I
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
573
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0040-0x006F Timer Module (TIM) Map
Address
Name
0x004D
TSCR2
0x004E
TFLG1
0x004F
TFLG2
0x0050
TC0H
0x0051
TC0L
0x0052
TC1H
0x0053
TC1L
0x0054
TC2H
0x0055
TC2L
0x0056
TC3H
0x0057
TC3L
0x0068–
0x006B
Reserved
0x006C
OCPD
0x006D
Reserved
0x006E
PTPSR
0x006F
Reserved
Bit 7
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
0
0
0
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TCRE
PR2
PR1
PR0
0
0
0
C3F
C2F
C1F
C0F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OCPD3
OCPD2
OCPD1
OCPD0
PTPS7
PTPS6
PTPS5
PTPS4
PTPS3
PTPS2
PTPS1
PTPS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TOI
0
TOF
0x0070-0x009F Analog to Digital Converter 10-Bit 6-Channel (ATD) Map
Address
Name
0x0070
ATDCTL0
0x0071
ATDCTL1
0x0072
ATDCTL2
0x0073
ATDCTL3
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
ETRIG
SEL
SRES1
SRES0
AFFC
S8C
0
DJM
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
WRAP3
WRAP2
WRAP1
WRAP0
SMP_DIS
ETRIG
CH3
ETRIG
CH2
ETRIG
CH1
ETRIG
CH0
ICLKSTP
ETRIGLE
ETRIGP
ETRIGE
ASCIE
ACMPIE
S4C
S2C
S1C
FIFO
FRZ1
FRZ0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
574
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0070-0x009F Analog to Digital Converter 10-Bit 6-Channel (ATD) Map
Address
Name
0x0074
ATDCTL4
0x0075
ATDCTL5
0x0076
ATDSTAT0
0x0077
Reserved
0x0078
ATDCMPEH
0x0079
ATDCMPEL
0x007A
ATDSTAT2H
0x007B
ATDSTAT2L
0x007C
ATDDIENH
0x007D
ATDDIENL
0x007E
ATDCMPHTH
0x007F
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
ATDCMPHTL
W
0x0080
ATDDR0H
0x0081
ATDDR0L
0x0082
ATDDR1H
0x0083
ATDDR1L
0x0084
ATDDR2H
0x0085
ATDDR2L
0x0086
ATDDR3H
0x0087
ATDDR3L
0x0088
ATDDR4H
0x0089
ATDDR4L
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SMP2
SMP1
SMP0
PRS4
PRS3
PRS2
PRS1
PRS0
SC
SCAN
MULT
CD
CC
CB
CA
ETORF
FIFOR
CC3
CC2
CC1
CC0
0
SCF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
0
0
0
0
0
0
CMPE[5:0]
CCF[5:0]
0
0
0
IEN[5:0]
0
0
0
CMPHT[5:0]
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
575
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0070-0x009F Analog to Digital Converter 10-Bit 6-Channel (ATD) Map
Address
Name
0x008A
ATDDR5H
0x008B
ATDDR5L
0x008C0x009F
Reserved
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0x00A0-0x00C7 Pulse Width Modulator 6-Channels (PWM) Map
Address
0x00A0
0x00A1
0x00A2
0x00A3
0x00A4
0x00A5
0x00A6
0x00A7
0x00A8
0x00A9
0x00AA
0x00AB
0x00AC
0x00AD
0x00AE
0x00AF
0x00B0
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
R
PWME7
PWME6
PWME5
PWME4
PWME3
PWME2
PWME1
PWME0
W
R
PWMPOL
PPOL7
PPOL6
PPOL5
PPOL4
PPOL3
PPOL2
PPOL1
PPOL0
W
R
PWMCLK
PCLK7
PCLK6
PCLK5
PCLK4
PCLK3
PCLK2
PCLK1
PCLK0
W
R
0
0
PWMPRCLK
PCKB2
PCKB1
PCKB0
PCKA2
PCKA1
PCKA0
W
R
PWMCAE
CAE7
CAE6
CAE5
CAE4
CAE3
CAE2
CAE1
CAE0
W
R
0
0
PWMCTL
CON67
CON45
CON23
CON01
PSWAI
PFRZ
W
R
PWMCLKAB
PCLKAB7 PCLKAB6 PCLKAB5 PCLKAB4 PCLKAB3 PCLKAB2 PCLKAB1 PCLKAB0
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
W
R
PWMSCLA
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
W
R
PWMSCLB
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
W
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PWMCNT0
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PWMCNT1
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PWMCNT2
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PWMCNT3
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
PWMCNT4
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWME
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
576
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
0x00A0-0x00C7 Pulse Width Modulator 6-Channels (PWM) Map
Address
Name
0x00B1
PWMCNT5
0x00B2
PWMCNT6
0x00B3
PWMCNT7
0x00B4
PWMPER0
0x00B5
PWMPER1
0x00B6
PWMPER2
0x00B7
PWMPER3
0x00B8
PWMPER4
0x00B9
PWMPER5
0x00BA
PWMPER6
0x00BB
PWMPER7
0x00BC
PWMDTY0
0x00BD
PWMDTY1
0x00BE
PWMDTY2
0x00BF
PWMDTY3
0x00C0
PWMDTY4
0x00C1
PWMDTY5
0x00C2
PWMDTY6
0x00C3
PWMDTY7
0x00C40x00C7
Reserved
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 7
0
Bit 7
0
Bit 7
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
5
0
5
0
5
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Bit 0
0
Bit 0
0
Bit 0
0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
577
Detailed Register Address Map
0x00C8-0x00CF Serial Communication Interface (SCI0) Map
Address
Name
0x00C8
SCI0BDH1
0x00C9
SCI0BDL1
0x00CA
SCI0CR11
0x00C8
SCI0ASR12
0x00C9
SCI0ACR12
0x00CA
SCI0ACR22
0x00CB
SCI0CR2
0x00CC
SCI0SR1
0x00CD
SCI0SR2
0x00CE
SCI0DRH
0x00CF
SCI0DRL
1
2
Bit 7
R
IREN
W
R
SBR7
W
R
LOOPS
W
R
RXEDGIF
W
R
RXEDGIE
W
R
0
W
R
TIE
W
R
TDRE
W
R
AMAP
W
R
R8
W
R
R7
W
T7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TNP1
TNP0
SBR12
SBR11
SBR10
SBR9
SBR8
SBR6
SBR5
SBR4
SBR3
SBR2
SBR1
SBR0
SCISWAI
RSRC
M
WAKE
ILT
PE
PT
0
0
0
0
BERRV
BERRIF
BKDIF
0
0
0
0
BERRIE
BKDIE
0
0
0
0
BERRM1
BERRM0
BKDFE
TCIE
RIE
ILIE
TE
RE
RWU
SBK
TC
RDRF
IDLE
OR
NF
FE
PF
0
0
TXPOL
RXPOL
BRK13
TXDIR
0
0
0
0
0
0
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R1
T1
R0
T0
T8
R6
T6
0
RAF
Those registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCI0SR2 register is set to zero
Those registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCI0SR2 register is set to one
0x00D0-0x00D7 Serial Communication Interface (SCI1) Map
Address
Name
0x00D0
SCI1BDH1
0x00D1
SCI1BDL1
0x00D2
SCI1CR11
0x00D0
SCI1ASR12
0x00D1
SCI1ACR12
0x00D2
SCI1ACR22
0x00D3
SCI1CR2
0x00D4
SCI1SR1
Bit 7
R
IREN
W
R
SBR7
W
R
LOOPS
W
R
RXEDGIF
W
R
RXEDGIE
W
R
0
W
R
TIE
W
R
TDRE
W
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TNP1
TNP0
SBR12
SBR11
SBR10
SBR9
SBR8
SBR6
SBR5
SBR4
SBR3
SBR2
SBR1
SBR0
SCISWAI
RSRC
M
WAKE
ILT
PE
PT
0
0
0
0
BERRV
BERRIF
BKDIF
0
0
0
0
BERRIE
BKDIE
0
0
0
0
BERRM1
BERRM0
BKDFE
TCIE
RIE
ILIE
TE
RE
RWU
SBK
TC
RDRF
IDLE
OR
NF
FE
PF
0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
578
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
Address
Name
0x00D5
SCI1SR2
0x00D6
SCI1DRH
0x00D7
SCI1DRL
1
2
Bit 7
R
W
R
W
R
W
AMAP
R8
Bit 6
Bit 5
0
0
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TXPOL
RXPOL
BRK13
TXDIR
0
0
0
0
0
0
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R1
T1
R0
T0
RAF
Those registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCI0SR2 register is set to zero
Those registers are accessible if the AMAP bit in the SCI0SR2 register is set to one
0x00D8-0x00DF Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Map
Address
Name
0x00D8
SPICR1
0x00D9
SPICR2
0x00DA
SPIBR
0x00DB
SPISR
0x00DC
SPIDRH
0x00DD
SPI0DRL
0x00DE
Reserved
0x00DF
Reserved
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SPIE
SPE
SPTIE
MSTR
CPOL
CPHA
SSOE
LSBFE
MODFEN
BIDIROE
SPISWAI
SPC0
SPR2
SPR1
SPR0
0
XFRW
0
0
0
0
SPPR2
SPPR1
SPPR0
SPIF
0
SPTEF
MODF
0
0
0
0
R15
T15
R7
T7
0
R14
T14
R6
T6
0
R13
T13
R5
T5
0
R12
T12
R4
T4
0
R11
T11
R3
T3
0
R10
T10
R2
T2
0
R9
T9
R1
T1
0
R8
T8
R0
T0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x00E0-0x00FF Reserved
Address
Name
0x00E00x00FF
Reserved
R
W
0x0100-0x0113 NVM Contol Register (FTMRG) Map
Address
Name
0x0100
FCLKDIV
0x0101
FSEC
Bit 7
R FDIVLD
W
R KEYEN1
W
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
FDIVLCK
FDIV5
FDIV4
FDIV3
FDIV2
FDIV1
FDIV0
KEYEN0
RNV5
RNV4
RNV3
RNV2
SEC1
SEC0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
579
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0100-0x0113 NVM Contol Register (FTMRG) Map
Address
Name
0x0102
FCCOBIX
0x0103
FRSV0
0x0104
FCNFG
0x0105
FERCNFG
0x0106
FSTAT
0x0107
FERSTAT
0x0108
FPROT
0x0109
DFPROT
0x010A
FCCOBHI
0x010B
FCCOBLO
0x010C
FRSV1
0x010D
FRSV2
0x010E
FRSC3
0x010F
FRSV4
0x0110
FOPT
0x0111
FRSV5
0x0112
FRSV6
0x0113
FRSV7
Bit 7
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
CCIE
W
R
0
W
R
CCIF
W
R
0
W
R
FPOPEN
W
R
DPOPEN
W
R
CCOB15
W
R
CCOB7
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
NV7
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CCOBIX2
CCOBIX1
CCOBIX0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FDFD
FSFD
0
0
0
0
0
DFDIE
SFDIE
ACCERR
FPVIOL
MGBUSY
RSVD
0
0
0
0
FPHDIS
FPHS1
FPHS0
0
0
0
CCOB14
CCOB13
CCOB6
0
0
IGNSF
MGSTAT1 MGSTAT0
DFDIF
SFDIF
FPLDIS
FPLS1
FPLS0
DPS3
DPS2
DPS1
DPS0
CCOB12
CCOB11
CCOB10
CCOB9
CCOB8
CCOB5
CCOB4
CCOB3
CCOB2
CCOB1
CCOB0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NV6
NV5
NV4
NV3
NV2
NV1
NV0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RNV6
0x0114-0x011F Reserved
Address
Name
0x01140x011F
Reserved
R
W
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
580
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0120 Interrupt Vector Base Register
Address
0x0120
Name
IVBR
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
R
W
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
IVB_ADDR[7:0]
0x0121-0x013F Reserved
Address
Name
0x01210x013F
Reserved
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 1
Bit 0
HSDR1
HSDR0
0x0140-0x0147 High Side Drivers (HSDRV)
Address
Name
0x0140
HSDR
0x0141
HSCR
0x0142
Reserved
0x0143
Reserved
0x0144
Reserved
0x0145
HSSR
0x0146
HSIE
0x0147
HSIF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HSOLE1
HSOLE0
HSE1
HSE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HSOL1
HSOL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HSOCIF1
HSOCIF0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
HSOCIE
W
R
0
W
0x0148-0x014F Reserved
Address
Name
0x01480x014F
Reserved
R
W
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
581
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0150-0x0157 Low Side Drivers (LSDRV)
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0x0150
LSDR
0
0
0
0
0
LSDR1
LSDR0
0x0151
LSCR
0
0
0
LSOLE1
LSOLE0
LSE1
LSE0
0x0152
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0153
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0154
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0155
LSSR
0
0
0
0
0
LSOL1
LSOL0
0x0156
LSIE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0157
LSIF
0
0
0
0
0
LSOCIF1
LSOCIF0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 1
Bit 0
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
LSOCIE
W
R
0
W
0x0158-0x015F Reserved
Address
0x0580x015F
Name
Reserved
R
W
0x0160-0x0167 LIN Physical Layer (LINPHY)
Address
Name
0x0160
LPDR
0x0161
LPCR
0x0162
Reserved
0x0163
LPSLR
0x0164
Reserved
Bit 7
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R LPSLRWD
W
R
0
W
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LPE
RXONLY
LPWUE
LPPUE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LPSLR1
LPSLR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LPDR1
LPDR0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
582
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0160-0x0167 LIN Physical Layer (LINPHY)
Address
Name
0x0165
LPSR
0x0166
LPIE
0x0167
LPIF
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LPOC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
BVHS
BVLS
BSUAE
BSUSE
0BSEAE
BSESE
BVHC
BVLC
BVHIE
BVLIE
BVHIF
BVLIF
R
0
W
R
LPOCIE
W
R
0
W
LPOCIF
0x0168-0x016F Reserved
Address
Name
0x01680x016F
Reserved
R
W
0x0170-0x0177 Supply Voltage Sense (BATS)
Address
Name
0x0170
BATE
0x0171
BATSR
0x0172
BATIE
0x0173
BATIF
0x0174
Reserved
0x0175
Reserved
0x0176
Reserved
0x0177
Reserved
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0178-023F Reserved
Address
Name
0x01780x023F
Reserved
R
W
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
583
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0240 -0x027F Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 4 of 4
Address
Name
0x0240
PTT
0x0241
PTIT
0x0242
DDRT
0x0243
Reserved
0x0244
PERT
0x0245
PPST
0x0246
PTTRR0
0x0247
PTTRR1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
R
W
0
0
0
0
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PTT3
PTT2
PTT1
PTT0
PTIT3
PTIT2
PTIT1
PTIT0
DDRT3
DDRT2
DDRT1
DDRT0
0
0
0
0
PERT3
PERT2
PERT1
PERT0
PPST3
PPST2
PPST1
PPST0
R
PTTRR07 PTTRR06 PTTRR05 PTTRR04 PTTRR03 PTTRR02 PTTRR01 PTTRR00
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTTRR15 PTTRR14
W
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
584
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0240 -0x027F Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 4 of 4
Address
Name
0x0248
PTS
0x0249
PTIS
0x024A
DDRS
0x024B
Reserved
0x024C
PERS
0x024D
PPSS
0x024E
WOMS
0x024F
MODRR2
0x02500x0257
Reserved
0x0258
PTP
0x0259
PTIP
0x025A
DDRP
0x025B
RDRP
0x025C
PERP
0x025D
PPSP
0x025E
PIEP
0x025F
PIFP
Bit 7
Bit 6
R
W
0
0
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
R
W
R
PTSRR7
W
R
0
W
R
0
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OCIE
OCIF
0
0
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PTS5
PTS4
PTS3
PTS2
PTS1
PTS0
PTIS5
PTIS4
PTIS3
PTIS2
PTIS1
PTIS0
DDRS5
DDRS4
DDRS3
DDRS2
DDRS1
DDRS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PERS5
PERS4
PERS3
PERS2
PERS1
PERS0
PPSS5
PPSS4
PPSS3
PPSS2
PPSS1
PPSS0
WOMS5
WOMS4
WOMS3
WOMS2
WOMS1
WOMS0
PTSRR5
PTSRR4
PTSRR3
PTSRR2
PTSRR1
PTSRR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTP5
PTP4
PTP3
PTP2
PTP1
PTP0
PTIP5
PTIP4
PTIP3
PTIP2
PTIP1
PTIP0
DDRP5
DDRP4
DDRP3
DDRP2
DDRP1
DDRP0
0
0
0
RDRP2
RDRP1
RDRP0
PERP5
PERP4
PERP3
PERP2
PERP1
PERP0
PPSP5
PPSP4
PPSP3
PPSP2
PPSP1
PPSS0
PIEP5
PIEP4
PIEP3
PIEP2
PIEP1
PIEP0
PIFP5
PIFP4
PIFP3
PIFP2
PIFP1
PIFP0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
585
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0240 -0x027F Port Integration Module (PIM) Map 4 of 4
Address
Name
0x02600x0268
Reserved
0x0269
PTIL
0x026A
DDRL
0x026B
PTAL
0x026C
PIRL
0x026D
PPSL
0x026E
PIEL
0x026f
PIFL
0x0270
Reserved
0x0271
PT1AD
0x0272
Reserved
0x0273
PTI1AD
0x0274
Reserved
0x0275
DDR1AD
0x02760x0278
Reserved
0x0279
PER1AD
0x027A
Reserved
0x027B
PPS1AD
0x027C
Reserved
0x027D
PIE1AD
0x027E
Reserved
0x027A
PIF1AD
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTIL3
PTIL2
PTIL1
PTIL0
0
0
0
0
DDRL3
DDRL2
DDRL1
DDRL0
0
0
0
0
PTAL1
PTAL0
0
0
0
0
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
R
W
PTAENL
0
PIRL3
PIRL2
PIRL1
PIRL0
PPSL3
PPSL2
PPSL1
PPSL0
PIEL3
PIEL2
PIEL1
PIEL0
PIFL3
PIFL2
PIFL1
PIFL0
0
0
0
0
0
PT1AD0
5
PT1AD0
4
PT1AD0
3
PT1AD0
2
PT1AD0
1
PT1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTI1AD5
PTI1AD4
PTI1AD3
PTI1AD2
PTI1AD1
PTI1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DDR1AD5 DDR1AD4 DDR1AD3 DDR1AD2 DDR1AD1 DDR1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PER1AD5 PER1AD4 PER1AD3 PER1AD2 PER1AD1 PER1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PPS1AD5 PPS1AD4 PPS1AD3 PPS1AD2 PPS1AD1 PPS1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PIE1AD5
PIE1AD4
PIE1AD3
PIE1AD2
PIE1AD1
PIE1AD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PIF1AD5
PIF1AD4
PIF1AD3
PIF1AD2
PIF1AD1
PIF1AD0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
586
Freescale Semiconductor
Detailed Register Address Map
0x0280-0x02EF Reserved
Address
0x02800x02EF
Name
Reserved
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 1
Bit 0
HTIE
HTIF
LVIE
LVIF
APIE
APIF
0
0
APIR9
APIR8
APIR1
APIR0
0
0
HTTR1
HTTR0
0x02F0-0x02FF Clock and Power Management Unit (CPMU) Map 2 of 2
Address
Name
0x02F0
CPMUHTCL
0x02F1
CPMULVCTL
0x02F2 CPMUAPICTL
0x02F3
CPMUACLKT
R
0x02F4
CPMUAPIRH
0x02F5
CPMUAPIRL
0x02F6
Reserved
0x02F7
CPMUHTTR
0x02F8
CPMU
IRCTRIMH
0x02F9
CPMU
IRCTRIML
0x02FA
CPMUOSC
0x02FB
CPMUPROT
0x02FC
Reserved
0x02FD
Reserved
0x02FE
Reserved
0x02FF
Reserved
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
R
0
0
0
HTDS
VSEL
HTE
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
LVDS
W
R
0
0
APICLK
APIES
APIEA
APIFE
W
R
ACLKTR5 ACLKTR4 ACLKTR3 ACLKTR2 ACLKTR1 ACLKTR0
W
R
APIR15
APIR14
APIR13
APIR12
APIR11
APIR10
W
R
APIR7
APIR6
APIR5
APIR4
APIR3
APIR2
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
0
0
0
HTOE
HTTR3
HTTR2
W
R
0
TCTRIM[3:0]
W
R
IRCTRIM[7:0]
W
R
0
0
OSCE
Reserved
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
IRCTRIM[9:8]
0
PROT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x0300-0x03FF Reserved
Address
0x03000x03FF
Name
Reserved
R
W
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
Freescale Semiconductor
587
Detailed Register Address Map
MC9S12VR Family Reference Manual, Rev. 2.8
588
Freescale Semiconductor
How to Reach Us:
Information in this document is provided solely to enable system and software implementers to use
Freescale Semiconductor products. There are no express or implied copyright licenses granted
USA/Europe/Locations not listed:
Freescale Semiconductor Literature Distribution
P.O. Box 5405, Denver, Colorado 80217
1-800-521-6274 or 480-768-2130
hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits or integrated circuits based on the information
in this document.
Freescale Semiconductor reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products
herein. Freescale Semiconductor makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the
Japan:
Freescale Semiconductor Japan Ltd.
SPS, Technical Information Center
3-20-1, Minami-Azabu
Minato-ku
Tokyo 106-8573, Japan
81-3-3440-3569
suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Freescale Semiconductor assume any
liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically disclaims any
and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages. “Typical” parameters
which may be provided in Freescale Semiconductor data sheets and/or specifications can and do
vary in different applications and actual performance may vary over time. All operating parameters,
including “Typicals” must be validated for each customer application by customer’s technical experts.
Asia/Pacific:
Freescale Semiconductor H.K. Ltd.
2 Dai King Street
Tai Po Industrial Estate
Tai Po, N.T. Hong Kong
852-26668334
Freescale Semiconductor does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others.
Freescale Semiconductor products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as components
in systems intended for surgical implant into the body, or other applications intended to support or
sustain life, or for any other application in which the failure of the Freescale Semiconductor product
could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use
Learn More:
For more information about Freescale
Semiconductor products, please visit
http://www.freescale.com
Freescale Semiconductor products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall
indemnify and hold Freescale Semiconductor and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and
distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney
fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated with such
unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Freescale Semiconductor was
negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part.
Freescale™ and the Freescale logo are trademarks of Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. All other
product or service names are the property of their respective owners.
© Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. 2010